Canon Ir c3200 c3220n Series

Service Manual
iR C3200 Series
iR C3220N PRT
Dec 3 2004
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and
repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be
information in this manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information
as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will
issue a new edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied,
reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol
Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.
Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical
and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams,
the arrow
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol ,
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the
delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to
indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in
"DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the
operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from
sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other
purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant
Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 System Construction .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 System Construction of the Pickup/Delivery Options ............................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 System Configuration and Print/Transmission Accessories ...................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories ....................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.4 Overview of Printing/Transmitting Accessories ........................................................................................ 1-4
1.2 Product Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1 Names of Parts ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.1.1 External View ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1.2 Cross Section ....................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 Using the Machine ...................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power ......................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.2 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ................................................................. 1-9
1.2.2.3 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.3 User Mode Items ....................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.3.1 Common Settings .............................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings ................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.3.3 Adjustments and Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.2.3.4 Report Generation ............................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings .................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.3.6 Copier Specifications Settings ........................................................................................................... 1-16
1.2.3.7 Transmission/Reception Specifications Settings ............................................................................... 1-16
1.2.3.8 Box Specifications Settings ............................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.3.9 Printer Specifications Settings ........................................................................................................... 1-18
1.2.3.10 Destinations Table Specifications Settings ..................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.4 User Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.4.1 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................. 1-19
1.2.4.2 Inspection .......................................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.5 Safety ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser System ................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.2.5.2 Regulations by the Center for Devices and Radiational Heath(CDRH) ........................................... 1-21
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Assembly ........................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner .................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.2.6 Product Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.2.6.1 Type and Functions ........................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.2.7 Function List ............................................................................................................................................. 1-23
1.2.7.1 Print Speed ......................................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.2.7.2 Print Size ........................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.2.7.3 Others ................................................................................................................................................ 1-27
1.2.7.4 Reader Unit Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1-28
Chapter 2
Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Selecting the Site ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Site Space ................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Sequence of Installing Accessories ............................................................................................................ 2-5
2.1.4 Connecting the Power Cables ..................................................................................................................... 2-6
Contents
2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................... 2-6

2.2 Unpacking and Installation ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.1 Checking the Contents ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.2 Configuring the Cassette ............................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.3 Connecting the Reader Unit ........................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.4 Removing the Fixing Members from the Printer ........................................................................................ 2-9
2.2.5 Installing the Reader Unit ......................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.6 Installing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Unit ............................................................................ 2-16
2.2.7 Connecting the Power Cord ...................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.8 Mounting the Transfer Cleaning Unit ....................................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.9 Fitting the Toner Container ...................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.2.10 Fitting the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.2.11 Connecting to the Network ..................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ........................................................................................................ 2-22
2.3.1 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................................................................. 2-22
2.3.2 Using PING .............................................................................................................................................. 2-22
2.3.3 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address ........................................................................................ 2-23
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network .......................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network ................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.2 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable ...................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.3 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address ............................................................................................. 2-24
2.4.4 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address .......................................................................................... 2-24
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations ..................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.5.1 Checking the Images/Operations .............................................................................................................. 2-25
2.5.2 PASCAL Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.3 Preventing Anti-Condensation .................................................................................................................. 2-29
2.6 Relocating the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.6.1 Preparing for Relocation ........................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.7 Installing the Card Reader ............................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.7.1 Checking the Contents .............................................................................................................................. 2-31
2.7.2 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.7.3 Making Settings If Net Spot Accountant (NSA) Is Used ......................................................................... 2-33
2.8 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ...................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.8.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ............................................................................................................... 2-34
2.9 Installing the Original Tray ............................................................................................................................. 2-43
2.10 Installing the Key Switch Unit-A1 ................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.10.1 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.10.2 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................. 2-45
2.10.3 Making Checks After Installation ........................................................................................................... 2-47
2.11 Installing the Reader Heater .......................................................................................................................... 2-48
2.12 Installing the Cassette Heater ........................................................................................................................ 2-59
2.12.3 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a Copier ........................................................................................ 2-61
2.12.4 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1 .............................................................. 2-63
2.13 Replacing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................... 2-64
2.13.1 Preparing for the Work ........................................................................................................................... 2-64
Contents
Chapter 3
Basic Operation
3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 Functional Construction ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Arrangement of Major PCBs ...................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ............................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations .................................................................................................................... 3-7
Chapter 4
Basic Operations (As a Printer)
4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry ............................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2.2 DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
Chapter 5
Main Controller
5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.2 Main Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 SRAM board ............................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.4 HDD ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.5 Composition of the System Software ......................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Start-Up Sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.2 Startup Sequence ........................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.4 Actions when HDD Error .................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.4.1 E602 in Detail ............................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.5 Image Processing ............................................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.5.1 Flow of Images ......................................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ........................................................................................ 5-15
5.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing ................................................................................................................ 5-16
5.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Edit Processing Black ........................................................................ 5-17
5.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing .............................................................................................................. 5-18
5.6 Flow of Image Data ......................................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.6.1 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions ................................................................................................ 5-19
5.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions .................................................................................................... 5-20
5.6.3 Flow of Image data for SEND function ................................................................................................... 5-21
5.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions .............................................................................. 5-22
5.6.5 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions ................................................................................... 5-23
5.6.6 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions ................................................................................................... 5-24
5.7 Parts Replacement Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.7.1 Main Controller PCB (main) .................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.7.1.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ...................................................................................................... 5-25
5.7.1.2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ............................................................................................... 5-25
5.7.1.3 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ......................................................................................... 5-25
Contents
5.7.1.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................. 5-25

5.7.1.5 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.7.1.6 Removing the Hard Disk Mounting Plates ........................................................................................ 5-26
5.7.1.7 Removing the Ethernet Board ............................................................................................................ 5-26
5.7.1.8 Removing the UFR Board ................................................................................................................. 5-27
5.7.1.9 Removing the SRAM PCB ................................................................................................................ 5-27
5.7.1.10 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ...................................................................................... 5-27
5.7.1.11 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main) .................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.1.12 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) .......................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2 Main Controller PCB (sub) ....................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2.4 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.7.2.7 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ........................................................................................ 5-30
5.7.2.8 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) .............................................................................. 5-30
5.7.3 SRAM PCB ............................................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.3.3 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.3.5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB ...................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.4 UFR Board ................................................................................................................................................ 5-32
5.7.5 Ethernet Board ........................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.7.6 Differential PCB ........................................................................................................................................ 5-34
5.7.6.4 Removing the Differential PCB ......................................................................................................... 5-34
5.7.7 Power Distribution PCB ............................................................................................................................ 5-35
5.7.7.2 Removing the Power Distribution PCB ............................................................................................. 5-35
5.7.8 HDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.3 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.4 When Replacing the HDD ................................................................................................................. 5-36
5.7.9 Controller Fan ........................................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.7.9.3 Removing the Controller Fan ............................................................................................................ 5-37
Contents
Chapter 6
Original Exposure System
6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 Major Components ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 Construction of the Control System ........................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode, 1 original) ............. 6-6
6.3 Various Control Mechanisms ............................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ....................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................ 6-8
6.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction ............................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio ....................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction .......................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.3 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................................ 6-9
6.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp .................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp .................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.3.3 Turning On/Off the Lamp ................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.3.4 Checking for an Error ........................................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals ................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.4.2 Points of Detection (original size) ..................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.4.3 Outline of Detection Operations ........................................................................................................ 6-11
6.4.1 Copyboard Glass ....................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ........................................................................................................ 6-14
6.4.1.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.2 Exposure Lamp ......................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4.2.2 Removing the Reader Left Cover/Reader Right Cover/Reader Front Cover .................................... 6-15
6.4.2.3 Removing the CCD Unit Cover ........................................................................................................ 6-15
6.4.2.4 Removing the Scanning Lamp .......................................................................................................... 6-16
6.4.3 Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................. 6-17
6.4.3.3 Removing the Original Size Detection Unit ...................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.3.4 Removing the Reader Controller PCB .............................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.3.5 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB .................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.4 Interface PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.4.4.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ..................................................................................................... 6-20
6.4.4.3 Removing the Interface PCB ............................................................................................................. 6-20
6.4.5 Inverter PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.4.5.3 Removing the Inverter PCB .............................................................................................................. 6-22
6.4.6 CCD Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 6-22
6.4.6.4 Removing the CCD Unit ................................................................................................................... 6-24
Contents
6.4.6.5 After Replacing the CCD Unit ........................................................................................................... 6-24

6.4.7 Fuse PCB (option) ..................................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.4.7.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ..................................................... 6-24
6.4.7.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit (option; 100/230v model only) ......................................................... 6-25
6.4.8 Scanner Motor ........................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.4.8.4 Removing the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................ 6-27
6.4.8.5 Mounting the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................. 6-27
6.4.9 Original Cover Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.4.9.3 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Cover ........................................................... 6-29
6.4.9.4 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor ..................................................................... 6-29
6.4.10 Scanner HP Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 6-29
6.4.10.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ................................................................................................... 6-29
6.4.10.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ................................................... 6-29
6.4.10.3 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor .......................................................................... 6-30
6.4.11 Original Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 6-30
6.4.11.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ...................................................................................................... 6-30
6.4.11.2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover ....................................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.11.3 Removing the Original Size Detection Unit .................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.11.4 Removing the Original Size Sensor ................................................................................................. 6-31
6.4.12 Reader Heater (option) ............................................................................................................................ 6-31
6.4.12.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit .......................................................................................................... 6-33
6.4.12.4 Removing the Reader Heater (option; 100/230V model only) ........................................................ 6-33
Chapter 7
Image Processing System
7.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Functional Construction of the PCBs ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Analog Image Processing .................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.2 CCD Drive .................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3 CCD Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction ................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.4 A/D Conversion of CCD Putput ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.3 Digital Image Processing ................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.3.2 Shading Correction ..................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Chapter 8
Laser Exposure
8.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Various Control ................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Contents
8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing .................................................................................................... 8-5

8.3.1.1 Turning On/Off the Laser .................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1.2 BD Signal ............................................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.3.1.3 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction .................................................................. 8-8
8.3.1.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction .................................................................... 8-8
8.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ..................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.2.1 APC Control ........................................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.3.2.2 PWM Control ...................................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter .................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ............................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.5 Correcting Image Displacement ................................................................................................................ 8-11
8.3.5.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.3.5.2 Timing of Color Displacement Detection/Correction ....................................................................... 8-12
8.3.5.3 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................. 8-13
8.3.5.4 Detecting/Correcting the Angle in Main Scanning Direction ........................................................... 8-14
8.3.5.5 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Main Scanning Direction ........................................... 8-16
8.3.5.6 Detecting/Correcting Changes in the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction ................... 8-17
8.4.1 Laser Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 8-19
8.4.1.1 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ................................................................................................. 8-19
8.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.4.1.3 After Replacing the Laser Unit .......................................................................................................... 8-20
Chapter 9
Image Formation
9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System ................................................................................. 9-3
9.1.3 Charging Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.2 Image Formation Process .................................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.2.1 Image Formation Process (general) ............................................................................................................ 9-6
9.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) ............................................................................................. 9-7
9.2.3 Image Formation Process (transfer) ........................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.3.1 At Power-On (1) ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.2 At Power-On (2) ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.3 During Copying/Printing Operations (normal speed) ................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.4 Making Copies/Prints (half speed) ........................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.5 After Replacing the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) ............................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.6 Printing Originals Containing a Color Page ............................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.7 Driving and Controlling the Image Formation System and the High-Voltage System ............................ 9-11
9.4 Image Stabilization Control ............................................................................................................................. 9-13
9.4.1 Outline of Image Quality Control ............................................................................................................ 9-13
9.4.2 Automatic Image Stabilization Control .................................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.3 ATR Control ............................................................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.4 Discharge Current Level Control ............................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.5 ATVC Control (transfer bias level correction) ......................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.6 PASCAL Control (image gradation) ........................................................................................................ 9-18
9.4.7 SALT-Dmax Control (development characteristics correction) .............................................................. 9-19
9.4.8 SALT-Dhalf Control (development characteristics correction) ............................................................... 9-20
9.4.9 Auto Gradation Control ............................................................................................................................ 9-22
9.5 Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-24
Contents
9.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit .......................................................................................................................... 9-24

9.5.1.1 Outline of the Drum Unit ................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.5.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) ........................................................................... 9-25
9.5.2 Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 9-26
9.5.2.1 Construction of the Developing Assembly ........................................................................................ 9-26
9.5.2.2 Controlling the Developing Bias ....................................................................................................... 9-27
9.5.3 Auxiliary Brush ......................................................................................................................................... 9-29
9.5.3.1 Construction of the Auxiliary Brush .................................................................................................. 9-29
9.5.3.2 Controlling the Auxiliary Bias ........................................................................................................... 9-30
9.5.4 Charging Mechanism ................................................................................................................................ 9-34
9.5.4.1 Construction of the Charging Mechanism ......................................................................................... 9-34
9.5.4.2 Controlling the Charging Bias ........................................................................................................... 9-35
9.6 Toner Container ............................................................................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.1 Outline of the Toner Container ................................................................................................................. 9-37
9.6.2 Controlling the Toner Container Drive ..................................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.3 Checking the Level of Toner .................................................................................................................... 9-38
9.6.4 Controlling the Supply of Toner ............................................................................................................... 9-39
9.7 Transfer Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.7.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit ...................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.7.1.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit ............................................................................................................... 9-40
9.7.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Transfer Unit ........................................................................................ 9-40
9.7.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias .................................................................................................................... 9-42
9.7.2.1 Controlling the Transfer Bias ............................................................................................................ 9-42
9.7.3 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................... 9-44
9.7.3.1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) ....................................................................................................... 9-44
9.7.3.2 Secondary External Roller ................................................................................................................. 9-45
9.7.3.3 Collecting Waste Toner ..................................................................................................................... 9-45
9.7.4 Separation Mechanism .............................................................................................................................. 9-46
9.7.4.1 Separation .......................................................................................................................................... 9-46
9.8.1 Drum ITB Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 9-48
9.8.1.1 Slide Out the Drum Unit .................................................................................................................... 9-48
9.8.1.3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ...................................................................................................... 9-48
9.8.1.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover .......................................................................................... 9-48
9.8.1.7 Opening the Main Controller Box ..................................................................................................... 9-49
9.8.1.8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ............................................................................................ 9-50
9.8.1.9 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ......................................................................................... 9-50
9.8.1.10 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................... 9-50
9.8.1.11 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ............................................................................................. 9-51
9.8.1.12 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting .................................................................................... 9-51
9.8.1.13 Removing the High-Voltage Unit .................................................................................................... 9-52
9.8.1.14 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct ............................................................................... 9-52
9.8.1.15 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting ..................................................................................... 9-52
9.8.1.16 Removing the Drum ITB Motor ...................................................................................................... 9-53
9.8.2 Drum Drive Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 9-53
Contents

9.8.2.9 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ........................................................................................ 9-56
9.8.2.12 Removing the Lattice Controller Base ............................................................................................ 9-57
9.8.2.13 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................... 9-57
9.8.2.14 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting Base ............................................................................ 9-58
9.8.2.15 Removing the Drum Drive Unit ...................................................................................................... 9-58
9.8.3 Drive Roller .............................................................................................................................................. 9-59
9.8.3.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit .......................................................................... 9-59
9.8.3.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ......................................................................................... 9-59
9.8.3.3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt ......................................................................................... 9-60
9.8.3.4 Removing the Drive Roller ............................................................................................................... 9-62
9.8.4 Developing Motor (Bk) ............................................................................................................................. 9-63
9.8.4.8 Removing the Developing Motor (Bk) .............................................................................................. 9-65
9.8.5 Developing Motor (Y/M/C) ...................................................................................................................... 9-65
9.8.5.8 Removing the Developing Motor (Y/M/C) ....................................................................................... 9-67
9.8.6 Secondary Transfer Unit ........................................................................................................................... 9-68
9.8.6.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................. 9-68
9.8.6.2 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ......................................................................................... 9-68
9.8.6.3 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit ............................................................................................ 9-68
9.8.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit ........................................................................................................................ 9-69
9.8.8 Transfer Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................................................. 9-69
9.8.8.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container .............................................................................................. 9-69
9.8.8.2 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit .............................................................................................. 9-70
9.8.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt ........................................................................................................................ 9-70
9.8.10 Primary Transfer Roller .......................................................................................................................... 9-73
9.8.10.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit ........................................................................ 9-73
9.8.10.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ....................................................................................... 9-73
9.8.10.3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt ....................................................................................... 9-74
9.8.10.4 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller ........................................................................................... 9-76
9.8.11 Secondary Transfer External Roller ........................................................................................................ 9-77
9.8.11.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................... 9-77
9.8.11.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer External Roller ......................................................................... 9-77
Contents
9.8.12 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ......................................................................................................... 9-78

9.8.12.4 Removing the Secondary Transfer Internal Roller .......................................................................... 9-81
9.8.13 Toner Container Drive Unit .................................................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container ............................................................................................. 9-82
9.8.13.2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ..................................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover .................................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.4 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ............................................................................................. 9-82
9.8.13.5 Removing the Controller Box Cover ............................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ........................................................................................ 9-83
9.8.13.7 Opening the Main Controller Box ................................................................................................... 9-83
9.8.13.8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting .......................................................................................... 9-84
9.8.13.9 Removing the Toner Container Drive Unit ..................................................................................... 9-84
9.8.14 Waste Toner Detection PCB ................................................................................................................... 9-85
9.8.14.2 Removing the Front Cover .............................................................................................................. 9-85
9.8.14.3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit Releasing Lever ............................................................ 9-85
9.8.14.4 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover .................................................................................................... 9-86
9.8.14.5 Removing the Inside Cover (lower) ................................................................................................. 9-86
9.8.14.6 Removing the Waste Toner Detection PCB .................................................................................... 9-86
9.8.15 Feedscrew Rotation Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 9-86
9.8.15.10 Removing the Toner Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate ...................................................... 9-89
9.8.15.11 Removing the Feedscrew Rotation Sensor .................................................................................... 9-90
9.8.16 Tone Container Motor ............................................................................................................................. 9-90
9.8.16.11 Removing the Toner Container Motor ........................................................................................... 9-94
9.8.17 Waste Toner Feedscrew Case .................................................................................................................. 9-94
9.8.17.2 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.17.3 Removing the Waste Toner Feedscrew Case .................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.18 Pattern Reader Unit ................................................................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.18.3 Removing the Upper Right Cover ................................................................................................... 9-96
Contents
9.8.18.4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit .................................................................................................. 9-96

9.8.19 Auto Registration Sensor PCB ................................................................................................................ 9-97
9.8.19.5 Removing the Auto Registration Sensor PCB ................................................................................. 9-99
9.8.20 SALT Sensor ......................................................................................................................................... 9-100
9.8.20.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit ...................................................................... 9-100
9.8.20.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ..................................................................................... 9-101
9.8.20.3 Removing the Upper Right Cover ................................................................................................. 9-101
9.8.20.4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit ................................................................................................ 9-101
9.8.20.5 Removing the SALT Sensor .......................................................................................................... 9-103
Chapter 10
Pickup/Feeding System
10.1 Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ............................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Arrangement of he Units ........................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers .......................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Paths .................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors ......................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.6 Arrangement of the Clutches and Solenoids .......................................................................................... 10-6
10.1.7 Route of Dive ......................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 10-8
10.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ........................................................................................... 10-8
10.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key ................................................ 10-8
10.3 Detecting Jams .............................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.1 Delay Jams .............................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.1.1 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly ................................................................................... 10-9
10.3.1.2 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly ......................................................................... 10-9
10.3.2 Stationary Jams ..................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.2.1 Stationary Jams .............................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.3.2.2 Stationary Jams at Power-On ........................................................................................................ 10-11
10.4 Cassette ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-12
10.4.1 Identifying the Paper Size .................................................................................................................... 10-12
10.4.2 Detecting the Level of Paper ................................................................................................................ 10-14
10.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ................................................................................................................................. 10-16
10.5.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-16
10.5.2 Basci Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................. 10-17
10.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ............................................................................................................................ 10-18
10.6.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-18
10.6.2 Basic Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................. 10-19
10.6.3 Identifying the Size of Paper ................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.6.4 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper ............................................................................................ 10-21
10.6.5 Detecting the Last paper ....................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.7 Registration Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.7.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-23
10.8 Duplex Feeding Unit ................................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.8.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-25
10.8.2 Controling Horizontal Registration ...................................................................................................... 10-26
10.8.3 Face-Down Delivery, A4, 5 Sheets in Circulation ............................................................................... 10-27
10.8.4 Face-Down Delivery, A3, 3 Sheets in Cirucilation .............................................................................. 10-29
10.9 Delivery ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-32
Contents
10.9.1 Delivery ................................................................................................................................................ 10-32

10.9.2 Movement in the Direction of Face-Down Delivery ............................................................................ 10-33
10.9.3 Movement in the Direction of Face-Up Delivery ................................................................................. 10-34
10.9.4 Movement for CenterTray delivery ...................................................................................................... 10-34
10.9.5 Moement for Copy Tray Dievyer ......................................................................................................... 10-35
10.10 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.10.1.1 Removing the Cassette ................................................................................................................. 10-36
10.10.1.2 Removing the Front Right Cover ................................................................................................. 10-36
10.10.1.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover .................................................................................................. 10-36
10.10.1.4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover .................................................................................. 10-36
10.10.1.5 Removing the Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................... 10-37
10.10.2 Cassette Size Detection Unit ............................................................................................................... 10-37
10.10.2.2 Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit ................................................................................ 10-37
10.10.3 Pickup Roller ....................................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.3.2 Removing the Pickup Roller ........................................................................................................ 10-38
10.10.4 Feed Roller .......................................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.4.2 Removing the Feeding Roller ...................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.5 Separation Roller ................................................................................................................................. 10-38
10.10.5.2 Removing the Separation Roller .................................................................................................. 10-39
10.10.6 Cassette Pickup Motor ........................................................................................................................ 10-39
10.10.6.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ................................................................................................. 10-39
10.10.6.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ................................................................................................ 10-39
10.10.6.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ......................................................................................... 10-39
10.10.6.4 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit ......................................................................................... 10-39
10.10.6.5 Removing the Controller Box Cover ........................................................................................... 10-39
10.10.6.6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover .................................................................................... 10-39
10.10.6.7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................... 10-40
10.10.6.8 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ......................................................................................... 10-40
10.10.6.9 Removing the Lattice Controller Base ......................................................................................... 10-41
10.10.6.10 Removing the High-Voltage Unit .............................................................................................. 10-41
10.10.6.11 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct ......................................................................... 10-41
10.10.6.12 Removing the Rear Right Cover ................................................................................................ 10-42
10.10.6.13 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor ....................................................................................... 10-42
10.10.7 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ................................................................................................................ 10-43
10.10.7.6 Removing the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate ............................................................... 10-44
10.10.7.7 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ................................................................................. 10-44
10.10.7.8 Mounting the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate ................................................................ 10-44
10.10.8 Cassette Paper Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 10-45
Contents
10.10.8.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor .......................................................................................... 10-47

10.10.9 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ..................................................................................................... 10-48
10.10.9.1 Removing the Cassette ................................................................................................................ 10-48
10.10.9.2 Removing the Front Right Cover ................................................................................................ 10-48
10.10.9.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover ................................................................................................. 10-48
10.10.9.5 Removing the Pickup Unit .......................................................................................................... 10-48
10.10.9.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ...................................................................... 10-49
10.10.10 Slide Resistor .................................................................................................................................... 10-50
10.10.10.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit .............................................................................................. 10-50
10.10.10.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Unit ...................................................................................... 10-50
10.10.10.3 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Upper Cover/Lower Cover .................................................. 10-51
10.10.10.4 Removing the Slide Resistor ..................................................................................................... 10-52
10.10.11 Cassette Pickup Solenoid .................................................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.1 Removing the Cassette .............................................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.2 Removing the Front Right Cover .............................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover ............................................................................................... 10-52
10.10.11.4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover ................................................................................ 10-53
10.10.11.5 Removing the Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................ 10-53
10.10.11.6 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................... 10-53
10.10.12 Manual Feed Tray Unit ..................................................................................................................... 10-53
10.10.12.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover .................................................................................... 10-53
10.10.13 Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................................................. 10-54
10.10.14 Manual Feed Roller ........................................................................................................................... 10-55
10.10.14.3 Removing the Manual Feed Roller ............................................................................................ 10-56
10.10.15 Manual Feed Separation Roller ........................................................................................................ 10-57
10.10.15.3 Removing the Motor Cover ....................................................................................................... 10-58
10.10.15.5 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller ......................................................................... 10-59
10.10.16 Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor ........................................................................................................ 10-60
10.10.16.4 Removing the Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor ......................................................................... 10-62
10.10.17 Manual Feed Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 10-62
10.10.17.5 Removing the Manual Feed sensor ........................................................................................... 10-64
10.10.18 Transparency Sensor (Front/Rear) .................................................................................................... 10-66
10.10.18.2 Removing the Transparency Sensor Mounting Plate ................................................................ 10-66
10.10.18.3 Removing the Transparency Sensor (front/rear) ....................................................................... 10-66
10.10.19 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid .......................................................................................................... 10-66
Contents
10.10.19.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................... 10-66

10.10.19.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ............................................................................ 10-69
10.10.20 Registration Motor ............................................................................................................................ 10-69
10.10.20.4 Removing the Registration Motor ............................................................................................. 10-70
10.10.21 Pre-Registration Motor ...................................................................................................................... 10-71
10.10.21.4 Removing the Pre-Registration Motor ....................................................................................... 10-72
10.10.22 Horizontal Registration Motor .......................................................................................................... 10-72
10.10.22.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ......................................................................................................... 10-72
10.10.22.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit ............................................................................................. 10-72
10.10.22.3 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ................................................................................. 10-73
10.10.22.4 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Assembly Back Sheet ................................................................. 10-73
10.10.22.5 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate ..................................................... 10-73
10.10.22.6 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor ........................................................................... 10-74
10.10.23 Registration Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 10-74
10.10.23.3 Removing the Registration Sensor ............................................................................................ 10-75
10.10.24 Fixing/Feeder Unit ............................................................................................................................ 10-75
10.10.25 Vertical Path Roller ........................................................................................................................... 10-76
10.10.25.1 Removing the Cassette ............................................................................................................... 10-76
10.10.25.2 Removing the Front Right Cover ............................................................................................... 10-76
10.10.25.5 Removing the Pickup Unit ......................................................................................................... 10-77
10.10.25.6 Removing the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate ............................................................. 10-77
10.10.25.7 Mounting the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate .............................................................. 10-77
10.10.25.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller ............................................................................................ 10-78
10.10.26 Inside Delivery Roller ....................................................................................................................... 10-78
10.10.26.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller ........................................................................................ 10-78
10.10.27 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor ........................................................................................... 10-79
10.10.27.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover ............................................................................................... 10-79
10.10.27.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray .......................................................................................... 10-79
10.10.27.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) ...................................................................... 10-79
10.10.27.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) ..................................................................... 10-80
10.10.27.5 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting Plate .................................. 10-83
10.10.27.6 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................ 10-84
10.10.28 Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................................. 10-84
10.10.28.6 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor .............................................. 10-85
Contents
10.10.29 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ......................................................................... 10-86

10.10.29.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ......................................................................................... 10-86
10.10.29.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................... 10-87
10.10.29.5 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting Plate ................................. 10-89
10.10.29.6 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch .......................................... 10-90
10.10.30 Drawer Connector (manual feed unit) .............................................................................................. 10-90
10.10.30.2 Removing the Disconnecting the Drawer Connector (manual feed unit) ................................. 10-91
10.10.31 Drawer Connector (fixing/feeder unit) ............................................................................................. 10-91
10.10.31.3 Removing the Drawer Connector (fixing feeder unit) .............................................................. 10-92
10.10.32 Duplex Roller 1 ................................................................................................................................. 10-92
10.10.32.3 Removing the Duplex Roller 1 .................................................................................................. 10-92
10.10.33 Duplex Feed Motor ........................................................................................................................... 10-94
10.10.33.3 Removing the Duplex Feed Motor ............................................................................................ 10-95
10.10.34 Duplex Registration Sensor .............................................................................................................. 10-96
10.10.34.4 Removing the Duplex Registration Sensor ............................................................................... 10-97
10.10.35 Duplex Horizontal Registration Sensor ............................................................................................ 10-97
10.10.35.4 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate .................................................... 10-98
10.10.36 Duplex Pickup Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 10-99
10.10.36.1 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ............................................................................................. 10-99
10.10.36.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit Releasing Lever ...................................................... 10-99
10.10.36.3 Removing the Inside Cover (lower) ........................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.4 Removing the Cassette ............................................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.5 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.6 Removing the Front Cover ...................................................................................................... 10-100
10.10.36.7 Removing the Rear Right Cover ............................................................................................. 10-101
10.10.36.8 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover .............................................................................. 10-101
10.10.36.9 Removing the Pickup Unit ...................................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.10 Removing the Upper Rear Cover .......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.11 Removing the Lower Rear Cover .......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.12 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.13 Removing the Controller Box Cover ..................................................................................... 10-102
10.10.36.14 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ............................................................................. 10-102
10.10.36.15 Opening the Main Controller Box ......................................................................................... 10-103
10.10.36.16 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ................................................................................ 10-104
10.10.36.17 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ............................................................................ 10-104
10.10.36.18 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ................................................................................... 10-104
10.10.36.19 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting .......................................................................... 10-105
10.10.36.20 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct ..................................................................... 10-105
Contents
10.10.36.21 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB ........................................................................................ 10-105

10.10.36.22 Removing the Duplex Pickup Sensor .................................................................................... 10-105
10.10.37 Duplex Registration Clutch ............................................................................................................. 10-106
10.10.37.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ....................................................................................................... 10-106
10.10.37.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit ........................................................................................... 10-107
10.10.37.3 Removing the Duplex Feeder Motor Connector ...................................................................... 10-107
10.10.37.4 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ............................................................................... 10-107
10.10.37.5 Removing the Duplex Registration Clutch .............................................................................. 10-107
10.10.38 Duplex Pickup Clutch ..................................................................................................................... 10-108
10.10.38.4 Removing the Duplex Pickup Clutch ...................................................................................... 10-109
10.10.39 Delivery Vertical Path Unit ............................................................................................................. 10-110
10.10.39.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ........................................................................................ 10-111
10.10.39.3 Removing the Upper Left Cover ............................................................................................. 10-111
10.10.39.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) .................................................................... 10-111
10.10.39.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) ................................................................... 10-112
10.10.40 Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 ......................................................................................................... 10-115
10.10.40.5 Removing the Delivery Sensor Mounting Plate ...................................................................... 10-119
10.10.40.6 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Sensor Flag .................................................................... 10-119
10.10.40.7 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 .......................................................................... 10-120
10.10.41 Face-Up Delivery Roller ................................................................................................................. 10-120
10.10.41.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Cover ................................................................................. 10-121
10.10.41.3 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller ...................................................................................... 10-121
10.10.41.4 Removing the Face-Up Delivery Roller .................................................................................. 10-122
10.10.42 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 ....................................................................................................... 10-123
10.10.42.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Sensor 2 ......................................................................... 10-127
10.10.42.6 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 ........................................................................ 10-128
10.10.43 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 2 ....................................................................................................... 10-128
10.10.44 Face-Down Delivery Motor ............................................................................................................ 10-133
10.10.44.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Motor ............................................................................. 10-137
10.10.45 Delivery Vertical Path Motor .......................................................................................................... 10-137
Contents
10.10.45.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................. 10-138
10.10.45.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Motor ........................................................................... 10-141
10.10.46 Face-Down Delivery Sensor 1 ........................................................................................................ 10-141
10.10.46.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ....................................................................................... 10-141
10.10.47 Center Delivery Tray Full sensor .................................................................................................... 10-146
10.10.47.5 Removing the Center Delivery Tray Full sensor ..................................................................... 10-149
10.10.49 Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ........................................................................ 10-154
10.10.49.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ......................................... 10-158
10.10.50 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 ............................................................................................... 10-158
10.10.50.5 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ........................................................................................... 10-162
10.10.50.6 Removing the Cleaner Fan ...................................................................................................... 10-162
10.10.50.7 Removing the Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 ................................................................ 10-162
10.10.51 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 2 ............................................................................................... 10-163
10.10.52 Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt ....................................................................................... 10-163
10.10.52.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt ........................................................ 10-167
Chapter 11
Fixing System
11.1 Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 11-1

11.1.2 Major Components ................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.3 Construction of the Control System ....................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On .................................................................................................... 11-4
11.2.2 Sequence of Operations (printing; plain paper, for less than 180 sec) ................................................... 11-5
11.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations (during printing; plain paper, for 180 sec or more) ............................... 11-6
Contents
11.3 Various Control Mechanisms ........................................................................................................................ 11-7

11.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller ............................................................................................. 11-7
11.3.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................. 11-7
11.3.1.2 Controlling the Speed According to the Type of Paper ................................................................... 11-7
11.3.1.3 Controlling the Speed According to the Quantity of Printing ......................................................... 11-8
11.3.1.4 Preventing Partial Deformation of the Roller .................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature ............................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2.2 At Power-On .................................................................................................................................. 11-10
11.3.2.3 In Standby ...................................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.3.2.4 During Printing .............................................................................................................................. 11-11
11.3.2.5 Between Sheets .............................................................................................................................. 11-12
11.3.2.6 Overheating in Areas Without Paper ............................................................................................. 11-13
11.3.2.7 Return for Low-Power Mode ......................................................................................................... 11-13
11.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper ............................................................................................................. 11-14
11.3.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper ...................................................................................................... 11-14
11.4 Protective Functions .................................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.1 Turning Off the Power Against Overheating (in response to activation of thermal switch) ................ 11-15
11.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Thermistors ........................................................................................... 11-16
11.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.5.1 Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 11-17
11.5.1.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................. 11-17
11.5.1.2 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................. 11-17
11.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame .............................................................................................................................. 11-18
11.5.2.2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide ............................................................................................ 11-18
11.5.2.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ............................................................................................... 11-19
11.5.3 Fixing Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.5.3.4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ......................................................... 11-23
11.5.3.5 Removing the Fixing Roller .......................................................................................................... 11-24
11.5.4 Pressure Roller ...................................................................................................................................... 11-26
11.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater ...................................................................... 11-28
11.5.4.5 Removing the Pressure Roller ....................................................................................................... 11-29
11.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor ........................................................................................................................ 11-30
11.5.5.4 Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor ......................................................................................... 11-32
11.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor .......................................................................................................................... 11-34
11.5.6.4 Removing the Fixing Sub thermistor ............................................................................................. 11-36
Contents
11.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch ......................................................................................................................... 11-37

11.5.7.4 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch .......................................................................................... 11-40
11.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater ................................................................................................. 11-42
11.5.8.4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ........................................................ 11-44
11.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater ............................................................................................................... 11-45
11.5.9.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater ..................................................................... 11-48
11.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide ............................................................................................................................... 11-50
11.5.10.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ........................................................................................................... 11-50
11.5.10.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide ................................................................................................ 11-50
11.5.10.3 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ........................................................................................... 11-50
11.5.11 Delivery Upper Guide ......................................................................................................................... 11-51
11.5.11.2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide .......................................................................................... 11-51
11.5.12 Delivery Lower Guide ........................................................................................................................ 11-52
11.5.12.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ............................................................................................. 11-53
11.5.12.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater ................................................................... 11-54
11.5.12.5 Removing the Pressure Roller ..................................................................................................... 11-55
11.5.12.6 Remove the Delivery Lower Guide ............................................................................................. 11-55
11.5.13 Fixing Inlet Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 11-57
11.5.13.4 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor ............................................................................................... 11-60
11.5.14 Fixing Delivery Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 11-61
11.5.14.4 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor ........................................................................................ 11-63
11.5.15 Fixing Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 11-64
11.5.15.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ................................................................................................ 11-64
11.5.15.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ................................................................................... 11-65
11.5.15.6 Opening the Main Controller Box ............................................................................................... 11-65
11.5.15.7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................. 11-66
11.5.15.8 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ............................................................................................... 11-66
Contents
11.5.15.9 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover ......................................................................................... 11-67

11.5.15.10 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ............................................................. 11-67
11.5.15.11 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit ............................................................................................... 11-68
11.5.15.12 Removing the Fixing Motor ...................................................................................................... 11-69
Chapter 12
Externals and Controls
12.1 Control Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 12-1

12.1.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 LCD Processing ...................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.3 LCD Contras Adjustment ....................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU ...................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Counters ......................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.2 Signal-Sided Print and 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print ...................................................................... 12-5
12.2.3 Side of a Duplex Print (duplex model only) ........................................................................................... 12-5
12.3 Fans ................................................................................................................................................................ 12-6
12.3.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.2 Sequence of Operations (fan) ................................................................................................................. 12-7
12.4 Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.4.1 Power Supply .......................................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.4.1.1 Timing of Power Supply .................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.4.1.2 Wiring to Various Accessories ........................................................................................................ 12-8
12.4.1.3 Route of Power Supply .................................................................................................................... 12-9
12.4.1.4 Power Supply Route lnside the Printer Unit .................................................................................. 12-10
12.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB .............................................................................................. 12-11
12.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Machine Power Suppy .................................................................................. 12-11
12.4.3 Protection Function ............................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms .................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.4.4 Backup Battery ...................................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.4.1 Backup Power Supply .................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.5 Energy-Saving Function ........................................................................................................................ 12-13
12.4.5.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.5.1 Fixing Drive Unit .................................................................................................................................. 12-15
12.5.1.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ................................................................................................... 12-15
12.5.1.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover .................................................................................................. 12-15
12.5.1.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ........................................................................................... 12-15
12.5.1.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ............................................................................................. 12-15
12.5.1.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ...................................................................................... 12-15
12.5.1.6 Opening the Main Controller Box ................................................................................................. 12-15
12.5.1.7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ..................................................................................... 12-16
12.5.1.8 Removing the High-Voltage Unit .................................................................................................. 12-17
12.5.1.9 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover ........................................................................................... 12-17
12.5.1.10 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ............................................................... 12-17
12.5.1.11 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit ................................................................................................. 12-18
12.5.2 Developing Drive Unit .......................................................................................................................... 12-18
12.5.2.7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ........................................................................................ 12-20
Contents
12.5.2.8 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................... 12-21

12.5.2.9 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................. 12-21
12.5.3 High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................................................ 12-22
12.5.3.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover .................................................................................................. 12-22
12.5.3.3 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................. 12-22
12.5.4 Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................ 12-23
12.5.4.5 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ................................................................. 12-23
12.5.5 DC Power Supply Unit ......................................................................................................................... 12-24
12.5.5.3 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit .......................................................................................... 12-24
12.5.6 Control Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 12-25
12.5.6.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover (small) ....................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.6.2 Removing the Inside Cover ........................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.6.3 Removing the Control Panel ......................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7 Control Panel LCD Unit ....................................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7.3 Removing the Control Panel ......................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ....................................................................................... 12-26
12.5.7.5 Removing the Control Panel LCD Unit ........................................................................................ 12-26
12.5.8 DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 12-26
12.5.8.4 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ..................................................................................... 12-27
12.5.8.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................ 12-27
12.5.8.6 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB ...................................................................................... 12-28
12.5.9 Counter Memory PCB .......................................................................................................................... 12-28
12.5.9.7 Removing the Counter Memory PCB ........................................................................................... 12-30
12.5.10 Fuse PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 12-30
12.5.10.3 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit ........................................................................................ 12-30
12.5.10.4 Removing the Fuse PCB ............................................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11 Leakage Breaker ................................................................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11.4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Mounting ................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11.5 Removing the Leakage Breaker .................................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.12 Duplex Driver PCB ............................................................................................................................. 12-32
Contents

12.5.12.3 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting ................................................................................ 12-32
12.5.12.4 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB .............................................................................................. 12-33
12.5.13 Relay PCB 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 12-33
12.5.13.7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ...................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.13.8 Removing the Relay PCB 1 ......................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14 Control Panel CPU PCB ..................................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover (small) ..................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14.2 Removing the Inside Cover ......................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14.3 Removing the Control Panel ........................................................................................................ 12-35
12.5.14.4 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB ...................................................................................... 12-36
12.5.15 Control Panel Key Switch PCB .......................................................................................................... 12-36
12.5.15.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ...................................................................................... 12-37
12.5.15.5 Removing the Control Panel Key PCB ........................................................................................ 12-37
12.5.16 Control Panel Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................. 12-37
12.5.16.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ...................................................................................... 12-38
12.5.16.5 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB .................................................................................. 12-38
12.5.17 Environment Sensor ............................................................................................................................ 12-38
12.5.17.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit .................................................................... 12-38
12.5.17.2 Removing the Upper Right Cover ............................................................................................... 12-39
12.5.17.3 Removing the Environment Sensor ............................................................................................. 12-39
12.5.18 Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Sensor .............................................................................................. 12-39
12.5.18.8 Removing the Registration Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ................................................ 12-42
12.5.18.9 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................... 12-42
12.5.19 Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor ........................................................................................................ 12-42
12.5.19.1 Removing the Tonner Container release Lever ........................................................................... 12-42
12.5.19.2 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ................................................................................................ 12-42
12.5.19.9 Removing the Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor ..................................................................... 12-44
Contents
12.5.20 Main Power Switch ............................................................................................................................. 12-44

12.5.20.10 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting .............................................................................. 12-47
12.5.20.11 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ............................................................................................. 12-47
12.5.20.13 Removing the Main Power Supply Switch ............................................................................... 12-48
12.5.21 Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ............................................................................. 12-48
12.5.21.8 Removing the Registration Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ............................................... 12-50
12.5.21.9 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Open/Close Switch ................................................................ 12-50
12.5.22 Front Cover Open/Closed Detecting Switch ....................................................................................... 12-51
12.5.22.2 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ............................................................................................... 12-51
12.5.22.9 Removing the Front Cover Open/Close Switch .......................................................................... 12-52
12.5.23 Cleaner Fan ......................................................................................................................................... 12-53
12.5.23.2 Removing the Cleaner Fan .......................................................................................................... 12-53
12.5.24 Manual Feed Cooling Fan ................................................................................................................... 12-53
12.5.24.13 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan .................................................................................. 12-57
12.5.25 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................................................. 12-58
Contents

12.5.26 Power Supply Cooing Fan ................................................................................................................... 12-60
12.5.26.4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Mounting .................................................................. 12-60
12.5.26.5 Removing the Power Supply Cooing Fan .................................................................................... 12-60
12.5.27 Delivery Cooling Fan .......................................................................................................................... 12-61
12.5.27.3 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................ 12-61
12.5.27.6 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan ........................................................................................... 12-62
12.5.28 Machine Heat Discharge Fan .............................................................................................................. 12-62
12.5.28.7 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ............................................................................... 12-64
12.5.29 Drum Unit Drive Belt .......................................................................................................................... 12-65
12.5.29.13 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting ............................................................................... 12-69
12.5.29.14 Removing the Drum Drive Unit ................................................................................................ 12-70
12.5.29.15 Detaching the Drum Unit Drive Belt ......................................................................................... 12-70
Chapter 13
MEAP
13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 13-1

13.2 MEAP Counter .............................................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform ............................................................................................................. 13-4
Chapter 14
Maintenance and Inspection
14.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ........................................................................................................................... 14-1

14.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Reader Unit/Color Image Reader-C1 ..................................................................................................... 14-1
Contents
14.1.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 14-1

14.2 Durables and Consumables ........................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ........................................................................................................... 14-4
14.3.1 Scheduled Servicing (Reader Unit) ........................................................................................................ 14-4
14.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (Printer Unit) ........................................................................................................ 14-6
Chapter 15
Standards and Adjustments
15.1 Image Adjustments ........................................................................................................................................ 15-1

15.1.1 Standards for Image Position ................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.2 Checking the Image Position .................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.3 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Cassette) ........................................................................................... 15-2
15.1.4 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Manual Feed Tray) ........................................................................... 15-3
15.1.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Side Paper Deck) .............................................................................. 15-3
15.1.6 Duplex Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 15-4
15.2 Scanning System ........................................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.1 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp ...................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass .................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.3 After Replacing the CCD Unit ............................................................................................................... 15-5
15.3 Laser Exposure System ................................................................................................................................. 15-6
15.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Unit .............................................................................................................. 15-6
15.4 Image Formation System ............................................................................................................................... 15-7
15.4.1 After Replacing the Drum Unit .............................................................................................................. 15-7
15.4.2 After Replacing the Transfer Unit .......................................................................................................... 15-7
15.4.3 After Replacing the Pattern Reading Unit .............................................................................................. 15-7
15.5 Fixing System ................................................................................................................................................ 15-8
15.5.1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ...................................................................................................... 15-8
15.6 Electrical Components .................................................................................................................................. 15-9
15.6.1 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ......................................................................................... 15-9
15.6.2 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................... 15-9
15.6.3 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) .............................................................................. 15-10
15.6.4 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ................................................................................. 15-10
15.6.5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB ........................................................................................................ 15-10
15.6.6 When Replacing the HDD .................................................................................................................... 15-11
15.6.7 When Replacing the Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................. 15-11
15.7 Pickup/Feeding System ............................................................................................................................... 15-12
15.7.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Pickup Cassette ...................................... 15-12
15.7.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit ........................................... 15-13
Chapter 16
Correcting Faulty Images
16.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................... 16-1

16.1.1 Site Environment .................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.2 Checking the Paper ................................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ........................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.4 Checking the Durables ........................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts .............................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks ............................................................................................ 16-1
16.1.7 Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.2 Test Print ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
Contents
16.2.2 Test Print TYPE ...................................................................................................................................... 16-4

16.2.3 Selecting a Test Print TYPE ................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.4 Gradations (TYPE=4) ............................................................................................................................. 16-5
16.2.5 Full Halftone (TYPE=5) ......................................................................................................................... 16-5
16.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) ....................................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripe (TYPE=10) .................................................................................................. 16-7
16.2.8 Gradations (TYPE=12) ........................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.2.9 Full Color 16 Gradations (TYPE=14) .................................................................................................... 16-8
16.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 16-9
16.3.1 Symptoms ................................................................................................................................................ 16-9
16.3.1.1 Image Fault Case Studies (A4) ........................................................................................................ 16-9
16.3.1.2 Image Fault Case Samples (A3) .................................................................................................... 16-14
16.3.2 Image Faults .......................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.1 Blank Image ................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.2 Solid Image .................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.3 Light Image / Weak Density .......................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.4 Foggy Image .................................................................................................................................. 16-24
16.3.2.5 Uneven Density .............................................................................................................................. 16-35
16.3.2.6 Out of Focus ................................................................................................................................... 16-40
16.3.2.7 Partially Blank/Streaked ................................................................................................................ 16-43
16.3.2.8 Smudged/Streaked ......................................................................................................................... 16-54
16.3.2.9 Ghost / Memory ............................................................................................................................. 16-60
16.3.2.10 Poor Finxing ................................................................................................................................ 16-62
16.3.2.11 Faulty Color Reproduction .......................................................................................................... 16-64
16.3.2.12 Stretching/Shrinking .................................................................................................................... 16-65
16.3.3 Faulty Feeding ....................................................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.1 Double-Feed/ Multiple Feed .......................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.2 Skew Feed ...................................................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.3 Wrinkle .......................................................................................................................................... 16-67
16.3.3.4 Ripple/Curl ..................................................................................................................................... 16-67
16.3.3.5 Wrap ............................................................................................................................................... 16-68
16.3.4 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................... 16-68
16.3.4.1 No Power ....................................................................................................................................... 16-68
16.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related .................................................................................................................... 16-70
16.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction ...................................................................................................................... 16-72
16.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection ........................................................................................................ 16-72
16.3.4.5 Noise .............................................................................................................................................. 16-77
16.3.4.6 User Warning Message .................................................................................................................. 16-78
16.3.4.7 Other Defect ................................................................................................................................... 16-83
16.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment ............................................................................................................ 16-88
16.3.5 Printing/scanning ................................................................................................................................... 16-88
16.3.5.1 No Output ...................................................................................................................................... 16-88
16.3.5.2 Installation Failure ......................................................................................................................... 16-91
16.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result .................................................................................................... 16-92
16.3.6 Network ............................................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure ........................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.6.2 Connection Problem .................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related ................................................................................................................... 16-108
16.3.7.1 Transmission Problem ................................................................................................................. 16-108
16.3.7.2 Reception Problem ....................................................................................................................... 16-115
16.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect ............................................................................................................. 16-116
16.3.8 Jam (Main Unit) .................................................................................................................................. 16-116
16.3.8.1 Paper not picked up: although the paper sensor detects paper inside the cassette ....................... 16-116
16.3.8.2 0102 Jam Code ............................................................................................................................. 16-117
Contents
16.3.8.3 0105 Jam Code: Occurs with machine having mylar sheet to fixing/feeder sensor flag ............ 16-117
16.3.8.4 JAM CODE 0107 ........................................................................................................................ 16-117
16.3.8.5 JAM CODE 0108, 0207 .............................................................................................................. 16-118
16.3.8.6 JAM CODE 0207 ........................................................................................................................ 16-118
16.3.8.7 0207 Jam Code: Because of deformation of internal delivery roller ........................................... 16-118
16.3.8.8 0A06 Jam Code ........................................................................................................................... 16-119
16.3.8.9 JAM CODE 0A0A: At about 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a
duplexing driver PCB failure ................................................................................................................. 16-119
16.3.8.10 JAM CODE 0B00/0105 ............................................................................................................ 16-120
16.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder) ...................................................................................................................... 16-120
16.3.9.1 JAM CODE 008C: frequent occurrence recorded in jam history under service
mode, although unable to reproduce during paper feeding test. ............................................................ 16-120
16.3.10 Error Code ......................................................................................................................................... 16-121
16.3.10.1 E000 Error code detail The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of
power-on is inadequate. ........................................................................................................................ 16-121
16.3.10.2 E001 Error code detail The fixing unit is overheating. ........................................................... 16-121
16.3.10.3 E002 Error code detail The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate. .................... 16-122
16.3.10.4 E003 Error code detai The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby. ... 16-123
16.3.10.5 E004 Error code detail The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty. ............................... 16-123
16.3.10.6 E004-0003 Error code Or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.': after
implementing countermeasure against malfunction of fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor ............. 16-124
16.3.10.7 E004-0005 Error Code: Because of faulty DC Controller PCB ................................................ 16-124
16.3.10.8 E004-0007 Error Code: Occasionally occurs first in the morning ............................................ 16-125
16.3.10.9 E004-0006/E004-0007 Error Code Descriptions ...................................................................... 16-125
16.3.10.10 E012 Error code detail The drum ITB motor is faulty. .......................................................... 16-126
16.3.10.11 E012-0001 Error code ITB motor not rotating ....................................................................... 16-126
16.3.10.12 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, due
to a drum ITB motor failure ................................................................................................................. 16-126
16.3.10.13 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, due
to a microswitch PCB failure ............................................................................................................... 16-127
16.3.10.14 E012-0001 Error Code: Drum ITB Motor, DC Power Supply PCB and
Fuse PCB work normally ...................................................................................................................... 16-128
16.3.10.15 E012-0001 Error Code: Because Drum ITB Motor is faulty, or Fuse PCB is faulty .............. 16-128
16.3.10.16 E020-0134 Error code Recurring even after replacement of yellow drum unit ..................... 16-129
16.3.10.17 E020 Error code detail There is a fault associated with the drum/developer. ........................ 16-129
16.3.10.18 E020-xx81: generally E020-0181 Error Code ......................................................................... 16-131
16.3.10.19 E020-0081 Error code Displaying when a copy is made with the service case removed ..... 16-132
16.3.10.20 E020-0X34, E020-0X21 Error code Upon installation in a cold season ................................ 16-132
16.3.10.21 E020-04B0 Error code At about 200 to 300 sheets from installation, toner
container motor (Bk) not rotating (Refer to SymptomExplanation.) .................................................... 16-132
16.3.10.22 E020-04B0 Cautions in replacing the drum unit ..................................................................... 16-133
16.3.10.23 E020-0X81 Error Code Displaying because of an open/close failure of the
SALT sensor shutter .............................................................................................................................. 16-134
16.3.10.24 E020-0124 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-134
16.3.10.25 E020-OXB0 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-135
16.3.10.26 E020-xx24 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-135
16.3.10.27 E020-xxA0 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.28 E020-xxD0 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.29 E020-xx34 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.30 E020-0125 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-137
16.3.10.31 E020-03B0 Error Code: Overall fogging (no margin) occurred after replacement
of Cyan drum unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-137
16.3.10.32 E032 Error code detail The counter of the NE controller fails to operate. ............................ 16-137
16.3.10.33 E110 Error code detail The operation of the laser scanner motor is faulty. ........................... 16-137
Contents
16.3.10.34 E110-0x10 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-138

16.3.10.35 E202 Error code detail A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position. .. 16-139
16.3.10.36 E202-0000 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-139
16.3.10.37 E220 Error code detail A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp. ...................... 16-140
16.3.10.38 E220-0000 Error Code: Entire image sometimes becomes tinged with red ............................ 16-140
16.3.10.39 E220-0000 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-141
16.3.10.40 E220-0000 Error code Faulty connection in the flat cable from the CCD
unit into R-CON J205 causes. ............................................................................................................... 16-141
16.3.10.41 E220-0000 Error Code: Scanning lamp did not light up after turning power ON ................... 16-142
16.3.10.42 E220-0000 Error Code when turning power ON while opening platen cover ........................ 16-142
16.3.10.43 E220-0000 Error Code: No problem with CCD unit and Reader Controller PCB .................. 16-142
16.3.10.44 E220-0000 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, because of poor contact
of J204 on Reader Controller PCB, iRC3220 ........................................................................................ 16-143
16.3.10.45 E240 Error code detail The communication between the main motor controller
and the DC controller is faulty. ............................................................................................................. 16-143
16.3.10.46 E243 Error code detail The control panel is faulty. ................................................................ 16-143
16.3.10.47 E302 Error code detail A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction. .................... 16-144
16.3.10.48 E315 Error code detail The image data is faulty. ................................................................... 16-144
16.3.10.49 E315-0010 Error code Only for FAX is transmitted .............................................................. 16-144
16.3.10.50 E351 Error code detail The ECO-ID PCB is faulty. ............................................................... 16-145
16.3.10.51 E351-0000 Error Code: Because of poor connection of connector on ECO-ID PCB ............. 16-145
16.3.10.52 E402 Error code detail There is a fault in the feeder motor. .................................................. 16-145
16.3.10.53 E402 Error Code ...................................................................................................................... 16-146
16.3.10.54 E404 Error code detail There is a fault in the delivery motor. ............................................... 16-146
16.3.10.55 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-N1) ............... 16-146
16.3.10.56 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-M1) ............... 16-147
16.3.10.57 E503 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle communication. ......................................... 16-147
16.3.10.58 E504 Error code detail There is a fault in stack size detection. .............................................. 16-148
16.3.10.59 E505 Error code detail There is a fault in the backup RAM. ................................................. 16-148
16.3.10.60 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-N1) ......................................... 16-149
16.3.10.61 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-M1) ....................................... 16-149
16.3.10.62 E514 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction) ................. 16-150
16.3.10.63 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in alignment.(Finisher-N1) ...................................... 16-150
16.3.10.64 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in rear alignment. (Finisher-M1) .............................. 16-151
16.3.10.65 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-M1) ......................................... 16-151
16.3.10.66 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) ........................................ 16-152
16.3.10.67 E532 Error code detail There is a fault in the shift of the stapler ........................................... 16-152
16.3.10.68 E535 Error code detail There is a fault in the swing mechanism. ......................................... 16-153
16.3.10.69 E537 Error code detail There is a fault in front alignment. .................................................... 16-153
16.3.10.70 E540 Error code detail There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. .............................. 16-154
16.3.10.71 E577 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction). .... 16-154
16.3.10.72 E580 Error code detail There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray. .......................... 16-155
16.3.10.73 E584 Error code detail There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2). ......................................... 16-155
16.3.10.74 E5F0 Error code detail There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle. .......................... 16-156
16.3.10.75 E5F1 Error code detail There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. ............................... 16-156
16.3.10.76 E5F2 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle guide. ................................................... 16-157
16.3.10.77 E5F3 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle alignment. ................................................ 16-157
16.3.10.78 E5F4 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. ................................... 16-158
16.3.10.79 E5F5 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front. ................................. 16-158
16.3.10.80 E5F6 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate. ......... 16-159
16.3.10.81 E5F8 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle connector. ........................................... 16-160
16.3.10.82 E5F9 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle switch. ................................................ 16-160
16.3.10.83 E601-0xdd: after performing [COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT-Y/M/C/K] to
improve faint image ............................................................................................................................... 16-161
Contents
16.3.10.84 E602-0001/E602-0002/E602-0003 Error Code: Remedy upon occurrence of error code ...... 16-162
16.3.10.85 E602 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. ...................................................................... 16-163
16.3.10.86 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a
failure of the Distribution Board PCB Ass'y ........................................................................................ 16-165
connection failure of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller ............................ 16-165
16.3.10.88 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after performing HD-CHECK ........................................ 16-166
16.3.10.89 E602-0202 Error Code: Because of faulty SRAM Board PCB ............................................... 16-166
16.3.10.90 Progress bar on machine starting-up window is slower than usual, then E602
Error Code is displayed ......................................................................................................................... 16-166
16.3.10.91 E602-0402 Error Code: not recovered after replacement of main controller PCB ................. 16-166
16.3.10.92 E602-0x02 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-167
16.3.10.93 E602-0001 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-167
16.3.10.94 E602-0402 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, iRC3220 .......................................... 16-167
16.3.10.95 E604 Error code detail There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM). ........................... 16-167
16.3.10.96 E604-0000 Error Code: Because of faulty expansion RAM ................................................... 16-168
16.3.10.97 E605 Error code detail The battery for image memory is faulty. ........................................... 16-168
16.3.10.99 E674 Error code detail The fax board is faulty. .................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.100 E677-0002 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.101 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication.(DADF-K1) ...................... 16-170
16.3.10.102 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication. .......................................... 16-170
16.3.10.103 E712 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the
ADF and the reader unit. ...................................................................................................................... 16-171
finisher and the cassette pedestal. .......................................................................................................... 16-171
cassette pedestal and the printer unit. .................................................................................................... 16-172
16.3.10.106 E716-0000 Error code Recorded only in the error history ................................................... 16-172
16.3.10.107 E717 Error code detail The communication with the NE controller is faulty. ..................... 16-172
16.3.10.108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty. ............................................................... 16-173
16.3.10.109 E719-0011 Error code After the cable is disconnected because of a
scanning fault in card reader D1 ............................................................................................................ 16-173
16.3.10.110 E719-0001 Error code When the coin vendor is disconnected, unable to be cleared .......... 16-174
16.3.10.111 E731 Error code detail There is a fault in the UFR board. .................................................. 16-174
16.3.10.112 E732 Error code detail There is a reader communication error. .......................................... 16-174
16.3.10.113 E732-9999 Error Code: Recorded in error log after performing service mode
COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON ............................................................................................ 16-175
16.3.10.114 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps displaying for
about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results (DC power
supply unit PCB J158 output failure) ................................................................................................... 16-175
16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting up. Please
wait" changes to error code indication .................................................................................................. 16-176
about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results ............................. 16-177
16.3.10.117 E733 Error code detail There is a printer communication error. ......................................... 16-177
16.3.10.118 E733-0001 Error code Printer communication error ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.119 E740 Error code detail The Ethernet board is faulty. ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.120 E744 Error code detail The language file is faulty. ............................................................. 16-178
16.3.10.121 E745 Error code detail The TokenRing board is faulty. ..................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.122 E747-8702 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.123 E747 Error code detail The image processing ASIC or the memory control/
communication ASIC is faulty. ............................................................................................................. 16-179
16.3.10.124 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation ......................................................... 16-180
Contents
16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-180

16.3.10.126 E747-00FF Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.127 E751-0304 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-181
16.3.10.128 E804 Error code detail The power supply cooling fan is faulty. .......................................... 16-181
16.3.10.129 E804-0004 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-181
16.3.10.130 E804-0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan (FM7)
which is fixed on the controller box ..................................................................................................... 16-182
16.3.10.131 E804-0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code .................................................................... 16-182
16.3.10.132 E805 Error code detail The cleaner fan is faulty. ................................................................ 16-182
16.3.10.133 E805 Error code detail The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty. .......................................... 16-183
16.3.11 FAX # Code ...................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.11.1 037 ......................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.12 FAX ## Code .................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.12.1 ##111, ##228 FAX Error Code .................................................................................................. 16-183
16.3.12.2 ##281/##104 FAX Error Code .................................................................................................. 16-184
16.3.12.3 ##796 FAX Error Code .............................................................................................................. 16-184
16.4 Outline of Electrical Components ............................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid ................................................................................................................................... 16-185
16.4.1.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.1.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.2 Motor ................................................................................................................................................... 16-186
16.4.2.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-186
16.4.2.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-186
16.4.3 Fan ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-188
16.4.3.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-188
16.4.3.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-188
16.4.4 Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 16-189
16.4.4.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-189
16.4.4.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-190
16.4.5 Switch .................................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.5.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.5.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ................................................................................................................ 16-194
16.4.6.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-194
16.4.6.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-194
16.4.7 PCBs .................................................................................................................................................... 16-195
16.4.7.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-195
16.4.7.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-196
16.4.8 Plane Pedistal ...................................................................................................................................... 16-198
16.4.8.1 Plain Pedestal-C1 ......................................................................................................................... 16-198
16.4.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ............................ 16-199
16.4.9.1 Adjusting the Variable Resistors (VR), the Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and
the Check Pins by PCB .......................................................................................................................... 16-199
16.4.9.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................... 16-200
16.4.9.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) .......................................................................................................... 16-201
16.4.9.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................ 16-201
16.4.9.5 Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................................ 16-202
16.4.9.6 Differential PCB .......................................................................................................................... 16-202
Chapter 17
Self Diagnosis
17.1 Error Code Details ......................................................................................................................................... 17-1

17.1.1 Error Code Details Table ........................................................................................................................ 17-1
Contents
Chapter 18
Service Mode
18.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-1

18.1.1 Service mode screen configuration ........................................................................................................ 18-1
18.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ....................................................................................................... 18-2
18.1.3 Exiting service modes ............................................................................................................................ 18-3
18.1.4 Service mode backup .............................................................................................................................. 18-3
18.1.5 Initial screen ........................................................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen ............................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.7 Sub-item screen ...................................................................................................................................... 18-5
18.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) ................................................................................................................. 18-6
18.2.1 COPIER .................................................................................................................................................. 18-6
18.2.1.1 VERSION ........................................................................................................................................ 18-6
18.2.1.2 ACC-STS ......................................................................................................................................... 18-8
18.2.1.3 ANALOG ........................................................................................................................................ 18-9
18.2.1.4 JAM ............................................................................................................................................... 18-10
18.2.1.5 ERR ............................................................................................................................................... 18-18
18.2.1.6 DENS ............................................................................................................................................. 18-20
18.2.1.7 MISC ............................................................................................................................................. 18-21
18.2.1.8 ALARM-1 ..................................................................................................................................... 18-21
18.2.1.9 ALARM-2 ..................................................................................................................................... 18-22
18.2.1.10 ENVRNT ..................................................................................................................................... 18-25
18.2.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-26
18.2.2.1 FEEDSIZE ..................................................................................................................................... 18-26
18.2.3 DISPLAY Level 2 ................................................................................................................................. 18-26
18.2.3.1 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) - Level 2 .................................................................................. 18-26
18.2.4 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) Level 2 ........................................................................................... 18-28
18.2.4.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-28
18.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode) ............................................................................................................................... 18-32
18.3.1 I/O (display mode) ................................................................................................................................ 18-32
18.3.2 DC-CON ............................................................................................................................................... 18-33
18.3.3 R-CON .................................................................................................................................................. 18-42
18.3.4 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-44
18.3.5 SORTER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-46
18.3.6 MN-CON .............................................................................................................................................. 18-63
18.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) ..................................................................................................................... 18-65
18.4.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-65
18.4.1.1 ADJ-XY ......................................................................................................................................... 18-65
18.4.1.2 CCD ............................................................................................................................................... 18-67
18.4.1.3 IMG-REG ...................................................................................................................................... 18-70
18.4.1.4 BLANK ......................................................................................................................................... 18-71
18.4.1.5 PASCAL ........................................................................................................................................ 18-72
18.4.1.6 FEED-ADJ .................................................................................................................................... 18-72
18.4.1.7 CST-ADJ ....................................................................................................................................... 18-73
18.4.1.8 MISC ............................................................................................................................................. 18-73
18.4.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-74
18.4.2.1 DOCST .......................................................................................................................................... 18-74
18.4.3 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) Level 2 .................................................................................................. 18-76
18.4.3.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-76
18.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode) ................................................................................................. 18-82
18.5.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-82
18.5.1.1 INSTALL ...................................................................................................................................... 18-82
18.5.1.2 CCD ............................................................................................................................................... 18-82
18.5.1.3 LASER .......................................................................................................................................... 18-83
18.5.1.4 CST ................................................................................................................................................ 18-83
Contents
18.5.1.5 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................... 18-84

18.5.1.6 FIXING .......................................................................................................................................... 18-84
18.5.1.7 PANEL ........................................................................................................................................... 18-85
18.5.1.8 PART-CHK ................................................................................................................................... 18-85
18.5.1.9 CLEAR .......................................................................................................................................... 18-86
18.5.1.10 MISC-R ........................................................................................................................................ 18-86
18.5.1.11 MISC-P ........................................................................................................................................ 18-86
18.5.1.12 SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................... 18-87
18.5.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-88
18.5.2.1 SENS-INT ...................................................................................................................................... 18-88
18.5.3 FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode): Level 2 .............................................................................. 18-88
18.5.3.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-88
18.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) ............................................................................................................. 18-90
18.6.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................. 18-90
18.6.1.1 BODY ............................................................................................................................................ 18-90
18.6.1.2 USER ............................................................................................................................................. 18-91
18.6.1.3 ACC ............................................................................................................................................... 18-91
18.6.1.4 INT-FACE ..................................................................................................................................... 18-92
18.6.2 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-94
18.6.2.1 BLNK-SW ..................................................................................................................................... 18-94
18.6.3 BOARD ................................................................................................................................................. 18-94
18.6.3.1 SURF-OFF ..................................................................................................................................... 18-94
18.6.4 OPTION (mechanical specifications setting mode): Level 2 ................................................................ 18-95
18.6.4.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-95
18.6.4.2 BOARD ....................................................................................................................................... 18-112
18.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ............................................................................................................................ 18-113
18.7.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-113
18.7.1.1 NETWORK ................................................................................................................................. 18-113
18.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ...................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1.2 TOTAL ........................................................................................................................................ 18-116
18.8.1.3 PICK-UP ...................................................................................................................................... 18-118
18.8.1.4 FEEDER ...................................................................................................................................... 18-118
18.8.1.5 JAM ............................................................................................................................................. 18-119
18.8.1.6 DRBL-1 ....................................................................................................................................... 18-119
18.8.1.7 DRBL-2 ....................................................................................................................................... 18-120
Chapter 19
Upgrading
19.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 19-1

19.1.1 Construction of Firmware ....................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool ....................................................................................................... 19-2
19.1.3 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use ......................................................................... 19-5
19.2 Making Preparations ...................................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.2.1 Registering the Firmware ....................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.2.2 Making Connections ............................................................................................................................. 19-11
19.3 Formatting the HDD .................................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.3.1 Formatting All Partitions ...................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.3.2 Formatting Selected Partitions .............................................................................................................. 19-18
19.3.3 Formatting the Partitions ...................................................................................................................... 19-20
19.4 Downloading System Software ................................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.1 Downloading the System Software ....................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-27
Contents
19.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................ 19-28

19.4.2 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module ..................................................................................... 19-35
19.4.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-35
19.4.3 Downloading the BOOT Software ........................................................................................................ 19-42
19.4.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-42
19.4.4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software .......................................................................................... 19-50
19.4.4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-50
19.4.5 Downloading the G3 FAX Software ..................................................................................................... 19-58
19.4.5.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-58
19.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data ................................................................................................. 19-65
19.5.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 19-65
19.5.2 Uploading Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 19-66
19.5.3 Downloading Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 19-72
Chapter 20
Service Tools
20.1 Special Tools ................................................................................................................................................. 20-1

20.2 Solvents and Oils ........................................................................................................................................... 20-2
Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction
Contents
Contents
1.1 System Construction .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 System Construction of the Pickup/Delivery Options ............................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 System Configuration and Print/Transmission Accessories ...................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories ....................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.4 Overview of Printing/Transmitting Accessories ........................................................................................ 1-4
1.2 Product Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1 Names of Parts ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.1.1 External View ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1.2 Cross Section ....................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 Using the Machine ...................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power ......................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.2 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ................................................................. 1-9
1.2.2.3 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.3 User Mode Items ....................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.3.1 Common Settings .............................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings ................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.3.3 Adjustments and Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.2.3.4 Report Generation ............................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings .................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.3.6 Copier Specifications Settings ........................................................................................................... 1-16
1.2.3.7 Transmission/Reception Specifications Settings ............................................................................... 1-16
1.2.3.8 Box Specifications Settings ............................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.3.9 Printer Specifications Settings ........................................................................................................... 1-18
1.2.3.10 Destinations Table Specifications Settings ..................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.4 User Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.4.1 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................. 1-19
1.2.4.2 Inspection .......................................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.5 Safety ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser System ................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.2.5.2 Regulations by the Center for Devices and Radiational Heath(CDRH) ........................................... 1-21
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Assembly ........................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner .................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.2.6 Product Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.2.6.1 Type and Functions ........................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.2.7 Function List ............................................................................................................................................. 1-23
1.2.7.1 Print Speed ......................................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.2.7.2 Print Size ........................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.2.7.3 Others ................................................................................................................................................ 1-27
1.2.7.4 Reader Unit Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1-28
Chapter 1
1.1 System Construction

1.1.1 System Construction of the Pickup/Delivery Options
0000-4246
A system may be configured as follows:

[8]
[1]
[7]
[9]
[6]
[2]
[14]
[4]
[17]
[10]
[11]
[15]
[16]
*[5]
[12]
[15]
[3]
[16]
[13]
F-1-1
T-1-1
[1] Finisher-M1
[10] Slide Paper Deck-P1
[2] Saddle Finisher-N2
[11] Card Reader-D1
[3] Finisher-N1
[12] Plain Pedestal-C1
[4] Copy Tray-H1
[13] 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1
[5] Delivery Tray (standard)
[14] Anti-Condensation Heater (100/230V)
[6] NE Controller-A1
[15] Cassette Heater Kit-A1
[7] DADF-K1
[16] Cassette Heater Unit-24
[8] Copyboard Cover
[17] Cassette Heater Unit-25
[9] Original Tray
*The presence of any of [1] through [3] prevents installation of [4] and [5].
1-1
Chapter 1
1.1.2 System Configuration and Print/Transmission Accessories
0006-8287
The machine may be configured as follows:

[12]
[9]
[8A]
[8B]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[7A]
[5]
[7B]
[6]
[11]
F-1-2
[1] Super G3 Fax Board-M2
[2] Ethernet Board (standard)
[3] UFR Board or Open Interface Board
[4] USB Interface Board or TokeRing Board
[5] Image Conversion Board-A2
[6] PS Print Server Unit-C1
[7A] PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS)-A2 (boot ROM for LIPS model: 100V model only)
[7B] PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS/PS Kanji) A2 (Boot Rom for LIPS/PS Kanji model: 100V machine only)
[8A] Color iR256 MB Expansion RAM (if 100V, optional)
[8B] Color iR512MB Expansion RAM (if 100V, optional)
[9] SEND Expansion Kit-B2/B2U (dongle for functional expansion)
[10] iR Security Kit-A2P/A2U
[11] USB Application Interface Board-C1
[12] Workplase Gateway
1-2
Chapter 1
1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories
0006-8352
T-1-2
GDI-UFR printing
->
- UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2
LIPS printing
->

- PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS)-A2
LIPS/PS kanji printing
->

- PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS/PS kanji)-A2
Transmitting
->
- SEND Expansion Kit-B2U/B2P

- Image Conversion Board-A2
Faxing
->
- Super G3 FAx Board-M2

Local printing
->
- USB Interface Board-A3

LIPS printing +
->
transmitting

- iR256MB Expansion RAM or iR512MB
Expansion RAM
LISP printing + faxing
->

- Super G3 Fax Board-M2
- iR256MB Expansion RAM or iR512MB
Expansion RAM
LIPS/PS kanji printing +
->
transmitting

- PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS/PS Kanji)-A2
- iR512MB Expansion RAM
LISP/PS kanji printing +
->
faxing

- PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS/PS kanji)-A2
- Super G3 Fax Board-M2
- iR512MB Expansion RAM
MEAP (authentication
->
iR256MB Expansion RAM
->
iR512MB Expansion RAM
function only)
MEAP (various application
operation)
1-3
Chapter 1
1.1.4 Overview of Printing/Transmitting Accessories
0006-8332
The following gives an outline of individual accessories; for details, see the descriptions found in subsequent
chapters:
1) UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2
Adds GDI-UFR printing functions and scanning functions associated with ScanGear.
2) PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS)-A2
Adds LIPS printing functions. The Kt does not come with a PDL board, requiring a UFR board.
3) Color iR256MB Expansion RAM
Required when transmitting/faxing functions are added.
4) Color iR512MB Expansion RAM
Required when MEAP functions are added.
5) SEND Expansion Kit-B2P/B2U
Adds transmitting functions. It requires setup work using a PC. Select B2P (for use of a PC parallel port) or B2U (for
use of a PC USB port).
6) Image Conversion Board-A2
Addition of transmitting/faxing functions requires the Image Conversion Board-A2.
7) USB Interface Board-A3
Adds printing functions through local connection of PC (USB). Requires a UFR board.
8) Super G3 Fax Board-M2
Adds G3 fax functions.
9) PDL Expansion (LISP/PS kanji)-A2
Adds LIPS printing/PS kanji printing functions. This board does not come with a PDL board, requiring a UFR board.
10) USB Application Interface Board-C1
Connects a USB device for MEAP applications. It is an interface board.
11) Workplase Gateway
Adds security functions for image data and server functions.
1-4
Chapter 1
1.2 Product Specifications

1.2.1 Names of Parts
1.2.1.1 External View
0000-4257
F-1-3
T-1-3
[1] Rear left cover
[10] Delivery cover (2)
[2] Copyboard cover
[11] Lower left cover
[3] Reader front cover
[12] Rear left cover (lower)
[4] Upper left cover (small)
[13] Delivery cover (1)
[5] Center delivery tray
[14] Rear left cover (upper)
[6] Control panel
[15] Upper left cover
[7] Front cover
[16] Upper cover
[8] Cassette 1
[17] Inside upper cover
[9] Cassette 2
1-5
Chapter 1
F-1-4
T-1-4
[1] Reader right cover
[8] Right cover
[2] Copyboard glass
[9] Front right cover
[3] Reader rear cover
[10] Manual feed tray
[4] Upper right cover (small)
[11] Manual feed unit cover
[5] Upper rear cover
[12] Model right cover
[6] Lower rear cover
[13] Upper right cover
[7] Rear right cover
1-6
Chapter 1
1.2.1.2 Cross Section
[1]
[2]
0000-4258
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[46]
[7]
[45]
[8]
[44]
[43]
[42]
[41]
[40]
[9]
[10]
[39]
[38]
[37]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[36]
[35]
[34]
[19]
[33]
[20]
[32] [31] [30] [29] [28][27][26] [25] [24]
[23]
[22]
[21]
F-1-5
T-1-5
[1] No. 3 mirror
[24] Registration lower roller
[2] No. 2 mirror
[25] Duplex roller 3
[3] No. 1 mirror
[26] Secondary transfer external roller
[4] Scanning lamp
[27] Secondary transfer internal roller
[5] CCD unit
[6] Toner container
[29] Intermediate transfer belt tension roller
[7] Laser unit
[30] Cassette 2
[8] Primary transfer roller
[31] Transfer cleaning unit
[9] Registration detention unit
[32] Fixing lower roller (pressure roller)
[10] Manual feed pickup tray unit
[33] Fixing upper roller (fixing roller)
1-7
Chapter 1
[11] Manual feed roller
[12] Pre-registration roller
[35] Internal delivery roller
[13] Manual feed separation roller
[36] Face-up delivery roller
[14] Re-pick up roller
[37] Delivery vertical path roll
[15] Pickup vertical path roller
[38] Delivery vertical path roller 2
[16] Feed roller
[39] Photopositive drum
[17] Pickup roller
[40] Developing cylinder
[18] Separation roller
[41] Drum unit
[19] Pickup assembly 1
[42] Charging roller
[20] Pickup assembly 2
[21] Cassette 1
[44] Delivery path roll
[45] Intermediate transfer belt
[23] Registration upper roller
[46] Face-down delivery roller 1
1.2.2 Using the Machine

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power
0000-4259
The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. Normally, the
machine is supplied with power when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than when it is in power save
mode, low power mode, or sleep mode).
F-1-6
1-8
Chapter 1
T-1-6
[1] Control panel power switch
[3] Main power switch
[2] Main power lamp
Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated.
(The machine is accessing its HDD.) Otherwise, the HDD can go out of order (E602).
Starting up. Please wait.
F-1-7
1.2.2.2 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch
0000-4260
Be sure to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch.
- When the Printer Is in Operation/Fax Data Is Being Sent/Received

Be sure that the Execution/Memory lamp on the control panel is OFF before touching the main power switch.
(Otherwise, the data being processed can be lost.)
1-9
Chapter 1
Execution/Memory
ID
Error
F-1-8
- When Downloading Is Under Way

Never turn off the main power switch or the control panel power switch.
(If you turn off the main power switch while downloading is under way, the machine may fail to operate.)
ON
/O
FF
F-1-9
1-10
Chapter 1
1.2.2.3 Control Panel
0000-4261
F-1-10
T-1-7
[1] Image contrast adjusting dial
[10] User mode key
[2] Counter check key
[11] Numeric keypad
[3] Power Save Key
[12] Execute/Memory lamp
[4] Control panel power switch
[13] Error lamp
[5] Touch pen holder
[14] ID key
[6] Clip holder
[15] Clear key
[7] Touch panel
[16] Main power lamp
[8] Reset key
[17] Start key
[9] Help key
[18] Stop key
1-11
Chapter 1
1.2.3 User Mode Items

1.2.3.1 Common Settings
0006-0742
*Factory default.
T-1-8
Mode
Description
initial functions
*copy, fax, box, SEND

use it to switch the System Status screen to
the Initial screen.
(*ON/OFF)
use it to give priority to [device] of the
System Status screen for display.
(*ON/OFF)
function after auto clear
*return, do not return
enable/disable buzzer
input correct: *ON/OFF

input incorrect: ON/*OFF
supply alert: ON/*OFF
alert: *ON/OFF
job end: *ON/OFF
residual original: ON/*OFF
priority on text/photo upon selection of auto
text, *photo
color
inch input
enable inch input (ON/*OFF; ON if 120 V)
paper type registration upon cassette auto
copier, printer, box, fax, other
selection
registration paper type
yes
change power save mode
*-10%/- 5%/- 0%, immediate recovery
power consumption in sleep state
*little, much
select special tray
use finisher tray for: copier, box, printer,

fax, other
priority on print
copy: *1, 2, 3; printer: 1, *2, 3; fax/box/

other: 1, 2, *3
register standard mode for manually fed
enable/disable standard mode for manually
paper
fed
paper (ON/*OFF)
1-12
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
standard mode for local print
paper select (*auto), print count (*1), sorter

(*sort/group/stable), double-sided print
(*off/on),
file delete after print (*off/on), print merge
(*off/on)
switch language of display
ON/*OFF
reverse screen color
ON/*OFF
between-jobs shift
*ON/OFF
JPEG compression rate at remote scan
high, *average, low
gamma value at remote scan
g1.0/g1.4/*g1.8/g2.2
initialize common settings
*yes, no
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings
0005-9694
* factory settings.
T-1-9
Mode
Description
set date/time
if fax is installed (10-digit number)
auto sleep time
10 min, *15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 40 min, 50 min, 1 hr, 90 min,

2 hr to 3 hr to 4 hr
change auto clear time
0: none; 1 to 9 min (*2 min)
set weekly timer
00:00 to 23:59 (1-min increments)
shift to low-power consumption
10 min, *15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 40 min, 50 min, 1 hr, 90 min,
mode
2 hr to 3 hr to 4 hr
1.2.3.3 Adjustments and Cleaning
0005-9696
*factory settings.
T-1-10
Mode
Description
zoom fine adjust
-1.0 to+1.0%: 0.1% intervals,*H270%
center binding staple edging
yes
center binding position change
(A3, 11x17)/B4/(A4R, LTRR)
1-13
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
auto gradation correction
plain paper (full correction/quick

correction), heavy paper (full correction/
quick correction)
density correction
copy/box, black-and-white transmission,

color transmission; density 5 settings each
cleaning inside machine
yes
cleaning of feeder
yes
1.2.3.4 Report Generation
0000-4265
*factory settings.
T-1-11
Mode
Description
setup>transmission
transmission results report

(*only if error, ON, OFF)
communication control report>auto print at
100 communications (*ON/OFF), print at
specified time (*ON/OFF)
setup>fax
fax transmission results report (*only if

error, ON, OFF)
fax communication control report>auto print
at 40 communications (*ON/OFF), print at
specified time (*ON/OFF)
fax reception results report
(only if error, ON, *OFF)
fax box reception report
(*ON, OFF)
list print>transmission
destinations list
user data list
1-14
list print>fax
user data list
list print>network
user data list
Chapter 1
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings
0000-4266
*factory settings.
T-1-12
Mode
Description
set system administrator info
yes
group ID control
register ID, control count; ON/OFF
set communication control
fax settings, system box settings
enable/disable remote UI
*ON/OFF
limit destinations list
ID in destinations table,
access No. in destinations table
set device info
device name, site of installation
set network
TCP/IP setup (IP address/DNS/PING

command/SINS/LPD/RAW/IPP print (*off);
HTTP (*on); IP address settings range
NetWare setup
AppleTalk setup
SMB settings
SNMB settings
special port settings (*ON/OFF)
spool function (ON/*OFF)
start-up time settings
(0 to 300 sec; *60 sec)
e-mail/i-fax
set transfer
yes
auto online/offline shift
auto online shift (ON/*OFF)

auto offline shift (ON/*OFF)
register to LDAP server
yes
switch limits to functions with control
*partial limits, entire limits
screen setup
single/standard
1-15
Chapter 1
1.2.3.6 Copier Specifications Settings
0000-4267
*factory settings.
T-1-13
Mode
Description
set preference key 1/2
w/ function, *no settings
auto sort
*ON/OFF
priority on image orientation
ON/*OFF
indicate copy wait time
ON/*OFF
enable auto vertical/horizontal
*ON/OFF
rotation
change standard mode
register/initialize
initialize copier ecifications settings
Yes, No
1.2.3.7 Transmission/Reception Specifications Settings

* factory settings.
T-1-14
Mode
Description
common setup>transmission
register sending party name (100 max.)
function setup
register user abbreviation
for FTP transmission, permit non-ASCII code (on/*off)
clear error file (*ON/OFF)
JPEG compression rate (high/*standard/low)
process transfer error file
(print always, store/print, *OFF)
number of retries (0 to 5; *3)
transmission function standard mode change>read mode,
file contraction
routine button registration>registration, name
PDF (high compression) image level>text, photo mode;
photo mode
set initial display of transmission screen (default task
button, one-touch button, *new destination)
record source of transmission
(*attach, do not attach)
1-16
0000-4268
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
sound of transmission (*add/do not add)>location of
indication (inside of image/outside of image), telephone
number mark (*fax/tel), communication mode (G3-G4/
*G3 only)
initialize transmission function settings
common setup>reproduction
record double-sided (ON/*OFF)
function setup
cassette selection>switch A, B, C, D
image resolution>image resolution (*on/off), reduction
mode (*auto/fixed), fixing mode reduction rate (97%/95%/
90%/75%), reduction direction (vertical and horizontal/
*vertical)
record 2-on-1 (ON/*OFF)
record reception info (attach, *do not attach)
fax setup>basic registration
user telephone number registration>telephone number

line type selection (120, 230V: *push tone/dial, 10PPS;
100V: *20PPS/10PPS/push tone)
volume control>alarm (0-8; *4), communication volume
(0-8; *4)
fax setup>transmission function
ECM transmission (*ON/OFF)
setup
pause length set (*1-15 sec; *4-11 sec; 3-6 sec)
auto redial (*on/off)>number of redials (100V: 1-15 (*2)/
230V: 1-10 (*2), redial interval (2-99 min; *2), redial at
transmission error (1 page and error page/all pages/off)
fax setup>reception function setup
ECM reception (*ON/OFF)
1.2.3.8 Box Specifications Settings
0000-4269
T-1-15
Mode
Description
set up/register user box
box selection (0-99), box name registration ,

ID No. (0 to 9999999), file auto deletion (0/
1/2/3/6/12 hr; 1/2/3/7/30 days; 3 days), reset
set standard mode for reading

set/register fax box
register, initialize
box selection (0-49), box name registration,
ID No. (0 to 999999), reset
1-17
Chapter 1
1.2.3.9 Printer Specifications Settings
0000-4270
Making settings if the machine is not equipped with any accessory.

* factory settings.
T-1-16
Mode
Description
set specifications
number of copies (1 to 2000: *1)

double-sided (double-sided, *single sided)
pickup>default paper size, default paper type, paper size
replacement (*yes/no)
print adjustment>super smooth (*yes/no), toner density (YMCK
density 8 settings), toner saving (yes/*no)
layout>bind position (longer side/shorter side), binding margin
(*0), vertical position (*0), horizontal position (*0)
secure print deletion time (1 hr/2/3/6/12/24)
time-out
(*time-out time (5 to 300 sec; 15)/no)
post-RIP printing (yes/*no)
sorter
(no/sort/rotation sort/rotation group)
transparency interleaf
(*disable, use blank paper, use print paper)
set reception function
color mode
(common settings)
(*auto switchover, full-color, monochrome)

gradation setup/gradation (*standard/smooth 1/smooth 2),
application to graphics (*yes)/application to image (*yes)
halftone selection>text (resolution/gradation/*error diffusion),
graphics (resolution/gradation/*error diffusion), image
(resolution/gradation/*error diffusion)
compression image output
(*output, error indication)
initialize printer settings
utility
1-18
initialize printer
Chapter 1
1.2.3.10 Destinations Table Specifications Settings
0000-4271
T-1-17
Mode
Description
register destination
yes
register name of destination
yes
register one-touch button
yes
1.2.4 User Maintenance

1.2.4.1 Cleaning
0000-4272
- Face of Copyboard, Back of Copyboard Cover

Instruct the user to clean the face of the copyboard glass and the back of the copyboard cover at least once a month.
Cleaning Procedure
Using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent (well-wrung), clean the face of the copyboard
glass [1] and the back of the copyboard cover [2]; then, dry wipe the surfaces.
F-1-11
F-1-12
1-19
Chapter 1
1.2.4.2 Inspection
0000-4273
- Checking the Leakage Breaker

Instruct the user to check the leakage breaker periodically (once or twice a month), and keep a record of the work.
Inspection Procedure
1) Turn on the main power switch.
2) Press the test button [1] of the breaker with the tip of a ball-point pen [2] or the like.
3) Check to see that the breaker switch shits to the OFF side and the power goes OFF.
F-1-13
4) Turn off the main power switch.
5) Shift the breaker switch [1] to the ON side.
F-1-14
6) Turn on the main power switch.
1.2.5 Safety
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser System
0000-4274
Laser Light in General

Laser light can prove to be very harmful to the human body, requiring full care.
About the Machine Laser System
The machinelaser optical system is sealed inside a protective housing and external covers, and the machine is
1-20
Chapter 1
constructed to prevent leakage of laser light outside it. As such, the light cannot escape the machine as long as the
machine is used for the operations for which it is designed.
1.2.5.2 Regulations by the Center for Devices and Radiational Heath(CDRH)
0000-4275
The Center for Devices and Radiation Heath (CDRH) of the United States put into effect regulations drawn up for
laser products. These regulations apply to laser products that are produced on August 1, 1976, and thereafter, and ban
the sale of laser products without certification indicated by a label obtained from the organization..
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Assembly
0000-4276
Points to Note When Servicing the Area Around the Laser Optical System
- Do not put an object with a high reflectance (e.g., screwdriver) into the path of the laser light.
- Do not wear a watch or ring during work. (They can reflect the laser light, causing damage to your eyes.)
The machinelaser light is red in color, and the covers that can reflect the light are identified with a label [1]. Pay
special attention whenever servicing an area behind these covers.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-1-15
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner
0000-4277
About the MachineToner

The machine toner is non-toxic, consisting of plastic and iron materials with a few amount of dye.
Do not throw toner into fire. It can explode.
1-21
Chapter 1
Toner Stains
1. If your skin or clothing has come into contact with toner, remove it with dry tissue, and then wash with water.
2. Do not use warm water; otherwise, the toner will become jell-like, permanently fusing with the fibers of the cloth
and resisting removal.
3. Do not bring toner into contact with vinyl material, as they can easily react.
1.2.6 Product Specifications

1.2.6.1 Type and Functions
0005-9070
Copyboard
Flat-bed
Body
Desk-top
Photosensitive medium
OPC drum
Exposure method
Laser exposure
Charging method
Roller charging
Development method
Bk
Cassette pickup method
Separation retard
Multifeeder pickup method
Simple retard
Transfer method
Intermediate transfer belt
Transfer method (primary
by charging roller
30.6 mm dia. (4 pc.)
Dry, 2-component Color
Dry, 2-component
transfer)
Transfer method (secondary
by charging roller
transfer)
Separation method
Curvature separation (static eliminator)
Drum cleaning method
None
Trasnsfer cleaning method
Blade (equalizing operation used)
Fixing method
Roller fixing
Delivery method
Face-down, face-up
Warm-up time
At power-on - 6 min or less (at 20 deg C room

temperature) Return from low-power mode - 30 sec
(Bk mode only)
Print area
Maximum image guarantee area 301 x 452 mm

Maximum print area 305 x 452 mm
Printing resolution
read resolution: 600 x 600 dpi write resolution: 9600

(equivalent) x 600 dpi
1-22
Toner level detection function
Yes
Drum wear detection function
Yes
Chapter 1
1.2.7 Function List

1.2.7.1 Print Speed
0006-3356
First Print Time

T-1-18
Unit: sec
A4, plain (64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2)
Full-color
Monochrome
12.8 (simplex model)
9.5 (simplex model)
13.1 (duplex model)
9.8 (duplex model)
Printing Speed
- Plain Paper Mode (64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2)
T-1-19
unit: prints/min
Paper size
Cassette,
Manual
Side paper
Face-down,
Face-up,
single-
feeder,
deck, single-
double-sided
double-
sided
single-sided
sided
B5
32
19
32
13.5
10.25
A5R
16
16
7.5
A4
32
19
32
13.5
10.25
STMT-R
16
16
LTR
32
19
13.5
10.25
B5R
16
16
7.5
LTR-R
16
16
7.5
A4R
16
16
7.5
LGL
16
14
6.5
5.5
B4
16
14
6.5
5.5
A3
16
13
6.5
5.5
279mm x 432mm
16
13
6.5
5.5
15
13
6.25
5.5
A5
16
320mm x 450mm
13
sided
(11 x 17)
305mm x 457mm
(12 x 18)
(12.6 x 17.7)
1-23
Chapter 1
- Thick Paper Mode (more than 105 g/m2)

T-1-20
unit: prints/min
Paper size
Cassette,
Manual feeder,
Side paper deck,
Face-down,
Face-up,
single-sided
single-sided
single-sided
double-sided
double-sided
B5
16
9.5
16
6.75
5.13
A5R
16
9.5
6.75
5.13
A4
16
9.5
16
6.75
5.13
STMT-R
16
9.5
6.75
5.13
LTR
16
9.5
16
6.75
5.13
B5R
11
3.75
3.5
LTR-R
11
3.75
3.5
A4R
11
3.75
3.5
LGL
9.5
3.25
2.75
B4
9.5
3.25
2.75
A3
6.5
3.25
2.75
279mm x 432mm
6.5
3.25
2.75
7.5
6.5
3.25
2.75
A5
9.5
Jpn postcard
9.5
Tab paper
320mm x 450mm
9.5
(11 x 17)
305mm x 457mm
(12 x 18)
(12.6 x 17.7)
- Color Transparency Film

T-1-21
unit: prints/min
Paper size
1-24
Cassette, single-sided
Manual feeder, single-sided
B5
A4
LTR
LTR-R
A4R
Chapter 1
- Monochrome, transparency
T-1-22
unit: prints/min
Paper size
Cassette, single-sided
Manual feeder, single-sided
B5
A4
LTR
LTR-R
A4R
1.2.7.2 Print Size
0006-3390
T-1-23
Cassette
Manual Feed
Side Paper
Cassette
Duplexing
Tray
Deck
Pedestal
Unit*2
<Paper Size>
A5R
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
B5
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
B5R
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
A4
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
A4R
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
B4
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
A3
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
LGL
yes
no
no
yes
yes
LTR
yes
no
no
yes
yes
LTR-R
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
STMT-R
yes
no
no
yes
yes
postcard
no
yes
no
no
no
279x432[mm]
(11x17)
305x457[mm]
(12x18)
320x450[mm]
(12.6x17.7)
1-25
Chapter 1
T-1-24
Manual
Side Paper
Cassette
Duplexing
Feed Tray
Deck
Pedestal
Unit*2
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
bond paper *1
no
yes
no
no
yes
gloss paper*1
no
yes
no
no
no
label paper*1
no
yes
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
no
tracing paper *1
no
yes
no
no
no
tab paper*1
no
yes
no
no
no
postcard
no
yes
no
no
no
2-pane postcard
no
yes
no
no
no
4-pane postcard
no
yes
no
no
no
Cassette
<Paper Type>
light paper (up
to 64 g/m2)
plain paper (64
to 105 g/m2)
heavy paper (up
to 209 g/2)
recycled paper
transparency*1
(A4/LTR)
Japanese
paper*1
*1: support limited to single-sided printing.

*2: support limited on iR C3200.
1-26
Chapter 1
1.2.7.3 Others
0006-3415
T-1-25
Operation
Temperature range
15 to 32.5 deg C
Humidity range
25 to 75%
environment
Atmospheric pressure range
810.6 to 1013.3 hpa

(0.8 to 1.0 atm)
Operating noise
Power supply
In operation
74 dB or less
In standby
50 dB or less
100 V
120 V
230 V
Power consumption
maximum
1500 W or less (if equipped with cassette

pedestal)
In standby
100V:344W*
120V:273W*
230V:350W*
*When equipped with all accessories.
Ozone
Dimensions
Weight
Maximum
0.05 ppm or less
Average
0.02 ppm or less
Width (W)
620 mm
Depth (D)
786 mm
Height (H)
1040 mm (including cassette pedestal)
Total
118.5 kg (including duplex unit; excluding

toner container, drum
unit, cable)
Printer unit
105.5 kg (including duplex unit)
The descriptions are subject to change for product improvement.
1-27
Chapter 1
1.2.7.4 Reader Unit Specifications
0006-3419
T-1-26
Copyboard
Fixed
Original size detection
Feed sensors, reading CCD; copyboard cover angle
Original type
Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)
Maximum original size
297 mm x 432 mm
Reproduction ratio
100%, Reduce I (1:0.250), Reduce II (1:0.500), Reduce III

(1:0.611), Reduce IV (1:0.707), Reduce V (1:0.816), Reduce VI
(1:0.865);
Enlarge I (1:1.154), Enlarge II (1:1.224), Enlarge III (1:1.414),
Enlarge IV (1:2.000), Enlarge V (1:4.000);
Zoom (1:0.250 to 4.000; 25% to 400%: in 1% increments)
Reading resolution
Main scanning direction 600 dpi

Sub scanning direction 600 dpi
Number of gradations
Reading maximum
256
Main scanning direction 0 to 2 mm against 297 mm
Sub scanning direction 0 to 2 mm against 420 mm
Source of light
Xenon lamp
Dimensions
Width (W) 585 mm

Depth (D) 543 mm
Height (H) 87 mm
Weight
12.5 kg
Option
Anti-condensation heater (100/230V model only)
The descriptions are subject to change for product improvement.
1-28
Chapter 2
Installation
Contents
Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Site Space ................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Sequence of Installing Accessories ............................................................................................................ 2-5
2.1.4 Connecting the Power Cables ..................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2 Unpacking and Installation ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.1 Checking the Contents ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.2 Configuring the Cassette ............................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.3 Connecting the Reader Unit ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.4 Removing the Fixing Members from the Printer ....................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.5 Installing the Reader Unit ......................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.6 Installing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Unit ............................................................................ 2-16
2.2.7 Connecting the Power Cord ..................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.8 Mounting the Transfer Cleaning Unit ...................................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.9 Fitting the Toner Container ...................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.2.10 Fitting the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.2.11 Connecting to the Network ..................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ....................................................................................................... 2-22
2.3.1 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................................................................ 2-22
2.3.2 Using PING .............................................................................................................................................. 2-22
2.3.3 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address ....................................................................................... 2-23
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network .......................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network ................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.2 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable ...................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.3 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address ............................................................................................ 2-24
2.4.4 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address ......................................................................................... 2-24
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations ..................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.5.1 Checking the Images/Operations .............................................................................................................. 2-25
2.5.2 PASCAL Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.3 Preventing Anti-Condensation ................................................................................................................. 2-29
2.6 Relocating the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.6.1 Preparing for Relocation .......................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.7 Installing the Card Reader ............................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.7.3 Making Settings If Net Spot Accountant (NSA) Is Used ......................................................................... 2-33
2.8 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ...................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.8.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ............................................................................................................... 2-34
2.9 Installing the Original Tray ............................................................................................................................. 2-43
2.10 Installing the Key Switch Unit-A1 ................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.10.3 Making Checks After Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-47
2.11 Installing the Reader Heater .......................................................................................................................... 2-48
Contents
2.12 Installing the Cassette Heater ........................................................................................................................ 2-59

2.12.3 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a Copier ........................................................................................ 2-61
2.12.4 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1 .............................................................. 2-63
2.13 Replacing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................... 2-64
2.13.1 Preparing for the Work ........................................................................................................................... 2-64
Chapter 2
2.1 Making Pre-Checks

2.1.1 Selecting the Site
0000-4363
Select the site of installation while keeping the following in mind; if possible, visit the user's premises before the
delivery of the machine:
1. The place must provide a source of power that is as rated (10%) and that may be used exclusively by the machine;
it also must provide a terminal for grounding.
2. The place must fall within the following ranges of temperature and humidity. The site must not be near a water
faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator.
Humidity (%RH)
80
75
60
40
25
20
10
0
(32)
10
(50)
15
(59)
20
(68)
27.5 30 C
(81.5)(86) (F)
Temperature
F-2-1
3. The site must not be near a source of fire or subject to dust or ammonium gas. If exposed to direct rays of the sun,
provide curtains.
4. The amount of ozone generated by the machine in operation is not of a level that would harm the health of
individuals around it. Some, however, may find its order unpleasant, requiring good ventilation for the work
place.
5. Be sure that the machine's feet will remain in contact with the floor and the machine will remain level.
6. Be sure that the machine will be at least 10 cm from all walls and there will be ample space for using the machine.
2-1
Chapter 2
100 mm min.
1110 mm
500 mm min.
500 mm
min.
1225 mm
500 mm
min.
F-2-2
Without Options
100 mm min.
1120 mm
500 mm min.
500 mm
min.
2000 mm
500 mm
min.
F-2-3
2-2
Chapter 2
With a Finisher-N1 and Side Paper Deck-P1 Installed

100 mm
min.
1120 mm
500 mm
min.
500 mm
min.
2210 mm
500 mm
min.
F-2-4
With a Finisher-N1/Saddle Finisher-N2 and Side Paper Deck-P1 Installed
7. The site must be well ventilated. Take care so that the machine will not be installed near a vent from which air is
taken into the room.
2.1.2 Site Space
0006-4577
1) Be sure the will be 10 cm or more between the machine and any wall and there will be enough space for operating
the machine.
100 mm min.
1110 mm
500 mm min.
500 mm
min.
1225 mm
500 mm
min.
F-2-5
2-3
Chapter 2
With Accessories Installed
100 mm min.
1120 mm
500 mm min.
500 mm
min.
2000 mm
500 mm
min.
F-2-6
With a Finisher-M1, Side Paper Deck-P1, and NEW Controller-A1 Installed
100 mm
min.
1120 mm
500 mm
min.
500 mm
min.
2-4
2210 mm
500 mm
min.
Chapter 2
F-2-7
With a Finisher-N1/Saddle Finisher-N2, Side Paper Deck-P1, and NE Controller-A1 Installed
200 mm min.
1110mm
500 mm min.
500 mm
1225 mm
500 mm
min.
F-2-8
With a PS Print Server Unit-C1 Installed
2) Be sure the room is well ventilated. Be sure also that the machine is not placed near the air vent of the room.
2.1.3 Sequence of Installing Accessories
0006-4594
Memo,
If you are installing the machine and its accessories at the same item, be sure to go through the work in the following
sequence:
1. Cassette Heater Kit-A1 (to the pedestal)
2. 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1, or Plain Pedestal-C1
3. Machine
4. Anti-condensation heater
5. DADF-K1, or copyboard cover
6. Cassette Heater Kit-A1 (to the machine)
7. Card Reader-D1
8. NE Controller-A1
9. Deck heater
10. Side Paper Deck-P1
11. Key Switch Unit-A1
12. Original holder
13. Copy Tray-H1
14. Finisher-M1, Finisher-N1, or Saddle Finisher-N2
2-5
Chapter 2
2.1.4 Connecting the Power Cables
0006-4602
When connecting accessories to the machine, be sure to connect the power cables as indicated:
When connecting the pedestal, paper deck, finisher, ADF, anti-condensation heater, and PS print server unit.
DADF-K1
Inlet
included with anti-condensation heater)
PS Print Server
Unit-C1
Inlet
Outlet1
Outlet2
Outlet3
Inlet
2-Cassette Pedestal-X1
included with
PS Print Server Unit-C1)
included with machine)
included with pedestal)
F-2-9
2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work
0000-4364
Keep the following in mind when installing the machine:
1. If the machine is brought from a cold to warm place, condensation can occur in its optical system, laser unit, or
pickup/feeder unit, leading to image faults. If such is the case, leave the machine alone without unpacking for 1 hr
or more before starting the work.
The term condensation refers to the phenomenon that occurs on a metal surface when it is brought from a cold to
warm location as the result of rapidly cooled vapor. It is seen as droplets of water on the metal surface.
2. The machine weighs about 120 kg (including the reader unit). Be sure to work in a group of 4.
2-6
Chapter 2
2.2
Unpacking
Installation
2.2.1
Checking
and
the
Contents
0006-4619
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that

none of the following is missing:
F-2-10
T-2-1
[1]
[2]
Drum unit (Y, M, C, K) 1 pc.
1 pc.
each
each
Toner cartridge (Y, M, C, K)
1 pc.
[10]
Cable clamp (round)
6 pc.
[11]
Cable clamp (angular)
2 pc.
each
[3]
Transfer cleaning unit
1 pc.
[12]
Size plate label
2 pc.
[4]
Secondary transfer outside
1 pc.
[13]
User's Manual
1 pc.
1 pc.
[14]
Installation Procedure
1 pc.
roller unit
[5]
Delivery tray
(100-V model only)

[6]
Power cord (for wall outlet)
1 pc.
[15]
QR Sheet (100-V model
1 pc.
only)
[7]
Touch pen
1 pc.
[16]
Service Book (100-V
1 pc.
model only)
[8]
Grounding cord (100-V
1 pc.
[17]
CD-ROM (iR C3200 only)
1 pc.
model only)
[9]
Reader controller
1 pc.
communication cable
2.2.2
Configuring
the
Cassette
all tape; then, detach the holding plate [1].

[1]
0000-4365
1) Open the shipping box, and remove the plastic

sheets.
- If you are installing the pedestal at the same time, be
sure to follow the instructions on the sheet that
comes with the pedestal.
2) Remove all tape from the machine.
F-2-11
3) Slide out the upper and lower cassettes, and remove
2-7
Chapter 2
4) Push the release button of the cassette, and slide out

the cassette to the front.
5) Find out the size of paper used by the user, and set
the slide guide [1] of each cassette to suit the paper
[1]
size.
[2]
F-2-14
8) Put paper in the cassette, and put the cassette back
into the machine.
[1]
STMT R
LTR
LTR R
LGL
11X17
2.2.3
Connecting
the
Reader Unit
F-2-12
6) Pick the levers of the side guide plate [1] and the
0000-4366
1) Remove the 2 mirror fixing screws [1] from the left

side of the reader unit. (Be sure to store them away
for possible future transport.)
rear guide plate [2], and move them to the

appropriate index.
[1]
[2]
F-2-15
2) Connect the reader controller communication cable
[1] that comes with the machine.
[1]
F-2-13
7) Attach the size label [2] to the cassette size plate
[1]; then, fit it to the cassette.
2-8
Chapter 2
2.2.4 Removing the Fixing

Members from the Printer
0006-4646
1) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] from the

left side of the machine.
F-2-16
3) Using 5 included round cable clamps [1], fix the
reader unit power cable [2] in place; then, using
another round cable clamp [1] and 2 angular cable
clamps, fix the reader controller communication
cable [4] in place.
F-2-19
2) Shift down the fixing roller releasing lever [1] to
unlock the fixing roller; then, remove the releasing
spacers [2] from the front and the rear. (These
members will no longer be used.)
F-2-17
F-2-20
F-2-18
2-9
Chapter 2
F-2-23
F-2-21
3) Shift the fixing roller releasing lever [1] back to its
2) Remove the face cap [1]. (Save it for later.)
initial position, and push in the fixing/feeding

assembly.
F-2-24
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the inside cover
F-2-22
[2]. (Save it for later.)
2.2.5 Installing the Reader

Unit
0006-3756
If the machine comes as two separate units (printer

and reader), go through the following steps:
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the printer unit, and
detach the center delivery tray [2]. (Save all for
later.)
F-2-25
4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the upper right
cover (small) [2]. (Save the screw for later; put
away the cover.)
2-10
Chapter 2
Fit it so that the sheet [1] attached to the joint plate is

under the joint [2].
F-2-26
5) Remove the face cap [1], and remove the screw [2]
(1 each); then, detach the 2 small covers [3]. (Put
away the cap; save the screws for later; put away
the cover.)
F-2-29
Wrong (The sheet is above the joint.)
Place the included joint plate (front)/(rear) [1] on the
front/rear joint.
F-2-27
F-2-30
6) Fit the included joint [1] in the hole in the machine's

top as shown. (2 locations at front and rear)
(front)
F-2-31
F-2-28
7)
(rear)
2-11
Chapter 2
8) For both front and rear, secure the joint grounding

spring [2] using the screw [1] removed from the
10) Secure the reader connection unit [1] using the 2

included screws [2].
small cover (for the front, tighten over the plate);

then, secure the joint plate (front/rear) [4] using the
2 included screws [3] (1 each at front and rear).
F-2-35
F-2-32
11) Then, use the included 2 screws [1] to further

secure it in place.
(front)
F-2-36
F-2-33
12) Shift down the arm [1] of the reader connection

unit by 90 deg C; then, hook it on the protrusion [2]
sticking out of the machine.
(rear)
9) Where the upper right cover (small) has been
removed, fit the positioning pin [A] for the bottom
of the reader connection unit [1].
F-2-37
F-2-34
2-12
Chapter 2
F-2-41
F-2-38
15) Unpack the reader unit.

16) Place the reader unit on the printer unit 7 to 8 cm
When folding the arm, be sure that it is under the
displaced to the side (temporarily).
protrusion.
7 to 8cm
F-2-42
F-2-39
13) Attach the inside cover using the 2 previously
removed screws.
17) Fit the included supports into the 2 holes in the

bottom of the reader unit; then, tighten them firmly
using a screwdriver so that they are fully fitted with
the joints.
F-2-40
F-2-43
14) Attach the center delivery tray using the 2
previously removed screws.
2-13
Chapter 2
20) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper left
cover [2]. (Save all for later.)
F-2-44
18) Open the delivery cover [1].
F-2-47
21) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader
left cover [2]. (Save all for later.)
F-2-45
19) Remove the face cap [1], and remove the 2 screws
[2]; then, detach the upper left cover (small) [3].
(Save all for later.)
F-2-48
22) Hook the reader unit retainer [1] on the hole in the
reader unit; then, while pushing it down from
above, secure it in place using the 2 included screws
[2].
F-2-46
F-2-49
2-14
Chapter 2
25) Attach the reader left cover using the 2 previously

removed screws.
F-2-50
F-2-53
23) Bend and remove the 2 claws [1] found on the top
of the removed upper left cover; then, attach them
26) Remove the 2 mirror fixing screws [1] from the
in place using the 2 previously removed screws.
left side of the reader unit. (Store away the removed
(Put away the claws.)
mirror fixing screws for later, i.e., for possible

relocation of the machine.)
F-2-51
24) Attach the upper left cover (small) using the 2
previously removed screws.
F-2-54
27) Lift the reader unit slightly, and push into the tip
of the positioning pin [1] into the hole [2] in the
reader unit.
F-2-52
F-2-55
2-15
Chapter 2
28) When the positioning pin [1] is fully in place,

secure it using the stepped screw [2].
2.2.6
Installing
Secondary
the
Transfer
Outside Roller Unit
0006-4664
Do not touch the roller area of the secondary transfer

outside roller.
1) Open the package, and open the cardboard used to
F-2-56
29) Secure the wire [2] in place using the included RS
tightening stepped screw [1].
protect the secondary transfer outside roller unit.

2) Slide out the machine's fixing/feeding unit.
3) Picking the tabs at both ends of the secondary
transfer outside roller [1], place the roller in the
secondary transfer unit [2] inside the fixing/feeding
unit; then, push on both ends so that it fits in place. (Be
sure to force the roller until a click is heard.)
F-2-57
F-2-59
30) Using the screw [1] removed from the upper right
cover (small) and the included screw [2], secure the
reader connection unit cover [3] in place.
F-2-60
F-2-58
2-16
4) Close the fixing/feeding unit.
Chapter 2
2.2.7 Connecting the Power

Cord
2.2.8
0006-4669
Mounting
the
Transfer Cleaning Unit
0000-4367
- When Using a Pedestal
1) Open the front cover.
1) Fix the power cord that comes with the machine in
2) Turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever
place to the pedestal side using the included cable
[1] in the direction of the arrow.
clamp (small) [2]; then, connect one end to the

socket.
F-2-63
F-2-61
3) Remove the waste toner container [1].
2) Remove the screw [1] from under the power cord

slot on the pedestal side; then, fit the other end [A]
(hook-shaped) of the included grounding wire [2]
to the pedestal.
Grounding Members
- grounding terminal of power outlet
- iron rod buried 75 cm or more in ground
- terminal wired to specification
F-2-64
4)Remove the screw [1], and remove the dummy
transfer cleaning unit.
Be sure to store away the removed transfer cleaning

unit. You will need it when executing the following
service mode (for freeing the machine from
F-2-62
condensation as needed by the site of installation):

COPIER>FUNCTION> INSTALL>DRY-RT.
2-17
Chapter 2
2.2.9 Fitting the Toner

Container
0000-4368
Each toner container has its specific position

according to color (viewing from the control panel
and starting at the left, Y, M, C, and Bk). Do not
force the wrong container into place.
F-2-65
1) Take out the toner container (Y) from the packing
box.
5)
2) Take out the toner container (Y) from the packing

bag; then, leave it alone for a while until it becomes
Do not touch the tip of the transfer cleaning unit blade.
The area is coated with lubricant.
used to the ambient temperature.

3) Turn the fixing lever [1] of the toner container (Y)
90 clockwise.
Take out the included transfer cleaning unit from the

bag, and remove the packing material (cardboard).
6) Using the included binding screw [1], mount the
transfer cleaning unit [2]. (Be sure to match the
protrusion on the top of the waste toner feedscrew
case with the groove in the base of the transfer
cleaning unit.)
F-2-67
4) Holding the toner container (Y) [1] with both
hands, move it several times as if to rotate it.
F-2-66
7) Fit the waste toner container.
8) Shift back the intermediate transfer unit releasing
lever back to its initial position.
F-2-68
2-18
Chapter 2
5) Push it all the way in the direction of the arrow

indicated on the top edge.
F-2-71
F-2-69
4) Remove the anti-interference sheet [1].
6) Shift the fixing lever of the toner container (Y) back

to its initial position (by turning it counterclockwise
by 90).
7) Fit the rest of the toner containers (M, C, Bk) in the
same way.
2.2.10 Fitting the Drum

Unit
0000-4369
1) Take out the drum unit (Y) from the packing box.
2) Take out the drum unit (H) [1] from the packing
bag; then, take out the drying agent (silica gel).
F-2-70
F-2-72
[1] in the direction of the arrow.
F-2-73
3)
Do not remove the protective cover. It serves as a rail.

Pull out the pressure releasing hook [1] at the front
and the rear.
2-19
Chapter 2
6) Turn the open/close lever [2] of the cartridge cover

[1] clockwise by 90 to open the cartridge cover.
F-2-76
F-2-74
9)
7) Match the groove [1] found behind the machine's
cartridge cover and the protrusion [2] found on the
bottom of the protective cover; then, secure them in
place.
When pulling out the sealing tape, be sure to hold the

drum cartridge with your hand so that the cartridge
will not slip off.
Pull out the sealing tape [1].
F-2-75
8)
F-2-77
1. Push the drum cartridge in the direction of the arrow

[1] indicated on its top edge.
2. Store away the protective cover after fitting the
drum cartridge.
10) Fit the M, C, and Bk drum cartridges in the same

way.
11) Close the cartridge cover, and turn the open/close
lever clockwise to set it in place.
12) Shift the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever
While supporting the protective cover [2] with you

hand, push in the cartridge (Y) [3], thereby setting
it in place (Y, M, C, and Bk starting from left).
2-20
back to its initial position.

13) Close the front cover.
Chapter 2
2.2.11 Connecting to the

Network
0000-4371
Perform the following only if the model is equipped

with printer functions.
1) Turn off the control panel power switch.
2) Turn off the main power switch.
3) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn
on the main power switch.
4) Inform the user's system administrator that the
installation work is over, and ask him/her to set up
the machine for use on the user's network.
5) When network settings have been made, turn off
the control power switch, and then turn off and then
on the main power switch.
2-21
Chapter 2
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network

2.3.1 Checking the Connection to the Network
0000-8240
Perform the following work only if the machine is equipped with printer functions:
If the user's network is in a TCP/IP environment, use the PING function to make sure that the Ethernet PCB has been
installed properly and all network settings have been made properly.
If the user's network is in an IPX/SPX or AppleTalk environment, this check is not needed.
2.3.2 Using PING
0000-4373
Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to a network:

If the user's network environment is based on TCP/IP, use the PING function to see that the Ethernet PCB has been
correctly mounted and the network settings have been correctly made. If the user's network environment is based on
IPX/SPX or AppleTalk, on the other hand, you need not make a PING-based check.
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING.
2) Enter the IP address using the keypad on the control panel, and press the OK key.
3) Press the Start key.
- If the PING check is successful, the machine will indicate 'OK'; otherwise, it will indicate 'NG'.
Result(OK/NG)
<READY >
< 1/1 >
<NETWORK>
PING
0.
0.
0.
IP address input
+/-
F-2-78
2-22
OK
Chapter 2
2.3.3 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address
0000-4374
You can execute PING using a remote host address, thereby checking the connection to the network.
The term "remote address" refers to the IP address of a PC terminal connected to and operating in a TCP/IP network
environment to which the machine belongs.
1) Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the connection to the network using PING.
2) Check with the system administrator to find out the remote host address.
3) Enter the remote host address you obtained in PING.
4) If the indication is 'OK", the machine is correctly connected to the network.
5) If the indication is 'NG", the machine is not correctly connected to the network. Go through the following
troubleshooting steps:
2-23
Chapter 2
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network

2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network
0000-4375
Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to the network:
If the connection to the network is not correct, you may suspect the following:
a. poor connection between the network and the Ethernet PCB
b. wrong TCP/IP setting on the machine
c. faulty Ethernet PCB or poorly mounted PCB
d. faulty user network
2.4.2 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable
0000-4376
1) Check to see if the network cable is correctly connected to the Ethernet PCB.
- If the connector is normal, make a check using the PING function and a loopback address or a local host address.
- if not correct, try a check once again using a remote host address.
2.4.3 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address
0000-8237
A loopback address returns before it reaches the network PCB; therefore, executing PING using a loopback address
will enable you to find out whether the TCP/IP settings of the machine are correct.
1) Enter the loopback address (127.0.0.1) to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', check the TCP/IP settings of the machine once again, and then execute PING once
again.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', check the local host address.
2.4.4 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address
0000-8238
The local host address is the IP address of the machine; therefore, executing PING using the local host address, which
returns after it has reached the network PCB, enables you to find out if the network PCB is good or not.
1) Enter the IP address of the machine to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', make the following checks/corrections, and execute PING once again.
a. faulty IP address of the machine: check with the system administrator to find out if the IP address (and its settings)
assigned to the machine is correct.
b. poor connection of the network PC: check the connectors associated with the network PCB.
c. faulty network PCB: replace the network PCB.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report to the system administrator,
ask for corrective action.
2-24
Chapter 2
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations

2.5.1 Checking the Images/Operations
0000-4379
Be sure to put back the service book cover; turning on the machine's main power without doing so will cause a fault
associated with error code E020. (The protrusion [A] of the service book cover will push the segment identified as
[B] in the figure when the front cover is closed, thus opening/closing the shutter assembly of the pattern reader unit.)
F-2-79
Place a test sheet on the copyboard glass, and select the cassette 1/2 as the source of paper; then, make copies, and
check the images.
(If a 2-cassette pedestal is used, try cassette 3/4 to check images.)
- Check to be sure there is no abnormal noise.
- Check to be sure that the images are free of faults at all default reproduction ratios.
- Check to make sure that as many copies as are specified are made without a problem.
- Check to make sure that the margin (L2) to the front of the copies made with each of the cassettes as the source of
paper is 2.0 1.5 mm; otherwise, make the following adjustments:
1) Slide out the manual feed unit and the cassette 1/2; then, open the pickup vertical path cover.
(In the case of a 2-cassette pedestal, cassette 3/4.)
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right front cover [2].
(Do the same also for a 2-cassette pedestal.)
2-25
Chapter 2
F-2-80
- Making Adjustments for Cassette 1
Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the right front stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the position of the
adjusting plate [2]. (Do the same for cassette 3/4.)
F-2-81
If the adjusting plate

is moved to the right,
L2
image
the margin to the front of

the paper will decrease.
F-2-82
- Making Adjustments for Cassette 2
3) Remove the grip [1] on the front right.
2-26
Chapter 2
F-2-83
4) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the right front stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the position of the
adjusting plate [2].
F-2-84
If the adjusting plate

is moved to the right,
L2
image
the margin to the front of

the paper will decrease.
F-2-85
- Check to make sure that the margin (L1) along the leading edge of paper picked from each of the cassettes is 2.5
1.5 mm; otherwise, make the following adjustments:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST.
2-27
Chapter 2
2) Change the setting to make adjustments.

(A change by '1' will cause a shift of 0.1 mm; a higher value will move the image toward the leading edge of the
paper.)
L1
Image
An increase in the value of

REGIST will move the image
toward the leading edge of the paper.
F-2-86
- Adjusting the Image Area (non-image width)
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK_T/L/B/R.
2) Change the settings to make adjustments. (An increase by '24' will increase the non-image width by about 1 mm;
the setting may be between 0 and 1000.)
- If a line is found in the output image, go through the following:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>CCD>SH-PS-ST.
2) Press the OK key so that the indication on the screen will change to 'ACTIVE' indicating that the machine is
executing automatic adjustment of shading position.
- If 'OK' is indicated on the screen,
3) See that auto adjustment has ended.
- If 'NG' is indicated on the screen,
3) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S.
4) Change the setting to adjust the shading position.
2.5.2 PASCAL Setting

1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PASCAL.
2) Check to make sure that the setting is '1'.
3) Press the Reset key several times to end service mode.
4) Make the following selections in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction.
5) Select the appropriate type of paper, and press [full correction].
6) Place the test print 1 output on the copyboard glass, and have the machine read it.
7) Press [test print 2] to generate test print 2.
9) Press [test print 3] to generate test print 3.
When all work is done, turn the adjuster on the bottom of the pedestal to secure the machine in place.
2-28
0000-4380
Chapter 2
2.5.3 Preventing Anti-Condensation
0006-4719
If condensation is expected at the site of installation, enable or disable the sleep mechanism on a monthly basis to
prevent it.
Service Mode (Category 2)
COPIER>OPTIONAL>BODY>SLPOFF01 to 12
Setting
0: enable sleep mode
1: disable sleep mode (prevent condensation)
2-29
Chapter 2
2.6 Relocating the Machine

2.6.1 Preparing for Relocation
0000-4381
If the machine must be relocated after installation, be sure to perform the following work before relocation:
Do not use the machine's grips when moving it over a step while it is on a pedestal; otherwise, the machine and the
pedestal may separate. Be sure to hold the pedestal.
1) Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw [1] removed and stored at time of installation.
F-2-87
2) Be sure to put about 10 sheets of paper [1] over the copyboard glass.
[1]
F-2-88
2-30
Chapter 2
2.7 Installing the Card Reader

2.7.1 Checking the Contents
0000-8498
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure none of the following is missing.
F-2-89
[1] Card Reader-D1................. 1 unit
[2] Pan-head screw (small)......... 1 pc.
[3] Binding screw (M4)............. 4 pc.
2.7.2 Installation Procedure
0000-8502
1) Remove the face cap [1] and 2 screw [2]; then, detach the upper left cover (small) [3].
F-2-90
2) Remove the 3 screws [1] from behind the upper left cover (small), and detach the inside cover [2]; then, attach it
as shown (by changing its orientation).
2-31
Chapter 2
F-2-91
F-2-92
3)
When attaching, be sure that a card may be inserted with the label on the face side.
Using the 4 included binding screws [1], mount the card reader [2] to the inside cover.
F-2-93
2-32
Chapter 2
4) Secure the grounding wire [1] in place using the included pan-head screw (small) [2]; then, connect the connector
[3] of the card reader to the machine's connector.
F-2-94
5) Attach the upper left cover (small) using the previously removed screw.
6) Turn on the main power switch, and make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD.
Then, enter any number (from 1 to 2000) to serve as the number to identify the first card used by the user.
7) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
2.7.3 Making Settings If Net Spot Accountant (NSA) Is Used
0000-8503
1) Check to make sure that IDs (from ID00000001 through ID00001000; i.e., if '1' is entered in
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD in service mode) have been prepareed in user mode (system control
settings>group ID control>count control).
2) Set up the following in user mode (system control settings>network settings>TCP/IP settings>IP address): 'IP
address', 'gateway address', 'subnet mask'.
3)
If you fail to set up 'system control group' and 'system control ID No.', you will not be able to execute 'register card
to device' when setting up NSA.
Enter any number for 'system control group' and 'system control ID No.' in user mode (under 'system administrator
info').
4) Turn off and then on the machine.
2-33
Chapter 2
2.8 Installing the NE Controller-A1

2.8.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1
0000-8506
Keep the following in mind when installing the controller to its host machine:
1. Be sure that the work complies with the laws and regulations of the country of installation.
2. Be sure that its host machine has properly been installed before starting the work.
3. Be sure to disconnect its host machine's power plug before starting the work.
4. Be sure to identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
5. Be sure to prepare the appropriate settings data on a PC at the service station.
1) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the upper cover [1].
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-2-95
2) Connect the connector [3] of the power supply unit to the connector [4] as shown.
[4]
[3]
F-2-96
3) Remove the 6 screws [5], and detach the face plate [3] of the host machine's upper rear cover.
2-34
Chapter 2
F-2-97
4) Connect the cable [7] to the connector (J1511) [8] of the host machine's power distribution PCB.
F-2-98
5) Secure the controller to the host machine's rear cover using the 4 included screws.
[8]
[8]
F-2-99
2-35
Chapter 2
6) Remove the slack from the cable connecting to the host machine; as necessary, bundle any stray segment of the
cables as shown and secure it in place with a harness band [9].
[9]
F-2-100
7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch (SW2) [10] on the PCB to ON (so that the mode used to communicate with the host
machine will be IPC).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[10]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
BAT1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-101
8) If IC6 [11] is found on the PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch (SW2) [12] to ON; otherwise, shift bit 7 of the DIP
switch (SW2) [16] to OFF.
If IC6 [11] is not found, you need not mount it newly.

If you must mount or replace a ROM (IC6) [11] for upgrading the controller, be sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch
(SW2) [12] to ON.
2-36
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Chapter 2
[12]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
BAT1
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW3
SW2
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
[11]
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-102
9) Set the bits of the DIP switch (SW3) [13] as indicated.
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[13]
6
BAT1
1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-103
T-2-2
Notation
Setting
SW3-1
SW3-2
Description
SW3-1
SW3-2
OFF
OFF
Description
sets the signal transmission level of the
modem to -16 dBm.
See right
ON
OFF

modem to -14 dBm.
OFF
ON

modem to -12 dBm.
ON
ON
ets the signal transmission level of the

modem to -10 dBm.
2-37
Chapter 2
Notation
Setting
SW3-3
OFF
sets it to OFF at all times.
SW3-4
ON
sets the line setting to tone pulse.
OFF
sets the line setting to dial pulse.
ON
sets the dial pulse speed to 20 pps.
OFF
sets the dial pulse speed to 10 pps.
not used
SW3-5
SW3-6
Description
10) Connect the power plug of the power supply unit, and check to make sure that LED1 [14] (orange) on the PCB
goes ON.
[14]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW3
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-104
11) Initialize the RAM. Set the bits of the DIP switch (SW2) [15] on the PCB as indicated in the table; then, press
the push switch (SW4) [16] so that LED5 [17] (red) goes ON.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[15]
[17]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
BAT1
1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
[16]
IC6
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-105
2-38
SW4
2
CN4
Chapter 2
T-2-3
SW2 bits
Setting
SW2-1
OFF
SW2-2
OFF
SW2-3
ON
SW2-4
ON
SW2-5
OFF
SW2-6
OFF
SW2-7
See step 8).
SW2-8
OFF
12) When LED5 [17] (red) has gone ON, set the bits of the DIP switch (SW2) [15] on the PCB as indicated in the
table, and press the push switch (SW4) [16] so that LED5 [17] (red) goes OFF, indicating the end of RAM
initialization.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[15]
[17]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
BAT1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
[16]
IC6
2
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-106
T-2-4
SW2 bits
Setting
SW2-1
OFF
SW2-2
OFF
SW2-3
OFF
SW2-4
ON
2-39
Chapter 2
SW2 bits
Setting
SW2-5
OFF
SW2-6
ON
SW2-7
See step 8).
SW2-8
OFF
13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch (SW2) [18] on the PCB to OFF.
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[18]
6
BAT1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-107
14) Connect the telephone line to the controller. If the connection is to the controller alone, connect the modular jack
cable to the connector (LINE) [19]. If the controller's extension function is to be used, connect the existing
telephone or fax to the connector (TEL) [2)] and then connect the telephone line to the connector (LINE) [19].
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
1
SW3
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
[20] [19]
F-2-108
2-40
SW4
Chapter 2
15) Ring the service station for initial settings of the controller. (Upon arrival, LED 4 [21] (red) will start to flash.)
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW3
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
[21]
CN3
CN2
F-2-109
16) Ring the service station, and find out if initial settings have been made. If the setup has failed, initialize the RAM
once again (steps 11) through 13)) to start over.
Be sure to check with the service station once again to make sure that the controller settings are correct.
17) Check to make sure that the controller may be used to call up the PC at the service station. Press the push switch
(SW4) [16] on the PCB so that LED6 [22] (red) goes ON. The LED goes OFF when the transmission ends
successfully; otherwise, it will start to flash.
When the push switch (SW4) [16] is pressed while LED6 [22] is flashing, a transmission will be initiated once again.
If the push switch (SW1) [23] is pressed while LED6 [22] is flashing, the ongoing transmission will be cancelled.
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
[22]
SW3
SW4
[16]
IC6
SW1
CN4
[23]
CN3
CN2
F-2-110
18) Check to make sure that the communication with its host machine is normal. Connect the host machine's power
plug, and turn on the power switch; then, check to make sure that LED2 [24] (orange) starts to flash.
[24]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
1
SW3
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-111
2-41
Chapter 2
19) Press the host machine's Start key, and check that LED3 [25] (pink) flashes each time paper is delivered.
[25]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW3
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-112
20) Attach the switch settings label [26] on the top cover, and record the switch settings.
21) Secure the upper cover [1] using 2 screws [2]. When doing so, check to make sure that the power unit cable is
secured to the cable guide inside the controller and is not trapped by the upper cover [1].
[2]
[26]
[1]
[2]
F-2-113
2-42
Chapter 2
2.9 Installing the Original Tray

0000-8545
Open the shiping box, and check to make sure that none of the fllowing is missing:
F-2-114
[1] Original base........ 1 pc.
[2] Stepped screw (M4)... 2 pc.
[3] Washer............... 2 pc.
0000-8546
1) Fit the 2 included washers [1] and 2 stepped screws [2] to the upper right cover.
F-2-115
2-43
Chapter 2
2) Separate the original tray into top and lower parts, and hook the cut-off [2] of the reinforcing plate of the original
tray (upper) [1] on the stepped screw [3] previously fitted.
F-2-116
3) Fit it to the original tray (lower) [1] together with the original tray (upper).
F-2-117
2-44
Chapter 2
2.10 Installing the Key Switch Unit-A1

0000-8548
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the following is missing:
F-2-118
[1] Key switch unit .............. 1 pc.
[2] Control key .................. 1 pc.
[3] Binding screw (M4)............ 1 pc.
0000-8550
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the host machine's center delivery tray [2].
F-2-119
2-45
Chapter 2
2) Cut out the excess [1] of the upper right cover.
F-2-120
3) Slide out the manual feed tray; then, remove tha screw [1], and detach the middle right cover.
F-2-121
4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right cover [2].
F-2-122
2-46
Chapter 2
5) Fit the plate of the key switch unit [1] into the cut-off of the upper right stay; then, secure it in place using the
included binding screw [2].
F-2-123
6) Connect the connector [1].
F-2-124
7) Attach the upper right cover using the 2 previously removed screws.
8) Attach the printer upper right cover using the 2 right screws.
2.10.3 Making Checks After Installation
0006-0710
1) Start service mode.

2) Make the following selections in service mode, and enter - COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>KEY.
3) Turn OFF and then ON the host machine.
2-47
Chapter 2
2.11 Installing the Reader Heater

0000-8554
Be sure to turn off the host machine before starting the work and observe the points to note indicated on the next page.
Open the shipping box, and check none of the following is missing:
F-2-125
T-2-5
[1]
Reader heater
...
1 pc.
[6]
Wire saddle
...
2 pc.
[2]
Fuse PCB unit
...
1 pc.
[7]
Gounding cord (100v
...
1 pc.
...
1 pc.
model only)
[3]
RS tightening screw
...
5 pc.
(M4x8)
[4]
Power cable (for wall
Power cable (for copier

outlet)
2-48
Power supply label

(100v model only)
...
1 pc.
...
1 pc.
outlet)
[5]
[8]
Chapter 2
0000-8557
Before starting the work, be sure to perform the follwing:

1. Turn off the control panel power switch.
2. Turn off the main power switch.
3. Disconnect the power cable (for wall outlet).
ON
/O
FF
[1] OFF
[2] OFF
[3] Pull out.
F-2-126
1) Remove the copyboard cover. (If an ADF is used, you need not remove it.)
2) Release the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader power cable.
[1]
F-2-127
2-49
Chapter 2
3) Desconnect the reader controller communication cable.

4) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the reader unit rear cover [2]. (Save it for later.)
F-2-128
5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the face plate. (Save it for later.)
F-2-129
6) Using the 2 included screws [1], mount the fuse PCB unit [2].
F-2-130
2-50
Chapter 2
7) Connect the harness [1] of the fuse PCB unit to the connector [2] of the interface PCB.
F-2-131
8)
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass face and the white plate found on the back of
it. (Dirt can cause black lined in the images.)
If soiled, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-2-132
2-51
Chapter 2
F-2-133
Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3].
F-2-134
9)
When moving the No.1 mirror base, be sure to hold it by the bend [A] of the cut-out in the mirror stay shown in the
figure.
F-2-135
2-52
Chapter 2
F-2-136
Move the No.1 mirror base [1] fully to the right.
F-2-137
When shifting the mirror unit, be sure not to touch the mirror unit. Otherwise, clean it with lint-free papaer moistened
with aocohol.
2-53
Chapter 2
10) Mount the Reader heater where indicated in the figure. When doing so, be sure that the harness guide of the heater
is above the harness of the fuse PCB.
[2] [1]
F-2-138
11) Using 2 included screws [1], secure the longer segment (silver-coloured) of the Reader heater [2].
F-2-139
12) Holding it where indicated [A], shift the No.1 mirror base to the left.
F-2-140
2-54
Chapter 2
13) Fit the harness guide [1], i.e., fit it in the hole in the base plate, and shift it to the right to secure; then, fit the
harness band [2].
F-2-141
14) Secure the shorter segment (black) of the Reader heater [1] using 2 included screws [2]. (To do so, insert a
screwdriver through the hole in the lens cover.)
F-2-142
15) Connect the connector [1] of the Reader heater to the connector [2] of the fuse PCB unit.
F-2-143
2-55
Chapter 2
16) Put the No.1 mirror base to its initial position (left edge).
17) Attach the reader unit rear cover.
18)
When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to touch the glass face or the white plate found on its back. (Dirt
can cause black lines in the images.)
If soiled, clean it with lint-freee paper moistened with alcohol.
F-2-144
Attach the copyboard glass.
F-2-145
2-56
Chapter 2
19) Secure the reader controller communication cable and the reader power supply cable back to their initial
positions.
20) Connect the power cable.
- If a pedestal (2-cassette pedestal or plain pedestal) is connected to the host machine, remove the 2 face stickers [1]
from the upper rear cover.
[1]
F-2-146
Connect the power cable (for wall outlet) [1] and the inlet terminal and the outlet terminal (topmost of the 3) of the
pedestal; then, secure it in place using the 2 included wire saddles.
F-2-147
2-57
Chapter 2
- If no pedestal (2-cassette pedestal or plain pedestal) is connected to the host machine, connect the power cable (for
wall outlet) [1] to the inlet terminal.
F-2-148
- Only if 100v Model
21) Remove the screw [1] found under the inlet terminal, and connect the included gounding wire [1] (i.e., if no
pedestal is connected).
F-2-149
22) Attach the included power supply label [1] to the reader unit rear cover.
F-2-150
2-58
Chapter 2
2.12 Installing the Cassette Heater

0006-0711
To install the heater kit, you must obtain a separately available Cassette Heater Unit-24.
Before starting the work, be sure to turn off the host machine; for installation, keep in mind the points to note
indicated on the next page.
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the following is missing:
Cassette Heater Kit-A1
F-2-151
T-2-6
[1]
Heater PCB unit.....1 pc.
[2]
RS tightening screw (M4).....2 pc.
Cassette Heater Unit-24
F-2-152
T-2-7
[1]
Heater unit.....1 pc.
[2]
Binding screw (M4).....1 pc.
2-59
Chapter 2
0006-0718
Before staritng the work, be sure to perform the following on the host machine in the order indicated:
1. Turn off the control panel power switch.
3. Disconnect the power cable (for power outlet).
ON
/O
FF
[1] OFF
[2] OFF
[3] Pull out.
F-2-153
MEMO:
The Cassette Heater Kit-A1 is designed for installation to either a copying machine or a 2-cassette pedestal using the
same installation procedure.
The following steps (images) are based on installation to a 2-cassette pedestal.
2-60
Chapter 2
2.12.3 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a Copier
0006-0719
1) Pull out both cases of the copier.

2) Insert a screwdriver from the front of the copier, and remove the 2 screws [2] to detach the heater PCB unit cover
[1] attached to the rear side plate of the copier.
F-2-154
3)
MEMO:
When detaching the heater unit PCB cover, slide it upward while pulling the stop [1] mounted to the cover toward
the front.
F-2-155
4)
Before installing the heater PCB unit, be sure to turn off the host machine.
Using the 2 included RS tightening screws [1], mount the heater PCB unit [2], and connect the 2 connectors [3].
2-61
Chapter 2
F-2-156
5) Connect the included connector of the heater unit with the connector [2] of the heater PCB unit.
F-2-157
6)
When mounting the heater unit, be sure to securely fit the 3 protrusions, and check to make sure there is no gap.
Fit the 3 protrusions [2] of the heater unit [1] into the slits in the base plate; match the holes, and secure it to the
cassette heater unit using the included binding screw [3].
2-62
Chapter 2
F-2-158
F-2-159
7) Mount the heater PCB unit cover using the previously removed screw.
2.12.4 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1
0006-0720
1) Slide out both cassettes from the cassette pedestal.

Hereafter, go through the same steps used for the installation to a copier.
2-63
Chapter 2
2.13 Replacing the Drum Unit

2.13.1 Preparing for the Work
0006-0723
1) Take out the drum unit (Y) from its shipping box; then, take out the drum unit (Y) [1] from its packing bag, and
also take out the drying agent [2].
F-2-160
2)
Do not remove the protective cover. It serves as a rail for installation.

Pull out the releasing hook [1] at the front and the rear.
F-2-161
2-64
Chapter 2
3) Remove the interference protective sheet [1].
F-2-162
0006-0728
Before starting the work, be sure to perform the following on the host machine in the order indicated:
1. Turn of the control panel power switch.
3. Pull out the power cable (for wall outlet).
ON
/O
FF
[1] OFF
[2] OFF
[3] Pull out.
F-2-163
2-65
Chapter 2
1) Open the copier's front cover, and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever [1] in the direction of the
arrow.
F-2-164
2) Turn the open/closed lever of the drum unit cover [1] counterclockwise by 90 deg to open the drum unit cover.
F-2-165
3) Match the dent [1] found in the back of the drum unit cover and the protrusion [2] on the bottom face of the
protective cover, and secure it in place.
F-2-166
4)
2-66
Chapter 2
1. Push it in the direction of the arrow [1] indicated on the top edge of the drum unit.
2. After setting the drum unit in place, be sure to store away the protective cover.
Holding the protective cover [2] level, push in the drum unit (Y) [3] to set; the units are Y, M, C, and Bk, starting
from the left.
F-2-167
5)
When pulling out the sealing tape, be sure to hold the drum unit in place so that the drum unit will not slide out.
Pull out the sealing tape [1].
F-2-168
6) Set the drum units for other colors (M, C, Bk) in the same way.
7) Close the drum unit cover, and shift the open/close lever back to its initial position.
8) Shift the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever back to its initial position.
9) Close the front cover.
2-67
Chapter 2
2-68
Chapter 3 Basic
Operation
Contents
Contents
3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Chapter 3
3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional Construction
0000-4278
The machine can broadly be divided into the following functional blocks:
Original exposure system
Reader control system
[7]
[1]
General control
system
Main controller
[2]
[3]
[8]
[4]
Printer control
system
DC controller
[5]
[6]
Image
formation system
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
2-cassette
pedestal
(option)
Pickup/
feeder
system
Side paper
deck (option)
[14]
[15]
F-3-1
T-3-1
[1] HDD
[9] Secondary transfer
[2] Option boards
[10] Pickup control
[3] Photosensitive drum (Y)
[11] Duplexing feed
[4] Photosensitive drum (M)
[12] Cassette 1
[5] Photosensitive drum (C)
[13] Cassette 2
[6] Photosensitive drum (Bk)
[14] Cassette 3
[7] Delivery system
[15] Cassette 4
[8] Fixing system
3-1
Chapter 3
3.1.2 Arrangement of Major PCBs

The machine's
0006-8366
major PCBs are wired as indicated in the following diagram:

Reader unit
[2]
J601
[1]
[3]
J303
J102
J103
J204
J205
J203
J307
J206
[4]
Printer unit
[5]
J511
[6]
[7]
J607
J608
J115
J1301
J114
J1209
[9]
J1303
[8]
[10]
J1501,J1502
J1508,J1509
J102
J105
J131
J100
[13]
J814
J75,J92 [14] [15] [16] [17] [18]
[19]
[11]
J95
J90
[12]
J441
J64 J50,J59
J60,J74
J54
J69
J58
[20]
J3
[21]
J5
J158
J155
J53
J153
J154
[22]
[23]
flat cable.
PCB-to-PCB connector.
F-3-2
T-3-2
3-2
[1] Inverter PCB
[13] High-voltage unit
[2] Reader controller PCB
[14] HV1 PCB
[3] Interface PCB
[15] HV1-SUB PCB
[4] CCD/AP PCB
[16] HV2 PCB
[5] Control panel CPU PCB
[17] HV2-SUBY PCB
[6] BD detection PCB
[18] HV4 PCB
[7] Laser driver PCB
[19] HV3 PCB
[8] DC controller PCB
[20] Fuse PCB
Chapter 3
[9] Main controller PCB (sub)
[21] Heater control PCB
[10] Main controller PCB (main)
[22] DC power supply PCB (1)
[11] Drive PCB
[12] Duplex driver PCB
The symbol <=> in the diagram indicates major wiring connections, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals.
The major PCBs within the machine's main controller are connected as follows:
J1400
[13]
J1301
[4]
[5]
J1202
[6]
J1201
J1203
[1]
J1342
[2]
[7]
J1318
J1204
[3]
J1207
J1213
J1210
[8]
[9]
J1205
[10]
J1206
[11]
J1513 J1507
[12]
Flat cable/signal.
J1303
F-3-3
3-3
Chapter 3
T-3-3
[8] Ethernet board
[2] SRMA PCB
[9] UFR board or Open I/F
[3] HDD
[10] USB interface board or TokenRing board
[11] Image conversion board
[5] Image memory (SDRAM-: 512 MB, standard)
[12] Power distribution PCB
[6] Image memory (SDRAM: 512 MB, expansion)
[13] Differential PCB
[7] Boot ROM (Fiash ROM)
The symbol <=> used in the diagram indicates connection between major PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction
of signals.
3-4
Chapter 3
3.2 Basic Sequence

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On
0000-4280
T-3-4
Period
Description
WMUP (warm-up)
From when the main power switch is turned on until the surface temperature of
the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C.
SSTBY (scanner standby)
From when shading correction ends until the Start key is turned on or the main
power switch is turned off.
WMUPR (warm-up
From when the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C until it
rotation)
reaches 190 deg C (i.e., the drive system has started up and, in addition, bias
adjustment and image stabilization correction control are under way).
PSTBY (printer standby)
From WMUPR ends until the Start key is enabled.
3-5
Chapter 3
Main power switch ON

Standby
Reader unit
WMUP
SSTBY
30 sec
Size detection/shading correction
Original lamp
(LA1)
Scanner motor
(M1)
Printer unit
Home position search
Starts here if, when the main power is turned

ON, the surface temperature of the fixing roller
is 90C or more
Standby (at this time, the surface
temperature of the fixing roller must
have reached 190C)
WMUP
WMUPR
PSTBY
360 sec
Fixing main heater
(H1)
Fixing sub heater
(H2)
90C
*1
*1
Fixing heat retention

heater (H3)
In the case of a new cartridge,
rotates for 30 sec; otherwise,
rotates for 0.3 sec
Development
motor
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Fixing motor (M24)
Rotates idly for 300

sec after the drum
ITB motor stops
Auto adjustment
*1: The main heater or the sub heater is

used for temperature control according to The following control is executed
the difference in the readings between the according to the surface temperature
of the fixing roller when the main
main thermistor (TH1) and the sub
power is turned ON:
thermistor (TH2).
if less than 100C,
if 100C or higher
(control at 190C)
[1] discharge current control [1] discharge current control
[2] ATVC control
[2] ATVC control
[3] ATR control
[3] image position control
[4] SALT-Dmax control
[5] image position correction
[6] SALT-Dhalf control
F-3-4
3-6
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations
0000-4281
a. Full-Color
full-color, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-3-5
Period
Description
SSTBY
From when shading ends until the Start key is turned ON or the
main power is turned OFF.
SREADY
While shading correction is under way after a press on the Start

key.
SCFW
SCRV
While an originals is being read (scanner forward).

While the scanner is returning to the home position after the
original is read (scanner in reverse).
PSTBY (print standby)
While the machine is ready to review a print request signal.
PINTR (printer initial rotation)
From when a print request signal is received until the image

leading signal is sent.
PRINT
Until all toner is transferred to paper.
LSTR (last rotation)
From when printing ends until all drive stops.
Chapter 3
Start key ON
Reader unit
SSTBY
SREADY SCFW SCRV
Scanning
lamp (LA1)
Scanner
motor (M1)
Printer unit
Image formation
Start key ON ready timing
PSTBY PINTR
Used to stabilize rotation

(Bk: 2.5 sec Y/M/C: 3.5 sec)
PRINT
LSTR PSTBY
Laser scanner motor

(M2 to M5)(Y,M,C,Bk)
ITOP signal
Laser ON
Toner container motor
(M20 to 23)(Y,M,C,Bk)
Developing motor
(M12 to 15)(Y,M,C,Bk)
Developing bias
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration motor
(M8)
Acceleration, half-speed, constant

speed control (to match transfer
timing and process speed)
Fixing motor (M24)
Fixing main heater
(H1)
Fixing sub heater
(H2)
Fixing heat
retention motor (H3)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1: The machine executes temperature control using the main heater or the sub heater
according to the difference in the readings of the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub
thermistor (TH2). (control at 190C)
F-3-5
b. Monochrome
monochrome, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-3-6
Period
Description
SSTBY
While an original is being read.
SREADY
While shading correction is under way after a press on the

Star key.
SCFW
3-8
While an original is being read.
Chapter 3
Period
Description
SCRV
While the scanner is returning to the home position after an

original has been read.
While the machine is ready to receive a print request signal.
PSINTR (printer initial rotation)
From when a print request signal is received until when the

image leading signal is received.
PRINT
Unit all toner is transferred to paper.
LSTR (last rotation)
From when printing ends until al drive stops.
Start key ON
Reader unit
SREADY
SSTBY
SCFW
SCRV
Scanning
lamp (LA1)
Scanner
motor (M1)
Printer unit
Image formation
Start key ON ready timing
PSTBY
PINTR

(2.5 sec)
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Laser scanner
motor (Bk) (M5)
ITOP signal
Laser ON
Toner container
motor (Bk) (M23)
Development
motor (Bk) (M15)
Developing bias
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB
motor (M1)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
Acceleration, half-speed, and

constant speed control (to match
transfer timing and process speed)
Fixing motor (M24)
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
heater (H3)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1: The machine uses the main heater or the sub heater for temperature control
according to the difference in the readings of the main thermistor (TH1)
and the sub thermistor (TH2). (control at 190C)
F-3-6
3-9
Chapter 3
3-10
Chapter 4 Basic
Operations (As a
Printer)
Contents
Contents
4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
Chapter 4
4.1 Construction
0000-4447
The machine can roughly be divided into the following functional blocks:
Original exposure system
Reader control system
[7]
[1]
General control
system
Main controller
[2]
[3]
[4]
Printer control
system
DC controller
[5]
[6]
Image
formation system
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Pickup/
feeder
system
[13]
[14]
2-cassette
pedestal
(option)
Side paper
deck (option)
[15]
[16]
F-4-1
T-4-1
[1] HDD
[9] Feeding system
[2] Option boards
[10] Transfer system
[3] Photosensitive drum (Y)
[11] Pickup control
[4] Photosensitive drum (M)
[12] Duplex/feeder
[5] Photosensitive drum (C)
[13] Cassette 1
[6] Photosensitive drum (Bk)
[14] Cassette 2
[7] Delivery system
[15] Cassette 3
[8] Fixing system
[16] Cassette 4
4-1
Chapter 4
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry

4.2.1 Arrangement of Major PCBs
0006-8375
The machine's major PCBs are wired as follows:

Printer unit
[1]
J511
[2]
[3]
J607
J608
J115
J1301
J114
J1209
[5]
J1303
[4]
[6]
J1501,J1502
J1508,J1509
J102
J105
J131
J100
[9]
J814
J75,J92
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[7]
J64
J95
J90
[8]
J441
J50,J59
J60,J74
J69
J58
J54
J3
[17]
[16]
J5
J158
J155
J53
J153
J154
[18]
[19]
flat cable.
F-4-2
T-4-2
4-2
[1] Control panel CPU PCB
[11] HV1-SUB PCB
[2] BD detection PCB
[12] HV2 PCB
[3] Laser driver PCB
[13] HV2-SBU PCB
[4] DC controller PCB
[14] HV4 PCB
[15] HV3 PCB
Chapter 4
[16] Fuse PCB
[7] Drum ITB motor
[17] Heater control PCB
[8] Duplex driver PCB
[9] High-voltage unit
[10] HV1 PCB
The arrow used in the diagram indicates connection of PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals.
The major PCBs of the machine's main controller are connected as follows:
[13]
J1400
J1301
[1]
J1202
[5]
[4]
J1201
J1203
[6]
J1342
[2]
[7]
J1318
J1204
[3]
J1207
[9]
J1205
J1213
J1206
J1210
[8]
[10]
[11]
J1513 J1507
[12]
F-4-3
T-4-3
[8] Ethernet board
[2] SRAM PCB
[9] UFR board or Open interface board
[3] HDD
[10] USB interface board, TokenRing

board, or USB application interface board
4-3
Chapter 4
[5] 512-MB expansion RAM
[11] Image conversion board or USB

application interface board
[6] 256/512MB expansion RAM
[12] Power distribution PCB
[7] Boot ROM
[13] Differential PCB
The arrow used in the diagram indicates connection of PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals.
4.2.2 DC Controller PCB
0000-4449
The following is a functional diagram of the DC controller PCB:

Converts control signals sent to
D/A converter (3.3V 5V)
Retains various data (parameters for image
formation; margin, color displacement,
laser adjustment value, etc.)
Converts signals
from CPU into
analog signals
Laser activation control

IC1019
ATR sensor
control signal
(0 to 12V)
SALT sensor
control signal
pattern reader unit
control signal(0 to 5V)
Retains settings
data; e.g., service
mode (SRAM)
Stores start-up
program (Boot ROM)
Bk
BAT IC1018
IC1016
M
IC1
IC30
IC24
IC12
Controls loads
IC25
IC27
IC49
IC15
CPU
IC14
Interfaces with
external devices
Stores firmware
(Flash ROM)
Converts signals
from CPU to
analog signals
(0 to 12V)
24 VDC
15 VDC
5 VDC
3.3 VDC
J100
F-4-4
4-4
IC1017
IC48
IC43
IC42
IC41
IC40
Control signals
to HVT
Chapter 4
4.3 Basic Sequence

0000-4450
T-4-4
Period
Description
WMUP (warm-up)
While the drive system is at rest and, in addition, until the

surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C.
WMUPR (warm-up rotation)
After the drive system starts up and, in addition, bias

adjustment is under way.
PSTBY (printer standby)
While the machine is ready for a copy/print request signal.
4-5
Chapter 4

Standby
Reader unit
WMUP
SSTBY
30 sec
Size detection/shading correction
Original lamp
(LA1)
Scanner motor
(M1)
Printer unit
Home position search
Starts here if, when the main power is turned

ON, the surface temperature of the fixing roller
is 90C or more
Standby (at this time, the surface
temperature of the fixing roller must
have reached 190C)
WMUP
WMUPR
PSTBY
360 sec
Fixing main heater
(H1)
Fixing sub heater
(H2)
90C
*1
*1

heater (H3)
In the case of a new cartridge,
rotates for 30 sec; otherwise,
rotates for 0.3 sec
Development
motor
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Fixing motor (M24)
Rotates idly for 300

sec after the drum
ITB motor stops
Auto adjustment
*1: The main heater or the sub heater is

used for temperature control according to The following control is executed
the difference in the readings between the according to the surface temperature
of the fixing roller when the main
main thermistor (TH1) and the sub
power is turned ON:
thermistor (TH2).
if less than 100C,
if 100C or higher
(control at 190C)
[1] discharge current control [1] discharge current control
[2] ATVC control
[2] ATVC control
[3] ATR control
[3] image position control
[4] SALT-Dmax control
[5] image position correction
[6] SALT-Dhalf control
F-4-5
4-6
Chapter 4
0000-4451
a. Full-Color
full-color, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-4-5
Period
Description
While the machine is ready to accept a copy/print

request signal.
From when a print request signal is received until an

image signal is sent.
PRINT
Until all toner is transferred to paper and the paper is

delivered.
LSTR
From when paper is delivered until all drive stops.
Printer unit
Start key Image formation

ON
ready timing
PSTBY
PINTR

(Bk: 2.5 sec; Y/M/C: 3.5 sec)
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Laser scanner motor

(M2 to M5) (Y,M,C,Bk)
ITOP signal
Laser ON
(M20 to 23) (Y,M,C,Bk)
Developing motor
(M12 to 15) (Y,M,C,Bk)
Developing bias
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
Acceleration, half-speed, constant
speed control (to match transfer
timing and process speed)
Fixing motor (M24)
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
*1
*1
*1
*1

heater (H3)
*1: The machine executes temperature control using the main heater or the sub
heater according to the difference in the readings of temperature between

the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2). (controlled to 190C)
F-4-6
4-7
Chapter 4
b. Monochrome
monochrome, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-4-6
Period
Description
While the machine is ready to receive a copy/print

request signal.
From when a print request signal is received until the

image signal is sent.
PRINT
Until all toner is transferred to the paper and the paper

is delivered.
LSTR
Printer unit
From when paper is delivered until all drive stops.
Start key Image formation

ready timing
ON
PSTBY
PINTR

(2.5 sec)
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Laser scanner
motor (Bk) (M5)
ITOP signal
Laser activation
Toner container
motor (Bk) (M23)
Development
motor (Bk) (M15)
Developing basis
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB motor

(M1)
Cassette pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
Acceleration, half-speed,
constant speed control (to match
transfer timing and process speed)
Fixing motor (M24)
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
*1
*1
*1
*1
Fixing heat
retention motor (H3)
*1: The machine uses the main heater or the sub heater for temperature control
according to the difference in the readings of temperature between the main
thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2). (controlled to 90C)
F-4-7
4-8
Chapter 5 Main
Controller
Contents
Contents
5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.2 Main Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 SRAM board ............................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.4 HDD ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.5 Composition of the System Software ......................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Start-Up Sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.2 Startup Sequence ........................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.4 Actions when HDD Error .................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.4.1 E602 in Detail ............................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.5 Image Processing ............................................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.5.1 Flow of Images ......................................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ........................................................................................ 5-15
5.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing ................................................................................................................ 5-16
5.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Edit Processing Black ........................................................................ 5-17
5.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing .............................................................................................................. 5-18
5.6 Flow of Image Data ......................................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.6.1 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions ................................................................................................ 5-19
5.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions .................................................................................................... 5-20
5.6.3 Flow of Image data for SEND function ................................................................................................... 5-21
5.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions .............................................................................. 5-22
5.6.5 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions ................................................................................... 5-23
5.6.6 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions ................................................................................................... 5-24
5.7.1 Main Controller PCB (main) .................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.7.1.5 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.7.1.7 Removing the Ethernet Board ........................................................................................................... 5-26
5.7.1.10 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ...................................................................................... 5-27
5.7.1.11 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main) ................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.1.12 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) ......................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2 Main Controller PCB (sub) ...................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2.4 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.7.2.7 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ........................................................................................ 5-30
Contents
5.7.2.8 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) .............................................................................. 5-30
5.7.3 SRAM PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 5-31
5.7.3.3 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.3.5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB ...................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.4 UFR Board ................................................................................................................................................ 5-32
5.7.5 Ethernet Board .......................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.7.6 Differential PCB ....................................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.7.6.4 Removing the Differential PCB ......................................................................................................... 5-34
5.7.7 Power Distribution PCB ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.7.2 Removing the Power Distribution PCB ............................................................................................. 5-35
5.7.8 HDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.3 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.4 When Replacing the HDD ................................................................................................................. 5-36
5.7.9 Controller Fan ........................................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.7.9.3 Removing the Controller Fan ............................................................................................................ 5-37
Chapter 5
5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Outline
0006-8424
The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the main controller are as follows:
Main controller PCB (main)
Image memory
(256 MB, expanded)
(512 MB, standard)
J1202
J1201
Flash ROM
(for boot program)
IC1003
LSI
LSI
IC1012
IC1015
IC1018
Ethernet board connector

slot (for support of
10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx)
J1203
J1204
UFR board or open

I/F board connection
PCI slot
J1207
IC1029
J1205
TokenRing board or
USB interface board
connection PCI slot
J1206
IDE hard disk (40 GB; f

or support of ultra TA/66) connector
Image conversion board

connection PCI slot
PCI slot for connection

of USB application
interface board
F-5-1
Main Controller PCB (sub)
IC10
IC15
F-5-2
5-1
Chapter 5
0000-4282
The machine may be broadly divided into the following functional blocks (main controller indicated with shading):
Retention of service mode settings/
HDD control information
Image memory (SDRAM)
Reader input image processing
Reader unit
SRAM board
Main controller
PCB (main)
Main controller
PCB (sub)
DC controller PCB
Boot ROM
HDD
Printer unit
system control
memory control
printer output image processing
F-5-3
5-2
Accessory
boards
Chapter 5
5.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry

5.2.1 Outline
0000-4283
The major mechanisms of the main controller PCB are controlled by the CPU on the main controller PCB.
To save on physical space, the machines main controller PCB is divided into two: main and sub.
The sub PCB serves to process input images coming from the reader unit, while the main PCB serves to control jobs,
output images going to the printer, and memory.
5.2.2 Main Controller PCB
0000-4284
Main Controller PCB (main)

T-5-1
IC No.
Description
IC1012
CPU: system control

network controller
PCI bus controller
serial communications controller
ROM/RAM controller
IC1015
image input/output and image processing
IC1003, 1018
image processing control of output image data to printer unit
IC1029
HDD control
temporarily stores image data
Boot ROM (Flash ROM)
storage of boot program

T-5-2
IC No.
Description
IC10
image processing control of input image data from reader unit
IC15
input/output processing
5-3
Chapter 5
5.2.3 SRAM board
0006-4436
T-5-3
Description
control information on image data stored on the HDD

service mode settings data
5.2.4 HDD
0006-4439
The hard disk is divided into 9 partitions (blocks for storage of specific type of data), with each partition possessing
its own functions:
T-5-4
Partition
Description
DOSDEV
stores multipurpose data
FSTDEV
stores image data
DOSDEV2
stores thumbnail display data (image data)
FSPTDEV
stores image data
DOSDEV3
temporarily stores multipurpose file (e.g., PDL spool)
PDLDEV
stores PDL-related files

(e.g., font, stored firmware, ICC Profile, PDL color correction
information file)
5-4
DOSDEV4
stores user data (address book, transfer settings)
BOOTDEV
stores system software
DOSDEV5
for future use
Chapter 5
DOSDEV
FSTDEV
HDD
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
F-5-4
5.2.5 Composition of the System Software
0006-4453
The following shows the construction of the machine's system software:

T-5-5
System software
Description
Location
SYSTEM
system module (controls system
HDD(BOOTDEV)
Remarks
as a whole)
Language
language module (controls LCD
HDD(BOOTDEV)
indication)
RUI
language module (controls
HDD(BOOTDEV)
remote UI)
BOOT
starts up the machine
BootROM
DIMM
G3FAX
controls G3FAX
G3FAX board
DIMM
Dcon
controls the DC controller
DC controller PCB
soldered in
place
Rcon
controls the reader controller
reader controller PCB
soldered in
place
5-5
Chapter 5
RCON
Reader controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DCON
G3Fax board
G3FAX
HDD
BOOT
SYSTEM
Language
RUI
BOOTDEV
BOOTDEV
F-5-5
5-6
Main controller PCB
Chapter 5
5.3 Start-Up Sequence

5.3.1 Outline
0000-4285
The system control software used to control the machine is stored on the HDD. At time of startup, the CPU on the
controller PCB follows the boot program to read the system software from the HDD to the Image Memory (SDRAM)
on the controller PCB.
While the CPU reads the system software from the HDD to the Image Memory (SDRAM), the control panel shows
the following screen, and the startup sequence under way is indicated by the progress bar on the screen.
Starting up. Please wait.
Progress bar
F-5-6
Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated. The HDD is being accessed during the period, and
turning off the power can cause a fault (E602) on the HDD.
5.3.2 Startup Sequence
0000-4286
<Boot ROM Area>

- Self Diagnosis Program
When the main power is turned on, the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the start-up sequence. In the course
of the sequence, the state of the image memory (SDRAM) and the HDD is checked, and an error code will be
indicated if a fault is detected.
- Boot Program
When the self diagnosis program ends normally, the CPI on the main controller PCB starts up the boot program.
When the program is run, the system software is read from the HDD and is written to the system area of the image
memory (SDRAM).
<Image Memory (SDRAM) Area>
A set of instructions is executed by the system software written in the boot program, initializing various settings (e.g.,
I/F settings of the main controller).
5-7
Chapter 5
When all the foregoing ends normally, the machine becomes ready to accept jobs. (The operation screen will appear
on the control panel, and the LED on the Start key changes from red to green.)
- Self Diagnosis Program Is Under Way
Image memory
System
area
SDRAM
Image
area
CPU
HDD
Self diagnos
is program
Boot
program
BootROM
:Access to the program at time of execution
F-5-7
- Boot Program Is Under Way
Image memory
System
area
SDRAM
Image
area
Systems
software
CPU
Self diagnos
is program
Boot
program
BootROM
: access to program at time of execution
: flow of system program
F-5-8
5-8
HDD
Chapter 5
5.4 Actions when HDD Error

5.4.1 E602 in Detail
0006-4492
In the even that the machine suffers a fault associated with E602-xxyy, different actions are required depending on
the detail code:
If the machine indicates E602-xxyy, be sure to turn it off and then on once (so that it will execute automatic
recovery sequence).
T-5-6
xx
Partition
yy
Description
00
HDD as a
01
The machine cannot recognize the HDD. The machine
whole
cannot find BOOTDEV at time of start-up.
Action:
Turn off the main power. Check the 2 types of cable
(power, IDE) coming from the HDD; then, turn the
power back on.
At this time, check to see that the HDD is rotating and
it is supplied with power.
F
02
NG
The machine cannot find the system software of the main

controller (main) CPU in BOOTDEV.
06
The machine cannot find the system software for the main
controller (sub) CPU in BOOTDEV.
07
The machine cannot find an appropriate ICCProfile file in

BOOTDEV/PDLDEV.
Action:
B
03
NG
When data is being read from BOOTDEV, the machine

detects a read error sector.
Action:
H
NG
NG
5-9
Chapter 5
T-5-7
xx
Partition
yy
Description
01
DOSDEV
01
The machine suffers a read error at time of start-up.
02
FSTDEV
03
DOSDEV2
04
FSTPDEV
05
DOSDEV3
06
PDLDEV
07
DOSDEV4
08
BOOTDEV
09
DOSDEV5
FF
not
Action:
A
NG
NG
- if xxyy = 0701, 0702
Action:
Ask the user to collect address book data,
transfer settings, and user mode data using RUI
before starting the work.
identified
NG
NG
- xxyy = 0801, FF01
Action:
A
02
NG
NG
There is a file system error.
Action:
B
NG
- xxyy = 0702
Action:
Ask the user to collect address book data,
transfer settings, and user mode data using RUI
before starting the work.
C
NG
- if xxyy = 0802, FF02
Action:
B
03
NG
There is an HDD contact fault or an OS system

error.
Action:
Turn off the main power. Check the 2 types of
cable (power, IDE) coming from the HDD;
then, turn the power back on.
At that time, check to see that the HDD rotates
and it is supplied with power.
E
5-10
NG
NG
Chapter 5
xx
Partition
yy
Description
11,21
The HDD has poor contact.
Action:
Turn off the main power. Check the 2 types of
cable (power, IDE) coming from the HDD;
then, turn the power back on.
At that time, check to see that the HDD rotates
and it is supplied with power.
F
13,25
NG
There is a read error.
Action:
A
NG
NG
- if xxyy= 0713, 0725

Action:
A
NG
NG
- if xxyy = 0813, 0825
Action:
A
10,12,14,2
NG
NG
There is a system error or a packet data error.
2,23,24
Action:
B
NG
A:
1) Set '0' to the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK*. (Make these selections, and press the
OK key.)
3) Turn off and then on the main power.
B:
1)
By
referring
to
the
table
"HDD
Format,"
fill
'CHK-TYPE'
under
the
following:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR. (Make these selections, and press the OK key.)
C:
1) ** Start up in normal mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 1 and 7 keys); then, make the
following selections, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD.
2) Execute DOSDEV4 (formatting) using the SST.
5-11
Chapter 5
D:
1) Replace the main controller (main) board.
2) Mount the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM (removed from the previous board) to the new board.
E:
1) ** Start up in save mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 2 and 8 keys.)
2) Execute HDD formatting using the SST (ALL); then, download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
F:
1) ** Replace the HDD, and start up in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down on the 2 and 8
keys).
2) Using the SST, format the HDD (ALL) and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
G:
1) Set '1' to the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR. (Make these selections, and press the OK
key.)
H:
1) Turn off the main power, and turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 9 keys. (In response, the machine
will automatically start its recovery program*, and the control panel will turn completely black.)
2) When the screen has turned white, turn off and then on the main power.
If the recovery program fails to start in response, go to E.

* It will take about 30 to 50 min.
** As necessary, ask the user to make a backup of the address book, transfer, and user mode data using the RUI.
T-5-8
- HDD
Format
Partition
CHK-
Data items that will be lost
TYPE
1
all relating to images (e.g., reservations, Box,

Fax); mode memory, routine task button
DOSDEV3
PDL spool
PDLDEV
PDL-related file (e.g., font, registration form,
DOSDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
ICCProfile)
5-12
Chapter 5
- HDD
Format
Partition
CHK-
Data items that will be lost
TYPE
4
user data (address book data, transfer settings,

system software)
DOSDEV5
unselected
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
5-13
Chapter 5
5.5 Image Processing

5.5.1 Flow of Images
0000-4288
The following diagram shows the flow of images in relation to the machine's various functions:
Other iR machine
Original
A
Copy
A
Print output
SEND
FAX
PullScan
E-Mail
Scan
A
Image data
BOX
SEND
FAX
PDL Print
PC
F-5-9
5-14
Chapter 5
5.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module
0000-4292
The machine's major image processing is undertaken by the main controller; the construction of the modules
involved in image processing is as follows:
Reader input image processing block

Processes the image data read
by the reader unit.
Reader unit
DC controller PCB
IC10
Main controller
PCB (sub)
C,M
IC1003
IC1015
Y,Bk
IC1018
IC1012
Main controller
PCB (main)
HDD
Printer output image

processing block
Processes image data from
IC1015 for output to the
printer.
Printer unit
JPEG conversion
enlargement/reduction, rotation
color space conversion
binary processing
resolution conversion
CPU
communications control
memory access control
F-5-10
5-15
Chapter 5
5.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing
0000-4293
The image data read by the reader unit (RGB data) is processed by the main controller PCB (sub).
Reader unit
RGB
Processing that takes the

place of conventional input
masking; executes color
correction for the CCD's
RGB filters.
24
Main controller PCB (sub)
RG phase correction
Black text
identification
Input correction
Input direct
mapping
ACS
identification
Applicable to monochrome
mode; hereafter, Bk
signals only.
Edge emphases
Smoothing
Image signal
generation
See-through
prevention (BE)
Bk generation
(monochrome mode)
Framing
Blanking
Frame erasing
RGB
IC1015
F-5-11
5-16
Chapter 5
5.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Edit Processing Black
0000-4294
The machine uses IC1015 to undertake compression/decompression and edit processing.

Reader unit
24
RGB
RGB
24
4 Image area signal

IC1015
PDL input
JPEG compression
Resolution conversion
Enlargement/reduction
Main controller
PCB (main)
SDRAM
JPEG decompression
PC
Rotation
IC1012
Color conversion
Binary processing
For fax
transmission
JPEG compression
JPEG decompression
IC1003
IC1018
C,M
Y,Bk
HDD
F-5-12
5-17
Chapter 5
5.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing
0000-4295
In this block, the machine processes image data coming from IC1015 for output to the printer.
Reader unit
24
RGB

RGB
If ACS identifies the original as
being black-and-white, the Bk
signal is generated here
(if color, passed through).
4 Image area
signal
24
IC1015
RGB
24
IC1003
Background removal (AE)

Bk generation
In the case of color mode, the

Bk signal is generated here.
Image area
signal
IC1018
RGB-to-CMY conversion
Output direct mapping
For the text area, UCR

processing
CMYK
F value adjustment
Color balance correction
Output correction
The LUT for correction is

generated using PASCAL.
Optimum screen selection
Smoothing
C,M
Framing
Blanking
To DC controller PCB
Y,Bk
F-5-13
5-18
Chapter 5
5.6 Flow of Image Data

5.6.1 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions
0000-4296
The following shows the flow of image data when copier functions are used:
Reader unit
RGB
24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
RGB
image area signal
24

DC controller PCB
JPEG
compression
Magnification
Rotation
JPEG
decompression
Color conversion
SDRAM
HDD
F-5-14
5-19
Chapter 5
5.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions

The following shows the flow of image data when Box functions are used:
Reader unit
RGB
24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
RGB
24
image area signal

DC controller PCB
JPEG
decompression
JPEG
compression
Decompression
conversion
Rotation
SDRAM
HDD
F-5-15
5-20
0000-4297
Chapter 5
5.6.3 Flow of Image data for SEND function
0000-4298
The following shows the flow of image data for SEND functions:
Reader unit
RGB
24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
RGB
24
image area signal

JPEG
decompression
for B/Wimage
Binary
processing
MMR
compression
Resolution
conversion
Rotation
JPEG
compression
HDD
SDRAM
Ethernet board
F-5-16
5-21
Chapter 5
5.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions

The following is the flow of image data for fax transmission functions:
Reader unit
RGB
24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
image area signal
RGB
JPEG
compression
Resolution
conversion
JPEG
decompression
Rotation
MMR
compression
Binary
processing
HDD
SDRAM
Fax board
F-5-17
5-22
0000-4299
Chapter 5
5.6.5 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions
0000-4300
The following is the flow of image data for fax reception functions:
DC controller PCB

Resolution
conversion
Rotation
HDD
SDRAM
Fax board
F-5-18
5-23
Chapter 5
5.6.6 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions
0000-4301
The following is the flow of image data for PDL functions:
Reader unit
Printer unit
Main controller
PCB (main)
SDRAM
IC1015
JPEG
decompression
IC1003
IC1018
IC1012
DC controller PCB
Main controller
PCB (sub)
JPEG compression
RGB
HDD
UFR board
CMYK
PS Printer Server
Unit-C1
LIPS data
Printer output image

processing block
LIPS
RGB
CMYK
Display list data
RGB
Option interface board
GDI-UFR
PS data
PS
F-5-19
5-24
PC
Chapter 5
5.7
Parts
Procedure
Replacement
[1]
5.7.1 Main Controller PCB (main)

5.7.1.1 Removing the Upper
Rear Cover
0000-4303
1) Remove the upper rear cover.

F-5-21
5.7.1.2
Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover
0000-4308
1) Removing the left rear upper cover.
5.7.1.3
Removing
the
Controller PCB Cover
5.7.1.4
Removing
the
Controller Box Cover
DC
0000-4309
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC

controller PCB cover [2].
0000-4310
1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power

distribution PCB, and free the harness from the
wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and
detach the main controller cover [4].
F-5-20
When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover
F-5-22
When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off

will not come into contact with the latch of the flat
cable. Otherwise, the flat cable can come loose.
5-25
Chapter 5
5.7.1.5 Removing the HDD
0000-4311
5.7.1.7 Removing the Ethernet

Board
0000-4313
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet

Points to Note When Removing the HDD
board [2] together with its mounting plate.
When removing the HDD, be sure to take full care

against damage by static discharge. Moreover, do not
subject the HDD to impact.
1) Remove the 4 screws [1] and the flat cable [2], and
disconnect the connector [3]; then, detach the HDD
[4].
F-5-25
2) Removing the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet
board [3] from the mounting plate [2].
F-5-23
5.7.1.6 Removing the Hard

Disk Mounting Plates
0000-4312
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the 2 hard disk

mounting plates [2].
F-5-26
F-5-24
5-26
Chapter 5
5.7.1.8 Removing the UFR

Board
0000-4314
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the UFR board

[2] together with its mounting plate.
F-5-29
5.7.1.10 Removing the Main

F-5-27
Controller PCB (sub)

[3] from its mounting plate [2].
0000-4316
1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and

remove the flat cable [1].
F-5-30
2) Remove the 7 screws [1], and remove the main
F-5-28
controller PCB (sub) [2].
5.7.1.9 Removing the SRAM

PCB
0000-4315
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the SRAM

PCB [2].
F-5-31
5-27
Chapter 5

Controller PCB (main)
0000-4317
1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used for connection to

the DC controller PCB.
F-5-34
F-5-32
2) Disconnect the connectors of the PCB; then,
remove the 10 screws [1], and detach the main
controller PCB (main) [2].
F-5-35
5.7.2 Main Controller PCB (sub)

Rear Cover
0000-4321
5.7.2.2
Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover

F-5-33
5.7.2.3
5.7.1.12 When Replacing the

Main Controller PCB (main)
0000-4322
0000-4318
Removing
the
0000-4323
Be sure to use the image memory (SDRAM) [1] PCB
and the boot ROM [2] from the old PCB on the new
main controller PCB (main).

5-28
Chapter 5
5.7.2.5 Removing the Hard

Disk Mounting Plates
0000-4325
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the 2 hard disk

mounting plates [2].
F-5-38
F-5-36
0000-4324

[4].
F-5-37
5-29
Chapter 5

PCB
0000-4326

PCB [2].
F-5-41

F-5-39
0000-4329
Be sure to use the SRAM PCB [1] from the old PCB
on the new main controller PCB (sub) [2].

Controller PCB (sub)
0000-4327
1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and

remove the flat cable [1].
F-5-42
F-5-40
2) Remove the 7 screws [1], and remove the main
controller PCB (sub) [2].
5-30
Chapter 5
5.7.3 SRAM PCB

Rear Cover
0000-4331
5.7.3.2
Removing
the
0000-4332

F-5-44

PCB
0000-4334

PCB [2].
F-5-45
F-5-43
0000-4333

SRAM PCB
0000-4335

When the SRAM PCB is replaced, all data in its
memory will be lost (file-related, user mode-related,
service mode-related, history-related files). There will

be no error operation, and initialization will take place
automatically.
If you pull out the SRAM PCB from machine B and
[4].
mount it to machine A, the PCB will be initialized and

be rendered useless for machine A or B. Take full
care.
5-31
Chapter 5
1) When you turn on the power after replacing the

SRAM PCB, the machine will execute automatic
initialization and will indicate a message on its
panel to the effect that you are to turn off and then
on the power switch found on its right side. Follow
the message and turn off and then on the machine.
2) Using service mode, initialize the RAM.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>MN-CON
Before starting the work, be sure to inform the user

that all image data stored in the Box will be lost and
obtain his/her consent.
F-5-46
5.7.4 UFR Board
5.7.4.4 Removing the UFR

Rear Cover
0000-4338
0000-4341
5.7.4.2
Board
[2] together with its mounting plate.
Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover
0000-4339
5.7.4.3
Removing
the
0000-4340

F-5-47

[3] from its mounting plate [2].
5-32
Chapter 5
F-5-48
5.7.5 Ethernet Board

Rear Cover
F-5-49
0000-4343
5.7.5.4 Removing the Ethernet
Board
5.7.5.2
Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover
0000-4346
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet

0000-4344
board [2] together with its mounting plate.
5.7.5.3
Removing
the
0000-4345

F-5-50
2) Removing the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet
board [3] from the mounting plate [2].
5-33
Chapter 5
F-5-51
5.7.6 Differential PCB

F-5-52

Rear Cover
0000-4348
5.7.6.2
5.7.6.4
Removing
Differential PCB
0000-4351
1) Remove the flat cable [1].
Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover
the
0000-4349
5.7.6.3
Removing
the
0000-4350

F-5-53
2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the
differential PCB [2].
5-34
Chapter 5
5.7.8 HDD
Rear Cover
0000-4357
5.7.8.2
Removing
the
0000-4358

F-5-54

5.7.7 Power Distribution PCB

Rear Cover
0000-4353
5.7.7.2 Removing the Power

Distribution PCB
0000-4354
1) Disconnect the connectors from the PCB, and

remove the 4 screws [1] to detach the power
distribution PCB [2].
F-5-56
0000-4359

F-5-55

[4].
5-35
Chapter 5
control settings>group ID control>count control;

then, check to see that IDs from 00000001 through
00001000 have been prepared.
Make the following selections: user mode>system
control
settings>network
settings>TCP/IP
settings>IP address; then, set up 'IP address'

'gateway address' and 'subnet mask'
administrator setup; then, fill in 'system control
group ID' and 'system control ID No.' thereafter,
turn off and then on the machine.
If you leave out 'system control group ID' and
F-5-57
'system control ID No.' the service engineer will not

be able to 'register card to device' as part of setup

HDD
work for NSA.

0000-4360
If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Not Used
3) With the machine in standby state, download the

card ID to be used from NSA.
4) When the card data has been downloaded from
1) Formatting the HDD

While holding down the 2 and 8 keys on the control
NSA, check to see that the ID data has correctly
panel, turn on the power to start up. Using the HD
been downloaded on the screen brought up by
formatting function of the SST, format all
making the following selections:

user mode>system control settings>group ID control
partitions.
(Only the downloaded ID data must be indicated.)
2) Downloading the Software

Using the SST, download the various software
5) Make copies using a user card registered with NSA,
(system, language, RUI). The machine will take
and check to see that statistical operations are made
about 10 min to start up after downloading.
for the device in question.
If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Used Together

with a Card Reader
The card ID used by the NSA resides on the HDD. If
you have replaced the HDD, therefore, you will have
to newly download the card data from NSA to enable
the statistical operations of NSA. After going through
steps 1) and 2) above, perform the following:
1) Set the following in service mode:
Make
the
following
selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD; then,
enter the number of the first card, and press [OK].
(For instance, if cards No. 1 through No. 1000 are
used for group control, enter '1')
2) Turn off and then on the machine; when the
machine has started up, perform the following in
user mode:
5-36
Chapter 5
5.7.9 Controller Fan
5.7.9.3
Removing
Controller Fan
Rear Cover
the
0000-4302
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4

0000-8501
screws [2]; then, detach the controller fan [3].
5.7.9.2
Removing
the
0000-8192

F-5-59
F-5-58
5-37
Chapter 5
5-38
Chapter 6 Original
Exposure System
Contents
Contents
6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode, 1 original) ............. 6-6
6.3 Various Control Mechanisms ............................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ....................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................ 6-8
6.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction ............................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio ....................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction .......................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.3 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................................ 6-9
6.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp .................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp .................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.3.3 Turning On/Off the Lamp ................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.3.4 Checking for an Error ........................................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals ................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.4.2 Points of Detection (original size) ..................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.4.3 Outline of Detection Operations ........................................................................................................ 6-11
6.4.1 Copyboard Glass ....................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.1.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.2 Exposure Lamp ......................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4.2.2 Removing the Reader Left Cover/Reader Right Cover/Reader Front Cover .................................... 6-15
6.4.2.4 Removing the Scanning Lamp .......................................................................................................... 6-16
6.4.3 Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................. 6-17
6.4.3.4 Removing the Reader Controller PCB .............................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.3.5 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB .................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.4 Interface PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.4.5 Inverter PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.4.5.3 Removing the Inverter PCB .............................................................................................................. 6-22
6.4.6 CCD Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 6-22
Contents

6.4.6.2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover ......................................................................................................... 6-23
6.4.6.4 Removing the CCD Unit .................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.4.6.5 After Replacing the CCD Unit ........................................................................................................... 6-24
6.4.7 Fuse PCB (option) ..................................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.4.7.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit (option; 100/230v model only) ......................................................... 6-25
6.4.8 Scanner Motor ........................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.4.8.4 Removing the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................ 6-27
6.4.8.5 Mounting the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................. 6-27
6.4.9 Original Cover Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.4.9.3 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Cover ........................................................... 6-29
6.4.9.4 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor ..................................................................... 6-29
6.4.10 Scanner HP Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 6-29
6.4.10.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ................................................... 6-29
6.4.10.3 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor .......................................................................... 6-30
6.4.11 Original Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 6-30
6.4.11.2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover ....................................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.11.3 Removing the Original Size Detection Unit .................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.11.4 Removing the Original Size Sensor ................................................................................................. 6-31
6.4.12 Reader Heater (option) ............................................................................................................................ 6-31
6.4.12.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit .......................................................................................................... 6-33
6.4.12.4 Removing the Reader Heater (option; 100/230V model only) ........................................................ 6-33
Chapter 6
6.1 Construction
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0006-0654
The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the original exposure system are as follows:
T-6-1
Item
Description
Scanning lamp
Xenon lamp
Original scanning
in book mode: by moving the scanner

in ADF mode: by moving the scanner
Reading resolution
600 dpi (main scanning) x 600 dpi (sub scanning)
Scanner position detection
by scanner HP sensor (PS2)
Lens
lens array (single focus, fixed)
Enlargement/reduction (zoom)
in copyboard cover mode: 100%

in ADF mode: 100%
in main scanning direction, image processing in the
controller unit
in sub scanning direction, image processing in the controller
unit
Scanner drive control
No. 1/No. 2 mirror mount (control by a pulse motor M1)
Scanning lamp
[1] activation control by an inverter circuit
Activation control
[2] detection of error
Original size identification
[1] in book mode,

sub scanning direction: by reflection type sensor
main scanning direction: by CCD
[2] in ADF mode: by ADF
6.1.2 Major Components
0000-4383
The major components of the original exposure system are as f follows:

T-6-2
Component
Notation
Description
Scanning lamp
LA1
xenon lamp (intensity of 35,000 lx)
Scanner motor
M1
2-phase pulse motor (pulse control)
Scanner HP sensor
PS2
photointerrupter (scanner home position detection)
6-1
Chapter 6
Component
Notation
Copyboard cover open/
Description
PS1
photointerrupter (copyboard cover state (open/closed)
closed sensor
detection; identifies as being "Closed"when the

copyboard is brought down to 30 deg or lower)
Mirror
---
No. 1/No. 2/No. 3 mirror
Scanner motor
Scanner HP sensor

CCD unit
Interface PCB
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
Fuse PCB
Inverter PCB
Anti-condensation heater
Available as option only for
100/230V model
Original size sensor

(Inch)
(AB, Inch)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
F-6-1
Shading position
Start position
Original size detection position
Home position sensor detection position
Image leading edge

Vertical size plate
White plate
Original
No. 2 mirror
Scanning lamp
No. 1 mirror base
No. 3 mirror
No. 1 mirror
No. 2 mirror base
F-6-2
6-2
Copyboard glass
(w/ integrated white plate)
Lens
CCD
Chapter 6
Scanner motor (M1)

Light-blocking plate
Scanning
lamp (LA1)
Scanner HP
sensor (PS2)
(forward)
(reverse)
No. 1 mirror base
No. 2 mirror base
F-6-3
Scanner motor (M1)

Light-blocking plate
Scanning
lamp (LA1)
Scanner HP
sensor (SR2)
(forward)
(reverse)
No. 1 mirror base
No. 2 mirror base
F-6-4
6-3
Chapter 6
6.1.3 Construction of the Control System
0000-4384
The control system of the original exposure system is constructed as follows:

Scanner motor (M1)
Scanner motor drive control
To printer
(main controller)
Interface PCB
CCD unit
J
03 306
J3
08
02
J3
J2
05
04
07
J3
J2
3
J
05
03
J3
2
2
J
J
10
06
J2
To DF
J6
J6
01
02
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
Scanning lamp
activation control
Scanner HP sensor
Inverter PCB
Scanning lamp (LA1)
F-6-5
6.1.4 Reader Controller PCB
0000-4385
The construction of the functions of the reader controller PCB is as follows:

Image processing (shading correction)
Storage of start-up program (boot ROM)
Scanner motor
Storage of firmware
(flash ROM)
Printer unit
DF
Not used
DC24V
DC15V
DC5V
DC3.3V
J203
J202
J210
IC5
(CPU)
IC16
J201
IC7 IC14
J204
J206
Inverter
PCB
J205
J207
IC3
J208

Backup of service
mode settings
(EEP ROM)
CCD unit
F-6-6
6-4
Chapter 6
6.2 Basic Sequence

ON (to stabilize lamp intensity)

Main power
switch ON
0000-4386
CCD output gain adjustment

(for color original)
CCD output gain adjustment
(for black-and-white original)
SREADY
STBY
Scanner HP
sensor (PS2)
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
Scanner motor(M1)
Reverse Forward
Forward
Shading position
Original size detection position
F-6-7
Original size
HP sensor
HP
Start
position
Shading
position
Image
leading
edge
Original size
detection
position
1. (The main power switch is

turned on.)
The scanner is moved to the
shading position.
2. The scanner is moved to the

scanner size detection position.
: No. 1 mirror base position
F-6-8
6-5
Chapter 6
6.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start

Key (book mode, 1 original)
0000-4387
Shading correction
(for 1st sheet)
Start key
ON
STBY
SREADY
SCFW
Shading correction
(for 2nd sheet)
SCRW
STBY
Scanner HP
sensor (PS2)
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
Scanner motor(M1)
Reverse
Reverse
Forward
Original size
Start position
detection position
Shading position
Start position
Shading position
HP
Original size
detection position
F-6-9
HP sensor
HP
Start
Shading
position position
1. (The Start key is pressed.)

The scanner moves to the
shading position.
2. After shading correction,
the scanner moves to the
start position.
3. The scanner scans the
original.
4. The scanner moves to
the shading position.
5. After shading correction,
the scanner moves to the
start position.
the start position.
the original size detection
position.
: No. 1 mirror base position
F-6-10
6-6
Image Original size Image

trailing Stop
leading detection
edge
position
edge position
Chapter 6
6.3 Various Control Mechanisms

6.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System
6.3.1.1 Outline
0000-4388
The following shows the parts associated with the scanner drive system:
[1]
Reader
controller
PCB
Interface
PCB
[2]
Scanner motor (M1)
[3]
Light-blocking
plate
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
(forward)
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(PS1)
(reverse)
Scanner HP
sensor (PS2)
No. 1 mirror base
No. 2 mirror base
F-6-11
1. Scanner Motor (M1) Drive Signal
turns on/off the motor, and controls the direction/speed of its rotation.
2. Scanner HP Detection Signal
indicates that the No. 1 mirror base is in the home position.
3. Copyboard Cover Detection Signal
identifies the state (open/closed) of the copyboard cover.
6-7
Chapter 6
6.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor
0000-4389
The following shows the construction of the control system of the scanner motor; the motor driver operates in
response to signals from the CPU to turn on/off the scanner motor or to control the direction/speed of its rotation.
Interface PCB
Scanner
motor
+24V/15V
J202 J308
[1]
CPU
Motor driver
A*
B
B*
J306
3
1
4
5
2
6
M1
[1] Scanner motor control signal
F-6-12
a. Moving the Scanner in Reverse for Image Scanning
After scanning an image, the movement of the No. 1 mirror base to the shading position is controlled at a speed
twice as high as it is moved to scan an image regardless of the color mode.
b. Moving the Scanner Forward for Image Scanning
To scan an image, the movement of the No. 1 mirror base unit is controlled by the following motor control
mechanism:
Start
position
Image leading edge
Acceleration
Image trailing edge Stop

Constant speed
Deceleration
Travel
speed
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Travel distance
[1] Acceleration area:
accelerates to a speed suited to black-and-white/SEND

mode or full-color mode
[2] Approach speed area: allows a margin of acceleration (approach run) to ensure
stable speed
[3] Reading image area: reads images at specific speed (if black-and-white/SEND
mode, twice as fast as in full-color mode)
[4] Deceleration area:
decelerates after the image trailing edge for a stop
F-6-13
MEMO:
The scanner is moved at the following speed to suit the selected mode:
- in full-color copy mode, 117 mm/sec.
- in black-and-white copy/black-and-white SEND mode, 234 mm/sec
- full-color SEND mode, 234 mm/sec (300 dpi or less);
117 mm/sec (more than 300 dpi)
6-8
Chapter 6
6.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction
6.3.2.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio
0000-4390
1. in copyboard cover mode, 100%

2. in ADF mode, 100%
MEMO:
- The speed of scanning is 234 mm/sec in black-and-white copy or black-and-white SEND mode (reduction by 50%);
to make up for the difference, the reading speed of the CCD is doubled, ultimately resulting in a 100%
reproduction ratio.
- The same is true of a resolution of 300 dpi or less in full-color SEND mode.
6.3.2.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction
0000-4391
In copyboard cover mode and ADF mode, reading in main scanning direction is at 100% at all times, and the
reproduction ratio is changed through data processing in the main controller.
6.3.2.3 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction
0000-4392
In copyboard cover mode and ADF mode, reading in sub scanning direction is at 100% at all times, and the
reproduction ratio is changed through data processing in the main controller.
6.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp

6.3.3.1 Outline
0000-4393
The items of control related to the scanning lamp and the construction of its control system are as follows:
1) turning on/off the lamp
2) checking for a fault
Inverter PCB
Xenon lamp
LA1
Activation
control circuit
J601
J206
GND
1
9
GND
2
8
GND
3
7
GND
4
6
LAMP-ON
5
5
24V
6
4
24V
7
3
8 Sync signal 2
24V
9
1
CPU
F-6-14
6-9
Chapter 6
6.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp
0000-4394
The machine's scanning lamp is a xenon lamp made up of a glass tube in which xenon gas is sealed. On the outside
of the tube are 2 terminals laid in parallel in axial direction, while the inner side of the tube is coated with fluorescent
material. When a high frequency, high voltage is applied to the terminals, the gas starts to discharge, thus causing
the fluorescent material to emit light.
Electrode
Electrode
Fluorescent
material
Open interval
Glass tube
Electrode
Electrode
F-6-15
6.3.3.3 Turning On/Off the Lamp
0000-4395
The scanning lamp is turned on/off by the drive signal (LAMP_ON) sent by the CPU on the reader controller PCB.
When the signal is sent, the inverter PCB generates high-frequency, high voltage in the activation control circuit
using the drive voltage (+24 V) supplied by the reader controller PCB for the activation of the xenon lamp.
6.3.3.4 Checking for an Error
0000-4396
At time of initial activation (e.g., shading correction), the lamp is checked for a fault (low intensity, activation failure;
i.e., activation error caused by lack of intensity).
E220 (lamp activation error at power-on)
Indicates a fault in the inverter PCB, reader controller PCB, or scanning
6.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals

6.3.4.1 Outline
0000-4397
The machine identifies the size of originals with reference to the combinations of the outputs of reflection type
sensors and the intensities of the CCD measured at specific points.
- in main scanning direction, of CCD (for AB, 4 points; for Inch, 2 points)
- in sub scanning direction, of reflection type photosensor (for AB, 1 point; for Inch, 2 points)
The machine identifies the size of an original using the following steps:
1. Search for External Light (main scanning direction only)
With the scanning lamp OFF, the level of the CCD at each point of detection is measured.
2. Detection of the Sensor Output Level
The scanning lamp is turned on, and the CCD level at each point of detecting in main scanning direction is
measured.
In addition, the LED of the reflection type photosensor in sub scanning direction is turned on to measure the output
of the sensor.
6-10
Chapter 6
The combination of these outputs is used to identify the size of the original.
For specific operation, see the pages that follow.
6.3.4.2 Points of Detection (original size)
0000-4398
For main scanning direction, the No. 1 mirror base is moved to the following positions to measure the intensity of
light at each point of detection. For sub scanning direction, the outputs of the sensors mounted at the following points
are used.
AB-configuration
Inch-configuration
Original Original
sensor 1 sensor 2
Original
sensor 1
Original detection
position1
Original detection
position2
Original detection
position3
B5
Original detection
position4
B5R
A4R
Original detection
position 1
B4
A3
A4
LTRR
Original detection
position 2
LTR
CCD original detection position
LGL
279.4431.8mm
(11"17")
CCD original detection position
F-6-16
6.3.4.3 Outline of Detection Operations
0000-4399
a. Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Closed

T-6-3
1. The machine is in a standby state.
Xenon lamp
No. 1 mirror
at original detection position
base:
Original sensor
Copyboard cover
Reader unit
Original detection position 1

Copyboard glass
xenon lamp:
OFF
original
sensor:
Original detection positio
2. The copyboard cover is opened.

No. 1 mirror
at original detection point
base:
(external light)
xenon lamp:
OFF
original
OFF
sensor:
6-11
Chapter 6
3. The copyboard cover is closed.

- If the external light is blocked, the machine
assumes the presence of an original; outside the
Original
(A4R)
(external light)
area, where light is detected, the machine

assumes that there is no original. (search for
external light)
At this point in time, B5, B4, A4, and A3 are
excluded.
- When the copyboard cover is brought to 30
deg, the copyboard cover sensor identifies the
condition to be "cover closed," thus causing the
machine to start original size detection.
- After a search for external light, the machine
30
turns on the xenon lamp (for main scanning

direction), and checks the reflected light by the
CCD at 4 points. For sub scanning direction,
the machine efers to the outputs of original
sensors.
4. The copyboard cover is fully down.

- The machine monitors the outputs of the
sensors for 5 sec after the copyboard cover
sensor has identified a "closed" state.
-If there is no change in the level, the machine
assumes the presence of an original at the
sensor. The machine uses the combination of
the outputs (changes) at 5 points.
5. The machine is in a standby sate (waiting for a

press on the Start key).
No. 1 mirror
at original detection position
base:
xenon lamp:
OFF
original
OFF
sensor:
6-12
Chapter 6
AB-configuration
Original
size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5
B5R
None
Inch-configuration
CCD detection position
Original
sensor 1
Original CCD detection Original Original

position
size
1
2 sensor 1 sensor 2
11" X 17"
LGL
LTRR
LTR
None
:change absent
: change present
F-6-17
6-13
Chapter 6
6.4
Parts
Procedure
Replacement
6.4.1 Copyboard Glass

6.4.1.1
Removing
the
Copyboard Glass
0000-4400
1) Open the ADF or the copyboard cover.
F-6-19
2)
3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass
Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard
retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3].
Glass
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to
touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind
it.
(The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images.)
If dirt is found, be sure to remove it using lint-free
paper moistened with alcohol.
F-6-20
6.4.1.2 After Replacing the

Copyboard Glass
0000-4401
Enter the value indicated on the copyboard glass (F01301-04) using the following service mode items:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X/Y/Z
Use it to enter data for the standard white plate.
820686679349
F-6-21
F-6-18
6-14
Chapter 6
6.4.2 Exposure Lamp

6.4.2.1
Removing
the
Copyboard Glass
0000-8280

2)
F-6-23

Glass
it.


F-6-24
6.4.2.2 Removing the Reader

Left
Cover/Reader
Right
Cover/Reader Front Cover
0000-4424
1) Remove the reader left cover, reader right cover,

and reader front cover.
6.4.2.3 Removing the CCD

Unit Cover
0000-4425
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the CCD unit

F-6-22
cover [2].
6-15
Chapter 6
3) Slide the No. 1 mirror base [1] until it matches

against the cut-off in the frame; then, remove the 3
screws [2], and remove the scanning lamp [3].
F-6-25
6.4.2.4 Removing the Scanning

Lamp
0000-4426
F-6-28
1) Peel the sheet [1] (1 each at front and rear) of the

reader frame.
Points to Note When Attaching the Scanning

Lamp
To mount the scanning lamp, route the harness [1] of
the lamp unit through the white guide [2] of the No. 2
mirror base and then the black harness guide [3];
thereafter, connect the connector [4] to the inverter
PCB.
F-6-26
2) Disconnect the connector [1] from the inverter
PCB, and free the harness [3] from the edge saddle
[2] of the frame.
F-6-29
F-6-27
6-16
Chapter 6
6.4.3 Reader Controller PCB

6.4.3.1
Removing
the
Copyboard Glass
0000-8290

2)
F-6-31

Glass
it.


F-6-32

Unit Cover
0000-8292

cover [2].
F-6-30
F-6-33
6-17
Chapter 6
6.4.3.3 Removing the Original

Size Detection Unit
J203
0000-8293
J202
J210
IC5
(CPU)
IC16

screws [2]; then, detach the original size detection
J201
J206
J205
IC7
IC14
ON
J204 OFF
SW1
1 2J208
J207
IC3
F-6-36
unit [3].
T-6-4
SW-1
SW-2
AB
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
A/INCH
OFF
ON
AB/INCH
ON
ON
- Using the SST, download the latest firmware.

F-6-34
- Enter the values indicated on the service label in

service mode (refer to the following list).

Controller PCB
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
0000-4432
1) Remove the 5 flat cables [1], disconnect the
Use it to adjust the scanner leading edge position.

COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
connector [2], and remove the 4 screws [3]; then,
Use it to adjust the CCD read start cell position.
detach the reader controller PCB [4].
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
Use it to enter an adjustment value for the scanner
shading measurement point.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X
Use it to enter white level data for the standard
while plate.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Y
white plate.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Z
while plate.
F-6-35
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CLF-R-RG
Use it to enter a color displacement correction value

Reader Controller PCB
for sub scanning direction.

0000-4433
- Set the DIP switch on the reader controller PCB to

the same settings as the initial PCB.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CLF-R-GB
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-RG
6-18
Chapter 6
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-GB
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-RG
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-GB
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-GB
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-RG
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-GB
F-6-37
6.4.4 Interface PCB

6.4.4.1
Removing
the
Copyboard Glass
0006-0814

2)
F-6-38
Glass
it.
6-19
Chapter 6

F-6-41
6.4.4.3 Removing the Interface
F-6-39
PCB
0000-4403

Rear Cover
0000-4402
1) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader

power cable.
Points to Note Before Removing the Interface PCB

Without detaching the motor unit, mark its position of
the rear side plate using a scriber [A].
[1]
F-6-40
2) Disconnect the reader controller communications
F-6-42
cable.
3) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the reader rear
cover [2].
1) Remove the 2 RS tightening screws and 4 binding

screws [2]; then, detach the I/F PCB cover [3].
6-20
Chapter 6
6.4.5 Inverter PCB

6.4.5.1
Removing
the
Copyboard Glass
0000-8287

2)

F-6-43
Glass
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2

connectors [2]; then, detach the connector base [3].

it.
F-6-44
3) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] and the 2 flat
cables [2], and remove the 5 screws [3] then, detach
the interface PCB unit [4].
F-6-46
F-6-45
6-21
Chapter 6
6.4.5.3 Removing the Inverter

PCB
0000-4431
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the flat

cable; then, remove the screw [3], and detach the
inverter PCB [4].
F-6-47

F-6-50
6.4.6 CCD Unit

6.4.6.1
Removing
the
Copyboard Glass
0000-8284

2)
F-6-48

Unit Cover

0000-8288
Glass
cover [2].
it.
F-6-49
6-22
Chapter 6
F-6-53

Unit Cover
0000-8285

cover [2].
F-6-51
F-6-54

F-6-52
Size Detection Unit
0000-8286


unit [3].
6-23
Chapter 6
6.4.7 Fuse PCB (option)

Rear Cover
0000-4411

power cable.
F-6-55
[1]

Unit
0000-4429
4) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] of the reader controller

F-6-57
PCB, 2 screws [2], and leaf spring [3]; then, detach

the CCD unit [4].

cable.
cover [2].
F-6-56

CCD Unit
When you have replaced the CCD unit, enter the

values (for color displacement correction in sub
scanning direction) indicated on the label attached to
the unit in service mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG/GB
Use it to enter the image position correction value
(dependent on the CCD unit).
6-24
F-6-58
0000-4430
6.4.7.2
Removing
Copyboard
Cover
the
Open/
Closed Sensor Mounting
0000-4412
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the sensor

base [2].
Chapter 6

F-6-59
6.4.7.3 Removing the Fuse

PCB Unit (option; 100/230v
model only)
0000-4413
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], ad remove the 2

screws [2]; then, remove the fuse PCB unit [3].
F-6-61
F-6-60
6.4.8 Scanner Motor

6.4.8.1
Removing
the
Copyboard Glass
0006-7342
F-6-62

2)
Glass
it.
6-25
Chapter 6
6.4.8.3 Removing the Interface

PCB
0000-4420
Points to Note Before Removing the Interface PCB

Without detaching the motor unit, mark its position of
the rear side plate using a scriber [A].
F-6-63

Rear Cover
0000-4419

power cable.
F-6-66
1) Remove the 2 RS tightening screws and 4 binding

[1]
screws [2]; then, detach the I/F PCB cover [3].
F-6-64
cable.
cover [2].
F-6-67
connectors [2]; then, detach the connector base [3].
F-6-65
6-26
Chapter 6
2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the scanner

motor [2].
F-6-68
F-6-71
3) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] and the 2 flat

cables [2], and remove the 5 screws [3] then, detach
6.4.8.5 Mounting the Scanner
the interface PCB unit [4].
Motor
0000-4422
1) Fit the scanner motor from the machine's rear, and

attach the belt [1] on the pulley [2] of the motor unit
through the space (front side) vacated by the
copyboard glass.
F-6-69
6.4.8.4 Removing the Scanner

Motor
0000-4421
1) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the DF base
F-6-72
[2].
2) With the belt on the pulley, pull the motor unit [1]
as far as the marking [A] you have drawn with a
scriber; then, secure it in place with 3 screws [2].
F-6-70
6-27
Chapter 6
F-6-73
F-6-75
6.4.9.2
Removing
Copyboard
Points to Note After Mounting the Scanner Motor
When you have mounted the motor, either move the
mirror or make a test print (so as to be sure that the
motor belt is correctly placed).
Cover
base [2].
0000-4404

power cable.
F-6-76
F-6-74
cable.
cover [2].
6-28
0006-7327
[1]
Open/
6.4.9 Original Cover Sensor
Rear Cover
the
Chapter 6
6.4.9.3
Removing
Copyboard
Cover
the
Open/
Closed Sensor Cover
0000-4406
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the

[1]
screws [2]; then, detach the sensor cover [3].
F-6-79
cable.
cover [2].
F-6-77
6.4.9.4
Removing
Copyboard
Cover
the
Open/
Closed Sensor
0000-4407
1) Remove the copyboard cover open/closed sensor

[1].
F-6-80
6.4.10.2
Copyboard
Removing
Cover
the
Open/
0000-4409

base [2].
F-6-78
6.4.10 Scanner HP Sensor

Rear Cover
0000-4408

power cable.
F-6-81
6-29
Chapter 6
6.4.10.3 Removing the Mirror

Base Home Position Sensor
0000-4410
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the mirror

base home position sensor [2].
F-6-82
6.4.11 Original Sensor

6.4.11.1
Removing
the
Copyboard Glass
0000-8281
F-6-83

2)

Glass
it.
F-6-84

6-30
Chapter 6
F-6-85
F-6-87

Unit Cover

0000-8282
Size Sensor
1) While freeing the claw at the edge, detach the
cover [2].
original size sensor [1].
F-6-88
F-6-86
6.4.12 Reader Heater (option)

Size Detection Unit
0000-4427
6.4.12.1
Removing
the
Copyboard Glass

unit [3].
0000-4428
0000-8933

2)

Glass
it.
6-31
Chapter 6

F-6-91

Rear Cover
0000-4415

power cable.
F-6-89
[1]
F-6-92
cable.
cover [2].
F-6-90

F-6-93
6-32
Chapter 6

PCB Unit
0000-4416
1) Remove the fuse PCB unit.

Heater
(option;
100/230V
model only)
0000-4417
1) Move the No. 1 mirror base [1] into the direction of

the arrow.
F-6-96
2) Remove the 3 screws used to secure the Reader

heater [1] in place, and remove the harness band
[3].
F-6-94
When moving the mirror base, be sure to hold the cutup [A] on the mirror stay.
F-6-97
3) Shift the mirror base to the farthest right, and free
the harness guide [1] at one location; then, while
shifting it to the left, detach the harness guide, and
detach the Reader heater [2].
F-6-95
F-6-98
6-33
Chapter 6
6-34
Chapter 7 Image
Processing System
Contents
Contents
7.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Functional Construction of the PCBs ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Analog Image Processing .................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.2 CCD Drive .................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3 CCD Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction ................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.4 A/D Conversion of CCD Putput ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.3 Digital Image Processing ................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.3.2 Shading Correction ..................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Chapter 7
7.1 Outline
0000-4434
The machine's image processing system has the following specifications and functions:
T-7-1
1)
CCD (image sensor)
number of lines:3 (RGB, 1 line each)

number of pixels:7350
size of pixel:9.3X9.3 um
2)
Shading Correction
shading adjustment: executed in service mode

shading correction: executed for each copy
7.1.2 Functional Construction of the PCBs

Analog image processing block
0000-4435
Digital image processing block
CCD
Analog
image
processing
A/D
conversion
Shading processing
Controller block
CCD/AP PCB
F-7-1
The PCBs of the image processing system have the following functions:
T-7-2
1)
CCD/P PCB:
CCD drive, analog image processing, A/D conversion
2)
Reader Controller PCB:
shading correction
7-1
Chapter 7
7.2 Analog Image Processing

7.2.1 Outline
0000-4436
The machine uses the CCD/AP PCB to perform analog image processing for each RGB line; the major operations
involved are as follows:
T-7-3
1
)
2
)
3
)
CCD drive
CCD output gain correction, offset correction
CCD output A/D conversion
CCD (RGB, 1 line each)
J101
J204
A12V
A5V
Odd-numbered Even-numbered
pixel
pixels
Analog
image
signal
Analog image
processing
CCD drive
control
Even-numbered
pixel
A/D
gain correction Odd-numbered conversion
pixel
offset correction
Gain
correction data
Digital
image signal
10
J102
CCD/AP PCB
F-7-2
7-2
J204
CCD
control signal
J205
Reader
controller
PCB
Chapter 7
7.2.2 CCD Drive
0000-4437
The CCD sensor used in the machine is a 3-line (RGB, 1 line each) linear image sensor consisting of photocells of
7350 pixels. The signals photo-converted by the light-receiving block are sent out as analog signals of 2 channels
(even-numbered pixels EVEN and odd-numbered pixels ODD).
Output buffer
Odd-numbered data
Shift register
Gate
Light-receiving block
(photodiode)
6 5
4 3
2 1
Gate
Even-numbered data
shift register
Output buffer
F-7-3
CCD Block Diagram
7.2.3 CCD Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction
0000-4438
The analog video signals from the CCD are modified so that the rate of its amplitude is of a specific level (gain
correction); it is also modified so that its output voltage in the absence of incident light is a specific level (offset
correction).
7.2.4 A/D Conversion of CCD Putput
0000-4439
The odd-numbered and even-numbered analog video signals after correction are further converted into 10-bit digital
signals corresponding to the levels of the pixel voltages by the A/D converter.
7-3
Chapter 7
7.3 Digital Image Processing

7.3.1 Outline
0006-0674
The machine uses the reader controller PCB for digital image processing; the major operations involved are as
follows:
1. Shading Correction
J101
J204
Gain
correction data
EEP-ROM
CPU
Target
value
SRAM
CCD/AP
PCB
J102
J205
Digital
image signal
10
J203
Shading correction
Digital image signal

8
F-7-4
7.3.2 Shading Correction
0006-0678
The output of the CCD is not necessarily uniform even when the density of the original is even for the following
factors:
1. variation in sensitivity among pixels of the CCD
2. difference in transmission between the middle and the edge of the lens
3. difference in the intensity of light between the middle and the edges of the scanning lamp
4. deterioration of the scanning lamp
The machine executes shading correction so as to even out the discrepancies in CCD output. Shading correction may
be shading adjustment, in which a target value is determined in service mode, or shading correction, in which a target
value is determined for each scan of the original.
Shading Adjustment
In shading adjustment, the density of the standard white plate is measured, and the result is stored in memory as
density data; the data is then computed to obtain the target value for shading correction.
Shading Correction
Shading correction is executed for each scan of the original. The density of the standard white plate is measured, and
the shading correction circuit compares the result against the target value stored in memory in advance; the result of
comparison is then used as the shading correction value to make up for the discrepancies among CCD pixels
occurring at time of scans, thus ensuring uniform image density.
7-4
Chapter 7
Characteristics
after correction
CCD output
Characteristics
before correction
Target value
Measurement
taken
White
Density of original
Standard white plate
F-7-5
7-5
Chapter 7
7-6
Chapter 8
Laser Exposure
Contents
Contents
8.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Various Control ................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing .................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1.1 Turning On/Off the Laser .................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1.2 BD Signal ............................................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.3.1.3 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction .................................................................. 8-8
8.3.1.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction .................................................................... 8-8
8.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ..................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.2.1 APC Control ........................................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.3.2.2 PWM Control ...................................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter .................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ............................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.5 Correcting Image Displacement ................................................................................................................ 8-11
8.3.5.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.3.5.2 Timing of Color Displacement Detection/Correction ....................................................................... 8-12
8.3.5.3 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................. 8-13
8.3.5.4 Detecting/Correcting the Angle in Main Scanning Direction ........................................................... 8-14
8.3.5.5 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Main Scanning Direction ........................................... 8-16
8.3.5.6 Detecting/Correcting Changes in the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction ................... 8-17
8.4.1 Laser Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 8-19
8.4.1.1 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ................................................................................................. 8-19
8.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.4.1.3 After Replacing the Laser Unit .......................................................................................................... 8-20
Chapter 8
8.1 Construction
0000-4452
T-8-1
Laser light
Wave length
780 nm (infrared)
Output
5 mW
Number of laser beams
T-8-2
Scanner motor
Type of motor
DC brush-less
Number of revolutions
23000 rpm (approx.)
Type of bearing
Oil
T-8-3
Polygon mirror
Number of facets
4 facets (f20)
T-8-4
Control mechanisms
Sync control
main scanning direction

sub scanning direction
Light intensity
APC control
PWM control
Color displacement correction
reproduction ratio in main scanning

direction
displacement in main scanning direction
Others
scanner motor control

laser shutter control
laser ON/OFF control
8-1
Chapter 8
0000-4453
T-8-5
Name
Description
Laser driver
generates laser light.
Polygon mirror
scans the laser beam in main scanning direction.
guide mirror
directs laser light in the direction of the drum.
Corrective lens
corrects displacement of laser light coming from the guide

mirror in main scanning direction.
displacement correction
moves the corrective lens to correct displacement in main
motor
scanning direction.
BD detection PCB
detects laser light as a BD signal.
BD mirror
reflects the laser light in the direction of the BD detection

PCB.
Guide mirror
Polygon mirror
Laser driver
Corrective lens
(front)
Displacement
correction motor
(rear)
Photosensitive drum
F-8-1
8-2
Chapter 8
BD detection PCB
BD mirror
F-8-2
0000-4454
The laser exposure system is controlled mainly by the DC controller PCB.
Laser scanner motor control
ON/OFF
control
Main
scanning
direction
correction
control
APC
control
J114(Y)/J116(M)/
J118(C)/J120(Bk)
J115
IC for
control
PWMIC
J113
J117
J117
Main scanning direction

sync control
J1216
PWM
signal
Image data
PWM
control
DC controller PCB
Main controller PCB
J129
Laser shutter control

Manual feed unit
Fixing feeder unit
Front cover
F-8-3
8-3
Chapter 8
8.2 Basic Sequence

0000-4455
The laser scanner motor starts to rotate when the Start key is pressed (or the print request signal is issued). When its
rotation has stabilized, the printer unit becomes ready for formation of images, causing the printer side to generate
the sync signal (PTOP).
The machine uses the signal to generate the sub scanning direction signals (Y-TOP, M-TOP, C-TOP, K-TOP) for
individual colors, and turns on the lasers of the corresponding colors.
Print request signal
(Start key ON)
Image formation
enable timing
PSTBY
Polygon motor
(Y,M,C,Bk)
PINTR
PRINT
Used to stabilize
rotation(3.5sec)
PTOP signal
Y-TOP signal
Laser Y ON
M-TOP signal
Laser M ON
C-TOP signal
Laser C ON
Bk-TOP signal
Laser Bk ON
F-8-4
8-4
LSTR
PSTBY
Chapter 8
8.3 Various Control

8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
8.3.1.1 Turning On/Off the Laser
0000-4456
The laser light is turned on/off in keeping with combinations of control signals (TRL0/1/2) from the DC controller
PCB.
T-8-6
CTR
CTR
CTR
L2
L1
L0
Status of laser A
Status of laser B
OFF
OFF
OFF
APC control
(bias current applied)

0
APC control
OIFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
(for factory adjustment)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
(for image formation)
(for image formation)
8-5
Y-CRL-0
Y-CRL-1
Y-CRL-2
Chapter 8
J114
for M: J116
for C: J118
for Bk: J120
DC controller PCB
F-8-5

(Start key ON)
PSTBY
Image formation
enable timing
PRINT
PINTR
Polygon motor
(Y, M, C, Bk)
PTOP signal
Y-TOP signal
Laser ON
For laser A
BD detection, APC control ON
For laser B
BD detection, APC control ON
Image equivalent of 1 line
F-8-6
8-6
Image equivalent of 1 line
Chapter 8
8.3.1.2 BD Signal
0000-4457
- The machine is equipped with a laser unit that can generate 2 channels of laser light (A and B).
- These 2 channels of laser light are based on separate BD signals.
BD signal
J115
A/B
separation
BD for
laser A
BD for
laser B
DC controller PCB
F-8-7
8-7
Chapter 8
8.3.1.3 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction
0000-4458
The control of synchronization in main scanning direction is based on the BD signal.
Clock signals/
sync signals
based on the
BD signal are
generated.
BD detection signal
BD detection PCB
J115
DC controller PCB
PWMIC
A
The BD signal is separated

into 2 channels for laser A
and laser B.
A/B
separation
B
FIFO
Image signal for laser A
Image signal for laser B
Video signals are
generated in keeping
with the sync signals.
F-8-8
8.3.1.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction
0000-4459
- The synchronization in sub scanning direction is controlled with reference to the PTOP signal (image formation
start signal).
- When the mechanism becomes ready for image formation, the PTOP signal (image formation start signal) is
generated, turning on the individual lasers based on the signal.
8-8
Chapter 8

(Start key ON)
Image formation
enable timing
PSTBY
Laser scanner
motor (Y,M,C,Bk)
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Used to stabilize
rotation (3.5sec)
PTOP signal
Y-TOP signal
Laser Y ON
M-TOP signal
Laser M ON
C-TOP signal
Laser C signal
Bk-TOP signal
Laser Bk ON
F-8-9
8.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light

8.3.2.1 APC Control
0000-4460
The machine uses the photodiode mounted on the laser driver PCB to monitor the intensify of laser light so as to
ensure that it remains at a specific level.
8.3.2.2 PWM Control
0000-4461
- A single pixel is divided into 32, and a 16-level activation pattern is selected to suit the image data in question.
Pixels
Lowest intensity
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
16 levels of
intensity
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
Highest intensity
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
F-8-10
8-9
Chapter 8
8.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor

8.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor
0000-4462
The machine uses the acceleration/deceleration signal to control the speed of rotation of the laser scanner motor so
that the BD signal from individual laser units will be of the same phase as the reference signal (if the BD signal is
behind the reference signal, accelerate; if ahead, decelerates).
Deceleration signal
Acceleration signal
BD signal
J117
J115
IC for
control
Reference
signal
DC controller PCB
F-8-11
8.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter

8.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter
0000-4463
The laser light is turned off whenever a cover (indicated) that can let laser light to escape is opened:
- front cover
- manual feed unit
- fixing feeder unit
If any of the covers (units) is opened, the operation voltage applied to the latest driver is turned off and, in addition,
the laser control signal/image signal is also turned off.
8-10
Chapter 8
Front cover switch
Manual feed unit

open/closed switch
Image signal
DC power
supply unit
Control signal
DC5V
Fixing feeder unit

open/closed switch
Front cover
open/closed sensor
PWMIC
Control IC
Manual feed unit

open/closed sensor
J129
PS23
Fixing feeder unit

open/closed sensor
J127
PS28
DC controller PCB
PS5
F-8-12
8.3.5 Correcting Image Displacement

8.3.5.1 Outline
0000-4464
The following factors can displace images of individual colors:

- displacement of the photosensitive drum caused by replacement of the drum unit/toner container
->displacement in sub scanning direction
- displacement of laser path caused by replacement of laser unit
->displacement/angle in main scanning direction
- displacement in laser path length caused by changes in temperature inside machine
->variation in magnification
To correct the discrepancies in images, the machine executes corrective control for image position; it detects
displacement in color by forming a pattern of a specific color on the transfer belt and reading it against the correct
position.
8-11
Chapter 8
Detecting displacement in color

Forms an image position correction pattern on the transfer belt (direct transfer).
Reads the individual pattern (of different colors) using the pattern reader
photo sensors.
Identifies displacement in color with reference to the pattern signals in the
DC controller.
Displacement in sub scanning
direction
corrects the write start position in

sub scanning direction.
Displacement in main scanning

direction
corrects the start position in main

scanning direction.
Angle in main scanning

direction
corrects the laser path inside the

laser unit.
Discrepancy in reproduction
ratio in main scanning direction
corrects image data generation timing

in main scanning direction
F-8-13
LED
Photosensor
Bk
C
M
Reader for individual

color patterns
Y
Bk
F-8-14
8.3.5.2 Timing of Color Displacement Detection/Correction
0000-4465
The machine detects/corrects color displacement at the following timing:

- during warm-up after the main power switch is turned on
- during warm-up after jam clear
- during warm-up after return from sleep
- during warm-up after replacement of the drum unit (not when the toner container is replaced)
- during warm-up when low-power mode is turned on after opening/closing of the cover while the machine is in low-
8-12
Chapter 8
power mode
- 2 hr after the machine has been left alone in standby state
- during quick correction (auto gradation correction)
- after sheet-to-sheet auto correction when 300 sheets (small-size, equivalent in single-sided) have been fed
continuously
- during last rotation auto correction at time of counter increments occurring after intermittent jobs of 300 pages
(small-size, equivalent of single-sided)
- in response to changes in the environment
- when replacing the toner cartridge
8.3.5.3 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction
0000-4466
The Y pattern is used as the reference. The machine identifies the degree of color displacement in sub scanning
direction with reference to the timing at which other color patterns are checked after a check on the Y pattern.
If the timing is not correct, the machine corrects the laser write start timing in sub scanning direction.
For C
For Bk
rear
For C
For Bk
Correct position
Too early
front
F-8-15
Displacement in sub
scanning direction
F-8-16
8-13
Chapter 8
8.3.5.4 Detecting/Correcting the Angle in Main Scanning Direction
0000-4467
The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine identifies the angle in main scanning direction with reference
to front/rear discrepancies of individual colors.
rear
Displacement
front
F-8-17
Angle
F-8-18
If the machine detects any angle, it turns on the main scanning direction angle correction motor located inside the
laser unit.
8-14
Chapter 8
Main scanning
direction correction
motor
Main scanning direction angle

correction lens
F-8-19
8-15
Chapter 8
8.3.5.5 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Main Scanning Direction
0000-4468
The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine compares the length of the center line of the Bk image position
correction pattern (front) and the length of the center line of the image position correction pattern (front) of individual
colors, and identifies the difference between the two as the degree of color displacement in main scanning direction.
When the machine detects color displacement, it corrects the timing at which the laser is started in main scanning
direction.
Displacement in main
scanning direction
F-8-20
Bk
F-8-21
8-16
Chapter 8
8.3.5.6 Detecting/Correcting Changes in the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning

Direction
0000-4469
The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine copies the center line of the Bk image correction pattern (rear)
and the center line of the individual image position correction patterns (rear), and identifies the difference between
the two as the change in the reproduction ratio in main scanning direction.
When the machine detects any change, it corrects the timing at which the video signals are transferred to the laser
unit.
(rear)
Bk
F-8-22
8-17
Chapter 8
Change in reproduction ratio in

main scanning direction
PWMIC
Video signal for laser A
Video signal for laser B
The machine changes the

frequency of the image clock
to change the reproduction
ratio in main scanning direction.
F-8-23
8-18
Frequency
control block
DC controller PCB
Chapter 8
8.4
Parts
Procedure
Replacement
8.4.1 Laser Unit

8.4.1.1 Removing the Center
Delivery Tray
0000-4289
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center
F-8-26
delivery tray [2].
3) Remove the face cap [1] and the screw [2]; then,
while lifting the rear reader unit [3] slightly, detach
the upper inside cover [4].
F-8-24
8.4.1.2 Removing the Laser

Unit
F-8-27
0000-4471
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader ink

unit cover [2].
4) Shift the arm [1] of the reader link unit 90 deg to

support the reader unit.
F-8-25
F-8-28
2) Remove the stepped screw [1], and detach the
positioning pin [2] from the reader link unit.
5) Disconnect the 8 connectors [1], and detach the

harness guide [2].
8-19
Chapter 8
F-8-31
F-8-29
6) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the cover [2]
of the laser driver PCB. (The cover for Y has a
MEMO:
different shape, but may be removed in the same
When mounting the laser unit, tighten the screws in
way.)
diagonal sequence for proper balance.

Laser Unit
0000-4291
If you have replaced the laser unit, execute the

following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>L-ADJ-0
Use it to execute automatic adjustment of laser
intensity.
F-8-30
7) Disconnect the connector[1], and remove the 4
screws [2];then, detach the laser unit [3].
8-20
Chapter 9 Image
Formation
Contents
Contents
9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System ................................................................................. 9-3
9.1.3 Charging Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.2 Image Formation Process .................................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.2.1 Image Formation Process (general) ............................................................................................................ 9-6
9.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) ............................................................................................. 9-7
9.2.3 Image Formation Process (transfer) ........................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.3.1 At Power-On (1) ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.2 At Power-On (2) ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.3 During Copying/Printing Operations (normal speed) ................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.4 Making Copies/Prints (half speed) ........................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.5 After Replacing the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) ............................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.6 Printing Originals Containing a Color Page ............................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.7 Driving and Controlling the Image Formation System and the High-Voltage System ............................ 9-11
9.4 Image Stabilization Control ............................................................................................................................. 9-13
9.4.1 Outline of Image Quality Control ............................................................................................................ 9-13
9.4.2 Automatic Image Stabilization Control .................................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.3 ATR Control ............................................................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.4 Discharge Current Level Control ............................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.5 ATVC Control (transfer bias level correction) ......................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.6 PASCAL Control (image gradation) ........................................................................................................ 9-18
9.4.7 SALT-Dmax Control (development characteristics correction) .............................................................. 9-19
9.4.8 SALT-Dhalf Control (development characteristics correction) ............................................................... 9-20
9.4.9 Auto Gradation Control ............................................................................................................................ 9-22
9.5 Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-24
9.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.5.1.1 Outline of the Drum Unit .................................................................................................................. 9-24
9.5.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) ........................................................................... 9-25
9.5.2 Developing Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 9-26
9.5.2.1 Construction of the Developing Assembly ........................................................................................ 9-26
9.5.2.2 Controlling the Developing Bias ....................................................................................................... 9-27
9.5.3 Auxiliary Brush ........................................................................................................................................ 9-29
9.5.3.1 Construction of the Auxiliary Brush ................................................................................................. 9-29
9.5.3.2 Controlling the Auxiliary Bias .......................................................................................................... 9-30
9.5.4 Charging Mechanism ............................................................................................................................... 9-34
9.5.4.1 Construction of the Charging Mechanism ......................................................................................... 9-34
9.5.4.2 Controlling the Charging Bias ........................................................................................................... 9-35
9.6 Toner Container ............................................................................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.1 Outline of the Toner Container ................................................................................................................ 9-37
9.6.2 Controlling the Toner Container Drive .................................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.3 Checking the Level of Toner .................................................................................................................... 9-38
9.6.4 Controlling the Supply of Toner .............................................................................................................. 9-39
9.7 Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.7.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit ..................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.7.1.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit .............................................................................................................. 9-40
9.7.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Transfer Unit ........................................................................................ 9-40
9.7.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias ................................................................................................................... 9-42
Contents
9.7.2.1 Controlling the Transfer Bias ............................................................................................................ 9-42

9.7.3 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................... 9-44
9.7.3.1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) ....................................................................................................... 9-44
9.7.3.2 Secondary External Roller ................................................................................................................. 9-45
9.7.3.3 Collecting Waste Toner ..................................................................................................................... 9-45
9.7.4 Separation Mechanism .............................................................................................................................. 9-46
9.7.4.1 Separation .......................................................................................................................................... 9-46
9.8.1 Drum ITB Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 9-48
9.8.1.12 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting .................................................................................... 9-51
9.8.1.14 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct ............................................................................... 9-52
9.8.1.15 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting ..................................................................................... 9-52
9.8.1.16 Removing the Drum ITB Motor ...................................................................................................... 9-53
9.8.2 Drum Drive Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 9-53
9.8.2.12 Removing the Lattice Controller Base ............................................................................................. 9-57
9.8.2.14 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting Base ............................................................................. 9-58
9.8.2.15 Removing the Drum Drive Unit ...................................................................................................... 9-58
9.8.3 Drive Roller .............................................................................................................................................. 9-59
9.8.3.4 Removing the Drive Roller ................................................................................................................ 9-62
9.8.4 Developing Motor (Bk) ............................................................................................................................ 9-63
Contents
9.8.4.8 Removing the Developing Motor (Bk) .............................................................................................. 9-65

9.8.5 Developing Motor (Y/M/C) ..................................................................................................................... 9-65
9.8.5.8 Removing the Developing Motor (Y/M/C) ....................................................................................... 9-67
9.8.6 Secondary Transfer Unit .......................................................................................................................... 9-68
9.8.6.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................. 9-68
9.8.6.2 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ......................................................................................... 9-68
9.8.6.3 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit ............................................................................................ 9-68
9.8.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit ....................................................................................................................... 9-69
9.8.8 Transfer Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................................................. 9-69
9.8.8.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container .............................................................................................. 9-69
9.8.8.2 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit .............................................................................................. 9-70
9.8.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt ........................................................................................................................ 9-70
9.8.10 Primary Transfer Roller .......................................................................................................................... 9-73
9.8.10.4 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller ........................................................................................... 9-76
9.8.11 Secondary Transfer External Roller ....................................................................................................... 9-77
9.8.11.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................... 9-77
9.8.11.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer External Roller ......................................................................... 9-77
9.8.12 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ........................................................................................................ 9-78
9.8.12.4 Removing the Secondary Transfer Internal Roller .......................................................................... 9-81
9.8.13 Toner Container Drive Unit ................................................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container ............................................................................................ 9-82
9.8.13.2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover .................................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ....................................................................................... 9-83
9.8.14 Waste Toner Detection PCB .................................................................................................................. 9-85
9.8.14.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container ............................................................................................ 9-85
9.8.14.2 Removing the Front Cover .............................................................................................................. 9-85
9.8.14.3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit Releasing Lever ............................................................ 9-85
9.8.14.4 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ................................................................................................... 9-86
9.8.14.5 Removing the Inside Cover (lower) ................................................................................................ 9-86
9.8.14.6 Removing the Waste Toner Detection PCB .................................................................................... 9-86
Contents
9.8.15 Feedscrew Rotation Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 9-86

9.8.15.11 Removing the Feedscrew Rotation Sensor .................................................................................... 9-90
9.8.16 Tone Container Motor ............................................................................................................................ 9-90
9.8.16.11 Removing the Toner Container Motor ........................................................................................... 9-94
9.8.17 Waste Toner Feedscrew Case ................................................................................................................. 9-94
9.8.17.2 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.17.3 Removing the Waste Toner Feedscrew Case .................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.18 Pattern Reader Unit ................................................................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.19 Auto Registration Sensor PCB ............................................................................................................... 9-97
9.8.19.5 Removing the Auto Registration Sensor PCB ................................................................................. 9-99
9.8.20 SALT Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 9-100
9.8.20.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit ...................................................................... 9-100
9.8.20.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ..................................................................................... 9-101
9.8.20.3 Removing the Upper Right Cover ................................................................................................. 9-101
9.8.20.4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit ................................................................................................ 9-101
9.8.20.5 Removing the SALT Sensor .......................................................................................................... 9-103
Contents
Chapter 9
9.1 Construction
0000-4473
T-9-1
Photosensitive drum
Drum unit
Type of drum
OPC
Diameter of drum
30.6 mm
(D-UNIT)
Cleaning mechanism
Cleaner-less
The residual toner after transfer is
charged for collection by the developing
assembly.
Process speed
130 mm/sec (plain paper)

65 mm/sec (thick paper, special paper,
transparency)
T-9-2
Developing assembly
Diameter of developing cylinder
16 mm
Method of development
dry, 2-component
Toner
non-magnetic, negative (S toner)
Detection of toner inside
ATR sensor (magnetic sensor)
developing assembly
Starter
held by drum unit
T-9-3
Primary charging assembly
Method of charging
roller, contact charging
Diameter of charging roller
14 mm
Cleaning mechanism
cleaning sheet, in contact (reciprocating

movement of 5 mm; cycle of 1.5 sec)
9-1
Chapter 9
T-9-4
Auxiliary brush
Type of brush
fur brush
Intrusion of brush
1.3 mm (upstream)
1.3 mm (downstream)
T-9-5
Others
Items of control by internal memory
color of toner inside drum unit

cumulative number of prints
cumulative number of video counts
data on life of drum unit
data on toner supply control
T-9-6
Toner container
Detection of toner level
in reference to number of rotations made

by toner feedscrew
Toner volume
Y: 490 g
M: 470 g
C: 470 g
Bk: 530 g
T-9-7
Others
Items of control by internal memory
color of toner inside toner container

data on life of toner container
T-9-8
Inter-mediate
Intermediae transfer belt (ITB)
seamless
transfer unit
Drive for belt
through gears from drum ITB motor
Feeding speed
130 mm/sec (plain paper)

65 mm/sec (thick paper, special paper,
transparency)
Cleaning mechanism
9-2
cleaning blade
Chapter 9
T-9-9
Image stabili-
Descharge current level control
to prevent image faults caused by
zation mechanism
changes in environment
ATVC control
to ensure good transfer
ATR control
to correct toner density (about)
PASCAL control
to correct image gradation

characteristics
SALT-Dmax control
to correct development density

(maximum density) characteristics
SALT-Dhalf control
to correct development density

(gradation) characteristics
9.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System
0000-4474
Toner container (Bk)
Developing cylinder
D-UNIT(Bk)
Developing
assembly
Primary
charging
roller
Intermediate
transfer belt
Auxiliary
brushes
Photosensitive drum
D-UNIT(Y) D-UNIT(M) D-UNIT(C)
Intermediate
transfer unit
Primary transfer rollers

Secondary transfer
internal roller
F-9-1
9-3
Chapter 9
9.1.3 Charging Specifications
0000-4475
Drum unit (high voltage)

T-9-10
Photosensitive drum charging
Method of primary charging
roller contact
AC component rating specifications range
1300 to 2000 Vp-p (standard: 1500 Vp-p)
DC component rating specifications range
-300 to -700 V (standard: -450 V)
AC component voltage correction factor
environment sensor
DC component voltage correction factor
environment sensor, SALT sensor
T-9-11
Auxiliary charging
Method of charging
fur brush (upstream, downstream)
Upstream auxiliary brush AC component rating
200 Vp-p
specifications range
Upstream auxiliary brush DC component rating
+200 to +300 V (standard: +250 V)
Downstream brush DC component rating
-700 to -800 V (standard: -750 V)
Voltage correction factor
environment sensor
T-9-12
Developing bias
AC component standard value
1800 Vp-p (fixed)
DC component rating specifications range
-150 to -550 V (standard: -300 V)
environment sensor, SALT sensor
Transfer unit specifications (high-voltage)

T-9-13
Primary transfer
9-4
Method of transfer
Roller transfer
Object of transfer
Transfer belt (ITB)
DC component rating use range
0 to +1200 V
Chapter 9
Primary transfer
Voltage control factor
environment sensor, print mode*
T-9-14
Secondary transfer
Method of transfer
roller
Object of transfer
paper (transfer media)
DC component rating use range
-2500 to +7000 V
paper type, environment sensor reading, print

mode*
*Full color or monochrome mode.
Developing cylinder
Primary charging roller

0V
0V
-300V
-450V
1800Vp-p
1500Vp-p
Downstream auxiliary
brush
0V
-750V
Secondary transfer
external roller
Primary transfer roller
Upstream auxiliary brush
+2000V
+250V
+400V
0V
0V
200Vp-p
0V
Full color, Plain paper, Normal temperature/humidify
F-9-2
9-5
Chapter 9
9.2 Image Formation Process

9.2.1 Image Formation Process (general)
0000-4476
T-9-15
Functional block
STEP
Description
Electrostatic latent image formation
1, 2
forms an electrostatic latent image on the
block
photosensitive drum.
Development block
deposits toner over the electrostatic latent

image, thereby turning it into a visible
image.
Transfer block
4, 5, 6
moves the toner image to the ITB or paper.
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaning
collects residual toner from the ITB.
8, 9, 10
collects residual toner from the
block
Photosensitive drum cleaning block
photosensitive drum.
Photosensitive drum
2.Laser beam exposure
1.Charging
10.Toner collection
9.Charging roller cleaning

3.Development
8.Auxiliary
charging
4.Primary
transfer
4.Primary
transfer
4.Primary
transfer
7.ITB cleaning
ITB
Delivery
Fixing
6.Separation
5.Secondary
transfer
F-9-3
9-6
Pickup
Bk
4.Primary
transfer
Chapter 9
9.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation)
0000-4477
Toner not charged to a negative

potential by the downstream brush
Photosensitive drum cleaning block
[6] Colled to the

developing assembly.
[5] Charging to a negative

potential by friction against
the cleaning sheet.
+ +
- - - - -
[1] Development
- - -
[4] Charging to a negative

potential by the downstream
auxiliary brush.*2
+
+
+
Development block
+
- -
[3] Charging to a positive

potential by the upstream
auxiliary brush.*1
+
-
Transfer residual toner*3

[2] Primary transfer
Primary transfer block
*1: reducing negative charges on toner (removal of charges)

*2: evening out charge to a specific level
*3: toner left behind from secondary transfer
(mix of positive and negative charges)
F-9-4
9.2.3 Image Formation Process (transfer)
0000-4478
[1] Moving the toner from the

photosensitive drum to the ITB
[3] Scraping off the toner by

the cleaning blade
ITB
cleaning
block
Bk
Primary transfer block

Transfer residual toner*
Waste tone container
Paper
Secondary
transfer
[2] Moving the toner image
block
from the ITB to paper
* Toner left behind from secondary transfer.
F-9-5
9-7
Chapter 9
9.3 Basic Sequence

9.3.1 At Power-On (1)
0000-4479
If the main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 100C
(e.g., first time in the morning or after a long period of no use),
Characteristics
- the same control timing is used for the Y, M, C, and Bk drum units.
- the machine takes about 300 to 360 sec before it enters PSTBY.
- the machine executes image stabilization control in the following order while it is warming up:
discharge current level control
ATVC control
ATR control
SALT-Dmax control
image position control
SALT-Dhalf control
Main power
switch ON
WMUPR
CNTR
Approx. 120sec
Approx. 120sec
PSTBY
Drum/ITB
motor (M1)
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development
motor (Y)
Image stabilization
control (for details,
see appropriate sections)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner

by auxiliary brush
Upstream auxiliary (DC)

bias (Y)
Upstream auxiliary (AC)
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner

by auxiliary brush
Downstream auxiliary (DC)

bias (Y)
Primary transfer
bias (Y)
Cleaning by secondary transfer roller
Secondary
transfer bias
Start-up sequence of the drum unit (Y; with surface temperature of fixing roller at 100 or more).
F-9-6
9.3.2 At Power-On (2)
0000-4480
If the main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100C or more
(i.e., after it returns from jam recovery*, after it has been forced off and then on, or after its front cover has been
opened and then closed while an imaged is made).
Characteristics
- the same control timing is used for the Y, M, C, and Bk drum units.
- the machine takes about 80 sec before it enters PSTBY.
- the machine executes image stabilization in the following order while it is warming up:
ATVC control
9-8
Chapter 9
image position correction

*If the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 100C after jam recovery, the machine uses the sequence
it uses at power-on (1).
Main power
switch ON
WMUPR
PSTBY
CNTR
Approx. 50sec
Approx. 30sec
Drum/ITB
motor (M1)
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development
motor (Y)
Image stabilization
control (for details, see
appropriate sections)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner

by auxiliary brush

bias (Y)
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner

by auxiliary brush

bias (Y)
Primary transfer
bias (Y)
Secondary
transfer bias
Start-up sequence of the drum unit (Y; with surface temperature of fixing roller at 100C or more).
F-9-7
9.3.3 During Copying/Printing Operations (normal speed)
0000-4481
Full color, Plain paper, A4, 2 copies/prints, Y drum unit

Characteristics
- in response to a press on the Start key, the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) stars to rotate.
- the sequence of operations for drum units after exposure starts with a delay of 0.7 sec each
- the ITB continues to rotate after delivery of paper from the fixing unit (for post-imaging control)
Start key
ON
PSTBY
PINTR
5sec
PRINT
LSTR
4sec
12sec
PSTBY
Drum/ITB
motor (M1)
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development
motor (Y)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner

by auxiliary brush

bias (Y)
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner

by auxiliary brush

bias (Y)
Primary transfer
bias (Y)
Secondary
transfer bias
Y Drum Unit Sequence of Image Formation (plain paper)
F-9-8
9-9
Chapter 9
When Making Y/M/C Monochrome Copies/Prints

If not for Bk (i.e., for Y, M, C), a high voltage is applied for the 4 colors as for full-color output when making
monochrome copies/prints. (Exposure is not executed for colors other than those in question.)
When Making Bk Monochrome Copies/Prints
When making Bk monochrome copies/prints, no high voltage is applied for Y or M, and the developing motors
for these colors are not driven.
9.3.4 Making Copies/Prints (half speed)
0000-4482
Full color, Thick paper/Special paper/Transparency, A4, 2 copies/prints, Y drum unit

Characteristics
- in response to a press on the Start key, the photosensitive drum and the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) start to rotate
- the sequence of operations of the drum units after exposure starts with a delay of 1.5 sec
- the photosensitive drum and the ITB continue to rotate after paper has been discharged from the fixing unit
(for post-imaging control)
Start key
ON
PSTBY
PINTR
15sec
PRINT
LSTR
7sec
PSTBY
25sec
Drum/ITB
motor (M1)
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development
motor (Y)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner

by auxiliary brush

bias (Y)
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner

by auxiliary brush

bias (Y)
Primary transfer
bias (Y)
Secondary
transfer bias
Y Drum Formation Sequence (thick paper/special paper/transparency)
F-9-9
9.3.5 After Replacing the Drum Unit (D-UNIT)
0000-4483
When a new drum unit (D-UNIT) has been installed,

Characteristics
- when a drum unit is fitted and the machine's front cover is closed, the developing cylinder starts to rotate.
- so that the developing cylinder may be coated evenly with developer, the cylinder is rotated for 30 sec at the
beginning
- if the drum unit is not new, this sequence is not executed; the sequence used at power-on (1) or (2) is executed
- about 150 sec after the drum unit has been fitted, image stabilization control is executed in the following order
ATVC control
ATR control
9-10
Chapter 9
SALT-Dmax control
image position correctionSALT-Dhalf control
New drum unit fitted,
and front cover closed
WMUPR
Approx. 30sec
CNTR
Approx. 120sec
Approx. 120sec
PSTBY
Drum/ITB
motor (M1)
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Image stabilization
control (for details, see
appropriate sections)
Development
motor (Y)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner

by auxiliary brush

bias (Y)
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner

by auxiliary brush

bias (Y)
Primary transfer
bias (Y)
Secondary
transfer bias
Y Drum Unit Initialization Sequence
F-9-10
9.3.6 Printing Originals Containing a Color Page
0000-4484
When making copies/prints of originals containing a color page, the machine uses the following sequence to avoid
a drop in productivity:
T-9-16
color original:
monochrome original:
full-color mode sequence

for 3rd and subsequent copies/prints after color page, fullcolor mode sequence for 4th and subsequent copies/prints
after color page, monochrome sequence
MEMO:
A switch-over from full-color mode to monochrome mode requires a sequence in which the high voltage of YMC
must be lowered. By reducing the use of such a sequence, the machine avoids an appreciable drop in productivity.
9.3.7 Driving and Controlling the Image Formation System and the
High-Voltage System
0000-4485
Drive Control
The image formation system is driven by the toner container motor, developing motor, and drum ITB motor
through gears. (For details, see the appropriate sections.)
9-11
Chapter 9
DC
controller
PCB
Toner container motor drive signal

J126
M20
M21
M22
M23
Developing motor drive signal
J110
Toner drive
motor
M12
M13
M14
M15
Drum/ITB motor
drive signal
J105
M1
Developing
motor
ITB
Drum/ITB motor
F-9-11
High-Voltage Control
The high-voltage unit is used to supply high voltage to each of the blocks in the image formation system.
(For details, see the appropriate sections.)
Y
Developing
cylinder
Bk
Primary charging
roller
Photosensitive
drum
Downstream
auxiliary
brush
Upstream
auxiliary
brush
Secondary
transfer
external roller
HV1
(1 each for
YMCBk)
HV4
HV2
(1 for YM; 1
for CBk)
Secondary
transfer
high-voltage unit
High-voltage unit
HV: high-voltage PCB
F-9-12
9-12
HV3
Chapter 9
9.4 Image Stabilization Control

9.4.1 Outline of Image Quality Control
0000-4486
Changes in temperature/humidity or passage of time can cause the machine to produce images of varying quality. To
ensure that the quality of images remain stable, the levels of voltage outputs and volumes of toner supply are
corrected:
T-9-17
So that the machine's image
reproduction remains stable, the
following control mechanisms are
used:
ATR Control
to suit changes in toner density/toner

consumption
Discharge Current Level Control
to prevent faulty images in a high humidity

environment
(correction of charging AC bias)
ATVC Control
to ensure good transfer

(correction of transfer bias level)
PASCAL Control/SALT Control
to suit changes in image density and gradation

(correction of charging/developing/transfer bias;
correction of image correction table)
9.4.2 Automatic Image Stabilization Control
0000-4487
T-9-18
Operation
Discharge
ATVC
ATR
SALT-
Image
SALT-
Estimated
current
control
control
Dmax
position
Dhalf
duration
control
correction
control
(sec)
YES
NO
about 80 *6
YES
YES
level
control
Power-on/
jam
- if fixing roller surface temperature >= 100 deg C

YES
YES
NO
NO
recovery
- if fixing roller surface temperature < 100 deg C
YES
YES
YES
YES
about 240
*7
9-13
Chapter 9
T-9-19
New
if the number of rotations made by the toner feedscrew has reached the threshold and,
toner
in addition, the reading of the ATR sensor is lower than a specific value *8
container
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
replacem
about
190
ent
if the number of rotations of the toner feedscrew has reached a specific value (100%) *8
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
about 20
T-9-20
Drum
YES
YES
YES
YES
unit
about
280 *7
replacem
ent
T-9-21
Cover *1
opened/
- if fixing roller surface temperature>=100 deg C *2

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
about 20
closed
- if fixing roller surface temperature < 100 deg C
YES
YES
YES
YES
about
240 *7
T-9-22
Number
- cumulative output (number of pages) is 100 or more and less than 200 (LSTR) *3
of pages
YES
YES
YES
NO
*10
(YES: 300
NO
pages *9 )
about 30
(50)
- cumulative output (number of pages) is 100 or more and less than 200 (INTR) *3
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
about 15
- cumulative output (number of pages) reaching 200 pages or more *3

YES
YES
YES
NO
(YES: 400
NO
pages *9 )
about 30
(50)
- cumulative output (number of pages) reaching 500 pages or more (LSTR) *3

YES
YES
YES
YES
(YES)
NO
about 50
(70)
9-14
Chapter 9
T-9-23
Left alone in
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
about
STBY for 2 hr
120
*3 /Rapid
change in
environment
T-9-24
Return
from low
- cover is not opened and closed during low power mode

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
about 30 *4
NO
about 80 *6
power
mode
state
- cover is opened and closed during low power mode

YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
T-9-25
Return
from
- STBY + power save mode lasts 1.9 hr or more before starting sleep mode
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
about 240 *7
sleep
state
- STBY + power save mode lasts less than 1.9 hr before starting sleep mode *5
YES
YES
(YES)
(YES)
YES
(YES)
about 80 *6
(about 240 *7 )
*1The term "over"refers to all covers.

*2 If the cover is opened and then closed again before the machine will be standby state(fixing roller surface
temperature >=100 deg C), the sequence used for 'cover opened/closed'(i.e., fixing roller surface temperature <100
deg C) is executed.
*3See the description or the service mode item in question.
*4The duration refers to the period of time for the fixing roller surface temperature to reach a level ready to start a job.
*5The condition depends on the fixing roller surface temperature upon return from sleep mode.
*6time that includes about 30 sec of various operations taking place before image stabilization control starts.
*7time that includes about 120 sec of various operations taking place before image stabilization control starts.
*8the toner container is identified as having reached the end of its life.
*9if the counter reading for image position correction is 300 or higher, image position correction is executed together
with other image stabilization control mechanisms.
*10the counters used in relation to a specific number of pages are of the following 3 types:
- used to set up discharge current level control, ATVC control, ATR control
- used to set up discharge current level control, ATVC control, ATR control, SALT-Dmax control
- used to correct image position
*The control mechanism executed after processing a specific number of pages is executed at the following timing of
operation:
9-15
Chapter 9
Cumulative output
is 100 pages or
more and less
1st page 2nd page
than 200 pages
99th page 105th page
next job *1
Continuous jobs
Control executed during post rotation
of last sheet of job in excess of 100 pages
Cumulative output
is 200 pages or
more
199th
page
200th
page
201st page
400th page
Pickup stopped once;

then, control executed
between sheets every
200 pages *2
Control executed also

during initial rotation
of next job *2
401st page
Pickup stopped once;
then, control executed
between sheets every
200 pages *2
*1 : job next to the one ending in excess of 100 pages.

*2 : counter reading returns to '0' when control is executed.
: timing at which control is executed.
F-9-13
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>INTROT-1
Use it to change the intervals between sessions of execution of image stabilization control (adjustment set-1) for
initial/last rotation in terms of the number of pages.
Default (at shipment/upon RAM initialization): 100
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>INTROT-2
Use it to change the intervals between execution sessions of image stabilization control (adjustment set-2) for
initial/last rotation in terms of the number of pages.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PPR-1
Use it to change the intervals of execution sessions (adjustment set-1) for image stabilization control between
sheets in terms of the number of pages.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>INTROT-T
Use it to change the intervals of execution sessions for image stabilization control for standby.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ADJ-LVL
Use it to change the execution mode settings for image stabilization control for a specific number of pages.
9-16
Chapter 9
9.4.3 ATR Control
0000-4488
The machine executes ATR control to maintain a specific image density, which otherwise would change as more and
more toner is used.
The machine measures the concentration of toner and adjusts its supply.
Forms a sample image

(every specific number of pages)
Measures the concentration
of toner inside the developing
assembly at all items
(ATR sensor)
Measures the density of the sample image

(SALT sensor)
Computes the change in density from 2 sets of

measurements (data)
Verifies the volume of toner to supply

Determines the volume of
toner to be supplied
ATR control
F-9-14
Bk
C
M
Y
SALT sensor
F-9-15
9.4.4 Discharge Current Level Control
0000-4489
- The machine controls the level of discharge current so as to ensure the optimum level in keeping with changes in
temperature/humidify. (The term "discharge current"refers to the current that occurs between the primary
charging roller and the photosensitive drum.) The current is controlled to a level that enables prevention of faulty
images in a high humidity environment and, at the same time, permits collection of toner remaining from transfer
to the developing assembly. Operation
1. An AC bias is applied to the primary charging assembly; the level of current occurring at the time is measured by
the high-voltage PCB (HV1-SUB) and is sent to the CPU on the DC controller PCB as feedback.
2. The roller is charged using the AC charging bias corrected by the CPU.
- If thick paper, special paper, or transparency is used, the frequency of the AC bias applied to the primary charging
roller is halved.
9-17
9.4.5 ATVC Control (transfer bias level correction)
0000-4490
The ATVC control mechanism is used to determine the optimum level of transfer voltage for transfer of images from
the photosensitive drum to the ITB, and from the ITB to paper.
The level of transfer voltage is corrected in relation to changes in temperature/humidity, deterioration of rollers, and
types of paper.
Description of Control
1. A reference voltage is applied to the transfer roller, and the level of current that occurs in response is checked by
the high-voltage PCB and communicated to the CPU on the DC controller PCB as feedback.
2. The machine executes transfer using a transfer voltage which is the result of correction by the CPU.
T-9-26
Item
Description
Primary
Applies a reference voltage to the primary charging roller.
transfer
Uses the high-voltage PCB (HV-2) to check the level of current, and the result is
fed back to the CPU for determination of the optimum level.
Secondary
Applies a reference voltage to the secondary transfer external roller.
transfer
Uses the high-voltage PCB (HV-3) to check the level of current, and the result is
fed back to the CPU for determination of the optimum level.
9.4.6 PASCAL Control (image gradation)
0000-4491
The PASCAL control mechanism is used to stabilize gradation characteristics of images on paper.
It makes up for the changes in gradation occurring in response to changes in temperature/humidity or as the machine
is used over time.
- PASCAL Control for Half-Speed
The mechanism is used to correct the changes in the gradation characteristics that otherwise would occur when thick
paper, special paper, or transparency is used. The test print used for the mechanism is the same as the test print
used for plain paper.
Start-up
V
Prints out the test pattern stored in the main controller (3 types).
V
Uses the scanner to read the test print (previously printed out) set in the reader.
V
Prepares the image correction table A (data processing).
V
End
Timing of Control
Chapter 9
- Service Person Interaction

The mechanism is executed when 'full correction'is executed while auto gradation correction is under way in user
mode.
MEMO;
Differences Among 3 Test Patterns
- Test Print 1
It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of error diffusion processing, which is not subject to moire and,
therefore, used in text/photo/map, print photo, and text mode.
- Test Print 2
It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a low number of lines, which is suitable for the
expression of gradation and, therefore, is used for print film photo mode and when priority is placed on PDL.
- Test Print 3
It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a high number of lines, which is suitable for the
achievement of a high resolution and is, therefore, used when priority is placed on PDL resolution.
Test Print
F-9-16
9.4.7 SALT-Dmax Control (development characteristics correction)
0000-4492
This mechanism is used to stabilize the maximum resolution on the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).
It is used to make up for changes in the maximum density (Dmax), changes in response to deterioration in developer
or the drum, changes in temperature/humidity, or changes occurring as the machine is used over time.
Start-up
V
Measures the light reflected by the surface of the ITB (background measurement).
V
Forms a sample patch of the maximum solid density stored in the DC controller.
9-19
Chapter 9
V
Uses the SALT sensor to take the reading.
V
Converts density (performs computation using the measurement taken).
V
Determines the charging DC bias, developing DC bias, and primary charging current level.
V
End
Timing of Control
- Service Person InteractionThe mechanism is executed when 'full correction' or 'quick correction' of auto gradation
correction is under way in user mode.
Bk
C
M
Y
SALT sensor
F-9-17
9.4.8 SALT-Dhalf Control (development characteristics correction)
0000-4493
The SALT-Dhalf control mechanism is used to stabilize the gradation of images on the ITB.
It makes up for the changes in gradation characteristics that occur in response to the deterioration in developer or
photopositive drum, changes in temperature/humidity, and changes that occur as the machine is used over time.
Gradation Density Control for Half Speed
The control mechanism is used to make up for the changes in the gradation in images when thick paper, special
paper, or transparency is used.
When the mechanism is enabled in service mode, it is activated when auto control is executed.
The time it takes is about double the time taken when plain paper is used.
Start-up*
V
Measures the light reflected by the surface of the ITB (background measurement).
V
Forms a sample patch of a gradation pattern stored in the main
controller on the ITB.
V
Uses the SALT sensor to take a reading.
9-20
Chapter 9
V
Performs density conversion (performs computation using the measurement taken).
V
Prepares an image correction table B/C (data processing).
V
End
- Non-AutomaticThe mechanism is executed when 'full correction'or 'quick correction' is under way in user mode.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CAL-SW
Use it to change the conditions that initiate automatic control.
default: 0 (disable gradation density control for half speed)
Bk
C
M
Y
SALT sensor
F-9-18
9-21
Chapter 9
9.4.9 Auto Gradation Control
0000-4494
Outline
The auto gradation control mechanism is used to correct image gradation by correcting the laser output so as to obtain
ideal gradation characteristics.
Image density
Actual gradation characteristics
1.45
Ideal
characteristics
255
Relationship between laser output
and image density
F-9-19
T-9-27
Full Correction:
The machine knows the actual gradation characteristics based on the 64gradation density data collected from the scanner.
Quick Correction:
The machine knows the actual gradation characteristics based on the 9gradation density data.
User Mode
The machine uses 2 types of auto gradation correction mechanisms, combining the best mechanisms to suit
individual requirements.
T-9-28
Description
9-22
Full correction
Quick correction
Start up
Start up
SALT-Dmax control
SALT-Dmax control
(determines developing DC,
(determines developing DC,
charging DC, primary current
charging DC, and primary
levels)
transfer levels)
Chapter 9
Full correction
Quick correction
PASCAL control
(prepares image correction
table A)
Image position correction
Image position correction
SALT-Dhalf control
SALT-Dhalf control
table B)
table C)
End
End
T-9-29
Image correction
Image correction table A
Table prepared by the result of
table for use at time
including the contents of the table A to
of image formation
the result of compari-son between

image correction tables B and C
T-9-30
Characteristics
A test print must be printed and
The machine does not use (print) a test
read by the machine.
print.
9-23
Chapter 9
9.5 Drum Unit

9.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit
9.5.1.1 Outline of the Drum Unit
0000-4495
The drum unit consists of the developing assembly, photosensitive drum, auxiliary brush, and charging mechanism.
As many as 4 units are used (Y, M, C, Bk), and all of them have the same construction.
Developing
cylinder
Primary charging
roller
Cleaning sheet
Developing
assembly
Downstream
auxiliary
brush
Upstream
auxiliary
brush
ATR sensor
Developing
blade
Photosensitive
drum
F-9-20
9-24
Chapter 9
9.5.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Drum Unit (D-UNIT)
0000-4496
T-9-31
Parts
Source of drive
Remarks
Developing cylinder
Developing motor (M2
driven through gears
through M15)
Toner stirring screw
Developing motor (M2
through M15)
Charging roller
Linked to photosensitive drum
Photosensitive drum
Drum ITB motor (M1)
Auxiliary brush, cleaning
Drum ITB motor (M1)
(reciprocating movement in
sheet
drum axial direction)
Development
motor drive
signal
ITB drum motor

drive signal
DC controller PCB
Developing
motor (pulse)
M
Drum ITB
motor (DC)
Developing
cylinder
Cleaning sheet
Primary changing
roller
Auxiliary brushes
ATR sensor
Toner stirring
screw
Photosensitive
drum
F-9-21
9-25
Chapter 9
9.5.2 Developing Assembly

9.5.2.1 Construction of the Developing Assembly
0000-4497
Outline and Uses

1. turning latent static image into visible image (development)
2. collecting residual toner from photosensitive drum
- eliminates the need for a cleaning mechanism for the photosensitive drum
T-9-32
Component
Developing cylinder
- deposits toner on the photosensitive drum.

- collects toner from the photosensitive drum coming from upstream
Developing blade
- serves to coat the developing cylinder with a uniform layer

of developerserves to coat the developing cylinder with a uniform layer of
developer
Toner stirring screw
- stirs the toner and the developer inside the developing assembly (thus,
charging the toner to a negative potential).
ATR sensor
- detects the amount (concentration of toner) inside the developing

assembly.
Developing cylinder
Developing assembly
Toner stirring
screw
ATR sensor
Developing blade
F-9-22
9-26
9.5.2.2 Controlling the Developing Bias
0000-4498
1) AC Component
fixed; used to increase the density of output images.
2) DC Component
output suited to the reading of the environment sensor/SALT sensor;
changes the median voltage of the AC bias to adjust the image density
a-1. Route of the Developing Bias
DC power supply unit
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85
J87
J71
J73
J75
J72
J71
J86
J76
J82
HV1-SUB
HV2
J77
J72
J81
J79
J71
J72
J71
J72
HV1(Y)
HV1(M)
HV1(C)
HV1(Bk)
J70
J70
J70
J70
AC/DC bias for developing

cylinder
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-23
Chapter 9
a-2. Route of the Developing Cylinder Control Signal

Environment
sensor
SALT sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A
J109
DEV_AC_CTRLT_Y,M
DEV_DC_CTRL_Y,M
DEV_MODE_Y,M
J131-B
DEV_CLK-A
DEV_CLK-B
DEV_CLK-C
DEV_AC_CTRLT_C,K
DEV_DC_CTRL_C,K
DEV_MODE_C,K
J88
High-voltage
unit
HV2-SUB
J87
DEV_CLK-A
DEV_CLK-B
DEV_CLK-C
J97
J76
J98
HV1-SUB
J73
DEV_AC_CLK1_Y
DEV_AC_CLK2_Y
J75
_Y
DEV_VIN
_M
_M
J77
_M
DEV_VIN
_C
_C
J79
_C
DEV_VIN
_K
_K
DEV_DC_CTRL_K
DEV_VIN
J72
J72
J72
J72
HV1(Y)
HV1(M)
HV1(C)
HV1(Bk)
J70
J70
J70
J70
: control signal.
F-9-24
9-28
Chapter 9
9.5.3 Auxiliary Brush

9.5.3.1 Construction of the Auxiliary Brush
0000-4499
Outline and Uses

1. removes charges from the photosensitive drum; charges residual toner
2. controls the polarity of residual toner
- thereby preventing adhesion of toner to the primary charging roller
- thereby eliminating the need for a cleaning mechanism for the photosensitive drum
T-9-33
Component
Upstream auxiliary
- removes charge from the photosensitive drum. (in preparation for the
brush
next image formation session, the latent static image from the previous
session is removed)
- charges the residual toner to a positive potential. (to increase the effects
of charging by the downstream brush as part of the upcoming operation)
Downstream
- charges the photosensitive drum to a negative potential.
auxiliary brush
- charges the residual toner to a negative potential. (to facilitate collection
by the developing assembly)
Downstream auxiliary brush

Upstream auxiliary brush
F-9-25
9-29
Chapter 9
9.5.3.2 Controlling the Auxiliary Bias
0000-4500
T-9-34
AC Component:
level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor.

(upstream auxiliary brush)
DC Component:
level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor.

(upstream/downstream auxiliary brush)
b-1. Route of the Upstream Auxiliary Brush Bias
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85
J87
J86
J76
HV1-SUB
J74
J78
J94
J94
J82
HV4(Y,M)
HV4(C,Bk)
HV2
J93
J93
J81
DC bias for upstream

auxiliary brush
J71
J71
J71
J71
HV1(Y)
HV1(M)
HV1(C)
HV1(Bk)
J70
J70
J70
J70
DC bias for upstream

auxiliary brush
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-26
9-30
Chapter 9
b-2. Route of the Upstream Auxiliary Brush Bias Control Signal

Environment
sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A
J131-B
SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K.C
SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K.C
SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y.M
SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y.M
High-voltage
unit
J97
J98
HV1-SUB
J74
J78
SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K.C
SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K.C
SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y.M
SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y.M
J94
J94
HV4(Y,M)
HV4(C,Bk)
J93
J93
J71
J71
J71
J71
HV1(Y)
HV1(M)
HV1(C)
HV1(Bk)
J70
J70
J70
J70
: control signal.
F-9-27
9-31
Chapter 9
c-1. Route of the Downstream Auxiliary Brush Bias
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85
J87
J71
J73
J75
J72
J71
J86
J76
J82
HV1-SUB
HV2
J77
J72
J81
J79
J71
J72
J71
J72
HV1(Y)
HV1(M)
HV1(C)
HV1(K)
J70
J70
J70
J70
DC bias for
downstream
auxiliary brush
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-28
9-32
Chapter 9
c-2. Route for the Downstream Auxiliary Brush Bias Control Signal
Environment
sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A
J131-B
SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_Y,M
High-voltage
unit
SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_C,K
J97
J73
SUB_LO_CTRL_Y
J98
HV1-SUB
J75
SUB_LO_CTRL_M
J77
SUB_LO_CTRL_C
J79
SUB_LO_CTRL_K
J72
J72
J72
J72
HV1(Y)
HV1(M)
HV1(C)
HV1(Bk)
J70
J70
J70
J70
: control signal.
F-9-29
9-33
Chapter 9
9.5.4 Charging Mechanism

9.5.4.1 Construction of the Charging Mechanism
0000-4501
Outline and Uses

1. charging the photosensitive drum
2. controlling the polarity of residual toner by the cleaning sheet
T-9-35
thus preventing the adhesion of toner to the
primary changing roller
thus eliminating the need for a cleaning
mechanism for the photosensitive drum
Component
Primary charging roller
1. in preparation for the next image formation

session, the photosensitive drum is evenly charged
to a negative potential.
2. returns the toner changed to a negative potential
to the photosensitive drum (for collection in the
developing assembly).
Primary charging roller cleaning
charges residual toner to a negative potential by
sheet
friction
(thereby returning the toner to the photosensitive
drum).
Charging roller
F-9-30
9-34
Cleaning sheet
Chapter 9
9.5.4.2 Controlling the Charging Bias
0000-4502
T-9-36
AC
level of output suited to discharge current control
Component:
DC
level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor/SALT
Component:
sensor
d-1. Route of the Primary Charging Bias
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85
J87
J71
J73
J75
J72
J71
J86
J76
J82
HV1-SUB
HV2
J77
J72
J81
J79
J71
J72
J71
J72
HV1(Y)
HV1(M)
HV1(C)
HV1(Bk)
J70
J70
J70
J70
AC/DC bias for primary

charging roller
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-31
9-35
Chapter 9
d-2. Route for the Primary Charging Bias Control Signal

Environment
sensor
SALT sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A
J109
CHRG_DC_CTRL
_Y,M
CHRG_AC_CTRL
_Y,M
J131-B
CHRG_DC_CTRL
_C,K
CHRG_AC_CTRL
_C,K
CH_CLK
High-voltage
unit
J88
HV2-SUB
J87
CHRG_AC_CLK
J97
J98
J76
HV1-SUB
J73
CHRG_DC_CTRL
_Y
CHRG_AC_CTRL
_Y_SND
J75
_M
CHRG_AC
_CLK
_M_SND
J77
_C
CHRG_AC
_CLK
_C_SND
J79
_K
CHRG_AC
_CLK
_K_SND
CHRG_AC
_CLK
J72
J72
J72
J72
HV1(Y)
HV1(M)
HV1(C)
HV1(Bk)
J70
J70
J70
J70
: control signal.
F-9-32
9-36
Chapter 9
9.6 Toner Container

9.6.1 Outline of the Toner Container
0000-4503
The toner container consists of toner, stirring blade, and toner feedscrew;
as many as 4 containers are used (Y, M, C, Bk), and all of them are of the same construction.
Stirring blade
Toner
Toner feedscrew
(supplies toner from the container
to the developing assembly)
F-9-33
9.6.2 Controlling the Toner Container Drive
0000-4504
T-9-37
Part
Source of drive
Remarks
Stirring blade
Toner container motor (M20 to 23)
driven through gars
Toner feedscrew
Toner container motor (M20 to 23)
DC controller PCB

drive signal
M20
M21
M22
M23
Toner stirring blade
Bk
Toner feedscrew
F-9-34
9-37
9.6.3 Checking the Level of Toner
0000-4505
The machine checks the level of toner using the following sensors:
T-9-38
Developing
assembly
ATR sensor
magnetic sensor
Description
checks the concentration of toner inside the developing assembly.
relies on the fact that a change in the ratio between carrier (magnetic)
and toner (non-magnetic) changes the force of magnetism.
detects changes to identify the level of toner.
SALT Sensor
photo sensor
Description
checks the sample toner formed on the intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
at such times as programmed.
checks the density of the toner image after development.
Toner
Toner feedscrew rotation sensor
container
photosensor
Description
checks the number of revolutions made by the toner feedscrew.
the amount of toner supplied to the developing assembly made by a
single rotation of the feedscrew is constant, enabling the computation of
the level of remaining toner with reference to the number of revolutions.
Chapter 9
DC controller PCB
J124
J126
ATR_CTRL_Y,M
ATR_SIG_Y,M
J125
J129
ATR_CTRL_Y,M
ATR_SIG_Y,M
T-CRG_PULSE_Y,M,C,K
PATCH_P
PATCH_S
Feedscrew
rotation
sensor
Bk
SALT
sensor
ATR
sensor
: control signal.
F-9-35
9.6.4 Controlling the Supply of Toner
0000-4506
1. Developing Assembly
If the ATR sensor identifies a shortage of toner inside the developing assembly, the machine starts control of toner
supply from the toner container to the developing assembly.
DC controller PCB
J124
J126
Toner container (Y)
M20
Toner feedscrew
Developing assembly
Y drum unit
ATR sensor
F-9-36
9-39
9.7 Transfer Unit

9.7.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit
9.7.1.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit
0000-4507
The transfer unit consists of 2 units: intermediate transfer unit and secondary transfer unit:
Intermediate Transfer Unit
intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
primary transfer roller (1 pc. each for Y, M, C, and Bk)
ITB cleaning blade
secondary transfer internal roller
Secondary Transfer Unit
secondary transfer external roller
static eliminator
feed guide
Intermediate transfer unit
ITB cleaning
blade
Waste toner
feedscrew
Secondary transfer internal roller
ITB
Primary transfer
roller
Feed guide
Transfer lower front guide
Attraction
plate
Static eliminator
Secondary transfer external roller
Secondary transfer unit
F-9-37
9.7.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Transfer Unit
0000-4508
T-9-39
Part
Source of drive
Drive roller
Drum ITB motor (M1)
Intermediate transfer belt
Linked to drive roller
(ITB)
Linked to ITB
Remarks
Chapter 9
Part
Source of drive
Secondary transfer internal
Linked to ITB
Remarks
roller
Secondary transfer external
roller
Tension roller
Linked to ITB
Waste toner feedscrew
Tension roller
DC controller PCB
J105
Drum ITB motor drive signal

Drum ITB
motor
Tension roller
M1

Drive roller
Waste toner
feedscrew
ITB
F-9-38
9-41
Chapter 9
9.7.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias

9.7.2.1 Controlling the Transfer Bias
0000-4509
1. Primary Transfer Bias

output in keeping with the reading of the environment sensor, color mode, ATVC control
2. Secondary Transfer Bias
output in keeping with the type of paper, reading of the environment sensor, color mode (full-color/monochrome),
ATVC control
e. Route of the Primary Transfer Bias/Bias Control Signal
Environment
sensor
DC controller PCB

J109
1_TR_CTRL_Y,M,C,K
High-voltage
unit
J88
J91
HV2-SUB
J89
TR1_CTRL_Y,M,C,K
J80
HV2
J83
DC bias for
primary transfer
: +24V
: +1kV
: control signal
F-9-39
9-42
Chapter 9
f. Route of the Secondary Transfer Bias/Bias Control Signal

Environment
sensor
DC controller PCB

J109
2TR_SEL
2TR_CTRL_P,N
High-voltage
unit
J88
J91
HV2-SUB
J90
Secondary transfer
high-voltage unit
NCTL
PCTL
PSEN
J95
HV3
T801
Secondary transfer
external roller
DC bias for
secondary transfer
: +24V
: +1kV
: control signal.
F-9-40
9-43
9.7.3 Cleaning
9.7.3.1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
0000-4510
The machine uses a cleaning blade to clean the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).
T-9-40
Cleaning belt:
remains in contact with the ITB at all times, and used to scrape
off toner from the ITB.
Scoop-up sheet:
used to prevent fall of toner.
Cleaning blade
ITB
Waste toner feedscrew
Scoop-up sheet
F-9-41
Chapter 9
9.7.3.2 Secondary External Roller
0000-4511
The secondary transfer external roller is cleaned electrostatically.

A bias is applied to the secondary transfer external roller alternately using the polarity used for image formation
and the polarity opposite it for longer than the time it takes the roller to make a single rotation, thereby returning
the toner remaining on the roller to the ITB.
Timing of Control
1. when a copy/print job ends.
2. after recovery from a jam.
3. when a sample image (or test pattern) is formed as part of image stabilization control.
9.7.3.3 Collecting Waste Toner
0000-4512
The machine uses the following mechanism to collect waste toner.

Waste Toner
The waste toner is scraped off by the cleaning blade, and is moved to the waste toner box by the waste toner
feedscrew.
Waste Toner Box Full Detection
The waste toner sensor consists of a LED (light-emitting) and a phototransistor (light-receiving) to find out when
the waste toner box becomes full.
Tension roller
Waste toner sensor

(light-emitting)
DC controller
PCB
J127
+5V
GND
Waste toner sensor

(light-receiving)
+3.3V
WASTE_TONER_FULL
GND
F-9-42
9-45
Chapter 9
9.7.4 Separation Mechanism

9.7.4.1 Separation
0000-4513
The machine uses the following mechanism to separate paper:

T-9-41
1. Separation
- Curvature (mechanical)
- Static Eliminator (static electricity)
It is grounded to lower the potential occurring on the back of
paper, thus facilitating the separation of paper from the ITB.
T-9-42
2. Separate
Auxiliary
Mechanism
- Feed Guide
It is used to prevent increases in the potential occurring on the
back of paper because of friction used when it is moved to the
fixing assembly.
It is used to prevent image faults caused by contact with the
attraction plate.
- Attraction Plate
It is grounded, and is used to draw paper.
9-46
Chapter 9
The eccentric arrangement of the 2 rollers causes the paper to separate

by taking advantage of the rigidity of paper (curvature separation).
ITB
Paper
Feed guide
Attraction plate
Feed guide
Attraction plate
Static eliminator
F-9-43
9-47
Chapter 9
9.8
Parts
Procedure
Replacement
9.8.1.5
Removing
the
DC
0000-4618

9.8.1 Drum ITB Motor

9.8.1.1 Slide Out the Drum Unit
0000-4614
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the drum unit to
the front.

Rear Cover
0006-7770
9.8.1.3 Removing the Lower

Rear Cover
0000-4616
F-9-45
1) Remove the lower rear cover.
9.8.1.4
Removing
the
0000-4617

[1]
F-9-46
9.8.1.6
Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover

F-9-44
9-48
0000-4619
Chapter 9
9.8.1.7
Opening
the
Controller Box
Main
3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the

0000-4620
top of the main controller box.
1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC

controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
F-9-50
4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
F-9-47
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine,

and open it.
2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box.
F-9-48
F-9-51
F-9-49
9-49
Chapter 9
9.8.1.8
Removing
the
DC
Controller Mounting
0000-4621
1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free

all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove
the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB
[2] together with its base.
F-9-54
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the
connector [2]; then, detach the heat exhaust fan unit
[3].
F-9-52
9.8.1.9 Removing the Fixing

Heat Discharge Fan
0000-4622

connector [2]; then, detach the fixing heat discharge
fan [3].
F-9-55
F-9-53
9.8.1.10
Removing
the
Machine Heat Discharge Fan
0000-4623
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fan duct [2].
9-50
Chapter 9
9.8.1.11
Removing
Developing Drive Unit
the
0000-4624
1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the developing

motor [1], and free the harness [3] from the cable
clamp [4].
F-9-58
9.8.1.12 Removing the Lattice

Connector Mounting
0000-4625
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect all

F-9-56
connectors; then, detach the lattice connector

Mounting [2].
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main

controller base [2].
F-9-57
F-9-59

developing drive assembly [2].
9-51
Chapter 9
9.8.1.13 Removing the HighVoltage Unit
0000-4626
1) Disconnect all connectors of the high-voltage unit;

then, remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the highvoltage unit [2].
F-9-62
9.8.1.15 Removing the Drum

ITB Motor Mounting
F-9-60
0000-4628
Points to Note When Removing the Drum ITB

Motor Mounting
2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate

[2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3].
To remove, put your hand into the inside where you

have slid out the manual feed unit; then, while holding
down the swing plate [1] found to the rear of the drum
drive unit, remove from the machine's rear side plate.
The drum drive unit is hooked on the protrusion from
the rear side plate; lift it slightly to detach.
F-9-61
9.8.1.14 Removing the Manual

Feed Cooling Fan Duct
0000-4627
F-9-63
1) Slide out the manual fee unit; then, disconnect the

connector [1] and remove the 2 screws [2] to detach
the manual feed cooling fan duct [3].
1) Free the DC harness [1] found at the front of the

drum ITB motor base from the cable clamp [2].
9-52
Chapter 9
F-9-66
F-9-64
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 3
9.8.2 Drum Drive Unit
screws [2]; then, detach the drum ITB motor base

[3].
9.8.2.1 Slide Out the Drum Unit
0006-7762
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the drum unit to
the front.

Rear Cover
0006-7769

Rear Cover
0000-4632

F-9-65
9.8.2.4
0000-4633

0000-4629
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the drum ITB

motor [2].
the

ITB Motor
Removing

9-53
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-69
9.8.2.6
Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover

F-9-67
9.8.2.5
Removing
the
0000-4635
DC
9.8.2.7
0000-4634

Opening
the
Controller Box
Main
0000-4636

F-9-70
F-9-68

9-54
Chapter 9
F-9-71
F-9-74
9.8.2.8
Removing
the
Controller Mounting
DC
0000-4637

F-9-72
F-9-75
F-9-73
and open it.
9-55
Chapter 9

Heat Discharge Fan
0000-4638

fan [3].
F-9-78
9.8.2.11
Removing
the
0000-4640
F-9-76
9.8.2.10
Removing
clamp [4].
the
0000-4639
F-9-79
F-9-77
[3].
9-56
Chapter 9
F-9-80
F-9-82

0000-4642

F-9-81

Controller Base
0000-4641
F-9-83

Mounting [2].

9-57
Chapter 9
F-9-84
F-9-86

ITB Motor Mounting Base

0000-4644

[3].

Motor Mounting
F-9-87

Drive Unit
0000-8360

screws [2]: then, take out the drum drive unit [3].
F-9-85

9-58
Chapter 9
F-9-90
9.8.3.2
Removing
the
0000-4527
1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear,
F-9-88
slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then,

detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2].
9.8.3 Drive Roller

9.8.3.1 Pressure Release of the
0000-4524
1) Open the front cover, and turn the intermediate

transfer unit releasing lever to unlock it.
2) Slide out the manual feed unit.
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the middle right
cover [2].
F-9-91
F-9-89
4) Release the escape lever [1].
F-9-92
9-59
Chapter 9
9.8.3.3
Removing
Intermediate Transfer Belt
the
4) Remove the 4 screws [1] at the rear, and pull out the
0000-4528
link plate (rear) [2].
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the belt cover

[2].
F-9-96
5) Fit the boss [1] on the frame at the rear into the
F-9-93
recess [A] in the middle right cover so that the unit

is upright.
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the varistor [2].
F-9-94
F-9-97
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer guide
6) Be sure that the rear link plate [1] is on the opposite

of the middle right cover so that the intermediate
plate [2].
transfer unit will not fall down.
F-9-95
F-9-98
9-60
Chapter 9
7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the
marking on its surface is to the rear.
link plate (front) [2]; then, rotate it 180 deg.

[1]
F-9-101
2) When fitting the belt, place the unit in a low
position so that the belt may be fitted from above
F-9-99
and straight down.
When you have pulled out the belt, keep it upright or

place it on paper to avoid damage.
After bending the transfer frame, pull out the transfer
belt [1] upward.
F-9-102
3) Check to make sure that the edge [A] of the belt
does not ride over the rib [B] of the tension roller.
[1]
[2]
F-9-100
[2]
Check to make sure that the secondary transfer
[A]
[2]
[A]
F-9-103
internal roller is free of soiling. If dirt is found, clean

it with alcohol.
Points to Note When Attaching the Intermediate

Transfer Belt
1) Attach the intermediate transfer belt so that the
9-61
Chapter 9
9.8.3.4 Removing the Drive

Roller
0000-4529
1)
1) The spring found at the front is under pressure;

thus, starting at the front can cause the spring to
snap out. Be sure to start at the rear.
2) When removing the gear, be sure to take care not to
lose the parallel pin.
At the rear, remove the following: E-ring [1], washer
[2], bearing [3], E-ring [4], gear [5], parallel pin [6],
F-9-105
gear butting spacer [7], bearing [8], and 2 E-rings [9].
3) Remove the bearing [1] found at the rear, and free

the drive roller [2] from the cut-off [A] of the frame
found at the front.
F-9-104
F-9-106
2) At the front, remove the following: E-ring [1],
washer [2], bearing [3], E-ring [4], washer [5],
spring [6], washer [7], bearing [8], grounding plate
[9].
Points to Note When Attaching

When attaching the washer, spring, and washer at the
front, be sure to fit the E-ring after forcing down the
spring together with the washer until the E-ring
groove [A] of the drive roller shaft is in view.
9-62
Chapter 9
F-9-107
F-9-108
9.8.4 Developing Motor (Bk)

9.8.4.5
the

Rear Cover
Removing
0006-7766
DC
0000-4577


Rear Cover
0006-7773
9.8.4.3
Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover
0000-4575
9.8.4.4
Removing
the
0000-4576
F-9-109

9-63
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-110
F-9-113
9.8.4.6
Opening
the
Controller Box
Main
0000-4578

F-9-114
F-9-111
and open it.
F-9-115
F-9-112
9-64
Chapter 9
9.8.4.7
Removing
the
9.8.5 Developing Motor (Y/M/C)
DC
Controller Mounting
0000-4579


Rear Cover
0006-7767

Rear Cover
0006-7772
9.8.5.3
Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover
0006-7716
9.8.5.4
Removing
the
F-9-116
0000-4568
9.8.4.8
Removing
Developing Motor (Bk)
the

0000-4580

connector [2]; then, detach the developer motor
(Bk) [3].
F-9-117
F-9-118
9-65
Chapter 9
9.8.5.5
Removing
the
9.8.5.6
DC
0000-4569

Opening
the
Controller Box
Main
0006-7725

F-9-121
F-9-119

[1]
F-9-122
F-9-120
F-9-123
9-66
Chapter 9

F-9-126
F-9-124
9.8.5.8
Removing
the
Developing Motor (Y/M/C)
0000-4572
and open it.
F-9-127
F-9-125
9.8.5.7
Removing
the
Controller Mounting
DC
connector [2]; then, detach the developer motor [3]

0006-7744
(starting at the right, Y, M, and C in sequence).

F-9-128
9-67
Chapter 9
9.8.6 Secondary Transfer Unit

Unit
0000-4667
1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit
[2].
F-9-131
When removing the secondary transfer unit, be sure to

take care not to lose the tension spring [1] found
behind it.
F-9-129
9.8.6.2 Removing the Duplex

Open/Close Guide
0000-4669
1) Remove the duplex open/close guide [1].
F-9-132
2) Hold the grips at the front and the rear, and slide the
front side to the right to pull out the secondary
transfer unit [1].
F-9-130
9.8.6.3
Removing
the
Secondary Transfer Unit
0000-4670
1) Remove the screw [1] at the front, and detach the

secondary transfer unit retainer [2].
F-9-133
9-68
Chapter 9
9.8.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit

0000-4514

cover [2].
F-9-136
F-9-134
F-9-137
9.8.8 Transfer Cleaning Unit

9.8.8.1 Removing the Waste
Toner Container
0000-4646

transfer unit releasing lever [1] to detach the waste
toner container [2].
F-9-135
9.8.7.2
Removing
the
0000-4517

F-9-138
9-69
Chapter 9
F-9-139
F-9-141
9.8.8.2 Removing the Transfer

Cleaning Unit

0000-4647
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer

cleaning unit [2].
F-9-142
9.8.9.2
F-9-140
Removing
9.8.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt
the
0000-4521


0000-4518

cover [2].
F-9-143
9-70
Chapter 9

plate [2].
F-9-144
9.8.9.3
Removing
F-9-147
the
0000-4522

[2].
F-9-148
F-9-145
is upright.
F-9-146
F-9-149
9-71
Chapter 9

F-9-152
F-9-150

it with alcohol.

Transfer Belt
[1]
F-9-151

F-9-153

belt [1] upward.

and straight down.
9-72
Chapter 9
F-9-154
F-9-156
[1]
[2]
[2]
[A]
[2]
[A]
F-9-155
F-9-157
9.8.10 Primary Transfer Roller
9.8.10.2
Removing

the
0000-4651

0000-4648


cover [2].
F-9-158
9-73
Chapter 9

plate [2].
F-9-159
9.8.10.3
Removing
F-9-162
the
0000-4652

[2].
F-9-163
F-9-160
is upright.
F-9-161
F-9-164
9-74
Chapter 9

F-9-167
F-9-165

it with alcohol.

Transfer Belt
[1]
F-9-166

F-9-168

belt [1] upward.

and straight down.
9-75
Chapter 9
F-9-169
[1]
[2]
F-9-171
[2]
[A]
[2]
[A]
Points to Note When Mounting the Primary

Transfer Roller
F-9-170
1) Bend over the edge of the sheet [1] at the front, and
fit the edge [2] of the roller and then fit its rear side.
9.8.10.4 Removing the Primary

Transfer Roller
0000-4653
1) Bend over the edge of the sheet [1] at the rear; while
picking the edge [3] of the primary transfer
roller[2], detach it upward.
F-9-172
2) Check to make sure that the edge of the sheet [1] is
on the inner side of the rib [2].
9-76
Chapter 9
Take care not to touch the surface of the secondary

transfer external roller.
Holding the tabs [1] at both ends, remove the
secondary transfer roller [2].
F-9-173
9.8.11 Secondary Transfer External

Roller
F-9-175

Unit
0000-4661
1) If the white spacer [2] of the secondary transfer

[2].
roller [1] becomes soiled with toner or the like, the

roller can fail to rotate, causing lines. Be sure to see
to it that the spacer moves.
F-9-174
9.8.11.2
Removing
the
F-9-176
Secondary Transfer External

Roller
1)
0000-4663
2) When mounting the roller [1], be sure that the edge

of the leaf spring [2] found at the rear and used for
electrical continuity is not bent over.
9-77
Chapter 9
cover [2].
F-9-177
F-9-179
3) Be sure that the spring [1] is securely fitted to the
back of the tab used to remove/attach the roller.
Pay attention to the orientation of the spring, as

different types are used between front and rear.
F-9-180
9.8.12.2
Removing

F-9-178
the
0000-4657

9.8.12 Secondary Transfer Internal

Roller
0000-4654

9-78
F-9-181
Chapter 9

plate [2].
F-9-182
9.8.12.3
Removing
F-9-185
the
0000-4658

[2].
F-9-186
F-9-183
is upright.
F-9-184
F-9-187
9-79
Chapter 9

it with alcohol.

Transfer Belt
F-9-188

[1]
F-9-191
and straight down.
F-9-189

belt [1] upward.
F-9-192
F-9-190
9-80
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
[2]
[A]
[2]
[A]
F-9-193
9.8.12.4
Removing
the
Secondary Transfer Internal

Roller
F-9-195
0000-4659
1) Extend the belt frame, and fit the link plate at both
front and rear.
4) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2] at the

front; then, remove the secondary transfer internal
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the
roller [3].
positioning block [2] at the rear.
F-9-196
F-9-194
3) Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], and bushing [3].
Points to Note When Attacing the Secondary
Transfer Internal Roller
When Attaching the bushing at the front, be sure to fit
the bushing [2] while avoiding the spring [1] found on
the inner side of the frame.
9-81
Chapter 9
F-9-199
F-9-197

Rear Cover
0000-4582
9.8.13 Toner Container Drive Unit
Toner Container
0006-0801
Rear Cover
0000-4583
9.8.13.4 Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover
0000-4584
9.8.13.5
Removing
the
0000-4585

F-9-198
9-82
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-202
9.8.13.7 Opening the Main

Controller Box
F-9-200
0000-4587

9.8.13.6 Removing the DC

0000-4586

F-9-203
F-9-201

F-9-204
9-83
Chapter 9

Controller Mounting
0000-4588

F-9-205
F-9-208
9.8.13.9 Removing the Toner

Container Drive Unit
0000-4589
1) Disconnect the connector from the relay PCB 1,

and feed the harness of the developer motor from
F-9-206
the cable clamp; then, remove the 4 screws [1], and

detach the relay PCB 1 together with its base [2].

and open it.
F-9-209
screws [2]; then, detach the toner container drive
unit [3].
F-9-207
9-84
Chapter 9
9.8.14.2 Removing the Front

Cover
0000-4560
1) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 hinge pins [2];

then, detach the front cover.
F-9-210
9.8.14 Waste Toner Detection PCB

F-9-213

Toner Container
9.8.14.3
0000-4559

Removing
the

Releasing Lever
0000-4561
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the intermediate
transfer unit releasing lever [2].
F-9-211
F-9-214
F-9-212
9-85
Chapter 9
9.8.14.4 Removing the Cleaner

Fan Cover
0006-8837

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cleaner fan
cover [2].
F-9-217
2) Detach the waste toner detection PCB [1] from the
cover, and disconnect the connector [2] for
replacement.
F-9-215
9.8.14.5 Removing the Inside

Cover (lower)
0000-4563

screws [2]; then, detach the inside cover (lower)
[3].
F-9-218
9.8.15 Feedscrew Rotation Sensor

Toner Container
0006-0802

F-9-216


Toner Detection PCB
0000-4564
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] found behind the fixing/

feeder unit; then, detach the waste toner detection
PCB cover [2].
9-86
Chapter 9
F-9-219
F-9-221

0000-4607

F-9-220

Rear Cover
0000-4603

Rear Cover
0000-4604

Upper Rear Cover
0000-4605
9.8.15.5
Removing
F-9-222
the
0000-4606
9-87
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-223
F-9-226

Controller Box
0000-4608

F-9-227
F-9-224
and open it.
F-9-228
F-9-225
9-88
Chapter 9

Controller Mounting
0000-4609

F-9-231

Container Drive Assembly
Upper Plate
F-9-229
1) Remove the screw [1], 2 E-rings [2], and 2 bushings

[3]; then, free the harness from the edge saddle [4];

0000-4611
then, free the harness [5] of the toner container

0000-4610
motor from the cord clamp [6] to detach the toner

container drive assembly top plate [7].

F-9-230
F-9-232
unit [3].
Points to Note When Attaching the Toner
Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate
9-89
Chapter 9
When mounting the top plate, check to be sure to fit

the edge of the idler gear [1] after matching it against
the hole [2] in the top plate and the hole [3] in the
bottom plate.
9.8.15.11
Removing
the
Feedscrew Rotation Sensor
0000-4612

feedscrew rotation sensor [2].
F-9-233
F-9-236
9.8.16 Tone Container Motor

Toner Container
0006-0803

F-9-234
F-9-237
F-9-235
9-90
Chapter 9
F-9-238

Rear Cover
0000-4591

Rear Cover
F-9-239
0000-4592

Upper Rear Cover
0000-4595

0000-4593
9.8.16.5
Removing
the
0000-4594

F-9-240

9-91
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-241
F-9-244

Controller Box
0000-4596

F-9-245
F-9-242
and open it.
F-9-246
F-9-243
9-92
Chapter 9

Controller Mounting
0000-4597

F-9-249

Container Drive Assembly
Upper Plate
F-9-247
1) Remove the screw [1], 2 E-rings [2], and 2 bushings

[3]; then, free the harness from the edge saddle [4];

0000-4599
then, free the harness [5] of the toner container

0000-4598
motor from the cord clamp [6] to detach the toner

container drive assembly top plate [7].

F-9-248
F-9-250
unit [3].
Points to Note When Attaching the Toner
Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate
9-93
Chapter 9
When mounting the top plate, check to be sure to fit

the edge of the idler gear [1] after matching it against
the hole [2] in the top plate and the hole [3] in the
bottom plate.

Container Motor
0000-4600
1) Remove the gear [2] that is engaged with the gear

[1] found at the tip of the toner container motor.
F-9-251
F-9-254
connector [2]; then, detach the toner container
motor [3].
F-9-252
F-9-255
9.8.17 Waste Toner Feedscrew Case

Toner Container
0000-4556

F-9-253

9-94
Chapter 9
Points to Note When Removing the Waste Toner

Feedscrew Case
Remove the waste toner feedscrew only when a jam
has occurred and the sheet [1] attached to the
feedscrew has become damaged or bent (rendered
useless).
F-9-256
F-9-259

[1] slightly counterclockwise, and remove the
screw [2]; then, remove the waste toner feedscrew
F-9-257
case[3].
9.8.17.2 Removing the Transfer

Cleaning Unit
0000-4557
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer

cleaning unit [2].
F-9-260
9.8.18 Pattern Reader Unit

F-9-258


Toner Feedscrew Case
0000-4530

0000-4558

9-95
Chapter 9

cover [2].
F-9-264
F-9-261
Right Cover
0000-4533
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right
cover [2].
F-9-262
F-9-265
9.8.18.2
Removing
the
0000-4532

9.8.18.4 Removing the Pattern

Reader Unit
0000-4534
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the

screw [2]; then, free the plate [4] from the hook of
the upper right stay [3], and detach the pattern
reader unit [5].
F-9-263
9-96
Chapter 9
F-9-268
3) Connect the connector [1]; then, while pulling the
escape lever [2] toward the front, hook the plate [3]
on the left/right claw [4], and secure it in place with
F-9-266
a screw [5] over the screw hole.
Point to Note When Attaching the Pattern Reader

Unit
<Mounting to the Machine>
1) Match the boss [1] with the rail [2].
F-9-269
9.8.19 Auto Registration Sensor PCB

F-9-267
2) While pushing the cleaning member [1] to the right,
fit it in while taking care so that it will not hit the
slide rail [2] of the intermediate transfer unit on the
side of the machine's side plate.
0000-4546

cover [2].
9-97
Chapter 9
F-9-273
F-9-270
Right Cover
0000-4550

cover [2].
F-9-271
9.8.19.2
Removing
the
F-9-274
0000-4549


Reader Unit
0000-4551

reader unit [5].
F-9-272
9-98
Chapter 9
F-9-277
F-9-275

Unit
F-9-278
9.8.19.5 Removing the Auto

Registration Sensor PCB
0000-4553
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the plate

found to the rear of the pattern reader unit [2].
F-9-276
9-99
Chapter 9
F-9-281
F-9-279
connectors [2]; then, remove the auto registration
sensor PCB (front) [3].
MEMO:
The auto registration sensor PCB (rear) is also
removed in the same way.
9.8.20 SALT Sensor

0000-4536

cover [2].
F-9-280
F-9-282
Points to Note When Attaching the Auto
Registration Sensor PCB
When Attaching the plate [1], be sure that its edge is
farther on the inner side than the cleaning member [2].
9-100
Chapter 9

Right Cover
0000-4540

cover [2].
F-9-283
9.8.20.2
Removing
the
0000-4539
F-9-286


Reader Unit
0000-4541

reader unit [5].
F-9-284
F-9-287
F-9-285
9-101
Chapter 9

Unit
F-9-290
F-9-288
F-9-289
9-102
Chapter 9
9.8.20.5 Removing the SALT

Sensor
0000-4543
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the plate from

the rear of the pattern reader unit [2].
F-9-293
F-9-291
connector [2]; then, detach the SALT sensor [3].
F-9-292
Points to Note When Attaching the Plate

When Attaching the plate [1], be sure to position it so
that it is farther on the inner side than the cleaning
member [2].
9-103
Chapter 9
9-104
Chapter 10 Pickup/
Feeding System
Contents
Contents
10.1 Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Arrangement of he Units ........................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers .......................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Paths .................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors ......................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.6 Arrangement of the Clutches and Solenoids .......................................................................................... 10-6
10.1.7 Route of Dive ......................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 10-8
10.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ........................................................................................... 10-8
10.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key ................................................ 10-8
10.3 Detecting Jams .............................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.1 Delay Jams ............................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.1.1 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly ................................................................................... 10-9
10.3.1.2 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly ......................................................................... 10-9
10.3.2 Stationary Jams ..................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.2.1 Stationary Jams .............................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.3.2.2 Stationary Jams at Power-On ........................................................................................................ 10-11
10.4 Cassette ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-12
10.4.1 Identifying the Paper Size .................................................................................................................... 10-12
10.4.2 Detecting the Level of Paper ................................................................................................................ 10-14
10.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ................................................................................................................................. 10-16
10.5.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-16
10.5.2 Basci Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................. 10-17
10.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ............................................................................................................................ 10-18
10.6.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-18
10.6.2 Basic Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................. 10-19
10.6.3 Identifying the Size of Paper ................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.6.4 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper ............................................................................................ 10-21
10.6.5 Detecting the Last paper ....................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.7 Registration Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.7.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-23
10.8 Duplex Feeding Unit ................................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.8.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-25
10.8.2 Controling Horizontal Registration ...................................................................................................... 10-26
10.8.3 Face-Down Delivery, A4, 5 Sheets in Circulation ............................................................................... 10-27
10.8.4 Face-Down Delivery, A3, 3 Sheets in Cirucilation .............................................................................. 10-29
10.9 Delivery ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-32
10.9.1 Delivery ................................................................................................................................................ 10-32
10.9.2 Movement in the Direction of Face-Down Delivery ............................................................................ 10-33
10.9.3 Movement in the Direction of Face-Up Delivery ................................................................................ 10-34
10.9.4 Movement for CenterTray delivery ...................................................................................................... 10-34
10.9.5 Moement for Copy Tray Dievyer ......................................................................................................... 10-35
10.10 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit .......................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.10.1.1 Removing the Cassette ................................................................................................................ 10-36
10.10.1.2 Removing the Front Right Cover ................................................................................................ 10-36
10.10.1.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover ................................................................................................. 10-36
Contents

10.10.2 Cassette Size Detection Unit .............................................................................................................. 10-37
10.10.2.2 Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit ................................................................................ 10-37
10.10.3 Pickup Roller ...................................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.3.2 Removing the Pickup Roller ........................................................................................................ 10-38
10.10.4 Feed Roller .......................................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.4.2 Removing the Feeding Roller ...................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.5 Separation Roller ................................................................................................................................ 10-38
10.10.5.2 Removing the Separation Roller .................................................................................................. 10-39
10.10.6 Cassette Pickup Motor ........................................................................................................................ 10-39
10.10.6.9 Removing the Lattice Controller Base ......................................................................................... 10-41
10.10.6.13 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor ....................................................................................... 10-42
10.10.7 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ............................................................................................................... 10-43
10.10.7.7 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ................................................................................. 10-44
10.10.8 Cassette Paper Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 10-45
10.10.8.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor ........................................................................................... 10-47
10.10.9 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ..................................................................................................... 10-48
10.10.9.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ...................................................................... 10-49
Contents
10.10.10 Slide Resistor .................................................................................................................................... 10-50

10.10.10.4 Removing the Slide Resistor ..................................................................................................... 10-52
10.10.11 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.1 Removing the Cassette .............................................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.2 Removing the Front Right Cover .............................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover ............................................................................................... 10-52
10.10.11.5 Removing the Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................ 10-53
10.10.11.6 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................... 10-53
10.10.12 Manual Feed Tray Unit .................................................................................................................... 10-53
10.10.13 Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................................................. 10-54
10.10.14 Manual Feed Roller .......................................................................................................................... 10-55
10.10.15 Manual Feed Separation Roller ........................................................................................................ 10-57
10.10.15.5 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller ......................................................................... 10-59
10.10.16 Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor ....................................................................................................... 10-60
10.10.16.4 Removing the Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor ......................................................................... 10-62
10.10.17 Manual Feed Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 10-62
10.10.17.5 Removing the Manual Feed sensor ........................................................................................... 10-64
10.10.18 Transparency Sensor (Front/Rear) ................................................................................................... 10-66
10.10.18.3 Removing the Transparency Sensor (front/rear) ....................................................................... 10-66
10.10.19 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid .......................................................................................................... 10-66
10.10.19.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ........................................................................... 10-69
10.10.20 Registration Motor ........................................................................................................................... 10-69
10.10.20.4 Removing the Registration Motor ............................................................................................. 10-70
10.10.21 Pre-Registration Motor ..................................................................................................................... 10-71
Contents

10.10.21.4 Removing the Pre-Registration Motor ....................................................................................... 10-72
10.10.22 Horizontal Registration Motor .......................................................................................................... 10-72
10.10.22.3 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ................................................................................. 10-73
10.10.22.5 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate ..................................................... 10-73
10.10.22.6 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor ........................................................................... 10-74
10.10.23 Registration Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 10-74
10.10.23.3 Removing the Registration Sensor ............................................................................................ 10-75
10.10.24 Fixing/Feeder Unit ............................................................................................................................ 10-75
10.10.25 Vertical Path Roller .......................................................................................................................... 10-76
10.10.25.6 Removing the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate ............................................................. 10-77
10.10.25.7 Mounting the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate .............................................................. 10-77
10.10.25.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller ............................................................................................ 10-78
10.10.26 Inside Delivery Roller ....................................................................................................................... 10-78
10.10.26.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller ........................................................................................ 10-78
10.10.27 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor .......................................................................................... 10-79
10.10.27.6 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................ 10-84
10.10.28 Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................................. 10-84
10.10.28.6 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor .............................................. 10-85
10.10.29 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ......................................................................... 10-86
10.10.29.6 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ........................................... 10-90
10.10.30 Drawer Connector (manual feed unit) .............................................................................................. 10-90
10.10.30.2 Removing the Disconnecting the Drawer Connector (manual feed unit) .................................. 10-91
10.10.31 Drawer Connector (fixing/feeder unit) ............................................................................................. 10-91
Contents

10.10.31.3 Removing the Drawer Connector (fixing feeder unit) .............................................................. 10-92
10.10.32 Duplex Roller 1 ................................................................................................................................ 10-92
10.10.32.3 Removing the Duplex Roller 1 .................................................................................................. 10-92
10.10.33 Duplex Feed Motor .......................................................................................................................... 10-94
10.10.33.3 Removing the Duplex Feed Motor ............................................................................................ 10-95
10.10.34 Duplex Registration Sensor .............................................................................................................. 10-96
10.10.35 Duplex Horizontal Registration Sensor ............................................................................................ 10-97
10.10.35.4 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate .................................................... 10-98
10.10.36 Duplex Pickup Sensor ...................................................................................................................... 10-99
10.10.36.1 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ............................................................................................. 10-99
10.10.36.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit Releasing Lever ...................................................... 10-99
10.10.36.3 Removing the Inside Cover (lower) ........................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.4 Removing the Cassette ............................................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.5 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.6 Removing the Front Cover ...................................................................................................... 10-100
10.10.36.7 Removing the Rear Right Cover ............................................................................................. 10-101
10.10.36.8 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover .............................................................................. 10-101
10.10.36.9 Removing the Pickup Unit ...................................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.10 Removing the Upper Rear Cover .......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.11 Removing the Lower Rear Cover .......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.12 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.13 Removing the Controller Box Cover ..................................................................................... 10-102
10.10.36.14 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ............................................................................. 10-102
10.10.36.15 Opening the Main Controller Box ......................................................................................... 10-103
10.10.36.16 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ................................................................................ 10-104
10.10.36.17 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ............................................................................ 10-104
10.10.36.18 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ................................................................................... 10-104
10.10.36.19 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting .......................................................................... 10-105
10.10.36.20 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct ..................................................................... 10-105
10.10.36.21 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB ........................................................................................ 10-105
10.10.36.22 Removing the Duplex Pickup Sensor .................................................................................... 10-105
10.10.37 Duplex Registration Clutch ............................................................................................................ 10-106
10.10.37.3 Removing the Duplex Feeder Motor Connector ..................................................................... 10-107
10.10.37.5 Removing the Duplex Registration Clutch .............................................................................. 10-107
10.10.38 Duplex Pickup Clutch .................................................................................................................... 10-108
Contents

10.10.38.4 Removing the Duplex Pickup Clutch ...................................................................................... 10-109
10.10.39 Delivery Vertical Path Unit ............................................................................................................ 10-110
10.10.40 Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 ......................................................................................................... 10-115
10.10.40.5 Removing the Delivery Sensor Mounting Plate ...................................................................... 10-119
10.10.40.6 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Sensor Flag .................................................................... 10-119
10.10.40.7 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 .......................................................................... 10-120
10.10.41 Face-Up Delivery Roller ................................................................................................................. 10-120
10.10.41.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Cover ................................................................................. 10-121
10.10.41.3 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller ...................................................................................... 10-121
10.10.41.4 Removing the Face-Up Delivery Roller .................................................................................. 10-122
10.10.42 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 ...................................................................................................... 10-123
10.10.43 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 2 ...................................................................................................... 10-128
10.10.44 Face-Down Delivery Motor ............................................................................................................ 10-133
10.10.44.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Motor ............................................................................. 10-137
10.10.45 Delivery Vertical Path Motor ......................................................................................................... 10-137
10.10.45.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Motor ........................................................................... 10-141
10.10.47 Center Delivery Tray Full sensor ................................................................................................... 10-146
Contents

10.10.47.5 Removing the Center Delivery Tray Full sensor ..................................................................... 10-149
10.10.48 Face-Down Delivery Sensor 2 ....................................................................................................... 10-150
10.10.49 Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ....................................................................... 10-154
10.10.49.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ......................................... 10-158
10.10.50 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 .............................................................................................. 10-158
10.10.50.5 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ........................................................................................... 10-162
10.10.50.6 Removing the Cleaner Fan ...................................................................................................... 10-162
10.10.51 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 2 .............................................................................................. 10-163
10.10.52 Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt ....................................................................................... 10-163
10.10.52.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt ........................................................ 10-167
Contents
Chapter 10
10.1 Construction
0005-9871
The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the pickup feeder system are as follows:
T-10-1
Item
Description
Method of paper
Front loading
accommodation
Method of pickup
Separation retard
Paper feed reference
Center
Size of paper
Cassette 1/2
550 sheets (80 g/m2)
Manual feed tray
100 sheets (80 g/m2)
accommodation
Size of paper
Cassette 1/2
A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, B5R,

A5R,
12x18, 11x17, LGL, LTR,
LTRR, STMTR
Manual feed tray
98 to 320 mm (main scanning

direction)
148 to 457.2 mm (sub
scanning direction)
Type of paper
Plain , Heavy, transparency
64 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 (from

cassette)
64 g/m2 to 253 g/m2 (from
manual feeder)
Paper size switching
Duplex print
Cassette 1/2
by user
Manual feed tray
by user
Through path
10-1
Chapter 10
10.1.2 Arrangement of he Units
0000-4672
[1]
[8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
F-10-1
T-10-2
10-2
[1] Delivery assembly
[5] Pickup unit
[2] Fixing unit
[6] Registration unit
[3] Duplex unit
[7] Manual feed unit
[4] Secondary transfer unit
[8] Intermediate transfer unit
[5]
Chapter 10
10.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers

[2]
0000-4673
[1]
[3]
[4]
[23]
[22]
[21]
[20]
[7]
[5]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[6]
[16]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[15]
[14]
F-10-2
T-10-3
[13] Pickup roller
[14] Separation roller
[15] Feed roller
[17] Re-pickup roller
[18] Manual feed separation roller
[7] Fixing roller (fixing upper roller)
[19] Manual feed roller
[8] Pressure roller (fixing lower roller)
[20] Pre-registration roller
[9] Duplex roller 1
[21] Lower registration roller
[22] Upper registration roller
[23] Secondary transfer roller
10-3
Chapter 10
10.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Paths
0000-4674
Face-down delivery
(center delivery tray)
Face-down
delivery
(copy tray)
Pickup from
manual feeder
Face-up delivery
(side delivery tray)
Pickup from cassette 1
F-10-3
10-4
Pickup from
paper deck
Chapter 10
10.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors

[1]
0000-4675
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[22]
[21]
[2]
[3]
[20]
[4]
[19]
[5]
[18]
[6]
[7]
[17]
[8]
[16]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
F-10-4
T-10-4
[1] Center delivery tray full sensor (PS8)
[14] Cassette 2 paper level sensor (A; PS20)
[2] Face-down delivery sensor 1 (PS12)
[15] Cassette 2 paper sensor (PS19)
[3] Face-down delivery sensor 2 (PS6)
[16] Cassette 2 retry paper sensor (PS17)
[4] Delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor (PS13)
[17] Caste 1 paper sensor (PS7)
[5] Fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor (PS5)
[18] Cassette 1 retry paper sensor (PS16)
[6] Fixing delivery sensor (PS25)
19] Pickup vertical path cover open/closed sensor (PS11)
[7] Fixing inlet sensor (PS27)
[20] Manual feed last paper sensor (PS9)
[8] Duplex registration sensor (PS21)
[21] Manual fed unit open/closed sensor (PS28)
[9] Duplex horizontal registration sensor (PS22)
[22] Manual feed paper sensor (PS10)
[10] Duplex pick sensor (PS24)
[23] Front cover open/closed sensor (PS23)
[11] Cassette 1 paper level sensor (B; PS15)
[24] Transparency sensor (front; OHP1)
[12] Cassette 1 paper level sensor (A; PS14)
[25] Transparency sensor (rear; OHP2)
[13] Cassette 2 paper level sensor (B; PS18)
[26] Registration sensor (PS26)
10-5
Chapter 10
10.1.6 Arrangement of the Clutches and Solenoids
0000-4676
[1]
[7]
SL
SL
SL
[2]
[6]
CL
CL
SL
[5]
[3]
SL
[4]
F-10-5
T-10-5
[1] Delivery path switching solenoid 1 (SL2)
[5] Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL3)
[2] Delivery path switching solenoid 2 (SL5)
[6] Duplex pickup solenoid (CL2)
[3] Duplex registration clutch (CL1)
[7] manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1)
[4] Cassette 2 pickup solenoid (SL4)
10-6
Chapter 10
10.1.7 Route of Dive
0000-4677
M11
M1
M10
M8
M9
SL1
M24
M6
CL1
SL3
M7
CL2
M26
SL4
F-10-6
T-10-6
CL1
duplex registration clutch
M10
delivery vertical path motor
CL2
duplex pickup clutch
M11
face-down delivery motor
M1
drum ITB motor
M24
fixing motor
M6
cassette 1 pickup motor
M26
duplex feeder motor
M7
caste 2 pickup motor
SL1
manual feed pickup solenoid
M8
registration motor
SL3
caste 1 pickup solenoid
M9
pre-registration motor
SL4
cassette 2 pickup solenoid
10-7
Chapter 10
10.2 Basic Sequence

0000-4678
Main power
switch ON
Printer unit
WMUP
WMUPR
PSTBY
360 sec (approx.)
Drum ITB motor

(M1)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 2 pickup
motor (M7)
Registration motor
(M8)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Delivery vertical
path motor (M10)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Face-down delivery
motor (M11)
*1
Fixing motor
(M24)
Duplex feeder
motor (M26)
*1
*1: rotates for about 4.0 sec; a stationary jam will be identified if the sensor goes ON during the period.
F-10-7
10.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start

Key
0000-4679
Print start
PRINT
2.76sec (approx.)
1.3sec (approx.)
Cassette pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette retry paper
sensor (PS16)
Registration
sensor (PS26)
Pre-registration
sensor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
F-10-8
10-8
LSTR
Chapter 10
10.3 Detecting Jams

10.3.1 Delay Jams
10.3.1.1 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly
0000-4680
The leading edge of paper is not at the sensor within a specific period of time (for feeding) after the motor has gone
ON.
Start key ON
or print start
INTR
[1]
Pickup motor
PRINT
[1]
Jam check
Normal
Sensor N
Error
[1]: specific feed time.
F-10-9
T-10-7
Source
Motor
Sensor
Cassette 1
Pickup motor (M6)
Cassette 1 retry paper sensor (PS16)
Cassette 2
Pickup motor (M7)
10.3.1.2 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly
0000-4681
A delay jam occurring outside the cassette pickup assembly is identified at the following timing:
The period of time during which paper is moved form the sensor N-1 to the delay jam sensor N in question is
controlled, and a delay jam will be identified if the delay jam sensor N in question does not go ON within a specific
period of time after the sensor N-1 has gone ON.
Start key ON
or PRINT setting
accepted
INTR
[1]
PRINT
[1]
Sensor N-1
Jam check
Sensor N
Normal
Error
[1]: specific period of feed.
F-10-10
10-9
Chapter 10
T-10-8
Sensor
Registration sensor (PS26)
Fixing delivery sensor (PS25)
Face-down delivery sensor 1 (PS12)
Duplex registration sensor (PS21)
Duplex pickup sensor (PS24)
10.3.2 Stationary Jams

10.3.2.1 Stationary Jams
0000-4682
A stationary jam will be identified if the sensor N does not go OFF within a specific period of tie after the sensor N
has gone ON.
Start key ON
or print start
INTR
L+A
PRINT
L+A
Jam check
Sensor N
Normal
Error
(L = paper length feed distance; A = specific feed distance)
F-10-11
T-10-9
Sensor
Caste 2 retry paper sensor (PS17)
Face-down deliver y sensor 2 (PS6)
10-10
Chapter 10
10.3.2.2 Stationary Jams at Power-On
0000-4683
The machine checks the absence of paper over the following sensors before it starts initial multiple rotations at
power-on:
T-10-10
Sensor
Caste 1 retry paper sensor (PS16)

Fixing inlet sensor (PS27)
10-11
Chapter 10
10.4 Cassette
10.4.1 Identifying the Paper Size
0000-4684
The machine identifies the size of paper into the cassette with reference to the slide guide (15 settings) of the cassette.
The 4-in-a-row actuator designed for the identification of the cassette size found on the machine side goes ON/OFF
according to the position of the slide guide, permitting the machine to identify 15 settings. In the absence of a
cassette, all 4 actuators will go OFF.
Paper size
slide guide
Cassette size
detecting switch
Size detecting
actuator
Cassette open
Cassette closed
Cassette
F-10-12
T-10-11
4-in-a-row actuator
Rear
10-12
Paper size
Bit3
STMT R
ON
LTR
LTR R
Front
Bit2
Bit1
ON
ON
ON
Bit0
Chapter 10
4-in-a-row actuator
Rear
Paper size
Bit3
Front
Bit2
Bit1
ON
Bit0
LGL
ON
11X17*1
A5 R
ON
A4
ON
A4 R
A3
ON
10
B5
ON
ON
11
B5 R
ON
ON
ON
12
B4
ON
ON
ON
ON
13
12X18*2
ON
ON
ON
14
U1
ON
ON
15
U2
16
no cassette
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON: actuator pressed (i.e... '0'in reference to a check in I/O mode).

*1:279 x 431.8[mm]
*2:305 x 457[mm]
10-13
Chapter 10
10.4.2 Detecting the Level of Paper
0000-4685
The level of paper inside the cassette is detected using the following three sensors:
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[8]
F-10-13
T-10-12
[1] Flag
[6] Paper level sensor flag
[2] Cassette paper sensor
[7] Lifter gear
[3] Gear
[8] Tray
[4] Cassette paper level sensor (A)
[9] Paper
[5] Cassette paper level sensor (B)
10-14
Chapter 10
View from the Front of the Machine

If the cassette is full of paper
Cassette paper Cassette paper
level sensor (B) level sensor (A)
Paper
OFF OFF
If the cassette is half full of paper
Paper
OFF ON
If the cassette has little paper
Paper
ON ON
Cassette paper sensor

Flag
Paper tray
If the cassette has no paper
F-10-14
T-10-13
Paper level sensor (A)
Paper level sensor (B)
Paper sensor
Level of paper
off
off
off
100% to 50% of capacity
ON
off
off
about 50% to about 50 sheets
ON
ON
off
About 50 sheets or less
---
---
ON
No paper
Indication on control panel
10-15
Chapter 10
10.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit

10.5.1 Outline
0005-9837
The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate, and the pickup roller is borught down to the paper for
pickup.
The feed roller and the srpaton roller are used to make sure that no more than a single sheet of paper is moved to the
feeing assembly; the pickup vertical path roller/pre-registration roller is then used to move the paper a fara as the
kegistatoin roller (upper, lower).
The pickup vertical path roller and the pre-registration roller are each driven by the pickup 1 motor and the preregistration motor, respectively.
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
F-10-15
T-10-14
[1] Vertical path guide
[7] Holding plate
[2] Caste retray paper sensor
[8] Lifter plate
[9] Retard guide
[4] Feed roller (roller B)
[10] Separation ton roller (roller C)
[5] Pickup roller (roller A)
[11] Retard spring
[6] Cassette paper sensor
10-16
Chapter 10
10.5.2 Basci Sequence of Operations
0005-9838
Print start
PRINT
LSTR
2.76sec (approx.)
1.3sec (approx.)
Cassette pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette retry paper
sensor (PS16)
Registration
sensor (PS26)
Pre-registration
sensor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
F-10-16
10-17
Chapter 10
10.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit

10.6.1 Outline
0000-4688
The paper in the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the pickup feeder roller as the lifter moves up, an a single
sheet of paper is separed and moved ahead by the work of the pickup feeder roller and the separation roller.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[9]
[8]
[6]
[7]
F-10-17
T-10-15
[1] Paper tray
[6] Manual feeder separation roller
[2] Side guide plate
[7] Registration multi frame
[3] Paper flag
[8] Last paper pick roll
[4] Manual feed feeder roller
[9] Lifter
[5] Pickup guide plate
10-18
Chapter 10
Torque limter
Torque delay
mehcainsm
Manual feeder
pickup feed roller
DC drive direct link
Separation roller
holder
Manual feeder
separation roller
F-10-18
Torque delay mechanism

in operation
Initial
condition
Torque limiter in
operation
Manual feed
feeder roller
Paper
Tortion spring
Damper core
Spring pin
Separation
roller shaft
Separation
roller
Torque delay mechanism Separation roller shaft
direction of rotation
direction of rotation
F-10-19
0000-4689
Print start
PRINT
LSTR
1.9 sec (approx.)
Manual feed pickup

Solenoid (SL1)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration
sensor (PS26)
Registration motor
(M8)
F-10-20
10-19
Chapter 10
10.6.3 Identifying the Size of Paper
0000-4690
The machine checks the widht of paper in reference to the level of output ffrom the variable resistor operating in
conjunction with the movemetn of the side guide epatle. The side guide plate on the manual feed tray is set by the
user when he/she deposit paper.
Variable resistor
Manual feed tray
Slide guide (rear)
Slide guide (front)
F-10-21
10-20
Chapter 10
10.6.4 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper
0000-4691
When paper is placed, its weight pushes down the paper detecting flag, thus enabling the manual feed paper sensor
(PS10) to detect the presence of paper.
Paper detecting
flag
Paper
Manual feed paper

sensor (PS10)
Paper
Manual feed paper Paper detecting

sensor (PS10)
flag
F-10-22
10-21
Chapter 10
10.6.5 Detecting the Last paper
0000-4692
When the last paper pickup roll rotates, the slit in the roll cuses the output of the last paper sensor (PS9) to beocme
wave-form pusles. The last paper roll rotates only when the last paper is picked up; otherwise, it remains still. The
machine will identify the paper to be the last paper if it detects 4 or more output pules form the lat paper sensor.
Last paper
Manual feed
last paper
sensor (PS9)
Last paper
detecting roll
Last paper
If 4 or more output pulses are detected,
the paper is identified as being the last.
Manual feed lsat paper

sensor (PS9)
Last paper detecting roll
F-10-23
10-22
Chapter 10
10.7 Registration Unit

10.7.1 Outline
0000-4693
The upper registraont roller an the lower registration roller are dreiven by the registration motor (M8), and are used
to make user aht the paper an the image on the intermediate transfer rbelt mach at a specific position. The upper guide
locking arm latches in place when the unit is fitted to the machine.
When fitted to the machine
Upper registration
roller
Lower registration
roller
Area of upper
guide to be
locked in place
Machine rail
Upper guide
locking arm
Upper guide preasure

spring
Mobile rail
When the multi upper guide is shifted up

Registration Nip Released
The shape of the cam causes
the registration upper roller
to move up by 1.5 mm during
rotation, releasing the nip
where paper moves.
Registration multi
upper guide
Area of upper guide
to be locked
in place
Upper guide locking

arm open (unlocked)
Machine rail
Upper guide pressure spring
Mobile rail
F-10-24
10-23
Chapter 10
Registration motor (M8)
Pre-registration motor (M9)

Manual feed
pickup solenoid
Manual feed
control gear
Upper
registration
roller
Lower
registration
roller
Pre-registration
roller
F-10-25
10-24
Duplex
roller shaft
Manual feed
roller shaft
Chapter 10
10.8 Duplex Feeding Unit

10.8.1 Outline
0000-4694
The duplex nit is drivn by the duplex motor (M26), and is sued when making double-sided prints.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
F-10-26
T-10-16
[1] Reversing sheet
[9] Delivery cooling duct
[2] Reversing rollre
[10] Arching assembly
[3] Reversing sheet
[12] Duplex horizontal registration

sensor (PS22)
[5] Cross path flapper
[6] Duple roller 1
[7] FU/FD swtycing flapper
[15] Re-pickup roller
10-25
Chapter 10
10.8.2 Controling Horizontal Registration
0000-4695
When in duplexing mode, the machine executes horizontal registration detection for paper coming from the duplex
feed assembly to see if there is any discrepancy in main scanning direction (front-rear direction), thus adjusting the
point of laser exposure.
T-10-17
Detecting of paper
duplex horizontal registration sensor (PS22)
position:
Timing of detection:
starts a specifi peirrod of time after pasage over the duplex

registraont neosr (PS21)
Dive
horizontal registration motor (M25)
Identifiaotin of
with refenced to the pulse form the horizontal registration
position:
motor
Horizontal registration
motor (M25)
Duplex horizontal registration
sensor (PS22)
Paper
Home
position
Detection start
position
10 mm (approx.)
F-10-27
10-26
Paper
Chapter 10
10.8.3 Face-Down Delivery, A4, 5 Sheets in Circulation
0000-4696
The number on a white backgoudn and the nbuer on a black background indicated the 1s side and the 2nd side,
respse3ctively.
1 point of reversal
2
1 duplex pre-registration
(1)
(3)
(2)
2
1 check on horizontal
registration
(4)
3
1
in wait for
re-pickup
1
2
(6) with 2 sheets inside duplex unit

(5)
(7)
10-27
Chapter 10
1
4
3
(8)
2
1
2
5
5
5
(10)
thereafter, repeats (7) through (10)
(9)
3
2
1
(12)
10-28
(11)
Chapter 10
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
(14)
(13)
10.8.4 Face-Down Delivery, A3, 3 Sheets in Cirucilation
0000-4697
The nbuemr on a white background and the nbuemr on a black backgrdoun indicated the 1st side and he 2nd side,
respectively.
1 point of reversal
1 duplex pre-registration
(1)
(2)
(3)
10-29
Chapter 10
check on horizontal
registration
(4)
2 point of reversal
1
1 in wait for
1
2
re-pickup
(5)
(6)
3
2
(8)
thereafter, repeats (6) through (8)
10-30
non-contact reversal
(7)
Chapter 10
3
2
1
2
1
(9)
(10)
10-31
Chapter 10
10.9 Delivery
10.9.1 Delivery
0000-4698
The machine uses any of the following 3 types of delivery (paper apths):
face-deown delivery (center delivery tray)
face-down delivery (copy tray)
face-up device r(side delivery tray)
Face-down delivery
(center delivery tray)
Face-down delivery
(copy tray)
Face-up delivery
F-10-28
10-32
Chapter 10
10.9.2 Movement in the Direction of Face-Down Delivery
0000-4699
After moving thtough the fixing unit, the paper moves along the FU/FD switching flapper now facing downawar; it
then pushes down the plastic sheet to move to the vertical path diecoint for face-down delivery.
Plastic sheet
FU/FD
switching
flapper
F-10-29
10-33
Chapter 10
10.9.3 Movement in the Direction of Face-Up Delivery
0000-4700
After moving through he fixing unit, the paper moves uder the FU/FD swtichign flapper, which has been shfited up
by the delivery path switching solenoid (SL2); at this time the cross path flapper is also siwtched over by the work
of the delivery path switching solenoid 2 (SL5), thus guding the paper into the direction of face-up delivery.
FU/FD
switching
flapper
Face-up delivery
Cross path
flapper
F-10-30
10.9.4 Movement for CenterTray delivery
0000-4701
The paper moves while pushing down the plastic sheet, and then moves ahead for center tray delivery.
Center tray delivery
Paper
Plastic sheet
F-10-31
10-34
Chapter 10
10.9.5 Moement for Copy Tray Dievyer
0000-4702
The paper meos while pushign down the plastic sheet, and then moves ahead in the direction of the centra tray.
Immeiately after the trailig edge of the paper moves past the palstc film the momevement stops, at which time the
movmeent rverses so that the paper moves along the plastic sheet in the direction of the copy tray.
Paper
Copy tray delivery
Plastic sheet
Paper
Copy tray delivery
Paper
movement
reverse
Plastic sheet
F-10-32
10-35
Chapter 10
10.10 Parts
Procedure
Replacement
cover [2].
10.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit

10.10.1.1
Removing
the
Cassette
0000-4704
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
F-10-34
1) Slide out the cassette.
10.10.1.4 Removing the Pickup

Vertical Path Cover

Right Cover
0006-8859
1) Slide out the manual feed unit, and open the pickup
vertical path cover.
1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical

path lower cover [1]; then, detach the pickup
vertical path cover [3].
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the machine's

front right cover [2].
F-10-35
F-10-33
10.10.1.3 Removing the Rear

Right Cover
0006-8860
The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the rear right
10-36
0000-4707
Chapter 10

Unit
0000-4708

screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3].
F-10-37
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and push the
protrusion [A] from the left to release the lock;
F-10-36
then, detach the cassette size detection unit [2] for

the machine's front.
10.10.2 Cassette Size Detection Unit

10.10.2.1
Removing
the
Cassette
0000-4778
MEMO:
F-10-38
10.10.2.2
Removing
the
Cassette Size Detection Unit
0000-4779

lower left cover [2].
MEMO:
When attaching the cassette size detection unit, try
pushing the 4 protrusions into the holes of the
machine's stay.
10-37
Chapter 10
10.10.3 Pickup Roller
10.10.4.2
Removing
the
Feeding Roller
10.10.3.1
Removing
the
Cassette
0000-4714
1) Put your hand through the machine's front; then,

0000-4710
pick the tab [A] of the feed roller, and pull it out.
MEMO:

Roller
0000-4711
1) Put your hand through the machine's front; then,
F-10-40
pick the tab [A] of the pickup roller [1], and pull it
out.
10.10.5 Separation Roller

10.10.5.1
Removing
Cassette
the
0000-4716
MEMO:
F-10-39
10.10.4 Feed Roller

10.10.4.1
Removing
Cassette
the
0000-4713
MEMO:
10-38
Chapter 10
10.10.5.2
Removing
the
Separation Roller
0000-4717
1) Put your hand through the front of the machine;

then, pick the tab [A] of the separation roller [1],
and pull it out.
F-10-42
10.10.6.5
Removing
the
0000-4760

F-10-41

10.10.6 Cassette Pickup Motor

Rear Cover
0006-7771

Rear Cover
0000-4758

Upper Rear Cover
0000-4762

Power Supply Unit
0000-4759
F-10-43

connectors of the fuse PCB; then, detach the DC
power supply unit [2].

0000-4761

10-39
Chapter 10
F-10-46
F-10-44
10.10.6.8
Removing
the
0000-4764

clamp [4].
[1]
F-10-47
F-10-45


Heat Discharge Fan
0000-4763

fan [3].
F-10-48
10-40
Chapter 10

F-10-51
F-10-49

Controller Base
0000-4765

Mounting [2].
F-10-52
10.10.6.11
Removing
the
Manual Feed Cooling Fan

Duct
0000-4767

F-10-50
10.10.6.10
Removing
High-Voltage Unit
the
0000-4766

10-41
Chapter 10
F-10-53
F-10-55

Right Cover

0000-4768
screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup motor

unit [3].
cover [2].
F-10-56
screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup motor
unit [3].
F-10-54
10.10.6.13
Removing
Cassette Pickup Motor

1) Remove the grip [1].
10-42
the
0000-4769
Chapter 10

Right Cover
0000-4734
cover [2].
F-10-57
10.10.7 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor

10.10.7.1
Removing
the
Cassette
0000-4732
MEMO:
F-10-59
Vertical Path Cover

Right Cover
0000-4735

0000-4733


F-10-60
F-10-58
10-43
Chapter 10

Unit
0000-4736

F-10-63
10.10.7.7
F-10-61
Removing
the
Cassette Retry Paper Sensor
0000-4738
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the
10.10.7.6 Removing the Pick-
cassette retry paper sensor [2].
up System Sensor Mounting

Plate
0000-4737
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] at the rear, and remove the

bracket [2].
F-10-64
10.10.7.8 Mounting the Pickup System Sensor Mounting

Plate
0000-4739
F-10-62
Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw
[1]; then, detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3].
Thereafter,remove the 5 screws [4], and detach the
sensor mounting plate [5].
Mounting Plate
Any of the gears can drop off. When attaching the
sensor mounting plate, be sure that the pickup unit
will not face downward.
1) Attach the bushing [1] to the frame; then, attach the
gear shaft [2].
10-44
Chapter 10
10.10.8 Cassette Paper Sensor

10.10.8.1
Removing
the
Cassette
0000-4740
MEMO:
F-10-65
2) Fit the 6 locations [A] indicated in the figure firmly
into the holes of the mounting plate; then, secure
the sensor mounting plate [2] in place.

Right Cover
0000-4741
F-10-66
3) Attach the gear [1] and the E-ring [2].
F-10-68

Right Cover
0000-4742
F-10-67
4) Turn the gears to see that the movement is smooth.
cover [2].
10-45
Chapter 10
F-10-71
F-10-69
10.10.8.6 Removing the Pick10.10.8.4 Removing the Pickup

Vertical Path Cover

0000-4743

Plate
0000-4745

bracket [2].
F-10-70
F-10-72

Unit

0000-4744
10-46
Chapter 10
F-10-75
F-10-73
10.10.8.7
Removing
the
Cassette Paper Sensor
0000-4746

cassette paper sensor [2].
F-10-76
F-10-74
10.10.8.8 Mounting the Pickup System Sensor Mounting

Plate
0000-4747

Mounting Plate
F-10-77


gear shaft [2].
10-47
Chapter 10
10.10.9 Cassette Paper Level Sensor

(A/B)
10.10.9.1
Removing
the
Cassette
0000-4748
MEMO:
F-10-79

Right Cover

0000-4749
Vertical Path Cover
0000-4751

F-10-80
F-10-78

Right Cover
Unit
0000-4750
0000-4752

cover [2].
10-48
Chapter 10
F-10-81
F-10-83
10.10.9.6 Removing the Pickup System Sensor Mounting

Plate
10.10.9.7
0000-4753

bracket [2].
Removing
the
Cassette Paper Level Sensor

(A/B)
0000-4754

cassette paper sensor (A/B) [2].
F-10-84
F-10-82
10.10.9.8 Mounting the Pick-
Plate
0000-4755

Mounting Plate
10-49
Chapter 10
10.10.10 Slide Resistor
gear shaft [2].
10.10.10.1
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit
0000-4995
1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right

side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].
F-10-85
F-10-88
2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2];
then, detach the manual feed unit [3].
F-10-86
F-10-89
10.10.10.2
Removing
Manual Feed Tray Unit
the
0000-4996
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the base [2].
F-10-87
10-50
Chapter 10
F-10-92
F-10-90
2) Disconnect the connector [1] at the rear; then, while
opening the face plate [2], shift the manual feed tray
MEMO:
[3] 90 deg or more to detach it upward.
When attaching the upper cover [1] and the lower

cover [2], match the markings [A] found on the side,
and slide them into place.
F-10-91
F-10-93
10.10.10.3
Removing
the
Manual Feed Tray Upper

Cover/Lower Cover
0000-4997
1) Spread the side guide [1] of the manual feed tray

unit, and separate it into the upper cover [2] and the
lower cover [3] (for detachment).
10-51
Chapter 10
10.10.11 Cassette Pickup Solenoid
10.10.10.4 Removing the Slide

Resistor
0000-4998
10.10.11.1
Removing
the
Cassette
0000-4771
Points to Note Removing the Slide Resistor

When detaching the slide resistor, do not apply excess
MEMO:
force when spreading the claw of the lower cover;
otherwise, the claw can break.
When attaching the slide resistor, take care not to

touch the connector [1] at the edge of the slide resistor.
Try to match the black protrusion [A] behind the slide

resistor against the hole [A] in the tray.

Right Cover
0000-4772
F-10-94
1) Disconnect the connector [1] on the lower cover

side, spread the claw [A], and detach the slide
resistor [2].
F-10-96

Right Cover
0000-4773
cover [2].
F-10-95
10-52
Chapter 10
F-10-99
F-10-97
10.10.11.6
10.10.11.4
Removing
the
Cassette Pickup Solenoid
the
Pickup Vertical Path Cover
Removing
0000-4776
0000-4774
screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup
solenoid [3].
F-10-100
F-10-98
10.10.12 Manual Feed Tray Unit

10.10.11.5
Pickup Unit
Removing
the
0000-4775

10.10.12.1
Removing
Manual Feed Unit Cover
the
0000-4949

10-53
Chapter 10
10.10.12.2
Removing
the
0000-4950
F-10-101
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and
the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed
unit cover [4].
F-10-104
F-10-102
F-10-105
10.10.13 Manual Feed Unit

10.10.13.1
Removing
Manual Feed Unit

F-10-103
the
0000-4947

10-54
Chapter 10
F-10-106
F-10-108

F-10-109
F-10-107
10.10.14 Manual Feed Roller
10.10.14.2
Removing

10.10.14.1
Removing
Manual Feed Unit
the
the
0000-4961

0000-4960

F-10-110
10-55
Chapter 10
unit cover [4].
F-10-113
2) Remove the gear [1] at the front, and detach the
F-10-111
bushing [2].
(For both gear and the bushing, free the claw fitted
in the groove of the roller for detachment.)
F-10-112
F-10-114
10.10.14.3
Removing
Manual Feed Roller
the
0000-4962
3) Remove the bushing [1] at the rear.
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the mounting

plate [2].
F-10-115
4) Remove the resin clamp [1], and pull out the
manual feed roller [2].
10-56
Chapter 10
10.10.15 Manual Feed Separation

Roller
When attaching the manual feed roller, be sure that the
groove of the parallel pin is toward the rear.
10.10.15.1
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit
0000-4964

F-10-116
F-10-118
When attaching the bushing and the gear at the front,

check to be sure that the claw is hooked on the groove
of the roller.

F-10-119
10.10.15.2
F-10-117
Removing
the
0000-4965

10-57
Chapter 10
10.10.15.3
Removing
the
Motor Cover
0006-8853
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the motor cover

[2] at the rear.
F-10-120
unit cover [4].
F-10-123
10.10.15.4
Removing
Manual Feed Roller
the
0000-4966

plate [2].
F-10-121
F-10-124
bushing [2].
F-10-122
10-58
Chapter 10

of the roller.
F-10-125
F-10-128
10.10.15.5
Manual
F-10-126
Removing
Feed
Separation
Roller
the
0000-4968
1)

Take care not to lose the spring found at the front
when detaching the face plate.
Detach the face plate [1].
F-10-129
F-10-127
10-59
Chapter 10
When attaching the face plate, be sure that the spring

[2] fits into the hole [1] found on the front side of the
arm.
F-10-132
10.10.16 Manual Feed Last Paper

Sensor
F-10-130
10.10.16.1
2) Detach the rear guide [1] and the middle guide [2].
(Free the snap-in claw.)
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit
0000-5000

F-10-131
F-10-133
3) Pick the tab [A] of the manual feed separation roller
[2], and pull it out in the direction of the arrow.

10-60
Chapter 10
F-10-134
10.10.16.2
Removing
the
F-10-136
0000-5001
10.10.16.3
Removing
the
Manual Feed Tray Upper

Cover/Lower Cover
0000-5002
1) Spread the side guide [1] of the manual feed tray

unit, and separate it into the upper cover [2] and the
lower cover [3] (for detachment).
F-10-135
F-10-137
MEMO:
When attaching the upper cover [1] and the lower
cover [2], match the markings [A] found on the side,
and slide them into place.
10-61
Chapter 10
10.10.17 Manual Feed Sensor

10.10.17.1
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit
0000-4970

F-10-138
10.10.16.4
Removing
the
Manual Feed Last Paper

Sensor
0000-5003
1) Free the needle spring [1] from the hook, and

detach the detecting roll [2].
F-10-141
F-10-139
F-10-142
manual feed last paper sensor [2].
10.10.17.2
Removing
the
0000-4971

F-10-140
10-62
Chapter 10
10.10.17.3
Removing
the
Manual Feed Roller
0000-4973

plate [2].
F-10-143
unit cover [4].
F-10-146
bushing [2].
F-10-144
F-10-147
F-10-145
10-63
Chapter 10
F-10-148
F-10-150
10.10.17.4
Removing
the
Motor Cover
0000-4974

[2] at the rear.
F-10-149
F-10-151
10.10.17.5
Removing
Manual Feed sensor

the
0000-4975
1)

of the roller.
Take care not to lose the spring found at the front

when detaching the face plate.
Detach the face plate [1].
10-64
Chapter 10
F-10-152
F-10-154
3) Remove the sensor flag [2] attached to the middle
guide [1].
When attaching the face plate, be sure that the spring

[2] fits into the hole [1] found on the front side of the
arm.
F-10-155
4) Disconnect the connector [1] from behind the
F-10-153
middle guide, and detach the manual feed paper

sensor [2].
2) Detach the rear guide [1] and the middle guide [2].
(Free the snap-in claw.)
F-10-156
10-65
Chapter 10
10.10.18
Transparency
Sensor
(Front/Rear)
10.10.18.1
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit
0000-4952

F-10-159
10.10.18.3
Removing
the
Transparency Sensor (front/

rear)
0000-4954
1) While taking care not to touch the light-emitting

face, detach the transparency sensor [1].
F-10-157
F-10-160
10.10.19
Manual
Feed
Pickup
Solenoid
F-10-158
10.10.18.2
Removing
Transparency
Mounting Plate
10.10.19.1
the
Manual Feed Unit
Sensor
0000-4953

screws [2]; then, detach the sensor base [3] found at
the bottom.
10-66
Removing
the
0000-4977

Chapter 10
unit cover [4].
F-10-161
F-10-164
F-10-162
10.10.19.2
Removing
F-10-165
the
0000-4978

10.10.19.3
Removing
Manual Feed Roller
the
0000-4979

plate [2].
F-10-163
10-67
Chapter 10

F-10-166
bushing [2].
F-10-169

of the roller.
F-10-167
F-10-170
10.10.19.4
F-10-168
Removing
Motor Cover
the
0000-4980

10-68
[2] at the rear.
Chapter 10
[A]
[1]
[B]
[2]
F-10-173
F-10-171
10.10.20 Registration Motor

10.10.19.5
Manual
Removing
Feed
the
Pickup
Solenoid
10.10.20.1
0000-4981

[2]; then, detach the manual feed pickup solenoid
[3].
F-10-172
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit
0000-4989

F-10-174
Points to Note When Attaching the Manual Feed

Pickup Solenoid
When attaching the solenoid [1], be sure to hook the
flapper [A] on the claw [B] of the gear [2].
F-10-175
10-69
Chapter 10
10.10.20.2
Removing
the
0000-4990

F-10-178
10.10.20.3
Removing
the
Motor Cover
F-10-176
0000-4992

[2] at the rear.
unit cover [4].
F-10-179
10.10.20.4
Removing
Registration Motor
F-10-177
the
0000-4993

screws [2]; then, detach the registration motor [3].
10-70
Chapter 10
F-10-182
F-10-180
10.10.21.2
10.10.21 Pre-Registration Motor
Removing
the
0000-4984
10.10.21.1
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit

0000-4983

F-10-183
F-10-181

unit cover [4].

F-10-184
10-71
Chapter 10
F-10-185
10.10.21.3
Removing
F-10-187
the
Motor Cover
10.10.22
0000-4986
Horizontal
Registration
Motor

[2] at the rear.
10.10.22.1
Removing
the
Fixing Unit
0000-4882

[2].
F-10-186
10.10.21.4 Removing the PreRegistration Motor
0000-4987
F-10-188
screws [2]; then, detach the pre-registration motor

[3].
10.10.22.2
Removing
Fixing/Feeder Unit
the
0000-4883
1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/

feeder unit [2].
10-72
Chapter 10
F-10-191
1) Stand it so that the fixing feeder unit cover is at the
F-10-189
bottom.
10.10.22.3
Removing
2) Free the 6 snap-ons [A] and the 3 hooks [B]; then,
the
Duplex Open/Close Guide
0000-4884
detach the sheet [1] from behind the fixing feeder

assembly.
F-10-190
10.10.22.4
Removing
Fixing/Feeder
F-10-192
the
10.10.22.5
Assembly
Back Sheet
Horizontal
0000-4885
Removing
the
Registration
Motor Support Plate
0000-4886

screws [2]; then, detach the horizontal registration
- When placing the fixing feeder unit upright, be sure
motor support plate [3].
to use paper to prevent dirt from collecting.

- If you forgot to use paper, make a double-sided test
copy before ending the work.
10-73
Chapter 10
F-10-195
F-10-193
10.10.23 Registration Sensor

- When attaching the horizontal registration motor
support plate [1], be sure to bring the horizontal
registration motor support plate firmly in contact
with the grounding lead spring [2] found under the
10.10.23.1
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit
0000-4956

guide plate.
- After replacement, check to make sure that the
sensor flag moves smoothly.
F-10-196
F-10-194
10.10.22.6
Horizontal
Motor
Removing
the
Registration
0000-4887

motor [3].
10-74
Chapter 10
F-10-197
10.10.23.2
Removing
Transparency
F-10-199
the
10.10.24 Fixing/Feeder Unit
Sensor
Mounting Plate
0000-4957

screws [2]; then, detach the sensor base [3] found at
10.10.24.1
Removing
the
Fixing Unit
0006-7407
the bottom.

[2].
F-10-198
F-10-200
10.10.23.3
Removing
Registration Sensor
the
0000-4958
1) While taking care not to touch the light-emitting

face of the transparency sensor [1], detach the
registration sensor [2].
10.10.24.2
Removing
Fixing/Feeder Unit
the
0000-4782

feeder unit [2].
10-75
Chapter 10

Right Cover
0000-4720
cover [2].
F-10-201
10.10.25 Vertical Path Roller

10.10.25.1
Removing
the
Cassette
0000-4718
MEMO:
F-10-203
10.10.25.4

F-10-204
10-76
0000-4721

0000-4719
F-10-202
the

Right Cover
Removing
Chapter 10
10.10.25.5
Removing
the
Pickup Unit
0000-4722

F-10-207
10.10.25.7 Mounting the PickF-10-205

Plate
10.10.25.6 Removing the Pick-
0000-4725

Plate
0000-4723

bracket [2].
Mounting Plate
gear shaft [2].
F-10-206
F-10-208


10-77
Chapter 10
2) Free the claw [A] of the bushing [1] at the front;

shift the vertical path roller [2] to the rear and then
pull it upward to detach.
F-10-209
F-10-212
10.10.26 Inside Delivery Roller

10.10.26.1
Removing
the
Inside Delivery Roller
0000-4945
1) Open the fixing feeder unit cover.

F-10-210
10.10.25.8
Removing
the
Vertical Path Roller
0000-4724
1) Free the claw [A] of the gear [1] at the rear, and
detach the gear and the bushing [2].
F-10-213
2) Remove the E-ring[1] and the bushing [2] at the
front; then, remove the gear [3] and the bushing [4]
at the rear.
F-10-211
10-78
Chapter 10
F-10-216
F-10-214
3) Free the internal delivery roller [1] from the cut-off
10.10.27.2
Removing
the
Center Delivery Tray
of the frame at the front; then, detach it.
0000-4786

delivery tray [2].
F-10-215
10.10.27 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/
F-10-217
Closed Sensor
10.10.27.3
10.10.27.1
Removing
Upper Left Cover
Removing
the
Delivery Vertical Path Unit
the
0000-4785
(Old)
0000-4787
1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and

remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left
cover [3].
In case following models, refer to "Removing the

Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)".
- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
1) Detach the strap [1] from the delivery vertical
cover; then, detach the delivery vertical path cover
10-79
Chapter 10
[2].
F-10-218
F-10-220
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery

internal cover [2].
Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery

Vertical Path Unit
When attaching, engage the left/right hook [1] found
on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the
plate on the side of the machine, and secure it with
screws. (Be sure to tighten the left screw first.)
F-10-219
screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path
unit [3].
F-10-221
10.10.27.4
Removing
the

(New)
10-80
0006-8955
Chapter 10
For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the

version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later. Be
sure to check its version in service mode:
Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4

screws [2]; then, detach the delivery path unit [3].
(The delivery path unit will no longer be used.)
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>D-CON.
2) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then,
remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the upper left
cover [3].
F-10-224
F-10-222
inside cover [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical
path cover [3] from the machine.
5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the slip-stop

[2] from the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then,
detach the strap [3] from the delivery inside cover.
(The delivery vertical path cover will no longer be
used.)
F-10-223
4)
F-10-225
6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside
cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2];
To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit
then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3].
and then pull it out toward the front.
10-81
Chapter 10
F-10-226
7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the
F-10-228
machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be

9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path
used.)
unit [3] in place; then, connect the 3 connectors. At

this time, check to make sure that the machine
positioner [4] is properly in place.
F-10-227
8) Fit the top [1] of the new delivery vertical path
inside of the machine plate [2].
When mounting the delivery vertical path unit, be sure

to lift it once before setting it in place.
Engage the left and right hooks [3] on the machine
F-10-229
plate [4] so as to set the new delivery vertical path

unit in place.
10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to

the machine; then, fix the delivery inside cover [2]
in place using a screw [3].
10-82
Chapter 10
F-10-230
F-10-232
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
1) Disconnect the connector [1] and the 4 terminals
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
[2], and remove the screw [1]; then, detach the
position.
fixing/feeder unit open/closed sensor mounting

plate [4].
F-10-231
10.10.27.5
Removing
Fixing/Feeder
Closed
Unit
Sensor
the
Open/
Mounting
Plate
0000-4788
Before detaching the fixing/feeder unit, be sure to

mark its position using a scriber.
F-10-233
10-83
Chapter 10
10.10.27.6
Removing
Fixing/Feeder
Unit
the
Open/
Closed Sensor
0000-4789
1) Remove the fixing/feeder open/closed sensor [1].
F-10-235

Right Cover
0000-4728
F-10-234
10.10.28 Pickup Vertical Path Cover
Open/Closed Sensor
10.10.28.1
Removing
the
Cassette
cover [2].
0000-4726
MEMO:

Right Cover
0000-4727
F-10-236

10.10.28.4
Removing
the
0000-4729

10-84
Chapter 10
F-10-237
10.10.28.5
Removing
F-10-239
the
Pickup Unit
2) Remove the spring [1], and detach the sensor flag

0000-4730
[2].

F-10-240
3) Remove the pickup vertical path cover open/closed
F-10-238
10.10.28.6
Removing
sensor [1].
the

Open/Closed Sensor
0000-4731

[2]; then, detach the sensor mounting plate [3].
F-10-241
10-85
Chapter 10
10.10.29 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/
10.10.29.3
Removing
the
Closed Detecting Switch
(Old)
10.10.29.1
Removing
0000-4795
the
Upper Left Cover
0000-4793


- flom MLW01838
cover [3].
- flom MLX02392
[2].
F-10-242
10.10.29.2
Removing
the
F-10-244
0000-4794

delivery tray [2].
internal cover [2].
F-10-243
F-10-245
unit [3].
10-86
Chapter 10

cover [3].
F-10-246

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-248


F-10-247
F-10-249
4)
10.10.29.4
Removing
the

(New)
0006-8956

10-87
Chapter 10

F-10-252
F-10-250
used.)

used.)
F-10-253

F-10-251
10-88

unit in place.
Chapter 10
F-10-256
position.
F-10-254
F-10-257
10.10.29.5
Removing
Fixing/Feeder
Closed
Unit
Sensor
the
Open/
Mounting
Plate
0000-4796
Before detaching the fixing/feeder unit, be sure to

mark its position using a scriber.
F-10-255
10-89
Chapter 10
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing/

feeder open/closed sensor [2].
F-10-258
1) Disconnect the connector [1] and the 4 terminals

[2], and remove the screw [1]; then, detach the
fixing/feeder unit open/closed sensor mounting
plate [4].
F-10-260
10.10.30 Drawer Connector (manual

feed unit)
10.10.30.1
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit
0000-8487

F-10-259
10.10.29.6
Removing
Fixing/Feeder
Unit
the
F-10-261
Open/
0000-4797

MEMO:
The fixing/feeder unit open/closed switches 1 and 2
may be removed in the same way.
10-90
Chapter 10
10.10.31 Drawer Connector (fixing/

feeder unit)
10.10.31.1
Removing
the
Fixing Unit
0000-5005

[2].
F-10-262
10.10.30.2
Removing
the
Disconnecting the Drawer

Connector (manual feed unit)
0000-8485

drawer connector [2].
F-10-265
10.10.31.2
Removing
Fixing/Feeder Unit
the
0000-5006

feeder unit [2].
F-10-263
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] from behind, and
disconnect the drawer connector [2].
F-10-266
F-10-264
10-91
Chapter 10
10.10.31.3
Drawer
Removing
Connector
the
(fixing
feeder unit)
0000-5007
1) Free the harness [2] from the cable clamp [1], and
disconnect the 2 connectors [3], and remove the 2
screws [4]; then, detach the connector base [5].
F-10-269
10.10.32.2
Removing
the
Fixing/Feeder Unit
0000-8926

feeder unit [2].
F-10-267
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer
connector [2].
F-10-270
10.10.32.3
Removing
Duplex Roller 1
the
0000-4942
1) Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit [1].

F-10-268
10.10.32 Duplex Roller 1

10.10.32.1
Removing
Fixing Unit
the
0000-4939

[2].
10-92
Chapter 10
F-10-271
2) Remove the duct.
F-10-273
5) Remove the gear [1] and the bearing [2] at the rear.
When removing the gear, pay attention not to lose the

parallel pin found at the rear.
3) Remove the 2 E-rings [1], gear [2], and link [3];
then, remove the screw [4] to detach the grounding
wire [5].
F-10-274
6) Remove the 2 duplex auxiliary guides [1] of the
duplex roller.
F-10-272
4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the motor base
[2].
F-10-275
10-93
Chapter 10
7) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the

connector [2]; then, detach the delivery path
switching solenoid 2 [3] together with the base.
Points to Note When Attaching the Duplex Roller

1) Be sure that the longer side [A] of the D-cut in the
roller shaft [1] is toward the front.
F-10-276
8) Free the claw of the gear [1] at the front; then, slide
F-10-279
the roller to the rear, and remove the gear [1] and
the bearing [2].
2) When monting, be sure that the front tip of the

roller shaft is in contact with the grounding plate
[A].
F-10-277
9) Remove the duplexing roller [1].
F-10-280
10.10.33 Duplex Feed Motor

10.10.33.1
F-10-278
Removing
Fixing Unit
the
0000-4903

10-94
Chapter 10
[2].
F-10-283
F-10-281
2) Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit [1], and
10.10.33.2
Removing
the
Fixing/Feeder Unit
remove the screw [1], then detach the duct [2].

0000-4904

feeder unit [2].
F-10-284
3) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and free the boss
[A] and the hook [B]; then, detach the cover (rear)
[2].
F-10-282
10.10.33.3
Removing
Duplex Feed Motor
the
0000-4907
1) Disconnect the connector [1] of the duplex feeder

motor from the bottom.
F-10-285
10-95
Chapter 10
4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and shift the duplex
10.10.34 Duplex Registration Sensor
feeder motor [2] in the direction indicated to detach.
10.10.34.1
Removing
the
Fixing Unit
0000-8478

[2].
F-10-286
F-10-288
Points to Note When Attaching the Duplex Feed
Motor
1) Be sure that the connector area is at the bottom.
2) Be sure to tighten the lower right screw [1] together
with the grounding wire [2].
10.10.34.2
Removing
the
Fixing/Feeder Unit
0000-8480

feeder unit [2].
F-10-287
F-10-289
10.10.34.3
Removing
Fixing/Feeder
Back Sheet
10-96
the
Assembly
0000-8481
Chapter 10

F-10-290
F-10-292
bottom.
10.10.35

Duplex
Horizontal
Registration Sensor
assembly.
10.10.35.1
Removing
Fixing Unit
the
0000-4890

[2].
F-10-291
10.10.34.4
Removing
the
Duplex Registration Sensor
0000-8482
1) Disconnect the connector [1], free the 2 claws [2],
F-10-293
and remove the sensor base [3]; then, detach the

duplex registration sensor [4].
10-97
Chapter 10
10.10.35.2
Removing
the
Fixing/Feeder Unit

0000-4891
assembly.

feeder unit [2].
F-10-296
10.10.35.4
Horizontal
F-10-294
Removing
Registration
Motor Support Plate

10.10.35.3
Removing
Fixing/Feeder
the
0000-4893
the
Assembly
Back Sheet
0000-4892
motor support plate [3].

F-10-297
F-10-295
- When attaching the horizontal registration motor

support plate [1], be sure to bring the horizontal
registration motor support plate firmly in contact

bottom.
10-98
with the grounding lead spring [2] found under the

guide plate.
- After replacement, check to make sure that the
Chapter 10
sensor flag moves smoothly.
F-10-300
F-10-298
After replacement, check to make sure that the sensor

flag moves smoothly.
10.10.35.5
Removing
the
Duplex Registration Sensor
0000-4894
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the duplex
10.10.36 Duplex Pickup Sensor
horizontal registration sensor [2].
10.10.36.1
Removing
the
Cleaner Fan Cover
0000-4915

cover [2].
F-10-299
Be sure to mach the protrusion [B] of the harness

guide found behind the guide plate against the area
F-10-301
[A] marked on the flat cable [1] coming from the

duplex horizontal registration sensor.
(if you twist it inadvertently, the loop area will not
move smoothly.)
10.10.36.2
Removing
the

Releasing Lever
0000-4916
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the intermediate

transfer unit releasing lever [2].
10-99
Chapter 10
10.10.36.5
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit
0000-4920

F-10-302
10.10.36.3
Removing
the
Inside Cover (lower)
0000-4917
F-10-304
screws [2]; then, detach the inside cover (lower)

[3].

F-10-305
F-10-303
10.10.36.4
Removing
Cassette
the
0000-4918
Cover
0000-4921
1) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 hinge pins [2];

MEMO:
10-100
then, detach the front cover.
Chapter 10
F-10-308
F-10-306
10.10.36.9
Right Cover
Removing
the
Pickup Unit
0000-4922
0000-4924

cover [2].
F-10-309
10.10.36.10
Removing
the
Upper Rear Cover
0000-4925
10.10.36.11
F-10-307
10.10.36.8
Removing
the
Lower Rear Cover
0000-4926
the
0000-4923

Removing
10.10.36.12
Removing
High-Voltage Unit
the
0000-4927

10-101
Chapter 10
F-10-310
F-10-312

0000-4930

F-10-311
10.10.36.13
Removing
the
0000-4929

F-10-313

10-102
Chapter 10
[1]
F-10-314
F-10-317

Controller Box
0000-4931

F-10-318
F-10-315
and open it.
F-10-319
F-10-316
10-103
Chapter 10

Controller Mounting
0000-4932

F-10-322
F-10-320
10.10.36.17
Removing
the
Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
0000-4933

fan [3].
F-10-323
F-10-321
10.10.36.18
Removing
the
0000-4934

clamp [4].
10-104
F-10-324
Chapter 10
10.10.36.19
Removing
the
Lattice Connector Mounting
0000-4935

Mounting [2].
F-10-327
10.10.36.22
Removing
Duplex Pickup Sensor
the
0000-4937
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the rear side plate

F-10-325
side, and detach the rail support plate [2] of the

manual feed unit.
10.10.36.20
Removing
the

Duct
0000-4936

F-10-328
2) Remove the 3 screws [1] from the side of the rear
side plate and the 2 screws [2] from the side of the
F-10-326
10.10.36.21
Removing
Duplex Driver PCB
front side plate; then, detach the rail guide [3] of the
manual feed unit as shown.
the
0006-3015
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the duplex

driver PCB [2].
10-105
Chapter 10

[2]; then, detach the sensor support plate [3].
F-10-332
F-10-329
6) Remove the duplex pickup sensor [1].
connector support plate [2].
F-10-333
F-10-330
4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the lower
guide plate [2].
10.10.37 Duplex Registration Clutch

10.10.37.1
Removing
Fixing Unit
the
0000-4876

[2].
F-10-331
10-106
Chapter 10
F-10-334
10.10.37.2
Removing
F-10-336
the
Fixing/Feeder Unit
10.10.37.4
0000-4877
Removing
the
0000-4879
feeder unit [2].
F-10-337
10.10.37.5
F-10-335
Removing
the
Duplex Registration Clutch

10.10.37.3
Duplex
Removing
Feeder
Connector
the
0000-4880
1) Remove the 2 E-rings [1].
Motor
0000-4878
1) Disconnect the connector [1] of the duplex feeder

motor from the base side.
F-10-338
10-107
Chapter 10
2) Slide the bushing [1] to free the duplex feed roller

3 [2].
F-10-341
F-10-339
4) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the duplex
registration clutch [2].
When attaching it, fit it while turning the duplex feed

roller 3 [2] so as not to bend the sheet [1] of the duplex
guide plate. (Do not shift up the sheet by hand.)
F-10-342
10.10.38 Duplex Pickup Clutch

10.10.38.1
F-10-340
Removing
Fixing Unit
the
0000-4897

clutch stop [2]; then, pull the duplex registration
clutch [3] upward to detach.
10-108
[2].
Chapter 10
F-10-343
10.10.38.2
Removing
F-10-345
the
Fixing/Feeder Unit
10.10.38.4
0000-4898

feeder unit [2].
Removing
Duplex Pickup Clutch
the
0000-4901
1) Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit [1].
F-10-346
2) Remove the 2 E-rings [1].
F-10-344
10.10.38.3
Removing
the
0000-4900
F-10-347
10-109
Chapter 10
3) Shift the bushing [1] to the inside of the duplex

feeder guide.
When attaching, be sure that the stop [A] of the clutch

is at the bottommost.
[A]
F-10-351
F-10-348
4) Disconnect the connector [1] of the duplex pickup
Make sure that the front side of the roller shaft is in
clutch.
contact with the leaf spring [1].
F-10-349
F-10-352
5) Remove the roller shaft, and remove the E-ring [1];
then, detach the duplex pickup clutch [2].
10.10.39 Delivery Vertical Path Unit

10.10.39.1
Removing
Fixing Unit
the
0006-3193

[2].
F-10-350
10-110
Chapter 10
F-10-353
10.10.39.2
Removing
F-10-355
the
0000-4801

delivery tray [2].
10.10.39.4
Removing
the

(Old)
0000-4802

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
[2].
F-10-354
10.10.39.3
Removing
Upper Left Cover
the
0000-4800

cover [3].
F-10-356
internal cover [2].
10-111
Chapter 10
F-10-357
F-10-359

unit [3].
10.10.39.5
Removing
the

(New)
0006-4883

F-10-358

cover [3].

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-360
10-112
Chapter 10
used.)
F-10-361
F-10-363
4)

F-10-364
used.)
F-10-362
10-113
Chapter 10
F-10-365
F-10-367


unit in place.
F-10-368
position.
F-10-366
10-114
Chapter 10
F-10-369
F-10-371
10.10.40 Face-Down Delivery Roller

1
10.10.40.3
Removing
the

10.10.40.1
Removing
the
Upper Left Cover
(Old)
0000-4823
0000-4821

cover [3].

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
[2].
F-10-370
10.10.40.2
Removing
the
0000-4822
F-10-372
delivery tray [2].

internal cover [2].
10-115
Chapter 10
F-10-373
F-10-375

unit [3].
10.10.40.4
Removing
the

(New)
0006-8958

F-10-374

cover [3].

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-376
10-116
Chapter 10
used.)
F-10-377
F-10-379
4)

F-10-380
used.)
F-10-378
10-117
Chapter 10
F-10-381
F-10-383


unit in place.
F-10-384
position.
F-10-382
10-118
Chapter 10
F-10-385
10.10.40.5
Removing
F-10-387
the
Delivery Sensor Mounting

Plate
MEMO:
0006-0709
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the sensor
The edge of the sensor flag is cut to an I-shape,

permitting it to be removed upward.
mounting plate [2].
F-10-388
Points to Note When Attaching the Sensor Flag

When attaching the sensor flag, be sure to match the
F-10-386
L-shaped area [A] of the spring against the groove [B]

of the face-down delivery sub frame.
Points to Note When Attaching the Delivery

Sensor Mounting Plate
When attaching the sensor mounting plate, secure it in
place with screws first and then route the wire to
facilitate the work.
10.10.40.6 Removing the FaceDown Delivery Sensor Flag
0006-3776
1) Shift up the sensor flag [1] of the face-down

delivery sensor 1, and pull it upward to detach.
F-10-389
10-119
Chapter 10
Spring
When attaching, shape the grounding leaf plate
10.10.40.7 Removing the FaceDown Delivery Roller 1
removed in 3) into a half-loop, and work so that the

0000-4826
1) Shift up the grounding leaf spring [1] using a flat-
frame plate [1] and the grounding leaf spring [2] are in
contact.
blade screwdriver, and free the 2 claws.
F-10-392
3) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2], and
remove the gear [3] and the bushing [4] found to the
rear of the face-down delivery roller 1; then, detach
F-10-390
the face-down delivery roller 1 [5].
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the sensor

cable [2] from the face-down delivery sub frame;
then, remove the flag [3] of the face-down delivery
sensor 1, and detach the face-down delivery sub
frame [4].
F-10-393
10.10.41 Face-Up Delivery Roller

F-10-391
10.10.41.1
Removing
Fixing/Feeder Unit
Points to Note When Attaching the grounding Leaf
10-120
the
0006-2818
Chapter 10
feeder unit [2].
F-10-396
10.10.41.3
F-10-394
10.10.41.2
Removing
Fixing/Feeder Unit Cover
Removing
the
Inside Delivery Roller
0000-4844
1) Open the fixing feeder unit cover.
the
0000-4843
1) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, grounding wire

[2], and E-ring [3]; then, release the link [4].
F-10-397
2) Remove the E-ring[1] and the bushing [2] at the
front; then, remove the gear [3] and the bushing [4]
at the rear.
F-10-395
2) Remove the screw [1] at the front and the cover
fixing pin [2]; then, detach the fixing/feeder unit
cover.
F-10-398
10-121
Chapter 10
3) Free the internal delivery roller [1] from the cut-off
3)
of the frame at the front; then, detach it.
The spring [1] hooked on the flapper of the upper

guide is small and can easily be lost. Detach it in
advance.
F-10-399
10.10.41.4 Removing the FaceUp Delivery Roller
0000-4845
F-10-402

guide 2 [2].
Remove the screw [2] of the gear mounting plate [1],

and remove the screw [3]; then, detach the upper
guide [4].
F-10-400
2) Remove the E-ring [1] at the rear, and detach the
gear [2].
F-10-403
guide [2].
F-10-401
10-122
Chapter 10
F-10-404
F-10-406
5)
10.10.42
When detaching the gear [3], be sure to pay attention
Delivery Vertical Path
Roller 1
so as not to lose the parallel pin found at the rear.
10.10.42.1
Remove the 3 E-rings [1], gear [2], bushing [4], and
gear mounting plate [5] at the rear.
Removing
the
Upper Left Cover
0000-4846

cover [3].
F-10-405
F-10-407
front; then, detach the face-up delivery roller [3].
10.10.42.2
Removing
the
0000-4847

delivery tray [2].
10-123
Chapter 10
F-10-410
F-10-408
10.10.42.3
Removing
the

(Old)
unit [3].
0000-4848

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
[2].
F-10-411

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-409


internal cover [2].
10-124
Chapter 10

F-10-412
F-10-414
10.10.42.4
Removing
4)
the

(New)
0006-8959



cover [3].
F-10-415
F-10-413
10-125
Chapter 10

used.)
F-10-418

F-10-416
unit in place.
F-10-417
F-10-419

used.)

10-126
Chapter 10
F-10-422
10.10.42.5 Removing the FaceDown Delivery Sensor 2
0000-4849
1) Free the harness [2] from the wire saddle [1],

screws [4]; then, detach the face-down delivery
motor mounting plate [5].
F-10-420
F-10-423
F-10-421
2) Remove the sensor flag [1], and detach the facedown delivery sensor 2 [2].
position.
F-10-424
10-127
Chapter 10

When attaching the sensor flag [1], hook one end of
the inside spring [2] and hook the other end on the
flag.
F-10-427
10.10.43
Roller 2
F-10-425
10.10.43.1
Removing
the
Upper Left Cover

10.10.42.6
Removing
the
Delivery Vertical Path Roller

1
0000-4852
cover [3].
0000-4850

front; then, remove the gear [3], and detach the belt
[4]. Thereafter, remove the bushing [5], and detach
the delivery vertical path roller 1 [6].
F-10-428
10.10.43.2
Removing
the
0000-4853

F-10-426
10-128
delivery tray [2].
Chapter 10
F-10-431
F-10-429
10.10.43.3
Removing
the

(Old)
unit [3].
0000-4854

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
[2].
F-10-432

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-430


internal cover [2].
10-129
Chapter 10

F-10-433
F-10-435
10.10.43.4
Removing
4)
the

(New)
0006-8960



cover [3].
F-10-436
F-10-434
10-130
5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the slip-stop [2]

from the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then, detach
the strap [3] from the delivery inside cover. (The
delivery vertical path cover will no longer be used.)
Chapter 10
F-10-439
F-10-437



unit in place.
F-10-438
used.)
F-10-440
10-131
Chapter 10
F-10-443
10.10.43.5
Removing
the
Delivery Vertical Path Roller

2
0000-4855
1) Disconnect the connector [1[, and remove the 2

F-10-441
motor [3] together with the mounting plate.

F-10-444
F-10-442
2) Remove the gear [1] and the bushing [2].
position.
F-10-445
10-132
Chapter 10
3) Remove the gear [1] and detach the belt [2] at the
rear; then, remove the bushing [3], and detach the
delivery vertical roller 2 [4].
F-10-448
10.10.44.3
F-10-446
Removing
the
10.10.44 Face-Down Delivery Motor

10.10.44.1
Removing
(Old)
0000-4835
the
Upper Left Cover
0000-4833

cover [3].

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
[2].
F-10-447
10.10.44.2
Removing
the
F-10-449
0000-4834

delivery tray [2].

internal cover [2].
10-133
Chapter 10
F-10-450
F-10-452

unit [3].
10.10.44.4
Removing
the

(New)
0006-8961

F-10-451

cover [3].

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-453
10-134
Chapter 10


used.)
F-10-454
F-10-456
4)

F-10-457
used.)
F-10-455
10-135
Chapter 10
F-10-458
F-10-460


unit in place.
F-10-461
position.
F-10-459
10-136
Chapter 10
F-10-462
10.10.44.5 Removing the FaceDown Delivery Motor
F-10-464
0000-4836

10.10.45.2
Removing
the
motor [3].
0000-4858

delivery tray [2].
F-10-463
F-10-465
10.10.45

10.10.45.3
Motor
10.10.45.1
Removing
the

Removing
Upper Left Cover
(Old)
the
0000-4859
0000-4857

cover [3].

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
10-137
Chapter 10

[2].
F-10-468
F-10-466
internal cover [2].

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-467
unit [3].
F-10-469
10.10.45.4
Removing
the

(New)
10-138
0006-8962
Chapter 10


cover [3].
F-10-472
F-10-470

used.)
F-10-471
4)
F-10-473
10-139
Chapter 10
F-10-474
F-10-476

used.)

F-10-475

F-10-477

unit in place.

10-140
Chapter 10
10.10.46
Face-Down
Delivery
Sensor 1
10.10.46.1
Removing
the
Upper Left Cover
0000-4810

cover [3].
F-10-478
position.
F-10-481
10.10.46.2
F-10-479
Removing

10.10.45.5
Removing
the
Delivery Vertical Path Motor
the
0000-4811

0000-4860
delivery tray [2].

motor [3].
F-10-482
F-10-480
10-141
Chapter 10
10.10.46.3
Removing
the

(Old)
0000-4812

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
[2].
F-10-485

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-483
internal cover [2].
F-10-486
F-10-484
10.10.46.4
unit [3].
10-142
Removing
the

(New)
0006-8963
Chapter 10


cover [3].
F-10-489
F-10-487

used.)
F-10-488
4)
F-10-490
10-143
Chapter 10
F-10-491
F-10-493

used.)

F-10-492

F-10-494

unit in place.

10-144
Chapter 10
F-10-495
F-10-498
MEMO:
position.
The edge of the sensor flag is cut to an I-shape,

permitting it to be removed upward.
F-10-496
F-10-499
0000-8470
1) Shift up the sensor flag [1] of the face-down

delivery sensor 1, and pull it upward to detach.

When attaching the sensor flag, be sure to match the
L-shaped area [A] of the spring against the groove [B]
in the face-down delivery sub frame.
F-10-497
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the facedown delivery sensor 1 [2].
F-10-500
10-145
Chapter 10
10.10.47.3
Removing
the
10.10.47 Center Delivery Tray Full
(Old)
0000-4864
sensor
10.10.47.1
Removing
the
Upper Left Cover

0000-4862


- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
cover [3].
[2].
F-10-501
F-10-503
10.10.47.2
Removing
the
0000-4863

internal cover [2].
delivery tray [2].
F-10-504
F-10-502

unit [3].
10-146
Chapter 10

cover [3].
F-10-505

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-507


F-10-506
F-10-508
4)
10.10.47.4
Removing
the

(New)
0006-8964

10-147
Chapter 10

F-10-511
F-10-509
used.)

used.)
F-10-512

F-10-510
10-148

unit in place.
Chapter 10
F-10-515
position.
F-10-513
F-10-516
10.10.47.5
Removing
the
Center Delivery Tray Full

sensor
0000-4865
1) Remove the sensor flag [1]; then, disconnect the

connector [2], and detach the center delivery tray
full sensor [3].
F-10-514
F-10-517
10-149
Chapter 10
10.10.48
Face-Down
Delivery
10.10.48.3
Removing
the
Sensor 2
(Old)
10.10.48.1
Removing
0000-4818
the
Upper Left Cover
0000-4816


- flom MLW01838
cover [3].
- flom MLX02392
[2].
F-10-518
10.10.48.2
Removing
the
F-10-520
0000-4817

delivery tray [2].
internal cover [2].
F-10-519
F-10-521
unit [3].
10-150
Chapter 10

cover [3].
F-10-522

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-524


F-10-523
F-10-525
4)
10.10.48.4
Removing
the

(New)
0006-8965

10-151
Chapter 10

F-10-528
F-10-526
used.)

used.)
F-10-529

F-10-527
10-152

unit in place.
Chapter 10
F-10-532
position.
F-10-530
F-10-533
0000-4819
1) Free the harness [2] from the wire saddle [1],

motor mounting plate [5].
F-10-531
F-10-534
10-153
Chapter 10
2) Remove the sensor flag [1], and detach the face-

cover [3].
down delivery sensor 2 [2].
F-10-535
F-10-537
10.10.49.2
When attaching the sensor flag [1], hook one end of
the inside spring [2] and hook the other end on the
flag.
Removing
the
0000-4805

delivery tray [2].
F-10-538
F-10-536
10.10.49.3
Removing
the

(Old)
10.10.49
0000-4806
Cover Open/Closed Sensor

10.10.49.1
Removing
Upper Left Cover
the
0000-4804
10-154
- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
Chapter 10

[2].
F-10-541
F-10-539
internal cover [2].

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-540
unit [3].
F-10-542
10-155
Chapter 10
10.10.49.4
Removing
the

(New)
0006-8967


cover [3].
F-10-545
F-10-543



used.)
F-10-544
F-10-546
4)
10-156
Chapter 10

F-10-549
F-10-547
used.)
F-10-548
F-10-550

unit in place.
10-157
Chapter 10
10.10.50 Delivery Path Switching

Solenoid 1
10.10.50.1
Removing
the
Upper Left Cover
0000-4867

cover [3].
F-10-551
position.
F-10-554
10.10.50.2
F-10-552
Removing

10.10.49.5
Removing
the
delivery tray [2].

0000-4808

delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor [2].
F-10-555
F-10-553
10-158
0000-4868
Delivery Vertical Path Cover

Open/Closed Sensor
the
Chapter 10
10.10.50.3
Removing
the

(Old)
0000-4869

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
[2].
F-10-558

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-556
internal cover [2].
F-10-559
F-10-557
unit [3].
10-159
Chapter 10
10.10.50.4
Removing
the

(New)
0006-8966


cover [3].
F-10-562
F-10-560



used.)
F-10-561
F-10-563
4)
10-160
Chapter 10

F-10-566
F-10-564
used.)
F-10-565
F-10-567

unit in place.
10-161
Chapter 10
10.10.50.6
Removing
the
Cleaner Fan
0006-2819
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the 3 claws;

then, detach the cleaner fan [2].
F-10-568
position.
F-10-571
10.10.50.7
Delivery
Removing
Path
the
Switching
Solenoid 1
0000-8475

[2]; then, detach the delivery path switching
solenoid 1 [3].
F-10-569
10.10.50.5
Removing
Cleaner Fan Cover
the
0000-4870

cover [2].
F-10-572
F-10-570
10-162
Chapter 10
10.10.51 Delivery Path Switching

Solenoid 2
10.10.51.1
Delivery
10.10.52 Face-Down Delivery Roller

1 Drive Belt
Removing
Path
10.10.52.1
the
Switching
Solenoid 2
Removing
the
Upper Left Cover

0000-4874
1) Open the fixing/feeder unit cover.
0000-4828

cover [3].
F-10-573
F-10-575
connector [2]; then, detach the delivery path

switching solenoid 2 [3] together with the mounting
plate.
10.10.52.2
Removing
the
0000-4829

delivery tray [2].
F-10-574
F-10-576
10-163
Chapter 10
10.10.52.3
Removing
the

(Old)
0000-4830

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
[2].
F-10-579

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-577
internal cover [2].
F-10-580
F-10-578
unit [3].
10-164
Chapter 10
10.10.52.4
Removing
the

(New)
0006-8968


cover [3].
F-10-583
F-10-581



used.)
F-10-582
F-10-584
4)
10-165
Chapter 10

F-10-587
F-10-585
used.)
F-10-586
F-10-588

unit in place.
10-166
Chapter 10
F-10-589
F-10-591
position.
F-10-590
10.10.52.5 Removing the FaceDown
Delivery
Drive Belt
Roller
1
0000-4831
1) Free the protrusion [1] of the belt pulley (upper or

lower) from the groove of the shaft, and shift it;
then, detach the belt [2].
10-167
Chapter 10
10-168
Chapter 11 Fixing
System
Contents
Contents
11.1 Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.2 Major Components ................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.3 Construction of the Control System ....................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On .................................................................................................... 11-4
11.2.2 Sequence of Operations (printing; plain paper, for less than 180 sec) ................................................... 11-5
11.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations (during printing; plain paper, for 180 sec or more) ............................... 11-6
11.3 Various Control Mechanisms ........................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller ............................................................................................ 11-7
11.3.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................. 11-7
11.3.1.2 Controlling the Speed According to the Type of Paper .................................................................. 11-7
11.3.1.3 Controlling the Speed According to the Quantity of Printing ......................................................... 11-8
11.3.1.4 Preventing Partial Deformation of the Roller .................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature ............................................................................................ 11-8
11.3.2.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2.2 At Power-On .................................................................................................................................. 11-10
11.3.2.3 In Standby ...................................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.3.2.4 During Printing .............................................................................................................................. 11-11
11.3.2.5 Between Sheets .............................................................................................................................. 11-12
11.3.2.6 Overheating in Areas Without Paper ............................................................................................. 11-13
11.3.2.7 Return for Low-Power Mode ........................................................................................................ 11-13
11.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper ............................................................................................................ 11-14
11.3.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper ...................................................................................................... 11-14
11.4 Protective Functions .................................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.1 Turning Off the Power Against Overheating (in response to activation of thermal switch) ................ 11-15
11.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Thermistors .......................................................................................... 11-16
11.5.1 Fixing Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame ............................................................................................................................. 11-18
11.5.3 Fixing Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.5.3.4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ........................................................ 11-23
11.5.3.5 Removing the Fixing Roller .......................................................................................................... 11-24
11.5.4 Pressure Roller ..................................................................................................................................... 11-26
11.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater ..................................................................... 11-28
11.5.4.5 Removing the Pressure Roller ....................................................................................................... 11-29
Contents

11.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor ........................................................................................................................ 11-30
11.5.5.4 Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor ......................................................................................... 11-32
11.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor .......................................................................................................................... 11-34
11.5.6.4 Removing the Fixing Sub thermistor ............................................................................................. 11-36
11.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch ......................................................................................................................... 11-37
11.5.7.4 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch ........................................................................................... 11-40
11.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater ................................................................................................ 11-42
11.5.8.4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ......................................................... 11-44
11.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater ............................................................................................................... 11-45
11.5.9.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater ...................................................................... 11-48
11.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide ............................................................................................................................... 11-50
11.5.10.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide ................................................................................................ 11-50
11.5.11 Delivery Upper Guide ......................................................................................................................... 11-51
11.5.12 Delivery Lower Guide ........................................................................................................................ 11-52
11.5.12.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater .................................................................... 11-54
11.5.12.5 Removing the Pressure Roller ..................................................................................................... 11-55
11.5.12.6 Remove the Delivery Lower Guide ............................................................................................. 11-55
11.5.13 Fixing Inlet Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 11-57
11.5.13.4 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor ............................................................................................... 11-60
11.5.14 Fixing Delivery Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 11-61
Contents

11.5.14.4 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor ........................................................................................ 11-63
11.5.15 Fixing Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 11-64
11.5.15.10 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ............................................................. 11-67
11.5.15.11 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit ............................................................................................... 11-68
11.5.15.12 Removing the Fixing Motor ...................................................................................................... 11-69
Chapter 11
11.1 Construction
0005-9875
The major functions of the fixing system are as follows:

T-11-1
Item
Description
Fixing method
Heat roller
Fixing heater
2 fixing rollers (main heater, sub heater)

1 pressure roller (heat retaining heater)
Control temperature
190 deg C (in PSTBY)
Fixing drive control
Fixing roller speed control (by paper type and mode)
Fixing temperature
Main thermistor (non-contact; TH1, center of fixing roller)
detection
Sub thermistor (TH2; rear end of fixing roller)
Protective
Error detection as follows; upon detection of error, cuts off
mechanism
power to fixing heater:

- temperature detection by thermistor (TH1/TH2)
- temperature control by fixing thermal switch (TP1;front end of
fixing roller; operating temperature of 222 -/+8 deg C
Separation claw
Non-contact type (facilitates separation of paper in highhumidity environment; under normal conditions, separation by
fixing/pressure roller)
Cleaning
None (cleaning-less mechanism; no element in paper path of

fixing/pressure roller)
0000-5012
The fixing system consists of the following major components:

T-11-2
Component
Notation
Description
Fixing roller
48.5 mm (external diameter)
Pressure roller
38.0 mm (external diameter)
Main heater (halogen)
H1
100/120V: 500W 230V: 545W
Sub heater (halogen)
H2
100/120V: 330W 230V: 360W
11-1
Chapter 11
Component
Notation
Description
Heat retaining heater
H3
100/120/230V:80W (no temperature control)
Main thermistor
TH1
Non-contact type (temperature control/overheating detection)
Sub thermistor
TH2
Temperature control, overheating detection
Thermal switch
TP1
222 -/+8 deg C (operating temperature)
Separation claw
Non-contact type (facilitates paper separation in high-humidity environment)
Fixing inlet sensor
PS27
Detection of passage of paper to fixing unit)
Fixing delivery sensor
PS25
Detection of delivery of paper after fixing
Sub thermistor
Main thermistor
(TH1; non-contact)
Non-contact
separation claw
Thermal switch
(TP1)
Sub heater (H2)

Fixing roller
Pressure roller
Main heater (H1)
Fixing inlet guide
Heat retaining heater
F-11-1
Fixing roller
Fixing
delivery
sensor
(PS25)
Pressure
roller
F-11-2
11-2
Fixing inlet
sensor
(PS27)
Chapter 11
0000-5013
The major components of the fixing system are arranged as follows:

Fuse PCB
J51_2
H1_ON
J105A_14
J108A-2
J51_1
H2_ON
J105A_13
J105-6 to 9
FUSER ENTER_SNS
PM-FUSER
FUSER DELI_SNS
J108A-5
SUB_FUSER_THM J108-8
MAIN_FUSER_ THM1 J108-10
J105A_1
J54_11
H3_ON
H2_ON
H1_ON
J69_1
DC controller PCB
J51_14
J69_2
J54_12
J62
Sub
thermistor
(TH2)
J2_1
J2_3
J2_2
Heater driver
PCB
Main thermistor
(TH1; non-contact)
Fixing motor
Fixing delivery
sensor (PS25)
Thermal switch
(TP1)
Fixing inlet sensor
(PS27)
Sub heater(H2)
Main heater(H1)
Heat retaining heater(H3)
F-11-3
11-3
Chapter 11
11.2 Basic Sequence

11.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On
0000-5014
Starts here if the surface temperature

of the fixing roller is 90C or more when
the main power switch is turned on.
Main power
switch ON
WMUP
WMUPR
PSTBY
Fixing system
Here, alternately ON for 3

sec and OFF for 1.5 sec
Fixing main heater

(H1)
Fixing sub heater
(H2)
Fixing heat retaining
heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M24)
360sec
90C
*1
190C
*1
300 sec
Rotates idly for 300 sec after
end of drum ITB motor rotation
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control (to 190C) according to the
reading of the main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-4
11-4
Chapter 11
11.2.2 Sequence of Operations (printing; plain paper, for less than 180
sec)
0000-5015
Start
key ON
PSTBY PINTR
Controlled
to 193C
Fixing system
Fixing motor
(M24)
PRINT
Controlled
to 185C
Controlled
to 174C
LSTR
PSTBY
Controlled
to 164C
Fixing main heater

(H1)
*1
*1
Fixing sub heater

(H2)
*1
*1
Fixing heat retaining heater (H3)
1st sheet passed
193C
190C
185C
174C
164C
10 sec
20 sec
20 sec
130 sec
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control (to 190C) according
to the reading of the main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-5
11-5
Chapter 11
11.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations (during printing; plain paper, for

180 sec or more)
0000-5016
Start
key ON
PSTBY PINTR
Fixing system
Fixing motor
(M24)
Fixing main heater
(H1)
Fixing sub heater
(H2)
Controlled
to 193C
PRINT
Controlled
to 185C
Controlled
to 174C
LSTR
Controlled
to 164C
PSTBY
Idle rotation
*1
*1
Controlled
to 170C
*1
*1
1st sheet passed
193C
190C
185C
174C
164C
10 sec
20 sec
20 sec
130 sec or more
30 sec
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control (to 190C) according to the reading
of the main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-6
11-6
Chapter 11
11.3 Various Control Mechanisms

11.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller
11.3.1.1 Outline
0000-5017
The fixing roller is driven by a pulse motor used exclusively for it;
The roller is controlled for the following:
1) speed to suit the type of medium used
2) speed to suit the (large) quantity of printing work
Fixing motor
M24
*PM-FUSER-B
_6
PM-FUSER-B
_7
*PM-FUSER-A
_8
PM-FUSER-A
_9
J105B
3) configuration to prevent partial deformation otherwise caused by a long period of no use
Fixing roller
DC controller
PCB
Pressure
roller
F-11-7
11.3.1.2 Controlling the Speed According to the Type of Paper
0000-5018
Controlling the Speed According to the Type of Paper

The machine controls the fixing roller to the following 2 speeds to suit the type of medium used:
T-11-3
Medium
Fixing speed
Plain paper
129.1 mm/sec
Thick paper
64.55 mm/sec
Monochrome transparency
129.1 mm/sec
Color transparency
64.55 mm/sec
Note: The speed of the fixing roller is reduced (to half) to ensure good fixing on thick paper (thick paper speed) or
on a full-color transparency (full-color transparency mode).
11-7
Chapter 11
11.3.1.3 Controlling the Speed According to the Quantity of Printing
0000-5019
If left unattended, the heat of the pressure roller would be absorbed by paper when a large quality of printing is under
way, causing the paper to curl appreciably upon delivery and, thus, making proper stacking difficult.To prevent
excess curling, the speed of the roller is reduced to half (as set in service mode) when as many as 100 large-size sheets
or as many as 200 small-size sheets have been handled.
Service Mode (level 2)
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DWNSQ-SW
11.3.1.4 Preventing Partial Deformation of the Roller
0000-5020
To prevent deformation otherwise caused by the nip pressure of the fixing roller as occurring when the machine is
left unattended for a long period of time, the fixing roller is rotated for 0.5 sec at half speed (64.55 mm/sec) every 30
min after it has stopped (i.e., during standby/low power mode).
11.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature

11.3.2.1 Outline
The fixing roller is driven by a pulse motor used exclusively for it;
The roller is controlled for the following:
[1] speed to suit the type of medium used
[2] speed to suit the (large) quantity of printing work
[3] during printing
[4] between long sheet intervals
[5] in response to overheating in non-paper contact area
[6] during return from low-power mode
11-8
0000-5021
Chapter 11
DC controller PCB
H1_ON
J51_1
H2_ON
J105A_14
J105A_13
J2_1
J2_3
Sub thermistor
(TH2)
24V
J2_2
Heater drive PCB
SUB_FUSER_THM J108-8
J51_2
J105A_1
J54_11
H2_ON
H3_ON
J69_2
J54_12
H1_ON
J69_1
J51_14
Fuse PCB
J62
Main thermistor
(TH1) (non-contact)
Thermal switch
(TP1)
Sub heater (H2)

Main heater (H1)
Heat retaining heater (H3)
F-11-8
11-9
Chapter 11
11.3.2.2 At Power-On
0000-5022
The fixing roller is heated by 2 fixing heaters (main heater H1, sub heater H2).
The main heater repeats remaining ON for 3.5 sec and OFF for 1.5 sec until the fixing temperature reaches 190 deg C.
The sub heater, on the other hand, remains ON throughout.
The pressure roller is kept warm by the heat retaining heater (which remains ON throughout).
The fixing motor starts to rotate when the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C.
It keeps rotating for a further 300 sec after the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 190 deg C (warm-up state; so
as to maintain the temperature of the pressure roller; the machine accepts a print job during this period).
Starts here if the surface temperature
of the fixing roller is 90C or more when
the main power switch is turned on.
Main power
switch ON
WMUP
WMUPR
PSTBY
Fixing system
Repeats ON for 3.5 sec

and OFF for 1.5 sec.
Fixing main heater

(H1)
Fixing sub heater
(H2)
Fixing motor
(M24)
360sec
90C
*1
190C
*1
300 sec
Rotates idly for 300 sec
after the drum ITB motor stops.
*1: The main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2) performs temperature control (to 190C)
according to the reading of the main sub heater or the sub heater.
F-11-9
11.3.2.3 In Standby
0000-5023
The machine controls the fixing roller (to 190 deg C) according to the reading of the non-contact thermistor TH1 or
sub thermistor TH2.
If the reading of the main thermistor is assumed to be Th1 and that of the sub thermistor is assumed to be Th2,
if Th1 > Th2, the temperature control will be by the sub heater.
if Th1 <= Th2, the temperature control will be by the main heater.
The temperature of the pressure roller is controlled by the heat retaining heater, which repeatedly remains on for 480
sec and, thereafter, remainsON for 4.2 sec and OFF for 1.6 sec.
11-10
Chapter 11
Fixing system
WMUPR
PSTBY
Fixing main heater

(H1)
Fixing sub heater
(H2)
Fixing motor
(M24)
*1
*1
*2
300 sec
480 sec
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature

control (to 190C) according to the reading of the main
thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: The fixing heat retaining heater repeatedly remains ON
for 4.2 sec and OFF for 1.6 sec.
F-11-10
11.3.2.4 During Printing
0000-5024
The temperature of the fixing roller is controlled by turning on and off the main heater according to the reading taken
by the main thermistor.
During printing, the control (i.e., timing at which control is initiated) varies according to the type of paper being used.
The following shows the sequence of temperature control when printing on plain paper:
Start
key ON
PSTBY PINTR
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Fixing system
Fixing motor
(M24)
Fixing main heater
(H1)
*1
Fixing sub heater

(H2)
*1
Controlled
to 193C
Controlled
to 185C
Controlled
to 174C
*1
*1
1st sheet passed
193C
190C
185C
174C
164C
Controlled
to 164C
10 sec
20 sec
20 sec
130 sec
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control
(to 190C) according to the reading of the main thermistor (TH1)
and the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-11
11-11
Chapter 11
If a print job exceeds 180 sec, the fixing roller is rotated for 30 sec after the job
(so that the heat of the fixing roller is transmitted evenly to the pressure roller).
Start
key ON
PSTBY PINTR
PRINT
Fixing system
PSTBY
LSTR
Fixing motor
(M24)
Idle rotation
Fixing main heater

(H1)
*1
Fixing sub heater

(H2)
Controlled
to 193C
Controlled
to 185C
Controlled
to 174C
Controlled
to 164C
*1
Controlled
to 170C
*1
*1
1st sheet passed
193C
190C
185C
174C
164C
10 sec
20 sec
20 sec
130 sec or more
30 sec
F-11-12
11.3.2.5 Between Sheets
0000-5025
The temperature of the fixing roller is controlled over the distance between sheets within a print job:
1. If the distance is 15 sec or more and less than 60 sec,
The fixing temperature sequence and the heater (main/sub) control sequence are continued over the distance.
2. If the distance is 60 sec or more
The fixing temperature control sequence and the heater (main/sub) control sequence are performed over the distance
up to 60 sec; thereafter, only the heater sequence control is performed.
11-12
Chapter 11
Start
key ON
PSTBY PINTR
PRINT
LSTR PSTBY
Fixing system
Fixing motor
(M24)
Fixing main
heater (H1)
*1
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
*1
Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled

to 164C
to 193C to 185C to 174C
Controlled
to 164C
Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled

to 174C to 185C to 174C to 164C
*1
*1
Fixing heat
retaining
heater (H3)
1st sheet passed
193C
190C
185C
174C
Passage of paper
(60 sec and later)
164C
Paper
passed
10 sec 20 sec
20 sec
15 to 60 sec
60 to sec 10 sec 20 sec

N
N: sheet-to-sheet
distance after 60 sec.
F-11-13
11.3.2.6 Overheating in Areas Without Paper
0000-5026
If the sub thermistor (TH2) registers 195 deg C or more, the machine turns off the sub heater.
If it registers 210 deg C or more, the machine also turns off the main heater.
When the temperature at the ends falls below 210 deg C, the machine turns on the main heater.
If the temperature at the ends falls below 195 deg C, the machine also turns on the sub heater.
If the reading of the main thermistor is below the control temperature at this time, the heaters are turned on.
11.3.2.7 Return for Low-Power Mode
0000-5027
After a lapse of 30 sec, the machine becomes ready to accept a job only in black mono mode.
In the case of color mode, the machine will not accept a job until the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 190 deg
C after a lapse of 30 sec.
11-13
Chapter 11
11.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper

11.3.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper
0000-5028
The mechanisms involved in the detection of the passage of paper in the fixing unit are as follows:
1. Fixing Inlet Sensor
Detects passage of paper being moved into the fixing unit.
2. Fixing Delivery Sensor
Detects the passage of paper being moved from the fixing assembly.
Fixing roller
Fixing
delivery
sensor
(PS25)
DC controller
PCB
Pressure
roller
Fixing
inlet sensor
(PS27)
J108_6
J108_5
J108_4
J108_3
J108_2
J108_1
F-11-14
11-14
+5V
FUSER_ENTER_SNS
+5V
FUSER_DELI_SNS
Chapter 11
11.4 Protective Functions

11.4.1 Turning Off the Power Against Overheating (in response to
activation of thermal switch)
0006-0741
Once its contact has opened, the thermal switch will not return to its initial state even after the error temperature has
been corrected. Be sure to replace it.
If the internal temperature of the thermal switch exceeds 222 -/+8 deg C, the thermal switch goes OFF to cut the
power to the fixing heater.
Heater control PCB
J4
J5
DC controller
PCB
CB
13
14
12
9
J105A
RL
J2_1
Triac shortHeater
circuit
detection drive
circuit
PCB
Triac shortHeater
circuit
detection drive
circuit
PCB
Q20
2
1
3
6
Q10
J51
Q11
Q22
Q21
TP
J2_3
J69_7 HRLY_ON
J69_9 TR_ERR*
J69_11 H2_ON
J69_12 H1_ON
J2_2
J54
Fuse PCB
Q23
6
3
2
1
H1
Fixing roller
H2
F-11-15
11-15
Chapter 11
11.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Thermistors
0000-5029
When the sub thermistor mounted at the end of the fixing roller detects 239 deg C, the signal from the DC controller
turns off the heater drive circuit, thus cutting off power to the main heater and the sub heater.
DC controller
PCB
CPU
J105
-14
-6
-3
-2
-1
Sub thermistor detection signal

-8
Main thermistor detection signal (by infrared) -10
Main thermistor detection signal (by temperature) -11
-1
-9
-12
-13
-14
J108
CB
Fuse
PCB
RL
SW
Fuse
(1sec)
TH2
Heater control PCB
J51
Triac shortcircuit detection circuit
-2
-1
J62
TH1
Fixing roller
H1
H2
H3
F-11-16
11-16
Heater
drive circuit
Triac shortcircuit detection circuit
Heater
drive circuit
Chapter 11
11.5 Parts
Procedure
Replacement
11.5.1 Fixing Unit

Unit
0000-5031

[2].
F-11-18
2) Fit the fixing unit in the machine, and execute the
following service mode to measure the nip:
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
c
Paper
movement
Standard:
|a c| = 0.5mm or less
F-11-17
11.5.1.2 After Disassembling

the Fixing Unit
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
of paper 9.25mm0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-19
0000-8566
If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to

secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the
fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be
sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows:
1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that
the length of the pressure spring is 31.5mm.
3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear:

4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward
the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on
the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
MEMO:
A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the
nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
rear by 0.2 mm.
If the median value of the measured nip is toward the
higher limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the
side with a higher nip value at the edge.
If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance is
correct, the adjusting screw both at the front and rear
may be given a 1/2 turn so that the nip may change by
about 0.3 mm.
11-17
Chapter 11
F-11-21
11.5.2.2
Removing
Delivery Upper Guide
the
0000-5042
1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3

snap-on claws)
F-11-20
Service Mode
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
measurement.
F-11-22
11.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame

2) Remove the insulating cover [1].

Unit
0000-5041

[2].
F-11-23
3) Remove the rear cover [1]. (2 snap-on claws)
11-18
Chapter 11

connector [2].
F-11-24
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the
F-11-27
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].

3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/
thermal switch).
F-11-25
F-11-28

Upper Frame
0000-5043
4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1].
1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the grounding wire.

(AC heater line)
F-11-29
F-11-26
11-19
Chapter 11
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing

upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2].

the Fixing Unit
0000-5044

F-11-30
upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
F-11-33
c
F-11-31
7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1].
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-34
F-11-32
11-20
Chapter 11
11.5.3 Fixing Roller
MEMO:
0.4 mm.

Unit
0000-5052
rear by 0.2 mm.

[2].

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-36
11.5.3.2
Removing
the
0000-5053

snap-on claws)
F-11-35
F-11-37
Service Mode

measurement.
11-21
Chapter 11

Upper Frame
0000-5054

(AC heater line)
F-11-38
F-11-41
connector [2].
F-11-39
F-11-42
thermal switch).
F-11-40
11-22
Chapter 11
F-11-43
F-11-46
F-11-44
F-11-47
11.5.3.4 Remove the Fixing

Main Heater and the Fixing
Sub Heater
0000-5055
1) Remove the heater retaining spring (needle-shaped)

[1] at the rear.
F-11-45
11-23
Chapter 11

Roller
0000-5057
1) Remove the separation claw [1].
F-11-48
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the end of the heater
at the front.
F-11-51
Points to Note When Attaching hte Separation

Claw
When attaching the separation claw, be sure that it is
mounted as indicated.
F-11-49
3) Pull out the fixing main heater [1] and the fixing
sub heater [2].
F-11-52
2) Remove the fixing roller [1].
F-11-50
11-24
Chapter 11
c
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-55
F-11-53

the Fixing Unit
MEMO:
0000-5058


0.4 mm.
rear by 0.2 mm.
about 0.3 mm.
F-11-54
11-25
Chapter 11
F-11-57
11.5.4.2
Removing
the
0000-5067

snap-on claws)
F-11-56
Service Mode
measurement.
F-11-58
11.5.4 Pressure Roller


Unit
0000-5066

[2].
F-11-59
11-26
Chapter 11

connector [2].
F-11-60
F-11-63

thermal switch).
F-11-61
F-11-64

Upper Frame
0000-5068

(AC heater line)
F-11-65
F-11-62
11-27
Chapter 11


Temperature Retainer Heater
0000-5069
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and pull out the 2

fastons [2].
F-11-66
F-11-69
2) Remove the screw [1] front the sub heater contact
at the front.
F-11-67
F-11-70
3) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and detach the

heater retaining plate [2].
F-11-68
11-28
Chapter 11

the Fixing Unit
0000-5071

F-11-71
4) Remove the fixing heat retaining heater [1].
F-11-74
F-11-72
11.5.4.5 Removing the Pressure

Roller

0000-5070
1) While opening the delivery lower guide [1], remove

c
the pressure roller [2].

Paper
movement
Standard:
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-75
F-11-73
11-29
Chapter 11
11.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor
MEMO:
0.4 mm.

Unit
0000-5073
rear by 0.2 mm.

[2].

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-77
11.5.5.2
Removing
the
0000-5074

snap-on claws)
F-11-76
F-11-78
Service Mode
measurement.
11-30
Chapter 11

Upper Frame
0000-5075

(AC heater line)
F-11-79
F-11-82
connector [2].
F-11-80
F-11-83
thermal switch).
F-11-81
11-31
Chapter 11
F-11-84
F-11-87
F-11-85
F-11-88

Main Thermistor
0006-2112
1) While freeing the retaining screw [1] of the upper

frame, detach the fixing main thermistor [2].
F-11-86
11-32
Chapter 11
F-11-90
F-11-89

Points to Note When Attaching hte Main
Thermistor
When attaching, be sure so that the retaining spring

forces the fixing thermistor in place.
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-91

the Fixing Unit
0000-5077

MEMO:
0.4 mm.
rear by 0.2 mm.
about 0.3 mm.
11-33
Chapter 11
F-11-93
11.5.6.2
Removing
the
0000-5080

snap-on claws)
F-11-92
Service Mode
measurement.
F-11-94
11.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor


Unit
0000-5079

[2].
F-11-95
11-34
Chapter 11

connector [2].
F-11-96
F-11-99

thermal switch).
F-11-97
F-11-100

Upper Frame
0000-5081

(AC heater line)
F-11-101
F-11-98
11-35
Chapter 11


Sub thermistor
0000-5082
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing sub

thermistor [2].
F-11-102
F-11-105

the Fixing Unit
0000-5083

F-11-103
F-11-106
F-11-104
11-36
Chapter 11

c
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-107
MEMO:
0.4 mm.
F-11-108

rear by 0.2 mm.
Service Mode
measurement.

about 0.3 mm.
11.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch

Unit
0000-5085

[2].
11-37
Chapter 11
F-11-109
11.5.7.2
Removing
F-11-112
the
0000-5086

snap-on claws)
F-11-113
F-11-110

Upper Frame
0000-5087

(AC heater line)
F-11-111
11-38
F-11-114
Chapter 11
connector [2].
F-11-118
F-11-115
thermal switch).
F-11-116
F-11-119
F-11-117
F-11-120
11-39
Chapter 11

Thermal Switch
0000-5088
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the upper frame, and

detach the fixing thermal switch [2].
F-11-122
- Check the thermal switch for improper installation
1) After attaching the thermal switch to the fixing
F-11-121
assembly, use the scale to measure the intervals (A/

B) between the leaf spring and the fixing assembly
frame.
Points to Note When Attaching the Thermal

Switch
Ensure to check the following points when attaching
the thermal switch to the fixing assembly.
- Check the leaf springs on the thermal switch for
deformation
1) Place a scale on the leaf springs on the thermal
switch (See the illustration below), and check the
leaf springs for deformation.
F-11-123
2) Check that the gap between the intervals (A and B)
is within 3.1mm+/-1mm. When the gap is more
than 3.1mm+/-1mm, it means that the springs are
not properly attached or that the springs are
deformed. Therefore, it is necessary to use another
thermal switch.
11-40
Chapter 11

the Fixing Unit

0000-5089

rear by 0.2 mm.

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-124
c
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-125
F-11-126
Service Mode
measurement.

MEMO:
0.4 mm.
11-41
Chapter 11
11.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing

Sub Heater
Unit
0000-5046

[2].
F-11-129
F-11-127
11.5.8.2
Removing
the
0000-5047
F-11-130
snap-on claws)
F-11-128
F-11-131
11-42
Chapter 11

Upper Frame
0000-5048

(AC heater line)
F-11-134
F-11-132
connector [2].
F-11-135
F-11-133
thermal switch).
F-11-136
11-43
Chapter 11
F-11-139
F-11-137
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the end of the heater
at the front.
F-11-140
F-11-138
3) Pull out the fixing main heater [1] and the fixing
11.5.8.4 Remove the Fixing
sub heater [2].
Main Heater and the Fixing

Sub Heater
0000-5049
1) Remove the heater retaining spring (needle-shaped)

[1] at the rear.
F-11-141
11-44
Chapter 11

the Fixing Unit

0000-5050

rear by 0.2 mm.

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-142
c
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-143
F-11-144
Service Mode
measurement.

11.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater
MEMO:
0.4 mm.

Unit
0000-5060
11-45
Chapter 11
[2].
F-11-148
F-11-145
11.5.9.2
Removing
the

0000-5061

snap-on claws)
F-11-149
F-11-146

Upper Frame
0000-5062

(AC heater line)
F-11-147
11-46
Chapter 11
F-11-150
F-11-153
connector [2].
F-11-151
F-11-154
thermal switch).
F-11-152
F-11-155
11-47
Chapter 11

F-11-158
F-11-156

0000-5063

fastons [2].
F-11-159
F-11-157
at the front.
F-11-160
11-48
Chapter 11

the Fixing Unit

0000-5064

rear by 0.2 mm.

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-161
c
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-162
F-11-163
Service Mode
measurement.

MEMO:
0.4 mm.
11-49
Chapter 11
11.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide


Unit
0000-5037

[2].
F-11-166
F-11-164


Inlet Guide
0000-5038
1) While pushing its claw [2] at the front, detach the

fixing inlet guide [1] to the front.
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-167
MEMO:
F-11-165
0.4 mm.

the Fixing Unit

0000-5039

11-50
rear by 0.2 mm.
Chapter 11

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-169
11.5.11.2
Removing
the
0000-5034

snap-on claws)
F-11-168
F-11-170
Service Mode
measurement.
11.5.11 Delivery Upper Guide

Unit
0000-5033

[2].
F-11-171
11-51
Chapter 11
F-11-174
F-11-172
11.5.12.2
Removing
the
0000-5104

snap-on claws)
F-11-173
F-11-175
11.5.12 Delivery Lower Guide

Unit
0000-5103

[2].
F-11-176
11-52
Chapter 11

connector [2].
F-11-177
F-11-180

thermal switch).
F-11-178
F-11-181

Upper Frame
0000-5105

(AC heater line)
F-11-182
F-11-179
11-53
Chapter 11


0000-5106

fastons [2].
F-11-183
F-11-186
at the front.
F-11-184
F-11-187

F-11-185
11-54
Chapter 11
11.5.12.6 Remove the Delivery

Lower Guide
0000-5108
1) Remove the mounting screw [1] of the static

eliminator.
F-11-188
F-11-191
2) Remove the fixing pin [1] of the delivery lower
guide.
F-11-189
11.5.12.5
Removing
Pressure Roller
the
0000-5107
F-11-192
1) While opening the delivery lower guide [1], remove

the pressure roller [2].
3)
When removing the side plate at the front/rear, be sure

to start at the rear.
Otherwise, the side plate at the rear can break the
boss on the lower frame.
Remove the 2 screws [1] from the bottom face of the
lower frame, and detach the side plate [2] at the front
and the side plate [3] at the rear (the releasing shaft [4]
F-11-190
and the delivery lower guide [5] are kept attached).
11-55
Chapter 11
Guide
When mounting, be sure to set the spring [1] on either
end of the delivery lower guide as indicated.
F-11-193
F-11-196
F-11-194
F-11-197
4) Remove the delivery lower guide [1] from the front/
rear side plate.

the Fixing Unit
0000-5109

F-11-195
Point to Attaching When the Delivery Lower
11-56
Chapter 11
about 0.3 mm.
F-11-198
c
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-199
F-11-200
Service Mode
measurement.

MEMO:
0.4 mm.
11.5.13 Fixing Inlet Sensor

Unit
0000-5091
rear by 0.2 mm.
[2].

11-57
Chapter 11
F-11-201
11.5.13.2
Removing
F-11-204
the
0000-5092

snap-on claws)
F-11-205
F-11-202

Upper Frame
0000-5093

(AC heater line)
F-11-203
11-58
F-11-206
Chapter 11
connector [2].
F-11-210
F-11-207
thermal switch).
F-11-208
F-11-211
F-11-209
F-11-212
11-59
Chapter 11

c
Inlet Sensor
0000-5094
1) Disconnect the connector [1] from the lower frame
Paper
movement
Standard:
side, and detach the fixing inlet sensor [2].

a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-215
MEMO:
0.4 mm.
F-11-213


the Fixing Unit
0000-5095

rear by 0.2 mm.

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-214
11-60
Chapter 11
F-11-217
11.5.14.2
Removing
the
0000-5098

snap-on claws)
F-11-216
Service Mode
measurement.
F-11-218
11.5.14 Fixing Delivery Sensor


Unit
0000-5097

[2].
F-11-219
11-61
Chapter 11

connector [2].
F-11-220
F-11-223

thermal switch).
F-11-221
F-11-224

Upper Frame
0000-5099

(AC heater line)
F-11-225
F-11-222
11-62
Chapter 11


Delivery Sensor
0000-5100
1) Detach the fixing delivery sensor [1] form the

lower frame side.
F-11-226
F-11-229

the Fixing Unit
0000-5101

F-11-227
F-11-230
F-11-228
11-63
Chapter 11
c
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-11-231
MEMO:
0.4 mm.
rear by 0.2 mm.
F-11-232

about 0.3 mm.
Service Mode
measurement.
11.5.15 Fixing Motor

Rear Cover
0006-2270

Rear Cover
0006-2282

Upper Rear Cover
11-64
0006-2285
Chapter 11
11.5.15.4
Removing
the
0006-2289

[1]
F-11-235

Controller Box
F-11-233
0006-2304


0006-2302

F-11-236
F-11-234
11-65
Chapter 11
F-11-237
F-11-240

Heat Discharge Fan
0006-2305

fan [3].
F-11-238
F-11-241
0006-2306

F-11-239
and open it.
11-66
Chapter 11
F-11-242
F-11-244
2) Remove the mounting screw [1] of the high-voltage
cable, and free the high-voltage cable [2] from the
cable clamp [3]; then, detach it from the edge
saddle [4] of the high-voltage unit base.
F-11-243

Lower Rear cover
0006-2308
F-11-245
1) Removing the left lower rear cover.
11.5.15.10
Removing
Secondary
Voltage Unit
Transfer
3) Pull the secondary transfer high-voltage unit [1]
the
slightly to the front, and free the high-voltage cable
High-
[3] from the cable clamp [2].

0006-2309
1) Free the DC harness [1] from the edge saddle [2];

then, disconnect the 3 connectors [3], and remove
the 2 screws [4].
11-67
Chapter 11
11.5.15.11
Removing
the
Fixing Drive Unit
0006-2311
1) Slide out the fixing feeder assembly. Disconnect

the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2];
then, detach the fixing drive unit [3].
F-11-246
4) Remove the secondary transfer high-voltage unit
together with the delivery cooling fan.
connector [2]; then, detach the secondary transfer
high-voltage unit [3].
F-11-248
F-11-247
11-68
Chapter 11
11.5.15.12
Removing
Fixing Motor
the
0006-2312
1)
When mounting the fixing motor to the motor base, be

sure that the connector [2] of the motor [1] is located
as shown.
F-11-249
Remove the tension spring [1] and the 3 screws [2]

found inside the fixing drive assembly; then, detach
the fixing motor [3].
F-11-250
11-69
Chapter 11
11-70
Chapter 12 Externals and

Controls
Contents
Contents
12.1 Control Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 LCD Processing ...................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.3 LCD Contras Adjustment ....................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU ...................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Counters ......................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.2 Signal-Sided Print and 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print ...................................................................... 12-5
12.2.3 Side of a Duplex Print (duplex model only) ........................................................................................... 12-5
12.3 Fans ............................................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.2 Sequence of Operations (fan) ................................................................................................................. 12-7
12.4 Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................ 12-8
12.4.1 Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.4.1.1 Timing of Power Supply ................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.4.1.2 Wiring to Various Accessories ........................................................................................................ 12-8
12.4.1.3 Route of Power Supply .................................................................................................................... 12-9
12.4.1.4 Power Supply Route lnside the Printer Unit .................................................................................. 12-10
12.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB .............................................................................................. 12-11
12.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Machine Power Suppy .................................................................................. 12-11
12.4.3 Protection Function .............................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms .................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.4.4 Backup Battery ..................................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.4.1 Backup Power Supply ................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.5 Energy-Saving Function ....................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.4.5.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.5.1 Fixing Drive Unit ................................................................................................................................. 12-15
12.5.2 Developing Drive Unit ......................................................................................................................... 12-18
12.5.2.7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ........................................................................................ 12-20
12.5.2.9 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................. 12-21
Contents

12.5.3 High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................................................ 12-22
12.5.4 Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................ 12-23
12.5.4.5 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ................................................................. 12-23
12.5.5 DC Power Supply Unit ......................................................................................................................... 12-24
12.5.5.3 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit ........................................................................................... 12-24
12.5.6 Control Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 12-25
12.5.6.3 Removing the Control Panel .......................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7 Control Panel LCD Unit ....................................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7.3 Removing the Control Panel .......................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ........................................................................................ 12-26
12.5.7.5 Removing the Control Panel LCD Unit ......................................................................................... 12-26
12.5.8 DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 12-26
12.5.8.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................ 12-27
12.5.8.6 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB ...................................................................................... 12-28
12.5.9 Counter Memory PCB .......................................................................................................................... 12-28
12.5.9.7 Removing the Counter Memory PCB ............................................................................................ 12-30
12.5.10 Fuse PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 12-30
12.5.10.4 Removing the Fuse PCB .............................................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11 Leakage Breaker ................................................................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11.4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Mounting .................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11.5 Removing the Leakage Breaker ................................................................................................... 12-31
12.5.12 Duplex Driver PCB ............................................................................................................................. 12-32
Contents
12.5.12.3 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting ................................................................................ 12-32

12.5.12.4 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB .............................................................................................. 12-33
12.5.13 Relay PCB 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 12-33
12.5.13.8 Removing the Relay PCB 1 ......................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14 Control Panel CPU PCB ..................................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14.3 Removing the Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14.4 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB ...................................................................................... 12-36
12.5.15 Control Panel Key Switch PCB .......................................................................................................... 12-36
12.5.15.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ..................................................................................... 12-37
12.5.15.5 Removing the Control Panel Key PCB ....................................................................................... 12-37
12.5.16 Control Panel Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................ 12-37
12.5.16.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ..................................................................................... 12-38
12.5.16.5 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB ................................................................................. 12-38
12.5.17 Environment Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 12-38
12.5.17.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit .................................................................... 12-38
12.5.17.2 Removing the Upper Right Cover ............................................................................................... 12-39
12.5.17.3 Removing the Environment Sensor ............................................................................................. 12-39
12.5.18 Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................................................. 12-39
12.5.18.8 Removing the Registration Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ............................................... 12-42
12.5.18.9 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................... 12-42
12.5.19 Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor ....................................................................................................... 12-42
12.5.19.9 Removing the Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor .................................................................... 12-44
12.5.20 Main Power Switch ............................................................................................................................ 12-44
Contents

12.5.20.13 Removing the Main Power Supply Switch ................................................................................ 12-48
12.5.21 Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ............................................................................. 12-48
12.5.21.8 Removing the Registration Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ................................................ 12-50
12.5.21.9 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Open/Close Switch ................................................................. 12-50
12.5.22 Front Cover Open/Closed Detecting Switch ...................................................................................... 12-51
12.5.22.9 Removing the Front Cover Open/Close Switch .......................................................................... 12-52
12.5.23 Cleaner Fan ......................................................................................................................................... 12-53
12.5.23.2 Removing the Cleaner Fan .......................................................................................................... 12-53
12.5.24 Manual Feed Cooling Fan .................................................................................................................. 12-53
12.5.24.13 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan .................................................................................. 12-57
12.5.25 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................................................. 12-58
Contents

12.5.26 Power Supply Cooing Fan .................................................................................................................. 12-60
12.5.26.4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Mounting ................................................................. 12-60
12.5.26.5 Removing the Power Supply Cooing Fan ................................................................................... 12-60
12.5.27 Delivery Cooling Fan ......................................................................................................................... 12-61
12.5.27.6 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan ........................................................................................... 12-62
12.5.28 Machine Heat Discharge Fan ............................................................................................................. 12-62
12.5.28.7 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ............................................................................... 12-64
12.5.29 Drum Unit Drive Belt ......................................................................................................................... 12-65
12.5.29.13 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting ............................................................................... 12-69
12.5.29.14 Removing the Drum Drive Unit ................................................................................................ 12-70
12.5.29.15 Detaching the Drum Unit Drive Belt ......................................................................................... 12-70
Contents
Chapter 12
12.1 Control Panel

12.1.1 Outline
0000-5110
The machine's control panel consists of PCBs, LCD, and touch panel as shown below; the control panel is associated
with the following functions:
- LCD indication
- contrast adjustment
- touch switch input
- hard key input

J1304A,J1304B
J511A,J511B
Touch panel
J1114
Control panel CPU PCB
J1112
J1113
J1110,J1111
J1119
Control
panel
inverter PCB
J1116,J1117
Color LCD
Keypad PCB
Control panel
F-12-1
12.1.2 LCD Processing
0000-5111
The CPU on the main controller PCB sends data (display information) to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed
by various programs.
The data is moved through the control panel CPU PCB to reach the color LCD.
12.1.3 LCD Contras Adjustment
0000-5112
The machine is equipped with a dial on its control panel designed for use by the user for adjustment of the LCD
contrast.
12-1
Chapter 12
12.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU
0000-5113
- Monitoring key inputs (relays the inputs made by keypad keys and function keys to the CPU on the main controller
PCB)
- Controlling the buzzer sound
- Turning on/off thecontrolpanel LEDs
12-2
Chapter 12
12.2 Counters
12.2.1 Outline
0000-5114
The machine is equipped with counters that keep track of the number of prints made according to the type of print;
a specific counter reading is shown in response to a press on the Check key on the control panel.The particulars of
the counter settings made at time of shipment from factory and grouped by model are as follows:
T-12-1
Model
Counter 1
Counter 2
Counter 3
Counter 4
Counter 5
Counter 6
100V
Total 1
Total
Copy
Print
(disabled at
(disabled at
(full color +
(full color +
default)
default)
mono color/1)
mono color/1)
May be
May be
changed
changed
in service
in service
mode
mode
(*1)
(B&W 1)
101
120V
Total 1
(*2)
108
232
324
Total
Copy + print
Copy + print
Total
(disabled at
(B&W 1)
(full color/
(full color/
(mono
default)
large)
small)
color/1)
May be
changed
in service
mode
120V
101
108
401
402
118
Total 1
Total
Copy
Copy
Print
Print
(B&W 1)
(full color +
(full color
(full color +
(full color
mono color/
+mono color/
mono color/
+mono color/
large)
small)
large)
small)
(*3)
230V
101
108
229
230
321
322
Total 1
Total
Copy + print
Copy + print
Total
Total (duplex)
(B&W 1)
(full color/
(full color/
(mono
large)
small)
color/1)
401
402
118
(*4)
101
108
114
12-3
Chapter 12
Model
Counter 1
240V
Total 1
(*5)
Counter 2
Counter 3
Counter 4
Counter 5
Counter 6
scan (total 1)
total (full
total (full color
total (black-
total (black-
color +
+ mono color;
and-white;
and-white;
mono
small)
large)
small)
color;
large)
240V
101
122
123
112
113
501
Total 1
Total
Copy
Copy
Print
Print
(B&W 1)
(full color +
(full color
(full color +
(full color
mono color/
+mono color/
mono color/
+mono color/
large)
small)
large)
small)
(*6)
230V
101
108
229
230
321
322
Total 1
total (full
total (full color
total (black-
total (black-
scan (total 1)
color +
+ mono color;
and-white;
and-white;
mono
small)
large)
small)
122
123
112
113
501
scan (total 1)
(*7)
color;
large)
101
230V
Total 1
(*8)
total (full
total (full color
total (black-
total (black-
color +
+ mono color;
and-white;
and-white;
mono
small)
large)
small)
122
123
112
113
501
scan (total 1)
color;
large)
101
230V
Total 1
(*9)
total (full
total (full color
total (black-
total (black-
color +
+ mono color;
and-white;
and-white;
mono
large)
large)
small)
122
123
112
113
501
scan (total 1)
color;
large)
101
230V
Total 1
(*10)
total (full
total (full color
total (black-
total (back-
color +
+ mono color;
and-white;
and-white;
mono
large)
large)
small)
123
112
113
color;
large)
101
12-4
122
501
Chapter 12
T-12-2
Guide to Notation:
large: large-size paper (in excess of 364 mm in feed length; increment by 1)
small: small-size paper (364 mm or less in feed direction)
total: all copies (C + P); increment by 1
duplex: auto duplex copy; increment by 1
3 digits in Counter column: settings in following:
COPIER>OPTION>USER>COUNTER1 through 6
(for details, see description in Service Mode)
These counters may be set in service mode to serve for different counter readings. (In the case
of the 120/230V model, all counters may be assigned different counter readings.)
T-12-3
Medium Order (printer unit)
*1: F14-2412/2413/2416/2417/2512/2514/2516/2518
*2: F14-2501
*3: F14-2531/
2532
*4: F14-2541/2560/2570
*5: F14-2551
*6: F14-2561
*8: F14-2581
*9: F14-2591
*10: F14-2521
*7: F14-2571
12.2.2 Signal-Sided Print and 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print
0000-5116
When making a single-side print or printing on the 2nd side of a double-side print, the counter reading is incremented
when the trailing edge of paper leaves the machine, as indicated by the output of the following sensor:
T-12-4
Condition
Sensor
Finisher absent
face-down delivery (center tray):
center delivery tray full sensor (PS8)
face-down delivery (copy tray):
face-down delivery sensor 2 (PS6)
face-up delivery (side tray):
fixing delivery sensor (PS25)
Finisher present
finisher delivery sensor
12.2.3 Side of a Duplex Print (duplex model only)
0000-5117
The machine identifies the end of printing on the 1st side of a double-sided print and increments the counter reading
when the duplex pickup sensor (PS24) goes ON.
12-5
Chapter 12
12.3 Fans
12.3.1 Outline
0000-5118
The names and functions of the fans used inside the machine are as follows:
T-12-5
Notation
Name
Description
FM3
machine cooling fan
cools the drum cartridge and the developing

motor
FM2
fixing heat exhaust fan
discharges the heat generated by the fixing

assembly to the outside of the machine
FM1
power supply cooling fan
cools the power supply
FM4
cleaner cooling fan
cools the cleaner
FM5
delivery cooling fan
cools the delivery assembly
FM6
manual feed cooling fan
cools the pre-registration motor (duplex model

only)
FM7
controller fan
FM7
cools the controller
FM6
FM3
FM2
FM8
FM4
FM1
F-12-2
12-6
Chapter 12
12.3.2 Sequence of Operations (fan)
0000-5119
The following is the sequence of operations used by the machine to drive the fans:
When the control panel power switch is pressed to start sleep mode, the control panel LCD goes OFF. If the reading
of the environment sensor is 30 deg C or higher at this timing, the machine rotates the fixing heat discharge fan,
power supply cooling fan, and cleaner cooling fan for 30 min continuously and, thereafter, moves into sleep mode.
Main power
switch ON
Warm-up
Control panel
power switch
OFF
Print request
signal
Standby
Printing
Standby
Main
power
switch
OFF
Low-power mode Power-save mode Sleep mode
Power supply cooling

fan (FM3)
Fixing heat exhaust
fan (FM2)
Cleaner cooling fan
(FM4)
Delivery cooling fan
(FM5)
Machine cooling fan
(FM1)
Manual feed cooling
fan (FM6)
Controller fan
(FM7)
Delivery vertical
path fan (FM8)*
*: FM8 rotates in case either thick paper (210 to 253 g/m2)
or glossy paper is fed to face-down delivery.
: half speed.
: full speed.
F-12-3
12-7
Chapter 12
12.4 Power Supply

12.4.1 Power Supply
12.4.1.1 Timing of Power Supply
0005-9431
The reader unit is supplied with 24 VDC by the printer unit at the following timing of operation:
Standby
Sleep mode
Main power switch

turned ON
Power plug connected
to outlet
Power save mode
PSTBY
DC 24V
F-12-4
12.4.1.2 Wiring to Various Accessories
0006-0745
The power supply of the printer unit and the various accessories are wired as follows:
The anti-condensation heater inside the reader unit and the power supply cable are as shown. The machine's power
supply uses no more than 2 lines to connect to any external power outlet.
T-12-6
12-8
Pedestal
Target of reader heater power supply cable
Absent
External outlet
Present
Pedestal outlet
Chapter 12
For heater
(If a pedestal is
installed, connect it
to its outlet.)
DADF-K1
Inlet
Reader C1
FinisherM1/N1/N2
PS Print Server
Unit-C1
Side Paper
Deck-P1
Cable for
deck heater
Printer
Inlet
Outlet1
Outlet2
Outlet3
Inlet
Pedestal
If a pedestal is installed,
connect the pedestal power
cable to its outlet 2.
F-12-5
12.4.1.3 Route of Power Supply
0005-9433
The machine uses the I/F PCB to produce the following types of DC voltage from the 24 VDC supplied by the printer
unit:
- 5 VDC (for sensors)
- 3.3 VDC (for ICs)
- 2.5 VDC (for ICs)
- 15 VDC (for scanner motor drive)
- 24 VDC (for scanner motor drive)
The reader controller PCB produces the following type of DC voltage:
- 12 VDC (for CCD unit)
12-9
Chapter 12
Interface PCB
5 VDC generation
3.3 VDC generation
2.5 VDC generation
15 VDC generation
To DF 24 VDC generation
24 VDC
15 VDC
24 VDC
12 VDC
generation
Reader controller
PCB
5 VDC
12 VDC
J3
06
05
J3
01
J3
J3
09
11
J3
24 VDC
From printer unit
04
J2
J2
01
100/230 VAC
06
J2
24 VDC
J6
01
100/230 VAC
Fuse PCB
24 VDC
15 VDC
5 VDC
3.3 VDC
Inverter PCB
F-12-6
12.4.1.4 Power Supply Route lnside the Printer Unit
0006-1651
The machine's DC power supply is fed with power by the 2 DC power supply PCB (DCP1, DCP2) and the DC power
supply PCB (for accessories) built inside the pedestal (plain, cassette pedestal).
DC Power Supply PCB
- generates DC power from AC power
- protects against current/voltage
- supplies DC power to loads
DC Power Supply PCB for Accessories (inside pedestal)
- generates DC power from AC power
- protects against overcurrent/voltage
- supplies DC power to accessories (paper deck, finisher)
12-10
Chapter 12
Power supply unit

Leakage
breaker
Heater
control PCB
Main
power
switch
3.3V
3.3VAN
12VAN
DCP1 PCB
24V
5V
12V
3.3V
DCP2 PCB
3.3VAN
12VAN
5V
3.3V
12V
24V
Fuse PCB
Power
distribution
PCB
Main
controller
PCB (main)
5V
3.3V
3.3VAN
Main
controller
PCB (sub)
12V
5V
HDD
24V
24V
5V
12V
3.3V
DC
controller
PCB
24V
Reader
24V
Intermediate
transfer motor
5V
PDL board
5V
5V
Control
panel unit
Coin
manager or
Card reader
Laser
scanner motor
(Y,M,C,K)
Laser
driver PCB
(Y,M,C,K)
Scanner unit
24V
5V
3.3V
3.3VAN
5V
5VAN
24VATR
Drum
drive unit
(Y,M,C,K)
Duplex
driver PCB
HVI(Y,M,C,K)
FAX board
(option)
HVI-SUB
HV2
24V
HV2-SUB
HV4(YM/CK)
HV3
High-voltage unit
VAN: All Night Voltage
24V,5V
Cassette
feeder
unit 1/2
F-12-7
12.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB

12.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Machine Power Suppy
0006-0760
The rated output and the power supply tolerance of the DC power supply PCB (DCP1 PCB, DCP2 PCB) of the
printer unit are as follows:
T-12-7
Output
Tolerance
3.3 V
3.3 VAN
-4%/
-4%/+5%
+5%
5V
5 VAN
12 V
12 VAN
24 V
-5%/
-5%/
-8%/
-9%/
-9%/
+5%
+5%
+10%
+10%
+10%
12-11
Chapter 12
12.4.3 Protection Function

12.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms
0006-0766
The machine's power supply PCB and the power supply PCBs of its accessories are equipped with an overcurrent/
voltage protective mechanisms that prevent damage to the power supply circuit by automatically cutting off the
output voltage in the event of an overcurrent/voltage caused, for example, by a short-circuit in any of its loads.
If the protective function has gone ON, turn off the power switch of the printer unit, disconnect the power plug of
the printer unit or the accessories power supply circuit, and remove the cause of activation; then, leave the machine
alone for about 3 min, and turn it on to reset.
12.4.4 Backup Battery

12.4.4.1 Backup Power Supply
0006-0767
The SRAM PCB and the DC controller PCB of the machine's main controller PCB are each equipped with a lithium
battery for backup in the event of a power outage or disconnection of the power plug.
T-12-8
SRAM PCB
manganese dioxide/lithium battery (3 V, 1000

mAh)
DC controller PCB
lithium battery (3 V, 560 mAh)
T-12-9
Battery life
10 yr or more (for both; with power plug

disconnected)
Battery replacement
not possible (on its own, in the field)
After replacement of battery in
input of values indicated on service label
workshop
The lithium battery must be replaced only with the one indicated in the Parts Catalog; otherwise, it may trigger
a fire or explosion.
Do not charge, disassemble, or incinerate the lithium battery; mishandling can lead to a fire or a chemical explosion.
Keep the lithium battery out of reach of children. Be sure to dispose of a used battery strictly in accordance with all
applicable regulations.
12-12
Chapter 12
12.4.5 Energy-Saving Function

12.4.5.1 Outline
0006-0772
1. Standby Mode
In standby mode, the machine is in operation or is ready to operate, with all its parts supplied with power.
2. Power-Save Mode
The term "power-save mode" is used generically to refer to the following modes, in which the machine is supplied
with power differently than it is in normal mode: power-save, low-power, sleep. A shift in the direction of 'resent
power-save mode' to 'low-power mode' and then to 'sleep' mode occurs automatically.
- Power-Save Mode
T-12-10
Shift:
A shift to power-save mode is initiated only in response to a press on the Save

Power button on the control panel.
Description:
The power used by the machine is reduced according to the settings made in
user mode (immediate recovery, -10%, -25%, -50%; the fixing unit is
controlled to 190 deg C).
- Low-Power Mode (factory setting)

This mode conforms to the standards under Energy Star.
T-12-11
Shift:
A shift is made only in response to the passage of time (auto low-power shift
time) selected in user mode.
Description:
The power used by the machine is reduced to enable the machine to remain in
a state that satisfies the standards under Energy Star.The power supplied to the
reader unit will remain ON except the +24V power, which the reader unit uses
to generate internal power. (All operations remain at rest.)
The printer unit keeps the temperature of the fixing unit to a specific level (190
deg C) which is lower than when the machine is in normal operating mode.
- Sleep Mode (sleep mode 1 or sleep mode 2)

T-12-12
Shift:
A shift is made in response to the passage of time (auto sleep shift time)
specified in user mode or in response to a press on the control panel software
power switch.
12-13
Chapter 12
Description:
In sleep mode 1 (relatively higher power consumption), the fixing assembly

is totally deprived of power. The DC controller PCB, however, remains
supplied with power.
In sleep mode 2 (relatively lower power consumption), on the other hand, the
printer unit (including the fixing assembly) remains OFF; the main controller
PCB is supplied with all-night power as indicated in the table:
T-12-13
Controller
FAX
+3.3 VAN
CPU, main memory
+12 VAN
controller cooling fan
+5 VAN
fax arrival detection
3. AC OFF Mode
AC OFF mode occurs when the main power switch is turned off, i.e., all parts of the machine is deprived of power.
The supply of power to the various systems of the machine in each of the foregoing modes is as follows:
T-12-14
Main
Non-all
controller
night power
Standby
Power-
Low-
Sleep
Sleep
AC
mode
save
power
mode 1
mode 2
OFF
mode
mode
mode
+12V
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+5V
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+3.3V
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+3.3VAN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
+12VAN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Reader unit
+24V
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Printer unit
+24V
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+12V
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+5V
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+3.3V
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+5V
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+3.3V
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+5VAN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
All-night
power
FAX
Non-all
night power
All-night
power
12-14
Chapter 12
12.5 Parts
Procedure
Replacement

0000-5130

12.5.1 Fixing Drive Unit

Rear Cover
0000-5127

Rear Cover
0000-5128

Upper Rear Cover
0000-5131
F-12-9
12.5.1.4
Removing
the
0000-5129
[1]
F-12-10

Controller Box
0000-5132

F-12-8
12-15
Chapter 12
F-12-11
F-12-14

and open it.
F-12-12
F-12-15

Heat Discharge Fan
0000-5133

fan [3].
F-12-13
12-16
Chapter 12
F-12-16
F-12-18

0000-5134
Lower Rear cover
0000-5135
12.5.1.10
Removing
Secondary
Transfer
the
High-
Voltage Unit
0000-5136

the 2 screws [4].
F-12-17
F-12-19
12-17
Chapter 12
F-12-20
F-12-22

Drive Unit
0000-5137

F-12-21
F-12-23
12.5.2 Developing Drive Unit

Rear Cover
12-18
0000-5146
Chapter 12

Rear Cover
0000-5147

Upper Rear Cover
0000-5150
12.5.2.4
Removing
the
0000-5148

F-12-25


[1]
F-12-26
F-12-24

0000-5149


Controller Box
0000-5151

12-19
Chapter 12
F-12-27
F-12-30

and open it.
F-12-28
F-12-31

Controller Mounting
0000-5152

F-12-29
12-20
Chapter 12
F-12-32
F-12-34

Heat Discharge Fan
0000-5153


[3].
fan [3].
F-12-35
F-12-33
12.5.2.9
Removing
12.5.2.10
the
Removing

0000-5154
the
0000-5155

clamp [4].
12-21
Chapter 12
12.5.3 High-Voltage Unit

Rear Cover
0000-5138

Rear Cover
0000-5139
F-12-36

0000-5140

F-12-37
F-12-39

F-12-38
12-22
Chapter 12

F-12-40
12.5.4 Secondary Transfer HighVoltage Unit
F-12-42

Lower Rear cover

Rear Cover
0000-5144

0000-5141
12.5.4.5
the
Transfer
High-
Secondary

Rear Cover
Removing
Voltage Unit
0000-5142
0000-5145

the 2 screws [4].
0000-5143

F-12-43
F-12-41
12-23
Chapter 12

F-12-46
12.5.5 DC Power Supply Unit

F-12-44

Rear Cover
0000-5168

Rear Cover
0000-5169

Power Supply Unit
0000-5170

F-12-45

F-12-47
12-24
Chapter 12
12.5.6 Control Panel
control panel [2].

Left Cover (small)
0000-5171
1) Remove the upper left cover (small).

Cover
0000-5172
1) Open the front cover and the drum unit cover.

2) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside
F-12-50
cover [2].
12.5.7 Control Panel LCD Unit

Left Cover (small)
0000-5187

Cover
0000-5188

F-12-48
cover [2].
12.5.6.3 Removing the Control

Panel
0000-5173
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the control

panel [2] toward the front.
F-12-51

F-12-49
Panel
0000-5189

12-25
Chapter 12
F-12-52
F-12-54
control panel [2].
Panel LCD Unit
0000-5191

panel LCD unit [2].
F-12-53

Panel Back Plate
0000-5190
1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] from the CPU
F-12-55
PCB, remove the 2 flat cables [2], disconnect the 2

connectors [3] from the inverter PCB, remove the
binding screw [4], and remove the 8 self-tapping
12.5.8 DC Controller PCB
screws [5]; then, detach the control panel back plate

[6].

Rear Cover
0000-5279

Rear Cover
12-26
0000-5280
Chapter 12
12.5.8.3
Removing
the
0000-5281

[1]
F-12-58

Controller PCB
F-12-56
0000-5283
1) Disconnect all connectors of the PCB, and remove

the 2 flat cables [1] and the 10 screws [2]; then,

detach the DC controller PCB [3].

0000-5282

F-12-59
F-12-57
12-27
Chapter 12

DC Controller PCB

0000-5284
1) After replacing the DC controller PCB, use the
Upper Rear Cover
0000-5319
following service mode to initialize the memory of
12.5.9.4
the DC controller PCB:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON
2) Enter the settings indicated on the service label
using the following service mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>PVE-OFST
Use it to enter an adjustment value for the laser
beam position.
Removing
the
0000-5317

COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST
Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration
roller clutch goes ON.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for repickup.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4R
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray.
manual feed tray.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4
manual feed tray.
4) Make the following selections in service mode:
F-12-60
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>L-ADJ-0.
5) Press the OK key. (The machine starts auto
adjustment and will indicate 'END' at its end.)

0000-5318
12.5.9 Counter Memory PCB

Rear Cover
0000-5315

Rear Cover
12-28
0000-5316
Chapter 12
F-12-63
F-12-61

[1]
F-12-64
F-12-62

Controller Box
0000-5320
F-12-65

12-29
Chapter 12
F-12-66
F-12-68
12.5.10 Fuse PCB
and open it.

Rear Cover
0000-5322

Rear Cover
0000-5323

Power Supply Unit
F-12-67

12.5.9.7 Removing the Counter

Memory PCB

0000-5321

screws [2]; then, detach the counter memory PCB
[3].
F-12-69
12-30
0000-5324
Chapter 12

PCB
0000-5325
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and free the 5 card

spacers [2]; then, detach the fuse PCB [3].
F-12-71

Supply
Cooling
Fan
Mounting
F-12-70
0000-5301
1) Remove the 5 screws [1], and remove the power

supply cooling fan mointing plate[2]; then, detach
12.5.11 Leakage Breaker
the connector [3].

Rear Cover
0000-5298

Rear Cover
0000-5299

Power Supply Unit
F-12-72
0000-5300

12.5.11.5
Removing
Leakage Breaker
the
0000-5302

connectors from the fuse PCB; then, detach the
power supply PCB base [2].
12-31
Chapter 12
F-12-76
F-12-73
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the protective
12.5.12 Duplex Driver PCB
plate [1].

Rear Cover
0000-5311

Rear Cover
0000-5312

F-12-74
Connector Mounting
0000-5313

3) Remove the 4 terminals [1] and the 2 screws [2];
then, detach the leakage breaker [3].

Mounting [2].
F-12-75
F-12-77
12-32
Chapter 12
12.5.12.4
Removing
the
Duplex Driver PCB
0000-5314
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the duplex

driver PCB [2].
F-12-79
F-12-78
12.5.13 Relay PCB 1
0000-5306

Rear Cover

0000-5303

Rear Cover
0000-5304

Upper Rear Cover
0000-5307
12.5.13.4
Removing
F-12-80
the
0000-5305


12-33
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-81
F-12-84

Controller Box
0000-5308

F-12-85
F-12-82
and open it.
F-12-86
F-12-83
12-34
Chapter 12

Controller Mounting

0000-5309

Cover
0000-5180

cover [2].
F-12-89
F-12-87
12.5.14.3
12.5.13.8 Removing the Relay

PCB 1
Removing
Control Panel
0000-5310
1) Disconnect the 9 connectors [1] and the 8 screws
the
0000-5181

[2] from the PCB; then, detach the relay PCB 1 [3].
F-12-88
F-12-90
12.5.14 Control Panel CPU PCB

control panel [2].

Left Cover (small)
0000-5179
12-35
Chapter 12

Cover
0000-5175

cover [2].
F-12-91
12.5.14.4
Removing
the
Control Panel CPU PCB
0000-5182

flat cables [2]; then, detach the control panel CPU
PCB [4].
F-12-93
12.5.15.3
Removing
Control Panel
the
0000-5176

F-12-92
F-12-94
12.5.15 Control Panel Key Switch
PCB
control panel [2].

Left Cover (small)
12-36
0000-5174
Chapter 12
F-12-95
F-12-97
12.5.15.4
Removing
the
Control Panel Back Plate
0000-5177
12.5.16 Control Panel Inverter PCB

[6].

Left Cover (small)
0000-5183

Cover
0000-5184

cover [2].
F-12-96
12.5.15.5
Removing
Control Panel Key PCB
the
0000-5178

panel key PCB [2].
F-12-98
12.5.16.3
Removing
Control Panel
the
0000-5185

12-37
Chapter 12
F-12-99
F-12-101
12.5.16.5
control panel [2].
Removing
the
Control Panel Inverter PCB
0000-5186

screws [2]; then, detach the control panel inverter
PCB [3].
F-12-100
12.5.16.4
Removing
Control Panel Back Plate
the
0006-2163

F-12-102
[6].
12.5.17 Environment Sensor

12.5.17.1 Pressure Release of
the
Intermediate
Transfer
Unit
0006-2169

12-38
Chapter 12
12.5.17.3

cover [2].
Removing
the
Environment Sensor
0000-5344
1) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the upper

right stay of the machine, and remove the screw [1];
then, detach the environment sensor mounting plate
[2].
F-12-103
F-12-106
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the claw [2]
of the sensor base; then, detach the environment
sensor [3].
F-12-104

Right Cover
0000-5343

F-12-107
cover [2].
12.5.18 Manual Feed Unit Open/

Closed Sensor
Rear Cover
0000-5227
F-12-105
12-39
Chapter 12

Rear Cover
0000-5228

Upper Rear Cover
0000-5231
12.5.18.4
Removing
the
0000-5229

F-12-109


[1]
F-12-110
F-12-108

0000-5230


Controller Box
0000-5232

12-40
Chapter 12
F-12-111
F-12-114

and open it.
F-12-112
F-12-115

Controller Mounting
0000-5233

F-12-113
12-41
Chapter 12
F-12-118
F-12-116
12.5.19 Front Cover Open/Closed

12.5.18.8
Removing
Registration
Unit
the
Sensor
Open/
0000-5234
12.5.19.1
Tonner
screw [2]; then, detach the registration unit open/

closed sensor mounting [3].
Removing
Container
the
release
Lever
0006-2360

2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and the 4 tonner container
release levers [2].
F-12-117
12.5.18.9
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit Open/

Closed Sensor
F-12-119
0000-5235

registration unit open/closed sensor [2].
12.5.19.2
Removing
Cleaner Fan Cover
the
0000-5216

cover [2].
12-42
Chapter 12

Upper Rear Cover
0000-5222

0000-5221

F-12-120

Cover
0000-5217

cover [2].
F-12-122

F-12-121
[1]

Rear Cover
0000-5218

Rear Cover
0000-5219

F-12-123
12-43
Chapter 12

Controller Mounting
0000-5224

F-12-126
12.5.20 Main Power Switch

Rear Cover
0000-5192

F-12-124

Cover Open/Closed Sensor
Rear Cover
0000-5226
0000-5193

cover [2].

Upper Rear Cover
0000-5196
12.5.20.4
Removing
the
0000-5194

F-12-125
2) Remove the front cover open closed sensor [1].
12-44
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-129

Controller Box
F-12-127
0000-5197


0000-5195

F-12-130
F-12-128

F-12-131
12-45
Chapter 12

Controller Mounting
0000-5198

F-12-132
F-12-135

Heat Discharge Fan
0000-5199

F-12-133
fan [3].

and open it.
F-12-136

Drive Unit
0000-5200

F-12-134

12-46
Chapter 12
F-12-139
F-12-137

12.5.20.10
Removing
the
0000-5201

Mounting [2].
F-12-140
12.5.20.12
Removing
the

Duct
0000-5203

F-12-138

12.5.20.11
Removing
High-Voltage Unit
the
0000-5202

12-47
Chapter 12
12.5.21 Manual Feed Unit Open/

Rear Cover
0000-5236

Rear Cover
F-12-141
0000-5237

Power Supply Switch
0000-5204
1) Remove the 2 terminals [1].

Upper Rear Cover
0000-5240
12.5.21.4
Removing
the
0000-5238

F-12-142
2) Pick the stopper segment [A], and detach it.
F-12-143
12-48
F-12-144
Chapter 12

0000-5239

F-12-147
F-12-145

F-12-148
[1]
F-12-146
F-12-149

Controller Box
0000-5241

12-49
Chapter 12
F-12-150
F-12-152
and open it.
12.5.21.8
Removing
Registration
Unit
the
Open/
0000-5243

screw [2]; then, detach the registration unit open/
closed sensor mounting [3].
F-12-151

Controller Mounting
0000-5242
F-12-153

12.5.21.9
Removing
the
Manual Feed Unit Open/

Close Switch
0000-5244
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the manual feed

unit open/close switch [2].
12-50
Chapter 12
F-12-156
F-12-154
12.5.22 Front Cover Open/Closed

Detecting Switch

Cover
0000-5206

12.5.22.1
Tonner
Removing
Container
the
cover [2].
release
Lever
0006-2374

2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and the 4 tonner container
release levers [2].
F-12-157

Rear Cover
F-12-155
12.5.22.2
0000-5207
Removing
Cleaner Fan Cover
the
0000-5205
Rear Cover
0000-5208

cover [2].
12-51
Chapter 12

Upper Rear Cover

0000-5211
Controller Mounting
0000-5213



0000-5210

F-12-160

F-12-158
Cover Open/Close Switch
0000-5215
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the retaining

plate [2]; then, push it inside the front side cover.

[1]
F-12-161
screws [2]; then, slide out the sensor base [3]. (The
sensor flag pushing plate is found running from the
F-12-159
12-52
front side plate to the rear side plate.)
Chapter 12
F-12-164
F-12-162
12.5.23.2
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the front cover
open/close switch [2].
Removing
the
Cleaner Fan
0000-5292
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the 3 claws;

then, detach the cleaner fan [2].
F-12-163
12.5.23 Cleaner Fan

12.5.23.1
Removing
Cleaner Fan Cover
F-12-165
12.5.24 Manual Feed Cooling Fan
the
0000-5291

cover [2].

Rear Cover
0000-5245

Rear Cover
0000-5246
12-53
Chapter 12

Upper Rear Cover
0000-5249
12.5.24.4
Removing
the
0000-5247

F-12-167

[1]
F-12-166

0000-5248
F-12-168


Controller Box
0000-5250

12-54
Chapter 12
F-12-169
F-12-172

and open it.
F-12-170
F-12-173

Controller Mounting
0000-5251

F-12-171
12-55
Chapter 12
F-12-174
F-12-176

Heat Discharge Fan

0000-5252

fan [3].
F-12-177
F-12-175
12.5.24.9
Removing
the
0000-5253

clamp [4].
F-12-178
12-56
Chapter 12
12.5.24.10
Removing
the
0000-5254

Mounting [2].
F-12-181
12.5.24.12
Removing
the

Duct
0000-5256

F-12-179
12.5.24.11
Removing
High-Voltage Unit
the
0000-5255

F-12-182
12.5.24.13
Removing
the
0000-5257
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the manual

feed cooling fan [2].
F-12-180
12-57
Chapter 12
F-12-183
12.5.25 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan

Rear Cover
0000-5258
F-12-184


Rear Cover
0000-5259
0000-5261


Upper Rear Cover
0000-5262
12.5.25.4
Removing
the
0000-5260

F-12-185

12-58
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-186
F-12-189

Controller Box
0000-5263

F-12-190
F-12-187
and open it.
F-12-191
F-12-188
12-59
Chapter 12

Heat Discharge Fan
0000-5264

fan [3].
F-12-193

Supply
Cooling
Fan
Mounting
0000-5296
1) Remove the 5 screws [1], and remove the power
F-12-192
supply cooling fan mointing plate[2]; then, detach
12.5.26 Power Supply Cooing Fan
the connector [3].

Rear Cover
0000-5293

Rear Cover
0000-5294

Power Supply Unit
F-12-194
0000-5295


Supply Cooing Fan
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the power

supply cooling fan [2].
12-60
0000-5297
Chapter 12

F-12-195
F-12-197
12.5.27 Delivery Cooling Fan

Rear Cover
Lower Rear cover

0000-5285
0000-5288
12.5.27.5
Rear Cover
Removing
Secondary
0000-5286
Transfer
Voltage Unit
the
High0000-5289

the 2 screws [4].

0000-5287

F-12-198
F-12-196
12-61
Chapter 12

F-12-201
12.5.27.6
F-12-199
Removing
the
Delivery Cooling Fan
0000-5290

screws [2]; then, detach the fan [3].

F-12-202
F-12-200
12.5.28 Machine Heat Discharge Fan


Rear Cover
0000-5272

Rear Cover
12-62
0000-5273
Chapter 12

Upper Rear Cover
0000-5276
12.5.28.4
Removing
the
0000-5274

F-12-204

[1]
F-12-203

0000-5275
F-12-205


Controller Box
0000-5277

12-63
Chapter 12
F-12-206
F-12-209

and open it.
F-12-207
F-12-210
12.5.28.7
Removing
the
0000-5278
F-12-208
12-64
Chapter 12

Upper Rear Cover
0000-5330
12.5.29.4
Removing
the
0000-5328

F-12-211
[3].
F-12-213
F-12-212
12.5.29 Drum Unit Drive Belt
0000-5329


Rear Cover
0000-5326

Rear Cover
0000-5327
12-65
Chapter 12
F-12-216
F-12-214

[1]
F-12-217
F-12-215

Controller Box
0000-5331
F-12-218

12-66
Chapter 12
F-12-219
F-12-221
and open it.

Heat Discharge Fan
0000-5333

fan [3].
F-12-220

Controller Mounting

F-12-222
0000-5332
12.5.29.9
Removing
the
0000-5334

clamp [4].
12-67
Chapter 12
12.5.29.10
Removing
the
0000-5335

Mounting [2].
F-12-223
F-12-226
12.5.29.11
Removing
High-Voltage Unit
the
0000-5336

F-12-224
F-12-227
F-12-225
12-68
Chapter 12
F-12-228
12.5.29.12
Removing
F-12-230
the

Duct

0000-5337

F-12-231
F-12-229

12.5.29.13
Removing
the
Drum ITB Motor Mounting
[3].
0000-5338

Motor Mounting
12-69
Chapter 12
tension on the belt.)
F-12-234
F-12-232
12.5.29.14
Removing
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the belt
the
Drum Drive Unit
tension pulley cover [2]. (2 locations left/right)

0000-5339

screws [2]: then, take out the drum drive unit [3].
F-12-235
2) Remove the belt retaining roll [1] found on the right
side, and detach the drum unit drive belt [2].
F-12-233
12.5.29.15 Detaching the Drum

Unit Drive Belt
0000-5340
Never remove the screws [1] (identified by a red

marking) used to secure the belt tension plate in place.
(The plate is used to maintain a specific degree of
12-70
F-12-236
Chapter 13
MEAP
Contents
Contents
13.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 MEAP Counter .............................................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform ............................................................................................................. 13-4
Chapter 13
13.1 Overview
0007-0341
The term MEAP stands for Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform, and is used to generically refer to a
platform for software built into MFPs and peripheral equipment. The architecture is based on Java (J2ME, i.e., Java
2 Platform Micro Edition), and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications.
A MEAP application behaves independently from its host printer's system software, and may be installed or
uninstalled using SMS (Service Management Service), which is an interface that runs as part of the browser on a PC.
As long as the device supports MEAP, most MEAP applications may be added to the device in the field.
13-1
Chapter 13
13.2 MEAP Counter
0007-0359
In addition to the commonly found print counters, a device that supports MEAP is equipped with a counter
mechanism used to keep track of which functions are used as well as how often they are used for individual MEAP
applications that are installed. The MEAP counter readings may be checked by making the following selections on
the device control panel: Counter Check Key>MEAP Counter Check. A device may possess the following MEAP
counters, and which counter to use and, therefore, to display all depend on the application in question.
A counter reading may be of a type that is forced to increase as a job is expected or of a type that is increased when
the application sends instructions; or, it may be of a type that increases independently of the host device, thus
increasing solely in response to the application being run; specifics are as follows:
T-13-1
Type
Count item
forced
total
total (black-and-white 1)
total (black-and-while large)
scan (total 1)
black-and-white scan (total 1)
in response to instructions from application
black-and-white scan 1
application-independent
free 1
free 2
free 3
free 4
free 5
free 6
free 7
free 8
free 9
free 10
free 11
free 12
13-2
Chapter 13
Notes:
forced: the device forces the counter to increase its reading in response to execution of a job.
in response to instructions from application: the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from
the application.
application independent: the counter operates according to the specifications of the application.
13-3
Chapter 13
13.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform
0007-0346
In addition to the installation of the system software, language file, and RUI, a printer equipped with MEAP functions
calls for the installation of MEAP content, which offers functions (system services) needed to run MEAP
applications and class libraries needed by the MEAP applications to control the device.
It is important that the version of the system software be fully compatible with the version of the MEAP content,
calling for special care. (In the case of a mismatch, the device will not be able to run the MEAP application.) For
version information, refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the system software.
The following shows the components of a MEAP application:
[5]
[7] [8]
[1]
[6]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F-13-1
[1] User Interface Control Bock
installed as part of the system software
[2] Device Control Block
[3] Operating System
[4] Java VM
[5] MEAP System Services (includes SDL/SSO)
installed as part of MEAP content
[6] Device Control Class Library
installed as part of MEAP content
[7] internally developed application
[8] externally developed application
13-4
Chapter 14 Maintenance
and Inspection
Contents
Contents
14.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ........................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.2 Durables and Consumables ........................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ........................................................................................................... 14-4
14.3.1 Scheduled Servicing (Reader Unit) ........................................................................................................ 14-4
14.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (Printer Unit) ........................................................................................................ 14-6
Chapter 14
14.1 Periodically Replaced Parts

14.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts
0005-9998
Some parts of the machine must be periodically replaced to ensure a specific level of product performance (i.e., they
may not show wear but can significantly affect the machine performance once they fail). If possible, schedule any
periodical replacement so that it coincides with scheduled servicing.
The guide to periodical replacement is subject to change according to the site of installation and habits of use.
14.1.2 Reader Unit/Color Image Reader-C1
0006-0000
The reader unit/Color Image Reader-C1 does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
14.1.3 Printer Unit
0006-0001
The printer unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
14-1
Chapter 14
14.2 Durables and Consumables

14.2.1 Outline
0006-0002
Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more over the life of the product because of deterioration
or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to the guide.
Find Out When to Replace
Use the following service mode to find out when it is best to replace a specific durable part.
- Copier
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
- Option
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
14.2.2 Reader Unit/Color Image Reader-C1
0006-0004
The reader unit/Color Image Reader-C1 does not have parts that are designated as "durables."
14.2.3 Printer Unit
0006-0005
T-14-1
as of May 2004
Ref.
Parts name
Parts No.
Q'ty
Life
[1]
Waste toner container
FG6-8992
60,000 prints*
[2]
Secondary transfer outside
FG6-8997
300,000 prints*
roller (120/230-V)
Remarks
actual number of
prints
[3]
Transfer cleaning unit
FG6-8989
100,000 prints*
[4]
Fixing roller
FB6-3641
100,000 prints*
actual number of
prints
[5]
Pressure roller
FB6-3653
100,000 prints*
actual number of
prints
[6]
Transfer belt
FB6-2930
300,000 prints*
actual number of
prints
[7]
Drive roller
FB6-2931
300,000 prints*
actual number of
prints
[8]
Primary toner roller
RB2-6870
300,000 prints*
[9]
Secondary transfer inside
FB6-2934
300,000 prints*
roller
[10]
Feed roller (each cassette

holder)
14-2
actual number of
prints
FB6-3406
250,000 prints*
actual number of
prints
Chapter 14
as of May 2004
Ref.
Parts name
Parts No.
Q'ty
Life
Remarks
[11]
Separation roller (each
FB6-3406
250,000 prints*
actual number of
cassette holder)
[12]
prints
Feed roller (manual feeder)
FB1-8581
120,000 prints*
actual number of
prints
[13]
Separation roller (manual
FB5-0873
120,000 prints*
feeder)
actual number of
prints
[14]
Fixing upper frame unit
FG6-9645
100,000 prints*
[15]
Fixing unit (100 V)
FG6-9070
200,000 prints*
[15]
Fixing unit (120 V)
FG6-9069
200,000 prints*
[15]
Fixing unit (230 V)
FG6-9070
200,000 prints*
[16]
Pressure roller bearing
XG9-0478
100,000 prints*
actual number of
prints
*: Assumes the use of A4 originals with a 5% image ratio.
[8]
[7]
[12]
[6]
[13]
[9]
[10]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[11]
[1]
[15]
[16]
[5]
[16]
F-14-1
14-3
Chapter 14
14.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure

14.3.1 Scheduled Servicing (Reader Unit)
0006-0013
Do not use solvents or oils that are not indicated herein.
T-14-2
Unit name
Location
Cleaning
Remarks
Optical assembly
Scanner cable
inspect
if dirt is appreciable
Optical path
Scanner rail
lubricate
Copyboard glass
clean
No. 1 through No. 3
clean
Original reflecting plate
clean
clean
Lens
clean
mirrors
Points to Note About Scheduled Servicing

Unless otherwise specifically mentioned, use lint-free paper and alcohol for cleaning.
- If you used solvent for cleaning, be sure that the solvent has completely dried before mounting the part back to the
machine.
- Unless specifically mentioned, do not use a wet (moist) cloth for cleaning.
- See to it that scheduled servicing and replacement are conducted as indicated.
14-4
Chapter 14
Scanning lamp
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Reflecting plate
Clean with a blower brush.
No. 1 through No. 3 mirror

Use a blower brush; if dirt
cannot be removed, dry wipe
with lint-free paper.
Copyboard glass
Clean the face/back and white plate.
Scanner rail
Lubricate.
Scanner cable
Inspect.
Lens
Use a blower brush.
Use a blower brush.
Face-down
delivery roller 1
Intermediate
transfer belt
Face-down
delivery roller 2
(ITB; when
replacing it)
Drive roller
Reversing roller
(when replacing
the ITB)
Tension roller
(when replacing
the ITB)
Pre-registration
roller
Reversing roller
Pickup vertical
path roller
External delivery
roller
Internal delivery
roller
Registration
upper roller
Duplex feed roller
Duplex feed
roller
Delivery upper
Secondary Duplex
guide
transfer rear feed
Delivery lower
guide
roller
guide
Fixing inlet guide
Dry wipe with
lint-free paper.
Secondary Duplex
feed
transfer
roller
internal
roller
Registration
lower roller
(when replacing
the ITB)
Note: Unless otherwise indicated and for guides coming into

contact with paper, use lint-free paper and alcohol.
F-14-2
14-5
Chapter 14
14.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (Printer Unit)
0006-0015
Do not use solvents or oils that are not indicated herein.
T-14-3
Maintenance
intervals
Unit name
Location
every
150,000
Other
Remarks
40,000
Delivery unit
Internal delivery
clean
roller
External delivery
clean
roller
Duplex feed unit
if dirt is
appreciable
if dirt is
appreciable
Duplex roller 1
clean
if dirt is
appreciable
Duplex roller 2
clean
if dirt is
appreciable
Duplex roller 3
clean
if dirt is
appreciable
Duplex roller 4
clean
if dirt is
appreciable
Delivery vertical
path unit
Reversing roller
clean
Face-down delivery
clean
roller 1
Face-down delivery
clean
roller 2
Fixing unit
Fixing inlet guide
clean
if dirt is
appreciable
Fixing inlet roll
clean
if dirt is
appreciable
Delivery upper guide
clean
if dirt is
appreciable
Delivery lower guide
clean
if dirt is
appreciable
14-6
Maintenance
intervals
Unit name
Location
every
150,000
Other
Remarks
clean
if dirt is
40,000
Manual feed
Pre-registration
registration unit
roller
appreciable
Registration upper
clean
roller
appreciable
Registration lower
clean
roller
clean
roller
Drive roller
if dirt is
appreciable
Pickup vertical path
Intermediate
if dirt is
if dirt is
appreciable
clean
or, when replacing
transfer unit
the intermediate
transfer belt
Tension roller
clean
or, when replacing

the intermediate
transfer belt
Secondary transfer
clean
or, when replacing
internal roller
the intermediate
transfer belt
Internal transfer belt
clean
or, when replacing
(inside)
the intermediate
transfer belt
Secondary
Secondary transfer
transfer unit
rear guide
clean
if dirt is
appreciable
Points to Note About Scheduled Servicing

Unless otherwise specifically mentioned, use lint-free paper and alcohol for cleaning.
- If you used solvent for cleaning, be sure that the solvent has completely dried before mounting the part back to the
machine.
- Unless specifically mentioned, do not use a wet (moist) cloth for cleaning.
- See to it that scheduled servicing and replacement are conducted as indicated.
Chapter 14
Scanning lamp
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Reflecting plate
Clean with a blower brush.
No. 1 through No. 3 mirror

Use a blower brush; if dirt
cannot be removed, dry wipe
with lint-free paper.
Copyboard glass
Clean the face/back and white plate.
Scanner rail
Lubricate.
Scanner cable
Inspect.
Lens
Use a blower brush.
Use a blower brush.
Face-down
delivery roller 1
Intermediate
transfer belt
Face-down
delivery roller 2
(ITB; when
replacing it)
Drive roller
Reversing roller
(when replacing
the ITB)
Tension roller
(when replacing
the ITB)
Pre-registration
roller
Reversing roller
Pickup vertical
path roller
External delivery
roller
Internal delivery
roller
Registration
upper roller
Duplex feed roller
Duplex feed
roller
Delivery upper
Secondary Duplex
guide
transfer rear feed
Delivery lower
guide
roller
guide
Fixing inlet guide
Dry wipe with
lint-free paper.
Secondary Duplex
feed
transfer
roller
internal
roller
Registration
lower roller
(when replacing
the ITB)
Note: Unless otherwise indicated and for guides coming into

contact with paper, use lint-free paper and alcohol.
F-14-3
14-8
Chapter 15 Standards and

Adjustments
Contents
Contents
15.1 Image Adjustments ........................................................................................................................................ 15-1
15.1.1 Standards for Image Position ................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.2 Checking the Image Position .................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.3 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Cassette) ........................................................................................... 15-2
15.1.4 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Manual Feed Tray) ........................................................................... 15-3
15.1.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Side Paper Deck) .............................................................................. 15-3
15.1.6 Duplex Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 15-4
15.2 Scanning System ........................................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.1 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp ...................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass .................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.3 After Replacing the CCD Unit ............................................................................................................... 15-5
15.3 Laser Exposure System ................................................................................................................................. 15-6
15.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Unit .............................................................................................................. 15-6
15.4 Image Formation System ............................................................................................................................... 15-7
15.4.1 After Replacing the Drum Unit .............................................................................................................. 15-7
15.4.2 After Replacing the Transfer Unit .......................................................................................................... 15-7
15.4.3 After Replacing the Pattern Reading Unit .............................................................................................. 15-7
15.5 Fixing System ................................................................................................................................................ 15-8
15.5.1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ...................................................................................................... 15-8
15.6 Electrical Components .................................................................................................................................. 15-9
15.6.1 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ......................................................................................... 15-9
15.6.2 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................... 15-9
15.6.3 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) .............................................................................. 15-10
15.6.4 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ................................................................................. 15-10
15.6.5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB ........................................................................................................ 15-10
15.6.6 When Replacing the HDD .................................................................................................................... 15-11
15.6.7 When Replacing the Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................. 15-11
15.7 Pickup/Feeding System ............................................................................................................................... 15-12
15.7.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Pickup Cassette ...................................... 15-12
15.7.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit ........................................... 15-13
Chapter 15
15.1 Image Adjustments
2.01.5mm
(2nd side of double-side copy:
2.01.5mm)
15.1.1 Standards for Image

Position
0000-5345
The standards for the image margin/non-image width
4
5
6
of prints made at 100% are as follows:
2.51.5mm
(2nd side of double-sided
copy: 2.52.0mm)
10
F-15-4
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
F-15-1
15.1.2 Checking the Image

Position
0000-5346
Make 10 prints each using the following as the source

2.01.5mm
(2nd side of double-sided copy:
2.01.5mm)
of paper, and check to see that the image margin and

non-image width are as indicated:
[1] individual cassettes
[2] manual feed tray
[3] side paper deck
4
5
6
[4] duplex unit
1) left/right image margin adjustment (horizontal
If not, perform the following:

registration adjustment)
10
F-15-2
2) leading edge image margin adjustment (registration

adjustment)
3) left-right non-image width adjustment (CCD read
2.51.5mm
copy:2.52.0mm)
start cell position adjustment)

4) leading edge non-image width adjustment (scanner
image leading edge position adjustment)
Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin
1) Make the following selections in service mode, and
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
F-15-3
see that the image margin is as indicated:

COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST.
15-1
Chapter 15
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right front

Decease the
value of REGIST.
(A decrease of 10
2.51.5mm
(2nd side of duplex will increase
copy: 2.52.0mm) the margin by 1 mm.)
Leading edge of paper
cover [2].
Increase the
value of REGIST.
(An increase of 10
will decrease
the margin by 1 mm.)
0 2 456 8 101214161820
F-15-5
Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width
see that the non-image width is as indicated:
F-15-8
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y.
Decrease the
value of ADJ-X.
2.51.5mm
(A decrease of 10
(2nd side of
will decrease
double-sided
the non-image
copy: 2.52.0mm)
width by 1 mm.)
Image leading edge
3) Detach the grip [1] found at the right front.
(If
only the cassette 2.)
Increase the
value of ADJ-X.
(An increase of 10
will increase
the non-image
width by 1 mm.)
0 2 456 8 101214161820
F-15-6
Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width
F-15-9
see that the non-image width is as indicated:

COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X.
Decrease the
value of ADJ-Y.
(A decrease of 10
will decrease
the non-image
width by 1 mm.)
Edge of image
Increase the value of ADJ-Y.
(An increase of 10 will increase
the non-image width by 1 mm.)
4) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the right

front stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the
position of the adjusting plate [2].
2.01.5mm
copy: 2.51.5mm)
0
2
4
5
6
8
10
F-15-7
15.1.3 Adjusting the Left/

Right Margin (Cassette)
0000-5347
1) Slide out the cassette 1/2, and open the pickup

15-2
F-15-10
Chapter 15

Right Margin (Manual
Feed Tray)
0000-5348
Loosen the 2 screws [1], and move the position of the

Moving the adjusting
plate to the right
slide guide [2] to make adjustments.
L2
Image
Decrease the margin at

the front of the paper.
F-15-11
- For output from each cassette, check to make
sure that the margin (L1) along the leading edge
is 2.51.5 mm; if not, make the following
adjustments:
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST.
F-15-13
(A change of '1' will cause a shift of 0.1 mm, and a

higher value will move the image toward the
leading edge.)

Right Margin (Side Paper
L1
Deck)
0000-5349
1) Slide out the compartment, and adjust the position

of the latch plate [1] of the compartment opening
Image
solenoid (SL102) using the 2 screws. (When doing

so, refer to the index [3] on the latch plate.)
Increasing the value of FEED-ADJ will move

the image toward the leading edge of the paper.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-15-12
- Adjusting the Image Area (non-image width)
COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-T/L/B/R.
(An increase by '24'increases the non-image width by
about 1mm, with the range of settings being between
0 and 100.)
(left rear of compartment)
F-15-14
15-3
Chapter 15
15.1.6 Duplex Unit
0000-5350
Loosen the adjusting screw [1] to make adjustments.

(A single graduation in the index will cause a change
of approximately 1 mm.)
- To move the paper to the rear, move it to the left.
- To move the paper to the front, move it to the right.
[1]
right
left
F-15-15
15-4
Chapter 15
15.2 Scanning System

15.2.1 After Replacing the
Scanning Lamp
0000-5354
There is no particular work to perform after replacing

the scanning lamp.

Copyboard Glass
0000-5355
Enter the value indicated on the copyboard glass (F01301-04) using the following service mode items:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X/Y/Z
Use it to enter data for the standard white plate.
820686679349
F-15-16

CCD Unit
0000-5356
When you have replaced the CCD unit, enter the

values (for color displacement correction in sub
scanning direction) indicated on the label attached to
the unit in service mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG/GB
Use it to enter the image position correction value
(dependent on the CCD unit).
15-5
Chapter 15
15.3 Laser Exposure System

Laser Unit
0000-5357
If you have replaced the laser unit, execute the

following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>L-ADJ-0
Use it to execute automatic adjustment of laser
intensity.
15-6
Chapter 15
15.4
Image
System
Formation

Drum Unit
0000-5358

the drum unit.

Transfer Unit
0000-5359

the transfer unit (intermediate transfer unit, secondary
transfer unit).

Pattern Reading Unit
0000-5360

the pattern reading unit.
15-7
Chapter 15
15.5 Fixing System

0.4 mm.
15.5.1 After Disassembling

the Fixing Unit

0000-5361
rear by 0.2 mm.

about 0.3 mm.
F-15-17
c
Paper
movement
Standard:
a
1.5mm
Standard:
8.75mm0.25mm
(less than
b
Center 5000 sheets)
(5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
F-15-18
F-15-19
Service Mode

MEMO:
15-8
measurement.
Chapter 15
15.6 Electrical Components

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CLF-R-GB
15.6.1 When Replacing the
Reader Controller PCB
0000-5362

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-RG
- Set the DIP switch on the reader controller PCB to

the same settings as the initial PCB.

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-GB
J203
J202
J210
IC5
(CPU)
IC16
J201
J206
J205
IC7
IC14
ON
J204 OFF
SW1
1 2J208
J207
IC3

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-RG
F-15-20

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-GB
T-15-1

SW-1
SW-2
AB
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
A/INCH
OFF
ON
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-GB
AB/INCH
ON
ON
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG

- Using the SST, download the latest firmware.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-RG
- Enter the values indicated on the service label in
service mode (refer to the following list).
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-GB
Use it to adjust the scanner leading edge position.
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
Use it to adjust the CCD read start cell position.

COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
Use it to enter an adjustment value for the scanner
shading measurement point.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X

DC Controller PCB
0000-5363
1) After replacing the DC controller PCB, use the
following service mode to initialize the memory of
while plate.
the DC controller PCB:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Y
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON
2) Enter the settings indicated on the service label
white plate.
using the following service mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Z
COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>PVE-OFST
Use it to enter an adjustment value for the laser
while plate.
beam position.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CLF-R-RG
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST
15-9
Chapter 15
Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration

roller clutch goes ON.
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for repickup.
manual feed tray.
F-15-22
manual feed tray.

COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4

Main
manual feed tray.

COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>L-ADJ-0.
5) Press the OK key. (The machine starts auto
Controller
PCB
(sub)
0006-3263
Be sure to use the SRAM PCB [1] from the old PCB
on the new main controller PCB (sub) [2].
adjustment and will indicate 'END' at its end.)

Main
Controller
(main)
PCB
0000-5364
Be sure to use the image memory (SDRAM) [1] PCB

and the boot ROM [2] from the old PCB on the new
main controller PCB (main).
F-15-23

SRAM PCB
0000-5365
When the SRAM PCB is replaced, all data in its

memory will be lost (file-related, user mode-related,
F-15-21
service mode-related, history-related files). There will

be no error operation, and initialization will take place
automatically.
If you pull out the SRAM PCB from machine B and
mount it to machine A, the PCB will be initialized and
be rendered useless for machine A or B. Take full
15-10
Chapter 15
2) Turn off and then on the machine; when the
care.
machine has started up, perform the following in

1) When you turn on the power after replacing the
user mode:
SRAM PCB, the machine will execute automatic
initialization and will indicate a message on its
control settings>group ID control>count control;
panel to the effect that you are to turn off and then
then, check to see that IDs from 00000001 through
on the power switch found on its right side. Follow
00001000 have been prepared.
the message and turn off and then on the machine.
2) Using service mode, initialize the RAM.

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>MN-CON
control
settings>network
settings>TCP/IP
settings>IP address; then, set up 'IP address'

'gateway address' and 'subnet mask'
Before starting the work, be sure to inform the user

that all image data stored in the Box will be lost and
administrator setup; then, fill in 'system control

group ID' and 'system control ID No.' thereafter,
turn off and then on the machine.
obtain his/her consent.
If you leave out 'system control group ID' and

'system control ID No.' the service engineer will not
be able to 'register card to device' as part of setup

HDD
work for NSA.

0000-5366
3) With the machine in standby state, download the

card ID to be used from NSA.
If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Not Used

1) Formatting the HDD
4) When the card data has been downloaded from

NSA, check to see that the ID data has correctly
While holding down the 2 and 8 keys on the control

panel, turn on the power to start up. Using the HD
been downloaded on the screen brought up by

making the following selections:
formatting function of the SST, format all
user mode>system control settings>group ID control
partitions.
(Only the downloaded ID data must be indicated.)
2) Downloading the Software
5) Make copies using a user card registered with NSA,
Using the SST, download the various software
and check to see that statistical operations are made
(system, language, RUI). The machine will take
for the device in question.
about 10 min to start up after downloading.

If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Used Together
with a Card Reader
The card ID used by the NSA resides on the HDD. If

Power Supply PCB
0000-5367
you have replaced the HDD, therefore, you will have

to newly download the card data from NSA to enable
the statistical operations of NSA. After going through

the power supply PCB.
steps 1) and 2) above, perform the following:

1) Set the following in service mode:
Make
the
following
selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD; then,
enter the number of the first card, and press [OK].
(For instance, if cards No. 1 through No. 1000 are
used for group control, enter '1')
15-11
Chapter 15
15.7 Pickup/Feeding System

15.7.1
Adjusting
Horizontal
When
the
Registration
Replacing
the
Pickup Cassette
0000-5368
Make a test copy of the A3 Test Chart, and check to

F-15-25
be sure that the margin on the front side of the image

is correct (L2 = 2.0 1.5 mm); otherwise, go through
the following steps to make adjustments, starting with
the 1st side and then the 2nd side:
Adjusting the Horizontal Registration on the 1st Side
1) Slide out the manual feed unit and the cassette 1/2;
then, open the pickup vertical path cover.
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the front right

plate to the right
cover [2].
L2
Image
will decrease the margin on

the front side of the paper.
F-15-26
- Adjusting the Cassette 2 Side
F-15-24
3) Remove the grip [1] from the front right.
- Adjusting the Cassette 1 Side

3) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the front
right stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the
F-15-27
4) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the front
right stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the
15-12
Chapter 15
F-15-28

plate to the right
L2
Image
will decrease the margin on

the front side of the paper.
F-15-29
Adjusting the Horizontal Registration on the 2nd Side
Use the following service mode to make adjustments:
15.7.2
Adjusting
Horizontal
When
Registration
Replacing
Duplex Unit
the
the
0000-5370
After replacing the horizontal registration motor,

horizontal registration sensor, duplex unit, and fixing
delivery unit, follow the adjustment showing below.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED>ADJ>ADJ-REFE
15-13
Chapter 15
15-14
Chapter 16 Correcting
Faulty Images
Contents
Contents
16.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.1 Site Environment .................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.2 Checking the Paper ................................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ........................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.4 Checking the Durables ........................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts .............................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks ............................................................................................ 16-1
16.1.7 Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.2 Test Print ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.2 Test Print TYPE ..................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.3 Selecting a Test Print TYPE ................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.4 Gradations (TYPE=4) ............................................................................................................................. 16-5
16.2.5 Full Halftone (TYPE=5) ......................................................................................................................... 16-5
16.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) ....................................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripe (TYPE=10) .................................................................................................. 16-7
16.2.8 Gradations (TYPE=12) ........................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.2.9 Full Color 16 Gradations (TYPE=14) .................................................................................................... 16-8
16.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 16-9
16.3.1 Symptoms ............................................................................................................................................... 16-9
16.3.1.1 Image Fault Case Studies (A4) ........................................................................................................ 16-9
16.3.1.2 Image Fault Case Samples (A3) .................................................................................................... 16-14
16.3.2 Image Faults .......................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.1 Blank Image ................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.2 Solid Image .................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.3 Light Image / Weak Density .......................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.4 Foggy Image .................................................................................................................................. 16-24
16.3.2.5 Uneven Density ............................................................................................................................. 16-35
16.3.2.6 Out of Focus .................................................................................................................................. 16-40
16.3.2.7 Partially Blank/Streaked ................................................................................................................ 16-43
16.3.2.8 Smudged/Streaked ......................................................................................................................... 16-54
16.3.2.9 Ghost / Memory ............................................................................................................................. 16-60
16.3.2.10 Poor Finxing ................................................................................................................................ 16-62
16.3.2.11 Faulty Color Reproduction .......................................................................................................... 16-64
16.3.2.12 Stretching/Shrinking .................................................................................................................... 16-65
16.3.3 Faulty Feeding ...................................................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.1 Double-Feed/ Multiple Feed .......................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.2 Skew Feed ..................................................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.3 Wrinkle .......................................................................................................................................... 16-67
16.3.3.4 Ripple/Curl .................................................................................................................................... 16-67
16.3.3.5 Wrap .............................................................................................................................................. 16-68
16.3.4 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................... 16-68
16.3.4.1 No Power ....................................................................................................................................... 16-68
16.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related ................................................................................................................... 16-70
16.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction ..................................................................................................................... 16-72
16.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection ....................................................................................................... 16-72
16.3.4.5 Noise .............................................................................................................................................. 16-77
16.3.4.6 User Warning Message .................................................................................................................. 16-78
16.3.4.7 Other Defect .................................................................................................................................. 16-83
Contents
16.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment ............................................................................................................ 16-88

16.3.5 Printing/scanning ................................................................................................................................... 16-88
16.3.5.1 No Output ...................................................................................................................................... 16-88
16.3.5.2 Installation Failure ......................................................................................................................... 16-91
16.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result .................................................................................................... 16-92
16.3.6 Network ............................................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure ........................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.6.2 Connection Problem .................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related ................................................................................................................... 16-108
16.3.7.1 Transmission Problem ................................................................................................................. 16-108
16.3.7.2 Reception Problem ....................................................................................................................... 16-115
16.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect ............................................................................................................. 16-116
16.3.8 Jam (Main Unit) .................................................................................................................................. 16-116
16.3.8.1 Paper not picked up: although the paper sensor detects paper inside the cassette ....................... 16-116
16.3.8.2 0102 Jam Code ............................................................................................................................. 16-117
16.3.8.3 0105 Jam Code: Occurs with machine having mylar sheet to fixing/feeder sensor flag ............. 16-117
16.3.8.4 JAM CODE 0107 ......................................................................................................................... 16-117
16.3.8.5 JAM CODE 0108, 0207 ............................................................................................................... 16-118
16.3.8.6 JAM CODE 0207 ......................................................................................................................... 16-118
16.3.8.7 0207 Jam Code: Because of deformation of internal delivery roller ........................................... 16-118
16.3.8.8 0A06 Jam Code ............................................................................................................................ 16-119
16.3.8.9 JAM CODE 0A0A: At about 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a duplexing
driver PCB failure .................................................................................................................................. 16-119
16.3.8.10 JAM CODE 0B00/0105 ............................................................................................................. 16-120
16.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder) ...................................................................................................................... 16-120
16.3.9.1 JAM CODE 008C: frequent occurrence recorded in jam history under service mode,
although unable to reproduce during paper feeding test. ....................................................................... 16-120
16.3.10 Error Code ......................................................................................................................................... 16-121
16.3.10.1 E000 Error code detail The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on
is inadequate. ........................................................................................................................................ 16-121
16.3.10.2 E001 Error code detail The fixing unit is overheating. ............................................................ 16-121
16.3.10.3 E002 Error code detail The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate. .................... 16-122
16.3.10.4 E003 Error code detai The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby. ... 16-123
16.3.10.5 E004 Error code detail The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty. ............................... 16-123
16.3.10.6 E004-0003 Error code Or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.': after
implementing countermeasure against malfunction of fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor .............. 16-124
16.3.10.7 E004-0005 Error Code: Because of faulty DC Controller PCB ................................................ 16-124
16.3.10.8 E004-0007 Error Code: Occasionally occurs first in the morning ............................................ 16-125
16.3.10.9 E004-0006/E004-0007 Error Code Descriptions ....................................................................... 16-125
16.3.10.10 E012 Error code detail The drum ITB motor is faulty. .......................................................... 16-126
16.3.10.11 E012-0001 Error code ITB motor not rotating ....................................................................... 16-126
16.3.10.12 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a drum
ITB motor failure .................................................................................................................................. 16-126
microswitch PCB failure ....................................................................................................................... 16-127
16.3.10.14 E012-0001 Error Code: Drum ITB Motor, DC Power Supply PCB and Fuse PCB
work normally ........................................................................................................................................ 16-128
16.3.10.15 E012-0001 Error Code: Because Drum ITB Motor is faulty, or Fuse PCB is faulty .............. 16-128
16.3.10.16 E020-0134 Error code Recurring even after replacement of yellow drum unit ..................... 16-129
16.3.10.17 E020 Error code detail There is a fault associated with the drum/developer. ........................ 16-129
16.3.10.18 E020-xx81: generally E020-0181 Error Code ......................................................................... 16-131
16.3.10.19 E020-0081 Error code Displaying when a copy is made with the service case removed ..... 16-132
16.3.10.20 E020-0X34, E020-0X21 Error code Upon installation in a cold season ................................ 16-132
16.3.10.21 E020-04B0 Error code At about 200 to 300 sheets from installation, toner container
Contents
motor (Bk) not rotating (Refer to SymptomExplanation.) .................................................................... 16-132

16.3.10.22 E020-04B0 Cautions in replacing the drum unit ..................................................................... 16-133
16.3.10.23 E020-0X81 Error Code Displaying because of an open/close failure of the SALT
sensor shutter ......................................................................................................................................... 16-134
16.3.10.24 E020-0124 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-134
16.3.10.25 E020-OXB0 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-135
16.3.10.26 E020-xx24 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-135
16.3.10.27 E020-xxA0 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.28 E020-xxD0 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.29 E020-xx34 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.30 E020-0125 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-137
16.3.10.31 E020-03B0 Error Code: Overall fogging (no margin) occurred after replacement of Cyan
drum unit ............................................................................................................................................... 16-137
16.3.10.32 E032 Error code detail The counter of the NE controller fails to operate. ............................ 16-137
16.3.10.33 E110 Error code detail The operation of the laser scanner motor is faulty. ........................... 16-137
16.3.10.34 E110-0x10 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-138
16.3.10.35 E202 Error code detail A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position. .. 16-139
16.3.10.36 E202-0000 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-139
16.3.10.37 E220 Error code detail A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp. ..................... 16-140
16.3.10.38 E220-0000 Error Code: Entire image sometimes becomes tinged with red ........................... 16-140
16.3.10.39 E220-0000 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-141
16.3.10.40 E220-0000 Error code Faulty connection in the flat cable from the CCD unit into
R-CON J205 causes. ............................................................................................................................. 16-141
16.3.10.41 E220-0000 Error Code: Scanning lamp did not light up after turning power ON .................. 16-142
16.3.10.42 E220-0000 Error Code when turning power ON while opening platen cover ........................ 16-142
16.3.10.43 E220-0000 Error Code: No problem with CCD unit and Reader Controller PCB ................. 16-142
16.3.10.44 E220-0000 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, because of poor contact of
J204 on Reader Controller PCB, iRC3220 ............................................................................................ 16-143
16.3.10.45 E240 Error code detail The communication between the main motor controller and
the DC controller is faulty. ................................................................................................................... 16-143
16.3.10.46 E243 Error code detail The control panel is faulty. ................................................................ 16-143
16.3.10.47 E302 Error code detail A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction. .................... 16-144
16.3.10.48 E315 Error code detail The image data is faulty. ................................................................... 16-144
16.3.10.49 E315-0010 Error code Only for FAX is transmitted .............................................................. 16-144
16.3.10.50 E351 Error code detail The ECO-ID PCB is faulty. .............................................................. 16-145
16.3.10.51 E351-0000 Error Code: Because of poor connection of connector on ECO-ID PCB ............. 16-145
16.3.10.52 E402 Error code detail There is a fault in the feeder motor. .................................................. 16-145
16.3.10.53 E402 Error Code ...................................................................................................................... 16-146
16.3.10.54 E404 Error code detail There is a fault in the delivery motor. ............................................... 16-146
16.3.10.55 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-N1) .............. 16-146
16.3.10.56 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-M1) ............... 16-147
16.3.10.57 E503 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle communication. ........................................ 16-147
16.3.10.58 E504 Error code detail There is a fault in stack size detection. ............................................. 16-148
16.3.10.59 E505 Error code detail There is a fault in the backup RAM. ................................................. 16-148
16.3.10.60 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-N1) ........................................ 16-149
16.3.10.61 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-M1) ....................................... 16-149
16.3.10.62 E514 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction) ................ 16-150
16.3.10.63 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in alignment.(Finisher-N1) ...................................... 16-150
16.3.10.64 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in rear alignment. (Finisher-M1) .............................. 16-151
16.3.10.65 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-M1) ........................................ 16-151
16.3.10.66 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) ........................................ 16-152
16.3.10.67 E532 Error code detail There is a fault in the shift of the stapler ........................................... 16-152
16.3.10.68 E535 Error code detail There is a fault in the swing mechanism. ......................................... 16-153
16.3.10.69 E537 Error code detail There is a fault in front alignment. .................................................... 16-153
Contents
16.3.10.70 E540 Error code detail There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. .............................. 16-154
16.3.10.71 E577 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction). .... 16-154
16.3.10.72 E580 Error code detail There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray. .......................... 16-155
16.3.10.73 E584 Error code detail There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2). ......................................... 16-155
16.3.10.74 E5F0 Error code detail There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle. .......................... 16-156
16.3.10.75 E5F1 Error code detail There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. ............................... 16-156
16.3.10.76 E5F2 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle guide. ................................................... 16-157
16.3.10.77 E5F3 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle alignment. ................................................ 16-157
16.3.10.78 E5F4 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. ................................... 16-158
16.3.10.79 E5F5 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front. ................................. 16-158
16.3.10.80 E5F6 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate. ......... 16-159
16.3.10.81 E5F8 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle connector. ........................................... 16-160
16.3.10.82 E5F9 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle switch. ................................................ 16-160
16.3.10.83 E601-0xdd: after performing [COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT-Y/M/C/K] to improve
faint image ............................................................................................................................................. 16-161
16.3.10.84 E602-0001/E602-0002/E602-0003 Error Code: Remedy upon occurrence of error code ...... 16-162
16.3.10.86 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a failure of the
Distribution Board PCB Ass'y .............................................................................................................. 16-165
16.3.10.87 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a connection
failure of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller ............................................... 16-165
16.3.10.88 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after performing HD-CHECK ......................................... 16-166
16.3.10.89 E602-0202 Error Code: Because of faulty SRAM Board PCB ............................................... 16-166
16.3.10.90 Progress bar on machine starting-up window is slower than usual, then E602 Error
Code is displayed ................................................................................................................................... 16-166
16.3.10.91 E602-0402 Error Code: not recovered after replacement of main controller PCB ................. 16-166
16.3.10.92 E602-0x02 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-167
16.3.10.93 E602-0001 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-167
16.3.10.94 E602-0402 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, iRC3220 .......................................... 16-167
16.3.10.95 E604 Error code detail There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM). ............................ 16-167
16.3.10.96 E604-0000 Error Code: Because of faulty expansion RAM ................................................... 16-168
16.3.10.97 E605 Error code detail The battery for image memory is faulty. ........................................... 16-168
16.3.10.99 E674 Error code detail The fax board is faulty. ..................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.100 E677-0002 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.101 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication.(DADF-K1) ...................... 16-170
16.3.10.102 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication. ........................................... 16-170
16.3.10.103 E712 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the ADF
and the reader unit. ................................................................................................................................ 16-171
16.3.10.104 E713 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the finisher
and the cassette pedestal. ....................................................................................................................... 16-171
16.3.10.105 E716 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the cassette
pedestal and the printer unit. .................................................................................................................. 16-172
16.3.10.106 E716-0000 Error code Recorded only in the error history ................................................... 16-172
16.3.10.107 E717 Error code detail The communication with the NE controller is faulty. ..................... 16-172
16.3.10.108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty. ............................................................... 16-173
16.3.10.109 E719-0011 Error code After the cable is disconnected because of a scanning fault
in card reader D1 .................................................................................................................................... 16-173
16.3.10.110 E719-0001 Error code When the coin vendor is disconnected, unable to be cleared ........... 16-174
16.3.10.111 E731 Error code detail There is a fault in the UFR board. .................................................. 16-174
16.3.10.112 E732 Error code detail There is a reader communication error. ........................................... 16-174
16.3.10.113 E732-9999 Error Code: Recorded in error log after performing service mode
COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON ............................................................................................ 16-175
16.3.10.114 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps displaying for about
Contents
2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results (DC power supply
unit PCB J158 output failure) ............................................................................................................... 16-175
16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting up. Please wait"
changes to error code indication ............................................................................................................ 16-176
about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results ............................. 16-177
16.3.10.117 E733 Error code detail There is a printer communication error. ......................................... 16-177
16.3.10.118 E733-0001 Error code Printer communication error ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.119 E740 Error code detail The Ethernet board is faulty. ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.120 E744 Error code detail The language file is faulty. ............................................................. 16-178
16.3.10.121 E745 Error code detail The TokenRing board is faulty. ..................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.122 E747-8702 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.123 E747 Error code detail The image processing ASIC or the memory control/
communication ASIC is faulty. ............................................................................................................. 16-179
16.3.10.124 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation ......................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.126 E747-00FF Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.127 E751-0304 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-181
16.3.10.128 E804 Error code detail The power supply cooling fan is faulty. .......................................... 16-181
16.3.10.129 E804-0004 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-181
16.3.10.130 E804-0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan (FM7) which is
fixed on the controller box ................................................................................................................... 16-182
16.3.10.131 E804-0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code .................................................................... 16-182
16.3.10.132 E805 Error code detail The cleaner fan is faulty. ................................................................ 16-182
16.3.10.133 E805 Error code detail The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty. .......................................... 16-183
16.3.11 FAX # Code ...................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.11.1 037 ......................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.12 FAX ## Code .................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.12.1 ##111, ##228 FAX Error Code ................................................................................................. 16-183
16.3.12.2 ##281/##104 FAX Error Code .................................................................................................. 16-184
16.3.12.3 ##796 FAX Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-184
16.4 Outline of Electrical Components ............................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid ................................................................................................................................... 16-185
16.4.1.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.1.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.2 Motor ................................................................................................................................................... 16-186
16.4.2.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-186
16.4.2.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-186
16.4.3 Fan ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-188
16.4.3.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-188
16.4.3.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-188
16.4.4 Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 16-189
16.4.4.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-189
16.4.4.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-190
16.4.5 Switch ................................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.5.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.5.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ................................................................................................................ 16-194
16.4.6.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-194
16.4.6.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-194
16.4.7 PCBs ................................................................................................................................................... 16-195
16.4.7.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-195
16.4.7.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-196
16.4.8 Plane Pedistal ...................................................................................................................................... 16-198
Contents
16.4.8.1 Plain Pedestal-C1 ......................................................................................................................... 16-198

16.4.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ............................ 16-199
16.4.9.1 Adjusting the Variable Resistors (VR), the Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and the Check
Pins by PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 16-199
16.4.9.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................... 16-200
16.4.9.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) .......................................................................................................... 16-201
16.4.9.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................ 16-201
16.4.9.5 Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................................ 16-202
16.4.9.6 Differential PCB .......................................................................................................................... 16-202
Chapter 16
16.1 Making lnitial Checks

16.1.1 Site Environment
0006-5663
Be sure of the following:

a. The voltage of the power supply is as rated (10%). The power plug remains connected throughout day and night.
b. The site is not a high temperature/humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier), and it is
not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fire or dust.
c. The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
d. The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)
e. The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine level.
f. The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.
16.1.2 Checking the Paper
0006-5664
a. The paper is of a recommended type.

b. The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
16.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper
0006-5665
a. Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specific level.
b. If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray.
16.1.4 Checking the Durables
0006-5666
Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.
16.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts
0006-5667
Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table, and replace any part that has reached
the time of replacement.
16.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks
0006-5668
[Reader Unit]
- Check the optical system (mirror, while plate, copyboard glass, reflecting plate) for damage and foreign matter.
- Check the mirror base to see that it moves smoothly and its rail is free of dirt.
- Check the scanning lamp to see it is free of flickering.
- Check the scanner cable to see that it is correctly routed.
- Check the scanner to see that it is free of condensation.
[Process System]
- Check to see that the toner container contains toner.
- Check to see that the drum unit is properly fitted.
- Check the photosensitive drum to see that it is free of damage and dirt.
16-1
Chapter 16
- Check the window of the SALT sensor to see if it is free of dirt.

[Transfer System]
- Check the secondary transfer unit to see that it is free of foreign matter.
- Check the ITB/secondary transfer external roller for wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the blade of the ITB cleaning unit for tear, peeling, deformation, and stray toner.
[Fixing System]
- Check the fixing roller/pressure roller for wear, tear, and deformation.
- Check the fixing heater (main/sub) to see that it operates when power is turned on.
- Check the fixing thermistor to see that it is free of an open circuit.
- Check the thermal switch to see that there is electrical continuity.
[Paper Feeding System]
- Check to see if there is residual paper or other foreign matter.
- Check to see if there is a buildup of paper lint on the pickup, feeding, and separation rollers. Check the rollers for
wear, tear, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the pre-registration roller, registration roller (upper/lower), and paper path roller for wear, tear, and dirt, and
deformation.
- Check the feeding guide for wear, tear, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the paper for a bent leading edge, curling, waving, and absorption of moisture.
- Check the paper and/or transparency to see if it is a recommended type. If not, try a recommended type to see if the
symptom in question still occurs.
[Mechanical System]
- Check to see if the load of the drive system is excessive.
- Check the gears for wear and tear (chipping).
[Cassettes]
- Check to see if the cassettes are properly fitted. Check to see if the paper size is correctly set. Try replacing with a
normal cassette to see if the symptom in question still occurs.
- Check to see that the holding plate of the cassette moves smoothly and that it is free of deformation.
- Check to see that the side guide plate and the rear guide plate of the cassette are fitted correctly.
- Check to see if the switch of the cassette heater is turned on (if the machine is equipped with a cassette heater).
[Service Mode]
- Check to see if the various CCD adjustment values are as indicated on the service label.
(COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>all items)
- Check to see if the machine executes registration adjustment.
(COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST/ADJ-REFE)
- Check to see if the machine correctly detects the internal temperature/humidity.
(COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG>TEMP/ABS-HUM)
- Check to see if the image read position is correctly adjusted.
(COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X/ADJ-Y/ADJ-Z)
- Check to see if the paper reference value data is correct.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>CST-ADJ)
- Check to see that the value of ADJUST/OPTION is as indicated on the service label.
- Check to see if 'error clear' has been initialized.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)
[General]
16-2
Chapter 16
- Is the power plug properly connected?

- Is the rated AC voltage present at the power outlet?
- Are the sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids operating normally? Are the connectors free of poor contact?
(Be sure to check the routes of power and signals by referring to the general circuit diagram.)
- Has the leakage breaker or the circuit breaker gone ON?
- Is there biting of a wire or a loose screw?
- Are all eternal covers attached properly?
- Are the main power switch and the control panel power switch ON?
- Are the power cable and the signal cable to all accessories routed correctly?
- Does the cover switch operate normally?
- Is the fuse on each PCB blown?
- Is the user aware of the correct use of the machine?
16.1.7 Others
0006-5670
If a machine is brought from a cold to warm place, condensation can occur inside it, leading to various problems:
a. condensation on the BD sensor can cause problems associated with E110.
b. condensation on the LDE lens can cause image in sub scanning direction to be too light.
c. condensation on the mirror of the reader unit or on the copyboard glass can cause images to be too light.
d. condensation on the pickup or feeder guide can cause paper feeding faults.
If any of the foregoing (a through c) occurs, use the following service mode to correct it
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>DRY-RT
Use it to eliminate condensation at time of installation work.
If d has occurred, dry wipe the pickup and feeder units.
Moreover, the toner container and the drum unit can also develop condensation if it is brought in from a cold to warm
place (unpacked). To prevent condensation, advise the user to leave them alone for 1 to 2 hours before unpacking
them at the site.
As necessary after installation, use the following service mode
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLPOFF01 to SLPOFF12
Use it to disable sleep mode.
16-3
Chapter 16
16.2 Test Print

16.2.1 Outline
0006-5673
The machine offers 6 types of test prints (TYPE), enabling identification of a fault in images with reference to test
prints.
If a fault appearing on a normal print does not show on a test print, the cause may be assumed to be on the PDL input
side or the reader unit side.
16.2.2 Test Print TYPE
0006-5686
T-16-1
TYPE NO.
Description
normal copy/print
1 to 3
- (for R&D)
16 gradations
full halftone
grid
7 to 9
- (for R&D)
10
MCYBk horizontal stripe (sub scanning direction)
11
- (for R&D)
12
64 gradations
13
- (for R&D)
14
full color 16 gradations
15 to 100
- (for R&D)
16.2.3 Selecting a Test Print TYPE

1) Set the print count and paper size.
2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>FG.
3) Make the following selections: COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE.
4) Using the keypad, enter the desired TYPE No., and press the OK key.
5) Using 'COLOR-Y/M/C/K', select the desired color (output at '1').
6) Using 'DENS-Y/M/C/K', set the desired density. (valid only for TYPE=5)
7) Press the Start key.
16-4
0006-5694
Chapter 16
16.2.4 Gradations (TYPE=4)
0006-5696
Use this test print to check gradation, fogging, white lines, or uneven density at the front/rear.
a. Gradation
If the reproduction of 16 gradations is not as expected, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure system.
b. Fogging
If fogging is limited to the white area of the following illustration, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser
exposure unit.
c. Vertical White Lines/Black Lines
If a white line is found in the image, suspect a fault in the developing system.
d. Uneven Density at the Front/Rear
If uneven density is found at the front/rear, suspect a fault in the drum unit, laser exposure system, or transfer unit.
16 gradations
F-16-1
16.2.5 Full Halftone (TYPE=5)
0006-5698
Use this test print to check transfer failure, black lines, white lines, or irregular intervals.
MEMO:
1. You can select a specific color to develop in user mode using 'COLORY/M/C/K' in service mode
(COPIER>TEST>PG).
2. If you want to change the density of the test print, use the following in service mode: TEST>PG>DENS-Y/M/C/K.
a. Transfer Failure
If transfer failure occurs, suspect a fault in the transfer (intermediate/secondary) unit.
b. Uneven Density in Horizontal Direction
If uneven density occurs in horizontal direction, suspect a fault in the photosensitive drum drive unit, drum ITB
motor, or drum unit.
c. Uneven Density in Vertical Direction
If uneven density occurs in horizontal direction, suspect dirt on the LDE lens, a fault in the drum unit, or
deterioration of the intermediate transfer belt.
16-5
Chapter 16
COLOR-M=1, COLOR-Y/C/K=0
F-16-2
16.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6)
0006-5700
Use this test print to check color displacement, right angle, or straight line.
a. Color Displacement
If color displacement occurs, suspect a fault in any of the laser exposure system, transfer (intermediate/secondary)
unit, or photosensitive drum drive unit.
b. Right Angle, Straight Line
If right angles or straight lines are faulty, suspect a fault in the laser exposure system, registration
(upper/lower) roller, or secondary external roller (i.e., the shape of the rollers).
F-16-3
16-6
Chapter 16
16.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripe (TYPE=10)
0006-5702
Use this test print to check the density of dark areas of individual colors, balance among colors, and white lines in
relation to development.
a. Solid Density of Colors and Balance Among Colors
- The density must not be appreciably low (light).
- If the density of a specific color is too low, suspect a fault in the developer, primary transfer roller, laser exposure
system, or high-voltage system used for that color.
b. White/Black Lines
If a white/black line occurs for a specific color, suspect a fault in the drum unit used for that color or dirt in the laser
optical path.
c. Uneven Density at the Front/Rear
If uneven density occurs for a specific color, suspect a fault in the drum unit, laser exposure system, or transfer
(intermediate/secondary) unit.
If uneven density occurs for all colors, suspect deterioration of the intermediate transfer unit.
2.51.5 mm
2.01.5 mm
F-16-4
16-7
Chapter 16
16.2.8 Gradations (TYPE=12)
0006-5704
Use this test print to check the reproduction of gradation for all colors (YMCBk) at once.
F-16-5
16.2.9 Full Color 16 Gradations (TYPE=14)
0006-5705
Use this test print to check gray balance, the reproduction of gradation for individual colors (YMCBk), or fogging.
a. Gray Balance
Check to see if each color is reproduced at an even level of density in the gray scale area.
b. Gradation
Check the reproduction of gradation of individual colors (YMCBk) and for the difference, if any, in density.
c. Fogging
If fogging occurs in the white area, suspect a fault in the developing system or the photosensitive drum, or improper
adjustment of the laser exposure system.
Light area
White area
White area
F-16-6
16-8
Chapter 16
16.3 Troubleshooting
16.3.1 Symptoms
16.3.1.1 Image Fault Case Studies (A4)
0000-5378
The following is a collection of faulty images that can occur on A4 or larger paper; they have been artificially created,
and may slightly differ from actual faulty copies.
A. Image Fault Case Samples
1. Light Image in Middle
F-16-7
2. Toner Collection Along Image End
F-16-8
16-9
Chapter 16
3. Uneven Density at 44-mm Intervals
F-16-9
4. Uneven Density at Angle at 12-mm Intervals
F-16-10
5. Uneven Density in vertical direction
F-16-11
16-10
Chapter 16
6. Mottled Image
F-16-12
7. Flow image on Side
F-16-13
8. Toner Stray
F-16-14
16-11
Chapter 16
9. 47-mm Horizontal Line
F-16-15
10. 100-mm Horizontal Line
F-16-16
11. White Spot Along Trailing Edge
F-16-17
16-12
Chapter 16
12. Vertical Lines (Charging Roller)
F-16-18
13. Trace of Delivery Clip
F-16-19
14. Trace of Pickup Roller Along Leading Edge
F-16-20
16-13
Chapter 16
15. Trace of Pickup Roller
F-16-21
16.3.1.2 Image Fault Case Samples (A3)
0000-5379
The following is a collection of faulty images that can occur on A3 or larger paper; they have been artificially created,
and may slightly differ from actual faulty copies.
1. White Spot on Edge
F-16-22
16-14
Chapter 16
2. 20 to 30-mm White Spot
F-16-23
3. White Spots Leading Edge
F-16-24
16-15
Chapter 16
4. Fine White Spot Near 30 mm of Trailing Edge
F-16-25
5. Line Along Trailing Edge
F-16-26
16-16
Chapter 16
6. Poor Parallel Reproduction Along Trailing Edge
F-16-27
7. Rub off Along Trailing Edge
F-16-28
16-17
Chapter 16
16.3.2 Image Faults

16.3.2.1 Blank Image
16.3.2.1.1 Blank page is output when printing scanned image
0004-0707
[ Case in the field ]

Field Remedy
Launch the file in question with 'Imaging' (selectable software by right-clicking) and print it. If the result is OK,
the application software is likely to be a cause, so check its settings.
16.3.2.2 Solid Image

16.3.2.2.1 Solid black image on prints and FAX RX documents
0005-6110

< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and reinsert
the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG6-2854
16.3.2.3 Light Image / Weak Density

16.3.2.3.1 Density is light on paper corresponding to machine rear side: Occurs concurrently with
diagonal uneven density of 12mm intervals when continuously outputting high image duty
original
0002-3362
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
This symptom occurs because toner replenishment cannot keep pace with toner consumption.
Field Remedy
In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> SLV-UP], select "1" or "2".
Note: The drum life will be shortened as a negative effect of "1". In addition to this, the print productivity will
decrease as a negative effect of "2".
16.3.2.3.2 Density fluctuation: appreciable after outputting images of a high color ratio continuously
0002-3372
Cause
The balance in toner inside the developing assembly fails; when the image stabilization mechanism goes ON in
this condition, the machine tends to base its contrast potential on the existing condition. When the balance
between the toner and the carrier inside the developing assembly returns, the density fluctuates in relation to the
selected contrast potential.
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction>full correction
16-18
Chapter 16
16.3.2.3.3 Uneven density of 12mm intervals in diagonal direction/Density at the rear is light: when
continuously generating an image with a high color ratio
0002-3391
Symptom
When an image with a high color ratio is generated continuously, the density at the rear tends to become too
low (light). It tends to occur simultaneously with uneven density in diagonal direction at intervals of 12 mm.
Cause
The amount of toner supplied cannot keep up with the amount of toner being consumed.
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLV-UP.adverse effect of setting it
to'1' the life of the drum unit will decrease.
adverse effect of setting it to '2' the life of the drum unit will decrease, and the print productivity will also
decrease.
16.3.2.3.4 Uneven gloss of 155mm width along the leading edge of the 1st print: when attempting to
print an image with a high color ratio on thick paper (209g or more and coated paper)
0002-3398
Symptom
Uneven gloss (about 155 mm) occurs along the leading edge of the 1st print when an image with a high color
ratio is printed on thick paper (209 g or more and coated paper).
Cause
There is an appreciable difference in temperature between the 1st rotation of the fixing roller and its 2nd and
subsequent rotations (with a peripheral length of 155 mm).
Field Remedy
If prints are made continuously, the fault does not occur on the 2nd and subsequent prints.If prints are made
continuously, the fault does not occur on the 2nd and subsequent prints.
16.3.2.3.5 Flow image along the edges of the sheet: after the machine has been left alone in a high
humidity environment for a long time (e.g., 2 days)
0002-3411
Symptom
If the machine has been left alone in a high humidity environment for a long time (e.g., 2 days), flow image can
occur along the edges of the sheet.
Cause
The chemical elements on the surface of the photosensitive drum absorbs moisture from the atmosphere, thus
decreasing the resistance on the surface of the drum.
16-19
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater (to keep the inside of the machine warm).
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>internal cleaning.
The symptom may disappear when several prints have been made on A3 paper.
16.3.2.3.6 Traces of delivery roller on thick paper (particularly, coated paper): When making copy
of high image duty original
0002-3503
[ Manual-related ]
Description
If thick paper (particularly, coated paper) is used on machines manufactured in the early stage of production (old
type of the delivery vertical path ass'y is installed), there might occur a difference in gloss between the area where
the delivery rollers come in contact and the other area, when the paper passes through the rollers, depending on
the paper in use and the toner duty of the original document.
Field Remedy
1. Replace the three parts listed below with a new one respectively.
2. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> CTM-MARK], change the set value to "1".
Note: As a result of the setting change above, the paper delivery speed when the delivery vertical path ass'y is used
will be changed and thus the productivity might be affected. Therefore, be sure not to change it if the machine
operates normally.
FG6-9654 Delivery Vertical Path Ass'y
FG6-9655 Vertical Path Panel Ass'y
VS1-6318-003 Snap Tight Connector
16.3.2.3.7 Traces of pickup roller in Bk solid image printed on paper with a high moisture content
0002-3506
Symptom
Traces of the pickup roller occur in Bk solid images printed on moist paper.
Cause
The moisture content of the area coming into contact with the pickup roller is low, showing a resistance higher
than the areas with a higher moisture content.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater and/or cassette internal sheet.
16.3.2.3.8 Uneven density of 12mm intervals in diagonal direction/Density at the rear is light: when
0002-4598
Symptom
When an image with a high color ratio is generated continuously, the density at the rear tends to become too
low (light) and, thereafter, the overall density tends to decrease.
Cause
The amount of toner supplied cannot keep up with the amount of toner being consumed.
16-20
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLV-UP.adverse effect of setting it
to '1' the life of the drum unit will decrease.
decrease.
16.3.2.3.9 Light image at the rear side: 1cm from the edge of paper, when making a copy with A4 or
A3
0002-4782
Symptom
Light image at the rear side: 1cm from the edge of paper, when making a copy with A4 or A3
Description
This symptom occurs only on copied images, not on the test print or printed images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the CCD unit was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Make a reduction copy, and if the portion of light image moves together with the image, replace the CCD unit
with a new one.
16-21
Chapter 16
F-16-29
16.3.2.3.10 Light image: appearing all over the page
0002-8528
Symptom
Light image: appearing all over the page
Cause
As a result of inspection, reinstallation of the secondary transfer external roller solved the symptom.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the secondary transfer external roller is not installed properly, thus reinstall it again.
16-22
Chapter 16
F-16-30
16.3.2.3.11 Fine lines are not printed sharply when printing via UFR
0004-2919

Field Remedy
On the window of UFR printer properties, press 'Quality' tab and select 'Designs (CAD)' that appears under
'Objective'.
16.3.2.3.12 When executing UFR printing in monochrome, density of color area of original is too
light
0005-1894

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the setting changes on the printer driver improved the symptom.
Follow the steps below:
Click [Quality] tab> select [Designs (CAD)] under [Objective]> click [Details]> select [Pattern 1] under
[Halftones].
16-23
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4 Foggy Image

16.3.2.4.1 Ground color of cut-and-paste newspaper transferred to the copied image
0002-3252
Symptom
When you use a cut-and-paste newspaper as an original, the ground color of the newspaper remains on the
printed document.
Description
When you put newspaper on the whole copy board glass for an original, the ground color of the newspaper can
be suppressed with the AE Function.
Cause
The AE measurement fails, because the cut-and-paste newspaper is located outside of the AE measurement
coverage.
Spot Disposal
Expalin to the users that they should select 'Application Mode>Image adjustment> Ground Color Suppression'
to make a copy in using a cut-and-paste newspaper as an original.
16.3.2.4.2 Fogging on the entire Magenta image: as if it were combed with a brush
0002-3322
Symptom
Image appears to have been given a magenta wash.
Cause
The earth plate of the magenta drum unit contacts the earth pin of the main unit drum unit door guide (FF62110-000). The earth pin is moved out of place or there is contact failure due to soiling.
Field Remedy
Correct or clean the magenta earth pin of the drum unit door guide.
16.3.2.4.3 Fogging appears on the entire image as if it were combed with brush: all colors affected
0002-3327

Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the grounding pins of the drum unit door guide, which come in contact
with the grounding plates of each color's drum unit, were misaligned or soiled and finally had poor contact with the
grounding plate.
Field Remedy
Align or clean the grounding pin for the affected color in the drum unit door guide.
16-24
Chapter 16
F-16-31
16.3.2.4.4 Fogging appearing on the entire Black image as if it were combed with a brush
0002-3330
Symptom
Image appears to have been given a black wash.
Cause
The earth plate of the black drum unit contacts the earth pin of the main unit drum unit door guide (FF6-2110000). The earth pin is moved out of place or there is contact failure due to soiling.
Field Remedy
Correct or clean the black earth pin of the drum unit door guide.
16.3.2.4.5 Density fluctuation (increase): immediately after replacement of the drum unit in a high
humidity environment
0002-3368
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate (increase) immediately after replacement of the
drum unit.In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate (increase) immediately after
replacement of the drum unit.In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate (increase)
immediately after replacement of the drum unit.In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate
(increase) immediately after replacement of the drum unit.
16-25
Chapter 16
Cause
The developer is exposed to the moisture of the environment and, as a result, the charge on the toner decreases
to increase the density.
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation adjustment>full correction.
16.3.2.4.6 Reverse fogging: appreciable when the drum unit has been in use for a long time in a low
0002-3373
Symptom
In a low humidity environment, reverse fogging tends to occur when the drum unit has been in use for a long
time.
Cause
The toner has deteriorated, thus not being able to take on adequate negative charge.
Field Remedy
Replace the drum unit of the color in question.As a temporary measure, turn off and then on the main power
switch so that the formation of a sample image (for image stabilization control) will remove the faulty toner
from the drum.
16.3.2.4.7 Fogging in Y area: appreciable after the machine has been left along for a long time (e.g.,
2 days) in a high humidity environment
0002-3375
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, fogging occurs in Y areas if the machine has been left alone for a long time
(e.g., 2 days).
Cause
The toner (MCBk) charged to a positive potential and existing on the photosensitive drum is drawn to the Y
toner charged to a negative potential and existing on the ITB.
Field Remedy
Generate about 10 prints of solid images of the color in question using A3 paper.
16.3.2.4.8 Fogging in Y area: appreciable after the machine has been left along for a long time (e.g.,
2 days) in a high humidity environment
0002-3377
Symptom
Toner collection occurs along image end when the machine is left alone for a long time (e.g., 1 week).
16-26
Chapter 16
Cause
When the machine is left alone for a long time, the level of charge on the toner tends to decrease.
Field Remedy
Generate about 10 prints of solid images of the color in question using A3 paper.
16.3.2.4.9 Color shift/Uneven density (rough texture): when continuously generating an image with
low color ratio
0002-3406
Symptom
The hues are not appropriate or the density is not even when images with a low color ratio have been generated
continuously.
Cause
The toner inside the developing assembly has remained unconsumed without being stirred for a long time, thus
increasing the charge of the toner and, ultimately, causing re-transfer or mixing of colors.
Field Remedy
Set '1'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEVL-PTH.
Adverse effect of setting it to'1' the life of the toner container will decrease.
16.3.2.4.10 Yellow spots or yellow ghosting on skin colored-area
0002-3590
Symptom
Yellow spots or yellow ghosting on skin colored-area
Description
This symptom appears only on copied images, not on printed ones.
Cause
Main Controller PCB Ass'y is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB Ass'y with a new one.
16.3.2.4.11 Light density at center of halftone image: appreciable after feeding transparencies in a
high humidity environment
0002-4638
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, the middle of a halftone image tends to become low in density after passage of
a transparency.
Cause
The coating agent on the surface of the transparency sticks to the ITB, making transfer of toner from the ITB to
paper difficult.
16-27
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>internal cleaning.
16.3.2.4.12 Fogging on the entire Cyan and Yellow images
0003-2364

Description
This symptom does not appear on the test print.
Cause
There is a case in the field that replacement of the CCD unit solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Try replacing the CCD unit with a new one. After replacement, be sure to execute CCD-ADJ in service mode.
16.3.2.4.13 Fogging on the entire Cyan image
0003-2390
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]

Description
Cause
There is a case in the field that unplugging/insertion of the connectors on the reader controller PCB solved the
problem.
Field Remedy
Unplug and insert the connectors J204, J205 and J206 on the reader controller PCB. If the problem is not solved,
replace the reader controller PCB with a new one.
F-16-32
16-28
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.14 Fogging on white area
0003-2700

Description
Fogging on white area
Cause
There is an actual case in the field that the symptom was solved by the following actions: unplugging/reinsertion
of the flat cables of the Interface PCB, replacement of the Interface PCB.
Field Remedy
Try unplugging/inserting the flat cables J307 and J308 on the Interface PCB. If the symptom is still not solved,
try replacing the Interface PCB with a new one.
16.3.2.4.15 Fogging in Magenta appearing on entire image
0003-3077

Description
Cause
Field Remedy
At first, output a test print to check whether fogging does not appear on the entire image. Next, unplug and
insert the connectors J204 and J205 on the reader controller PCB. If the symptom still appears, replace the CCD
unit with a new one.
F-16-33
16-29
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.16 86mm-wide fogging in sub scanning direction
0003-8743

Description
This symptom occurs only on copied images, not on a test print or printed images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB (sub) was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Execute 'CCD0ADJ' and 'SH-PS-ST' in service mode [COPIER>Function>CCD].
2. If the symptom still recurs, replace the CCD unit and the reader controller PCB with a new one in this order.
3. If the symptom still recurs, this indicates that the reader unit is normal. Replace the DDI-S board with a new
one.
4. If the symptom still recurs, this indicates that the interface between the reader unit and the printer unit is
normal. Replace the main controller PCB (sub) with a new one.
CCD unit:FM2-0023
READER CONTROLLER:FG3-2570
SUB CONTROLLER:FG3-3129
F-16-34
16-30
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.17 Fogging: after upgrading System Software to Ver.9.05
0003-8768
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]

Field Remedy
On System Software Ver.9.05, the gradation adjustment was improved. When upgrading it from Ver.8.04 and
earlier to Ver.9.05 and later, be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after upgrading.
16.3.2.4.18 Background is fogged when making a copy of newspaper
0004-2926
Field Remedy
Press [Special Features>Image Quality Adjustment>Remove Background].
If the symptom still recurs, press [Fine Adjustment] that appears by the side of 'Remove Background' key to
adjust the density of the background you want to remove. Adjusting it to the direction of 'minus' will lighten
the background.
16.3.2.4.19 Fogging in Magenta as if noise had occurred
0004-9715

Field Remedy
It is possible that the flexible cables inside the CCD unit (two cables are aligned at the back of the CCD unit)
are not securely fitted. Make sure that they are securely fitted.
F-16-35
16-31
Chapter 16
F-16-36
16.3.2.4.20 Fogging in Magenta appearing at position corresponding to machine front side, during
continuous copying
0004-9720

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the symptom was corrected by adjusting the auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
So, execute it in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Auto Gradation Adjustment> Full
Adjustment].
16.3.2.4.21 Fogging under low humidity environment
0004-9774

Field Remedy
Ever since DCON Ver.10.02 (DCON software which is to be installed simultaneously with System Ver.10.01),
the service mode described below has been newly added in order to ease fogging which might occur under low
humidity environment.
This service mode switches a bias of the lower auxiliary brush under low humidity environment from -800V to
-850V. If fogging occurs under low humidity environment, upgrade DCON to Ver.10.02 and later. The current
setting can be checked in the service mode below.
Service mode (level2) [COPIER> Option> BODY>LSUB-DWY/DWM/DWC]
0: -850V [Factory default/A setting value after RAM is cleared: 0]
1: -800V
16-32
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.22 Fogging with BK cartridge that has been used for a certain period of time
0004-9776

Field Remedy
Ever since DCON Ver.10.02 (DCON software which is to be installed simultaneously with System Ver.10.01),
the service mode described below has been newly added in order to ease fogging which might occur with the
BK cartridge that has been used for a certain period of time.
This service mode switches the amount of toner in the BK developing assembly whose cartridge has been used
for a certain period of time. If fogging occurs under such environment, upgrade DCON to Ver.10.02 and later.
Service mode (level2) [COPIER> Option> BODY>BKTC-DWN]
0: The amount of toner in the developing assembly: small [Factory default/A setting value after RAM is cleared:
0]
1: The amount of toner in the developing assembly: large
16.3.2.4.23 Adjustments to be executed upon occurrence of fogging (Addition of service mode
items)
0004-9782

Field Remedy
The service mode items below have newly been added to DCON Ver.10.02 (DCON software which is to be
installed simultaneously with System Ver.10.01) in order to ease fogging.
- Adjusting the upper limit of VD:
Service mode (level 2) [COPIER> Adjust> VCONT> VD-LIM-Y/M/C/K]
The smaller the set value is, the lesser the fogging becomes.
- Adjusting the amount of toner replenishment:
Service mode (level 2) [COPIER> Adjust> DENS> T-SPLY-Y/M/C/K]
The smaller the set value is, the lesser the fogging becomes.
- Enables to switch a bias of the lower auxiliary brush under low humidity environment (-800V to -850V):
Service mode (level2) [COPIER> Option> BODY>LSUB-DWY/DWM/DWC]
- Enables to change the toner amount in the developing ass'y which has been used for a certain period of time:
Service mode (level2) [COPIER> Option> BODY>BKTC-DWN]
16.3.2.4.24 Fogging during continuous duplex copying or printing
0004-9813

Field Remedy
During continuous duplex-copying or -printing the image in low density, it is likely to be fogging. This
symptom has been corrected with System Ver.10.01. So, if this happens, upgrade the system to Ver.10.01 and
later.
16-33
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.25 Fogging in reddish purple appears on entire page, Message [Correctly place the test
print on the platen glass.] is displayed: No problem on print from computer and test print
0005-1922

Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Reader Controller PCB was faulty. If this symptom occurs,
replace it with a new one.
Reader Controller PCB Ass'y: FG3-2564 (100V), FG3-2570 (120/220/240V)
F-16-37
16.3.2.4.26 Fogging in Cyan on entire page; no problem with test prints
0005-6106

< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the flat cable connecting to J203 on
the Reader Controller PCB was not securely fitted. Unplug and reinsert the flat cable of J203 once again.
16.3.2.4.27 Overall fogging with margins: Occurs only on black-and-white copies, no problem with
color copies and test prints
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the CCD unit was faulty.
Field Remedy
16-34
0006-4448
Chapter 16

1. Make sure that the interface cable connecting the reader unit and the printer unit is securely fitted.
2. Check whether this symptom was resolved by performing "CCD-ADJ" and "SH-PS-ST" in service mode
[COPIER> Function> CCD> CCD-ADJ, SH-PS-ST].
When selecting the item, the adjustment will start
automatically.
3. Make sure that the connectors between the CCD unit, the Reader Controller PCB and the Interface PCB are
securely fitted.
4) If the symptom still recurs even after the Steps 1 through 3, replace the CCD unit with a new one.
After replacement of the CCD unit, enter the values (for color displacement correction in sub scanning direction)
indicated on the label attached to the unit in service mode [COPIER> Adjust> CCD> CCDU-RG, CCDU-GB].
CCD Unit: FM2-0023
F-16-38
16.3.2.5 Uneven Density

16.3.2.5.1 Uneven color around characters: when being printed on half-tone background in
combination with MacOS and QuarkXpress
0002-3290

Field Remedy
In the field, the setting change on Mac side improved the symptom. Select [Printer Functions> Halftone>
Resolution].
Description
When "Resolution" is selected for the Halftone setting, the reproductivity for halftone will be improved and thus
uneven color will be relieved.
16-35
Chapter 16
16.3.2.5.2 Uneven density at about 6mm intervals in the sub scanning direction
0002-3292

Cause
As a result of inspection, this symptom occurred because the secondary transfer roller was not properly installed at
the designated position.
Field Remedy
Reinstall the secondary transfer roller once again.
16.3.2.5.3 Uneven density at 44 mm intervals: when the drum unit has been in use for a long time
0002-3389
Symptom
Uneven density at an angle and at 12 mm intervals; tending to occur simultaneously with low density at the rear
or over the entire image when an original of a high color ratio is printed continuously.
Cause
Toner sticks to the charging roller, and soils it.
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode:COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLV-UP.
adverse effect of setting it to '1' the life of the drum unit will decrease.
decrease.
16.3.2.5.4 Uneven density in vertical direction occurs when images with a high color ratio are
generated in large volumes.
0002-3393
Symptom
Uneven density in vertical direction occurs when images with a high color ratio are generated in large volumes.
Cause
Filming (white soiling) occurs on the surface of the photosensitive drum, affecting exposure.
Field Remedy
Be sure to refer to the instructions indicated on how to clean the photosensitive drum (dry wiping the
photosensitive drum of the color in question).
16.3.2.5.5 Uneven density at 0.8mm intervals
Symptom
Uneven density occurs at 0.8 mm intervals, tending to be noticeable in halftone images.
Cause
The rotation of the photosensitive drum drive gear is uneven.
16-36
0002-3396
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Set '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16.3.2.5.6 Mottled image: when large numbers of prints are made daily and, the drum unit has been
in use for a long time
0002-3400

Cause
The toner in the developing assembly is caking into lumps.
Field Remedy
Clean the inside of the machine in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Cleaning inside Main Unit].
Note: It is recommended to execute the mode every 4000 prints or more, as a guide.
16.3.2.5.7 Uneven image (rough texture) in halftone images
0002-3404

Cause
The level of secondary transfer current is so high that the transfer efficiency decreases because of re-transfer.
Field Remedy
1. Clean the inside of the machine in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Cleaning inside Main Unit].
2. In service mode level 2 [COPIER> Adjust> HV-TR> 2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TR-ENV/TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TRDUP], change the set value with extra care.
Note: As adverse effects of changing the setting, it is possible toner scattering or spots will worsen.
16.3.2.5.8 Uneven density (rough texture) in Bk solid images: in a high humidity environment
0002-3408
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, uneven density occurs in Bk solid images. (rough texture)
Cause
The level of secondary transfer current is too high, thus decreasing the transfer efficiency because of re-transfer.
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction>full correction. Or, add a cassette
heater.
16.3.2.5.9 Toner scattering around image with a high color ration in a low humidity environment
0002-3413
Symptom
Toner stray tends to occur around an image with a high color ratio in a low humidity environment.
Cause
The level of the secondary transfer current is too low, thus failing to transfer the toner from the ITB.
16-37
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
With care, use the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TR-ENV/
TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-DUP.
Adverse effect of changing the setting: it can worsen white spots, transfer faults, or fogging (rough texture).
16.3.2.5.10 Uneven image in main scanning direction: when copying in a single color
0002-8530
Symptom
Uneven image in main scanning direction: when copying in a single color
Cause
As a result of inspection, reinstallation of the secondary transfer external roller solved the symptom.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the secondary transfer external roller is not installed properly, thus reinstall it again.
F-16-39
16-38
Chapter 16
16.3.2.5.11 Uneven image of 47mm intervals in main scanning direction
0005-7242
Field Remedy
1. Output a test print to specify the color causing this symptom: in service mode [COPIER> Test>PG].
2. Replace the drum unit of the affected color.
3. If the symptom still recurs, it is possible that the drum drive unit is faulty. Replace the drum drive unit with
a new one.
Drum Drive Ass'y: FG6-8964
16.3.2.5.12 Coarse image or brushed image only on Cyan areas: Occurs on both copies and test
prints
0006-4447

Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the DC Controller PCB was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between the DC Controller PCB (J117 and J118) and the Cyan
laser unit (J613, J614, and J616).
2. Swap the Cyan laser unit with a different color's and check the image once again. If the symptom occurs with
the different color, the laser unit is likely to be faulty. So, replace it with a new one. If the symptom is not changed,
the DC Controller PCB is likely to be faulty. So, replace it with a new one.
Laser Unit: FG6-8962
DC Controller PCB: FG3-2356
F-16-40
16-39
Chapter 16
16.3.2.6 Out of Focus

16.3.2.6.1 Torsion spring coming off or displaced: locating close to the back of the pattern reader
unit
0002-3218
Symptom
Printed image is displaced, because a spring of the attaching part (on the main body), in the backside of the
pattern reader unit, has come off, or because the spring hook is not properly located.
Cause
Because a spring of the attaching part (on the main body), in the backside of the pattern reader unit, has come
off, or because the spring hook is not properly located, the pattern reader unit is not fixed in the proper position
and is free, which displaces image output by laser, leading to the printed image displacement.
Items to Check
Remove the two screws on the right inside cover, and you can check whether a spring is attached to the pattern
reader unit. Remove the pattern reader unit, referring to the service manual, and you can check whether the
springs is properly located.
Field Remedy
Attach the spring FB6-3289-000.
16.3.2.6.2 Color displacement in sub scanning direction
0002-3498
Symptom
Color displacement occurs (several mm) in sub scanning direction.
Cause
Toner has stuck to the ITB drive roller, causing the ITB to slip against the ITB drive roller.
Field Remedy
Clean the ITB drive roller, tension roller, and secondary transfer internal roller.
16.3.2.6.3 Image misalignment in main scanning direction/Black is copied in green
Symptom
Image misalignment in main scanning direction/Black is copied in green
Cause
CCD unit is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the CCD unit with a new one.
16-40
0002-3578
Chapter 16
16.3.2.6.4 Registration failure of image on duplex side
0003-6292
[ Manual-related ]
Simptom
Registration failure of image on duplex side
Field Remedy
An adjustment for duplex side registration has been added with System software Ver.4.03. It can be made in
service mode [COPIER>Adjust>FEED-ADJ>REGIST2].
16.3.2.6.5 Color registration failure on thick paper in sub scanning direction
0003-6310

Simptom
Color registration failure on thick paper in sub scanning direction
Field Remedy
A solution against color registration failure of thick paper has been added with System software Ver.3.16. In
service mode level 2 [COPIER>Option>CLR-SHIFT], set it as '1' to activate the solution. Note that this will
decrease the productivity of thick paper to approx. one-third.
16.3.2.6.6 Color registration failure in sub scanning direction
0003-8593

Description
In the field, this symptom was solved by clearing RAM of the DC Controller PCB or replacement of the ITB unit.
Field Remedy
Perform the steps below in the order presented (they are listed in order of decreasing possibility):
1. Inspect whether the 42T gear in the ITB unit is broken or not. If a breakage is confirmed, replace it with a new one.
2. Clear RAM of the DC controller PCB in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> DC-CON].
3. Replace the ITB unit with a new one.
4. Replace the ITB drive unit with a new one.
FU3-0266 42T Gear
FG6-8942 Inter Transfer Belt Ass'y
FG6-9663 ITB Drive Ass'y
16.3.2.6.7 Color registration failure in main scanning direction
0003-8749

Field Remedy
1. Check whether jam code 0105 was recorded in the jam history or E110-0110 was in the error log. If either of
them was recorded, inspect the fixing/feeder sensor flag to make sure that mylar is attached to it. If not, replace
the sensor flag with a new type.
2. If mylar is attached or the new type of the sensor flag has already been installed, clear DCON in service mode
[COPIER> Function> CLEAR> DC-CON].
3. If the symptom still recurs, swap the laser units for all colors.
FB6-3143-020 Fixing/Feeder Sensor Flag (New type as of June 15, 2004)
16-41
Chapter 16
16.3.2.6.8 Color displaces approx. 3mm away from right position in sub scanning direction
0005-1908

Field Remedy
If the back side of the ITB soils after long usage, the ITB is not driven properly and each color displaced
approximately 3mm away from their right position.
If this symptom occurs, clean the back side of the ITB and the drive gears by following the instructions in the
attachment.
F-16-41
16.3.2.6.9 Blurred image in sub scanning direction
0005-4661

< Field Remedy >
If the host machine has been left for a long time in stand-by state or low-power mode state, the fixing roller may
be deformed due to its nip pressure, causing blurred images in sub scanning direction. This symptom has been
corrected with the DCON Ver.11.02 (software of DCON to be used together with System Ver.11.03). Thus, if
paper wrinkle occurs because of the fixing roller, upgrade the DCON to Ver.11.02 as well as replace the fixing
roller or the fixing ass'y.
A change that has been implemented is as follows:
Before change: Fixing roller will rotate in every 30 minutes in stand-by or low-power mode.
After change: Fixing roller will rotate in every 5 minutes in stand-by and in every 12 minutes in low-power
mode.
16-42
Chapter 16
Fixing Roller: FB6-3641

Fixing Ass'y: FG6-9069 (120V), FG6-9070 (220/240V)
16.3.2.6.10 Image is shifted in main scanning direction when printing via UFR, no problem on
copied or scanned images
0005-6104

< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was
faulty.
Unplug and reinsert the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16.3.2.6.11 Abnormal images (image shift in main scanning direction, color void) when making pull
scan
0005-6128

< Field Remedy >
16.3.2.7 Partially Blank/Streaked

16.3.2.7.1 Black lines at 2mm intervals in main scanning direction
0002-1289
Symptom
Black lines at 2mm intervals in main scanning direction
Description
Once this symptom occurs, it keeps occurring continuously.
Cause
High voltage transformer PCB ass'y (FG6-9673) is faulty.
FieldRemedy
Replace the high voltage transformer PCB ass'y (FG6-9673) with a new one.
16-43
Chapter 16
F-16-42
16.3.2.7.2 White spots like bubbles and wave-shaped white spots: 5cm of the rear
0002-3291
Symptom
White spots like bubbles and wave-shaped white spots: 5cm of the rear
Cause
A ground is unstable because of a warpage of the grounding plate for the secondary transfer at the rear side of
the machine.
Field Remedy
There is a possibility that a ground cannot be established because of a warpage of the grounding plate for the
secondary transfer at the rear side of the machine. Visually inspect the grounding plate for warpage.
Location of the grounding plate
16-44
Chapter 16
F-16-43
16.3.2.7.3 47mm horizontal line on full color image: when the amount of toner deposited on the
drum changes abruptly over the entire length of the drum axis
0002-3419
Symptom
An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis when full color
image is made. It is a 47-mm horizontal line.
Cause
An abrupt change (increase) has occurred in the amount of toner on the photosensitive drum, causing uneven
rotation of the drum and, ultimately, a discrepancy in exposure.
Field Remedy
Set '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16-45
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.4 47mm horizontal line on Bk image: when the amount of toner deposited on the drum
changes abruptly over the entire length of the drum axis
0002-3421
Symptom
An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis when
monochrome image is made. It is a 47-mm horizontal line.
Cause
An abrupt change (increase) has occurred in the amount of toner on the photosensitive drum, causing uneven
rotation of the drum and, ultimately, a discrepancy in exposure.
Field Remedy
Set'1'to the following in service mode:COPIER>OPTION>BODY>BK-4CSW.
16.3.2.7.5 47-mm horizontal line at the leading edge of paper
0002-3423
Symptom
A 47-mm horizontal line occurs in the leading edge of paper.
Cause
A yellow pattern made in blank (for progress in image) has occurred uneven rotation of the drum and ultimately,
causing a discrepancy in exposure.
Field Remedy
Set '2'to the following in service mode:COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16.3.2.7.6 An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the
drum axis. It is a 100-mm horizontal line.
0002-3426
Symptom
An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis. It is a 100mm horizontal line.
Cause
An abrupt change (increase) has occurred in the amount of toner on the intermediate transfer belt, causing
uneven rotation of the belt and, ultimately a discrepancy in primary transfer.
Field Remedy
Set '2'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>Y-PTN.adverse effect of setting it to '2'
the white area and the image on the paper tend to show a yellowish hue.
16-46
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.7 White spots along trailing edge of halftone image on the 2nd side of duplex print made
after generating several sheets of simplex print in a high humidity environment (e.g. for the first
time in the morning)
0002-3429
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, a white spot occurs along the trailing edge of a halftone image on the 2nd side
of a double-sided print made after generating a single-sided print and turning on the power (e.g., for the first
time in the morning).
Cause
The fixing heat causes the moisture in the paper to evaporate, causing condensation on the delivery guide; if it
moves to the leading edge of the 1st side of a double-sided print, a transfer fault will occur along the trailing
edge of the 2nd side.
Field Remedy
Allow about 10 min between making a single-sided print and making a double-sided print so as to prevent
condensation on the delivery guide (thus the symptom).
16.3.2.7.8 White spots in a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) in a low
0002-3433
Symptom
A white spot occurs in a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) in a low humidity
environment.
Cause
The resistance of the secondary transfer external roller is too low, causing the voltage lower limit limiter to go
ON (the level of the secondary transfer current is too high)
Field Remedy
With care, make use of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TRENV/TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-DUP.adverse effect of changing the setting: toner can move astray, worsening
white spots.
16.3.2.7.9 White spots along the trailing edge: when feeding dry paper (e.g., freshly opened paper)
0002-3455
Symptom
White spots occur along the trailing edge when dry paper is used (e.g., fresh out of package).
Cause
When the trailing edge of paper moves past the nip area of the secondary transfer external roller, the current
flowing to the trailing edge of the paper is limited.
16-47
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Adjust the setting of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-B.The symptom
maybe corrected when the trailing edge margin is increased by about 4 mm.
16.3.2.7.10 White spots (like small flower) along the leading edge: when feeding paper with high
resistance in a low humidity environment
0002-3457
Symptom
White spots (like small flower) occurs along the leading edge, where the resistance tends to be high in a low
Cause
A transfer fault occurs during secondary transfer (i.e., the level of the secondary transfer current is too high).
Field Remedy
With care, make use of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TRENV/TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-DUP.
adverse effect of changing the setting: toner may move astray, worsening the occurrence of white spots.
16.3.2.7.11 A fine, white line around 30mm of the trailing edge on A3 paper
0002-3460

Cause
When the temperature at both ends of the fixing roller rises, the roller pressure becomes higher there. Under this
condition, it is possible the trailing edge of paper jumps.
Field Remedy
Install the Spur (FG6-9649) to the ITB locking shaft. For the installation procedure, refer to Service Manual
[Troubleshooting > Correcting Faulty Images > Image Fault Case Studies > The output has transfer faults/lines. >
Mounting the Spur (FG6-9649)].
16.3.2.7.12 White spots (mottled)
0002-3463
Symptom
White spots occur in images (mottled).
Cause
Paper lint sticks to paper from the pre-registration roller, causing a transfer fault during secondary transfer.
Field Remedy
Clean the clips (2 pc. above the pre-registration roller).
16-48
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.13 Lines along the trailing edge on A3 or larger paper
0002-3474

Cause
As paper is looped between the secondary transfer external roller and the fixing roller, an electrical discharge occurs
when its trailing edge leaves the intermediate transfer belt.
Field Remedy
[Troubleshooting > Correcting Faulty Images > Image Fault Case Studies > The output is soiled/has lines. >
16.3.2.7.14 A single line in the drum axial direction on solid image
0002-3482
Symptom
A single line occurs in the drum axial direction when a solid image is generated.
Cause
The tube of the fixing roller was inadvertently given a crease during production.
Field Remedy
Replace both fixing roller and pressure roller; or, replace the fixing unit.
16.3.2.7.15 Traces of pickup roller along the leading edge of transparency when its source is
cassette.
0002-3504
Symptom
Traces of the pickup roller occur along the leading edge of a transparency when the source of the transparency
is the cassette.
Cause
When a stack of transparencies is used, the leading edge of the bottom transparency is subjected to friction at
time of pickup, thus causing it to develop a scratch.
Field Remedy
Fan out the stack before placing it to correct the fault. Recommend the use of manual feeding.
16.3.2.7.16 White spots along trailing edge of halftone image on the 2nd side of duplex print in a
0002-4666
16-49
Chapter 16
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, a white spot occurs along the edge of the paper in a halftone image on the 2nd
side of a double-sided print.
Cause
The paper is moist, and tends to become wavy after fixing on its 1st side; as a result, the wavy area prevents
proper transfer on the 2nd side and, ultimately, causes a white spot.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater, or recommend replacement of paper.
16.3.2.7.17 White spots in a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) in a
low humidity environment
0002-4671
Symptom
A 20 to 30 mm white spot occurs along the trailing edge of prints made on A3 paper.
Cause
The paper arches between the secondary transfer external roller and the fixing roller, and discharge occurs when
the trailing edge of the paper leaves the intermediate transfer belt, leaving traces.
Field Remedy
Set '1'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FX-SPD.
Adverse effect of changing the setting: parallel lines may fail to be parallel along the trailing edge.
16.3.2.7.18 White streaks at 10cm intervals in main scanning direction
0003-3073

Cause
There is a case in the field that a tip of teeth of the ITB drive gear (FU3-0354) was partially cracked, causing
this symptom.
Field Remedy
Inspect the teeth of the ITB drive gear (FU3-0354) for any cracks on the teeth. If any abnormalities are found,
replace the gear with a new one.
16-50
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.19 Void appearing at approx. 9.5mm from the edge (corresponding to machine's front side)
in sub scanning direction
0004-0688

Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because grease was transferred to the secondary
transfer roller.
Field Remedy
1. It is possible that grease adheres to the surface of the secondary transfer roller. So, remove grease from the roller.
If it cannot be removed completely, replace the secondary transfer roller or the Secondary Transfer Ass'y with a new
one.
2. It is possible that excessive amount of grease has been applied to the lower registration roller. Inspect the affected
area and wipe grease off the roller if excessive amount of grease is confirmed. Refer to the attached files for the
location. In addition, make sure that grease does not adhere to the paper path between the lower registration roller
and the secondary transfer roller.
FB6-3131 Secondary Transfer Roller
FG6-8993 Secondary Transfer Ass'y
F-16-44
16-51
Chapter 16
F-16-45
16-52
Chapter 16
F-16-46
16.3.2.7.20 Black and yellow are not printed
0004-5068

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that replacement of the laser unit for BK (black) and Y (yellow) solved the problem.
Laser unit (common in colors): FG6-8962
16.3.2.7.21 40mm-wide void appearing at all four perimeters of paper
0004-9002

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that this symptom occurred because the set value in service mode
[COPIER>Adjust>BLANK-T/L/R/B] was 1000 (max). Check the set value with the machine you are servicing.
In addition, make sure that the other set values are proper.
16.3.2.7.22 Streaks appearing in sub scanning direction when making a copy of color and
monochrome originals at a time
0004-9761

Field Remedy
This problem has been corrected with System Ver.10.01. So, if this happens, upgrade the system to Ver.10.01
and later.
16-53
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.23 Color voids at image lead edge when outputting SRA3 or 12x18" paper
0004-9762

Field Remedy
When outputting SRA3 or 12x18" paper under the measure for color displacement on thick paper activated in
service mode, color voids may occur at the image lead edge.
This symptom has been corrected with the System Ver.10.01, so upgrade it to Ver.10.01 and later if this
happens.
If the following service mode is set at [1], the measure for color displacement is activated: Service mode (level
2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> CLR-SHIFT> 1].
16.3.2.7.24 PS-C1: When outputting data created with Illustrator on MacOS9.2.2, image is printed
partially
0004-9763

Field Remedy
When outputting the data created with Illustrator 8/9/10 on MacOS9.2.2, most of the image may lack.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver1.1.1 and later if this
happens.
16.3.2.8 Smudged/Streaked
16.3.2.8.1 Soiled image due to waste toner
0002-3602
Symptom
Soiled image due to waste toner
Cause
The gear at the rear side in the waste toner feed unit is missing. As the waste toner screw is not activated, waste
toner overflows without being delivered.
Field Remedy
Install the gear (25T Gear: FS7-0579) driving the waste toner screw.
16.3.2.8.2 Black lines randomly appear on the printed image when the original is set on the ADF.
0002-1581
Symptom
Black lines randomly appear on the printed image when the original is set on the ADF.
Description
Black lines randomly appear on the printed image when the original is set on the ADF.
Field Remedy
By decreasing the value of the Parameter instructedbelow by 10 from factory setting, the reading possition will
16-54
Chapter 16
be moved 1mm toward the delivery (rear) side In service mode no 6 SCANNER>7.CCD>>Parameter 018(xxx)
If you implement the procedure above mentioned, the position is moved 1mm forward, and then increase the
following value by 10 from the factory setting so that the leading registration can be adjusted by 1mm. In service
mode NO 6 SCANNER>7 CCD>Parameter 024(xxx).
If damage appears on the image by implementing the process above, we suggest that you chaange those setting
to default setting.
16.3.2.8.3 Vertical streaks of charging roller: when the drum unit has been in use for a long time
0002-3465
Symptom
Vertical lines (charging roller) occur when the drum unit has been in use for a long time.
Cause
Toner sticks to the charging roller, thus soiling it.
Field Remedy
Replace the drum unit of the color in question. (Generate a 16-gradation test pattern (TYPE=4) to identify the
color.
16.3.2.8.4 Vertical streaks
0002-3470
Symptom
Vertical lines occur.
Cause
The while plate/mirror of the reader unit is soiled. The copyboard glass is soiled with foreign matter.
Field Remedy
Clean the white plate/mirror with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
16.3.2.8.5 Back of paper soiled: first in the morning after generating a double-sided print of a
halftone image in Bk as the last job of the previous day
0002-3471
Symptom
The back of a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) is soiled after making a doublesided print of a halftone image in Bk as the last job of the previous day.
Cause
The surface temperature of the fixing roller has grown too high causing toner to move from paper to the fixing
roller; the toner then moves to the surface of the pressure roller, soiling the back of the 1st print made for the
first time when the power is turned on the next time.
16-55
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
The symptom is limited to 120 mm along the leading edge of the 1st print (on the back; 120 mm being the
peripheral length of the pressure roller).
16.3.2.8.6 Black spots at 64mm intervals
0002-3483
Symptom
A black spot occurs (64 mm).
Cause
Foreign matter (non-conductive) exists on the secondary transfer internal roller.
Spot Disposal
Clean the secondary transfer internal roller.
16.3.2.8.7 Rubbing mark at trailing edge of A3 paper
0002-3525

Cause
When the temperature at both ends of the fixing roller rises, the roller pressure becomes higher there. Under this
condition, it is possible the trailing edge of paper rubs against the ITB when it passes through the secondary transfer
external roller.
Field Remedy
[Troubleshooting > Correcting Faulty Images > Image Fault Case Studies > The output is soiled/has lines. >
16.3.2.8.8 White lines at 1.5mm intervals in main scanning direction
0003-2383

Field Remedy
The similar kind of image can be output when the counterfeit-proof function works. There is no solution at this
moment. Adjust the document orientation or the scanning density.
16.3.2.8.9 Shade of original appears at lead edge of output image when making a copy by selecting
'Entire Image'
0003-2777

Cause
If one-by-one (direct) copy is selected, shade of the original will not appear on the output image because it
should be printed on the lead edge margin area. On the other hand, in the case of 'Entire Image' copy, the
original will be scaled down and the shade should be printed inside the lead edge margin area, appearing on the
output image.
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER>Adjust>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X], increase the set value so that the scanning start position
will be shifted backward and shade of the original will not appear. However, note that backward-shifting of the
scanning start position will widen the lead edge of original that is not printed on the output image.
16-56
Chapter 16
16.3.2.8.10 Lines as if noise occurred appearing in sub scanning direction: when printing via UFR
0003-8737

Cause
There is a case in the field that the symptom was solved by replacement of the UFR board.
Field Remedy
Reinstall the UFR board. If the symptom still recurs, replace the UFR board with a new one.
F-16-47
16.3.2.8.11 35mm-wide lines in sub scanning direction appearing at a location corresponding to the
machine's rear side
0003-8742

Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB was found to be faulty. (In this inspection, the symptom
continuously occurred once it started; however, it did not always occur.)
Field Remedy
Try replacing the main controller PCB with a new one.
FG3-3129
16-57
Chapter 16
F-16-48
16.3.2.8.12 Fine lines appearing randomly in main scanning direction
0003-8791

Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB (sub) was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the main controller PCB (sub) with a new one.
SUB CONTROLLER BOARD Ass'y:FG3-3133
<Tips for identifying a failure part>
1. Whether the problem is caused by the reader unit or printer unit?
- Output a test print and check whether the image is abnormal.
Yes: problem in the printer unit
No: problem in the reader unit
2. Whether the test print has margins (lead, trail, right and left)?
Yes: no problem in high voltage output
No: problem in high voltage output
3. If fines lines appear at dot intervals, it is possible that the main controller PCB can be possibly faulty.
16-58
Chapter 16
F-16-49
16.3.2.8.13 Toner soiling
0004-0726

Description
This symptom is likely to occur during continuous outputting.
Field Remedy
1. If the soiling occurs with primary colors (YMCK), the drum unit is likely to be faulty. So, inspect the drum
unit.
2. If the soiling occurs with mixed colors, the ITB cleaning failure is likely to be a cause. So, inspect the ITB
cleaning unit.
16.3.2.8.14 Streaks appearing as if they had been caused by cleaning failure (with all four colors)
0004-9714

Field Remedy
It is possible that a symptom like this can occur because the secondary transfer roller is not securely fitted,
causing a leak. So, reinstall the secondary transfer roller securely.
16-59
Chapter 16
16.3.2.8.15 Lines on entire image when making copy using preset zoom feature
0005-6129

< Field Remedy >
16.3.2.8.16 When printing via UFR, lines appear only on images that are pasted on document: no
problem with document containing texts only
0005-6180

Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the UFR board was faulty. Remove and install it once again. If the
symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
UFR Board Ass'y: FG6-8983
16.3.2.8.17 Lines appear in main scanning direction on A4-sized copies, in sub scanning direction
on A3-sized copies
0005-9418

Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Reader Controller PCB was
faulty. So, unplug and reinsert the connectors on the PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a
new one.
Reader Controller PCB: FG3-2570
16.3.2.9 Ghost / Memory

16.3.2.9.1 Ghost Repeating images which seem to be caused by inferior cleaning at approximately
10cm intervals
0002-1792
Symptom
Ghost Repeating images which seem to be caused by inferior cleaning at approximately 10cm intervals
Cause
As a result of inspection, the following causes are found:
1. The degree of auxiliary charging is not appropriate because of a broken spring installed at the auxiliary brush
in the drum unit.
2. High voltage transformer PCB (FG6-9673) is faulty.
Field Remedy
1. If ghosting is accompanied by fogging as shown in Image1, replace the drum unit(s) of the color in which the
symptom appears.
2. If ghosting is NOT accompanied by fogging as shown in Image2, replace the high voltage transformer PCB
(FG6-9673) with a new one.
16-60
Chapter 16
Image1
F-16-50
Image2
F-16-51
16-61
Chapter 16
16.3.2.9.2 Drum positive ghost in halftone image: occurring after outputting solid images
0002-3486
Symptom
A drum positive ghost occurs in a halftone image after generation of a solid image.
Cause
A residual charge exists on the photosensitive drum.
Field Remedy
Set '2'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16.3.2.9.3 Drum reverse ghost: on halftone image after outputting solid images and on solid image
after outputting images having larger areas of halftone
0002-3491
Symptom
A drum reverse ghost occurs in a solid image after generation of a halftone image or an image of white against
a black background following the generation of a solid image.
Cause
A residual charge exists on the photosensitive drum.
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>NEGA-GST.
16.3.2.9.4 Slipping ghost: after generating fine lines with a high color ratio
0002-3494
Symptom
A slipping ghost occurs after generation of fine lines with a high color ratio.
Cause
Toner remains on the photosensitive drum (from collection of toner to the developing assembly).
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction>full correction.
16.3.2.10 Poor Finxing

16.3.2.10.1 Poor fixing: due to failure of the fixing temperature control (mostly E004 is displayed.)
Symptom
Poor fixing: due to failure of the fixing temperature control (mostly E004 is displayed.)
Cause
16-62
0002-3545
Chapter 16
1. Because of chattering of the fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor, the DC controller PCB mistakenly
considers the fixing feeder unit to be slid out and starts the temperature control of the fixing unit at 0 degrees C.
2. Because of a software bug, the cooling fan does not rotate in the low power mode, which causes a heat
deformation of the fixing/feeder sensor flag. Accordingly, even after the fixing feeder unit is closed, chattering
occurs and a failure of the temperature control also occurs as in the case of '1'.
Field Remedy
1. Upgrade the system to Ver4.03 and the DCON to Ver6.02.
2. Attach a sheet of mylar to the fixing/feeder sensor flag.
* For the mylar, please contact a division handling this issue.
16.3.2.10.2 Poor fixing, Toner peel-off
0002-3257

Cause
Due to chattering of the fixing feeder open/close sensor, noise of 200msec or less is generated. This makes the DC
Controller PCB mistakenly consider the fixing feeder unit open and start the temperature control of the fixing unit at
0 degrees C.
Field Remedy
Upgrade the ROM of the DC controller to Ver.4.03.
16.3.2.10.3 Flap of envelope is glued after passing through machine
0003-8657

Field Remedy
If the flap of an envelope is glued in "Envelope" mode, make a copy or print in "Plain Paper" mode by following
the steps below:
a. For copy
Press [Paper Select> Stack Bypass> Irreg. Size> enter the envelope size> OK> Next> Plain Paper> OK], and load
the envelopes on the stack bypass.
b. For print
1. As in the case of copy, make the stack bypass settings.
2. Register the size of an envelope to be used into "Custom Paper Size" in the printer driver:
[Start> Settings> Printers> iRC3200> Properties> General> Printing Preference> Custom Paper Size> enter any
name (e.g. envelope) in Name of Custom Paper Size> enter the envelope size in Paper Size> Register> OK].
3. Select the registered paper in the printer driver and start to print:
[Print> iRC3200> Properties> Page Setup> select the registered paper in step 2 from Output Size> OK].
Note: The steps above enable envelopes to be fed at a normal speed. Accordingly, this symptom will not occur at
a high rate. However, if it still recurs, decrease the fixing temperature in service mode [COPIER> Option>
BODY> TEMP-TBL> set to "1" or "2"].
16.3.2.10.4 Poor fixing on postcard
0005-4289
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
If this symptom occurs, check whether the set value in service mode [COPIER> Option> BODY> TEMP-TBL]
is set at [2] (to decrease fixing temperature by 10 degrees C). In such a case, change the set value to [0] (normal
fixing temperature).
16-63
Chapter 16
16.3.2.11 Faulty Color Reproduction

16.3.2.11.1 White area becomes gray when making a copy by selecting 'Nega/Posi'
0003-8641

Field Remedy
Color reproductivity for 'Nega/Posi' copy has been improved to the level of the previous models with System
software Ver.9.05. If the machine you are servicing is earlier than Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.2.11.2 Faulty color reproduction
0003-2394

Description
Gray area is tinged with blue and cyan area is fogged with yellow.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the reader controller PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Unplug and insert the connectors J204, J205 and J206 on the reader controller PCB. If the problem is not solved,
replace the reader controller PCB with a new one.
F-16-52
16-64
Chapter 16
16.3.2.11.3 Color of output image is different from that of original: when thick paper is used
0003-2775
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Auto gradation adjustment has two different modes: for plain paper and for thick paper. If color reproductivity
is not stabilized with thick paper, execute auto gradation adjustment by selecting 'thick paper' mode.
16.3.2.11.4 Image is normal at 10cm area from image lead edge; however, right and left images
become interchanged on rearward area: paper size is A3
0004-9718

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the problem was solved by clearing the reader controller PCB's RAM. Turn the
power OFF/ON, and if the symptom still recurs, clear the reader controller PCB's RAM.
Before clearing the RAM, print the service mode setting values in service mode [COPIER> Function> MISCP> P-PRINT] in order to enter them as necessary after clearing the RAM.
Clear of RCON RAM can be done in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> R-CON].
16.3.2.11.5 PS-C1: Running 'ColorCAL' degrades gradation quality
0004-9854

Field Remedy
The quality of gradation may be degraded by running 'ColorCAL', as compared with the previous.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later if this
happens. Then, run 'ColorCAL' again.
16.3.2.12 Stretching/Shrinking
16.3.2.12.1 Image at trailing edge on 2nd side of A3 is distorted
0002-3500

Cause
Since the rotation speed of the fixing roller is faster relative to the secondary transfer external roller, it is possible the
image can be stretched depending on the condition.
Field Remedy
In service mode level 2 [COPIER> Option> BODY> FX-SPD], set it to "-1".
As adverse effects of changing the setting, voids of 20mm-30mm long, image rubbing or voids along the trailing edge
could worsen. At that time, install the Spur (FG6-9657) to the ITB locking shaft. For the installation procedure,
refer to Service Manual [Troubleshooting > Correcting Faulty Images > Image Fault Case Studies > The output has
color displacement. > Mounting the Spur (FG6-9657)].
16-65
Chapter 16
16.3.3 Faulty Feeding

16.3.3.1 Double-Feed/ Multiple Feed
16.3.3.1.1 Multifeed of transparencies
0002-3527
Symptom
Multiple transparencies are moved at the same time.
Cause
The transparencies are attracted to each other by the work of static charge.
Field Remedy
Fan out the transparencies.
16.3.3.1.2 Multifeed (gloss paper, tracing paper, or some thick paper)
0002-3532
Symptom
Multiple sheets of gloss paper, tracing paper, or some thick paper are moved at the same time.
Cause
The bonding between sheets is too strong, causing the separation mechanism to fail.
Field Remedy
Recommend the use of the manual feed tray, feeding the sheets individually.Types of media in question: gloss
paper (coated), tracing paper, and thick paper.
16.3.3.2 Skew Feed

16.3.3.2.1 DADF-K1: Thin original is jammed
0003-8649

Cause
There is a case in the field that the occurrence ratio of thin original jams was decreased by activating the DADF silent
reading mode.
Field Remedy
Activate the DADF-K1 silent reading mode, which slows down the paper delivery speed. In service mode (level
2) [COPIER>Option>ACC>DF-MUTE], select '1'.
16-66
Chapter 16
16.3.3.3 Wrinkle
16.3.3.3.1 Paper wrinkle: when there are only few sheets remaining in the cassette in a high
0002-3534
Symptom
Paper tends to wrinkle when there are only few sheets remaining in the cassette at time of pickup in a high
Cause
The paper is likely to be moist, thus tending to become wavy.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette internal sheet.
16.3.3.3.2 Paper wrinkle
0005-4653

< Field Remedy >
be deformed due to its nip pressure, causing paper to be wrinkled. This symptom has been corrected with the
DCON Ver.11.02 (software of DCON to be used together with System Ver.11.03). Thus, if paper wrinkle
occurs because of the fixing roller, upgrade the DCON to Ver.11.02 as well as replace the fixing roller or the
fixing ass'y.
mode.
16.3.3.4 Ripple/Curl
16.3.3.4.1 Jam of special postcard (such as double-sided postcard with adhesive inside)
0004-0701

Description
Because the double-sided portion swells out when it passes though the fixing unit.
Cause
There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected by changing the fixing temperature control.
Field Remedy
Try changing the fixing temperature control in service mode [COPIER>Option>BODY>TEMP-TBL].
0: 190 C (default)
1: 185 C
2: 180 C
16-67
Chapter 16
16.3.3.5 Wrap
16.3.3.5.1 Paper separation failure at fuser: when generating an image with a high color ratio in a
0002-3538
Symptom
The leading edge of paper tends to resist separation in a high humidity environment and when the image has a
high color ratio.
Cause
The rigidity of paper is too low so that it tends to wrap around the fixing roller, preventing it from separating
from the roller at time of delivery.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater.
16.3.4 Malfunction
16.3.4.1 No Power
16.3.4.1.1 No power: Even after three minutes have passed from the power-ON, neither the power
lamp nor the control panel lights up. (Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J156)
0002-2493
Symptom
Even after three minutes have passed from the power-ON, neither the power lamp nor the control panel lights
up. (Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J156) <Refer to SymptomExplanation>
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of finisher and feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally. In this case, however, there is no initialization.
Cause
DC power supply PCB failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the fuse PCB J56 from the DC power supply PCB J156. If no, check
the DC power supply PCB.
2) Check whether AC line is supplied to the DC power supply PCB. If there is no problem with the AC supply,
replace the DC power supply PCB.
Field Remedy
DC Power Supply PCB Part No. FG6-8970-000 (100/120V), FG6-8971-000 (220/240V)
16-68
Chapter 16
16.3.4.1.2 Machine not booting up, LCD not lighting up: Even after three minutes have passed from
the power-ON, only the power lamp lights up, but not the LCD. (Output failure of the DC power
supply PCB J157)
0002-2501
Symptom
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of the finisher and the feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally.
Cause
Items to Check
Field Remedy
16.3.4.1.3 When the power is turned ON, initialization of the finisher and the feeder should start if
the main unit operates normally. In this case, however, there is no initialization.
0002-2504
Symptom
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of the finisher and the feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally. In this case, however, there is no initialization.
Cause
Items to Check
16-69
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
16.3.4.1.4 PS-C1: Not start up while 'Please Wait' keeps displaying. iRC3200 Ver.9.05, PS-C1
Ver1.1.1
0005-3242

< Field Remedy >
Shut down the power of PS-C1 and iRC3200, and unplug the LAN cable connecting to network. Then, turn ON
the power of both devices.
a. If PS-C1 starts up normally
It is possible that the IP address for communication between PS-C1 and the user's LAN environment and the
one for communication between PS-C1 and iRC3200 might be identical. Download the patch file (17RJ592.ps) into PS-C1 for a solution against overlap of IP addresses.
b. If PS-C1 does not start up normally while 'Please Wait' keeps displaying
Reinstall the system of PS-C1 Ver.1.1.1 again. If the patch file (1-7RJ592.ps) has already been downloaded,
follow the steps below:
1. After reinstalling the System of PS-C1 Ver.1.1.1, shut down the power of PS-C1.
2. On iRC3200, in service mode [COPIER> Option> INT-FACE> IMG-CONT], set at [0]. Then, shut down
and turn on the power of iRC3200.
3. On iRC3200, in service mode [COPIER> Option> INT-FACE> IMG-CONT], se at [3]. Then, shut down the
power of iRC3200.
4. Turn on the power of PS-C1 and then iRC3200. After making sure that the both devices start up normally,
download the patch file (1-7RJ592.ps) into PS-C1.
16.3.4.1.5 DADF-K1: iRC3200 does not start up while progress bar is stopping halfway, with
DADF-K1 installed
0005-6120

< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Interface PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on
it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Interface PCB: FM2-0036
16.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related

16.3.4.2.1 iRC3200 does not start up: After indication of message 'Starting up. Wait a moment.',
LCD alternates between black and blue
0002-3343

Cause
Due to faulty soldering of J1204 (for the Ethernet board) on the Main Controller PCB, a problem occurs with the
LCD during a power-on communication checking.
16-70
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
When this symptom occurs, replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one.
FG3-2854 Main Controller PCB
16.3.4.2.2 LCD on control panel not lighting up, remaining black
0002-3464
Symptom
LCD on control panel not lighting up, remaining black
Description
The main power indicator lights up and the machine starts the initial rotation.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the SDRAM on the main controller was found not to be fitted securely on the main
controller PCB.
Field Remedy
Check whether the SDRAM is securely fitted on the main controller PCB. If not, reinsert it securely.
16.3.4.2.3 LCD on control panel does not come on remaining black
0003-2353

Description
In the field, this symptom was solved by an insertion of the BootROM, the connector of the HDD, the Resolution
Switching Board and the SDRAM.
Field Remedy
Perform the steps below in the order presented. Note that there are relatively many cases that reinsertion of the
BootROM solved the problem in the field.
1. Remove and insert the BootROM.
2. Unplug and insert the connectors of the HDD.
3. Remove and insert the Resolution Switching Board.
4. Remove and insert the SDRAM. If the symptom still recurs, replace the SDRAM with a new one.
WA7-2645 SDRAM DIMM Ass'y
16.3.4.2.4 How to adjust touch position on LCD
0003-2404
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER>Function>PANEL>TOUCHCHK], press 'OK'. And press '+' indicated on the touch
panel at nine locations in sequence.
16-71
Chapter 16
16.3.4.2.5 'Send' screen does not appear although SEND board has been installed
0005-6116

< Field Remedy >
1. Make sure that [UI-SEND] is set to [1] in service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> UI-SEND].
2. Execute setup once again. In the middle of setup, if a message is displayed saying that the option has been
already installed, it means normal completion of setup. If it is not displayed, continue to setup.
3. Since this symptom occurred in the field because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty, remove and reinstall
it once again. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Resolution Switch PCB: FG3-2728
16.3.4.2.6 Control panel switch (ON/OFF key) does not work although control panel is replaced
0005-6133

< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom was solved by unplugging/reinserting the cable that connects the Main Controller
PCB (Sub) to the control panel CPU PCB. Unplug and reinsert the connectors J1304 on the Main Controller
PCB and J1221 that connects to the control panel CPU PCB.
16.3.4.2.7 Streaks appear at intervals of 2cm; recurs after replacement of control panel
0005-9419

Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was
faulty. If the symptom still recurs even after replacement of the control panel, replace the Main Controller PCB
(Sub) with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Sub): FG3-2855
16.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction

16.3.4.3.1 Card Reader-D1: Counter does not increment after executing PWD-CLR, although
copying is possible
0005-6119
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
When executing PWD-CLR in service mode, it is necessary to set up the card reader once again. In service
mode [COPIER> Function>INSTALL>CARD], enter [1] and then start up the host machine again.
16.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection

16.3.4.4.1 'Close the front cover' is indicated
Symptom
'Close the front cover' is indicated
16-72
0002-1876
Chapter 16
Cause
Static noise would be happened if optinal cassette unit and iR1600 are not connected well to ground. It causes
bad communication between optinal cassette unit and iR1600, then iR1600 stopps paper feeding.'Close the front
cover' message would be indicated when paper jam happen caused by reason above, the message will be
indicated though jammed paper is removed and front cover is closed.
Field Remedy
Fix the grounding plate of optinal cassette unit located on the rear side of the iR1600 by binding screw with
washer.
16.3.4.4.2 Document detection failure of DADF-K1: Open/close of DADF-K1 not detected
0002-3026
Symptom
Installed DADF-K1 but the feeder open/ close detection is not working, so documents cannot be detected.
Cause
During installation, the cover plate had not been fitted to the reader upper assembly cover, so the open/close
sensor could not switch ON/ OFF.
Field Remedy
Attach the cover plate.
16.3.4.4.3 Service mode [COPIER>Function>SYSTEM>HDD] not completed for two hours
0002-3262
Symptom
When service mode > COPIER > Function > SYSTEM > HDD is run, the operation is still not finished two
hours later.
Cause
Even though this service mode was not being run, service mode was being displayed.
Field Remedy
Alternative service modes are as follows.
When service mode level 1 > COPIER > Function > SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE is set to '0' and run, a check and
recovery is run on the whole hard disk.
[Service mode display problem]

When the main unit system software is upgraded to Ver. ?? service mode level 1 > COPIER > Function >
SYSTEM > HDD is deleted.
16-73
Chapter 16
16.3.4.4.4 Host machine reboots when "Reservation copies can be made." message is displayed on
LCD: FAX unit is installed
0002-3467

Description
As a result of inspection, the SRAM Board PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Clear RAM of the SRAM in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON].
If the symptom still recurs, replace the SRAM Board PCB with a new one.
Note: Clearing the RAM or replacement of the SRAM Board PCB will erase all the image data inside the HDD.
FG3-2856 SRAM Board PCB Ass'y
16.3.4.4.5 Host machine locks up with message "Starting up. Please wait."
0002-8527

Cause
As a result of inspection, the SRAM Board PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Check whether E719-0000 was recorded in ERR of service mode. If it was, it is possible the SRAM Board PCB is
faulty. Accordingly, make sure that it is properly installed. If the symptom still recurs, replace the SRAM Board
PCB with a new one.
Description
In this case, the machine locked up when the progress bar which appears at start up reached at the end. E719-0000
was recorded in the error log; however, there was no indication on the LCD. E719-0000 is an error code occurring
when the coin vendor cannot be detected. The machine, in this case, is not equipped with a coin vendor.
16.3.4.4.6 Unable to start copy operation even by pressing Start key
0002-8532
Symptom
Unable to start copy operation even by pressing Start key
Description
This symptom occurs after the FAX board was installed.
Cause
There is a case in the field that reinstallation of the FAX board solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Reinstall the FAX board.
16.3.4.4.7 Half of image is missing when A3-sized original is copied
Description
Image is copied only in the half of page (A4 size).
16-74
0003-8605
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Initialize 'Copy Settings'. In user mode [Copy Settings>Initialize Copy Settings], select 'Yes'.
16.3.4.4.8 Machine rebooting or hanging up (locking up/nonoperational) upon release of FAX line
0003-8643

Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver.9.05. If the machine you are servicing is earlier
than Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.4.4.9 Machine hanging up (locking up/nonoperational) during auto gradation adjustment (full
correction)
0003-8645

Field Remedy
16.3.4.4.10 Set values in service mode (level 2) [COPIER>Adjust>COLOR (to adjust color balance
for each level of density)] return to '0' after power OFF/ON0?
0003-8652

Field Remedy
This symptom was corrected with System software Ver.9.05. Upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.4.4.11 Machine rebooting upon completion of broadcasting
0004-0628

Description
This symptom can occur upon outputting Send TX Report with the image after broadcasting to more than 50
destinations has been completed.
Field Remedy
16.3.4.4.12 PS-C1: Setup Information of PS-C1 disappears on rare occasions
0004-9870

Field Remedy
The setup information of PS-C1 can disappear on rare occasions. This symptom has been corrected with the
PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later.
16.3.4.4.13 iRC3200 displays Mailbox window on touch panel, not Copy, after startup is completed
0005-6102

< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Interface PCB was faulty. Unplug
and reinsert the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16-75
Chapter 16
16.3.4.4.14 iRC3200 reboots repeatedly after FAX board is installed
0005-6103

< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was
faulty. If this symptom does not recur without it, replace the Main Controller PCB (Sub) with a new one.
16.3.4.4.15 iRC3200 locks up while displaying 'Copying' even when pressing Start key
0005-6122

< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Interface PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on
it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16.3.4.4.16 iRC3200 shuts down and reboots unintentionally during FAX transmission
0005-6160

Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Remove and install it once
again. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16.3.4.4.17 iRC3200 reboots unintentionally: USB Interface Board is installed
0005-6161

Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the USB interface board was faulty. Install the board once again.
If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
(Note that the USB interface board is not assigned as a service part.)
16.3.4.4.18 When making copy, iRC3200 goes back to ready state and fails to output paper after
scanning: FAX Board is installed
0005-6163

Field Remedy
In this case, this symptom did not occur without the original FAX board but recurred when installing other FAX
board. It was found in the field that the DC fuse PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on the
DC fuse PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
DC Fuse PCB: FG3-2337
16.3.4.4.19 iRC3220 reboots when progress bar reaches right end and it almost starts up following
power-on upon installation
0008-1577

Description
The captioned symptom occurred because the connector J308 on the Reader Controller PCB in the reader unit.
16-76
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Check the connection of J308 on the Reader Controller PCB. If poor contact is found, reinsert it once again.
FG3-2570 Reader Controller PCB
16.3.4.5 Noise
16.3.4.5.1 Abnormal noise from DADF-K1
0003-8608

Cause
There is a case in the field that noise was heard from the drive unit of the ADF transfer belt because the belt was
held under a strong tension.
Field Remedy
Slightly decrease the tension of the ADF transfer belt. Shifting the position of the stoppers at the front and the
rear can adjust the tension.
16.3.4.5.2 DADF-K1 Continuous scanning sound is noisy: How to set DADF silent scanning mode
0003-8648
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode level 2 [COIPIER>Option>ACC>DF-MUTE], set at '1' to activate the DADF silent reading
mode. However, the speed of scanning the originals will slow down from 750mm/s to 420mm/s.
16.3.4.5.3 Abnormal noise when paper is picked up from Cassette
0005-3237

< Field Remedy >
It is possible that abnormal noise might occur at the time of paper separation. Although the level of noise is
within the specification, replace the separation roller with the one (FB5-0873) used in the Multi Feed Ass'y, if
the customer complaints it.
16.3.4.5.4 PS-C1: Fan is noisy
0005-4286

< Field Remedy >
The fan has been changed to a low-noise type. When changing the fan, install nylon snaps (4 pieces per one
fan) together.
Fan (low-noise type): FH9-0803
Nylon Snap: FH9-0802
16-77
Chapter 16
16.3.4.5.5 Abnormal noise from fixing ass'y
0005-4657

< Field Remedy >
be deformed due to its nip pressure, causing abnormal noise from the fixing ass'y during printing. This symptom
has been corrected with the DCON Ver.11.02 (software of DCON to be used together with System Ver.11.03).
Thus, if paper wrinkle occurs because of the fixing roller, upgrade the DCON to Ver.11.02 as well as replace
the fixing roller or the fixing ass'y.
mode.
16.3.4.5.6 Abnormal noise from fixing exhaust fan (FM2): Because delivery cooling fan cable
0008-1578

Description
The cable was connected to the delivery cooling fan in order to prevent the internal delivery roller from being
deformed by heat; however, abnormal noise was heard from the fixing exhaust fan or the cable was cut because
the cable was not fixed into the two cable cramps and interfered with the fixing exhaust fan.
Field Remedy
Inspect the cable to check whether it is fixed with two cable cramps securely. And, if you pull out the cable for
any service work, be sure to fix it with the cable cramps after the work.
FG3-3973 Delivery Cooling Fan Cable
16.3.4.6 User Warning Message

16.3.4.6.1 Indication of message 'Replace the toner container.'
0002-1879
Symptom
Indication of message 'Replace the toner container.'
Cause
There is a possibility that the waste toner container moves a little during operational vibration because of its
backlash, leading to misdetection.
Field Remedy
Clean the upper part of the waste toner container and a pair of waste toner sensors (light-emitting and receiving).
As a factory measure, a small part has been attached to the back of the front cover in order to hold the waste
toner container.
16-78
Chapter 16
16.3.4.6.2 Copying cannot be started as 'Waiting' is displayed.
0002-1883
Symptom
Copying cannot be started as 'Waiting' is displayed.
Field Remedy
Although a specific cause has not been determined, try turning the power OFF/ON.
FYI
1) Status line = 'Waiting', Dialog = 'Waiting':
The above are displayed when the job cannot be started for some reasons during the waiting status.
2) Status line = 'Preparing', Dialog = 'Waiting':
The above are displayed when the job cannot be started because the previous job is being in operation.
16.3.4.6.3 'Check network settings' not disappearing: even by swithcing 'Auto Detect' OFF in user
mode [System Settings>Network Settings>Ethernet Driver Settings]
0002-2523
Symptom
In user mode > System Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet Driver Settings, 'Auto Detect' is switched OFF
but a message 'Check network settings' cannot turn off.
Cause
This is a specification of this product.
Field Remedy
In service mode level 2 COPIER > OPTION > NWERR-SW, change the value from '1' to '0' and turn the power
OFF/ON.
0: Not display, 1: Display [Factory setting value/ post-RAM clear value]
16.3.4.6.4 How to indicate the timing when the drum should be changed.
0002-2538
Symptom
Want to show the timing when the drum should be changed.
Cause
The default settings (in service mode) of this product is as follows: Whether the degree of wear of the
photosensitive drum is displayed or not --> not displayed, whether the drum unit is suspended when it has
reached to the drum life --> not suspended. In other words, there is no indication available to encourage the
user to change the drum unit.
16-79
Chapter 16
Items to Check
The drum life can be checked in the following service mode.
Service mode level 1 COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > Y, M, C, K-DRM-LF
Drum unit life (Y/M/C/K ) appropriate range is 0 to 100.
Field Remedy
The default settings can be changed according to the following service mode:
*Service mode level 1 COPIER > OPTION > BODY >DLIFE-SW
Whether or not the degree of wear of the photosensitive drum is displayed.
0: not displayed [factory setting/post-RAM clear value)]
1: displayed (the degree of wear of the drum unit is displayed on user screen under 'System status' >
'Consumables'.
*Service mode level 2 COPIER > OPTION > USER > P-CRG-LF
Whether or not the drum unit is suspended when it has reached to the drum life.
0: not suspended [factory setting/post-RAM clear value]
1: suspended
(Method 1) DLIFE-SW '1', P-CRG-LF '1'
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is shown in the form of a progress
bar (showing the amount of life remaining). Also, a warning is given at 90% and a message 'Replace drum (all
colors)' is shown at 100% and the machine will be suspended.
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is NOT shown in the form of a
progress bar. Also, when the drum life reaches 100%, the error lamp flashes red and the machine will be
suspended.
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is shown in the form of a progress
bar (showing the amount of life remaining). Also, even when the drum life has exceeded 100%, the machine
will not be suspended and still can be used.
(Method 4) DLIFE-SW '0', P-CRG-LF '0' (default settings)
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is NOT shown in the form of a
progress bar. Also, even when the drum life has exceeded 100%, the machine will not be suspended and still
can be used.
16.3.4.6.5 When an arbitrary paper size is programmed in user mode [Common Settings>Stack
Bypass Standard Settings], paper of different paper sizes cannot be copied from the manual feed
tray.
0002-3350
Symptom
When an arbitrary paper size is programmed into user mode > common spec. settings > manual feed paper
standard mote registration, different sized paper is set in the manual feed tray and copies cannot be made.
Cause
If you register optional paper size in " User Mode> Common Specification Setting > Standard Mode
Registration for Manual Feed Paper", you can make a copy only on the registered size paper through manual
feeding. This is specified on this machine.
16-80
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
If you want to use paper of several sizes on manual feeding tray, explain to your users that they should not select
the "Standard Mode for Manual Feed Paper" in User Mode.
16.3.4.6.6 Message 'Close the front cover.' keeps displaying
0003-2348

Description
This message does not disappear even after replacement of the front cover open/close switch.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the front cover open/closed sensor (PS23) of the door switch unit was faulty.
Field Remedy
Whether the front cover is open or close is detected by the front cover open/closed sensor (PS23), not by the
front cover open/close switch.
In service mode [COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>P05>bit11], check the operation of the sensor. If a problem is found,
replace the front cover open/closed sensor (FH7-7312) with a new one.
16.3.4.6.7 Indication of paper size that has been registered as Stack Bypass Standard Settings
disappears by removing paper from manual tray
0003-8639

Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver.9.05 so that the registered paper size keeps
displaying although no paper is loaded in the manual tray. If the machine you are servicing is earlier than
Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.4.6.8 When attempting to use Remote UI, 'RUI Model Version 0902' message appears on a
computer display and unable to access host machine
0004-0721

Description
System Version: Ver.9.05
RUI: Ver.4.02
Cause
This symptom is caused by a mismatch in versions between System and Remote UI.
Field Remedy
Upgrade Remote UI to Ver.9.03.
16.3.4.6.9 Message 'Replace the waste toner container.' is displayed even after addition of sponge to
fix the waste toner container
0004-9851

Field Remedy
happens.
16-81
Chapter 16
16.3.4.6.10 Machine locking up/hanging up/nonoperational with message 'Adjusting gradation.

Please wait a moment.'
0004-9853

Field Remedy
When the front cover is opened during quick correction/full correction/at-rest gradation control, a message
'Adjusting gradation. Please wait a moment.' keeps displaying in the next job.
happens.
16.3.4.6.11 When installing Send Kit, message 'Protect Key Device is not connected.' is displayed
0005-1900
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
It is possible that the Protect Key Device Driver is not installed. Double-click [hdd32.exe] in [iR Series Send
System Setup Tool] and install [Protect Key Device Driver] by following the instructions on the monitor. Then,
execute the setup.
16.3.4.6.12 #853 User Error Code during printing
0005-3252
[ Manual-related ]
< Cause >
If the host machine stops printing because of no paper or no toner remaining, or if the speed of data input is
faster than the one of data processing (e.g. a large volume of print job is sent to the host machine), the area of
spooling on network will become full and communication clogging occur. As a result, a timeout occurs on the
computer and #853 is displayed without a completion of the job.
< Field Remedy >
1. Make sure that the host machine does not stop for any reasons such as no paper or no toner.
2. Enable network spooling function in user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Use Spooler> On] so
that it will become faster to release the computer that sends the job from network environment.
16.3.4.6.13 Message 'The file attachment cannot be processed by Internet Fax. No programs can
process the file attachment.' is printed out with text of received I-Fax
0005-4587
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
This symptom can occur when the files (images) that are attached to received I-fax documents are not
compatible with this machine. In that case, the machine does not process (print, forward, or store) these files,
but erases them instead. The names of the erased files and the message above is printed out with the text of the
received I-fax.
For your information, iRC3200 I-Fax can support only TIFF format (MH, MR, MMR).
16.3.4.6.14 #899 User Error Code: After e-mail or I-Fax transmission
0005-6092
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
#899 can be displayed when the e-mail or I-Fax has been successfully sent; however, it is unknown whether or
not reception has been complete because transmission was relayed via multiple servers.
16-82
Chapter 16
16.3.4.6.15 Message 'Insert drum cartridge. (color)' is displayed
0005-6127

< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Memory PCB was faulty. If the message does not disappear
even after the drum unit is replaced, replace the Memory PCB with a new one.
Memory PCB: FG3-2345
16.3.4.6.16 When attempting to access iRC3200 via Remote UI, message 'User information is
invalid' is displayed
0005-6207

It is impossible that the above message will be displayed when the privacy preference setting is set to 'High'.
Try changing the privacy preference setting to 'Medium'.
In the Internet Explorer's case, click [Tool]> [Internet Option]> [Privacy].
16.3.4.6.17 #802 when attempting to send e-mail
0004-0694
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This error can occur when the host machine cannot connect to SMTP server and DNS server because of wrong
settings of SMTP server and DNS server name.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the settings of SMTP server or NDS server for e-mail/I-fax are wrong. Check the settings:
SMTP server settings:
In user mode [System Settings>Network Settings>E-mail/I-Fax>SMTP Server]
DNS settings:
In user mode [System Settings>Network Settings>TCP/IP Settings>DNS Server Settings]
16.3.4.7 Other Defect

16.3.4.7.1 Pick up roller of ADF-J1 remains down
0002-1574
Symptom
Pick up roller of ADF-J1 remains down
Cause
It is caused by faulty spring clutch which should be locked as pick up roller is raised.
Field Remedy
Replace spring clutch. Part number is FG3-3485-000
16-83
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.2 Flaming or Blanking inoperative: When a document is set on the ADF, the function
[Special Features>Area Designation>Pen Entry>Flaming or Blanking] is inoperative.
0002-2517
Symptom
When a document is set on the ADF, the following feature is not available: Special Features > Area Designation
> Pen Entry > Flaming or Blanking.
Cause
This is a specification of this product. However, the following feature is available: Special Features > Area
Designation > Numeric Key Entry > Flaming or Blanking.
Field Remedy
Explain to customer.
16.3.4.7.3 [Two-page Separation] is inoperative: When a document is set on the ADF, [Special
Features>Two-page Separation] is inoperative.
0002-2520
Symptom
When a document is set on the ADF, Special Features > Two-page Separation is not available.
Cause
Field Remedy
Explain to customer.
16.3.4.7.4 When attempting to view each item through the remote UI on the client PCs, only
'Device' can be seen. When the user attempts to view 'Job', 'Copy', 'Box', 'Address' and 'U
0002-2533
Symptom
When attempting to view each item through the remote UI on the client PCs, only 'Device' can be seen. When
the user attempts to view 'Job', 'Copy', 'Box', 'Address' and 'User mode', he is prompted to enter 'User name' and
'Password', and the items cannot be viewed.
Symptom
This is a specification of this product. Please refer to 'SpotDisposal' for more information.
Field Remedy
When the card reader C1/D1 is installed or 'Dept. ID Management' is activated in user mode, the following items
cannot be viewed: 'System Manager ID' and 'System Password' in service mode, and information related to print
volume and billing through the remote UI.. 'System Manager ID' and 'System Password' which are registered
in user mode should be entered into 'User name' and 'Password', respectively. Then, all the items can be viewed
through the remote UI.
16-84
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.5 Card Reader-D1: Cautions upon installation
0002-2656
Symptom
Card Reader-D1: Cautions upon installation
Field Remedy
The installation procedures for the Card Reader-D1 is that the lowest number of the cards that are to be used
should be entered in service mode [COPIER>Function>INSTALL>CARD], and then the power is turned OFF/
ON.
DO NOT turn the power OFF until the entered number is displayed on the LCD (it will take 5 to 10 seconds).
It is possible that a mismatch in the data of SDRAM will occur and the machine will not start up with a message
'Starting up. Please wait.'.
16.3.4.7.6 Paper stacking failure: when outputting media of low rigidity in a high humidity
environment
0002-3536
Symptom
The medium tends to wave or curl if stacking is poor, as when the medium is of high rigidity and used in a high
Cause
The medium absorbs moisture, and tends to curl appreciably downward.
Field Remedy
Set'1'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEVL-FAN
16.3.4.7.7 Control key not working
0003-2739
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER>Function>INSTALL>KEY], set it at '1'.
16.3.4.7.8 PS-C1: Calibration cannot be performed
0003-3070
[Case in the field]

Cause
There is an actual case in the field that activating 'Accept Scan Job with Unknown IDs' solved the problem.
Field Remedy
If 'Dept. ID Management' is activated, calibration cannot be performed with 'Accept Scan Job with Unknown
IDs' is set at 'Off'. So, select 'ON' for 'Accept Scan Job with Unknown IDs' and then perform calibration.
16-85
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.9 Even after installing send kit, 'SEND' tab is not displayed on LCD
0004-0681

Description
Installation of the send kit has been successfully completed.
Cause
There is a case in the field that the symptom was corrected by reinstalling the Resolution Switching Board.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the Resolution
Switching Board is not properly recognized. So, try reinstalling it. If the
symptom is not corrected, replace it with a new one.

16.3.4.7.10 Unable to format or install HDD
0004-0719
[ Manual-related ]
Description
SST Ver.1.41 is used.
Field Remedy
The version of the SST which is applicable to iRC3200 is Ver.1.63 and later. Upgrade the SST to Ver.1.63 and
later.
16.3.4.7.11 #705
0004-0733
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
The data size of image that is being sent is larger than that specified in 'Maximum Data Size for Sending'.
Field Remedy
Change the maximum data size for sending: in user mode [System Settings>Communications Settings>E-mail/
I-Fax Settings>Maximum Data Seize for Sending].
16.3.4.7.12 Air bubbles are generated on surface of glossy paper
0004-2974

Cause
There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected by changing the fixing temperature control.
Field Remedy
1. Select 'Glossy Paper' that appears under 'Special Paper Types' for stack bypass paper selection.
2. If air bubbles are still generated, try changing the fixing temperature control in service mode
[COPIER>Option>BODY>TEMP-TBL].
0: 190 C (default)
1: 185 C
2: 180 C
16-86
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.13 PS-C1: Screen does not change while 'Please Wait' screen keeps displaying
0004-9713

Field Remedy
When 'Please Wait' screen appears, it does not change until pressing Close button. This symptom has been
corrected with a combination of the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1 and iRC3200 system Ver.10.01 so that the next
screen will automatically appear without pressing Close button.
16.3.4.7.14 PS-C1: Not start up after turning power of host machine OFF/ON
0004-9849

Field Remedy
If only the host machine is turned OFF/ON, it is possible that the system of PS-C1 does not start up normally.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 or later if this
happens.
16.3.4.7.15 PS-C1: Machine locking up (hanging up/nonoperational) after forcibly outputting paper
0004-9850

Field Remedy
After a paper size error occurs during printing, if the job is forcibly output through an operation on the host
machine control panel, PS-C1 can lock up. This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1,
so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later if this happens.
16.3.4.7.16 PS-C1: PS error when outputting image prepared with PhosoShop6 on Mac OS9
0004-9859

Field Remedy
When attempting to output the binary mode image file prepared with PhosoShop6 on Mac OS9, PS error might
occur. This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 or later if
this happens.
16.3.4.7.17 Reader unit does not operate after startup
0005-6112

< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the flat cables between the Reader Controller PCB and the Interface
PCB were not securely fitted. Unplug and reinsert it.
Interface PCB: J307, J308
Reader Controller PCB: J202, J203
16.3.4.7.18 FAX board cannot be detected even although it is replaced
0005-6132

< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the
connectors (particularly J1309 and J1336) on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16-87
Chapter 16
16.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment

16.3.4.8.1 DADF-K1 does not start to pick up originals
0005-6114

< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the 14T gear (FS7-0478) in the
separation drive unit was faulty. Inspect it to make sure that there is no abnormality such as breakage. If so,
replace it with a new one.
14T Gear: FS7-0478
16.3.5 Printing/scanning
16.3.5.1 No Output
16.3.5.1.1 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation
0002-3598
Symptom
E747-00FF: only with printing operation Error Code
Cause
UFR board is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the UFR board with a new one.
16.3.5.1.2 Unable to print
0002-8534
Symptom
Unable to print
Description
A print job can be sent from a PC, and PING also worked fine.
Field Remedy
If the setting in user mode [System Settings>Dept. ID Management>Accept Jobs With Unknown ID] is set at
'OFF', the same symptom will occur. Change it to 'ON'.
16.3.5.1.3 Unable to print from Windows98-equipped computer
0003-2342

Description
This machine is used as a UFR printer. Any print jobs from a WindowsMe-equipped computer is acceptable.
Field Remedy
Disable 'bidirectional' of spool setting in the printer driver and try it again.
16-88
Chapter 16
16.3.5.1.4 Machine locking up when attempting to output massive size of data: machine is
configured as a UFR printer
0003-2360

Description
This symptom occurred with a 3.7MB PDF file.
Cause
There is a case in the field that replacement of the UFR board solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Upgrade the printer driver to the latest version. If the problem is not still solved, try replacing the UFR board
with a new one.
16.3.5.1.5 PS-C1: Hanging up during continuous scanning
0003-2779

Cause
When FieryScan is kept running, the data will remain inside memory without being released (memory full).
This will cause PS-C1 to hang up.
Field Remedy
Install a patch file '1-8XS7M'.
[Installation Procedure]
1. Launch Fiery Downloader and set the connection type to PS-C1 as 'Direct queue'.
2. Download the patch file to PS-C1.
3. After at least 60 seconds, reboot PS-C1.
4. Press 'Extension' button on the LCD of iRC3200 and select the printer. When the LCD indicates [Idle], reboot
PS-C1 again.
5. After PS-C1 reboots, output [Configuration Page] and make sure that [Update Information] indicates [18XS7M].
16.3.5.1.6 Unable to output via UFR with 'Processing' indication
0003-8581

Cause
There is a case in the field that initialization of the printer solved the problem.
Field Remedy
In user mode [Printer Settings>Utility>Reset Printer], initialize the printer.
16.3.5.1.7 PS-C1: Unable to print
0003-8636

Description
This symptom can occur because of a communication error between the host machine and PS-C1.
Field Remedy
16-89
Chapter 16
16.3.5.1.8 Unable to output attached file in e-mail sent from computer to iRC3200
0004-0658
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
A file attached to an e-mail from a computer to iRC3200 should be: A4, monochrome, resolution 200x200dpi
and TIFF format. If not, it will result in an error.
Note that there is no limitation when an e-mail is sent from iRC3200 to a computer.
16.3.5.1.9 Machine locking up when attempting to print during sleep mode
0004-0723

Cause
There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected after the setting of energy consumption in sleep
mode was set at 'High'.
Field Remedy
In user mode [Common Settings> Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode], set it 'High'.
16.3.5.1.10 When attempting to print document selected with Envelope and stored in Inbox, unable
to print with message 'The paper type cannot be used with this mode.'
0004-2929
Field Remedy
If 'Envelope' is selected for the paper type, the finisher mode cannot be set. (The finisher mode is set by default.)
So, cancel the finisher mode and make a print. Refer to Mail Box Guide on page 5-9.
16.3.5.1.11 Unable to print with message 'Suspended'
0004-9731

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected by replacement of the UFR board. Remove and
install the UFR board, and if the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
UFR Board Ass'y: FG6-8983
16.3.5.1.12 PS-C1: Unable to print Text file attached to body of email when attempting to print
using E-mail client, resulting in PDL error
0004-9760
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. Text file attached to the body of the email cannot be printed.
16.3.5.1.13 PS-C1: Unable to print texts in body of email when attempting to print using E-mail
client
0004-9771
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. Text in the body of the email cannot be printed. For more details, refer
to the Printing Guide on page 8-3.
16-90
Chapter 16
16.3.5.1.14 Second sheet and later are not output during LPR printing
0005-4294

< Field Remedy >
As a temporary solution, do not launch Norton Firewall so that printing can be made properly.
As a permanent solution, update the file by executing LiveUpdate of Norton Firewall.
16.3.5.1.15 iRC3200 keeps displaying 'Processing' and does not print any data from computer
0005-6101

< Field Remedy >
16.3.5.1.16 When printing via UFR, iRC3200 locks up (becomes unoperational) with 'Waiting to
print' after outputting documents, unable to cancel~
0005-6218

Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and insert the
connectors on the PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
16.3.5.1.17 When printing through UFR, host machine halts with message 'Canceling'
0005-6596

< Field Remedy >
When the print job reaches the upper impression limit that has been specified using [Dept. ID Management]
feature, the host machine may halt with a message 'Canceling'. This symptom has been corrected with the UFR
Ver.1.02, so upgrade the UFR driver applicable to your computer's operating system to Ver.1.02 and later when
it occurs.
For your information, a temporary solution is to enable [Print After Completing RIP] in user mode [Printer
Settings> Settings> Print After Completing RIP> On]. (This process is not necessary when UFR is upgraded
to Ver.1.02 and later.)
16.3.5.2 Installation Failure

16.3.5.2.1 Unable to install UFR printer driver on Windows NT4.0
0003-2330
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
Field Remedy
UFR is applicable only with the following OSs: Win98/Me/2000/XP. WinNT is not supported.
16-91
Chapter 16
16.3.5.2.2 Color Network Scan Gear cannot be installed
0003-2790
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If a computer is Windows NT4.0/2000/XP, log in by [Administrator] and install the color network scan gear.
16.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result

16.3.5.3.1 Tip for scanning with Acrobat under auto duplex mode by using ADF
0002-1577
Symptom
Tip for scanning with Acrobat under auto duplex mode by using ADF
Description
When documents are set on the ADF and scanned under auto duplex mode, the pages of a PDF file get out of
order.
Cause
This is a specification limitation of Adobe Acrobat 5.x.
Field Remedy
Set the scanning settings on Acrobat at 'Simplex'.
16.3.5.3.2 Duplex printing is inoperative with Illustrator10.x.
0002-1850
Symptom
Duplex printing is inoperative with Illustrator10.x.
Description
Even when a file containing multiple pages are printed in duplex mode, it is output in simplex.
Field Remedy
Save the file in a form of Illustrator9.0 compatibility and print it in duplex mode from Illustrator9.x.
16-92
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.3 Printing unavailable with PS-C1: Setup menu not displayed
0002-1859
Symptom
Printing unavailable with PS-C1: Setup menu not displayed
Field Remedy
PS-C1 is applicable only with MN-CONT Ver.6.02 and later.
The setup menu can be displayed in the following procedure:
In service mode [COPIER>Option>INT-FACE>IMG-CONT], change from '0' to '3'. Then, press the button
'Expansion' on the control panel so that the setup menu will be displayed. Make settings for Server, Network
and Printer in this order and store the settings in each step.
16.3.5.3.4 Some fonts are garbled when using 'Image Combination' or 'Image Separation' functions.
0002-1892
Symptom
Some fonts are garbled when using 'Image Combination' or 'Image Separation' functions.
Description
This symptom concerns only Japanese fonts.
16.3.5.3.5 Black image: when scanned with iRC3200 PS-C1 using Fiery Scan3.4
0002-3563
Symptom
Black image: when scanned with iRC3200 PS-C1 using Fiery Scan3.4
Cause
Fiery Scan3.4 does not support iRC3200.
Field Remedy
If a scanning is done with iRC3200 PS-C1, install Fiery RemoteStan5 which is contained in a CD supplied with
iRC3200 PS-C1.
16.3.5.3.6 Unable to transfer scanned image to Windows XP Home-equipped PC
0003-2327

Field Remedy
If a Windows XP Home-equipped PC is used, right-click on the shared folder and select [Sharing/Security >
Sharing tab], and place a checkmark on the following:
'Sharing on the network'
'Share this folder on the network within security'
'Allow network users to change my files'
It is unnecessary to make the above settings for Windows XP Pro.
16-93
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.7 How to set image density scanned by network scan
0003-2386
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Common Settings>Gamma Value for Remote Scans], select a desired value. The default is
Gamma 1.8.
16.3.5.3.8 Output order is retrograde when making a copy from DF after 'Tray B' has been
designated as a delivery tray for copy
0003-2402
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
This is the specification of this product.
Field Remedy
If the side delivery tray (referred to as 'Tray B') is designated as a delivery tray for copy in a state of none of the
finisher products being installed, the back-side up delivery function becomes ineffective. This means that the
printed paper will be delivered right-side up and the output order will be retrograde against the original.
16.3.5.3.9 How to adjust image density when printing via UFR
0003-2781
[Manual-related]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Printer Settings>Settings>Image Quality>Density], adjust the density of each color.
16.3.5.3.10 PS-C1: Color around texts is different from background when outputting data of Quark
Xpress (for Mac4.1)
0004-0645

Field Remedy
Check the settings for printerfont on Mac side. If there are any fonts on which a check mark is not placed for
'Font exists', place the check mark on all the fonts.
16.3.5.3.11 When merging multiple documents in inbox, print settings for individual documents
become ineffective
0004-0696
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If you combine multiple documents and print them as one document, they are printed using the Standard Local
Print settings in stead of the individual settings of the respective documents. When the print is completed, the
individual settings become effective again.
For the detail of merging documents, refer to Mail Box Guide on page 5-28. For the standard local print settings,
refer to Reference Guide on page 4-48.
16.3.5.3.12 Document stored in Inbox from computer cannot be printed in monochrome
0004-2954
Field Remedy
A document stored in Inbox from a computer cannot be printed in monochrome mode. Refer to Mail Box Guide
on page 5-25 for more details.
16-94
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.13 PS-C1: When outputting to Direct queue on MacOS, halftone setting specified on
Illustrator not reflected on actual printing
0004-9765

Field Remedy
When outputting to Direct queue, the halftone setting specified on Illustrator may not be reflected to the actual
printing but changed to the default setting.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later if this
happens.
16.3.5.3.14 PS-C1: When attempting to duplex print with Custom paper size, it is printed by
Simplex
0004-9789

Field Remedy
When attempting to duplex print with Custom paper size, the job can be printed by Simplex depending on the
size. The supported size is [182 - 457.2] x [105 - 305]mm.
16.3.5.3.15 PS-C1: 11x17-sized paper is not output in proper direction when attempting to output
LTR and 11x17 simultaneously
0004-9865
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Select 'Large Paper Only' for [Rotate 180] in Print Options. For more details, refer to Appendix A: Print Options
in the Printing Guide.
How to set for Windows:
1. On you application, select [Print].
2. Click [Property].
3. Click [Fiery Print] tab.
4. From the print option bar, select [Rotate 180> Large Paper Only].
16.3.5.3.16 Color of output image is different from that shown on computer monitor when printing
via UFR: Windows2000 or XP-equipped PC is used
0005-3351

< Field Remedy >
On the window of UFR printer driver properties, click [Quality] tab> [Manual Color Settings]> [Color
Settings], and select [ICM Mode] for Matching Mode and [Perceptual (Monitor Color Matched)] for Matching
Method.
16-95
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.17 Print settings made in printer driver were not effective when printing multiple sheets of
MS Excel data
0005-4584

< Field Remedy >
In order to print multiple sheets of MS Excel data with some special features (e.g. duplex mode, specifying a
particular paper source), it is necessary to make those settings for every sheet. Before printing, make the
appropriate settings in [Properties] of the printer driver for every sheet.
16.3.5.3.18 When printing three-page document (PDF in this case) via UFR, 1st page is misaligned
and iRC3200 locks up with 'Waiting to print' indication during printing 3rd page
0005-6179

Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and insert the
connectors on the PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
16.3.5.3.19 PS-C1: Image data attached to document becomes mirror image
0003-8610

Description
This symptom can occur in the combination below:
Operating System: Windows 98/Me
Application Software: Word2000
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with a patch file '1-9C5YH'. Install it at the time of its occurrence.
16.3.5.3.20 To Activate ICC Profile when ICM Mode Is Selected in Printer Driver
0002-5425
Symptom
To Activate ICC Profile when ICM Mode Is Selected in Printer Driver
Overview
Select a color profile when you select ICM Mode for the Matching Mode in the Color Settings dialog.
Cause
There are two tab sheets for ICM controls on the driver. Without properly setting the relevant controls, you cannot
get the print results as desired.
Field Remedy
Field Countermeasure
Take the following steps for setting a color profile.
1. Open the Color Management tab sheet in the Properties for the printer.
2. Select Manual radio button.
Note: When Automatic is selected, the printer driver automatically selects the printer profile that matches the printer.
When Manual is selected, the color profile selected in the Color Profiles list box is used for printing.
3. If the list does not have the desired profile, click Add button, select the desired profile, and click Add button to
add the profile in the list.
16-96
Chapter 16
4. Select a profile from the list and click Set As Default button.
5. Click OK button to close the properties.
Then, select ICM Mode from the Matching Mode list box on the Matching tab sheet in the Color Settings dialog and
submit the job to the printer.
Remarks
Note that selecting improper profiles may cause undesirable print results.
ICC
F-16-53
16-97
Chapter 16
ICM
F-16-54
16.3.5.3.21 To Set Custom Paper Size
0002-5432
Symptom
Overview
This document shows how to set custom pager sizes.
Cause
For each driver version, you have to open different dialogs to reach to the Custom Paper Size Setting dialog. It is
not easy to find the dialog.
Field Remedy
On the Properties Dialog that Features Custom Paper Size Button
Select Start > Settings > Printers and open the Properties for the printer for setting custom paper size.
To Open Printer Properties
Click Printing Preferences button on General tab sheet.
General Tab Sheet
16-98
Chapter 16
PrinterPropaties
F-16-55
Click Custom Paper Size button on Page Setup tab sheet.
Page Setup Tab Sheet
Page Setup
F-16-56
16-99
Chapter 16
Click Custom Paper Size button on Page Setup tab sheet.

Page Setup Tab Sheet
Custom Paper Size Settings
F-16-57
16-100
Chapter 16
Select the defined paper size from the Output Size dropdown list box on the Page Setup tab sheet.
Output Size
(Fig)
OutPutSize
F-16-58
16-101
Chapter 16
On Device Settings tab sheet, click Form to Tray Assignment button.

Select Stack Bypass from Paper Source list and the defined paper size from the Paper Size dropdown list box.
(Fig)
Device Settings
F-16-59
16-102
Chapter 16
On the Properties Dialog without Custom Paper Size Button

No Custom Paper Size Button!
(Fig)
No Custom Paper Size Button
F-16-60
16-103
Chapter 16
Select Start > Settings > Printers and select the printer for setting custom paper size. On the menu bar in Printers
window, select File > Server Properties.
Server Properties
(Fig)
Server Propaties
F-16-61
16-104
Chapter 16
On Form tab sheet, select the Create a New Form option. Enter an appropriate name in the Form Description text
box. Under Measurements, enter appropriate values for Paper Size and Printer Area Margins fields.
Notes:
For setting Paper Size and Printer Area Margins, enter values within the range specified for the printer. The printer
driver does not show the custom paper sizes with values that exceed the specified range.
Enter 5 mm or larger values for the margins.
In Form to Tray Assignment dialog, select Stack Bypass from the Paper Source list and the defined paper size from
the Paper Size dropdown list box.
(Fig)
Create a new form
F-16-62
16-105
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.22 Printing Does Not Restart after Making up Paper
0002-5438
Symptom
Overview
The conditions to reproduce the problem are:
After making up, leave the printer for about 3 to 25 minutes before it restarts printing.
On Windows 2000 with SP1, SP2, and SP3. It does not occur on Windows 2000 without service pack.
With Standard TCP/IP (RAW) Port
Cause
The host does not send SNMP for several minutes, holding the spooler status in error. As a result, the printer does
not print for several minutes.
Field Remedy
In Properties dialog for the printer, select Ports tab and click Configure Port button to open the Configure Port dialog.
Then change either or both of the settings shows below.
Setting 1: Change the Protocol from RAW to LPR.
Setting 2: Turn off the SNMP Status Enabled option.
Remarks
If the LPR is used for protocol, transmitted data is not buffered in the NIC so that the symptom does not occur.
SNMP OFF
F-16-63
16-106
Chapter 16
16.3.6 Network
16.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure
16.3.6.1.1 Utility software (e.g. Network ScanGear) cannot be used, no problem with other
functions
0005-6123

< Field Remedy >
It is possible that [SNMP Settings] and [Enable Dedicated Port] are set to 'Off'. If so, change them to 'On'.
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> SNMP Settings> On
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Enable Dedicated Port> On
[SNMP Settings]: If you want to set or browse each item of the machine with utility software that uses SNMP
to obtain information, set it to 'On'.
[Enable Dedicated Port]: If you want to set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer
driver or utility software, set it to 'On'.
16.3.6.2 Connection Problem

16.3.6.2.1 Facsimile mark is occasionally displayed at lower-left corner of LCD, message 'POP
server connection error' is displayed
0004-0729

Description
This symptom can occur when the host machine has been configured to receive e-mail or I-fax via POP server.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the host machine is not properly connected to the POP server. Check the connection settings
of POP server:
In user mode [System Settings>Network Settings>E-mail/I-Fax], check [POP Server], [POP Address] and
[POP Password].
16.3.6.2.2 To Hide Check TCP/IP Connection Message
0002-5440
Symptom
Overview
This document shows how to hide the Check TCP/IP Connection message even when the network cable is connected.
Cause
When the driver cannot detect the TCP/IP, it displays the message for warning.
Field Remedy
Countermeasure 1: In Service Mode LEVEL2, select > COPY > OPTION > BODY > NWERR-S. Then change the
NWERR-SW from 1 to 0. The switch turns on and off the network error display.
Countermeasure 2: Select Add Function > System Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet Driver Settings. Then
click Off button for Auto Detect.
16-107
Chapter 16
16.3.6.2.3 Printing Is Not Performed after Long Time Sleep
0002-5442
Symptom
Overview
Printing is not performed after a log time sleep when the network uses 10/100 Base hubs.
Cause
While iR C3200 is sleeping, it cannot communicate with the hub. The network board in the printer cannot detect the
hub's transfer rate properly.
Field Remedy
Select Off button for Auto Detect, Full Duplex button for Communication Mode, and 100 Base-TX button for
Ethernet Type in the Ethernet Driver Settings dialog.
If transfer rate can be changed in the hub, change the setting for the port connected to the printer from the automatic
option to 100 M of fixed rate option.
Ethernet Driver Settings
F-16-64
16.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related
16.3.7.1 Transmission Problem
16.3.7.1.1 ##796 displaying at FAX transmission
Symptom
##796 displaying at FAX transmission
Field Remedy
This error is related to ECM.
Try to make 'ECM TX' invalid or replace the FAX board.
16-108
0002-1848
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.2 ##765 only with a specific destination
0002-1955
Symptom
##765 only with a specific destination
Description
The result is the same even by dialing the fax number on numerical keys.
Field Remedy
Change the following settings as below:
1. Transmission speed: 9600 bps
2. Echo protect tone in high speed transmission (SW03-1): Send
3. Bit output from DIS signal bit 33 onward (SW05-3): Prohibit
4. Protocol signals final flag sequences (SW04-2): 2
16.3.7.1.3 E674-0001: When the START button is pressed to send a G3 Fax, a beep sound is heard
and no transmission can be made. Also, E674-0001 is recorded in the error history. (Output
failure of the fuse PCB J61) <Refer to SymptomExplanation>
0002-2506
Symptom
When the START button is pressed to send a G3 Fax, a beep sound is heard and no transmission can be made.
Also, E674-0001 is recorded in the error history.
(Output failure of the fuse PCB J61) <Refer to
SymptomExplanation>
Description
There was no indication that this problem had occurred as far as the following were checked: 'Sending Job
Status', 'Receiving Job Status' and 'Job History'.
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the Super G3 Fax board PCB J560 from the fuse PCB J61. If no, check
the output of J61 on the fuse PCB.
2) If there is no DC output from the fuse PCB J61, check whether DC is input into the fuse PCB J53, J56, J57
and J58 from the DC power supply PCB. If DC is supplied from the DC power supply PCB, the fuse PCB is
likely faulty.
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the fuse PCB ass'y, if faulty.
Fuse PCB Ass'y Part No. FG3-2337-000
16-109
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.4 Lines in the main scanning direction at about 4mm intervals: on FAX received image at
receiving side
0002-4750
Symptom
Lines in the main scanning direction at about 4mm intervals: on FAX received image at receiving side
Description
This symptom does not occur on copied images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the main controller PCB with a new one.
F-16-65
16-110
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.5 One-sheet original is output in two sheets at receiving side
0003-2300

Field Remedy
Make the sender information smaller or change the printing position of the transmission terminal ID.
[How to make sender information smaller]
In service mode [FAX>NCU>SPECIAL-B>SW28], change bit6 to '1'.
[How to change TX transmission terminal ID position]
In
user
mode
[Communications
Settings>Common
Settings>TX
Settings>TX
Terminal
ID>On>Option>Printing Position], select 'Inside'.

16.3.7.1.6 Message 'Data exceeds available size.' is displayed at iFAX transmission
0003-2334

Cause
It is possible that the data size of the document exceeds the upper limit specified in user mode.
Field Remedy
In user mode [System Settings>Communications Settings>E-mail/I-FAX Settings>Maximum Data Size For
Sending], try increasing the data size.
16.3.7.1.7 Density of FAX-sent document is light
0003-2338
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning>Exposure Recalibration>Send (B & W)], make it darker.
16.3.7.1.8 Documents stored in Memory RX Inboxes are sent in a file after selecting all documents
(pressing 'Select All')
0003-8603
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
When attempting to send all documents stored in Memory RX Inboxes by pressing 'Select All', they will be sent
in a file, not in a separate file if MTIFF or PDF is selected as a file type.
In order to send the documents in a separate file, select 'TIFF' or 'JPEG' as a file type.
16.3.7.1.9 Unable to send documents by e-mail
0003-8762
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This symptom can occur if the subject of that e-mail is blank.
Field Remedy
For the security purposes, e-mails cannot be sent with its subject being blank depending on network
environments.
In user mode [System Settings>Communications Settings>E-mail/I-Fax Settings] check whether the field of
'Default Subject' is not blank. ('Attached Image' is entered by default.)
16-111
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.10 Transmission error sometimes occurring when sending I-Fax
0004-2921
Description
E-mail transmission results in successfully.
Field Remedy
If the data size of the document to be sent exceeds the upper limit, a transmission error occurs when being sent
as an I-Fax. (The documents will be sent by dividing into multiple mails when being sent as an e-mail.)
Change the upper limit of the transmission data size:
Sending]
16.3.7.1.11 E-mail is sometimes sent by dividing into multiple mails
0004-2923
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
Field Remedy
If the data size of the document to be sent exceeds the upper limit, the documents will be sent by dividing into
multiple mails when being sent as an e-mail.
Change the upper limit of the transmission data size:
Sending]
16.3.7.1.12 PS-C1: Unable to download PDF files from FieryDownloader with Direct connection
0004-9712
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. When attempting to download PDF files with Direct connection, the print
job will be spooled to the Print queue and then printed. If the Print queue is not enabled, the job is spooled to
the Hold queue and must be released for printing by the operator.
For more details, refer to the Printing Guide on page 4-5.
16.3.7.1.13 PS-C1: Unable to send Booklet job to BOX
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. When sending a booklet job to a BOX, it is canceled.
16-112
0004-9792
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.14 Message like 'Check the settings for the server.' is displayed when attempting to send
push scan to computer; push scan to Inbox is available
0004-9847
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If push scan to any Inboxes can be sent, the Resolution Switching Board and the sending function operate
normally. So, check the settings for the file server on the network. Refer to the Network Guide, on page 3-46
for FTP server, and on page 5-16 for configuration of the shared folder for Windows.
How to send push scan to any Inboxes:
Place a document> Press [Send] tab> Press [Store in User Inbox]> Select any Inbox> Press [Start] key
16.3.7.1.15 Unable to send scanned documents stored in Inbox
0004-9875
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. If the document you are attempting to send is [Scan Doc.] or [Print Doc.],
it is impossible. If you want to send them, store the document as [System Doc.] in the Inbox by following the
steps below:
Place a document> Press [Send] tab> Press [Store in User Inbox]> Select any Inbox> Press [Start] key
16.3.7.1.16 E-mail cannot be sent: Field of e-mail address of iRC3200 is blank
0005-4293
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
E-mail cannot be sent if the e-mail address of iRC3200 is not registered. Register the e-mail address in user
mode [System Settings> Network Settings> E-mail/I-Fax> E-mail Address].
16.3.7.1.17 iRC3200 displays 'Too many jobs are specified.' upon FAX TX, with Resolution Switch
PCB installed
0005-6107

< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Replace it with a new one.
16.3.7.1.18 When attempting to send FAX, iRC3200 does not dial destination's number after
scanning
0005-6176

Field Remedy
In this case, this symptom recurred even after installing other Fax board. It was found in the field that the DC
fuse PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on the DC fuse PCB. If the symptom still recurs,
replace the PCB with a new one.
16-113
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.19 Fax number is not entered partially (in the actual failure case, 2nd digit)
0007-4511

Description
If you enter a fax number using the numerical keys without pressing the "Fax" key immediately after switching to
the "Send" screen (this is not a proper procedure), the machine has to start up the entry screen of the fax number
and cannot accept any entry of the numerical keys in a fraction of a second because of software constraints. This
is to prevent any operational error even if some key operations are done during transition of the screens. In this
failure case, one digit of the fax number was not entered because the operator pressed the number during the
affected period of time.
Field Remedy
According to the proper procedure, press the "Fax" key after switching to the "Send" screen, and then enter the fax
number using the numerical keys. Or, enter the number slowly after making sure that the screen has been switched.
For more details, refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide [Basic Sending Methods> Specifying Destinations> Using
the New Address Tab> Specifying a Fax Number].
16.3.7.1.20 Address Book List Cannot Be Selected
0002-5500
Symptom
Address Book List Cannot Be Selected
Overview
When registering the Address Book for the Fax driver, users of the Users group cannot select Address Book List on
Windows XP in NTFS drive.
Cause
Users of the Users group for Windows do not have the privilege to access the Address Book file.
Field Remedy
To edit the Address Book, the user must have the privilege for the Power Users or higher group.
Remarks
In FAT32 drives, users who have the privilege lower than the Power Users can edit the Address Book.
16.3.7.1.21 End Code # 899
0002-5498
Symptom
Overview
Question
Sending a mail from iR C3200 to the mail server of the provider results in End Code # 899. What does the End Code
mean?
Answer
The chapter 12 in the Sending Guide has descriptions for this code, as shown below.
Cause
The iR C3200 has successfully sent out the email or ifax from the SMTP server, but cannot confirm that it has arrived
16-114
Chapter 16
the recipient server because it would be relayed via multiple servers.

Remedy 1: Confirm that the recipient has received it.
Remedy 2: Check if you have received an error notification.
Cause
The # 899 proves that the iR C3200 itself has sent the mail successfully.
In the Simple mode for iFax or email, iR C3200 is responsible for sending out data from its SMTP server but is not
responsible for tracing further transmission pathway to the recipient's mail server. Thus, it cannot judge if the
recipient can receive the data properly. In this sense, iR C3200 displays the # 899 to notify that it has sent data out
from the SMTP server successfully.
Field Remedy
Please explain the users the meaning of the # 899.
Remarks
This code appears when data is transmitted in Canon FTP with iW Gateway.
16.3.7.2 Reception Problem

16.3.7.2.1 Faint lines in the main scanning direction at about 1mm intervals: on FAX received image
0002-4748
Symptom
Faint lines in the main scanning direction at about 1mm intervals: on FAX received image
Description
This symptom does not occur on copied images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the main controller PCB with a new one.
16.3.7.2.2 iRC3200 displays 'Printing' after FAX reception and does not output RX documents
0005-6100

< Field Remedy >
16-115
Chapter 16
16.3.7.2.3 iRC3200 does not output FAX RX documents although reception has been completed
successfully
0005-6108

< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Remove and reinsert the
PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect

16.3.7.3.1 Alarm tone (Success tone, Error tone) emitted upon completion of sending/receiving fax
0004-8987
[ Manual-related ]
Description
According to Sending Guide/Facsimile Guide, the alarm volume is the tone that is emitted when an original has
been successfully sent/received using a fax, or when a send/receive error has occurred. However, the alarm tone
is not emitted upon completion of sending/receiving fax.
Field Remedy
In order to emit the alarm tone, the following setting change is required in service mode. So, set it upon request
from your customer.
1. For the success tone:
In service mode [FAX>NCU>SPECIALB>SW04], change bit1 at '1' (to emit).
'0' (not emit: default)
2. For the error tone:
In service mode [FAX>NCU>SPECIALB>SW04], change bit0 at '1' (to emit).
'0' (not emit: default)
16.3.8 Jam (Main Unit)

16.3.8.1 Paper not picked up: although the paper sensor detects paper inside the
cassette
0002-3284
Symptom
Sensor detects cassette paper, though no paper is present.
Cause
When the cassette is set, though the pickup roller should descends and stop on the paper surface, the pickup
assembly spring (FS7-2800-000) was out of place so the roller returned to the original position and paper could
not be picked up.
Field Remedy
Remove the pickup assembly and attach the spring (FS7-2800-000).
16-116
Chapter 16
16.3.8.2 0102 Jam Code
0004-9729

Field Remedy
0102 indicates that a delay jam is detected by the cassette 2 retry paper sensor (PS17).
1. Remove the paper pick-up ass'y and install a different one, and check whether the symptom can be corrected.
2. If the symptom can be corrected, replace the paper pick-up roller, the feed roller and the separation roller. If
the symptom cannot be corrected by these roller's replacement, replace the paper pick-up ass'y with a new one.
3. If the symptom cannot be corrected in the step 1, loosen the batch of paper loaded in the cassettes, or load a
new batch.
Paper pick-up roller: FB6-3405
Feed/separation roller: FB6-3407
Paper pick-up ass'y: FG6-9028
16.3.8.3 0105 Jam Code: Occurs with machine having mylar sheet to fixing/feeder
sensor flag
0002-3570

Field Remedy
Check whether the mylar sheet is properly attached to the fixing/feeder sensor flag. If not, reattach it or replace
the sensor flag with a new one.
FB6-3143-020 Fixing/Feeder Sensor Flag (New type as of June 15, 2004)
16.3.8.4 JAM CODE 0107
0003-8653

Description
This jam code indicates a delay jam at the fixing delivery sensor (PS25).
Cause
There is a case in the field that the lock lever applying pressure to the ITB was broken at a portion where the
spring is hooked and the ITB did not rotate, resulting in a paper jam.
Field Remedy
Check whether the fixing delivery sensor (PS25) operates normally in service mode [COPIER>I/O>DCCON>P007>bit4]. If there is no problem, inspect whether the lock levers (front and rear) for the ITB are broken
at the spring hook portion. If any breakage is found, replace it with a new one (FB6-2965-000).
16-117
Chapter 16
16.3.8.5 JAM CODE 0108, 0207
0002-3575
Symptom
JAM CODE 0108, 0207
Cause
Pins of the connectors in the delivery vertical path unit are bent.
Field Remedy
Because of a bend, there is a possibility that the connectors are not securely connected. Correct the bend if the
pins are bent.
Location of the connectors:
Slide out the Fixing Feeder Ass'y and open the delivery vertical path cover. Remove the delivery internal cover
by unfastening a screw. Two connectors can be seen there.
16.3.8.6 JAM CODE 0207
0003-8651

Description
This jam code indicates a stationary jam at the fixing delivery sensor (PS25).
Field Remedy
Check whether the fixing delivery sensor (PS25) operates normally in service mode [COPIER>I/O>DCCON>P007>bit4]. If any problems are found with the sensor, replace it with a new one (FH7-7312).
* Replacement of the fixing ass'y often solved the problem in the field; however, there are several cases where
toner adhering to the internal delivery roller or pinched wires of delivery vertical path motor caused this
symptom.
16.3.8.7 0207 Jam Code: Because of deformation of internal delivery roller
0007-9931

Description
The internal delivery roller was deformed by heat after long use and this degraded its paper delivery capability,
causing a paper jam. As a solution, in order to prevent the roller from being deformed by heat, a new part
"Delivery Cooling Fan Cable" is added and also the rotational sequence of the delivery cooling fan (FM5) is
modified. When this symptom occurs, follow the steps in Field Remedy below. The rotational sequence of the
fan is changed as follows:
- Original sequence:
The fan is off during standby and simplex copy, and rotates at full speed during duplex copy.
- New sequence:
The fan rotates at half speed during standby, and at full speed during simplex and duplex copy.
In addition, the following are starting serial numbers of the machine with the cable:
iR C3200 (120V): MSK23249
iR C3200 (120V): MSL01214
iR C3200 (EUR 230V): UKF03623
iR C3200N (EUR 230V): JAF05213
16-118
Chapter 16
iR C3200 (UK 230V): QLZ01829

iR C3200N (UK 230V): JBC02062
iR C3200 (FRN 230V): SLZ01812
iR C3200N (FRN 230V): JBQ02319
iR C3200 (GER 230V): TLZ01233
iR C3200N (GER 230V): JCJ01781
iR C3200 (ITA 230V): SSX00987
iR C3200N (ITA 230V): JCK00405
iR C3200 (A/B 230V): SSY00265
iR C3200N (A/B 230V): JCL01323
iR C3200 (AU 230V): RLZ02229
iR C3200 (TW 120V): MSN00125
iR C3200 (KR 230V): RQZ00321
iR C3200 (CN 230V): RQY00131
Field Remedy
1. Replace the internal delivery roller with a new one.
2. Connect the delivery cooling fan cable so as to change the rotational sequence of the delivery cooling fan.
Note: After connecting the cable, fix it with two pieces of the cable cramp adjacent to the delivery fan in order to
prevent the cable from interfering with the fan.
FB6-4862 Internal Delivery Roller
FG3-3973 Delivery Cooling Fan Cable
16.3.8.8 0A06 Jam Code
0004-9723

Field Remedy
0A06 indicates that a stationary jam is detected at the fixing inlet sensor (PS27) at power-ON.
1. Check whether or not the fixing inlet sensor (PS27) operates normally in service mode [COPIER> I/O> P007
bit3 (1: ON, 0: OFF)]. If it does not operate normally, replace it with a new one (FH7-7312).
2. If it operates normally, check whether the sensor flag moves smoothly
16.3.8.9 JAM CODE 0A0A: At about 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a
duplexing driver PCB failure
0002-2026
Symptom
About 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, a jam (0A0A) occurs due to a failure of the duplexing driver PCB.
Cause
Duplexing driver failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is output from the fuse PCB J70.
2) Check whether DC line is supplied to the duplexing driver PCB J440 from the fuse PCB J70.
16-119
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the duplexing driver PCB, if faulty.
Duplexing Driver PCB Ass'y Part No. FG6-9671-000
16.3.8.10 JAM CODE 0B00/0105
0002-5010
Symptom
JAM CODE 0B00/0105:
0B00 Front Cover Open/Close Sensor Jam
0105 Registration Delay Jam
Field Remedy
JAM CODE 0B00 is for front cover open/close jam and JAM CODE 0105 is for registration delay jam.
Check whether the delivery vertical path cover open/close sensor in the delivery vertical path ass'y is securely
installed. In the past, displacement of this sensor caused this
16.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder)

16.3.9.1 JAM CODE 008C: frequent occurrence recorded in jam history under
service mode, although unable to reproduce during paper feeding test.
0002-3047
Symptom
Service mode history shows frequent feeder document jams (008C). However, the jams are not reproduced
when a paper feed test is run.
Cause
Jams happened because mixed documents of the same size system were copies without pressing the 'Mixed
sized documents' key.
Field Remedy
Explain to the customer that she must press the 'Mixed size documents' key to copy mixed size documents.
Also, explain that documents of different size systems cannot be mixed.
16-120
Chapter 16
16.3.10 Error Code

16.3.10.1 E000 Error code detail The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time
of power-on is inadequate.
0002-1288
Symptom
E000 The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on is inadequate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-2
Detail
Description
0001
Timing of detection
After power-on, the output of the noncontact
thermistor does not reach 40C within 180 sec.
16.3.10.2 E001 Error code detail The fixing unit is overheating.
0002-1380
Symptom
E001 The fixing unit is overheating. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-3
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The high-temperature detection port ontinues to remain ON
for 500 msec.
0003
The reading of the no-contact thermistor remains 250C for

500 msec.
0004
The difference in temperature between the non-contact

thermistor and the end thermistor remains 80C or more for
500 msec.
0005
At the end of initial rotation, the difference in temperature

between the sub (end) thermistor and the main (noncontact)thermistor is 20C or more for 100 msec.
(A reversal in temperature (caused, for
example, by a piece of residual paper) is detected.)
16-121
Chapter 16
16.3.10.3 E002 Error code detail The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is
inadequate.
0002-1593
Symptom
E002 The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-4
Detail
0002
Description
Timing of detection
The output of the non-contact thermistor does not reach
60C within 240 sec after it has reached 40C.
0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0101

120C within 300 sec after power-on.
0102

16-122
Chapter 16
16.3.10.4 E003 Error code detai The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally
low after standby.
0002-1594
Symptom
E003 The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-5
Detail
Description
0001
Timing of detection
After standby, the reading of the non-contact thermistor
remains 120C or less for 10 sec.
16.3.10.5 E004 Error code detail The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty.
0002-1615
Symptom
E004 The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-6
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
A short circuit of the triac is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
0002
An open circuit of the temperature detection thermistor

inside the non-contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
0003
A short circuit of the temperature detecting thermistor

inside the non-contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
0004
An open circuit of the infrared detecting thermistor inside

the non-contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
0005
A short circuit of the infrared detecting thermistor inside

the non-contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
16-123
Chapter 16
16.3.10.6 E004-0003 Error code Or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher
trays.': after implementing countermeasure against malfunction of fixing feeder
unit open/closed sensor
0002-4676
Symptom
E004-0003 or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.': after implementing countermeasure against
malfunction of fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor Error Code
Description
This symptom occurs after attaching a sheet of mylar to the sensor flag for the fixing feeder unit open/closed
sensor as a countermeasure against malfunction
Cause
1. While attaching a sheet of mylar to the sensor flag, the delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor comes
off and short-circuited due to a contact with the sheet metal. Finally, the DC fuse PCB (FG3-2337) is broken.
2. Since the face-down delivery sensor 1 comes off, a message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.' is
displayed.
Field Remedy
1. Replace the DC fuse PCB with a new one.
2. Reinstall the face-down delivery sensor 1.
Note: When implementing the countermeasure, be careful not to detach the face-down delivery sensor 1 and the
delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor.
16.3.10.7 E004-0005 Error Code: Because of faulty DC Controller PCB
0006-2042

Description
E004-0005 can be displayed when a short circuit of the main thermistor (TH1) is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the DC Controller PCB was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Measure the electrical resistance with a tester to check whether the main thermistor is short-circuited. If so,
replace the main thermistor with a new one.
2. Inspect the cables and the connectors between the drawer connector of the fixing unit and the main thermistor
for any abnormality.
3. Inspect the cable and the connectors between J108A on the DC Controller PCB and the drawer connector deep
inside the machine for any abnormality.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one.
- Main Thermistor: FH7-7586
- Fixing Drawer Cable Ass'y (Fixing Ass'y): FG6-9644 for 100V, FG6-9646 for 120V, FG6-9647 for 220/240V
- Fixing Drawer Cable (Host Machine): FG3-2310
- DC Controller PCB: FG3-2356
16-124
Chapter 16
16.3.10.8 E004-0007 Error Code: Occasionally occurs first in the morning
0006-4441

Description
E004-0007 can be displayed when temperature monitored by the sub thermistor becomes 140 degrees C or lower.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the following were found:
- When a jam code "0107" was recorded in the jam history together with E004-0007:
Since adhesive agent for locking the screws of the fixing drive motor (FG6-9079) stuck to the damper, the
vibration of the fixing drive motor cannot be absorbed by the damper, and thus the motor drive was not delivered
to the fixing roller, causing the roller fail to rotate. Accordingly, the surface temperature of the roller did not
become even, resulting in the error code.
- The DC Controller PCB is faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Visually inspect the motor damper of the fixing drive motor. If adhesive agent sticks to it, remove it using a
jewelers screwdriver and check whether the error code will be resolved. If not, go on to the Step 2.
2. Visually inspect the fixing roller drive gears in the fixing unit for any abnormality.
3. Check the sub thermistor for any abnormality.
4. Check whether the gears in the fixing drive unit located on the back side of the host machine rotate at poweron. If not, remove the fixing drive unit and inspect the gears for any abnormality.
If no problem is found in the Steps 2 through 3, go to the next step.
5. In the field, this symptom was resolved by disabling the sleep mode in service mode [COPIER> Option>
USER> SLEEP> 0]. So, try this if possible.
6. If the Step 4 is impossible or the symptom still recurs, replace the fixing drive unit with a new one.
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one.
FH7-7587 Sub Thermistor (TH2)
FG6-9011 Fixing Drive Unit
FG3-2356 DC Controller PCB
16.3.10.9 E004-0006/E004-0007 Error Code Descriptions
0006-4444
[ Manual-related ]
Description
E004-0006 can be displayed when temperature monitored by the main thermistor becomes 150 degrees C or lower
during printing. The main cause is that the main thermistor is faulty.
E004-0007 can be displayed when temperature monitored by the sub thermistor becomes 140 degrees C or lower
during printing. The main cause is that the sub thermistor is faulty.
16-125
Chapter 16
16.3.10.10 E012 Error code detail The drum ITB motor is faulty.
0002-1616
Symptom
E012 The drum ITB motor is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-7
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The ITB drum motor
The lock (normal state) signal is not detected
fails to rotate.
within 2 sec after the ITB drum motor control

signal has gone ON or the motor speed has been
changed.
0002
The ITB drum motor
The lock (normal state) signal stops 0.5 sec later.
fails to rotate after it has

rotated.
0003
The lock (normal state) signal remains even when

the ITB drum motor has been stopped (i.e., the
lock (normal state) signal is detected continuously
for 2 sec after the ITB drum motor control signal
has been turned OFF).
16.3.10.11 E012-0001 Error code ITB motor not rotating
0002-1619
Symptom
E012-0001: ITB motor not rotating
Field Remedy
There is a possibility that the long arm is unable to actuate the front door switch because it almost comes off.
Make sure that the arm is placed securely.
16.3.10.12 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON,
due to a drum ITB motor failure
0002-2015
Symptom
About 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, E012-0001 is displayed due to a drum ITB motor failure.
Cause
Rotational failure of drum ITB motor
16-126
Chapter 16
Items to Check
1) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR, enter 1 and press the OK key.
2) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR-ON, press the OK key to check
whether the motor is working normally.
3) Check whether 24V is supplied to J93 on the ITB drum motor. If yes, the ITB motor likely faulty.
4) If 24V is not supplied to the ITB drum motor, check whether 24V is output from fuse PCB J70-3 to the ITB
drum motor.
Also, check whether 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the microswitch PCB and also whether 24V is
supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2 from the microswitch PCB.
5) If there is no problem between the fuse PCB J71-1, -2 and the microswitch PCB, the fuse PCB is likely faulty.
If 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the microswitch PCB and not supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2, check
the microswitch PCB.
Field Remedy
Replace the drum ITB motor.
DC Brushless Motor Part No. FH6-1971-000
due to a microswitch PCB failure
0002-2018
Symptom
About 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, E012-0001 is displayed, due to a microswitch PCB failure.
Cause
Rotational failure of drum ITB motor
Items to Check
1) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR, enter 1 and press the OK key.
2) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR-ON, press the OK key to check
whether the motor is working normally.
3) Check whether 24V is supplied to J93 on the ITB drum motor. If yes, the ITB motor likely faulty.
4) If 24V is not supplied to the ITB drum motor, check whether 24V is output from fuse PCB J70-3 to the ITB
drum motor.
Also, check whether 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the double switch PCB (microswitch PCB) and
also whether 24V is supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2 from the double switch PCB.
5) If there is no problem between the fuse PCB J71-1, -2 and the double switch PCB, the fuse PCB is likely
faulty.
If 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the double switch PCB and not supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2,
check the double switch PCB.
16-127
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Replace the double switch PCB.
Double Switch PCB Ass'y Part No. FG6-9015-000
16.3.10.14 E012-0001 Error Code: Drum ITB Motor, DC Power Supply PCB and
Fuse PCB work normally
0005-6214

Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Door Switch Ass'y was faulty.
Check whether or not 24V is supplied to the pin 1 of the connector J71 on the Fuse PCB while the door switch
is being actuated. If not, replace the Door Switch Ass'y with a new one.
Door Switch Ass'y: FG6-9013
For your information, if 24V is not supplied to the Fuse PCB, the relay on the PCB does not work and
consequently 24V is not supplied to the Drum ITB motor that is required to drive the ITB.
16.3.10.15 E012-0001 Error Code: Because Drum ITB Motor is faulty, or Fuse
PCB is faulty
0006-4440

Description
E012-0001 can be displayed when the drum ITB motor fails to rotate.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the following were found to be a cause. They are listed in order of decreasing number.
- The drum ITB motor is faulty.
- The Fuse PCB is faulty.
- Either of the open/close switches for the front cover, the manual feed tray unit or the fixing feeder unit is faulty.
- The connectors on the DC Controller PCB are not securely fitted.
Field Remedy
1. Remove the ITB unit and check whether the belt rotates smoothly.
2. Disconnect the connector J71 from the Fuse PCB and check the continuity between J71-1 and J71-3 with a
tester. If no continuity is verified, it indicates that either of the three switches above is not turned ON.
3. Check whether the drum ITB motor J93-1 is supplied with DC24V from the Fuse PCB J70-3. If not, replace
the Fuse PCB after checking the connection of the connectors on it.
4. Check whether the drum ITB motor J814-2 is supplied with DC5V from the DC Controller PCB J105B-16. If
not, replace the DC Controller PCB after checking the connection of the connectors on it.
5. If no problem is found in the Step 1 through 4, replace the drum ITB motor with a new one.
Front Cover Open/Close Switch (MSW1, 2): FG6-9015
Fixing Feeder Open/Close Switch (MSW5, 6): RH7-6037
Fuse PCB: FG3-2337
DC Controller PCB: FG3-2356
Drum ITB Motor: FH6-1971hITB[^ FH6-1971
16-128
Chapter 16
16.3.10.16 E020-0134 Error code Recurring even after replacement of yellow

drum unit
0002-1622
Symptom
E020-0134: recurring even after replacement of yellow drum unit
Cause
The ITB is not properly pressurized and a sample patch for ATR control is not formed on the ITB.
Field Remedy
There is a possibility that the ITB is not pressurized due to a breakage of the lock lever in the are applying the
pressure to the ITB. Also, there is a report from the field that the tension spring was broken.
Lock Lever (Front/Rear): FB6-2965-000
Tension Spring (Front/Rear): FS7-2785-000
16.3.10.17 E020 Error code detail There is a fault associated with the drum/
developer.
0002-1627
Symptom
E020 There is a fault associated with the drum/developer. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-8
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
For the first 2 digits of detail code xx20 through xxD0,

xx=01: Y
xx=02: M
xx=03: C
xx=04: Bk
xx20
There is a fault/open circuit in the
The fault can occur as when a new drum
ATR sensor. The drum unit is not
unit has been fitted. It is detected in
fitted normally, or is faulty.
about 90 to 120 sec after idle rotation of

the developing assembly.
xx24
SALT sensor.
unit has been fitted. It is detected during

ATR control or in about 150 sec after
idle rotation of the developing
assembly.
16-129
Chapter 16
Detail
xx25
Description
Timing of detection
SALT sensor.
The ITB has deteriorated.

assembly.
xx30
ATR sensor. The setting of the ATR
sensor computation value is wrong.
The drum unit is not fitted properly, or
is faulty.
xx34
xx35
The sample image fails to be drawn in
ATR control. There is a fault/open
circuit in the SALT sensor. The drum
unit is faulty. The ITB has
deteriorated.
assembly.
SALT sensor.
unit has been fitted. It is detached

during ATR control or in about 150 sec
after idle rotation of the developing
assembly.
xx40
The ATR sensor communication
value is faulty. There is a fault/open
circuit in the ATR sensor. The drum
unit has been fitted improperly. (The
machine cannot detect the drum unit).

The drum unit is faulty.
xx50
xx60
xx70
The developer concentration
The fault occurs when an image is
computation value is faulty (set when
being formed. It is detected when toner
a new drum unit is fitted).
supply operation is started.
The developer concentration target
value is faulty (set when a new drum is
fitted; the value is extremely small).
The developer concentration target
value is faulty (set when a new drum
unit is fitted; the value is extremely
small).
xx80
The actual value is considerably high
The fault occurs while ATR control is
in relation to the ITB surface
being executed.
reflectance when a new drum unit is

fitted. The SALT sensor is faulty.
16-130
Chapter 16
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
xx81
The actual value is considerably high
The fault occurs while ATR control is
in relation to the ITB surface
being executed.
reflectance when a new drum is fitted.

xxA0
The measured value of the developer
concentration is considerably low.
The ATR sensor is faulty. The SALT
sensor is faulty. The ITB is soiled.

xxB0
The drum unit is approaching the end
of its life and is causing the T/D ratio
to drop. The ATR sensor has an open
circuit.
xxC0
The supply of toner for the toner
container to the developing assembly
being formed.
is faulty. The developing assembly is

supplied with toner excessively. The
ATR sensor has an open circuit.
xxD0
container to the developing assembly
being formed and, in addition, when the
has failed. The toner cartridge motor
T/D ratio drops while 20 prints are
fails to rotate. The toner container is
being made continuously. It is detected
empty. The toner supply mouth of the
when toner supply operation is started.
drum unit is damaged. The ATR

sensor has an open circuit.
16.3.10.18 E020-xx81: generally E020-0181 Error Code
0002-1894
Symptom
E020-xx81: generally E020-0181 Error Code
Description
This error code is displayed when the coefficient of the SALT sensor contamination becomes lower than the
specified value; 70 or less in service mode [COPIER>Display>DENS>WINDOW-Y/M/C/K].
Cause
1. E020-0181: Since the service case storing the service book is not installed inside the front door, the SALT
sensor shutter is not opened. Consequently, the SALT sensor is unable to measure the density of sample patches
formed by the ATR control on the transfer belt.
2. E020-xx81: Since the SALT sensor is soiled, it is unable to precisely measure the density of sample patches
formed by the ATR control.
16-131
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
1. When E020-0181 occurs, first check whether the service case is installed inside the front door. If not, install
it to the designated position.
2. Check whether the SALT sensor is soiled with toner. If it is, slide the cleaning device several times or clean
the sensor with a blower brush. Do not rub the sensor surface with a dry cloth as it can be electrically charged
and soiled with toner again.
If E020-xx81 recurs even performing the above, replace the SALT sensor (FH7-7601) with a new one.
16.3.10.19 E020-0081 Error code Displaying when a copy is made with the service
case removed
0002-2508
Symptom
When a copy is made with the service case removed, E020-0081 is displayed.
Cause
There is a projection on the service case, which opens/closes the SALT sensor shutter. Therefore, if a copy is
made without the service case, E020-0081 is displayed.
Field Remedy
Re-attach the service case.
16.3.10.20 E020-0X34, E020-0X21 Error code Upon installation in a cold season
0002-3219
Symptom
The E020-0X34, or the E020-0X21 lights on when you install this machine in the cold season.
Cause
If you carry in this machine which has been placed in cold environment, condensation occurs because of the
temperature difference between the body and the room.
Condensation on the surface of the drum prevents toner from attaching to the drum, which causes the E0200X34 to light on.
Condensation on the patch sensor decreases the amount of light of the patch detecting sensor, which causes the
E020-0X24 to light on.
Field Remedy
Leave it as it is for about 15 minutes until condensation recovers.
16.3.10.21 E020-04B0 Error code At about 200 to 300 sheets from installation,
toner container motor (Bk) not rotating (Refer to SymptomExplanation.)
16-132
0002-3278
Chapter 16
Symptom
After installation, when about 200 to 300 sheets have been fed through, the toner container motor (Bk) does not
rotate and error E020-04B0 is displayed. (Supplementary reference)
Description
* E020-0xB0 detection timing
Reduced T/D ratio due to life of drum unit. Broken wire in ATR sensor.
If the toner container motor does not rotate and toner is not supplied to the drum unit, the toner in the drum unit
will gradually run out and the T/D ratio will get lower.
This can be checked in service mode COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-K.
Cause
Upon shipment from the factory, the cable relay jack (J674) of the toner container motor (Bk), leading from
the DC controller PCB was loose.
Items to Check
1 The operation of the toner container motor (Bk) can be checked with the following service mode procedure.
Under service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > PART-CHK > MTR, enter 5 and press OK.
2 Under service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > PART-CHK > MTR-ON, press OK.
If everything is normal, the toner container motor (Bk) will come ON in 10 seconds.
The problem in this case was that the motor did not rotate.
Field Remedy
First, check the listed items.
If the toner container motor is not operating, check the cables from the DC controller PCB J126-B4 to the cable
relay jack (J674) and to the toner container motor (Bk).
If the toner relay jack is loose, secure it.
If there is no toner container motor (Bk) drive signal output from the DC controller J126-B4, check the DC input
to the DC controller and, if there is nothing wrong, replace the DC controller.
16.3.10.22 E020-04B0 Cautions in replacing the drum unit
0002-3282
Symptom
Caution when replacing drum unit when E020-04B0 is displayed.
Cause
The treatment for E020-0xB0 is explained under Field Action.
16-133
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
* E020-0xB0 detection timing
Reduced T/D ratio due to life of drum unit. Broken wire in ATR sensor.
If the toner container motor does not rotate and toner is not supplied to the drum unit, the toner in the drum unit
will gradually run out and the T/D ratio will get lower.
This can be checked in service mode COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-Y/M/C/K. If the level is between 3.0% and -4.0%, an error will be generated.
16.3.10.23 E020-0X81 Error Code Displaying because of an open/close failure of

the SALT sensor shutter
0002-3334
Symptom
SALT sensor open/ close failure caused E020-0X83
Description
E020-0x83 detection timing
When the ITB surface reflection ratio measurement value detected by the SALT sensor is extremely low.
Cause
Faulty detection because SALT sensor shutter does not open/close properly due to failure of service book cover
SALT sensor shutter open/close rod assembly not pressing home against the main unit, due to a loose screw in
the service book cover, or similar.
Field Remedy
Check for any play in the front cover. Check that the screws in the service book cover are properly tightened.
16.3.10.24 E020-0124 Error Code
0002-3480
Symptom
E020-0124 Error Code
Description
This error code is displayed when the density of a sample patch generated in ATR control is higher than the
specified value.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that pins of the connectors connecting the pattern reader ass'y and the DC
controller PCB were bent, causing a malfunction.
Field Remedy
Check whether the pins of the connectors are straight.
16-134
Chapter 16
F-16-66
16.3.10.25 E020-OXB0 Error Code
0002-3551
Symptom
E020-0XB0
Cause
This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y becomes low. It is also
displayed when the drum unit has exceeded the end of its life.
Field Remedy
1. Visually inspect the contacts on both the drum unit side and the main unit side.
2. As a contact failure is possible, try pulling out and installing the drum cartridge.
3. Check whether the sealing tape in the toner cartridge blocks the opening for toner supply. If it does, remove
it completely and replace the drum unit with a new one.
4. If the DCON is Ver4.03 or smaller, upgrade it to Ver5.05 or higher.
16.3.10.26 E020-xx24 Error Code
0002-3553
Symptom
E020-xx24
Cause
This error code is displayed when the density of a sample patch generated in ATR control is higher than the
specified value.
Field Remedy
Visually inspect the SALT sensor for condensation on its surface. Even if there is condensation, do NOT wipe it off
with a dry cloth, but air-dry or use a hair dryer. If the error recurs, replace the SALT sensor with a new one.
Please note that the surface of the sensor can electrically be charged by wiping with a dry cloth and toner
contamination can occur.
16-135
Chapter 16
16.3.10.27 E020-xxA0 Error Code
0002-3556
Symptom
E020-xxA0
Cause
This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y has exceeded the specified value.
The
measured
value
of
developer
concentration
is
15
or
less
in
service
mode
[COPIER>Display>DENS>SGNL-Y/M/C/K].
Field Remedy
1. Check whether the cables of the ATR sensor in the developing ass'y are broken or not. If the value displayed
by selecting service mode [COPIER>Display>DENS>SGNL-Y/M/C/K] is 0, the cables can be broken.
2. Visually inspect the contacts on both the drum cartridge side and the main unit side. As a contact failure is
possible, try pulling out and installing the drum cartridge.
16.3.10.28 E020-xxD0 Error Code
0002-3560
Symptom
E020-xxD0
Cause
This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y drops while 20 prints are
being made continuously.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the opening for toner supply of the toner cartridge is not damaged. If it is damaged, replace the
toner cartridge with a new one.
2. Make sure that the connectors of the toner container motors (M20 to M23) are securely inserted. If they are
unplugged, insert them securely.
16.3.10.29 E020-xx34 Error Code
0002-3566
Symptom
E020-xx34
Cause
This error code is displayed when the density of a sample patch generated in ATR control is lower than the specified
value.
Field Remedy
Visually inspect the SALT sensor for condensation on its surface. Even if there is condensation, do NOT wipe
it off with a dry cloth, but air-dry or use a hair dryer. If the error recurs, replace the SALT sensor with a new one.
Please note that the surface of the sensor can electrically be charged by wiping with a dry cloth and toner
contamination can occur.
16-136
Chapter 16
16.3.10.30 E020-0125 Error Code
0004-5069

Field Remedy
E020-0125 can be displayed when there is a fault/open circuit in the SALT sensor, a fault in the drum unit, or
the ITB is deteriorated.
As a result of inspection, it was found that a pin of the connector of the SALT sensor was deformed, causing
poor contact. Check whether the pin of the connector is deformed.
16.3.10.31 E020-03B0 Error Code: Overall fogging (no margin) occurred after
replacement of Cyan drum unit
0004-8989

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the DC Controller PCB was faulty.
For your information, when the overall fogging with no margin occurs, there is a high possibility that there is a
problem with the DC controller PCB or the H.V. transformer PCB. On the other hand, if there is a margin, it is
possible that the main controller PCB or the sub controller PCB is faulty.
16.3.10.32 E032 Error code detail The counter of the NE controller fails to
operate.
0002-1631
Symptom
E032 The counter of the NE controller fails to operate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-9
Detail
0000
Description
Timing of detection
The counter function of the NE controller fails to operate.
16.3.10.33 E110 Error code detail The operation of the laser scanner motor is
faulty.
0002-1634
Symptom
E110 The operation of the laser scanner motor is faulty.(Error code detail)
16-137
Chapter 16
Description
T-16-10
Detail
0110
Description
Timing of detection
The rotation of the Y laser
The motor lock signal remains in an unlock
scanner motor is faulty.
state for 1 sec or more while the laser scanner

motor is in operation.
0210
The rotation of the M laser

0310
The rotation of the C laser

0410
The rotation of the K laser

16.3.10.34 E110-0x10 Error Code
0004-8993

Field Remedy
E110-0x10 can be displayed when the rotational failure of the laser scanner motor has been detected.
1. Swap the affected laser unit with others.
2. Check whether or not the sub code of E110 will be changed.
- If the sub code is changed, the laser unit is faulty. So, replace it with a new one.
- If the sub code is not changed, it is possible that the DC controller PCB is faulty. So, replace it with a new
one. In the field, replacement of the DC controller PCB solved the problem.
DC controller PCB: FG3-3003 (100V), FG3-2356 (120/220/240V)
Laser Unit: FG6-8962
16-138
Chapter 16
16.3.10.35 E202 Error code detail A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1
mirror home position.
0002-1639
Symptom
E202 A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-11
Detail
0000
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The No. 1 mirror base moves in
The home position sensor does not
reverse but does not move to its home
go ON within a specific period of
position.
time.
The No. 1 mirror base moves forward
but does not move from its home
go OFF within a specific period of
position.
time.
16.3.10.36 E202-0000 Error Code
0002-8538
Symptom
Description
E202-0000 is displayed when the optical home position sensor (SR2) does not go ON within a specific period
of time.
Cause
There is a case in the field that unplugging/reinserting the connector on the interface PCB solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Check whether the optical home position sensor (SR2) operates normally in service mode [COPIER>I/O>RCON>P004>bit5].
If there is no problem with the sensor (SR2), unplug and insert the connectors on the interface PCB (J301, J305,
J306, J309, J311).
16-139
Chapter 16
16.3.10.37 E220 Error code detail A fault has occurred in activating the scanning
lamp.
0002-1641
Symptom
E220 A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-12
Detail
0000
Description
Timing of detection
The intensity of the scanning
During shading adjustment at time of
lamp has dropped.
power-on, the intensity detected by the

CCD is below a specific level.
16.3.10.38 E220-0000 Error Code: Entire image sometimes becomes tinged with
red
0002-2536

Cause
Field Remedy
Replace the CCD unit with a new one.
FM2-0023 CCD Unit
F-16-67
16-140
Chapter 16
[Image tinged with red]
F-16-68
[Normal Image]
16.3.10.39 E220-0000 Error Code
0002-3288
Symptom
E220-0000
Description
Although the power lamp lights up once, E220-0000 is displayed immediately.
Cause
Poor contact of the flat cable (J102) which is connected to the CCD unit.
Poor contact of the flat cable (J205) which is connected to the RCON.
Field Remedy
Securely insert the flat cables.
CCD unit side: J102
RCON side: J205
16.3.10.40 E220-0000 Error code Faulty connection in the flat cable from the
CCD unit into R-CON J205 causes.
0002-3358
Symptom
Faulty connection in the flat cable from the CCD unit into R-CON J205 causes E220-0000.
Cause
Connection failure in the flat cable that goes into R-CON J205.
Field Remedy
Insert the flat cable properly.
16-141
Chapter 16
16.3.10.41 E220-0000 Error Code: Scanning lamp did not light up after turning
power ON
0004-8991

Field Remedy
E220-0000 can be displayed when the intensity detected by the CCD becomes below a specific level during
shading adjustment at time of power-ON.
Unplug and insert the flat cable connecting the CCD unit and the reader controller PCB (CCD side: J102, RCON
side: J205). If the symptom still recurs, replace the reader controller PCB with a new one because its
replacement solved the problem in the field.
Reader Controller PCB: FG3-2564 (100V), FG3-2570 (120/220/240V)
16.3.10.42 E220-0000 Error Code when turning power ON while opening platen
cover
0005-6111

< Field Remedy >
It is possible that the connectors connecting to the Interface PCB are not securely fitted. Unplug and reinsert
them on the Interface PCB.
16.3.10.43 E220-0000 Error Code: No problem with CCD unit and Reader
Controller PCB
0005-6124

Description
E220-0000 can be displayed when the intensity detected by the
CCD is below a specific level during shading adjustment at power-on.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Inverter PCB was faulty (specifically, the fuse F1 opened.).
Field Remedy
Check continuity of the fuse F1 on the Inverter PCB. If it opens, replace the PCB with a new one.
Inverter PCB: FH3-7213
16-142
Chapter 16
16.3.10.44 E220-0000 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, because of poor

contact of J204 on Reader Controller PCB, iRC3220
0008-1581

Description
Because the flat cable J204 on the Reader Controller PCB had poor contact, E220 was displayed at power-on upon
installation.
E220-0000 can be displayed when the intensity detected by the
CCD is below a specific level during shading adjustment at power-on.
Field Remedy
Check the connection of J207 on the Reader Controller PCB. If poor contact is found, reinsert it once again. Be
sure to lock it after insertion.
16.3.10.45 E240 Error code detail The communication between the main motor
controller and the DC controller is faulty.
0002-1644
Symptom
E240 The communication between the main motor controller and the DC controller is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-13
Detail
Description
0000
Timing of detection
There is a fault in the serial communication between the
main controller and the DC controller.
16.3.10.46 E243 Error code detail The control panel is faulty.
0002-1645
Symptom
E243 The control panel is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-14
Detail
0000
Description
Timing of detection
There is a fault in the communication between the
controller and the control panel.
16-143
Chapter 16
16.3.10.47 E302 Error code detail A fault has occurred in relation to shading
correction.
0002-1647
Symptom
E302 A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-15
Detail
0000
0001
Description
Timing of detection
A time-out has occurred in
The shading processing does not end 1
shading operation.
sec after it has started.
The gain/offset correction (setting
gain/offset correction by the
operator) by the analog processor does
analog processor.
not end 1 sec after it has started.
16.3.10.48 E315 Error code detail The image data is faulty.
0002-1650
Symptom
E315 The image data is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-16
Detail
Description
0001
Timing of detection
A time-out condition has occurred in encoding/
decoding processing of image data.
16.3.10.49 E315-0010 Error code Only for FAX is transmitted

Symptom
E315-0010 Error Code: only for FAX is transmitted
Cause
Resolution Switching Board is faulty.
Field Remedy
Resolution Switching Board is faulty.
16-144
0002-3583
Chapter 16
16.3.10.50 E351 Error code detail The ECO-ID PCB is faulty.
0002-1651
Symptom
E351 The ECO-ID PCB is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-17
Detail
0000
Description
Timing of detection
There is a fault in the initial communication.
16.3.10.51 E351-0000 Error Code: Because of poor connection of connector on

ECO-ID PCB
0006-6281

Description
E351-0000 can be displayed when an error occurs in initial communication of the ECO-ID PCB.
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the connector between the ECO-ID PCB
and J1315 on the Main Controller PCB (Main) was not securely fitted. So, check the connection.
16.3.10.52 E402 Error code detail There is a fault in the feeder motor.
0002-1653
Symptom
E402 There is a fault in the feeder motor. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-18
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
The feeder motor (M2) fails to
The feeder motor encoder pulse is not
rotate. The feeder motor clock
detected within 0.3 sec after the DF
sensor (SR1) is faulty.
feeder motor drive signal has been

turned ON.
16-145
Chapter 16
16.3.10.53 E402 Error Code
0003-8600

Description
This error code can be displayed when the feeder motor encoder pulse is not detected within 0.3 sec after the
DF feeder motor drive signal has been turned ON.
Cause
There is a case in the field that an adjustment of the ADF transfer belt solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Check whether the feeder motor (M2) and the feeder motor clock sensor (SR1) are operating normally. If there
is no problem, adjust the tension of the belt.
16.3.10.54 E404 Error code detail There is a fault in the delivery motor.
0002-1656
Symptom
E404 There is a fault in the delivery motor. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-19
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
The face-down delivery motor
The face-down delivery motor encoder
(M3) fails to rotate. The
pulse is not detected within 0.3 sec after
facedown delivery motor clock
the face-down delivery motor drive
signal has been turned ON.
16.3.10.55 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication.

(Finisher-N1)
0002-1665
Symptom
E500 There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-20
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
There is a fault in data
The communication between the machine
communication.
and the finisher remains disrupted for 5 sec or

more.
16-146
Chapter 16
16.3.10.56 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication.

(Finisher-M1)
0002-1671
Symptom
E500 There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-21
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
There is a fault in
The communication between the machine and the
data communication.
finisher is disrupted and, in addition, an attempt at

recovery within 5 sec fails.
16.3.10.57 E503 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle communication.
0002-1673
Symptom
E503 There is a fault in saddle communication. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-22
Detail
0002
Description
Timing of detection
The communication between the saddle stitcher
communication.
controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB

remains disrupted for 5 sec or more.
16-147
Chapter 16
16.3.10.58 E504 Error code detail There is a fault in stack size detection.
0002-1675
Symptom
E504 There is a fault in stack size detection. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-23
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The height sensor (PS1) is
The communication between the height
faulty.
sensor and the finisher controller PCB is

prevented. Or, there is a fault in the
communication data.
0002
The height sensor (PS1) is
The communication between the height
faulty.
sensor and the finisher controller PCB is

prevented for 0.1 sec or more.
0003
The connector of the height
This fault is detected at power-on.
sensor (PS1) is faulty.

0004
The DIP switch for the
There is a fault in the adjustment of the
height sensor (PS1) is not
sensor by the DIP switch.
adjusted correctly.
16.3.10.59 E505 Error code detail There is a fault in the backup RAM.
Symptom
E505 There is a fault in the backup RAM. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-24
16-148
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0001
The checksum value of the finisher controller
This fault is detected at
PCB is faulty.
power-on.
0002-1677
Chapter 16
16.3.10.60 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-N1)
0002-1679
Symptom
E512 There is a fault in delivery.(Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-25
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0001
The delivery roller, feed motor
The delivery motor clock sensor fails to
(M2), or feed motor clock
generate the target number of clock
sensor (PI10) is faulty.
pulses within 10 sec at the start of

operation.
0002
The delivery roller, feeder
There is no clock pulse for a feed
motor (M2), or feeder motor
equivalent for 0.2 during
clock sensor (PI10) is faulty.
communication.
16.3.10.61 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-M1)
0002-1687
Symptom
E512 There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-26
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
The delivery motor (M1) or the
The delivery clock sensor signal is
delivery clock sensor (S1) is faulty.
not detected when the delivery
The connector is disconnected.
motor has been driven for 70 mm.
16-149
Chapter 16
16.3.10.62 E514 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise
direction)
0002-1692
Symptom
E514 There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-27
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
The stack processing motor (M2) or
The stack delivery lever fails to
the stack delivery lever home position
reach its home position when the
sensor (S8) is faulty. The connector is
stack processing motor has been
disconnected. The stack delivery belt
driven for a specific period of time
or the return roller is faulty.
at start of operation.
16.3.10.63 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in alignment.(Finisher-N1)

Symptom
E530 There is a fault in alignment.(Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-28
Detail
0001
0002
Description
There is an excess load on the
The aligning plate does not leave the
alignment motor (M3), aligning
aligning plate home position sensor
plate home position sensor (PI6),
when the alignment motor has been
or aligning plate.
driven for 2 sec.
There is an excess load on the rear
The aligning plate does not return to its
alignment motor (M3), rear
home position when the aligning plate
motor has been driven for 2 sec.
(PI6), or rear aligning plate.
16-150
Timing of detection
0002-1695
Chapter 16
16.3.10.64 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in rear alignment. (Finisher-M1)
0002-1698
Symptom
E530 There is a fault in rear alignment.(Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-29
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
The rear alignment motor (M4)
The rear aligning plate fails to reach the
or the rear aligning plate home
home position sensor or fails to leave the
position sensor (S7) is faulty.
aligning plate home position sensor when
An excess load is imposed on
the rear aligning plate has been driven for
the rear aligning plate.
a specific period of time.
16.3.10.65 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-M1)
0002-1700
Symptom
E531 There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-30
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
The stapler motor (M6) or
The stapler fails to leave the stapling home
the stapling home position
position sensor when the stapler shift motor
sensor (S17) is faulty. The
has been driven for 0.5 sec, or does not return
stapler harness is faulty.
to the stapler home position sensor.
16-151
Chapter 16
16.3.10.66 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1)
0002-1702
Symptom
E531 There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-31
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The stapler motor (M6) or the
The stapler does not leave the
stapling home position detecting
stapler shift position when the
switch (MS7) is faulty.
stapler shift motor has been driven

for 0.5 sec.
0002
The stapler does not return from the

for 0.5 sec.
16.3.10.67 E532 Error code detail There is a fault in the shift of the stapler
Symptom
E532 There is a fault in the shift of the stapler. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-32
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The stapler shift motor (M4) or the
The stapler shift base does not
stapler shift home position sensor
leave the stapler shift home
(PI7) is faulty. There is a fault in the
position sensor when the stapler
path of the stapler shift base.
shift motor has been driven for 4

sec.
0002
The stapler shift motor (M4) or the
stapler shift home position sensor
return from the stapler shift home
(PI7) is faulty. There is a fault in the
path of the stapler shift base.

sec.
16-152
0002-1704
Chapter 16
16.3.10.68 E535 Error code detail There is a fault in the swing mechanism.
0002-1706
Symptom
E535 There is a fault in the swing mechanism. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-33
Detail
0001
0002
0003
Description
Timing of detection
The swing motor (M7) or the
The swing guide closed switch does not
swing guide open sensor (PI18)
go ON when the swing motor has been
is faulty.
rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
The swing guide open switch does not go
swing guide closed switch
ON when the swing motor has been
(MS6) is faulty.
rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
The safety area switch (MS3)
The swing guide closed switch is OFF
or the swing guide switch 2
when the tray 1/2 is in the OFF position
(MS6) is faulty.
of the safety area switch while the tray

ascent/ descent motor is in operation.
0004
There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec while
swing motor clock sensor
swinging operation is under way.
(PI20) is faulty.
16.3.10.69 E537 Error code detail There is a fault in front alignment.
0002-1709
Symptom
E537 There is a fault in front alignment. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-34
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
The front alignment motor
The aligning plate fails to reach the
(M3) or the front aligning plate
aligning plate home position sensor when
home position sensor (S6) is
the rear alignment motor has been driven
faulty. An excess load is
for a specific period of time, or fails to
imposed on the front aligning
leave the aligning plate home position
plate.
sensor.
16-153
Chapter 16
16.3.10.70 E540 Error code detail There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray.
0002-1711
Symptom
E540 There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-35
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0001
The tray ascent/descent motor
The ascent/descent operation does not end
(M5), the tray ascent/descent
within 15 sec after the tray assent/descent
motor clock sensor (PI9/PI19),
motor has been driven; or, the tray home
or tray home position sensor
position is not detected when it has been
(PIE) is faulty.
driven for 15 sec.
0002
0003
The tray upper limit detecting
The tray upper limit detecting switch is
ON during tray ascent/descent operation.
There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec or more
(M5) or the tray ascent /descent
from the clock sensor when the tray
motor clock sensor 1/2 (PI9/
ascent/descent motor has been driven.
PI19) is faulty.
16.3.10.71 E577 Error code detail
There is a fault in stack processing
(counterclockwise direction).
0002-1714
Symptom
E577 There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-36
Detail
16-154
Description
Timing of detection
The stack processing motor (M2) or the
The return roller fails to reach the
return controller home position sensor
return roller home position sensor
(S3) is faulty. The connector is
when the stack processing motor
disconnected. The stack delivery lever
has been driven for a required
or the return roller is faulty.
period of time.
Chapter 16
16.3.10.72 E580 Error code detail There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack
tray.
0002-1716
Symptom
E580 There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-37
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
The stack tray ascent/descent
The stack tray upper limit sensor goes
motor (M5), stack tray paper
ON while the stack tray ascent/descent
height sensor (S10), or the stack
motor is in operation, or the clock pulse
tray ascent/descent motor clock
of the stack tray direction motor clock
sensor is not detected 15 times or more
connector is disconnected. An
within 0.8 sec.
excess load is imposed on the
The stack tray does not reach the stack
stack tray ascent/descent motor.
tray height sensor within 4 sec after the

stack tray ascent/descent motor has
started ascent operation.
16.3.10.73 E584 Error code detail There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2).
0002-1718
Symptom
E584 There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-38
Detail
Description
0001
The No. 2 feed motor (M8)
The shutter open sensor does not go ON
or the shutter open sensor
when the No. 2 feed motor has been rotated
(PI5) is faulty.
in reverse for 1 sec or more.
The No 2 feed motor (M8) or
The shutter closed switch does not go ON
the shutter closed switch
when the No. 2 feed motor has been rotated
(MS4) is faulty.
in reverse for 1 sec or more.
0002
0003
Timing of detection
The safety area detecting
The shutter closed switch is OFF when the
switch (MS3) or the shutter
tray 1/2 is in the OFF position of the safety
closed switch (MS4) is
area switch while the tray ascent/ descent
faulty.
16-155
Chapter 16
16.3.10.74 E5F0 Error code detail There is a fault in paper positioning for the
saddle.
0002-1719
Symptom
E5F0 There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-39
Detail
0001
0002
Description
Timing of detection
The paper positioning plate
The paper positioning plate home
motor (M4S) or the paper
position sensor does not go ON when the
positioning plate home position
paper positioning plate motor has been
sensor (PI7S) is faulty.
driven for 1.33 sec.
position sensor does not go OFF when the
paper position plate motor has been
driven for 1 sec.
16.3.10.75 E5F1 Error code detail There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle.
Symptom
E5F1 There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-40
Detail
Description
0001
The paper fold motor (M2S) or
The number of detection pluses of the
the paper fold motor clock
paper fold motor clock sensor falls below
a specific value.
The state of the paper fold home position
the paper fold motor clock
sensor remains unchanged when the paper
fold motor has been driven for 3 sec.
0002
16-156
Timing of detection
0002-1720
Chapter 16
16.3.10.76 E5F2 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle guide.
0002-1722
Symptom
E5F2 There is a fault in the saddle guide. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-41
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0001
The guide motor (M2S) or the
The guide home position sensor does not
guide home position sensor
go ON when the guide motor has been
(PI13S) is faulty.
rotated for 0.455 sec.
The guide home position sensor does not
go OFF when the guide motor has been
(PI13S) is faulty.
driven for 1 sec.
0002
16.3.10.77 E5F3 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle alignment.
0002-1743
Symptom
E5F3 There is a fault in saddle alignment. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-42
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0001
The alignment motor (M5S) or
The aligning plate home position sensor
the aligning plate home
does not go ON when the alignment motor
position sensor (PI5S) is faulty.
has been driven for 0.5 sec. (initially,

driven for 1.67 sec)
0002
The alignment plate home position sensor
the aligning plate home
does not go OFF when the alignment
16-157
Chapter 16
16.3.10.78 E5F4 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear.
0002-1752
Symptom
E5F4 There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-43
Detail
Description
0001
The stapler motor (rear, M6S)
The stitching home position sensor does
or the stacking home position
not go OFF when the stitch motor (rear)
sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty.
has been rotated clockwise for 0.5 sec.
0002
Timing of detection
The stitch motor (rear, M67S)
or the stitching home position
not go ON when the stitch motor (rear)has
been rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
16.3.10.79 E5F5 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front.
Symptom
E5F5 There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-44
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0001
The stitch motor (front, M7S)
not go OFF when the stitch motor (front)
sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty.
has been driven clockwise for 0.5 sec or

more.
0002
The stitch motor (front, M7S)
not go ON when the stitch motor (front)
has been driven in reverse for 0.5 sec or

more.
16-158
0002-1753
Chapter 16
16.3.10.80 E5F6 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper
pushing plate.
0002-1756
Symptom
E5F6 There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-45
Detail
0001
0002
0003
0004
Description
Timing of detection
The paper pushing plate motor
The paper pushing plate home position
(M8S) or the paper pushing
sensor does not go ON when the paper
plate home position sensor
pushing plate motor has been driven for
(PI14S) is faulty.
0.3 sec or more.
The paper pushing plate home position
sensor does not go OFF when the paper
plate home position sensor
pushing plate motor has been driven for
(PI14S) is faulty.
80 msec.
The paper pushing plate leading edge
position sensor does not go OFF when the
plate leading edge position
paper pushing plate motor has been
driven for 80 msec.
The number of detection pulses of the
paper pushing plate motor clock sensor
plate motor clock sensor
has dropped below a specific value.
(PI1S) is faulty.
0005
The paper pushing plate leading edge
positioning sensor does not go ON when
plate leading edge position
the paper pushing plate motor has been
driven for 0.3 sec or more.
16-159
Chapter 16
16.3.10.81 E5F8 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle connector.
0002-1758
Symptom
E5F8 There is a fault in the saddle connector. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-46
Detail
0001
0002
0003
Description
Timing of detection
The connector of the guide
The connector of the guide home position
home position sensor (PI13S)
sensor has been identified to have been
is faulty.
disconnected.
The connector of the paper
The connector of the paper pushing plate
pushing plate home position
home position sensor is identified to have
been disconnected.
The connector of the paper pushing plate
pushing plate leading edge
position sensor is identified to have been
position sensor (PI15S) is
disconnected.
faulty.
16.3.10.82 E5F9 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle switch.
Symptom
E5F9 There is a fault in the saddle switch. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-47
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The inlet cover switch
The inlet cover switch is identified to be open for
(MS1S), front cover
1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation or of
switch (MS2S), or
printing in the host machine with any of the
delivery cover switch
following sensor identifying the cover to be
(MS3S) is faulty.
closed:
. inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
. front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S)
. delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
16-160
0002-1759
Chapter 16
Detail
0002
Description
Timing of detection
The front cover switch
The front cover switch is identified to be open for
(MS2S) or the delivery
1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation or of
cover switch (MS3S) is
printing in the host machine with any of the
faulty.
following sensors identifying the cover to be

closed:
0003
The delivery cover
The delivery cover switch is identified to be open
switch (MS3S) is faulty.
for 1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation

or of printing in the host machine with any of the
following sensors identifying the cover to be
closed:
16.3.10.83 E601-0xdd: after performing [COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT-Y/M/C/K]

to improve faint image
0002-3339
Symptom
When adjusting faint image in service mode level 2 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT-Y/M/C/K, E061-0xdd is
displayed.
Cause
The adjustment range of service mode level 2 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT-Y/M/C/K is -30 to +30. When
adjusted in the + direction, the image gets darker.
Depending on the life of the drum, as the adjustment moves in the + direction, the charge DC exceeds the upper
limit and E061-0xdd is generated.
Field Remedy
Adjust image faintness as described below.
1 In service mode level 1 COPIER > DISPLAY > Y/M/C/K-DRM-LF, check the drum life. The correct range
is from 0 to 100%. If the life has been exceeded, replace the drum.
2 Perform user mode > adjust/ cleaning > automatic gradation correction > full correction.
3 In service mode level 1 COPIER > TEST > PG > THRU, set 0 (default) and 1, and output at each setting with
service mode level 1
COPIER > TEST >PG > TYPE=14
Compare the maximum density areas output at 'THRU 0' and 'THRU 1' and if the densities are different proceed
to step 4.
4 Adjust in service mode level 1 COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-Y/M/C/K, and again, in service
mode level 1 COPIER > TEST > PG > THRU, set 0 (default) and 1. With each setting, output service mode
level 1 COPIER > TEST >PG > TYPE=14.
16-161
Chapter 16
If the maximum density areas at 'THRU 0' are the same as those of 'THRU 1', carry out user mode > adjust/
cleaning > automatic gradation correction > full correction.
*Make a test copy. If the correct density is produced, the procedure is finished.
*If the correct density is not produced, go to step 5.
5 In service mode level 2 COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K, check the Vd value.
6Again, in in service mode level 1 COPIER > TEST > PG > THRU, set 0 (default) and 1. With each setting,
output service mode level 1 COPIER > TEST >PG > TYPE=14.
If 'THRU 0' is faint, adjust in service mode level 2 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VCONT-Y/M/C/K (1
unit: 10V). If the image is faint, increase the value.
Input a value that is 650V or lower when added to the the original value (as displayed in CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K)
by VCONT. If this value is exceeded, E061-0xdd will be generated and then the full correction performed in
step 7 will be disabled.
7 Perform user mode > adjustment/ cleaning> automatic gradation correction> full correction.
16.3.10.84
E602-0001/E602-0002/E602-0003
Error
Code:
Remedy
upon
occurrence of error code
0002-1761
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The captioned error codes are displayed when:
a. E602-0001: the host machine detects that the system is not properly installed in the HDD when the HDD starts
up.
b. E602-0002: the host machine detects an error during reading the data from the HDD when the HDD starts up.
c. E602-0003: there occurs a discrepancy between the control data for the data stored in the HDD and the actual
data. (HDD sector Write Abort)
Field Remedy
a. E602-0001
Check a connection between the HDD and the Main Controller PCB. If there is no problem, replace the HDD with
a new one and reinstall the system software.
Or, replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one if it is faulty.
b. E602-0002
Reinstall the system software.
c. E602-0003
There are four partitions inside the HDD. The following are solutions depending on in which sector a write abort
occurs.
c-1. Write Abort in Image Storage Area
Turn the power OFF/ON, which can recover errors automatically.
c-2. Write Abort in other areas than Image Storage Area
c-2-1. If you can enter service mode:
c-2-1-1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> STSTEM> CHK-TYPE], select "0" and perform [HD-CHECK].
The required time depends on a capacity of the HDD, usually approximately 20 to 40 minutes.
c-2-1-2. Turn the power OFF/ON to make sure that the machine starts up normally.
c-2-1-3. If no, perform [HD-CLEAR] by selecting "1" and "2".
c-2-1-4. Reinstall the system software.
16-162
Chapter 16
c-2-2. If you cannot enter service mode:

c-2-2-1. While pressing the numerical keys 1 and 9 simultaneously, turn the power ON. The recovery program
will automatically start and the LCD will go out.
c-2-2-2. Then, the LCD comes on, turn the power OFF/ON to make sure that the machine starts up normally.
c-2-2-3. If not, perform [HD-CLEAR] by selecting "1" and "2".
c-2-2-4. Reinstall the system software.
WM2-5210 HDD
FG3-2854 Main Controller PCB
16.3.10.85 E602 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty.
0002-1776
Symptom
E602 The hard disk is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-48
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The fault may be a HD detection error, in which the HD
cannot be detected. The machine may fail to become ready
(returning an error code).
0002
The startup file is absent. The program for the main CPU
does not exist on the HD, in BOOTDEV/BOOT or the like.
0003
The fault is a HD write/abort error. The machine fails to read

sectors of the HD.
0005
It is a fault in the detection of the HD controller IC. It is

detected when the HD controller IC cannot be recognized or
an error is detected in it.
0006
The auxiliary startup file is absent. The correct SUB CPU

program does not exist on the HD or in BOOTDEV/BOOT
or the like.
0007
The color profile file does not exist. The correct color profile
file does not exist in BOOTDEV/PDL or the like.
01XX
The partition DOSDEV is faulty.

(For detail code, see below.)
02XX
The partition PSTDEV is faulty.

03XX
The partition DOSDEV2 is faulty.

16-163
Chapter 16
Detail
Description
04XX
Timing of detection
The partition FSTPDEV is faulty.
05XX

06XX
The partition PDLDEV is faulty.

07XX

08XX
The partition BOOTDEV is faulty.

09XX

FFXX
A fault exists in a partition that cannot be identified. (For

detail code, see below.)
Detail code of E602

Last 2 bytes of detail
code (indicated by
XX)
01
Description
Device error: sector, write/abort, other HDD access (driver)

error
02
File system (logic) error: error detection by check

processing; mounting failure
03
Other error: HDD connector fault; HDD detection failure;

secondary error as of DRAM fault
16-164
10
HD controller HD controller IC, driver No. error
11
HD controller IC, driver not installed
12
HD controller IC, system error
13
HD controller IC, device error
14
HD controller IC, parameter error
21
packet R/W file operation, system error
22
packet R/W file operation, parameter error
23
packet R/W file operation, packet DMC error
24
packet R/W file operation, packet DMAC time-out
25
packet R/W file operation, HD controller IC error
Chapter 16
due to a failure of the Distribution Board PCB Ass'y
0002-2029
Symptom
About 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, E602-0001 is displayed due to a failure of the Distribution Board
PCB Ass'y.
Cause
Distribution board failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether 12V DC is input to the HDD unit J44-1 and 5V to J44-4. If no, check whether 12V DC is
output from the distribution board PCB J1505-1 and 5V from J1505-4.
If there is DC output from the distribution board PCB J1505, check the connection of the flat cable between the
HDD and the main controller. If there is no problem there, the HDD is likely faulty.
2) If there is no DC output from the distribution board PCB J1505, check whether 5V is input to the distribution
board PCB J1501-1 and 12V to J1501-8. If no, check the fuse PCB.
Field Remedy
Replace the distribution board PCB Ass'y.
Distribution Board PCB Ass'y Part No. FG6-9676-000
due to a connection failure of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main
controller
0002-2486
Symptom
About 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, E602-0001is displayed due to a connection failure of the flat cable
between the HDD unit and the main controller.
Cause
Faulty connection of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller
Items to Check
Check whether 5V DC is supplied to J44-1 and 12V to J44-4 on the HDD unit.
If No, the distribution board PCB Ass'y or the DC power supply PCB Ass'y.
Field Remedy
Securely insert the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller.
16-165
Chapter 16
16.3.10.88 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after performing HD-CHECK
0002-3294

Description
E602-0202 is an error code occurring when a file system logical error occurs in the partition FSTDEV of the HDD.
Field Remedy
In the field, the following service mode recovered the host machine.
1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE], enter "1" and then press OK. "1": Image storage
area
2. In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> HD-CHECK], press OK.
16.3.10.89 E602-0202 Error Code: Because of faulty SRAM Board PCB
0002-3476

Description
E602-0202 is an error code occurring when a file system logical error occurs in the partition FSTDEV of the HDD.
As a result of inspection, the SRAM Board PCB was found to be faulty in this case.
Field Remedy
Clear RAM of the SRAM in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON].
If the symptom still recurs, replace the SRAM Board PCB with a new one.
Note: Clearing the RAM or replacement of the SRAM Board PCB will erase all the image data inside the HDD.
16.3.10.90 Progress bar on machine starting-up window is slower than usual, then
E602 Error Code is displayed
0004-4203

Field Remedy
In this case, executing clear of 'MN-CON' in service mode enabled the machine to start up; however, it took for
as long as 60 seconds (normally less than 40 seconds). Replacement of the HDD solved the problem.
HDD: WM2-5188
16.3.10.91 E602-0402 Error Code: not recovered after replacement of main

controller PCB
0004-5067

Field Remedy
E602-0402 can be displayed when a file system error occurs. There is a case in the field that replacement of the
SRAM board PCB which holds administrative data for the HDD.
SRAM Board PCB: FG3-2856
16-166
Chapter 16
16.3.10.92 E602-0x02 Error Code
0005-3232

< Field Remedy >
When the power is turned ON, iRC3200 checks the control table for HDD stored in SRAM on the SRAM board.
E602-0x02 can possibly be displayed during checking unassigned field in SRAM.
This symptom has been corrected with the system Ver.11.03, so upgrade it to Ver.11.03 and later if this happens.
16.3.10.93 E602-0001 Error Code
0005-8612

Cause
Because of temperature rising around iRC3200, 5V input voltage into the HDD will become unsteady and
finally the HDD will detect low voltage input, leading to E602-0001 indication.
Field Remedy
When E602-0001 is displayed, check the 8-digit lot number on the DC Fuse PCB. If the last two digits show
[01] or [02], replace the PCB with [03] or bigger.
16.3.10.94 E602-0402 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, iRC3220
0008-1586

Description
When E602-0402 was displayed at power-on upon installation, MN-CONT clear was executed and the symptom
was solved. When this symptom occurs, follow the steps in Field Remedy.
E602-0402 can be displayed when the partition FSTPDEV inside the HDD is faulty. The detail code indicates a
file system error.
Field Remedy
1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CONT], press OK. The host machine will restart
automatically.
2. Turn the control panel switch OFF and then turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
Note: MN-CONT clear will erase all the image data stored in the HDD.
16.3.10.95 E604 Error code detail
There is a shortage in image memory
(SDRAM).
0002-1778
Symptom
E604 There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-49
Detail
0000
Description
Timing of detection
The remaining space in image memory is inadequate for
the intended write/read operation.
16-167
Chapter 16
16.3.10.96 E604-0000 Error Code: Because of faulty expansion RAM
0006-4445

Description
E604-0000 can be displayed when the capacity of the actually-mounted memory is smaller than the intended capacity.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the expansion RAM was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Check the capacity of the actually-mounted memory in service mode [COPIER> Display> ACC-STS> RAM]
(768MB: expansion RAM exists, 512MB: no expansion RAM). If it shows "512MB", remove and insert the
expansion RAM to see whether "768MB" will be displayed.
2. In order to identify the root cause whether the expansion RAM or the slot on the Main Controller PCB (Main)
is faulty, remote the original SDRAM (512MB) and insert into the expansion RAM slot to see whether the host
machine will start up normally.
3. If the host machine start up normally, replace the expansion RAM with a new one. If not, replace the Main
Controller PCB (Main) with a new one.
Expansion RAM: WA7-2383
16.3.10.97 E605 Error code detail The battery for image memory is faulty.
Symptom
E605 The battery for image memory is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-50
Detail
0000
16-168
Description
Timing of detection
A specific drop in voltage has been detected.
0002-1782
Chapter 16
16.3.10.98 E606 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty.
0002-1783
Symptom
E606 The hard disk is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-51
Detail
Description
0001
Timing of detection
A HD mounting error is detected when the HD is booted from
BOOT ROM.
0002
A reading error is detected when the HD is booted from

BOOTROM.
16.3.10.99 E674 Error code detail The fax board is faulty.
0002-1785
Symptom
E674 The fax board is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-52
Detail
Description
0000
Timing of detection
A communication error occurred though the FAX board
is detected.
16.3.10.100 E677-0002 Error Code
0004-9766
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
E677-0002 can be displayed when executing [Run Setup] of PS-C1 during printing. [Run Setup] must be
executed when the status is Idle.
16-169
Chapter 16
16.3.10.101
E711
Error
code
detail
There
is
fault
in
IPC
communication.(DADF-K1)
0002-1787
Symptom
E711 There is a fault in IPC communication.(DADF-K1)(Error code detail)
Description
T-16-53
Detail
0001
0002
Description
Timing of detection
There is a fault in data communication.
An error has been detected 4
The ADF controller or the reader
times or more within 1.5 sec
controller PCB is faulty. The connector
after the communication
between the reader unit and the ADF has
between the reader unit and the
poor connection.
ADF has been disrupted.
The finisher controller, pedestal
times or more within 1.5 sec
controller, or DC controller PCB is
after the communication
faulty. The connector between the
between the finisher and the
finisher and the cassette pedestal has
machine has been disrupted.
poor contact.
16.3.10.102 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication.

Symptom
E711 There is a fault in IPC communication. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-54
16-170
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0001
The ADF controller or the reader
times or more for 1.5 sec after
controller PCB is faulty. The connector
the communication is disrupted
between the reader unit and the DADF
has poor contact.
DADF.
0002-1789
Chapter 16
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0002
The finisher controller, pedestal
times or more for 1.5 sec after
controller, or DC controller PCB is
the communication between
faulty. The connector between the
the finisher and the machine is
finisher and the machine has poor
disrupted and, in addition, an
connection.
attempt at recovery has failed.
16.3.10.103 E712 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between
the ADF and the reader unit.
0002-1793
Symptom
E712 There is a fault in the communication between the ADF and the reader unit. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-55
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
There is a fault in data communication. The
An attempt at recovery fails 5
ADF controller or the reader controller PCB
sec or more after the
is faulty. The connector between the reader
communication between the
unit an the ADF has poor contact.
reader unit and the ADF has

been disrupted.
the finisher and the cassette pedestal.
0002-1796
Symptom
E713 There is a fault in the communication between the finisher and the cassette pedestal. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-56
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
There is a fault in data communication. The
The communication between
cassette pedestal controller or the finisher
the finisher and the machine is
controller PCB is faulty.
disrupted.
16-171
Chapter 16
the cassette pedestal and the printer unit.
0002-1798
Symptom
E716 There is a fault in the communication between the cassette pedestal and the printer unit.(Error code detail)
Description
T-16-57
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
An attempt at recovery fails for 2 sec or
communication. The DC controller
more after the communication between
or the cassette pedestal controller
the cassette pedestal and the machine
PCB is faulty.
has failed.
16.3.10.106 E716-0000 Error code Recorded only in the error history
0002-3272
Symptom
The service mode error history shows E716-0000. However, the main unit was operating normally.
Cause
When the main unit is in standby, if the power cord from the cassette pedestal is pulled out, an error is generated.
The main cause is that, when the main unit is moved forward, the power cord from the pedestal gets tugged out
and the power cord from the main unit is prone to being pulled out.
Items to Check
Check that the cassette pedestal power cord is not being tugged by something.
Field Remedy
If the power cord is being pulled out, explain to the user that, if the power cord is pulled out while the main unit
is activated, an error will be generated.
16.3.10.107 E717 Error code detail The communication with the NE controller is
faulty.
Symptom
E717 The communication with the NE controller is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
16-172
0002-1800
Chapter 16
T-16-58
Detail
Description
0000
Timing of detection
The communication with the NE controller is disrupted and
is not resumed within 3 sec thereafter.
16.3.10.108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty.
0002-1801
Symptom
E719 The coin vendor is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-59
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0000
The coin vendor cannot be detected at startup.
0011
The card reader cannot be detected at startup.
16.3.10.109 E719-0011 Error code After the cable is disconnected because of a

scanning fault in card reader D1
0002-1960
Symptom
E719-0011 is displayed when the cable is disconnected because of a scanning fault in card reader D1.
Description
At the time of installation of the card reader, service mode COPIER > Function > INSTALL > CARD is
performed and then the main unit communicates with the card reader D1. At this time, if the cable is suddenly
disconnected, E000719-0011 will occur.
Cause
Communication error when the card reader D1 cable is disconnected.
Field Remedy
1) In service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR, press OK and then turn OFF the main switch.
2) Turn ON the power.
3) When the main unit starts up, 'Department ID and Personal Identification Number entry window' will appear.
Press OK in service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > CLEAR > PWD-CLR and close service mode.
16-173
Chapter 16
16.3.10.110 E719-0001 Error code When the coin vendor is disconnected, unable
to be cleared
0002-1991
Symptom
When the coin vendor is disconnected, E719-0001 is displayed and cannot be cleared, even in the service mode.
Cause
A communication error occurs between the main unit and the coin vendor because the power is turned ON
without resetting the value in service mode COPIER>Option>ACC>COIN from '1' to '0'.
Field Remedy
Reset the value in service mode COPIER>Option>ACC>COIN from '1' to '0', and turn the power OFF/ON.
16.3.10.111 E731 Error code detail There is a fault in the UFR board.
0002-1803
Symptom
E731 There is a fault in the UFR board. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-60
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
3000
The UFR board cannot be recognized.
3001
The UFR board cannot be initialized.
3002
The RAM bus cannot be initialized.
3015
No image data arrives at the main controller PCB.
16.3.10.112 E732 Error code detail There is a reader communication error.
0002-1809
Symptom
E732 There is a reader communication error. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-61
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0001
The reader unit cannot be detected at startup.
9999
The reader unit cannot be detected. The display indicates "Turn the main power switch OFF & ON again".
16-174
Chapter 16
16.3.10.113 E732-9999 Error Code: Recorded in error log after performing service
mode COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON
0002-2011
[ Manual-related ]
Description
On a machine equipped with a reader unit, when you perform service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR>
MN-CON], the set value will be changed from "1" to "0" in service mode [COPIER> Option> BODY> W/
SCNR]. This indicates that the machine is set up as a printer model. At that time, a communication error occurs
between the reader unit, causing E732-9999 to be recorded in the error log. Then, a message like "Turn the
power OFF/ON" appears, and turning the power OFF/ON will automatically make the machine detect the reader
once again (the set value in [W/SCNR] will return from "0" to "1").
Consequently, there is no problem in the machine operation if E733-9999 appears in the error log.
Note: Take notice the following when you need to perform [MN-CON].
- Before performing [MN-CON], be sure to explain to your customer that all the images stored in the Inboxes
will be cleared.
- Before performing [MN-CON], be sure to output "P-PRINT" and "USER-PRINT". After performing,
compare the values on the both prints and enter the original values if they are changed.
16.3.10.114 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps
displaying for about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the
error code results (DC power supply unit PCB J158 output failure)
0002-2012
Symptom
About 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, a message 'Starting up. Please wait' is displayed and then
E732-001 (DC power supply unit PCB J158 output failure) is displayed. (Refer to SymptomExplanation.)
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of finisher and feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally.
Cause
DC power supply unit PCB (1) failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the fuse PCB J58 from the DC power supply PCB J158. If there is no
input, check the DC power supply PCB.
2) Check whether AC line is supplied to the DC power supply PCB. If there is no problem with the AC line
input, the DC power supply PCB is likely faulty.
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the DC power supply PCB, if faulty.
DC Power Supply PCB Ass'y Part No. FG6-8970-000 (100/120V), FG6-8971-000 (220/240V)
16-175
Chapter 16
16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting
up. Please wait" changes to error code indication
0002-2049

Cause
As a result of inspection, the following were found to be a main cause:
- The interface cable connecting the reader unit and the printer unit is not securely fitted.
- The Reader Controller PCB is faulty.
The following incidents were also found although they are not so many.
- The fuse (FU25) on the Fuse PCB is blown out.
- The DC Power Supply PCB is faulty.
- The Interface PCB is faulty.
- The DDI-S Board PCB is faulty.
- The CCD unit and the Reader Controller PCB is not securely connected.
Field Remedy
1. Unplug and plug the interface cable between the reader unit and the printer unit to see whether the host machine
will recover.
2. Make sure that all the connectors on the Interface PCB and the Reader Controller PCB in the reader unit are
securely fitted. If the symptom still recur, go to the step 3.
3. Check whether DC is output from J67 on the Fuse PCB located at the back side of the host machine. If DC output
is confirmed, go to the step 4. If not, go to the step 5.
4. Remove and install the DDI-S Board PCB and the Main Controller PCB (Sub) inside the controller box to see
whether the host machine will recover. If not, replace the Reader Controller PCB with a new one.
5. Check whether DC is input to J53/J56/J57/J58 on the Fuse PCB from the DC Power Supply PCB. If DC input is
confirmed, replace the Fuse PCB with a new one. If not, go to the step 6.
6. Check whether AC is input to the DC Power Supply PCB. If no problem is found with AC power supply, replace
the DC Power Supply PCB with a new one.
In addition to the above, it is possible that the Interface PCB (FM2-0036) or the DDI-S Board PCB (FG3-3136) is
faulty, so check them if necessary.
FG3-2337 Fuse PCB
FG6-8970 (100/120V) / FG6-8971(220/240V) DC Power Supply PCB
FM2-0036 Interface PCB
FG3-3136 DDI-S Board PCB
16-176
Chapter 16
16.3.10.116 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps
displaying for about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the
error code results
0002-2488
Symptom
About 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, the message 'Starting up. Please wait' is displayed and then
E732-001 is displayed.
Cause
DC output failure from the DC fuse PCB J67
Items to Check
1) Check whether the lattice connector of the interface cable is securely inserted. The lattice connector connects
the reader and the printer (located at the back).
2) Check whether the wiring from the lattice connector to the distribution board J67 is secured.
3) Check whether DC line is output from the fuse PCB J67.
4) If no, check whether DC line is output to the fuse PCB J53, J56, J57 and J58 from the DC power supply PCB.
If yes, the fuse PCB Ass'y is likely faulty.
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the fuse PCB ass'y, if faulty.
Fuse PCB Ass'y Part No. FG3-2337-000
16.3.10.117 E733 Error code detail There is a printer communication error.
0002-1811
Symptom
E733 There is a printer communication error. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-62
Detail
0000
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The printer unit cannot be detected at startup.
There is no response to an error command from the printer
unit.
16-177
Chapter 16
16.3.10.118 E733-0001 Error code Printer communication error
0002-3608
SymptomTitle
E733-0001: Printer communication error Error Code
SpotDisposal
Since there is a possibility that the connector J112 on the DC controller PCB is not securely connected, check
the connection.
In the past, the flat cable connected to the main controller PCB was unintentionally disconnected at the time of
installation of the Resolution Switching Board, resulting in this error code.
16.3.10.119 E740 Error code detail The Ethernet board is faulty.
0002-1816
Symptom
E740 The Ethernet board is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-63
Detail
Description
0002
Timing of detection
The MAC address is illegal.
16.3.10.120 E744 Error code detail The language file is faulty.

Symptom
E744 The language file is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-64
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The version of the language file on the HDD and the
bootable version differ.
0002
0003
The size of the language file on the HDD is too big.

The language specified in Config.txt on the HDD
cannot be found.
0004
A switchover to a language on the HDD cannot be

made.
1000
16-178
The installed boot ROM is of a different type.
0002-1817
Chapter 16
16.3.10.121 E745 Error code detail The TokenRing board is faulty.
0002-1818
Symptom
E745 The TokenRing board is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-65
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
0001
An attempt at initialization fails (PCI).
0002
The MAC address is faulty.
0003
The board information cannot be obtained.
0004
There is a connection fault.
16.3.10.122 E747-8702 Error Code
0005-6125

Description
E747-8702 can be displayed when the image processing ASIC or the memory control/communication ASIC is
faulty.
Cause
In the field, the tip of the flat cable that connects the Reader Controller PCB and the Interface PCB was peeled
off, causing an error in communication.
Field Remedy
Inspect the flat cable to make sure of no abnormality. If there is, replace it with a new one.
Flat Cable: FH2-6983
16.3.10.123 E747 Error code detail The image processing ASIC or the memory
control/communication ASIC is faulty.
0002-1836
Symptom
E747 The image processing ASIC or the memory control/communication ASIC is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-66
Detail
---
Description
Timing of detection
IC1010 (for image processing ASIC) on the main controller PCB
or IC1012 (memory control/ communication control ASIC,
CPU) has a fault (e.g., image data transfer error).
16-179
Chapter 16
16.3.10.124 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation
0002-4682
Symptom
E747-00FF: only with printing operation Error Code.
Cause
UFR board is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the UFR board with a new one.
16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code
0002-8535
Symptom
Cause
There is a case in the field that replacement of the interface PCB solved the symptom.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the connectors on the interface PCB (J301, J305, J306, J309, J399) are not connected properly.
Unplug and insert all of them. If the symptom is not still solved, replace the PCB with a new one.
16.3.10.126 E747-00FF Error Code
0005-6126

Description
E747-00FF can be displayed when image signal is not sent within a specific period of time.
Cause
In the field, the tip of the flat cable that connects the Reader Controller PCB and the Interface PCB was peeled
off, causing an error in communication.
Field Remedy
Inspect the flat cable to make sure of no abnormality. If there is, replace it with a new one.
Flat Cable: FH2-6983
16-180
Chapter 16
16.3.10.127 E751-0304 Error Code
0003-8583

Description
This error code indicates that an error has occurred during data writing to the internal memory of the drum unit.
It can be displayed at FAX reception and during auto gradation adjustment. It will not disappear even after
replacement of the Bk drum.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the memory PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the memory PCB (FG3-2345) with a new one.
16.3.10.128 E804 Error code detail The power supply cooling fan is faulty.
0002-1839
Symptom
E804 The cooling fan is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-67
Detail
0000
0004
Description
Timing of detection
The power supply cooling
The DC controller tried to start it up, but the fan has
fan is faulty
been identified as being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
The controller fan is faulty.
The controller fan has been identified as being at rest.
16.3.10.129 E804-0004 Error Code
0002-1900
Symptom
Description
This error code is displayed when a halt of the cooling fan (FM7) in the main controller ass'y is detected.
Cause
The connector of the cooling fan (FM7) attached to the rear cover of the main controller ass'y is disconnected.
Field Remedy
Check whether the snap tight connector of the cooling fan (FM7) is securely connected. If not, securely connect
it.
16-181
Chapter 16
16.3.10.130 E804-0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan
(FM7) which is fixed on the controller box
0002-2937
Symptom
Don't know where to install the jack of the controller fan (FM7) that is installed onto the controller box cover.
If the fan jack is not inserted, E804-000 is displayed.
Cause
The controller fan (FM7) cable should be inserted into J1512 on the distribution board PCB at the bottom of the
controller box, but the position can't be seen because of the cables inside the machine.
Field Remedy
Insert the controller fan (FM7) cable into J1512 on the distribution board PCB.
16.3.10.131 E804-0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code
0002-8536
Symptom
E804-0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code
Description
E804-0004 is displayed when a halt of the controller fan (FM7) is detected.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the fuse PCB was found to be faulty (FU12 was burnt.).
Field Remedy
There is a snap-tight connector of the controller fan (FM7) at the rear cover of the main controller. Check the
connection.
- If the connection is poor, reinsert the connector.
- If there is no problem in the connection, it is possible that the fuse (FU12) has been burnt. So, check whether
it is burnt or not. If it seems to be burnt, replace the fuse PCB with a new one.
16.3.10.132 E805 Error code detail The cleaner fan is faulty.

Symptom
E805 The cleaner fan is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-68
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The DC controller tried to start it, but the fan has been
identified as being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
16-182
0002-1841
Chapter 16
16.3.10.133 E805 Error code detail The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty.
0002-1844
Symptom
E805 The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-69
Detail
Description
0000
Timing of detection
The DC controller tried to start it up, but the fan has been
identified as being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
16.3.11 FAX # Code

16.3.11.1 037
0004-0666
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This code indicates that an image memory over error has occurred upon FAX reception. It can be cleared by
turning the power OFF/ON.
16.3.12 FAX ## Code

16.3.12.1 ##111, ##228 FAX Error Code
0003-8644

Cause
Because of a software bug, there might occurs a mismatch during the communication process between the FAX
board and the main controller PCB.
Field Remedy
16-183
Chapter 16
16.3.12.2 ##281/##104 FAX Error Code
0004-8998
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
##281: Displayed when the number of re-transmissions of the procedure signal has been exceeded.
##104: Displayed when RTN or PIN has been received.
Change the settings in the order designated below:
1. In service mode [FAX>#2MENU 007], set at '8'. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#1SSSW
SW17>bit1], set at '1' in order to extend the setting range for the transmission level higher than -7dB. Then,
change the transmission level again.
2. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#1SSSW SW03>bit4], set at '1' in order to prevent any
error occurrences caused by an echo.
3. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#1SSSW SW04>bit2], set at '1' so that the procedure
signal can be detected more easily by other party.
4. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#2MENU 005], set at '1' in order to activate the NL
equalizer.
16.3.12.3 ##796 FAX Error Code
0003-6301

Cause
##796 can be displayed when multiple sheets of A4R have been sent.
Field Remedy
16-184
Chapter 16
16.4 Outline of Electrical Components

16.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid
16.4.1.1 Reader Unit
0001-0290
The reader unit has no clutch or solenoid.
16.4.1.2 Printer Unit
0001-0320
T-16-70
Item
Notation
Name
Clutch
CL1
duplex registration clutch
Description
matches the position of images on
double-sided prints.
CL2
duplex pickup clutch
controls the timing of pickup for

double-sided printing.
Solenoid
SL1
manual feed pickup solenoid
controls the timing of pickup for

the manual feed block.
SL2
delivery path switching solenoid 1
switches over positions of the

delivery tray.
SL3
controls the timing of pickup from

the cassette 1.
SL4
controls the timing of pickup from

the cassette 2.
SL5
delivery path switching solenoid 2
switches over the paths in the

delivery/feeder unit.
16-185
Chapter 16
SL1
CL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
CL1
SL2
F-16-69
16.4.2 Motor
0001-0335
T-16-71
Item
Notation
Name
Description
Motor
M1
scanner motor
drives the scanner system.
0001-0355
T-16-72
16-186
Item
Notation
Name
Description
Motor
M1
drum ITB motor
drives the drum/intermediate transfer unit.
M2
laser scanner motor (Y)
drives the laser scanner (Y).
M3
laser scanner motor (M)
drives the laser scanner (M).
M4
laser scanner motor (C)
drives the laser scanner (C).
M5
laser scanner motor (Bk)
drives the laser scanner (Bk).
M6
drives the pickup unit 1.
M7
drives the pickup unit 2.
M8
registration motor
drives the registration roller.
M9
pre-registration motor
drives the pre-registration roller.
Chapter 16
Item
Notation
Name
Description
M10
delivery vertical path motor
drives the delivery vertical path roller 2.
M11
face-down delivery motor
drives the delivery vertical path roller 1.
M12
developing motor (Y)
drives the developing unit (Y).
M13
developing motor (M)
drives the developing unit (M).
M14
developing motor (C)
drives the developing unit (C).
M15
developing motor (Bk)
drives the developing unit (Bk).
M16
image slope correction motor (Y)
corrects image slope (Y).
M17
image slope correction motor (M)
corrects image slope (M).
M18
image slope correction motor (C)
corrects image slope (C).
M19
image slope control motor (Bk)
corrects image slope (Bk).
M20
toner container motor (Y)
stirs toner inside the toner container (Y).
M21
toner container motor (M)
stirs toner inside the toner container (M).
M22
toner container motor (C)
stirs toner inside the toner container (C).
M23
toner container motor (Bk)
stirs toner inside the toner container (Bk).
M24
fixing motor
drives the fixing unit.
M25
horizontal registration motor
matches the horizontal registration position for paper.
M26
duplex feeder motor
moves paper to the duplex unit.
16-187
M1
M9
M8
M26
M25
M11
M2
M3
M16
M4
M17
M5
M18
M19
M10
M20
M21
M22
M12
M23
M13
M24
M14
M15
M1
M6
M7
F-16-70
16.4.3 Fan
0001-0392
The reader unit does not have fans.
0001-0384
T-16-73
Item
Notation
Name
Description
Fan
FM 1
power supply cooling fan
cools the power supply unit.
FM2
fixing heat discharge fan
discharges heat from the fixing unit.
FM3
machine heat discharge fan
discharges heat from inside the machine.
FM4
cleaner fan
limits overheating inside the machine.
FM5
delivery cooling fan
cools paper for delivery.
Chapter 16
Item
Notation
Name
Description
FM6
manual feed cooling fan
cools paper for manual feeding.
FM7
controller fan
cools the inside of the controller box.
FM7
FM6
FM3
FM2
FM5
FM4
FM1
F-16-71
16.4.4 Sensor
0001-0393
T-16-74
Item
Notation
Name
Description
Sensor
CF1
original size sensor
detects original size.
CF2
original size sensor
detects original size.
SR1
copyboard cover sensor
detects the state (open/closed) of the

copyboard cover.
SR2
home position sensor
detects the home position of the

scanner.
16-189
Chapter 16
0001-0396
T-16-75
Item
Notation
Name
Description
Sensor
PS1
toner feedscrew rotation sensor
detects the rotation of the feedscrew
(Y)
inside the toner container (Y).
(M)
inside the toner container (M)
(C)
inside the toner container (C)
(Bk)
inside the toner container (Bk)
fixing feeder unit open/closed
detects the sate (open/closed) of the
Sensor
fixing feeder unit.
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
face-down delivery sensor 2
detects the passage of paper in the

face-down delivery assembly.
PS7
cassette 1 paper sensor
detects the presence/absence of

power inside the cassette 1.
PS8
center delivery tray full sensors
detects the state (full of paper) inside

the face-down delivery assembly.
PS9
manual feed last paper sensor
detects paper in the manual feed unit.
PS10
manual feed paper sensor
detects paper in the manual feed unit.
PS11
pickup vertical path cover open/
closed sensor
pickup vertical path cover.
PS12
face-down delivery sensor 1
detects face-down delivery.
PS13
delivery vertical path cover
open/closed sensor
delivery vertical path cover.
cassette 1 paper level sensor (A)
detects the level of paper inside the
PS14
cassette 1 (A)
PS15
cassette 1 paper level sensor (B)

cassette 1 B
PS16
cassette 1 retry paper sensor
detects paper retry operation for the

cassette 1
PS17
cassette 2 retry paper sensor
detects paper retry operation for the

cassette 2
PS18
cassette 2 paper level sensor (B)

cassette 2 (B)
PS19
cassette 2 paper sensor
detects the presence/absence of

paper inside the cassette 2.
16-190
Chapter 16
Item
Notation
Name
PS20
cassette 2 paper level sensor (A)
Description
cassette 2 (A)
PS21
duplex registration sensor
detects double-sided registration.
PS22
duplex horizontal registration
detects the position of paper in sub
Sensor
scanning direction.
front cover open/closed sensor
PS23
front cover.
PS24
duplex pickup sensor
detects pickup from the duplex unit.
PS25
fixing delivery sensor
detects delivery in the fixing unit.
PS26
registration sensor
detects paper before registration.
PS27
fixing inlet sensor
detects movement of paper to the

fixing unit.
PS28
VR1
manual feed unit open/closed
Sensor
manual feed unit.
slide resistor
detects the width of paper for manual

feed.
OHP1
transparency sensor (front)
detects a transparency.
OHP2
transparency sensor (rear)
detects a transparency.
EV1
environment sensor
environment sensor
TH1
fixing main thermistor
detect the temperature in the middle

of the fixing roller.
TH2
fixing sub thermistor
detects the temperature at the ends of

the fixing roller.
TP1
fixing thermal switch
detects the temperature at the ends of

the fixing roller.
TPS1
SALT sensor
stabilizes development
characteristics (SALT).
TS1
ATR sensor (Y)
executes automatic toner density

correction
(ATR; Y)
TS2
ATR sensor (M)

correction
(ATR; M)
TS3
ATR sensor (C)

correction
(ATR; C)
TS4
ATR sensor (Bk)

correction
(ATR; Bk)
16-191
PS16
PS7
PS14
CF1
CF2
PS15
PS17
PS19
SR1
SR2
PS20
PS18
VR1
PS10
OHP2
PS9
PS26
OHP1
PS25 PS22
PS27
PS21
PS23
PS4 PS28
PS3
PS2
PS8
EV1
PS1
TS4
PS13
PS6
TS3
PS12
TPS1
TS2
PS5
TS1
PS24
TH2
PS11
TH1
TP1
F-16-72
16.4.5 Switch
0001-0425
The reader unit does not have switches.
0001-0430
T-16-76
Item
Notation
Name
Description
Switch
SW1
main power switch
turns on/off the main power.
SW2
cassette 1 size detecting
detects the size of paper inside the
switch
cassette 1.
Chapter 16
Item
Notation
Name
Description
SW3
cassette 2 size detecting
detects the size of paper inside the
switch
cassette 2.
front cover open/closed
detection switch 1
front Cover
front cover open/closed
detection switch 2
front Cover
MSW1
MSW2
MSW3
MSW4
MSW5
MSW6
detection switch 1
manual feed unit.
detection switch 2
manual feed unit.
fixing feeding unit open/
closed detection switch 1
fixing feeder unit.
fixing feeding unit open/
closed detection switch 2
fixing feeder unit.
MSW5
MSW6
MSW1
MSW2
MSW3
MSW4
SW2
SW1
SW3
F-16-73
16-193
Chapter 16
16.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others

0001-0436
T-16-77
Item
Notation
Name
Description
Lamp
LA1
scanning lamp
illuminates an original.
Heater
H1
anti-condensation heater
prevents condensation on a mirror.
H2
anti-condensation heater
prevents condensation on a lens.
0001-0437
T-16-78
Item
Notation
Name
Description
Heater
H1
fixing main heater main
main heater (controls the temperature

of the fixing roller)
H2
fixing sub heater
sub heater (controls the temperature of

the fixing roller)
H3
H4
fixing heat retaining
heat retaining heater (keeps the
heater
pressure roller heated)
cassette heater
prevents absorption of moisture by

paper inside the cassette.
16-194
Breaker
ELCB1
leakage breaker
leakage breaker
Power cord
PLG1
power cord
power cord
Speaker
SP1
speaker
speaker
Chapter 16
H2
LA1
H1
H2
H1
H3
H4
SP1
ELCB1
PLG1
F-16-74
16.4.7 PCBs
0001-0442
T-16-79
Ref.
Name
Description
[1]
reader controller PCB
controls the reader unit/ADF.
[2]
interface PCB
communicates image information read by the reader unit to

the printer unit.
[3]
inverter PCB
controls the scanning lamp.
[4]
CCD/AP PCB
drives the CCD/processes analog images.
[5]
fuse PCB
controls mirrors/lens heater.
16-195
Chapter 16
0001-0448
T-16-80
Notation
Name
[6]
DC controller PCB
Description
controls the power supply to the printer unit/
accessories
[7]
Laser driver PCB (Y)
controls the drive of the laser unit (Y)
[8]
Laser driver PCB (M)
controls the drive of the laser unit (M)
[9]
Laser driver PCB (C)
controls the drive of the laser unit (C)
[10]
Laser driver PCB (Bk)
controls the drive of the laser unit (Bk)
[11]
BD detection PCB (Y)
detects the laser beam (Y)
[12]
BD detection PCB (M)
detects the laser beam (M)
[13]
BD detection PCB (C)
detects the laser beam (C)
[14]
BD detection PCB (Bk)
detects the laser beam (Bk)
[15]
Waste toner detection PCB (light-
detects the level of toner inside the waste
emitting)
toner container
Waste toner detection PCB (light-
detects the level of toner inside the waste
receiving)
toner container
Auto registration sensor F (light-
reads the image position correction pattern
[16]
[17]
emitting) detection PCB

[18]
Auto registration sensor F (light-
receiving) detection PCB

[19]
Auto registration sensor R (light-
emitting) detection PCB

[20]
Auto registration sensor R (light-
receiving) detection PCB

[21]
Duplex driver PCB
controls the sensors and motors inside the

duplex unit
[22]
Microswitch PCB
detects the state (open/closed) of the manual

feed unit and front cover
[23]
DC power supply PCB (1)
supplies DC power
[24]
DC power supply PCB (2)
supplies DC power
[25]
Fuse PCB
distributes voltage from the DC power

supply; communicates with the controller
unit and DC controller PCB
16-196
[26]
Heater control PCB
controls the main heater
[27]
HV1 PCB
executes charging/development
[28]
HV2 PCB
executes primary transfer
Chapter 16
Notation
Name
[29]
HV1-SUB PCB
Description
detects charging AC current; controls
developing AC output; distributes signals;
assists upstream mechanisms, assists
downstream mechanisms
[30]
HV2-SUB PCB
power input
[31]
HV3 PCB
secondary transfer
[32]
HV4 PCB
assists upstream mechanisms (sends to HV1)
[33]
Relay PCB 1
reads memory information from the drum

unit
[34]
Cassette heater PCB
controls the cassette heater
[35]
Power distribution PCB
relays power to individual PCBs
[36]
ECO-ID PCB
assists image processing
[37]
Control key PCB
control key
[38]
processes image data for output to the printer

unit
[39]
processes conversion input image data of

signals from the reader unit
[40]
Differential PCB
converts signals from the reader unit
[41]
Control panel CPU PCB
controls the control panel
[42]
Control panel KEY PCB
controls the input from the keypad
[43]
Control panel inverter PCB
controls the backlight of the LCD
16-197
[33]
[10]
[39]
[9]
[14]
[8]
[13]
[7]
[38]
[12]
[35]
[34]
[42]
[11]
[43]
[25]
[41]
[26]
[24]
[23]
[15]
[16]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[37]
[2]
[36]
[1]
[40]
[18]
[17]
[6]
[22]
[29]
[31]
[19]
[20]
[28]
[31]
[27]
[21]
[32]
[27]
[27]
[24]
[27]
F-16-75
16.4.8 Plane Pedistal

16.4.8.1 Plain Pedestal-C1
0001-0488
T-16-81
Name
Ref.
Description
PCB
[1] pedestal controller PCB
controls the pedestal.
[2] power supply PCB
supplies power.
Chapter 16
[1]
[2]
F-16-76
16.4.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by
PCB
16.4.9.1 Adjusting the Variable Resistors (VR), the Light-Emitting Diodes (LED),
and the Check Pins by PCB
0001-0494
Of the resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the machine, those needed in servicing
the machine in the field are discussed:
Those VRs and check pins that are not found in the lists are designed exclusively for use at the factory, requiring
special tools and measuring instruments. Do not touch them in the field.
Some LEDs permit flow of current when OFF; this is a normal condition, and must be kept in mind.
---VRs that may be used in the field.

---VRs that must not be used in the field.
16-199
Chapter 16
16.4.9.2 Main Controller PCB (main)
0001-0514
LED1001
LED1002
LED1003
F-16-77
T-16-82
16-200
Notation
Description
LED1001
in operation
LED1002
+3.3V (non-all night) being supplied
LED1003
+3.3V (all-night) being supplied
Chapter 16
16.4.9.3 Main Controller PCB (sub)
0001-0728
LED3 LED2 LED1
F-16-78
T-16-83
Notation
Description
LED1
+3.3V (all-nigh) being supplied
LED2
LED3
+5V (non-all night) being supplied
16.4.9.4 Reader Controller PCB
0001-0730
SW1
F-16-79
T-16-84
Notation
Description
SW1
selects paper configuration for original size detection
16-201
Chapter 16
SW1
SW1
SW1
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
AB configuration
A configuration
Inch configuration
F-16-80
16.4.9.5 Inverter PCB
0001-0732
VR31
F-16-81
T-16-85
Notation
Description
VR31
for factory
16.4.9.6 Differential PCB
0001-0734
LED1
F-16-82
T-16-86
16-202
Notation
Description
LED1
Chapter 17 Self
Diagnosis
Contents
Contents
17.1 Error Code Details ......................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1.1 Error Code Details Table ........................................................................................................................ 17-1
Chapter 17
17.1 Error Code Details

17.1.1 Error Code Details Table
0006-4868
T-17-1
Code
Detail
Description
E000
The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on is inadequate.

0001
Timing of detection
After power-on, the output of the

noncontact thermistor does not
reach 40 deg C within 180 sec.
E001
The fixing unit is overheating.

0001
The high-temperature detection

port continues to remain ON for
500 msec.
0003
The reading of the no-contact

thermistor remains 250 deg C for
500 msec.
0004
The difference in temperature

between the non-contact thermistor
and the end thermistor remains 80
deg C or more for 500 msec.
0005
At the end of initial rotation, the

difference in temperature between
the sub (end) thermistor and the
main (non-contact) thermistor is 20
deg C or more for 100 msec.
(A reversal in temperature (caused,
for example, by a piece of residual
paper) is detected.)
E002
The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate.

0002
The output of the non-contact

thermistor does not reach 60 deg C
within 240 sec after it has reached
40 deg C.
0003

60 deg C.
17-1
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
Description
0004
Timing of detection
90 deg C.
0005

120 deg C.
0006

140 deg C.
0007

160 deg C.
0008

180 deg C.
0101

within 300 sec after power-on.
0102

120 deg C.
E003
The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby.

0001
After standby, the reading of the

non-contact thermistor remains 120
deg C or less for 10 sec.
E004
The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty.

0001
A short circuit of the triac is

detected fo 500 msec continuously.
0002
An open circuit of the temperature

detection thermistor inside the noncontact thermistor is detected for
500 msec continuously.
17-2
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
Description
0003
Timing of detection
A short circuit of the temperature
detecting thermistor inside the noncontact thermistor is detected for
0004
An open circuit of the infrared

0005
A short circuit of the infrared

0006
While printing is under way, the

thermistor detects 150 deg C or less.
0007
While printing is under way, the

thermistor detects 140 deg C or less.
E012
The drum ITB motor is faulty.

0001
The ITB drum motor fails to
The lock (normal state) signal is not
rotate.
detected within 2 sec after the ITB

drum motor control signal has gone
ON or the motor speed has been
changed.
0002
The ITB drum motor fails to
The lock (normal state) signal stops
rotate after it has rotated.
0.5 sec later.
0003
The lock (normal state) signal

remains even when the ITB drum
motor has been stopped (i.e., the
lock (normal state) signal is
detected continuously for 2 sec after
the ITB drum motor control signal
has been turned OFF).
E020
There is a fault associated with the drum/developer.

For the first 2 digits of detail code xx12 through xxD0,
xx=01: Y
xx=02: M
xx=03: C
xx=04: Bk
17-3
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
xx20
Description
Timing of detection
The fault can occur as when a new
ATR sensor. The drum unit is not
drum unit has been fitted. It is
fitted normally, or is faulty.
detected in about 90 to 120 sec after

assembly.
xx24
SALT sensor.

detected during ATR control or in
about 150 sec after idle rotation of
xx25
SALT sensor.

xx30
xx34
xx35
ATR sensor. The setting of the
ATR sensor computation value is
wrong.. The drum unit is not
fitted properly, or is faulty.
assembly.
The sample image fails to be
drawn in ATR control. There is a
fault/open circuit in the SALT
sensor. The drum unit is faulty.
SALT sensor.

detached during ATR control or in
xx40
The ATR sensor communication
value is faulty. There is a fault/
open circuit in the ATR sensor.
The drum unit has been fitted
improperly. (The machine cannot
assembly.
detect the drum unit). The drum

unit is faulty.
xx50
17-4
computation value is faulty (set
being formed. It is detected when
when a new drum unit is fitted).
toner supply operation is started.
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
xx60
Description
Timing of detection
target value is faulty (set when a
new drum is fitted; the value is
extremely small).
xx70
target value is faulty (set when a
new drum unit is fitted; the value
is extremely small).
xx80
The actual value is considerably
The fault occurs while ATR control
high in relation to the ITB surface
is being executed.
reflectance when a new drum unit

is fitted. The SALT sensor is
faulty.
xx81
The actual value is considerably
The fault occurs while ATR control
high in relation to the ITB surface
is being executed.
reflectance when a new drum is

fitted.
xx83
The detected ITB surface

reflection rate is faulty. (The
value is appreciably high.)
xxA0
The measured value of the
developer concentration is
considerably low. The ATR
sensor is faulty. The SALT

sensor is faulty. The ITB is
soiled.
xxB0
The drum unit is approaching the
end of its life and is causing the
T/D ratio to drop. The ATR

xxB2
The value is extremely high when

compared with the T/D ratio
detected when a new drum unit is
set.
xxC0
container to the developing
being formed.
assembly is faulty. The

developing assembly is supplied
with toner excessively. The ATR
17-5
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
xxD0
Description
Timing of detection
container to the developing
being formed and, in addition, when
assembly has failed. The toner
the T/D ratio drops while 20 prints
cartridge motor fails to rotate.
are being made continuously. It is
The toner container is empty. The
detected when toner supply
toner supply mouth of the drum
operation is started.
unit is damaged. The ATR sensor

has an open circuit.
For the first 2 digits of detail code
xxEE,
xx=00: fault in access to drum
unit
xx=01: fault in access to toner
container
E032
The counter of the NE controller fails to operate.

0000
The counter function of the NE

controller fails to operate.
E061
Charging error
xxdd
The charging DC bias exceeds

the upper limit.
E110
The operation of the laser scanner motor is faulty.

0110
The rotation of the Y laser
The motor lock signal remains in an
unlock state for 1 sec or more while

the laser scanner motor is in
operation.
0210
The rotation of the M laser

operation.
0310
The rotation of the C laser

operation.
0410
The rotation of the K laser

operation.
E202
A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position.

0000
17-6
The No. 1 mirror base moves in
reverse but does not move to its
go ON within a specific period of
home position.
time.
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
0001
E220
Description
Timing of detection
The No. 1 mirror base moves
forward but does not move from
go OFF within a specific period of
its home position.
time.
A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp.

0000
The intensity of the scanning
During shading adjustment at time
lamp has dropped.
of power-on, the intensity detected

by the CCD is below a specific
level.
E240
The communication between the main motor controller and the DC controller is faulty.
0000
There is a fault in the serial

communication between the main
controller and the DC controller.
0002
While print is under way, there is no

appropriate response from the DC
controller within a specific period
of time.
E243
The control panel is faulty.

0000
There is a fault in the

controller and the control panel.
E248
The EEPROM on the reader controller PCB is faulty.

0000
The ID stored in EEPROM (read

when the main power is turned on)
and the ID stored in the flash ROM
fail to match.
E302
A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction.

0000
0001
The shading processing does not
shading operation.
end 1 sec after it has started.
A time-out has occurred in gain/
The gain/offset correction (setting
offset correction by the analog
operator) by the analog processor
processor.
does not end 1 sec after it has

started.
E315
The image data is faulty.

0001
A time-out condition has occurred

in encoding/decoding processing of
image data.
17-7
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
Description
0008
Timing of detection
The ASIC (used for compression/
expansion processing) on the image
conversion board is faulty.
While encoding is under way, a
time-out condition occurs (i.e.,
there is no response within 30 sec).
000e
The data is damaged, there is a

memory error on the HD.
0010

expansion) on the image conversion
board is faulty.
While decoding is under way, a
time-out condition occurs.
0025

board is faulty.
While rotation processing is under
way, an image data transfer error
occurs.
0028

board is faulty.
While rotation processing is under
way, a time-out condition occurs.
0034
The ASIC (used for enlargement/

reduction) on the image conversion
board is faulty.
While enlargement/reduction
processing is under way, an image
data transfer error occurs.
0036
The ASIC (used for enlargement/

reduction) on the image conversion
board is faulty.
While enlargement/reduction
processing is under way, a time-out
condition occurs.
E351
The ECO-ID PCB is faulty.

0000
There is a fault in the initial

communication.
E402
17-8
There is a fault in the feeder motor.
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
The feeder motor (M2) fails to
The feeder motor encoder pulse is
rotate. The feeder motor clock
not detected within 0.3 sec after the
DF feeder motor drive signal has

been turned ON.
E404
There is a fault in the delivery motor.

(M3) fails to rotate. The
encoder pulse is not detected within
facedown delivery motor clock
0.3 sec after the face-down delivery
motor drive signal has been turned

ON.
E500
There is a fault in finisher communication.

The communication between the
communication.
machine and the finisher remains

disrupted for 5 sec or more.
E503
There is a fault in saddle communication.

0002
communication.
saddle stitcher controller PCB and

the finisher controller PCB remains
disrupted for 5 sec or more.
E504
There is a fault in stack size detection.

0001
The height sensor (PS1) is faulty.

height sensor and the finisher
controller PCB is prevented. Or,
there is a fault in the
communication data.
0002
The height sensor (PS1) is faulty.

height sensor and the finisher
controller PCB is prevented for 0.1
sec or more.
0003
The connector of the height
sensor (PS1) is faulty.

0004
The DIP switch for the height
There is a fault in the adjustment of
sensor (PS1) is not adjusted
the sensor by the DIP switch.
correctly.
E505
There is a fault in the backup RAM.

0001
The checksum value of the
finisher controller PCB is faulty.

E512
There is a fault in delivery.
17-9
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The delivery roller, feed motor
The delivery motor clock sensor
(M2), or feed motor clock sensor
fails to generate the target number
(PI10) is faulty.
of clock pulses within 10 sec at the

start of operation.
0002
E514
The delivery roller, feeder motor
There is no clock pulse for a feed
(M2), or feeder motor clock
equivalent for 0.2 during
sensor (PI10) is faulty.
communication.
There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction).

The stack processing motor (M2)
The stack delivery lever fails to
or the stack delivery lever home
reach its home position when the
position sensor (S8) is faulty. The
stack processing motor has been
connector is disconnected. The
driven for a specific period of time
stack delivery belt or the return
at start of operation.
roller is faulty.
E530
There is a fault in alignment.

0001
0002
The aligning plate does not leave
alignment motor (M3), aligning
the aligning plate home position
plate home position sensor (PI6),
sensor when the alignment motor
or aligning plate.
has been driven for 2 sec.
The aligning plate does not return to
rear alignment motor (M3), rear
its home position when the aligning
aligning plate home position
plate motor has been driven for 2
sensor (PI6), or rear aligning
sec.
plate.
E531
There is a fault in stapling.

0001
The stapler does not leave the

for 0.5 sec.
0002
The stapler does not return from the

for 0.5 sec.
E532
There is a fault in the shift of the stapler.

0001
The stapler shift motor (M4) or
The stapler shift base does not leave
the stapler shift home position
sensor (PI7) is faulty. There is a
sensor when the stapler shift motor
fault in the path of the stapler
shift base.
17-10
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
0002
E535
Description
Timing of detection
The stapler shift motor (M4) or
return from the stapler shift home
sensor (PI7) is faulty. There is a
fault in the path of the stapler
shift base.
sec.
There is a fault in the swing mechanism.

0001
0002
0003
The swing guide closed switch does
swing guide open sensor (PI18) is
not go ON when the swing motor
faulty.
has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
The swing guide open switch does
swing guide closed switch (MS6)
not go ON when the swing motor
is faulty.
has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
The safety area switch (MS3) or
The swing guide closed switch is
the swing guide switch 2 (MS6)
OFF when the tray 1/2 is in the OFF
is faulty.
position of the safety area switch

while the tray ascent/descent motor
is in operation.
0004
E537
There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec
swing motor clock sensor (PI20)
while swinging operation is under
is faulty.
way.
There is a fault in front alignment.

The front alignment motor (M3)
The aligning plate fails to reach the
or the front aligning plate home
position sensor (S6) is faulty. An
when the rear alignment motor has
been driven for a specific period of
front aligning plate.
time, or fails to leave the aligning

plate home position sensor.
E540
There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray.

0001
The ascent/descent operation does
(M5), the tray ascent/descent
not end within 15 sec after the tray
motor clock sensor (PI9/PI19), or
assent/descent motor has been
tray home position sensor (PIE)
driven; or, the tray home position is
is faulty.
not detected when it has been

driven for 15 sec.
0002
switch is ON during tray ascent/

descent operation.
0003
There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec
(M5) or the tray ascent /descent
or more from the clock sensor when
motor clock sensor 1/2 (PI9/
the tray ascent/descent motor has
PI19) is faulty.
been driven.
17-11
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
Description
Timing of detection
E577
There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction).

The stack processing motor (M2)
The return roller fails to reach the
or the return controller home
return roller home position sensor
position sensor (S3) is faulty. The
when the stack processing motor
connector is disconnected. The
has been driven for a required
stack delivery lever or the return
period of time.
roller is faulty.
E580
There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray.

The stack tray ascent/descent
The stack tray upper limit sensor
motor (M5), stack tray paper
goes ON while the stack tray
height sensor (S10), or the stack
ascent/descent motor is in
tray ascent/descent motor clock
operation, or the clock pulse of the
stack tray direction motor clock
connector is disconnected. An
sensor is not detected 15 times or
more within 0.8 sec.
stack tray ascent/descent motor.
The stack tray does not reach the

stack tray height sensor within 4 sec
after the stack tray ascent/descent
motor has started ascent operation.
E584
There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2).

0001
The No. 2 feed motor (M8) or the
The shutter open sensor does not go
shutter open sensor (PI5) is
ON when the No. 2 feed motor has
faulty.
been rotated in reverse for 1 sec or

more.
0002
The No 2 feed motor (M8) or the
The shutter closed switch does not
shutter closed switch (MS4) is
go ON when the No. 2 feed motor
faulty.
has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec

or more.
0003
The safety area detecting switch
The shutter closed switch is OFF
(MS3) or the shutter closed
when the tray 1/2 is in the OFF
position of the safety area switch

while the tray ascent/descent motor
is in operation.
E5F0
There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle.

0001
0002
17-12
position sensor does not go ON
when the paper positioning plate
motor has been driven for 1.33 sec.
position sensor does not go OFF
when the paper position plate motor
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
E5F1
There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle.

0001
0002
Description
Timing of detection
The number of detection pluses of
the paper fold motor clock sensor
(PI4S) is faulty.
falls below a specific value.
The state of the paper fold home
position sensor remains unchanged
(PI4S) is faulty.
when the paper fold motor has been

driven for 3 sec.
E5F2
There is a fault in the saddle guide.

0001
The guide home position sensor
does notgo ON when the guide
(PI13S) is faulty.
motor has been rotated for 0.455

sec.
0002
E5F3
The guide home position sensor
does not go OFF when the guide
(PI13S) is faulty.
There is a fault in saddle alignment.

0001
The aligning plate home position
sensor does not go ON when the
alignment motor has been driven

for 0.5 sec. (initially, driven for
1.67 sec)
0002
The alignment plate home position
sensor does not go OFF when the
alignment motor has been driven

for 1 sec.
E5F4
There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear.

0001
The stapler motor (rear, M6S) or
The stitching home position sensor
the stacking home position
does not go OFF when the stitch
motor (rear) has been rotated

clockwise for 0.5 sec.
0002
The stitch motor (rear, M67S) or
the stitching home position
does not go ON when the stitch
motor (rear) has been rotated in

reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
E5F5
There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front.

0001
The stitch motor (front, M7S) or
does not go OFF when the stitch
motor (front) has been driven

clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.
17-13
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
0002
Description
Timing of detection
The stitch motor (front, M7S) or
does not go ON when the stitch
motor (front) has been driven in

reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
E5F6
There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate.

0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
The paper pushing plate home
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate
position sensor does not go ON
home position sensor (PI4S) is
when the paper pushing plate motor
faulty.
has been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
The paper pushing plate home
position sensor does not go OFF
home position sensor (PI14S) is
when the paper pushing plate motor
faulty.
has been driven for 80 msec.
The paper pushing plate leading
edge position sensor does not go
leading edge position sensor
OFF when the paper pushing plate
(PI15S) is faulty.
motor has been driven for 80 msec.
The number of detection pulses of
the paper pushing plate motor clock
motor clock sensor (PI1S) is
sensor has dropped below a specific
faulty.
value.
The paper pushing plate leading
edge positioning sensor does not go
leading edge position sensor
ON when the paper pushing plate
(PI15S) is faulty.
motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or

more.
E5F8
There is a fault in the saddle connector.

0001
The connector of the guide home
The connector of the guide home
position sensor has been identified

to have been disconnected.
0002
The connector of the paper pushing
pushing plate home position
plate home position sensor is
identified to have been

disconnected.
0003
E5F9
17-14
The connector of the paper pushing
pushing plate leading edge
plate position sensor is identified to
have been disconnected.
There is a fault in the saddle switch.
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
0001
Description
Timing of detection
The inlet cover switch (MS1S),
The inlet cover switch is identified
front cover switch (MS2S), or
to be open for 1 sec or more after
delivery cover switch (MS3S) is
the start of initial rotation or of
faulty.
printing in the host machine with

any of the following sensor
identifying the cover to be closed:
- inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
- front cover open/closed sensor
(PI2S)
- delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
0002
The front cover switch (MS2S) or
The front cover switch is identified
the delivery cover switch (MS3S)
to be open for 1 sec or more after
is faulty.
the start of initial rotation or of

printing in the host machine with
any of the following sensors
identifying the cover to be closed:
(PI2S)
0003
The delivery cover switch
The delivery cover switch is
(MS3S) is faulty.
identified to be open for 1 sec or

more after the start of initial
rotation or of printing in the host
machine with any of the following
sensors identifying the cover to be
closed:
(PI2S)
E602
The hard disk is faulty.

0001
The fault may be a HD detection

error, in which the HD cannot be
detected. The machine may fail to
become ready (returning an error
code).
0002
The startup file is absent. The

program for the main CPU does not
exist on the HD, in BOOTDEV/
BOOT or the like.
17-15
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
0003
Description
Timing of detection
The fault is a HD write/abort error.
The machine fails to read sectors of
the HD.
0004
At power-on, an error is detected as

part of a check made on the control
table for "image storage area." (Reinstall the system software, or
replace the HDD.)
0005
It is a fault in the detection of the

HD controller IC. It is detected
when the HD controller IC cannot
be recognized or an error is detected
in it.
0006
The auxiliary startup file is absent.

The correct SUB CPU program
does not exist on the HD or in
BOOTDEV/BOOT or the like.
0007
The color profile file does not exist.

The correct color profile file does
not exist in BOOTDEV/PDL or the
like.
01XX
The partition DOSDEV is faulty.

02XX
The partition FSTDEV is faulty.

03XX

04XX
The partition FSTPDEV is faulty.

05XX

06XX
The partition PDLDEV is faulty.

07XX

08XX
The partition BOOTDEV is faulty.

09XX

17-16
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
Description
FFXX
Timing of detection
A fault exists in a partition that
cannot be identified. (For detail
code, see below.)
Detail code of E602

Last 2 bytes of detail code (indicated by XX)
01
Description
Device error: sector, write/abort,
other HDD access (driver) error
02
File system (logic) error: error

detection by check processing;
mounting failure
03
Other error: HDD connector fault;

HDD detection failure; secondary
error as of DRAM fault
10
HD controller HD controller IC,

driver No. error
11
HD controller IC, driver not

installed
12
HD controller IC, system error
13
HD controller IC, device error
14
HD controller IC, parameter error
21
packet R/W file operation, system

error
22
packet R/W file operation,

parameter error
23
packet R/W file operation, packet

DMC error
24
packet R/W file operation, packet

DMAC time-out
25
packet R/W file operation, HD

controller IC error
E604
There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM).

0000
The remaining space in image

memory is inadequate for the
intended write/read operation.
E605
The battery for image memory is faulty.

A specific drop in voltage has been
detected.
E606
The hard disk is faulty.
17-17
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
Description
0001
Timing of detection
A HD mounting error is detected
when the HD is booted from BOOT
ROM.
0002
A reading error is detected when the

HD is booted from BOOTROM.
E674
The fax board is faulty.

0000
E674
Communication error with PS print server unit C1

0003
While the PS Print Server Unit C1

is starting up, a communication
error occurs.
0010
A controller other than a PS Print

Server Unit C1 is detected.
0080
A communication error occurs after

the PS Print Server Unit C1 has
started up.
E711
There is a fault in IPC communication.

0001
An error has been detected 4 times
communication. The ADF
or more for 1.5 sec after the
controller or the reader controller
communication is disrupted
PCB is faulty. The connector
DADF.
DADF has poor contact.

0002
An error has been detected 4 times
communication. The finisher
or more for 1.5 sec after the
controller, pedestal controller, or
DC controller PCB is faulty. The
finisher and the machine is
connector between the finisher
disrupted and, in addition, an
and the machine has poor
attempt at recovery has failed.
connection.
E712
There is a fault in the communication between the ADF and the reader unit.
0000
An attempt at recovery fails 5 sec or
communication. The ADF
more after the communication
controller or the reader controller
PCB is faulty. The connector
ADF has been disrupted.
between the reader unit an the

ADF has poor contact.
E713
17-18
There is a fault in the communication between the finisher and the cassette pedestal.
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
0004
Description
Timing of detection
communication. The cassette
finisher and the machine is
pedestal controller or the finisher
disrupted.

E716
There is a fault in the communication between the cassette pedestal and the printer unit.
0000
An attempt at recovery fails for 2
communication. The DC
sec or more after the
controller or the cassette pedestal
cassette pedestal and the machine

has failed.
E717
The communication with the NE controller is faulty.

0000
The communication with the NE

controller is disrupted and is not
resumed within 3 sec thereafter.
0001
While the new controller is starting

up, an error occurs. (Detection was
normal before the power has been
turned off, but detection fails when
the power is turned o)
0002
While the new controller is in

operation, an IPC error occurs (The
system assumes that IPC
communication cannot be restored.)
E719
The coin vendor is faulty.

0000
The coin vendor cannot be detected

at startup.
0001
While the coin manager is starting

up, an error occurs. (Detection was
normal before the power has been
turned off, but detection fails when
the power is turned on.)
0002
While the coin manager is in

operation, an error occurs. (The
communication cannot be restored,
there is an open circuit for the
pickup/delivery signal, or there is
an illegal connection.)
17-19
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
Description
0011
Timing of detection
While the mew card reader is
starting up, an error occurs.
(Detection is normal before the
power has been turned off, but
detection fails when the power is
turned on.)
0012
While the new card reader is in

operation, an error occurs. (The
communication cannot be restored.)
E731
There is a fault in the UFR board.

3000
The UFR board cannot be

recognized.
3001
The UFR board cannot be

initialized.
3002
The RAM bus cannot be

initialized.
3015
No image data arrives at the main

controller PCB.
E732
There is a reader communication error.

0000
The reader unit cannot be detected

at startup.
E733
There is a printer communication error.

0000
The printer unit cannot be detected

at startup.
0001
There is no response to an error

command from the printer unit.
E740
The Ethernet board is faulty.

0002
E744
The MAC address is illegal.
The language file is faulty.

0001
The version of the language file on

the HDD and the bootable version
differ.
0002
The size of the language file on the

HDD is too big.
0003
The language specified in

Config.txt on the HDD cannot be
found.
0004
A switchover to a language on the

HDD cannot be made.
17-20
Chapter 17
Code
Detail
Description
1000
Timing of detection
The installed boot ROM is of a
different type.
E745
The TokenRing board is faulty.

0001
An attempt at initialization fails

(PCI).
0002
0003
The MAC address is faulty.

The board information cannot
be obtained.
0004
E747
There is a connection fault.
The image processing ASIC or the memory control/communication ASIC is faulty.

---
IC1010 (for image processing

ASIC) on the main controller PCB
or IC1012 (memory control/
communication control ASIC,
CPU) has a fault (e.g., image data
transfer error).
E804
The power supply cooling fan is faulty.

0000
The DC controller tried to start it

up, but the fan has been identified as
being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
The controller fan is faulty.

0004
The controller fan has been

identified as being at rest.
E805
The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty.

0000
The DC controller tried to start it

up, but the fan has been identified as
E805
The cleaner fan is faulty.

0001
The DC controller tried to start it,

but the fan has been identified as
17-21
Chapter 17
17-22
Chapter 18
Service Mode
Contents
Contents
18.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.1.1 Service mode screen configuration ........................................................................................................ 18-1
18.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ....................................................................................................... 18-2
18.1.3 Exiting service modes ............................................................................................................................ 18-3
18.1.4 Service mode backup .............................................................................................................................. 18-3
18.1.5 Initial screen ........................................................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen ............................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.7 Sub-item screen ...................................................................................................................................... 18-5
18.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) ................................................................................................................. 18-6
18.2.1 COPIER .................................................................................................................................................. 18-6
18.2.1.1 VERSION ........................................................................................................................................ 18-6
18.2.1.2 ACC-STS ......................................................................................................................................... 18-8
18.2.1.3 ANALOG ........................................................................................................................................ 18-9
18.2.1.4 JAM ............................................................................................................................................... 18-10
18.2.1.5 ERR ............................................................................................................................................... 18-18
18.2.1.6 DENS ............................................................................................................................................. 18-20
18.2.1.7 MISC ............................................................................................................................................. 18-21
18.2.1.8 ALARM-1 ..................................................................................................................................... 18-21
18.2.1.9 ALARM-2 ..................................................................................................................................... 18-22
18.2.1.10 ENVRNT ..................................................................................................................................... 18-25
18.2.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-26
18.2.2.1 FEEDSIZE ..................................................................................................................................... 18-26
18.2.3 DISPLAY Level 2 ................................................................................................................................. 18-26
18.2.3.1 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) - Level 2 .................................................................................. 18-26
18.2.4 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) Level 2 ........................................................................................... 18-28
18.2.4.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-28
18.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode) ............................................................................................................................... 18-32
18.3.1 I/O (display mode) ................................................................................................................................ 18-32
18.3.2 DC-CON ............................................................................................................................................... 18-33
18.3.3 R-CON .................................................................................................................................................. 18-42
18.3.4 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-44
18.3.5 SORTER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-46
18.3.6 MN-CON .............................................................................................................................................. 18-63
18.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) ..................................................................................................................... 18-65
18.4.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-65
18.4.1.1 ADJ-XY ......................................................................................................................................... 18-65
18.4.1.2 CCD ............................................................................................................................................... 18-67
18.4.1.3 IMG-REG ...................................................................................................................................... 18-70
18.4.1.4 BLANK ......................................................................................................................................... 18-71
18.4.1.5 PASCAL ........................................................................................................................................ 18-72
18.4.1.6 FEED-ADJ .................................................................................................................................... 18-72
18.4.1.7 CST-ADJ ....................................................................................................................................... 18-73
18.4.1.8 MISC ............................................................................................................................................. 18-73
18.4.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-74
18.4.2.1 DOCST .......................................................................................................................................... 18-74
18.4.3 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) Level 2 .................................................................................................. 18-76
18.4.3.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-76
18.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode) ................................................................................................. 18-82
18.5.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-82
Contents
18.5.1.1 INSTALL ....................................................................................................................................... 18-82

18.5.1.2 CCD ............................................................................................................................................... 18-82
18.5.1.3 LASER ........................................................................................................................................... 18-83
18.5.1.4 CST ................................................................................................................................................ 18-83
18.5.1.5 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................... 18-84
18.5.1.6 FIXING .......................................................................................................................................... 18-84
18.5.1.7 PANEL ........................................................................................................................................... 18-85
18.5.1.8 PART-CHK ................................................................................................................................... 18-85
18.5.1.9 CLEAR .......................................................................................................................................... 18-86
18.5.1.10 MISC-R ........................................................................................................................................ 18-86
18.5.1.11 MISC-P ........................................................................................................................................ 18-86
18.5.1.12 SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................... 18-87
18.5.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-88
18.5.2.1 SENS-INT ...................................................................................................................................... 18-88
18.5.3 FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode): Level 2 .............................................................................. 18-88
18.5.3.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-88
18.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) ............................................................................................................. 18-90
18.6.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................. 18-90
18.6.1.1 BODY ............................................................................................................................................ 18-90
18.6.1.2 USER ............................................................................................................................................. 18-91
18.6.1.3 ACC ............................................................................................................................................... 18-91
18.6.1.4 INT-FACE ..................................................................................................................................... 18-92
18.6.2 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-94
18.6.2.1 BLNK-SW ..................................................................................................................................... 18-94
18.6.3 BOARD ................................................................................................................................................. 18-94
18.6.3.1 SURF-OFF ..................................................................................................................................... 18-94
18.6.4 OPTION (mechanical specifications setting mode): Level 2 ................................................................ 18-95
18.6.4.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-95
18.6.4.2 BOARD ....................................................................................................................................... 18-112
18.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ............................................................................................................................ 18-113
18.7.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-113
18.7.1.1 NETWORK ................................................................................................................................. 18-113
18.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ...................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1.2 TOTAL ........................................................................................................................................ 18-116
18.8.1.3 PICK-UP ...................................................................................................................................... 18-118
18.8.1.4 FEEDER ...................................................................................................................................... 18-118
18.8.1.5 JAM ............................................................................................................................................. 18-119
18.8.1.6 DRBL-1 ....................................................................................................................................... 18-119
18.8.1.7 DRBL-2 ....................................................................................................................................... 18-120
Chapter 18
18.1 Outline
18.1.1 Service mode screen configuration
0000-5388
As shown below, the service modes use three screen levels: initial screen main/intermediate item screen subitem screen.
One set of modes are used for normal maintenance (Level 1 modes), and another set are used for troubleshooting
(Level 2 modes).
User screen
)(2,8)(
Reset key
Initial screen
(Level 1)
Initial screen
(Level 2)
)(2)
(Select an item.)
Main/intermediate
item screen
(Level 1)
(Select an item.)
(Select a main item from the top of screen.)

(The corresponding intermediate items are
then displayed and can be selected.)
Sub-item screen
(Level 1)
Main/intermediate
item screen
(Level 2)
(Select a main item from the top of screen.)

(The corresponding intermediate items are
then displayed and can be selected.)
Sub-item screen
(Level 1)
Sub-item screen
(Level 2)
Previous/next page
Sub-item screen
(Level 2)
Previous/next page
F-18-1
18-1
Chapter 18
The copier has the 7 service modes listed below.

COPIER
FEEDER
DISPLAY
Status display mode
SORTER
I/O
I/O display mode
ADJUST
Adjustment mode
BOARD
FUNCTION
Operation/inspection mode
OPTION
Specifications setting mode
TEST
Test print mode
COUNTER
Counter mode
F-18-2
18.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes
0000-5389
To execute a copier operation using a service mode, remove the cable from the external controller or the cable from
the network before entering the desired mode. Take care when using the FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode)
mode, as the copier may malfunction and be damaged if a print job is received from outside while an operation is
executing with this mode in effect.
1) Press the asterisk key (
) on the operation panel.
2) Press 2 and 8 simultaneously on the numeric keypad.

3) Press the asterisk key (
)on the operation panel.
The initial screen (see below) now appears.
Copier service modes

COPIER
ADF service modes
FEEDER
Displayed only when the ADF is attached.
Sorter/finisher service modes
SORTER
Displayed only when the finisher is attached.

(There are no modes for the sorter,
so SORTER isnt displayed even
when the sorter is attached.)
Option board service modes
BOARD
Displayed only when an option board is

attached.
F-18-3
18-2
Chapter 18
18.1.3 Exiting service modes
0000-5390
When the reset key is pressed once, the display returns to the service mode initial screen (F00-102-01).
When the reset key is pressed twice, the service modes are exited, and the display returns to the user screen (standard
screen).
When using the ADJUST, FUNCTION or OPTION service mode, be sure to turn the main power switch ON/OFF
after exiting the mode.
18.1.4 Service mode backup
0000-5391
Each copier is adjusted at time of factory shipment, and the adjusted values are written on the service labels.
If you replace the reader controller PCB or DC controller PCB, or clear the RAM, the adjusted ADJUST and
OPTION values are restored to their default values, Therefore, always enter the new service mode values on the
service labels when you change the values as a result of adjusting the copier in the market, If the item you need to
enter is not listed on the service label, enter it in a balnk box.
- Reader controller PCB service label:
Back side of reader unit's left cover [1]
[1]
F-18-4
- Main controller PCB/DC controller PCB service label:
Back side of service book case [1] on inside of printer unit front cover (see figure below)
[1]
F-18-5
18-3
Chapter 18
18.1.5 Initial screen
0000-5392
COPIER
Initial items
FEEDER
Touch an item to
select it.
SORTER
BOARD
F-18-6
18.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen
Display
I/O
0000-5393
Adjust
Main items
Touch an item to
select it.
VERSION
USER
ACC-STS
Intermediate items
Touch an item to
select it.
ANALOG
CST-STS
JAM
ERR
F-18-7
18-4
Function
Option
Test
Counter
Chapter 18
18.1.7 Sub-item screen
0000-5394
Number of pages
Display
I/O
Adjust Function Option
Selected
intermediate
item
Test
Counter
< READY >

Copier status display
< 1/3 >
<VERSION>
DC-CON
Ready to receive service/copy

operation.
Paper jam
JAM:
Executing service mode.
SERVICE:
Performing warmup or similar
WAITING:
operation.
Cover open
DOOR:
COPYING: Copying
Error
ERROR:
NO-TONER: No toner
WTNR-FUL: Waste toner full
NO-PAPER: No paper
ALERM:
Alarm
READY:
IP
PANEL
ANAPRO
POWER
Sub-items
PREV
+/-
NEXT
OK
Returns to previous page.

Advances to next page.
F-18-8
Display
I/O
xxxxx
Pressing an item displays

it in reverse.
Counter
< READY >
< 1/3 >
<ADJ-XY>
ADJ-X
Test
(yyyyy) {aaaaa to bbbbb}
Range of values that

can be entered
Value before change

Entered value
ADJ-X
PREV
NEXT
+/-
OK
Sets entered value.
Toggles values sign ().

Stop
key: Stops running operations.
Clear
key: Clears value.
Start
key: Starts copying without exiting service mode.
F-18-9
18-5
Chapter 18
18.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)

18.2.1 COPIER
18.2.1.1 VERSION
18.2.1.1.1 COPIER
0001-2229
The following screen appears in response to selecting COPIER>DISPLAY (Level 1):
Display
I/O
Adjust
Function
Option
Test
Counter
VERSION
USER
ACC-STS
DENS
ANALOG
JAM
MISC
ERR
ALARM-2
F-18-10
18.2.1.1.2 Outline
0000-5395
Displays the ROM version of each PCB (for the copier and options).
- Example display: <R-CON XX.YY> XX: Version number,YY: Development management number
- If no PCB is connected, <--.--> is displayed.
18.2.1.1.3 DC-CON
0006-0645
ROM version of DC controller PCB.

18.2.1.1.4 R-CON
0006-0649
ROM version of reader controller PCB.

18.2.1.1.5 PANEL
0006-0652
ROM version of control panel CPU PCB.

18.2.1.1.6 ECO
ROM version of ECO PCB.
18-6
0006-0653
Chapter 18
18.2.1.1.7 FEEDER
0006-0656
ROM version of DADF controller PCB.

18.2.1.1.8 SORTER
0006-0657
ROM version of finisher controller PCB.

18.2.1.1.9 FAX
0006-0658
ROM version of fax board.

18.2.1.1.10 NIB
0006-0660
Network software version.

18.2.1.1.11 PS/PCL
0006-0661
UFR board (PS/PCL function) version.

18.2.1.1.12 LIPS
0006-0662
UFR board (LIPS function) version.

18.2.1.1.13 SDL-STCH
0006-0663
ROM version of saddle stitcher controller PCB.

18.2.1.1.14 OP-CON
0006-0664
ROM version of cassette pedestal controller PCB.

18.2.1.1.15 MN-CON
0006-0665
System software version of main controller PCB.

18.2.1.1.16 BOOT-ROM
0006-0666
BOOT ROM version of main controller PCB.

- Copy model/GDI-UFR model: xx.yy C
- LIPS model: xx.yy L
- PL/PCL model: xx.yy N
18.2.1.1.17 DIAG-DVC
0006-0667
ROM version of card reader D1/NE controller A1.

18.2.1.1.18 RUI
0006-0668
Remote UI version.
18.2.1.1.19 LANG-EN
0006-0669
English language file version.
18-7
Chapter 18
18.2.1.1.20 LANG-FR
0006-0670
French language file version.

18.2.1.1.21 LANG-DE
0006-0671
German language file version.

18.2.1.1.22 LANG-IT
0006-0672
Italian language file version.

18.2.1.1.23 LANG-JP
0006-0673
Japanese language file version.

18.2.1.1.24 GDI-UFR
0006-0675
UFR board (GDI-UFR function) version.

18.2.1.1.25 MEAP
0006-8433
Use it to indicate the version of MEAP content.
18.2.1.2 ACC-STS
18.2.1.2.1 FEEDER
0000-5396
Displays whether DADF is connected.

0: Not connected, 1: Connected
18.2.1.2.2 SORTER
0006-0690
Displays whether finisher is connected.

0: Not connected, 1: Finisher M1 or N1 connected,
2: Saddle finisher N2 connected
18.2.1.2.3 DECK
0006-0696
Displays whether paper deck is connected.

18.2.1.2.4 CARD
0006-0699
Displays whether card reader is connected.

18.2.1.2.5 DATA-CON
Displays whether NE controller/A1 is connected.
18-8
0006-0700
Chapter 18
18.2.1.2.6 RAM
0006-0701
Displays memory capacity of memory mounted on main controller PCB.

512 MB, 768 MB
18.2.1.2.7 COINROBO
0006-0703
Displays whether coin vendor is connected.

18.2.1.2.8 NIB
0006-0704
Displays whether network board is connected.

0: Not connected, 1: Ethernet board connected,
2: Token ring board connected,
3: Ethernet board and token ring board connected
18.2.1.2.9 NETWARE
0006-0705
Displays whether NetWare firmware is installed.

0: Not installed, 1: Installed
18.2.1.2.10 SEND
0006-0707
Indicates whether SEND function is appended.

0: No SEND function, 1: SEND function
18.2.1.2.11 USB-HOST
0007-6058
USB host board connection status

0: The board is not connected.
1: The USB host board for the E201A/E307 is connected.
2: The USB host board for the E82G is connected.
18.2.1.3 ANALOG
18.2.1.3.1 TEMP
0000-5397
Copier's internal temperature (environment sensor) in deg C

18.2.1.3.2 HUM
0006-0713
Copier's internal humidity (environment sensor) in %RH

18.2.1.3.3 ABS-HUM
0006-0714
Amount of moisture (environment sensor) in grams

18.2.1.3.4 FIX-C
0006-0715
Fixing roller's surface temperature (main thermistor's detected temperature) in deg C
18-9
Chapter 18
18.2.1.3.5 FIX-E
0006-0717
Fixing roller's surface temperature (sub-thermisto's detected temperature) in deg C
18.2.1.4 JAM
18.2.1.4.1 JAM
0000-5398
Displays jam data.

Display
I/O
< JAM >
< 1/7 >
Test
Counter
< READY >
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E
FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E
FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E
FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E
FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E
FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E
FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E
FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E
FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
F-18-11
T-18-1
AA
Jam sequence number
1 to 50 (the larger the number, the older the jam)
T-18-2
BBBB
Date of jam
T-18-3
CCCC
Time of jam
18-10
Chapter 18
T-18-4
DDDD
Time jam was restored
T-18-5
E
Jam location
0: Copier
1: DADF
2: Finisher
T-18-6
FFff
Jam code
FF: Jam type
ff: Jam sensor
T-18-7
G
Paper feed position
T-18-8
HHHHHH
Paper feed level software counter value
T-18-9
IIIII
Paper size
18-11
Chapter 18
FF: Jam type

T-18-10
Code
Jam type
00xx
Unused
01xx
Delay jam
02xx
Pileup jam
0Axx
Jam at power ON/jam during warmup
0Bxx
cover open jam (applies to all covers)
0Dxx
Transparency-related jam
ff: Jam sensor (printer unit)

T-18-11
18-12
Code
Sensor type
xx01
xx02
xx03
xx04
xx05
xx06
Fixing inlet sensor (PS27)
xx07
Fixing paper delivery sensor (PS25)
xx08
Face-down paper delivery sensor 1 (PS12)
xx09
Face-down paper delivery sensor 2 (PS6)
xx0A
Two-sided registration sensor (PS21)
xx0B
Two-sided paper feed sensor (PS24)
xx0C
Deck paper feed sensor (PS6D)
xx0D
Deck conveyor sensor (PS1D)
0D90
Transparency sensor (front OHP1, inner OHP2)
0D91
Manual feed paper sensor (PS10)
0D92
0D93
Chapter 18
ff: Jam sensor (finisher)

T-18-12
Code
Finisher M1 sensor/type
Finisher N1/saddle finisher N2

sensor/type
1103
Copier paper delivery delay jam
1104
Paper delivery pileup jam
1105
Jam due to early arrival while

switching trays
1500
Staple jam in stapler
Staple jam in stapler
1300
Jam at power ON
Jam at power ON
1400
Front top cover OPEN jam
1011
Inlet path sensor delay jam
1013
Buffer path sensor delay jam
1014
Paper delivery path sensor delay

jam
1121
Inlet path sensor pileup jam
1123
Buffer path sensor pileup jam
1124
Paper delivery path sensor pileup

jam
1125
Staple tray sensor pileup jam
1181
Jam when pressing bundle
1182
Jam when returning bundle
1186
Staple jam in saddle stapler
1187
Saddle power ON jam
1188
Front lower cover OPEN jam
1191
Saddle conveying path sensor

delay jam
1192
11A1
Saddle fold path sensor delay jam

Saddle conveying path sensor
pileup jam
11A2
Saddle fold path sensor pileup

jam
18-13
Chapter 18
ff: Jam sensor (DADF)

T-18-13
Jam name
Code
Sensor
Condition
Separation delay
0002
SR3
Separation sensor (SR3) didn't

turn ON within 500 msec
after separation motor (M1)
switched to drive (forward).
Paper feed delay
0003
U502
Registration front sensor

(U502) didn't turn ON within 1
sec from separation sensor
(SR3) (for small size) or near
separation sensor (for large
size).
Paper feed pileup
0005
U502

(U502) didn't turn OFF after
conveyor motor turned ON and
operated for 500 msec, after
formation of resist loop.
Separation early delivery
0006
SR3
Separation sensor (SR3) was

ON during start of document
separation.
Reverse outlet delay
0011
U505
Reverse outlet sensor (U505)

didn't turn ON at specified
amount of time after trailing
edge of document passed
right edge of belt's presser
roller.
Reverse outlet pileup
0012
U505
Reverse outlet sensor (U505)

didn't turn OFF when paper
was conveyed by paper
delivery motor for 500 msec
after trailing edge of document
was detected by reverse paper
delivery resist sensor (SR5).
Two-sided
0023
U505
Conveyor motor operated at

constant speed with reverse
outlet sensor (U505) still ON
after a two-sided copy finished
reversing.
18-14
Chapter 18
Jam name
Code
Sensor
Condition
Paper delivery inlet
0041
SR4
Reverse paper delivery inlet
delay
sensor (SR4) didn't turn ON

when conveyor motor (M2)
conveyed paper for 100 mm
from start of document paper
feed (for small size document)
or from 51 mm in front of
reverse paper delivery
inlet sensor (SR4) (for large
size/two-sided document).
Paper delivery inlet
0042
SR4
pileup
Reverse inlet sensor (SR5)

didn't turn OFF in specified
amount of time after
document's leading edge
arrived at reverse registration
roller nip (for small size), or
after document's leading edge
arrived at reverse outlet sensor
(U505) (for large size/twosided document).
Reverse registration
0043
SR5
delay
Reverse paper delivery

registration sensor (SR5) didn't
turn ON at specified amount of
time after reverse inlet sensor
(SR4) turned ON.
Reverse registration
0044
SR5
pileup
Reverse registration sensor

(SR5) didn't turn OFF at
specified amount of time after
reverse paper delivery inlet
sensor (SR4) turned OFF.
Reverse flapper failure
0045
U505
Flapper didn't switch when

flapper switching for each
paper delivery was checked by
reverse outlet sensor (U505).
Paper delivery sensor

delay (small size)
0046
SR5
Paper delivery sensor (SR5)

didn't turn OFF after specified
amount of time had elapsed
from start of reverse operation
of reverse paper delivery motor
(M3).
18-15
Chapter 18
Jam name
Code
Sensor
Condition
0047
SR5
Paper delivery sensor (SR5)
pileup (small size)
didn't turn OFF after paper was

conveyed 50 mm after
document trailing edge passed
paper delivery sensor (SR5).
0048
SR4
Reverse inlet sensor (SR5)
delay (large size/
didn't turn ON after specified
twosided document)
amount of time elapsed after

start of paper delivery.
0080
SR8
unit cover OPEN
Reverse paper delivery unit

cover was opened when copier
was stopped due to lack of
paper.
DADF OPEN
0081
SR6
DADF was opened when

copier was stopped due to lack
of paper.
Paper feed cover OPEN
0082
SR2
Paper feed unit cover was

opened when copier was
stopped due to lack of paper.
Document not removed
0088
SR4, SR5
Attempt to start paper feed was

made with document left on
document stand glass. Detected
by reverse paper delivery
inlet sensor (SR4) and reverse
paper delivery registration
sensor (SR5).
Timing failure 1
008A
Paper feed timing for second

side of paper failed during
two-sided copy operation.
Alternately, end of task wasn't
detected by inter-task
monitoring after specified
amount of time.
18-16
Chapter 18
Jam name
Code
Timing failure 2
008B
Sensor
Condition
During document conveying
mode, when paper delivery
clock sensor (SR7) was
counting conveyed volume of
document to deliver, paper feed
of next document completed,
and reverse paper delivery
motor (M3) encoder
pulse could no longer be
detected.
Timing failure 3
008C
When the document is sent as a

mixed load even though
document mixed loading hasn't
been set, the document
size error alarm (0014) is
generated, but since the jam
must be processed, this jam
display appears. 008C (jam)
and 0014 (alarm) are displayed
together, and the jam is
restored automatically 5
seconds after being processed.
User DADF OPEN
0091
SR6
DADF was opened during

DADF operation.
User cover OPEN
0092
SR2,SR8
Cover was opened during

DADF operation.
Separation sensor initial
0094
SR3
status
Separation sensor (SR3) was

ON before separation of first
document sheet.
0095
U502
initial status

(U502) was ON before
separation of first document
sheet.
0096
SR4
inlet sensor initial status

sensor (SR4) was ON before
separation of first document
sheet.

registration sensor
0097
SR5

registration sensor (SR5) was
ON before separation of first
document sheet.
18-17
Chapter 18
G: Paper feed position

T-18-14
Code
Description
Except for 1 to 10
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Side paper deck
6 to 8
not used
duplex unit
10
manual feed tray
18.2.1.5 ERR
18.2.1.5.1 ERR
0000-5399
Displays error data.

Display
I/O
< ERR >

< 1/7 >
Test
Counter
< READY >
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD
EEEE
FFff
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD
EEEE
FFff
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD
EEEE
FFff
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD
EEEE
FFff
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD
EEEE
FFff
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD
EEEE
FFff
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD
EEEE
FFff
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD
EEEE
FFff
F-18-12
T-18-15
AA
Error sequence number
1 to 50 (the larger the number, the older the error)
18-18
Chapter 18
T-18-16
BBBB
Date of error
T-18-17
CCCC
Time of error
T-18-18
DDDD
Time error was restored
T-18-19
EEEE
Error code
T-18-20
FFff
Detail code
"0000" if none.
T-18-21
G
Error location
0: Main controller
1: DADF
2: Finisher
3: Unused
4: Reader unit
5: Printer unit
6: PDL boards
7: Fax board
18-19
Chapter 18
18.2.1.6 DENS
18.2.1.6.1 DENS-Y/M/C/K
0005-9741
T-18-22
Calculated value of developer concentration (indicated
as % off target value)
Appropriate values
-2.0 to 2.0%
Note
Value is updated when toner is supplied after main

power switch ON.
18.2.1.6.2 WINDOW-Y,M,C,K
0006-0722
T-18-23
SALT sensor window dirt coefficient (Y/M/C/Bk). The
smaller the value, the dirtier the sensor window.
Appropriate values
50 or higher
Note
Value is updated when ATR control operation is

performed after main power switch ON.
18.2.1.6.3 SGNL-Y,M,C,K
0000-5400
T-18-24
Measured value of developer concentration (Y/M/C/
Bk)
Measured when each job is received.
Appropriate values
Note
16 to 192
Value is updated when toner is supplied after main

power switch ON.
18-20
Chapter 18
18.2.1.7 MISC
18.2.1.7.1 ENV-TR
0000-5401
T-18-25
(printer internal environment display)
1: Low humidity environment (5.8 g or less moisture)
2: Normal humidity environment (5.9 to 17.3 g moisture)
3: High humidity environment (17.4 g or more moisture)
18.2.1.7.2 Y,M,C,K-DRM-LF
0006-0738
T-18-26
Drum unit life (Y/M/C/Bk)
Expresses how much of life has expired (as percentage).
Appropriate values
0 to 100 (%)
Note
0% when new drum unit is inserted.
18.2.1.8 ALARM-1
18.2.1.8.1 IMG-DT-Y/M/C/K
0006-5081
- indicates the average of image ratios for copy/print jobs

indicates the average image ratio (color ratio) within the drum unit
18-21
Chapter 18
18.2.1.9 ALARM-2
18.2.1.9.1 ALARM2
0000-5402
Displays alarm data.

Display
I/O
<ALARM-2 >
< 1/7 >
Test
Counter
< READY >
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH

F-18-13
T-18-27
Item
Description
AA
Alarm sequence number
Remarks
1 to 50 (the larger the number, the older the

error)
BBBB
Date of alarm
CCCC
Time of alarm
DDDD
Time alarm was restored
EE
Alarm location code (see table on next page)
FFFF
Alarm code (see table on next page)
GGGG
Alarm detail code (for R&D)
HHHHH
Total counter value when alarm is generated
T-18-28
EE
Alarm location code
FFFFAlarm code
04
Paper feed/conveying
0008: Side deck lifter alarm

0009: Horizontal registration detection
alarm
18-22
Chapter 18
EE
Alarm location code
FFFFAlarm code
09
Drum unit
0001: Drum life (Y)

0002: Drum life (M)
0003: Drum life (C)
0004: Drum life (K)
10
Developer unit
0001: Toner out (Bk)

0002: Toner out (C)
0003: Toner out (M)
0004: Toner out (Y)
11
Waste toner conveying
0001: Waste toner box full (intermediate

copy belt)
33
Fan
0007: Paper delivery cooling fan (FM5)

alarm
0012: Manual feed cooling fan (FM6)
alarm
0013: Copier exhaust heat fan (FM3)
alarm
34
Image position compensation
0001: Incorrect data read (zero included in
control
image position pattern read data)

0002: Incorrect data read (abnormal data
in at least 8 of the 10 sets of image
position patterns)
0003: Pattern read timeout alarm
0004: Attempt was made to compensate
abnormally large slant as result of image
position compensation.
0005: Attempt was made to correct large
abnormally large magnification as result
of image position compensation.
61
Finisher staples
0001: No staples
62
Saddle stitcher
0001: No stitch needle
70
PDL
0001: memory overflow

0002: font memory overflow
0003: micro font memory overflow
0004: image font memory overflow
0005: pattern font memory overflow
0006: hard disk write error
18-23
Chapter 18
EE
Alarm location code
FFFFAlarm code
72
UFR board
0001: Register access failed.

0002: Data transfer to memory failed (or
timeout).
0003: Rendering error (ECI module)
0004: Rendering error (EM module)
0005: Rendering error (IE module)
0006: Rendering error (IDM module)
0007: Rendering error (LAM module)
0008: Rendering error (MI module)
0009: Rendering error (PCM module)
0010:Rendering error (PGM module)
0011: Rendering error (VII module)
0012: Rendering error (VOI module)
0013: Stores compressed image during
FallBack.
73
LIPS
0001:Download overflow
0002: Insufficient work memory needed
during system data processing (mainly
figure processing, text processing).
0003: Translator was specified that was
not mounted by LIPS emulation start
command.
0004: Translator work memory overflow
0006: Configuration acquiring/
management error
0007: LIPS internal memory management
error
0008: LIPS internal file management error
0009: Received data management error
0010: Page control error
0011: Macro management error
0012: Color management error
0013: Layout control error
0014: Font management error
0015: Character drawing error
18-24
Chapter 18
EE
Alarm location code
FFFFAlarm code
0016: Figure drawing error
0017: Image drawing error
0018: LCD display error
0019: Text mode command layer error
0020: Vector mode command layer error
0021: Utility execution control error
0022: LIPS internal database management
error
0023: LIPS internal menu control error
0024: LIPS internal boot error
74
GDI-UFR
0001: Incorrect Job Wrapper Format

version
0002: Incorrect command sequence
75
PS print server unit-C1
0001: Error in PS print server unit-C1

0002: Error due to incorrect SVG analysis
received from PS print server unit-C1
18.2.1.10 ENVRNT
18.2.1.10.1 Overview
0006-8546
<ENVRNT>
Displaying Environment Logs
Use it to indicate logs of changes that may have taken place for [machine inside temperature (deg C)/humidity (%)/
fixing roller surface (middle) temperature (deg C)] collected from the monitor output of the fixing thermistor (main)
and the environment sensor.
Remarks
The intervals of data collection may be set in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ENVP-IN.
F-18-14
18-25
Chapter 18
T-18-29
Item
Description
No.
number of a data piece (higher the number, older the data piece)
DATE
date of data collection
TIME
time of data collection
D + deg C
machine inside temperature
E+%
machine inside humidity
F + deg C
fixing roller surface (middle) temperature
18.2.2 FEEDER
18.2.2.1 FEEDSIZE
0000-5403
T-18-30
Displays the document size detected by the ADF.
Note
Displays the document size as a paper size such as A4 or LTR.

For paper names, see COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-U1,
CST-U2.
18.2.3 DISPLAY Level 2

18.2.3.1 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) - Level 2
0000-5404
The following screen appears in response to selecting COPIER>DISPLAY (Level 2):
Display
I/O
Adjust
VERSION
CCD
USER
DPOT
Function
Option
DENS
CST-STS
MISC
F-18-15
18-26
Test
Counter
Chapter 18
VERSION
- LANG-CS (indicates the version of the Czech language file)
- LANG-DA (indicates the version of the Danish language file)
- LANG-EL (indicates the version of the Greek language file)
- LANG-ES (indicates the version of the Spanish language file)
- LANG-ET (indicates the version of the Estonian language file)
- LANG-FI (indicates the version of the Finnish language file)
- LANG-HU (indicates the version of the Hungarian language file)
- LANG-KO (indicates the version of the Korean language file)
- LANG-NL (indicates the version of the Dutch language file)
- LANG-NO (indicates the version of the Norwegian language file)
- LANG-PL (indicates the version of the Polish language file)
- LANG-PT (indicates the version of the Portuguese language file)
- LANG-RU (indicates the version of the Russian language file)
- LANG-SL (indicates the version of the Slovenian language file)
- LANG-SV (indicates the version for the Swedish language file)
- LANG-TW (indicates the version of the classical Chinese language file)
- ECO-ID (Use it to check the ECO-ID number)
- LANG-ZH (indicates the version of the simplified Chinese language file)
- LANG-BU (indicates the version fort the Bulgarian language file)
- LANG-CR (indicates the version of the Croatian language file)
- LANG-RM (indicates the version of the Rumanian language file)
- LANG-SK (indicates the version of the Slovakian language file)
- LANG-TK (indicates the version of the Turkish language file)
CST-STS
- WIDTH-ME (indicates the paper width for the manual feed tray; in mm)
DPOT
- 2TR-PPR (indicates the output level of the paper assigned voltage for the secondary transfer DC voltage generated
most recently)
- 2TR-BASE (indicates the output level of the reference voltage for the secondary transfer DC voltage generated
most recently)
- 1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the primary transfer DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most
recently)
- CHG-AC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the primary charging AC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most
recently)
18-27
Chapter 18
DENS
- CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the primary charging DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most
recently)
- DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the developing DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most recently)
- DENS-S-Y/M/C/K (indicates the detected density level (Y/M/C/Bk) for the sample image to be created at time of
ATR control)
- D-Y/M/C/K -TRGT (indicates the detected density level (Y/M/C/Bk) for the sample image to be created at time of
ATR control)
- P-SENS-P/S (indicates the detected light intensity (P wave/S wave) of the background (ITB) for ATR control)
- D-CRNT-P/S (indicates the measurements (P waste/S wave) of the dark current at time of ATR control)
CCD
- GAIN-OB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-OG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-OR (indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-EB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-EG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-ER (indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAINB-OB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for blackand-white)
- GAINB-OG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for blackand-white)
- GAINB-OR (indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-andwhite)
- GAINB-EB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for blackand-white)
- GAINB-EG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for blackand-white)
- GAINB-ER (indicates the gain level adjustment of red for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-and-white)
18.2.4 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) Level 2

18.2.4.1 COPIER
18.2.4.1.1 VERSION
<LANG-CS>
0001-0125
Use it to check the version of the Czech language file.

<LANG-DA>
0001-0126
Use it to check the version of the Danish language file.

<LANG-EL>
Use it to check the version f the Greek language file.
18-28
0001-0127
Chapter 18
<LANG-ES>
0001-0128
Use it to check the version of the Spanish language file.

<LANG-ET>
0001-0129
Use it to check the version of the Estonian language file.

<LANG-FI>
0001-0130
Use it to check the version of the Finnish language file.

<LANG-HU>
0001-0131
Use it to check the version of the Hungarian language file.

<LANG-KO>
0001-0132
Use it to check the version of the Korean language file.

<LANG-NL>
0001-0133
Use it to check the version of the Dutch language file.

<LANG-NO>
0001-0134
Use it to check the version of the Norwegian language file.

<LANG-PL>
0001-0135
Use it to check the version of the Polish language file.

<LANG-PT>
0001-0136
Use it to check the version of the Portuguese language file.

<LANG-RU>
0001-0138
Use it to check the version of the Russian langue file.

<LANG-SL>
0001-0139
Use it to check the version of the Slovenian language file.

<LANG-SV>
0001-0140
Use it to check the version of the Swedish language file.

<LANG-TW>
0001-0141
Use it to check the version of the Chinese language file (traditional text).
<LANG-ZH>
0001-0143
Use it to check the version of the Chinese language file (simplified text).
<ECO-ID>
0007-6055
Use it to check the ECO-ID number

<LANG-BU>
0001-0144
Use it to check the version of the Bulgarian language file.

<LANG-CR>
0001-0145
Use it to check the version of the Croatian language file.

<LANG-RM>
0001-0146
Use it to check the version of the Romanian language file.

<LANG-SK>
0001-0147
Use it to check the version of the Slovakian language file.

<LANG-TK>
0001-0148
Use it to check the version of the Turkish language file.
18-29
Chapter 18
18.2.4.1.2 CST-STS
<WIDTH-MF>
0001-0149
Use it to check the width of paper in the manual feed tray (in mm).
18.2.4.1.3 CCD
GAIN-OB
0006-1757
CCD odd numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-OG
0006-1758
CCD odd numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-OR
0006-1759
CCD odd numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-EB
0006-1760
CCD even numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-EG
0006-1761
CCD even numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-ER
0006-1762
CCD even numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for color
GAINB-OB
0006-1763
CCD odd numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-OG
0006-1764
CCD odd numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-OR
0006-1765
CCD odd numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-EB
0006-1766
CCD even numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-EG
0006-1767
CCD even numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-ER
0006-1768
CCD even numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for black and white
18.2.4.1.4 DPOT
<2TR-PPR>
0001-0150
Use it to check the output value of the paper separation voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated last.
<2TR-BASE>
0001-0152
Use it to check the output value of the reference voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated last.
<1TR-DC-Y>
0001-0153
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (Y) generated last.
<1TR-DC-M>
0001-1231
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (M) generated last.
<1TR-DC-C>
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (C) generated last.
18-30
0001-1232
Chapter 18
<1TR-DC-K>
0001-1233
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (K) generated last.
CHG-AC-Y
0005-9754
output value of primary charge AC voltage (Y) output last

CHG-AC-M
0005-9755
output value of primary charge AC voltage (M) output last)

CHG-AC-C
0005-9756
output value of primary charge AC voltage (C) output last)

CHG-AC-K
0005-9752
output value of primary charge AC voltage (Bk) output last)

18.2.4.1.5 DENS
<DENS-S-Y/M/C/K>
0001-0157
Use it to check the density value (Y/M/C/Bk) detected of the sample image formed at time of ATR control.
<D-Y/M/C/K-TRGT>
0005-9757
target value (Y/M/C/Bk) of developer concentration

<DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K>
0001-0156
Use it to check the output value of the developing DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated last.
<CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K>
0001-0155
Use it to check the output value of the primary DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated last.
<D-CRNT-P/S>
0001-0160
Uses it to indicate the value (P wave/S wave) measured of the dark current at time of ATR control.
<P-SENS-P/S>
0005-9768
detected light quantity value (P wave/S wave) of backing (ITB) during ATR control
18-31
Chapter 18
18.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode)

18.3.1 I/O (display mode)
0000-5405
The COPIER > I/O screen is shown below. The screen items (only the items required for
market service) are described on the next page.
Display
I/O
Adjust
Function
Option
Test
Counter
Option
Test
Counter
DC-CON
R-CON
FEEDER
SORTER
MN-CONT
F-18-16
<Reading the screen>
Display
I/O
<DC-CON>
Adjust
Function
< 1/3 >
P001 xxxxxxxx
P002 xxxxxxxx
P003 xxxxxxxx
P004 xxxxxxxx
P005 xxxxxxxx
P006 xxxxxxxx
P007 xxxxxxxx
P008 xxxxxxxx
0
7
F-18-17
18-32
< READY >
Chapter 18
18.3.2 DC-CON
0000-5406
T-18-31
Address
Bit
P001
Symbol
Display
Remarks
Cassette 1 size
4 bits enable 16 types of size
detection 0
detection (see Table T05-401-01).
(input)
1
Cassette 1 size
detection 1
Cassette 1 size
detection 2
Cassette 1 size
detection 3
Cassette 2 size
Size detection 0 to 3 enable 16
detection 0
settings (see Table T05-401-01).
Cassette 2 size
detection 1
Cassette 2 size
detection 2
Cassette 2 size
detection 3
10
11
PS14
PS15
PS20
PS18
Cassette 1 remaining
1: Remaining volume is roughly
volume sensor A
half or less
volume sensor B
50 sheets or less
volume sensor A
half or less
volume sensor B
50 sheets or less
12
PS7
Cassette 1 paper sensor
1: ON
13
PS19
Cassette 2 paper sensor
1: ON
14
PS10
Manual paper feed
1: ON
paper sensor
15
PS9
Manual paper feed last
1: ON
paper sensor
18-33
Chapter 18
T-18-32
4-ream actuator
Inner
Front
Cassette paper size
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
STMT R
LTR
LTR R
LGL
1117
A5 R
A4
A4 R
A3
10
B5
11
B5 R
12
B4
13
1218
14
U1
15
U2
16
No cassette
0:
Actuator pressed
T-18-33
Address
Bit
P002
(output)
Symbol
Display
Remarks
Developing bias mode (Y)
0: Rectangular wave
Developing bias mode (M)
0: Rectangular wave
Developing bias mode (C)
0: Rectangular wave
Developing bias mode (K)
0: Rectangular wave
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
High-pressure remote
0: High pressure ON
permitted
18-34
For R&D
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
10
For R&D
11
Drum ITB motor operation
Remarks
0: Forward
direction
12
13
Drum ITB motor
0: ON
Fixing exhaust heat fan half-
1: Half-speed
speed
14
Cleaner fan half-speed
1: Half-speed
15
Power cooling fan half-speed
0: Half-speed
P003
Cassette 1 paper feed solenoid
1: ON
(output)
Cassette 2 paper feed solenoid
1: ON
Manual paper feed unit paper
1: ON
feed solenoid
3
Paper delivery path switching
0: Back side paper delivery,
solenoid 1
1: Front side paper delivery
4
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
Transparency detection LED
For R&D
10
For R&D
11
For R&D
12
For R&D
13
For R&D
14
For R&D
15
For R&D
P004
For R&D
(input)
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
1: ON
18-35
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
Two-sided PCB connection
0: Connected
10
Paper delivery cooling fan lock
0: Running, 1: Stopped
detection
(only operates during twosided copying)
11
Copier exhaust heat fan lock
detection
12
Manual feed cooling fan lock
detection
13
Power cooling fan lock
detection
14
Cleaner fan lock detection
15
Fixing exhaust heat fan lock
detection
P005
For R&D
(input)
For R&D
Cassette pedestal connection
0: Connected
Cassette pedestal power ready
0: Ready
Fixing conveyor unit OPEN/
1: CLOSED
PS5
CLOSED detection
5
Fixing heater enable
For R&D
PS13
Delivery vertical path cover
0: Enabled
0: OPEN, 1: CLOSED
detection
8
PS28
Manual feed unit OPEN/
1: CLOSED
CLOSED detection
9
PS8
Center paper delivery tray full
1: Full
sensor
10
PS11
Paper feed vertical path cover
1: CLOSED
OPEN/CLOSED sensor
11
PS23
Front cover OPEN/CLOSED
1: CLOSED
sensor
12
For R&D
13
Drum ITB motor lock
0: Running
detection
14
TRIAC short detection
0: Error
15
Fixing unit high temperature
1: Error
detection
18-36
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
P006
For R&D
(output)
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
24-V ON
0: ON
Secondary transfer positive/
0: Positive output,
negative switching
1: Negative output
6
Drum unit operation signal
1: ON
Cassette heater (for cassette 1/
0: Heater ON, 1: Heater
2) ON
OFF
For R&D
For R&D
10
For R&D
11
For R&D
12
For R&D
13
Paper delivery cooling fan full
1: Full speed (during two-
speed
sided output)
14
For R&D
15
Copier exhaust heat fan full
1: Full speed (during output
speed
when temperature inside

copier is 30C or more)
P007
PS17
Cassette 2 retry paper sensor
1: ON
(input)
PS16
Cassette 1 retry paper sensor
1: ON
PS26
Resist sensor
1: ON
PS27
Fixing inlet sensor
1: ON
PS25
Fixing paper delivery sensor
1: ON
PS12
Face-down paper delivery
1: ON
sensor 1
6
PS21
Two-sided resist sensor
1: ON
PS24
Two-sided paper feed sensor
1: ON
PS6
1: ON
sensor 2
9
PS22
Two-sided horizontal resist
1: ON
sensor
10
Transparency sensor (front)
1: ON
11
Transparency sensor (inner)
1: ON
18-37
Chapter 18
Address
P008
Bit
Symbol
Display
12
For R&D
13
For R&D
14
For R&D
15
For R&D
Remarks
Paper delivery vertical path
See separate Table T05-
motor current switching 0
401-08.
(output)
1
Paper delivery vertical path

See separate Table T05-
401-08.

Manual feed cooling fan
1: ON
Cleaner fan
1: ON
Fixing exhaust heat fan
1: ON
Power cooling fan
0: ON
Transparency sensor (front)
1: Gain large, 0: Gain small
gain switching
9
Transparency sensor (inner)
1: Gain large, 0: Gain small
gain switching
10
For R&D
11
For R&D
12
For R&D
13
For R&D
14
For R&D
15
For R&D
P009
Two-sided resist clutch
1: ON two-sided
(input/
Two-sided paper feed clutch
1: ON two-sided
Paper delivery path switching
1: ON
output)
2
solenoid 2
3
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
Horizontal registration voltage

down
18-38
1: Voltage down two-sided
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
7
P010
Symbol
Display
Remarks
Horizontal registration
0: Excitation ON (voltage
excitation
down status)
For R&D
For R&D
10
For R&D
11
For R&D
12
For R&D
13
For R&D
14
For R&D
15
For R&D
0 to
For R&D
7
to P018
(for R&D)
P019
Cassette 3 size detection 0
Size detection 0 to 3 enable

16 settings (see Table T05401-01).
(input)
1
Size detection 0 to 3 enable

16 settings (see Table T05401-01).
P020
Cassette 3 remaining volume
1: Remaining volume is
detection A
roughly half or less
(input)
1
detection B
roughly 50 sheets or less
detection A
roughly half or less
detection B
roughly 50 sheets or less
18-39
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
Right cover OPEN/CLOSED
1: CLOSED
detection
5
PS5D
Deck attachment
0: Deck released from

copier
PS8D
Deck paper volume sensor top
0: No paper
Deck connection signal
1: Connected
detection
P021
(input)
Deck LED switch

PS4D
Deck lifter sensor
0: LED switch pressed

1: Lifter at paper feed
position
Deck lifter motor error
0: Lifter error detected
detection
3
PS3D
Deck lifter upper limit sensor
1: Lifter has reached upper

limit
PS7D
Deck paper volume sensor
0: No paper
bottom
5
PS6D
Deck paper feed sensor
1: Paper
Deck lifter lower limit sensor
1: Lifter has reached lower

limit
PS9D
Deck open sensor
0: Storage compartment is
open
P022
Paper feed 3 solenoid
1: ON
(output)
Paper feed 4 solenoid
1: ON
CL2D
Deck paper feed clutch
1: ON
SL1D
Deck paper feed solenoid
1: ON
Deck lifter motor
0: Lifter motor ON
Deck lifter motor DOWN
1: Lift DOWN,
0: Lift UP
SL2D
Deck paper compartment
1: SL ON
OPEN SL
7
Deck paper compartment

button LED
P023
to 7
For R&D
to P025
(for R&D)
P026
18-40
For R&D
1: LED lit
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
(input/
For R&D
For R&D
output)
Symbol
Display
Cassette heater (for cassette 3/
0: Heater ON, 1: Heater
4) ON
OFF
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
P027
For R&D
(input/
For R&D
output)
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
Remarks
Deck motor current switching
See Table T05-401-09.
signal 0
7
Deck motor current switching
See Table T05-401-09.
signal 1
P028
Cassette 3 paper feed current
See pulse motor current
switching signal 0
setting
(input/
output)
table (Table T05-401-08).

1

switching signal 1
See pulse motor current
switching signal 0
setting
table (Table T05-401-08).

switching signal 1
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
P029
Cassette 3 retry sensor
1: Paper
(input/
Cassette 4 retry sensor
1: Paper
output)
PS2D
Deck no paper detection
1: Paper
PS1D
Deck outlet paper sensor
1: Paper
Cassette 3 paper detection
1: Paper
18-41
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
Cassette 4 paper detection
1: Paper
Pedestal model detection
1: Plain pedestal, 0:
Cassette pedestal
CL1D
Deck conveyor CL
1: CL ON
T-18-34
0
Pulse motor current setting
100%
70%
31%
0%
T-18-35
0
Paper deck pulse motor current setting
100%
70%
50%
35%
18.3.3 R-CON
0000-5407
T-18-36
Address
Bit
P001
Symbol
Display
Image leading edge signal
Remarks
0: Image leading edge
detected
(input/
12 V, 24 V
output)
0: 12 V supply,
1: 24 V supply
For R&D
Optical motor clock signal
1: Optical motor running
(input)
4
Optical motor clock signal

(output)
18-42
For R&D
For R&D
1: Optical motor running
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
7
Symbol
Display
Remarks
Size detection sensor drive
1: Document size detected
signal
P002
For R&D
(input)
For R&D
Size detection signal (AB/
0: Detect document
inch)
3
Size detection signal (inch)
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
0: Detect document
P003: For R&D

P004
For R&D
(input)
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
Pressure platen CLOSED
1: Detect pressure platen
detection signal
closed 30
Optical home position
1: Detect optical home
detection signal
position
For R&D
For R&D
P005 to P007: For R&D

P008
Document illumination lamp
1: Document illumination
lit signal
lamp lit
CCD drive signal
1: CCD drive
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
(output)
P009: For R&D
18-43
Chapter 18
18.3.4 FEEDER
0000-5408
T-18-37
Address
Bit
Symbol
P001
SR5
Display
Remarks
Reverse paper delivery resist
1: ON
sensor
(input)
SR4
1: ON
sensor
2
P002
SR3
Separation sensor
1: ON
0 to 7
(for R&D)
P003
U505
Reverse outlet sensor
1: ON
(input)
U502
Resist front sensor
1: ON
U503
Document set sensor
1: ON
U504
Final document detection
1: ON
sensor
4
P004
(input)
SR1
Conveyor motor clock sensor
Alternates between 1 and 0

when motor is running.
SR7
Reverse paper delivery motor
Alternates between 1 and 0
clock sensor
when motor is running.
18-44
Chapter 18
Address
P005
Bit
Symbol
Display
0 to 7
Separation motor reverse
Remarks
(for R&D)
P006
1: ON
operation
(output)
Separation motor forward
1: ON
operation
2
Separation motor PWM
1: ON
Conveyor motor PWM
1: ON
Brake
1: ON
Paper delivery motor PWM
1: ON
P007
(output)
Document display LED
1: Lit
LED1
0: Lit (flashes when paper

doesn't go through)
3
4
LED2
0: Lit
Conveyor motor reverse
1: ON
operation
5
Conveyor motor forward
1: ON
operation
6
Paper delivery motor reverse
1: ON
operation
7
Paper delivery motor forward
1: ON
operation
P008
(input)
Push switch
1: ON
Reverse paper delivery unit
0: OPEN
SR8
cover sensor
P009
SR2
Paper feed unit cover sensor
0: OPEN
SR6
ADF OPEN/CLOSED sensor
0: OPEN
0 to 7
(for R&D)
18-45
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
P010
(input)
Symbol
Display
Remarks
DIP SW bit 1
1: ON
DIP SW bit 2
1: ON
DIP SW bit 3
1: ON
DIP SW bit 4
1: ON
DIP SW bit 5
1: ON
DIP SW bit 6
1: ON
DIP SW bit 7
1: ON
DIP SW bit 8
1: ON
18.3.5 SORTER
0000-5409
T-18-38
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
P001
S10D
Stack tray home

position detection
1: Home position
(input)
S2D
Inlet paper detection
1: Paper
S12D
Stack tray lower

limit detection
1: Lower limit
S13D
Stack tray upper

limit detection
1: Upper limit
S11D
Stack tray paper

detection
1: Paper
S4D
Copier, finisher
connection detection
1: Connection
released
S5D
Processing tray
paper detection
1: Paper
S6D
Return roller home

position detection
1: Home position
Front junction plate

home position
junction detection
1: Home position
P002
0 to 7
(for R&D)
P003
(input)
18-46
S6D
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
S7D
Rear junction plate

home position
junction detection
1: Home position
S8D
Bundle paper
delivery lever home
position detection
0: Home position
S18D
Staple cartridge
detection
1: No cartridge
S15D
Staple detection
1: No staples
S17D
Stapling home
position detection
0: Home position
S16D
Staple leading edge

detection
1: No staple
leading edge
P004
S1D
Paper delivery motor

clock detection
1: Startup
detection
(input)
M5D1
Stack tray UP/

DOWN motor
operation 1 (output)
1: UP
M5D2
Stack tray UP/

DOWN motor
reverse operation 1
(output)
1: DOWN
P005
(input/
output)
18-47
Chapter 18
Address
18-48
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
S9D
Stack tray UP/

DOWN motor clock
detection
1: Startup
detection
S14D
Staple safety
detection
1: Obstruction
P006
(output)
Front junction motor

junction signal
(output)
1: Permit
Rear junction motor

permission signal
(output)
1: Permit
M6DA
Staple motor
0: Forward
M6DB
Staple motor reverse

0: Reverse
P007
M6DA
Staple motor
0: Forward
(output)
M6DB

0: Reverse
M5D1
Stack tray UP/

DOWN motor
reverse operation 2
(output)
1: UP
M5D2
Stack motor UP/

DOWN motor
reverse operation 2
(output)
1: DOWN
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks

OFF signal (output)
0: Current ON
P008
Push switch (output)
0: ON
(input/
output)
24VP detection
0 to 7

current switching
(output)
1: Current low, 0:
Current high
Bundle processing
motor current
switching 1 (output)
1: Current low, 0:
Current high
Bundle processing
motor current
switching 2 (output)
1: Current low,
P009
(for R&D)
P010
(output)
0: Current medium
3
Front matching
motor current
switching (output)
1: Current low, 0:
Current high
Rear matching motor

current switching
(output)
1: Current low, 0:
Current high
LED1
0: ON
LED2
0: ON
LED3
0: ON
P011
DIPSW1 bit 1
0: ON
(input)
DIPSW1 bit 2
0: ON
18-49
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
DIPSW1 bit 3
0: ON
DIPSW1 bit 4
0: ON
DIPSW1 bit 5
0: ON
DIPSW1 bit 6
0: ON
DIPSW1 bit 7
0: ON
DIPSW1 bit 8
0: ON
T-18-39
18-50
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
P001
(output)
M8
Second feed motor A

phase output
M8
Second feed motor B

phase output
M4
Staple mover motor

B phase output
M4
Staple mover motor

A phase output
M3
Matching motor B
phase output
M3
Matching motor A
phase output
8 to 15
P002
M5
Tray UP/DOWN
motor PWM
(output)
M2

PWM
M7
Rotary motor PWM
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
M5
Tray UP/DOWN
motor DOWN drive
output
1: DOWN
M5
Tray UP/DOWN
motor UP/DOWN
drive output
1: UP
8 to 15
P003
(output)
LED2 lighting signal

output
0: Lit
PS1
Height sensor (input)
LED1 lighting signal

output
1: Lit
PS1
Height sensor
external clock
(input)
8 to 15
P004
(output)
24 V output
interruption
detection signal
8 to 15
P005
M9
Inlet feed motor A

phase output
(output)
M9
Inlet feed motor B

phase output
18-51
Chapter 18
Address
18-52
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
8 to 15
P006
Staple tray paper

detection signal
0: Paper
(output)
M1
First feed motor A

phase (output)
M1
First feed motor B

phase (output)
M8
Second feed motor

clock input
M9
Inlet feed motor

clock input
M1
First feed motor

clock input

clock detection
signal
8 to 15
P007
(output)
M5
Tray UP/DOWN
motor clock
detection signal 1
M5
Tray UP/DOWN
motor clock
detection signal 2
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
M7
Rotary motor clock

detection signal
8 to 15
P008
Stacker unit
EEPROM clock
(output)
Stacker unit
EEPROM data
output
Stacker unit
EEPROM CS
* LWR (input/
output)
* HWR (input/
output)
* RD (input/output)
* AS (input/output)
Stacker unit
EEPROM data input
(input)
8 to 15
P009
Buffer path input

paper detection
signal
0: Paper
(output)
Paper delivery paper

detection signal
1: Paper
Buffer path paper

detection signal
0: Paper
Input detection
signal
0: Paper
PI7
Staple drive home

position detection
signal
1: Home position
8 to 15
18-53
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
P010
0 to 15
0 to 15
P012
Stapler connection
detection signal
1: Connected
(output)
MS7
Staple cartridge
detection
1: Cartridge
No staple detection
signal
1: Staple
PI11
Tray 1 detection
signal
1: Paper
PI12
Tray 2 detection
signal
1: Paper
8 to 15
0 to 15
0 to 15
P015
Push switch 3
(output)
Push switch 2
PI22
Staple mover
position detection
signal
1: Home position
PI6
Matching plate home

position detection
signal
1: Home position
PI8
Tray home position

detection signal
1: Home position
PI5
Shutter OPEN
detection signal
1: OPEN
(for R&D)
P011
(for R&D)
P013
(not used)
P014
(not used)
18-54
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
PI18
Rotary guide OPEN

detection signal
1: OPEN
8 to 15
P016
DIP SW3 bit 1
1: ON
(output)
DIP SW3 bit 2
1: ON
DIP SW3 bit 3
1: ON
DIP SW3 bit 4
1: ON
DIP SW3 bit 5
1: ON
DIP SW3 bit 6
1: ON
DIP SW3 bit 7
1: ON
DIP SW3 bit 8
1: ON
8 to 15
P017
Joint detection signal
1: Connected
(output)
Front top cover

OPEN/CLOSED
detection signal
1: CLOSED
MS5
Saddle unit
signal
MS5
Tray upper limit

detection switch
signal
1: Upper limit
MS3
Tray safety switch

signal
0: Safe
Front top cover

OPEN/CLOSED
detection signal
0: CLOSED
MS4
Shutter CLOSED
detection switch
signal
1: CLOSED
MS2
Rotary guide
CLOSED detection
switch signal
8 to 15
M7
Rotary motor
forward drive output
1: Forward
P018
18-55
Chapter 18
18-56
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
(output)
M7
Rotary motor reverse

drive output
1: Reverse
M2

reverse drive output
1: Reverse
M2

forward drive
output1: Forward
M6

drive output
1: Reverse
M6
Staple motor
1: Forward
8 to 15
P019
First feed motor OFF
1: OFF
(output)
M9
Inlet feed motor

connectivity
switching 2
0: During drive
M9
Inlet feed motor

connectivity
switching 1
0: During drive
M8
Second feed motor

current switching 2
0: During drive
M8
Second feed motor

current switching 1
0: During drive
M1
First feed motor

current switching 2
0: During drive
M1
First feed motor

current switching 1
0: During drive
8 to 15
P020
(output)
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
PS1
Height sensor ON/

OFF
M4
Staple mover motor

current switching
0: During drive
M3
Matching motor
current switching
0: During drive
8 to 15
P021
Belt retraction
solenoid drive signal
1: ON
(output)
Buffer outlet
solenoid drive signal
1: ON
Buffer inlet solenoid

drive signal
1: ON
Flapper solenoid
drive signal
1: ON
Paddle solenoid
drive signal
1: ON
Solenoid timer
output
Retraction solenoid
drive signal
1: ON
8 to 15
T-18-40
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
P023
M6S
Stitch motor (inner)

0: Forward
(output)
M6S
Stitch motor (inner)

0: Reverse
M7S
Stitch motor (front)

0: Forward
M7S
Stitch motor (front)

0: Reverse
M2S
Paper folder motor

0: Forward
18-57
Chapter 18
Address
18-58
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
M2S
Paper folder motor

0: Reverse
SL1S
First deflecting plate

solenoid drive
signal1: ON
SL2S
Second deflecting
plate solenoid drive
signal
1: ON
8 to 15
P024
(output)
Conveyor plateadjoining solenoid

drive signal
1: ON
Paper positioning
plate motor current
switching
0: During drive
8to 15
P025
24 V output
interruption
detection signal
1: Down
(output)
PI15S
Paper push plate

leading edge
position signal
0: Leading edge
PI11S
Paper delivery
detection signal
0: Paper
8 to 15
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
P026
PI4S
Paper folder motor

clock detection
signal
(output)
PI1S
Paper push plate

motor clock
detection signal
PI14S
Paper push plate

home position
detection signal
1: Home position
PI5S
Matching plate home

position detection
signal
0: Home position
8 to 15
Paper positioning
plate home position
detection signal
0: Home position
PI16S
Stitcher storage
detection signal
0: Stored
PUSH SW2 ON/

OFF
PI17S
Vertical path paper

detection signal
1: Paper
PI12S
Crescent roller phase

detection signal
0: Home position
PI13S
Guide home position

detection signal
0: Home position
8 to 15
P027
(output)
18-59
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
P028
M4S
Paper positioning
plate motor A phase
output
M4S
Paper positioning
plate motor B phase
output
M8S
Paper push plate

motor PWM
M1S
Feed motor current

switching
0: Drive
M1S
Feed motor A phase

output
M1S
Feed motor B phase

output
M8S
Paper push plate

motor reverse drive
output
0: Reverse
8 to 15
P029
M5S
Matching motor A
phase output
(output)
M5S
Matching motor B
phase output
M2S
Paper folder motor

PWM
M8S
Paper push plate

motor forward drive
output
0: Forward
M3S
Guide motor A
phase output
M3S
Guide motor B phase

output
M3S
Guide motor current

switching
0: Drive
M5S
Matching motor
current switching
0: Drive
(output)
18-60
Chapter 18
Address
P030
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
8 to 15
PI19S
Second paper sensor

paper detection
signal
0: Paper
PI20S
Third paper sensor

paper detection
signal
0: Paper
MS5S
Stitch operation
home position
detection signal 2
1: Home position
MS7S
Stitch operation
home position
detection signal 1
1: Home position
MS8S
Paper positioning
plate paper detection
signal
0: Paper
MS6S
Tray paper detection

signal
0: Paper
MS18S
First paper sensor

paper detection
signal
0: Paper
8 to 15
Matching plate home

position sensor
1: Connected
(output)
P031
(output)
connector
1
Paper fold home

position sensor
1: Connection
connector
2
Paper delivery cover

sensor connector
1: Connected
3
Front bottom cover

OPEN/CLOSED
1: Connected
18-61
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
sensor connector
4
Paper positioning
plate home position
1: Connected
sensor connector
18-62
Paper fold home

position detection
signal
0: Home position
8 to 15
P032
0 to 15
P033
MS4S
No staple detection
signal 2
1: Staple
(output)
MS6S
No staple detection
signal 1
1: Staple
MS1S
Inlet cover OPEN

detection switch
signal
0: CLOSED
Front bottom cover

OPEN detection
switch signal
0: CLOSED
PI3S

OPEN switch signal
0: CLOSED
Front bottom cover

OPEN detection
signal
1: CLOSED
PI9S
Inlet cover OPEN

detection signal
1: CLOSED
MS3S

OPEN detection
switch signal
1: CLOSED
8 to 15
P034
DIP SW1 bit 1
0: ON
(output)
DIP SW1 bit 2
0: ON
Chapter 18
Address
P035 to
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
DIP SW1 bit 3
0: ON
DIP SW1 bit 4
0: ON
DIP SW1 bit 5
0: ON
DIP SW1 bit 6
0: ON
DIP SW1 bit 7
0: ON
DIP SW1 bit 8
0: ON
8 to 15
P050
18.3.6 MN-CON
0000-5410
T-18-41
Address
Bit
Symbol
Display
Remarks
P001
GPDATA
PWR1
1: During normal
operation
(output)
PWR2
1: During normal
operation
For R&D
Alternates between 1 and

0 every 50 msec
For R&D
Cooling fan ON
P002
0 to 16
For R&D
P003
10
GPO
Cooling fan control
Paper feed count (for coin

vendor, assistance)
(output)
11
Paper delivery count (for

coin vendor, assistance)
12
0: OFF, 1: ON
SRAM board detection
0: YES, 1: NO
P004
(input)
For R&D
For R&D
GPI
LCD backlight control
Operation permission (key
0: Permitted, 1: Not
switch)
permitted
18-63
Chapter 18
Address
Bit
4
Symbol
Display
Remarks
Operation permission
(control card)
permitted
Operation permission (coin
vendor)
permitted
P005
0 to 7
For R&D
P006
Open interface control
0: Ready, 1: Not ready
(PRDY signal)
(input)
Open interface setting
Mode 0
10
Open interface setting
Mode 1
11
For R&D
12
For R&D
13
For R&D
14
Open interface board
0: YES, 1: NO
detection
15
Open interface board
control (CRDY)
P007
16
Fax option
0: Connected, 1: Not
connected
(input)
18-64
P008
Printer power ready
(input)
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
Scanner power ready
P009
PCPRDY
(output)
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
10
For R&D
11
Controller power ready
Chapter 18
18.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode)

18.4.1 COPIER
18.4.1.1 ADJ-XY
18.4.1.1.1 ADJ-X
0000-5411
T-18-42
Used to adjust the optical image leading edge position (image read
start position in the sub-scanning direction).
Adjustment method
- If the image's blank width is larger than the standard value, the
setting value should be decreased.
- If areas outside the document are also copied, the setting value
should be increased.
- Increasing the setting value by 1 moves the image read start
position by 0.1 mm in the direction of the trailing edge.
(The image read range moves in the direction of the trailing edge.)
- If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced
the reader controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment
range
220 to 320 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factoryadjusted value)

(Value after RAM clear: 265)
Caution 1
After changing the setting value of this item, execute the following:
- COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > SH-PS-ST
Caution 2
After changing the setting value of this item, enter the new value on
the service label.
Images leading
edge
Platen glass
(incorporating white plate)
Vertical size plate

White plate
Document
Increasing setting value

(read start position moves
in direction of trailing edge)
Decreasing setting value

in direction of leading edge)
Document illumination lamp
F-18-18
18-65
Chapter 18
18.4.1.1.2 ADJ-Y
0006-0838
T-18-43
Used to adjust the CCD's read start cell position (image read start
position in the main scanning direction).
Adjustment method
- If the image's blank width is larger than the standard value,

method the setting value should be decreased.
- If areas outside the document are also copied, the setting value
should be increased.
- Increasing the setting value by 1 moves the image read start
position by 0.1 mm toward you.
(The image read range moves toward you.)
- If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or
replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value on the service
label.
Adjustment
range
0 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factoryadjusted value)

Caution
After changing the setting value of this item, enter the new value
on the service label.
Decreasing setting value

away from you)
Read start position
Increasing setting value

(read start position
moves toward you)
Vertical size plate
F-18-19
18-66
Document
Chapter 18
18.4.1.1.3 ADJ-S
0006-0840
T-18-44
Used to enter the adjusted value of the optical shading measurement position.
- If white or black lines appear in the image after executing COPIER > FUNCTION
> CCD > SH-PS-ST (to automatically adjust the shading measurement position), you
can adjust the shading measurement position manually by changing the setting value.
- Decreasing the setting value by 1 moves the shading measurement position by 0.1
mm in the direction of the leading edge.
Adjustment method
- If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced the reader
controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment range
120 to 150 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-adjusted value)

Caution
When adjusting the optical shading measurement position, use the following mode:
- COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > SH-PS-ST
18.4.1.2 CCD
18.4.1.2.1 W-PLT-X/Y/Z
0000-5412
T-18-45
Used to enter white level data for standard white plate.
Adjustment method
- If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced the reader
controller PCB, enter the values on the service label.
- If you have replaced the platen glass, enter the values on the platen glass (see
figure below).
Adjustment range
0 to 10000 (Values at time of factory shipment: Factory-measured values)

(Values after RAM clear: W-PLT-X = 8271
W-PLT-Y = 8725
W-PLT-Z = 9418)
* 820686679349 *
W-PLT-X value
W-PLT-Z value
W-PLT-Y value
F-18-20
18-67
Chapter 18
18.4.1.2.2 CCDU-RG/GB
0006-0842
T-18-46
Used to enter color shift compensation value in sub-scanning
direction (between R and G/G and B for document reading
dependent on CCD unit + lens).
Adjustment
method
- If you have replaced the CCD unit, enter the value on the label
attached to the CCD unit
(also enter this value on the service label).
Adjustment
-1000 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-
range
measured value)
Note
Of the color shift in the sub-scanning direction generated by the

read optics, the amount dependent on the CCD unit + lens is
compensated by adjusting the 3-line CCD sensor's compensation
amount between R and G.
Image compensation is performed by image processing by the main
controller PCB.
18.4.1.2.3 CL-R-RG/GB
0006-0844
T-18-47
Used to enter the color shift compensation value (during normal
reading in color mode) in the sub-scanning direction.
Adjustment
method
Adjustment
range
measured value)

Note
During normal reading in color mode, the color shift in the subscanning direction due entirely to the reader unit is compensated by
adjusting the 3-line CCD sensor's compensation amount between R
and G/G and B.
controller PCB.
18-68
Chapter 18
18.4.1.2.4 BW-R-RG/GB
0006-0845
T-18-48
Used to enter the color shift compensation value (during
normal reading in black and white mode) in the sub-scanning
direction.
Adjustment
method
Adjustment
range
measured value)

Note
During normal reading in black and white mode, the color shift in
the subscanning direction due entirely to the reader unit is
amount between R and G/G and B.
Image compensation is performed by image processing by the
main controller PCB.
18.4.1.2.5 CLF-R-RG/GB
0006-0846
T-18-49
Used to enter the color shift compensation value (during highspeed reading in color mode) in the sub-scanning direction.
Adjustment
method
Adjustment
range
measured value)
(Value after RAM clear: 0)]

Note
During high-speed reading in color mode, the color shift in the subscanning direction due entirely to the reader unit is compensated by
adjusting the 3-line CCD sensor's compensation amount between R
and G/G and B.
Image compensation is performed by image processing by the
main controller PCB.
18-69
Chapter 18
18.4.1.2.6 FCCDU-RG/GB
0006-0847
T-18-50
Used to enter the color shift compensation value (between
R and G/G and B for document reading dependent on
CCD unit + lens at time of factory shipment) in the subscanning direction.
Adjustment
method
Adjustment
- 1000 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-
range
measured value)

Note
Of the color shift in the sub-scanning direction generated by the

read optics, the amount dependent on the CCD unit + lens is
amount between G and B.
controller PCB.
18.4.1.3 IMG-REG
18.4.1.3.1 MAG-H-K
0000-5414
T-18-51
Used to adjust magnification of the Bk image's main
scanning direction.
Adjustment method
- If you have cleared the DC controller PCB's RAM or replaced

the DC controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment range
- 10 to 10 (Value at time of factory shipment/value

after RAM clear: 0)
Note
This item is to enable input of the factory-adjusted value, and

should not be adjusted in the market.
18-70
Chapter 18
18.4.1.4 BLANK
18.4.1.4.1 BLANK-T
0000-5415
T-18-52
Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width (leading
edge).
Adjustment
- If you have cleared the main controller PCB's RAM or replaced
method
the SRAM PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment
0 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM
range
clear: +59)
18.4.1.4.2 BLANK-L
0006-1544
T-18-53
Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width (left
edge).
Adjustment
method
Adjustment
range
clear: +47)
18.4.1.4.3 BLANK-R
0006-1545
T-18-54
Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width (right
edge).
Adjustment
method
Adjustment
range
clear: +47)
18-71
Chapter 18
18.4.1.4.4 BLANK-B
0006-1629
T-18-55
Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width (trailing
edge).
Adjustment
method
Adjustment
range
clear: +59)
18.4.1.5 PASCAL
18.4.1.5.1 OFST-P-Y/M/C/K
0000-5416
T-18-56
Performs offset adjustment on the test print read signal for
PASCAL control during automatic gradation compensation (full
compensation).
Adjustment
Increasing the value makes the image after automatic gradation
method
compensation (full compensation) denser.
Adjustment
range
-128 to +128
(Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM
clear:0)
18.4.1.6 FEED-ADJ
18.4.1.6.1 REGIST
0000-5417
T-18-57
Used to adjust the registration roller clutch ON timing.
Adjustment
- Increasing the value by 1 moves the image by 0.1 mm in the direction
method
of the leading edge of the paper.

- If you have cleared the DC controller PCB's RAM or replaced the DC
controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment
range
- 50 to 50 (0.1 mm units)
(Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-adjusted value)
(Value after RAM clear: -20)
18-72
Chapter 18
18.4.1.7 CST-ADJ
18.4.1.7.1 MF-A4R
0000-5418
T-18-58
Used to enter the basic value for the manual feed tray's paper width
(A4R).
Adjustment
- If you have cleared the DC controller PCB's RAM or replaced the
method
DC controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.

- When replacing the paper width detection VR or registering a new
value, execute the following service mode: FUNCTION>CST.
Adjustment
range
0 to 255
(Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-adjusted value)
18.4.1.8 MISC
18.4.1.8.1 SEG-ADJ
0000-5419
T-18-59
Used to adjust the text and photo separation level for text/photo/
map mode.
Adjustment
- To make documents more easily recognized as photo documents,
method
increase the setting value.

- To make documents more easily recognized as text documents,
decrease the setting value.
Adjustment
-4to 4 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM
range
clear: 0)
18-73
Chapter 18
18.4.2 FEEDER
18.4.2.1 DOCST
0000-5420
T-18-60
Used to adjust the document stop position during ADF paper feed
(document tray paper feed).
Note
- Increasing the value makes the leading edge blank smaller.
Adjustment
-100 to 100 (0.337 mm units)
range
Caution
Delivering the document makes the setting value valid, so be sure

to press the OK key to deliver the document.
Operation method
1) Place the document on the ADF document tray.

2) Select the item, use the numeric keypad to change the setting
value, then press the OK key to set it.
3) Press the OK key again to deliver the document and stop it
(aligned left) on the platen glass.
4) Open the ADF carefully, and check the stop position of the
document.
Standard: Stop position L4 = 0 -/+ 1 mm
L4: Distance from vertical size plate edge to document edge
L4
Paper
F-18-21
T-18-61
- If the document is farther left than the arrow in the figure below: Increase the value (the
leading edge blank is made smaller).
18-74
Chapter 18
Document position
alignment mark
Horizontal size plate
Paper
Increase value of DOCST.
F-18-22
T-18-62
- If the document is farther right than the arrow in the figure below: Decrease the value
(the leading edge blank is made larger).
Document position
alignment mark
Horizontal size plate
Paper
Decrease value of DOCST.
F-18-23
T-18-63
5) Carefully close the ADF and press the OK button to deliver the document to the
document tray.
18-75
Chapter 18
18.4.3 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) Level 2

18.4.3.1 COPIER
18.4.3.1.1 DENS
T-SPLY-Y
0007-6096
T-18-64
Adjusting the amount of toner supply (Y color)
Adjustment
Enter a value of the service label when RAM of the DC controller
method
PCB has been cleared/the DC controller has been replaced.
Adjustment range
-3 to 5 [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
T-SPLY-M
0007-6098
T-18-65
Adjusting the amount of toner supply (M color)
Adjustment
method
Adjustment range
T-SPLY-C
0007-6106
T-18-66
Adjusting the amount of toner supply (C color)
Adjustment
method
Adjustment range
T-SPLY-K
0007-6107
T-18-67
Adjusting the amount of toner supply (K color)
18-76
Adjustment
method
Adjustment range
Chapter 18
18.4.3.1.2 V-CONT
VCONT-Y/M/C/K
0001-2375
- VCONT-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust electric potential for image contrast.)

Adjustment range: -30 to 30 (10 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
The larger the setting value, the higher the density.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
VBACK-Y/M/C/K
0006-0862
- VBACK-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust electric potential for removing image fog.)

Adjustment range: Y/M -6 to 12 (5 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
C/K -12 to 6 (5 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
The larger the setting value, the more fog is reduced.
VD-LIM-Y
0007-6165
Adjusting the upper limit of charge DC.

Adjustment range:
-10 to 0 (1 step: 25V) [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
Change a setting value when either of the following faulty images occurs.
- Color blanking in the highlight area (especially on low-density image)
- Fogging (when making a large number of low-density image copies)
VD-LIM-M
0007-6166

Adjustment range:
VD-LIM-C
0007-6168

Adjustment range:
VD-LIM-K
0007-6169

Adjustment range:
18-77
Chapter 18
18.4.3.1.3 COLOR
LD-OFS-Y/M/C/K
0001-2382
- LD-OFS-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust low-density color balance.)

MD-OFS-/Y/M/C/K
0006-0885
- MD-OFS-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust medium-density color balance.)

Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation. (Recommended setting value: -1)
HD-OFS-Y/M/C/K
0006-0888
- HD-OFS-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust high-density color balance.)

Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation. (Recommended setting value: -2)
18.4.3.1.4 HV-PRI
USUB-Y/M/C/KAC
0001-2384
- USUB-Y/M/C/KAC (Used to adjust upstream auxiliary brush charge voltage.)

DIS-TGY/M/C/K
0006-0890
- DIS-TGY/M/C/K (Used to adjust the offset to the target current used in discharge current control (normal paper).)
DIS-TGY2/M2/C2/K2
0006-0892
- DIS-TGY2/M2/C2/K2 (Used to adjust the offset to the target current used in discharge current control (card/special
paper/transparencies).)
18.4.3.1.5 HV-TR
Outline
0001-2385
The adjusted offset doesn't become valid unless all of the following 6 items are entered: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TRPPR, TR-ENV, TR-CLR and TRDUP.
The settings entered for all 6 items make up a single pattern. 8 patterns can be stored in memory.
2TR-TGT1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
0006-0896
- 2TR-TGT1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (Used to adjust the offset to the secondary transfer target current.)
Adjustment range: -5 to +5 (2 A units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after
RAM clear: 0)
Increasing the setting value: Effective for images with toner spatter/water droplets.
Decreasing the setting value: Effective for images with white marks, white blotches,
rough-textured half-tones.
2TR-SHR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
0006-0898
- 2TR-SHR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (Used to adjust the offset to the secondary transfer paper-portion voltage.)
Adjustment range: -5 to +5 (100 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
Increasing the setting value: Effective for images with toner spatter/water droplets.
Decreasing the setting value: Effective for images with white marks, white blotches, rough-textured half-tones.
18-78
Chapter 18
TR-PPR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
0006-0899
- TR-PPR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (paper type item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)

1: Plain(Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Recycled
3: Bond
4: Tracing Paper
5: Heavy1
6: Heavy2
7: Special paper 1 (including labels)
8: Glossy paper
9: Special paper 2 (including Japanese paper)
10: Postcards/envelopes
11: Transparencies (color)
12: Transparencies (monochrome)
TR-ENV1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
0006-0900
- TR-ENV1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (environmental item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)

Enter value of COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > ENV-TR.
1: Low-humidity environment (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Normal-humidity environment
3: High-humidity environment
TR-CLR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
0006-0901
- TR-CLR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (color mode item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)

1: Full-color mode (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Monochrome mode
TR-DUP1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
0006-0902
- TR-DUP1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (one/two-sided item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)

1: One-sided (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Automatic two-sided
3: Manual feed two-sided
1TR-TGY
0007-6172
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (Y)

Adjustment range: -5 to 5 (unit: 0.5 uA) (default: 0)
It is enabled when COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PTATVCSW = 1 (primary ATVC control is enabled).
Change a setting value when any of the following faulty images occurs.
- Mottle marks/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining transfer toner (when color density of the brush mark is
high)/Transfer ghost: Primary transfer current is low. -> Change a setting value to the '+' direction.
- Fogging due to re-transfer/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining re-transfer toner (when color density of the
former station is higher than that of the brush mark): Primary transfer current is high -> Change a setting value to the
'-' direction.
18-79
Chapter 18
1TR-TGM
0007-6174
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (M)

'-' direction.
1TR-TGC
0007-6176
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (C)

'-' direction.
1TR-TGK1
0007-6178
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (K: Black (monochrome) mode)
'-' direction.
1TR-TGK4
0007-6181
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (K: 4C mode)

'-' direction.
18-80
Chapter 18
18.4.3.1.6 MISC
ACS-EN
0006-0903
- ACS-EN (Used to adjust ACS recognition zone.)

Increasing the setting value expands the recognition zone.
ACS-CNT
0006-0904
- ACS-CNT (Used to adjust color recognition pixel count zone during ACS recognition.)
ACS-DF
0006-0905
- ACS-DF (Used to adjust ACS recognition zone during DF use.)

18-81
Chapter 18
18.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)

18.5.1 COPIER
18.5.1.1 INSTALL
18.5.1.1.1 CARD
0000-5421
Used to make card reader installation settings.

T-18-68
Setting values
1 to 2001 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after

RAM clear: 1)
Operation method
Enter the number of cards to use.

(You can use up to 1,000 cards from the entered number.)
Initialize the card management information.
- Initialize the card name (department ID) (from the entered
number).
- Initialize the card's password.
18.5.1.2 CCD
18.5.1.2.1 CCD-ADJ
0000-5422
T-18-69
Adjusts gain of analog processor unit (in CCD PCB).
Operation method
1) Select this item.

2) Press the OK key.
The operation starts. When the operation finishes, it stops
automatically.
MEMO:
When you turn the main power switch ON, the same automatic adjustment operation done by this item is performed.
18-82
Chapter 18
18.5.1.3 LASER
18.5.1.3.1 L-ADJ-O
0000-5423
T-18-70
Automatically adjusts laser emission quantity.
Operation method
Execute this item in the following cases:

- If a laser unit was replaced (if the Y, M, C or K unit was
replaced or if multiple units were replaced simultaneously)
- If the DC controller PCB was replaced
- If the DC controller PCB's RAM was cleared
1) Remove all 4 color drum units, and close the front cover.
2) Select this item, and press the OK key to execute the
operation. The operation stops automatically.
3) When automatic adjustment has finished, 'END'is displayed
in thescreen.
Note
The DC controller uses the photo diode in the laser unit to

automatically measure the light quantity when each laser emits
its minimum light quantity. This operation is used to
compensate the time the laser lights during minimum light
quantity emission.
Each laser unit (Y/M/C/K) is adjusted in sequence.
18.5.1.4 CST
18.5.1.4.1 MF-A4R, MF-A6R, MF-A4
0000-5424
T-18-71
Registers basic value of manual feeder's (DADF's) paper width.
A4R width: 210mm, A6R width: 105mm, A4 width: 297mm
- Once registered, the basic value can be fine-tuned by executing COPIER>
ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4R, MF-A6R or MF-A4.
Operation method
1) Place A4R size paper in the manual feeder, and set the size guide to the A4R
width.
2) In this service mode, select 'MF-A4R' to display the item in reverse. Press the
OK key to perform automatic adjustment and register the value.
3) Repeat Steps 1) and 2) to register the basic values for the A6R and A4 sizes.
18-83
Chapter 18
18.5.1.5 CLEANING
18.5.1.5.1 TBLT-CLN
0000-5425
T-18-72
Cleans intermediate transfer belt.
Image imperfections are improved by removing
impurities adhering to the intermediate transfer belt
(such as fingerprints, grease and paper dust).
Operation method
1) Press 'TBLT-CLN' to display the item in reverse and

select it.
The cleaning operation lasts about 80 seconds, then
ends automatically.
18.5.1.6 FIXING
18.5.1.6.1 NIP-CHK
0000-5426
T-18-73
Fixing nip width automatic measurement output.
Operation method
1)If the finisher is connected, remove it from the copier and pull out the
lattice cable.
2)Place A4 (LTR) size paper in the manual feed tray.
3)Press the OK key (the paper in the manual feed tray is fed).
4)When the fed paper is pressed by the fixing roller, it stops, and is
delivered about 15 seconds later.
5)Check that the nip width of the delivered paper is the standard value.
c
1.5 mm
Paper
advance
direction
Standard value:
8.75 mm 0.25 mm
(less than 5,000 sheets)
center
9.25 mm 0.25 mm
(5,000 sheets or more)
1.5 mm
b Paper
Standard value:
a - c = 0.5 mm max.
F-18-24
18-84
Chapter 18
T-18-74
6) If the standard value isn'tmet, adjust the value. See the Printer
Manual, Chapter 6, 'Fixing System' 4. 'Disassembly and
assembly' 4.2 'After fixing unit disassembly'
7) After completing the operation, output a test print
(COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE (6): Grid).
Remark
The paper is delivered from the side paper delivery tray.
18.5.1.7 PANEL
18.5.1.7.1 LCD-CHK
0000-5427
T-18-75
Used to check missing dots in LCD.
Operation method
1) Select this item, then press the OK key to start the operation.
The touch panel's front surface should light repeatedly in the
sequence: white, black, red, green and blue. (Check that it does.)
2) Press the stop key (the clear key on printer models) to end the
operation.
18.5.1.8 PART-CHK
18.5.1.8.1 CL
0000-5428
T-18-76
Used to specify clutch for operation check.
(Range: 1 to 10, 5 and above are reserved.)
Operation
method
2) Enter the desired clutch code on the numeric keypad.
1: Two-sided registration clutch
CL1
2: Two-sided paper feed clutch
CL2
3: Conveyor clutch
CL1 (paper deck)
4: Paper feed clutch
CL2 (paper deck)

4) Press CL-ON, and check the operation.
18-85
Chapter 18
18.5.1.9 CLEAR
18.5.1.9.1 ERR
0000-5429
T-18-77
Clears error codes.
(Cleared error codes: E000, E001, E002, E003)
Operation
1) Select this item, and press the OK key.
method
2) Turn the main power OFF/ON.
18.5.1.10 MISC-R
18.5.1.10.1 SCANLAMP
0000-5430
T-18-78
Executes document illumination lamp lighting operation.
Operation method

2) Press the OK key. The document illumination lamp lights for
3 seconds.
18.5.1.11 MISC-P
18.5.1.11.1 P-PRINT
0000-5431
T-18-79
Prints service mode setting values.
Operation method

2) Press the OK key to print the setting values.
Note
18-86
Printing takes about 15 seconds to start.
Chapter 18
18.5.1.11.2 D-PRINT
0007-6114
T-18-80
Printing out service mode (DISPLAY)
Procedure
1) Select this mode.

2) Press OK to print out.
Reference
Only DISPLAY items are printed out. (Items of P-PRINT/LBLPRINT/HIST-PRINT and ALARM are excluded.)
18.5.1.11.3 ENV-PRT
0007-6117
T-18-81
Outputting logs of inside machine temperature and humidity/fixing
roller surface temperature
Procedure

2) Press OK to output logs of inside machine temperature and
humidity/fixing roller surface temperature.
Reference
This mode is to output logs of [inside temperature()/humidity(%)/

fixing roller surface (center) temperature ()] variations using signals
of the attached temperature/humidity (environmental) sensor and
fixing thermistor (main). (Max. 100 records)
18.5.1.12 SYSTEM
18.5.1.12.1 DOWNLOAD
0000-5432
T-18-82
Switches to download mode.
Operation method

2) Press OK to enter download mode and have the copier wait
for commands (wait for connection). ("STNDBY" is now
displayed, next to the DOWNLOAD sub-items.)
3) Use the service support tool to start downloading.
("CONNECTED"is displayed during communication with the
PC.)
4) When communication ends, "HOLD"is displayed. (The
power can be turned off when "HOLD"is displayed.)
18-87
Chapter 18
18.5.2 FEEDER
18.5.2.1 SENS-INT
0000-5433
T-18-83
Used to adjust the initialization of ADF sensors.
Caution
Execute this item when you have replaced the ADF controller
PCB, document placement sensor, pre-registration sensor, final
document detection sensor or reverse outlet sensor.
Note
See the DIP switch function list in Chapter 5,

"Troubleshooting"in the DADF-D1/K1 Service Manual.
Operation method
1) Paste black paper (solid black) on the final document

detection sensor in the document tray.
(Make sure the black paper doesn't cover the document
placement sensor. The document placement display LED
must not light.)
2) Close the ADF, select this item, then press the OK key.
3) After about 15 seconds, the document detection LED flashes
twice. When <SERVICE> in the display changes to
<READY>, automatic adjustment is finished.
(<SERVICE> appears at the top right of the display during
automatic adjustment.)
18.5.3 FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode): Level 2

18.5.3.1 COPIER
18.5.3.1.1 LASER
LD-ADJ-Y/M/C
0007-5909
T-18-84
Making the tilt correction motor return to the initial position
automatically.
Operating
Instructions
- The operation starts. It automatically stops when it is
completed.
18-88
Chapter 18
Reference
The tilt correction motor may get locked when the tilt amount in
Information
the horizontal scanning direction exceeds the expected range,

and consequently color displacement cannot be corrected even
though automatic registration is conducted.
When this symptom occurs, use this mode to make the tilt
correction motor return to the center position automatically.
(If you try to do this operation manually by opening the scanner
unit, you may touch the lens. For this reason, be sure to do it by
the automatic operation.)
This Service Mode is used to correct the tilt of Y, M, and C
against BK, which is used as a reference, when the tilt is large
(when the horizontal lines are higher at the right).
18.5.3.1.2 MISC-P
KEY-HIST
0001-2419
- KEY-HIST (Prints the operation panel's key input history.)

2) Press the OK key to start printing.
HIST-PRT
0006-1033
- HIST-PRT (Prints the jam history and error history.)

TRS-DATA
0006-1037
- TRS-DATA (Moves the data received in memory to the BOX.)

18-89
Chapter 18
18.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode)

18.6.1 COPIER
18.6.1.1 BODY
18.6.1.1.1 MODEL-SZ
0000-5434
T-18-85
Used to select standard variable magnification display and
ADF document size detection.
Caution
The setting value takes effect after the main power switch is
turned OFF/ON.
Setting values
0: AB (6R5E)
1: INCH (5R4E)
2: A (3R3E)
3: AB/INCH (6R5E)
18.6.1.1.2 BASE-SW
0006-8601
T-18-86
Switching from MEAP-Full model to MEAP-Base model
Settings
0: Base model
1: Full model
18.6.1.1.3 CNTR-DSP
0006-8629
T-18-87
Selecting screen in response to the external controller
Settings
0: The external controller icon is displayed on the control panel of

the copier
[Factory default/After RAM clear]
(When the color image server is connected.)
1: The control panel of the copier becomes nondisplay mode
(When the control panel-mounted external controller is

connected.)
18-90
Chapter 18
18.6.1.1.4 ENVP-INT
0006-8647
T-18-88
Setting log correction interval of inner machine temperature/humidity/
fixing temperature
Setting log collection interval to COPIER>FUNCTION>MISCP>ENV-PRT and COPIER>DISPLAY>ENVRNT
Settings
0 to 480 <min.>
[Factory default/After RAM clear:60]
Reference
Log is not collected when '0' is set.
18.6.1.2 USER
18.6.1.2.1 COPY-LIM
0000-5435
T-18-89
Used to change upper limit value setting for number of
sheets to copy.
Setting values
1 to 999 sheets (Value at time of factory shipment/

value after RAM clear: 999)
18.6.1.3 ACC
18.6.1.3.1 COIN
0000-5436
T-18-90
Used to switch coin vendor setting.
Setting values
0: OFF (value at time of factory shipment)

1: ON
18-91
Chapter 18
18.6.1.3.2 USB-MSK
0007-6225
T-18-91
Limiting the number of USB-HOST channels on the models with
the USB-HOST installed.
Setting values
0 to 2
The relevant channels of the USB-HOST are masked
(deactivated).
(e.g.)
When there are two channels of CH0 and CH1,
0: Not mask any channel.
1: Masks CH1.
2: Reserved
18.6.1.4 INT-FACE
18.6.1.4.1 IMG-CONT
0001-2655
T-18-92
Used to set connection to PS print server unit.
Setting
0: Normal mode (no PS print server unit) (value at time of factory
values
shipment)
1: Not used
2: Not used
3: PS print server unit
4: Not used
5: Not used
Caution
When 1 is selected as the setting value, the following user mode items are
restored to their initial values:
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IP
address settings > IP address
address settings > Sub-net mask
address settings > Gateway address
- System management settings > Network settings > Ethernet driver
settings > Communication method
18-92
Chapter 18

settings > Ethernet type
- System management settings > Network settings > Startup time
- Common specifications settings
The following user mode settings are turned OFF:
address setting > DHCP use
address settings > RARP use
address settings > BOOTP use
settings > Automatic detection
- System management settings > Network settings > Spool function use
When 3 or 4 is selected as the setting value, the following settings are
turned OFF in addition to the items above.
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings >
RAW setting
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings >
LPD setting
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IPP
printing
- System management settings > Network settings > SMB setting
The items above are not restored when the setting value is returned to "0:
Normal mode", so must be set again as needed.
18-93
Chapter 18
18.6.2 SORTER
18.6.2.1 BLNK-SW
0000-5437
T-18-93
Used to set blank width (W) on both sides of fold position
when saddle stitcher is in use.
Setting values
0:Normal width (5 mm), 1: Large width (10 mm) (value at time

of factory shipment)
F-18-25
18.6.3 BOARD
18.6.3.1 SURF-OFF
0000-5438
T-18-94
Releases UFR board function.
Setting values
0: Even without UFR board, copier operates as copy model

without values displaying E codes.
1: UFR board recognition check is performed. If no UFR board
exists, E codes are displayed.
18-94
Chapter 18
18.6.4 OPTION (mechanical specifications setting mode): Level 2

18.6.4.1 COPIER
18.6.4.1.1 BODY
SCANSLCT
0001-2693
Used to turn ON/OFF function that calculates scan area from selected paper size.
0: OFF (Scan area is determined by document detection.)
(Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: ON (Scan area is determined by paper size.)
RAW-DATA
0006-1145
Sets whether to print out raw received data.

0: Normal operation (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Print out raw received data
RMT-LANG
0006-1148
Used to select language of remote UI used from Web.

Select language code with + and - keys.
IFAX-LIM
0006-1151
Used to select whether number of output lines will be restricted when largevolume data is received by IFAX.
0: No restriction
1 to 999 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 500)
TC-REF
0006-1152
Used to turn ON/OFF environmental compensation on ATR sensor output

Normally, the ATR sensor output value used is the value compensated for the environment.
0: Environmental compensation OFF
1: Environmental compensation ON (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
If fogging occurs in a low-humidity environment, set this item to 0.
SMTPTXPN
0006-1153
Used to change SMTP send port number.

0 to 65535 (increments of 1) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 25)
SMTPRXPN
0006-1155
Used to change SMTP receive port number.

POP3PN
0006-1158
Used to change POP receive port number.

ORG-LGL
0006-1162
Used to set special paper size not compatible with DF size recognition.
0: LEGAL (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: G-LEGAL
2: FOOLSCAP
18-95
Chapter 18
3: A-FOOLSCAP
4: FORIO
5: OFFICIO
6: E-OFFICIO
7: A-OFFICIO
8: M-OFFICIO
9: B-OFFICIO
ORG-LTR
0006-1164
0: LTR (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: G-LTR
2: A-LTR
3: EXECUTIVE
ORG-LTRR
0006-1167
0: LTR-R (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: G-LTR-R
2: A-LTR-R
3: EXECUTIVE-R
UI-BOX
0006-1168
Used to select whether to display operation panel box screen.

0: Don't display
1: Display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
UI-SEND
0006-1170
Used to select whether to display operation panel send screen.

0: Don't display
UI-FAX
0006-1171
Used to select whether to display operation panel fax screen.

0: Don't display
UI-EXT
0006-1172
Used to select whether to display operation panel extension screen.

0: Don't display
C4HTR-DT
0006-1174
Cassette heater: Sets lighting ratio of cassette on 4th level.

C2HTR-DT
Cassette heater: Sets lighting ratio of cassette on 2nd level.
18-96
0006-1175
Chapter 18
Y-PTN
0006-1178
Used to eliminate 100 mm horizontal lines.

0: Don't imprint Y dot patterns on intermediate transfer belt.
1: Imprint Y dot patterns on intermediate transfer belt (only when reading color documents; value at time of factory
shipment/value after RAM clear).
2: Imprint more Y dot patterns on intermediate transfer belt than when value of 1 is set.
K dot patterns are imprinted on intermediate transfer belt during monochrome document reading only when value of
2 is set.
SCR-SLCT
0006-1180
Used to select half-tone process for photographic printing paper/photo mode.

0: Use error diffusion method
1: Use low-line-count screen (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
2: Use high-line-count screen
TMC-SLCT
0006-1181
Used to select coefficient used in error diffusion process.

0: Low granularity/low dot stability for Y/M/C/Bk
1: Y/M/C -> Low granularity, low dot stability, Bk -> high granularity, low dot stability (value at time of factory
shipment/value after RAM clear)
2: High granularity/low dot stability for Y/M/C/Bk
LOW-DZL
0006-1182
Used to change document illumination lamp lighting (document size detection operation) time.
0: Normal operation (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Dazzle reduction mode (Document illumination lamp is lit only once momentarily to detect document size.)
D-CLN-TM
0006-1183
Cleans light-sensitive drum surface.

CAL-SW
0006-1186
Used to switch condition for executing calibration control.

CLN-PTH
0006-1187
Sets threshold value (number of sheets) for starting drum cleaning sequence.
CLN-VTH
0006-1190
Sets threshold value (image density) for starting drum cleaning sequence.
DEVL-VTH
0006-1194
Sets threshold value (video count) for starting toner forcible consumption sequence.
FTPTXPN
0006-1213
Used to specify port (FTP) number to send to.

0 to 65535 (16-bit value) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 21)
18-97
Chapter 18
PRNT-ORD
0006-1214
Used to switch order of output to side tray.

SLPOFF01 to 12
0006-1215
Used to turn sleep mode OFF as way to eliminate condensation: January to December.
Whenever possible, avoid using these settings during normal operation.
INTPPR-1
0006-1216
Sets interval (number of sheets) for executing image stabilization control (adjustment set 1) between sheets.
0.50 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 100)
DWNSQ-SW
0006-1219
Used to improve tray loading during one-sided continuous printing.

IMG-OFF
0006-1222
Forcibly adds trailing-edge blank on second side of two-sided sheets.

PRN-FLG
0006-1223
Used to select area flag for PDL images.

SCN-FLG
0006-1225
Used to select area flag for copy images.

T-LW-LVL
0006-1226
Used to switch timing for display of remaining toner volume warning message.
DVTGT-Y/M/C/K
0006-1228
developer concentration target value offsets

Whenever possible, avoid using these settings during normal operation.
NWERR-SW
0006-1229
Used to select whether to display network error messages.

0: Don't display
FX-SPD
0006-1232
Used to adjust fixing roller speed.

-2 to 2 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
Increasing the setting value increases the fixing roller's speed (in 0.8% increments).
Setting this value automatically increases the operation speed of the paper delivery vertical path motor (the speed
increases by the same ratio as the speed of the fixing roller).
EX-PS-SP
0006-1233
Used to adjust paper delivery vertical path motor speed.

-2 to 2 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
FX-N-ROT
Used to turn fixing motor idle after warmup ON/OFF.
18-98
0006-1236
Chapter 18
0: ON (idle) (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)

1: OFF (don't idle)
Setting this value to 1 increases the amount of paper curl, and reduces the capacity for the load on the paper delivery
tray.
FX-SUB
0006-1238
Sets the fixing sub-heater's lighting ratio.

0: Normal (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
Increasing this setting value decreases the lighting ratio (shortens the lighting time).
SLV-UP
0006-1239
Used to increase developing cylinder operation speed.

0: Normal (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Operate developing cylinder at 120% of normal speed.
2: Operate developing cylinder at 120% of normal speed and expand interval between sheets as well.
Setting this value to 2 decreases productivity ( -> 24 ppm).
STS-PORT
0006-1240
Used to turn TOT asynchronous status communication port ON/OFF.

For future expansion
CMD-PORT
0006-1241
Used to turn TOT synchronous command communication port ON/OFF.

For future expansion
BK-4CSW
0006-1242
Used to select color mode used in photo mode.

0: OFF (Use monochrome mode when reading monochrome documents in printed photo or photographic printing
paper photo mode.)
1: ON (Use simple color mode when reading monochrome documents in printed photo or photographic printing
paper photo mode.)
Instead of creating monochrome images in 4 colors, simple color mode applies only a very small amount of Y/M/C
toner to the ITB.
NEGA-GST
0006-5164
Additional Setting to the Sequence of Preconditioning Exposure (except laser)

0: OFF
1: ON (preconditioning exposure during initial rotations only)
2: ON (Preconditioning exposure during initial rotations and paper interval)
[Factory Setting/ Setting after RAM-clear]
Reference
Problem occurring when 2 is selected:
- Lower Productivity (=> delay by 2 or 3 seconds)
18-99
Chapter 18
NS-CMD5
0007-6192
T-18-95
Use it to set CRAM-MD5 authentication under SMTP authentication.
setting
0: dependent on SMTP server

1: disable
NS-GSAPI
0007-6194
T-18-96
Use it to set GSSAPI authentication under SMTP authentication.
setting

1: disable
NS-NTLM
0007-6196
T-18-97
Use it to set NTLM authentication under SMTP authentication.
setting

1: disable it
NS-PLNWS
0007-6202
T-18-98
Use it to set PLAIN LOGIN authentication under SMTP authentication.
<environment in which communication packets are subjected to
coding>
setting

1: disable
18-100
Chapter 18
NS-PLN
0007-6204
T-18-99
Use it to set PLAIN LOGIN under SMTP authentication.
<environment in which communication packages are not subjected to
coding>
setting

1: disable
NS-LGN
0007-6206
T-18-100
Use it to set LOGIN authentication under SMTP authentication.
setting

1: disable
SVMD-ENT
0007-7319
T-18-101
Switching the method of entering the Service Mode.
Setting Values
0: [User Mode key] -> Press [2] and [8] simultaneously -> [User
Mode key] [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear]
1: [User Mode key] -> Press [4] and [9] simultaneously -> [User
Mode key]
Reference
Support for Siemens
Information
MEAP-DSP
0006-8669
T-18-102
Disabling screen transition from the MEAP screen to the standard screen
Settings
0: Enabling to shift to the standard screen [Factory default/After

RAM clear: 0]
1: Disabling to shift to the standard screen
18-101
Chapter 18
MEAP-PN
0006-8671
T-18-103
Setting the port No. of HTTP server used for MEAP application
Settings
0 to 65535 [Factory default/After RAM clear: 8000]
Note
Do not use 1 to 1023 excepting 80 (HTTP) if specifying the port No. of

HTTP server as MEAP port.
(Because standard servers use numbers in this range.)
LSUB-DWY
0007-6213
Switching DC bias voltage of the lower auxiliary brush

Settings:
0: Bias is standard
1: Bias is reduced
[Factory default/After RAM clear: 0]
Increasing DC bias of the lower auxiliary brush has the effect of retaining/charging remaining transfer toner.
(Countermeasures against fogged image)
However, faulty image such as mark of the auxiliary brush and filming may occur as a result. Set this mode to '1'
if such faulty image occurs.
LSUB-DWM
0007-6214

Settings:
0: Bias is standard
1: Bias is reduced
LSUB-DWC
0007-6215

Settings:
0: Bias is standard
1: Bias is reduced
18-102
Chapter 18
BKTC-DWN
0007-6216
Countermeasures against fogged image due to Bk supply

Settings:
0: OFF
1: ON
Set this mode to [1 (countermeasures: ON)] when fogged image due to Bk supply occurs.
ANIM-SW
0006-8676
T-18-104
Disabling to display all jam/alarm messages when MEAP application is
running
Settings
0: Warning messages are displayed. [Factory default/After RAM

clear]
1: Warning messages are not displayed.
DA-PORT
0006-8679
T-18-105
Setting port for communication with DA
Settings
0: Close [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]

1: Open
Note
The following modes also become ON when

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DA-CNCT is set to '1'.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>STS-PORT
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CMD-PORT
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SSH-SW
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DA-PORT
DA-CNCT
0006-8705
T-18-106
Setting connection to DA
Settings
1: DA is used
2: DA is not used [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
18-103
Chapter 18
Note

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>STS-PORT
CHNG-STS
0006-8722
T-18-107
Setting the port number for status connection under TUIF over
TCP/IP
Settings
1-65535
CHNG-CMD
0006-8727
T-18-108
Setting the port number for command connection under TUIF
over TCP/IP
Settings
1-65535
SSH-SW
0006-8737
T-18-109
SSH server ON/OFF
Settings
0: Sever is not started up

1: Server is started up
Note

18-104
Chapter 18
RMT-LGIN
0006-8760
T-18-110
ON/OFF setting of remote login operation to SSH server
Settings
0: Remote login operation to SSH server is disabled

1: Remote login operation to SSH server is enabled
RE-PKEY
0006-8763
T-18-111
ON/OFF setting of SSH server key reproduction
Settings
0: SSH server key is not reproduced.

1: SSH server key is reproduced.

Note
This mode is enabled only when

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SSH-SW is set to '1'.
HDD-TMP
0007-6132
T-18-112
Use it to set a level of temperature to serve as a reference for
detecting a low temperature error.
Caution
The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has
been turned off and then on again.
Settings
0 to 30 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2
HDD-TIM
0007-6134
T-18-113
Use it to set the time interval allowed before a low temperature error is identified
Caution
The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and
then on again.
Settings
0 to 200 min at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 10
18-105
Chapter 18
HDD-SW
0007-6135
T-18-114
Use it to enable/disable E code indication of a low temperature error
Caution
The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been
turned off and then on again
Settings
0: indicate
1: do not indicate
at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
DV-RT-LG
0007-6222
Switching the developing assembly idle rotation time of first thing in the morning
Settings
0: 1 minute
1: 2 minutes
Default of idle rotation time is 1 minute since iR C3200/iR C3220 Dcon V12.1 However, use this mode to set 2
minutes if any trouble (faulty image etc.) occurs due to reduction of the time.
DH-TMG
0007-7315
T-18-115
Setting up a threshold for the accumulated number of outputs for the Dhalf control
sequence operation trigger.
Control
If the fixing unit is lower than a specified temperature when the machine is turned on
or recovered from the sleep mode, use this mode to make automatic full adjustments
during initial multiple rotations.
At this time, the Dhalf control is performed only if the number of outputs accumulated
since the last Dhalf control exceeds the value specified in this Service Mode.
Changing the timing of or canceling the Dhalf control (according to the number of
accumulated outputs) by using this mode can reduce the downtime in the morning. (A
measure for a complaint about the downtime in the morning)
Meanwhile, there is a possibility that gray scale (half-tone image) might be degraded
when the Dhalf control is cancelled.
With regard to the accumulated number of outputs, a small-size copy is regarded as 1
count, and a large-size copy is regarded as 2 counts.
When the Dhalf control is performed first thing in the morning or from the User Mode
(quick correction, full correction), the accumulated number of outputs is reset.
Settings
18-106
1 to 5000 [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear: 1000]
Chapter 18
18.6.4.1.2 USER
SIZE-DET
0001-2745
Used to turn document size detection function ON/OFF.

0: OFF
1: ON (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear) (When pressure plate opens/closes, optics don't
light, eliminating dazzle.)
DATE-DSP
0006-1247
Used to switch date display.

0: 'YYMM/DD
1: DD/MM'YY
2: MM/DD/YY
MB-CCV
0006-1248
Used to select whether to restrict mailbox control card users.

0: Don't restrict
1: Restrict
TRY-STP
0006-1253
Used to set mode in which output stops when tray is full.

0: Normal mode (Interrupted when finisher tray is full.)
1: Interrupted only by height detection
CNT-DISP
0006-1254
Used to select whether to display serial number when counter check key is pressed.
0: Display serial number.
1: Don't display serial number.
OP-SZ-DT
0006-1255
Used to turn document size detection when pressure plate is open ON/OFF.
0: Enter document size in control panel.
1: Detect document when start key is turned ON with pressure plate open.
NW-SCAN
0006-1258
Used to select whether to permit network scan function.

0: Don't permit
1: Permit (Invalid when UFR board or open interface board isn't connected.)
HDCR-DSP
0006-1259
Used to turn off display of user mode hard disk clear mode and switch clear operations.
0: Don't display and don't clear
1: Clear once with zeroes
2: Clear once with random data
3: Clear 3 times with random data (mode displayed for settings 1 to 3)
JOB-INVL
0006-1262
Used to set job interval during interrupt.

0: Standard setting (Output next job continuously during interrupt copy job.)
1: Start output of next job after last sheet of interrupt copy job has been delivered.
2: Start output of next job after last sheet of any job has been delivered.
18-107
Chapter 18
LGSW-DSP
0006-1264
Used to select whether to display "Log display ON/OFF setting" on user mode screen.
0: Don't display "Log display ON/OFF setting"
1: Display "Log display ON/OFF setting"
P-CRG-LF
0006-1266
Used to select operation performed when drum unit has reached end of service life.
0: Don't stop
1: Stop
PCL-COPY
0006-1267
Used to set compatible mode for "COPIES" PCL command.

0: Perform control on each page individually, according to value of COPIES command specified for each page (value
at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear).
1: Compatible (other controller) mode (not in use)
2: Reserved
FREG-SW
0006-8770
T-18-116
Switching display/nondisplay of a free register area of SEND MEAP
counter
Settings
0: Nondisplay [Factory default/After RAM clear]

1: Display
IFAX-SZL
0006-8775
T-18-117
Switching transmission size limitation during IFAX transmission
(Only when bypassing server)
Settings
0: Transmission size limitation is enabled (via/bypassing server)

1: Transmission size limitation is disabled (bypassing server only)
IFAX-PGD
0006-8777
T-18-118
Permitting the divided transmission per page (only when the
upper limit of the transmission data size is exceeded).
Settings
0: Not permit the divided transmission per page upon transmission

in the IFAX Simple mode.
18-108
Chapter 18
[initial factory setting/setting after RAM clear]
1: Permits the divided transmission per page upon

transmission in the IFAX Simple mode.
MEAPSAFE
0006-8774
T-18-119
Switching over to the MEAP safe mode.
Settings
0: Normal mode [initial factory setting/setting after RAM clear]

1: Safe mode
TRAY-FLL
0006-8786
T-18-120
Setting the timing to issue an output-tray-full warning.
Settings
0: Issues an output-tray-full warning when all the delivery trays

become full.
1: Issues an output-tray-full warning when all the specified

trays become full.
AFN-PSWD
0006-8779
T-18-121
Limiting access to the User Mode.
Settings
0: Normal mode (Enters the User Mode without asking a password)

1: Enters the User Mode after a password matches.
18-109
Chapter 18
DPT-ID-7
0007-7320
T-18-122
Registering a department ID and inputting a 7-digit code for
authentication.
Setting Values
0: As before [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear]

1: Inputting a 7-digit code
Reference
Support for Siemens
Information
RUI-RJT
0007-7321
T-18-123
Disconnecting the HTTP port when three authentication failures from
RUI are recognized.
Setting Values
0: Invalid [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear]

1: Valid
Reference
Support for Siemens
Information
CTM-S06
0006-8781
T-18-124
Setting password deletion from the export file of file
transmission address
Settings
0: Password is not deleted from the export file

1: Password is deleted from the export file
18-110
Chapter 18
CTM-S07
0006-8782
T-18-125
Setting deletion of transmission password source on the edit
screen/UI address
Settings
0: Transmission password source on the edit screen is not deleted.

1: Transmission password source on the edit screen is deleted.
18.6.4.1.3 CST
U1-NAME
0001-2753
Used to turn paper name display when U1 paper size group is detected ON/OFF.
0: Display "U1" on touch panel (default).
1: Display paper name set by "CST-U1" service mode item.
U2-NAME
0006-1276
Used to turn paper name display when U2 paper size group is detected ON/OFF.
0: Display "U2" on touch panel (default).
1: Display paper name set by "CST-U2" service mode item.
CST-U1
0006-1277
Used to specify paper name used by U1 paper size group.

CST-U2
0006-1278
Used to specify paper name used by U2 paper size group.

24: FOOLSCAP (CST-U2: Default)
25: Australian FOOLSCAP
26: OFFICIO
27: Ecuador OFFICIO
28: Bolivia OFFICIO
29: Argentine LETTER
30: Argentine LETTER-R
31: Government LETTER
32: Government LETTER-R
34: Government LEGAL
35: FOLIO
36: Argentine OFFICIO
37: Mexico OFFICIO
38: EXECTIVE (CST-U2: Default)
18-111
Chapter 18
18.6.4.1.4 ACC
STPL-LMT
0001-2748
Used to restrict number of sheets for saddle binding.

0: 5 sheets (no white band)
1: 10 sheets (no white band)
2: 10 sheets (white band)
3: 15 sheets (no white band) (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
DF-MUTE
0006-1268
DADF silent reading mode

0: Normal mode (750 mm/s) (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Silent mode (420 mm/s)
SC-TYPE
0006-1270
Used to switch type of coin vendor-compatible model

18.6.4.1.5 INT-FACE
AP-OPT
0001-2751
Used to set whether printing from application PrintMe in PS print server unit is possible.
0: Printing permitted for all department IDs (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Printing refused (printing is only possible for specified department ID).
AP-ACCNT
0005-9725
Used to set (CPCA) department ID for printing (print jobs) from application PrintMe in PS print server unit.
0 to 9999999 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
AP-CODE
0006-5130
T-18-126
Use it to set a path for printing from an external controller
(CPCA).
Setting:
0 (upon shipment from factory/RAM initialization)
Setting range:
0 to 9999
18.6.4.2 BOARD
18.6.4.2.1 MENU-1 to 4
0006-1280
Used to select whether to display Levels 1 to 4 of printer settings menu.

0: Don't display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Display
18.6.4.2.2 TR-DSP
Used to select whether to display toner reduction function switch.
18-112
0006-1281
Chapter 18
18.7 TEST (Test Print Mode)

18.7.1 COPIER
18.7.1.1 NETWORK
18.7.1.1.1 PING
0000-5440
T-18-127
Checks connection between copier and network (during TCP/IP
connection only).
Caution
Use this item when checking the connection to the network at

time of installation or when there is a network connection
problem.
Display
I/O
< NETWORK >
< 1/1 >
PING
0.
0.
Counter
Test
< READY >

0.
IP address input
Result display (OK/NG)
+/-
OK
F-18-26
18-113
Chapter 18
T-18-128
Operation method
1)
2)
Turn the main power switch OFF.

Connect the network cable to the copier and turn the main power
switch ON.
3)
Tell the user's system administrator that copier installation is

complete, and have them him/her the network settings.
4)
Ask the system administrator to allow you to perform a network

connection check, and check the address of the remote host (IP
address of the PC terminal in the user network) to send the PING.
5)
Select the COPIER > TEST > NETWORK > PING service mode
item, enter the IP address checked in Step 4 on the operation panel's
numeric keypad, and press the OK key.
If the copier is connected to the network normally, "OK" is
displayed (and the procedure is finished).
If "NG" is displayed, first check the connection of the network
cable. If the connection is normal, go to Step 6. If there is a problem
with the network cable's connection, redo the connection and redo
Step 5.
6)
item, enter the loop back address* (127.0.0.1), and press the OK
key followed by the start key.
If "NG" is displayed, there is a problem with the local TCP/IP
settings. Go back to Step 3 and check the settings again.
If "OK" is displayed, there is no problem with the local TCP/IP
settings. However, there could be a problem with the network
interface board (NIC) connection or the NIC itself. Go to Step 7 to
check the NIC.
*The loop back address returns the signal in front of the NIC,
enabling checking of the local TCP/IP settings.
7)
item, enter the local host address (local IP address), then press the
OK key.
If "OG" is displayed, there could be a problem with the NIC
connection or the NIC itself. In this case, check the NIC connection
or replace the NIC.
If "OK" is displayed, there is no problem with the local network
settings or NIC.
In this case, the problem may be with the user's network
environment. Explain the situation to the system administrator, and
ask them to deal with it.
18-114
Chapter 18
18.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode)

18.8.1 COPIER
18.8.1.1 Overview
18.8.1.1.1 Outline
0006-5189
The COPIER/COUNTER screen is shown below. The items are described starting on the next page.
F-18-27
<Clearing counter values>
1) Select the item to clear, displaying it in reverse.
2) Press the clear key on the operation panel.
- The counter is cleared, resetting it to "00000000".
<Small size and large size in this mode>
- TOTAL/PICKUP/FEEDER/JAM
Large (L) size: Paper larger than A4, LTR size
Small (S) size: A4, LTR size and smaller paper
- DRBL-1/DRBL-2 (PD-PU-RL, C3-PU-RL, C4-PU-RL)
Large (L) size: Paper longer than 324 mm in the feed direction
Small (S) size: Paper 324 mm or shorter in the feed direction
- DRBL-2 (DF-PU-RL, DF-SP-PD, DF-F-BLT, DF-SP-RL)
Large (L) size: Paper longer than the LTR length (216 mm) in the feed direction
Small (S) size: Paper of the LTR length (216 mm) or shorter in the feed direction
<Reading counters for consumable parts/parts needing periodic replacement>
The copier has special counters (DRBL-1/DRBL-2) that can be used to provide a guideline for when to replace
consumable parts or parts needing periodic replacement.
Small size sheets are counted in increments of 1, large size sheets are counted in increments of 2.
18-115
Chapter 18
T-18-129
<Example>
TR-BELT
[1]
00000201
00240000
[2]
[3]
0%
!!
000082
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]: Displays the part name. In this example, the intermediate transfer belt unit.
[2]: Displays the counter value (actual number of sheets used). The value is cleared by pressing the clear key when
the part is replaced.
[3]: Displays the limit value (number of sheets as guideline for replacement). You can select the item and change the
value with the numeric keypad. After changing the value, press the OK key.
[4]: Displays the ratio of the counter value to the limit value.
[5]: When the ratio is between 90% and 100%, a single exclamation mark (!) is displayed.
When the ratio is over 100%, two exclamation marks (!!) appear. In the example above, no exclamation marks would
appear.
[6]: Displays the predicted number of days until replacement. The example above shows 82 days.
18.8.1.2 TOTAL
18.8.1.2.1 SERVICE1
0001-2807
Service total counter 1

Incremented when paper is delivered outside the printer.
(Incremented for both large and small size sheets.)
Returns to "00000000" after reaching "99999999".
18.8.1.2.2 SERVICE2
0006-1293
Service total counter 2

Incremented when paper is delivered outside the printer.
(Incremented by 2 for large size sheets, and by 1 for small size sheets.)
18.8.1.2.3 COPY
0006-1295
Total copies counter

Incremented when a copy operation is executed and paper is delivered outside the printer.
18.8.1.2.4 PDL-PRT
0006-1296
PDL print counter

Incremented along with the billing counter during PDL printing, when paper is delivered outside the copier and twosided paper is loaded.
Blank sheets are not counted. Incremented by 1 for both large and small size sheets.
18-116
Chapter 18
18.8.1.2.5 FAX-PRT
0006-1298
Fax received print counter

Incremented along with the billing counter when a fax is received, when a print is delivered outside the copier and
two-sided paper is loaded.
Blank sheets are not counted. Incremented by 1 for both large and small size sheets. Can be cleared.
18.8.1.2.6 RMT-PRT
0006-1299
Remote print counter

Incremented along with the billing counter when a remote print is made, when paper is delivered outside the copier
and two-sided paper is loaded.
18.8.1.2.7 BOX-PRT
0006-1301
Box print counter

Incremented along with the billing counter when a box print is made, when paper is delivered outside the copier and
two-sided paper is loaded.
18.8.1.2.8 RPT-PRT
0006-1303
Report print counter

Incremented along with the billing counter when a report print is made, when paper is delivered outside the copier
and two-sided paper is loaded.
18.8.1.2.9 2-SIDE
0006-1304
Two-sided copy/print counter

Incremented along with the billing counter when a two-sided copy/print is made, when paper is delivered outside the
copier and two-sided paper is loaded.
18.8.1.2.10 SCAN
0006-1306
Scan counter
Incremented along with the billing counter when a scan is made, when reading finishes.
Incremented by 1 for both large and small size sheets. Can be cleared.
18-117
Chapter 18
18.8.1.3 PICK-UP
18.8.1.3.1 C1
0001-2811
Cassette 1 paper feed total counter

Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 1.
18.8.1.3.2 C2
0006-1307

Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 2.
18.8.1.3.3 C3
0006-1308

Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 3 (top level of cassette pedestal).
18.8.1.3.4 C4
0006-1309

Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 4 (bottom level of cassette pedestal).
18.8.1.3.5 MF
0006-1310
Manual paper feed total counter

Displays number of sheets fed from manual paper feed unit.
18.8.1.3.6 DK
0006-1311
Deck paper feed total counter

Displays number of sheets fed from deck paper feed unit.
18.8.1.3.7 2-SIDE
0006-1312
Two-sided paper feed total counter

Displays number of two-sided sheets fed.
18.8.1.4 FEEDER
18.8.1.4.1 FEED
ADF document feed total counter
18-118
0006-1359
Chapter 18
18.8.1.5 JAM
18.8.1.5.1 TOTAL
0001-2852
Total jam counter for copier

18.8.1.5.2 FEEDER
0006-1315
Total jam counter for feeder

18.8.1.5.3 SORTER
0006-1316
Total jam counter for finisher

18.8.1.5.4 2-SIDE
0006-1319
Jam counter for two-sided unit

18.8.1.5.5 MF
0006-1320
Jam counter for multi-feeder

18.8.1.5.6 C1
0006-1322
Jam counter for cassette 1

18.8.1.5.7 C2
0006-1324

18.8.1.5.8 C3
0006-1326

18.8.1.5.9 C4
0006-1327

18.8.1.5.10 DK
0006-1328
Jam counter for side paper deck
18.8.1.6 DRBL-1
18.8.1.6.1 SCN-LMP
0001-2857
Number of sheets document illumination lamp has lit (count value is stored
in controller).
18.8.1.6.2 T-CLN-BD
0006-1330
Number of sheets that have passed through transfer cleaning unit (count value is stored in controller).
18-119
Chapter 18
18.8.1.6.3 TR-BLT
0006-1331
Number of sheets that have passed through intermediate transfer belt unit (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.4 TR-ROLL
0006-1332
Number of sheets that have passed through secondary transfer outer roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.5 C1-PU-RL
0006-1334
Number of sheets that have passed through cassette 1 paper feed roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.6 C2-PU-RL
0006-1335
Number of sheets that have passed through cassette 2 paper feed roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.7 M-PU-RL
0006-1336
Number of sheets that have passed through manual paper feed roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.8 FX-UP-RL
0006-1338
Number of sheets that have passed through fixing roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.9 FX-LW-RL
0006-1339
Number of sheets that have passed through pressure roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.10 FX-UNIT
0006-1341
Number of sheets that have passed through fixing unit (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.11 FX-UP-FR
0006-1343
Number of sheets that have passed through fixing upper frame unit (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.7 DRBL-2
18.8.1.7.1 DF-PU-RL
0006-1344
Number of sheets that have passed through ADF paper feed roller.
18.8.1.7.2 DF-SP-PD
0006-1347
Number of sheets that have passed through ADF separation pad.

18.8.1.7.3 DF-F-BLT
0006-1348
Number of sheets that have passed through ADF conveyor belt.

Incremented by 3 for S-size two-sided sheets, and L-size one-sided/twosided sheets.
18.8.1.7.4 DF-SP-RL
Number of sheets that have passed through ADF separation roller.
18-120
0006-1349
Chapter 18
18.8.1.7.5 PD-PU-RL
0006-1351
Number of sheets that have passed through paper deck paper feed roller.
18.8.1.7.6 C3-PU-RL
0006-1352
Number of sheets that have passed through cassette 3 paper feed roller.
18.8.1.7.7 C4-PU-RL
0006-1353
Number of sheets that have passed through cassette 4 paper feed roller.
18.8.1.7.8 SORT
0006-1354
Number of sheets that have passed through sort path.

Incremented by 1 even for L-size sheets.
18.8.1.7.9 FIN-STPR
0006-1355
Number of staple operations.

18.8.1.7.10 FIN-PDDL
0006-1356
Number of sheets that have passed through finisher paddle.

18.8.1.7.11 SADDLE
0006-1357
Number of saddle operations.

18.8.1.7.12 SDL-STPL
0006-1358
Number of saddle staple operations.

18-121
Chapter 18
18-122
Chapter 19
Upgrading
Contents
Contents
19.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.1.1 Construction of Firmware ...................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool ....................................................................................................... 19-2
19.1.3 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use ........................................................................ 19-5
19.2 Making Preparations ...................................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.2.1 Registering the Firmware ....................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.2.2 Making Connections ............................................................................................................................. 19-11
19.3 Formatting the HDD .................................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.3.1 Formatting All Partitions ...................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.3.2 Formatting Selected Partitions ............................................................................................................. 19-18
19.3.3 Formatting the Partitions ...................................................................................................................... 19-20
19.4 Downloading System Software ................................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.1 Downloading the System Software ...................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.2 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module .................................................................................... 19-35
19.4.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-35
19.4.3 Downloading the BOOT Software ....................................................................................................... 19-42
19.4.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-42
19.4.4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software ......................................................................................... 19-50
19.4.4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-50
19.4.5 Downloading the G3 FAX Software .................................................................................................... 19-58
19.4.5.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-58
19.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data ................................................................................................. 19-65
19.5.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 19-65
19.5.2 Uploading Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 19-66
19.5.3 Downloading Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 19-72
Chapter 19
19.1 Outline
19.1.1 Construction of Firmware
0000-5449
The iR C3200 is taken as an example from this section. (i.e., The information described from here are common in iR
C3200 series.)
The construction of the machine's firmware is as follows:
T-19-1
Firmware
Function
Location
Remarks
System
Control of the system as a whole
HDD
Language
Display of control panel screens
HDD
RUI
Display of the RUI
HDD
Boot
Startup of the machine
BootROM
DIMM
G3FAX
Control of the G3 FAX Board
G3 FAX Board
DIMM
Dcon ROM
Control of DC controller
DC controller PCB
Soldered to a flash ROM
Rcon ROM
Control of the reader controller
Soldered to a flash ROM
Flash ROM Rcon

Flash ROM Dcon
DC controller PCB
G3Fax board
Flash ROM DIMM

G3Fax
Boot ROM
Boot
HDD
System
Language
RUI
Main controller PCB
F-19-1
19-1
Chapter 19
19.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool
0000-5450
The service support tool (SST, hereafter) provides the following functions:
iRC3200
PC for servicing work
SST
Initializing the HDD
HDD settings information
HDD
Downloading firmware
Firmware
Flash ROM
Uploading backup data
Backup data
Downloading backup data

Back up RAM
F-19-2
To use the SST, you must first set the machine to download mode.
The machine's download mode consists of 2 types, selected by pressing a combination of appropriate keys (keypad)
when starting up the machine.
[1] normal mode: 1 + 7
after startup, start service mode, and make the following selections:
COPIER>Function>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD
[2] safe mode: 2 + 8
19-2
Chapter 19
on keypad, 2 + 8
Main power
switch ON
on keypad, 1 + 7
Download control
program
(safe mode)
Boot ROM
Boot program
HDD
System program
In service mode:
COPIER > Function >
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
Download control
program
(normal mode)
Download mode
(safe mode)
Download mode
(normal mode)
F-19-3
Use safe mode for the following:

- after replacing the HDD.
- if the system fails to operate normally (E602-0001, -0002).
19-3
Chapter 19
The following shows combinations of functions that may be used in association with the SST and the machine when
the machine is in download mode:
T-19-2
Function
Download mode
Normal mode
Formatting the HDD
Safe mode
All inclusive
DOSDEV
BOOTDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
DOSDEV5
Downloading firmware
- System
- System
- Language
- Language
- RUI
- RUI
- Boot
- Boot
- G3Fax
- Dcon
- Rcon
Uploading backup data
- SramImg
- SramImg
- SramDCON
- SramRCON
Downloading backup data
- SramImg
- SramDCON
- SramRCON
19-4
- SramImg
Chapter 19
19.1.3 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use
0000-5451
The machine communicates with the SST using the Ethernet protocol (TCP/IP).
The machine offers the following 2 sets of network settings:
user environment network settings (user mode>system control settings>network settings)
service network settings (IP address: 172.16.1.100; subnet mask: 255.255.255.0, fixed)
The network settings are dependent on how the machine is started up.
The user environment settings are retained while the service settings are selected.
You need not change the user mode network settings before or after the use of the SST.
iRC3200
User network environment
Ethernet I/F
User environment network settings
Service network settings
Power OFF
Power ON in response to 1 + 7 or 2 + 8 on keypad
iRC3200
Service PC
Ethernet I/F

(settings are retained)
SST in use
Power OFF
Normal power ON

IP address: 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
iRC3200
Ethernet I/F

(settings retained in memory)
F-19-4
19-5
Chapter 19
If you start up the machine by pressing 1 + 7, the machine indicates 'FIXIP' in the upper right of the LCD to
distinguish its state from normal.
F-19-5
19-6
Chapter 19
If a TokenRing board is installed, the Ethernet interface is disabled.

If you, on the other hand, start up the machine by pressing 1 + 7 or 2 + 8, the TokenRing interface will be disabled
while the Ethernet interface remains enabled; thus, you need not remove the TokenRing board when connecting the
SST.
iRC3200

(TokenRing)
TokenRing I/F
disabled
Ethernet I/F
enabled
Power OFF
Power ON by s1 + 7 or 2 + 8 on keypad
iRC3200
PC for service
TokenRing I/F
disabled
Ethernet I/F
enabled
SST in use
F-19-6
19-7
Chapter 19
19.2 Making Preparations

19.2.1 Registering the Firmware
0000-5452
You will be registering the firmware stored on the system CD to the SST.
Before Starting the Work
Keep the following on hand:
- PC to which SST v1.61 or later has been installed.
- system CD for iRC3200
(in the case of Netware support, iRC3200N system CD)
Registering the Firmware
1) Start up the PC.
2) Set the system CD to the PC.
3) Start up the SST.
4) Click "Next"under "Data management"
F-19-7
19-8
Chapter 19
5) Click "Register Firmware"
F-19-8
6) Click "Register from selected folder"
F-19-9
19-9
Chapter 19
7) Select the drive in which you have set the system CD, and click "Search"
F-19-10
8) When the list of firmware items contained on the system CD has appeared, click "Register All" when it becomes
enabled.
F-19-11
19-10
Chapter 19
9) When the results of the registration have appeared, press "OK"
F-19-12
19.2.2 Making Connections
0000-5453
You will be connecting the PC to the machine.

Before Starting the Work
Keep the following on hand:
- PC to which SST v1.61 or later has been installed and iRC3200 firmware has been registered
- Twisted pair 10Base-T (category 3 or 5)
Cross cable 100Base-TX(category 5)
Procedure
1) Start up the PC.
2) Check the network settings of the PC.
Type "IPCONFIG" in response to the command prompt, and press the Return key.
Check to see that the network settings are as follows:
IP address: 172.16.1.160 (other than 172.16.1.0, 172.16.1.100, 172.16.1.255)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: any
19-11
Chapter 19
C:\
Command Prompt
M i c r o s o f t W i n d o w s 2 0 0 0 [ Ve r s i o n 5 . 0 0 . 2 1 9 5 ]
( C ) C o py r i g h t 1 9 8 5 - 1 9 9 9 M i n c r o s o f t C o r p.
C:\
ipconfig
Windows 2000 IP Configuration

Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific
IP Address. . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . .
Default Gateway . .
DNS Suffix
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
:
: 172.16.1.160
: 255.255.255.0
:
C:\
F-19-13
If the settings are not as indicated, change the PC network settings:

3) Check to see that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is OFF; then, turn off the machine's main power
switch.
4) Connect the machine and the PC with a cross cable.
IP address: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
IP address: 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Cross cable
10Base-T: category 3, 5
100Base-TX: category 5
F-19-14
19-12
Chapter 19
5) While holding down the keys (keypad) suited to the download mode you are going to use, turn on the machine's
main power switch.
- if normal mode, 1 + 7
enter source mode, and make the following selections : COPIER>Function>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD
- if safe mode, 2 + 8
6) Start up the SST.
If you are connecting your PC to a different network after using the SST, you must be sure to change the PC network
settings to suit the settings of the new network.
If you connect to a different network using the IP address you used for the SST, the possible presence of the same IP
address on the network can cause serious problems to the network functions.
7) Click "Next under Download/Upload"
F-19-15
19-13
Chapter 19
8) Select the model of the machine.
F-19-16
9) Select the unit you want, and click "Connect"
F-19-17
19-14
Chapter 19
10) Click "Set host name"
F-19-18
11) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click "OK".
F-19-19
19-15
Chapter 19
12) Click "OK" so that the machine makes a connection.
F-19-20
13) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click "OK"
F-19-21
19-16
Chapter 19
19.3 Formatting the HDD

19.3.1 Formatting All Partitions
0000-5454
You will be setting up partitions on the HDD and formatting (initializing) them for use by the main controller.
HDD
DOSDEV
FSTDEV
Formatting all partitions
(only if in safe mode)
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
HDD offered as service part
HDD after formatting
(partitions are not set up)
F-19-22
E602-0001
- Indicates that the BOOTDEV partition, in which the system program are stored, cannot be found at time of start-up.
- To correct, format all partitions in safe mode, and download the following: system, language, RUI.
19-17
Chapter 19
19.3.2 Formatting Selected Partitions
0000-5455
You will be formatting (initializing) partitions that you have selected.
HDD
FSTPDEV
FSTDEV
May be formatted in normal mode
DOSDEV2
DOSDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
May be formatted in safe mode*
DOSDEV5
Partitions on HDD
*After formatting, requires downloading

of the following: system, language, RUI.
F-19-23
T-19-3
Partition
Description
Error code for

data error
19-18
DOSDEV
Area for general work
E602-0401
FSTDEV
Storage of image data
E602-0201
DOSDEV2
Storage of thumbnail display data of image data
E602-0301
FSTPDEV
Storage of image data
E602-0101
DOSDEV3
Temporary storage of PDL job
E602-0501
PDLDEV
PDL processing
E602-0601
DOSDEV4
Storage of address book, filter
E602-0701
BOOTDEV
System area (stores system, language, RUI)
E602-0801
DOSDEV5
Reserved
E602-0901
Chapter 19
E602-0x01
- Indicates the presence of a data error in the identified partition.
- To correct, format the identified partition.
Formatting Partitions Using the SST
T-19-4
Name of partition that may be selected by
Partition that is formatted
the SST
FSTDEV
FSTDEV, FSTPDEV, DOSDEV,

DOSDEV2
DOSDEV3
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
DOSDEV4
DOSDEV5
DOSDEV5
BOOTDEV
BOOTDEV
FSTDEV and FSTPDEV retains image data as it accumulates while DOSDEV and DOSDEV2 retains its associated
data; these 4 partitions, therefore, must be formatted at the same time.
To do so, select FSTDEV using the SST.
The actual formatting of FSTDEV and PDLDEV takes place when the machine is started up the next time, and it
takes as long as the following:
FSTDEV:2 min (approx.)
PDLDEV:5 min (approx.)
all partitions:7 min (approx.; i.e., FSTDEV + PDLDEV)
The times vary according to the state of the HDD, and the progress of formatting is indicated by means of a progress
bar.
Formatting of DOSDEV4 requires the use of the SST.
19-19
Chapter 19
19.3.3 Formatting the Partitions
0000-5456
1) Click "To Next" under "Download/upload"
F-19-24
2) Select HD Format, and click "Connect"
F-19-25
19-20
Chapter 19
3) Click "Set host name"
F-19-26
4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click "OK"
F-19-27
19-21
Chapter 19
5) Click "OK" to start connection.
F-19-28
6) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click "OK"
F-19-29
19-22
Chapter 19
7) Click "Format".
F-19-30
8) Select the partition you want to format form the list, and click "Start".
To format all partitions, click "Start" shown for all partitions (enabled if in safe mode).
F-19-31
19-23
Chapter 19
T-19-5
Normal Mode
F-19-32
T-19-6
Safe Mode
19-24
Chapter 19
9) When the machine indicates the message for confirmation for the last time, click "Start".
F-19-33
10) When the machine indicates the message to indicate the end of formatting, click "OK".
F-19-34
19-25
Chapter 19
11) Click "return to unit selection screen"
If you have formatted all partitions or BOOTDEV, you must download the following: system, language, RUI. If you
fail to download system, an error (E602-0002) will occur when the main power is turned on.
Formatting of PDLDEV and DOSDEV2 takes place when the main power is turned on the next time.
Although varying according to the state of the HDD, formatting lasts as long as the following: for all partitions, about
7 min; for PDLDEV, about 5 min; for DOSDEV2, about 2 min.
The progress bar indicated at time of power-on will advance gradually while formatting is taking place.
Turning off the power at this time prevents access to the HDD, causing E0602.
You must not turn off the machine's main power while the progress bar is shown.
19-26
Chapter 19
19.4 Downloading System Software

19.4.1 Downloading the System Software
19.4.1.1 Outline
0000-5457
iRC3200
PC for service
SST
Main controller block
iRC3200
System
(System-Main)
(System-Sub)
(ICC Profile)
HDD
Download
BOOTDEV
iRC3200N*
(System-Main)
(System-Sub)
(ICC Profile)
System
(System-Main)
(System-Sub)
(ICC Profile)
*Only for Japan.
F-19-35
The system software comes in 3 types, selected depending on the country of installation and support of NetWare.
In the case of Japan, an appropriate model must be selected with reference to the presence/absence of support for
NetWare.
T-19-7
Country
SST
Firmware
NetWare
Remarks
Not
Installed at time of shipment
installation
model
Japan
iRC3200
System-JP ja
supported
(to iRC3200/3200S)
iRC3200N
System-JP ja
Supported

(to iRC3200N)
Other
iRC3200
System-USen
Supported
19-27
Chapter 19
The machines' firmware consists of multiple files.

The SST handles these files in groups, and transfers them in succession at time of downloading.
Files Making Up the System Software
T-19-8
Notation
Description
System-Main
program for main CPU
System-Sub
program for sub CPU
ICC Profile
color correction information file for PDL functions
E602-0002
- the system software for the main CPU cannot be found when the machine is started up.
- to correct, download the system software.
E602-0006
- the system file cannot be found for the sub CPU when the machine is started up.
E602-0007
- the IC profile cannot be found when the machine is started up.
19.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure

Making Checks in Advance (only in Japan)
Check the type of system software installed to the machine (support of NetWare) in service mode.
COPIER > Display > ACC-STS > NETWARE
NetWare not supported: 0
NetWare Supported: 1
Select the type of system software to download using the name of the model:
iRC3200
System-JP ja (for Japan): NetWare not supported
iRC3200N
System-JP ja (for Japan): NetWare supported
Procedure
Download Mode
if E602-0002 is indicated, safe mode
otherwise, normal mode
19-28
0000-5458
Chapter 19
1) Click [To next] under "Download/upload"
F-19-36
2) Select the system software of the iRC3200, and click [Connect].

In Japan and if NetWare is supported, be sure to select the system software of the iRC3200N.
F-19-37
19-29
Chapter 19
3) Click [Set host name].
F-19-38
4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically. Click [OK].
F-19-39
19-30
Chapter 19
5) Click [OK] to start connection.
F-19-40
6) When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-41
19-31
Chapter 19
7) Click [System Software Download].
F-19-42
8) Select the version to download, and click [Start].
F-19-43
19-32
Chapter 19
9) When the results of the downloading are indicated, click [OK].
F-19-44
10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown. Otherwise, writing to the HDD will be suspended,
preventing the machine to start up.
19-33
Chapter 19
F-19-45
If the machine fails to start up, execute formatting (BOOTDEV) using HDFormat and download the following:
system software, language files, and RUI files.
19-34
Chapter 19
19.4.2 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module

19.4.2.1 Outline
0000-5459
iRC3200
Network
LCD
RUI(en)
Version check
System
RUI(it)
System Language
Language-XXen
RUI-XXen
Language-XXit
RUI-XXit
Language-XXja
RUI-XXja
Language
RUI(ja)
RUI
Network PC
F-19-46
T-19-9
Language used on control panel LCD
Check the versions of the system software and language files.
- If the versions are correct, selections may be made in
user mode:
Language used in RUI

Select on the RUI.
- A specific language may be

selected for a specific PC.
user mode>common specifications settings>display language

switchover
- If the versions are not correct, "E744" will be indicated.
Turn off and then on the main power so that the system
language will be used:
System Language
System-JP ja: Japanese (inside Japan)
System-USen: English (outside Japan)
19-35
Chapter 19
T-19-10
Language code
Language
Language code
Language
de
German
it
Italian
en
English
ja
Japanese
fr
French
E744
- Indicates that the version of the system software and that of the language files do not mach.
- Uses the (built-in) system language for the LCD when the main power is turned off and then on.
- To correct, download the language that matches the version of the system software.
iRC3200
PC for service
SST
iRC3200
Language
XXen
XXja
HDD
Download
BOOTDEV
Language-XXen
Language-XXja
RUI
XXen
XXja
RUI-XXen
RUI-XXja
F-19-47
0000-5460
Procedure
Downloading may take place when the machine is in normal or in safe mode.
The following describes downloading of the language files; both language and RUI files may be downloaded in
common among models (here, the iRC3200 is selected):
19-36
Chapter 19
1) Click [To Next] under "Download/upload"
F-19-48
2) Select "language" for the iRC3200, and click [Connect].
F-19-49
19-37
Chapter 19
F-19-50
4) The machine's IP address will be entered automatically; click [OK].
F-19-51
19-38
Chapter 19
5) Click [OK] to start making a connection.
F-19-52
F-19-53
19-39
Chapter 19
7) Click [Language Download].
F-19-54
F-19-55
19-40
Chapter 19
9) When the result of downloading is indicated, click [OK].
F-19-56
10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated. Otherwise, writing to the HDD will be suspended,
preventing the machine from starting up.
19-41
Chapter 19
F-19-57
If the machine fails to start up, execute formatting (BOOTDEV) using HDFormat, and download the following:
system software, language files, RUI files.
19.4.3 Downloading the BOOT Software

19.4.3.1 Outline
0000-5461
The boot ROM differs according to the machine's functions:
T-19-11
19-42
Boot ROM
Service mode
type
indication
Country
Machine function
Copy
xx.yyC
Worldwide
Copy
LIPS
xx.yyL
Japan
Copy+LIPS
PSPCL
xx.yyN
Outside Japan
Copy+PSPCL
Chapter 19
PC for service
Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Select a function
suited to the type
of boot ROM.
May be upgraded
by DIMM replacement
iRC3200
SST
Japan
iRC3200
Boot (COPY)
iRC3200L
Boot (LIPS)
Download
Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Outside Japan
iRC3200
Boot (COPY)
iRC3200N
Boot (PSPCL)
Only if boot of
same type
F-19-58
If downloading fails, the boot ROM will have to be repalced.
The type of boot ROM mounted to the machine may be checked using service mode:
COPIER > Display > VERSION > BOOT-ROM
Copy:xx.yyC
LIPS: xx.yyL (Japan)
PSPCL: xx.yyN (outside Japan)
19-43
Chapter 19
0000-5462
Downloading may take place in normal mode or in safe mode.

1) Click [next] under "Downloading/Uploading"
F-19-59
19-44
Chapter 19
2) Select "Boot"for the iRC3200 (if a LIPS model, select iRC3200L; if a PSPCL model, select iRC3200N); then,
click [Connect].
F-19-60
F-19-61
19-45
Chapter 19
4) The machine's IP address will be entered automatically; click [OK].
F-19-62
F-19-63
19-46
Chapter 19
F-19-64
If the wrong type of boot ROM has been selected, the following screen will appear; select the correct model:
F-19-65
19-47
Chapter 19
7) Click [Boot ROM Download].
F-19-66
F-19-67
19-48
Chapter 19
9) When the result of downloading has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-68
10) Click [return to unit select screen].

After Downloading
When you have upgraded the boot ROM, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch so that the
new version will be validated.
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated. Otherwise, the machine will fail writting to the
boot ROM and may not start up.
19-49
Chapter 19
F-19-69
If the machine fails to start up, replace the boot ROM.
19.4.4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software

19.4.4.1 Outline
0000-5463
The DC controller/reader controller files are downloaded by way of the main controller block.
Both DC controller PCB and the reader controller PCB are equipped with boot ROMs, permitting retries if
downloading fails.
19-50
Chapter 19
iRC3200
PC for service
SST
Reader unit
Printer unit
Flash ROM
iRC3200
Dcon
Rcon
Main
controller
block
Download
Downloading
possible only
in normal mode
Signal cable
CPU
Boot ROM
Power cable
Flash ROM
CPU
Power supply
control signal
Boot ROM
Power
supply
cable
DC controller PCB
F-19-70
Unless the DC controller has started up normally, the power supply control signal will not be validated, not supplying
the reader unit with power and not permitting downloading of reader controller files.
0000-5464
Making Pre-Checks
Power cable
Signal cable
No error code must be indicated.

In the case of downloading reader
controller files, the version of 'DCCON'
must be indicated in service mode.
F-19-71
19-51
Chapter 19
Procedure
The following describes downloading of DC controller files (both DC controller and reader controller files are
shared in common among models; herein, the iRC3200 is selected):
1) Click [To Next] under "Downloading/Uploading"
F-19-72
19-52
Chapter 19
2) Select "DCON"and click [Connect].
F-19-73
F-19-74
19-53
Chapter 19
4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].
F-19-75
F-19-76
19-54
Chapter 19
F-19-77
7) Click [DCON Download].
F-19-78
19-55
Chapter 19
F-19-79
F-19-80
19-56
Chapter 19
10) Click [return to unit selection screen].

After Downloading
If you have downloaded DC controller or reader controller files, be sure to turn off and then on the main power
switch. You cannot download the DC controller and reader controller files in succession.
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated. Otherwise, writing to "DCON/RCON"can fail,
indicated by the following error codes:
DCON:E733
RCON:E732
F-19-81
If an error code is indicated, be sure to download the appropriate firmware.
19-57
Chapter 19
19.4.5 Downloading the G3 FAX Software

19.4.5.1 Outline
0000-5465
The G3Fax files are downloaded by way of the main controller block.
iRC3200
PC for service
G3Fax
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Upgrading may be
by DIMM replacement
SST
Downloading
G3Fax
iRC3200
CPU
(Flash ROM DIMM)
G3Fax
Main controller
PCB
Downloading possible
only in normal mode
F-19-82
If downloading fails, the flash ROM DIMM must be replaced.
19-58
G3 fax board
Chapter 19
0000-5466
Procedure
Use normal mode for downloading.
1) Click [To Next] under "Downloading/Uploading"
F-19-83
19-59
Chapter 19
2) Select "G3FAX" and click [Connect].
F-19-84
F-19-85
19-60
Chapter 19
F-19-86
F-19-87
19-61
Chapter 19
F-19-88
7) Click [G3Fax Download].
F-19-89
19-62
Chapter 19
F-19-90
F-19-91
19-63
Chapter 19

After Downloading
When you have downloaded G3Fax files, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch.
You cannot download G3Fax files twice in succession.

(Once downloading ends, the G3 fax board will be reset, leaving download mode.)
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated.
Writing to the flash ROM DIMM of the G3 fax board will fail, preventing the G3 fax board functions from operating
normally.
F-19-92
If the G3 fax board fails to operate, be sure to replace the flash ROM DIMM on the G3 fax board.
19-64
Chapter 19
19.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data

19.5.1 Outline
0000-5467
The machine's backup data is stored on the SRAM PCB, DC controller PCB, and reader controller PCB.
Any backup data is selected with reference to its file name used when uploading it.
T-19-12
Backup data
File name selected at time of uploading
SRAM PCB (main controller block)
SramImg. bin
DC controller PCB
SramDCON. bin
SramRCON. bin
If you plan to replace the DC controller PCB or the reader controller PCB, it is a good idea to upload its data in
advance, and download it after replacement so that parts counter readings and the like may be retained.
Reader unit
PC for service
EEPROM
SST
iRC3200
CPU
SramRCON.bin
Printer unit
System
Upload/download
Possible only in normal mode
SramImg
SramDCON
SramRCON
Main controller PCB

Sub controller PCB
SRAM PCB
CPU
SRAM
SramDCON.bina
DC controller PCB
SRAM
SramImg.bin
F-19-93
19-65
Chapter 19
If you download the SramImg data that has previously been uploaded from a specific machine to a machine with a
different serial number, the image data, user mode settings, and service mode settings stored in Box or the like will
all be lost.
Be sure not to download the SramImg data to any other machine.
19.5.2 Uploading Procedure
0000-5468
Procedure
Use normal mode for downloading.
1) Click [To Next] under "Download/Upload"
F-19-94
19-66
Chapter 19
2) Select "SYSTEM"under "iRC3200" and click [Connect].
F-19-95
F-19-96
19-67
Chapter 19
F-19-97
F-19-98
19-68
Chapter 19
F-19-99
7) Click [Upload the Backup Data].
F-19-100
19-69
Chapter 19
8) Select the data to upload, and click [Start Storing].

SRAM PCB: SramImg.bin
DC controller PCB: SramDCON.bin
Reader controller PCB: SramRCON.bin
F-19-101
19-70
Chapter 19
9) When uploading has ended, enter a file name to use, an click [Save].
F-19-102
10) When the file has been saved, click [OK].
F-19-103
19-71
Chapter 19
19.5.3 Downloading Procedure
0000-5469
Procedure
Use normal mode to download.
1) Click [To Next] under "Download/Upload"
F-19-104
19-72
Chapter 19
2) Select "SYSTEM" under "iRC3200" and click [Connect].
F-19-105
F-19-106
19-73
Chapter 19
F-19-107
5) Click [OK] to start a connection.
F-19-108
19-74
Chapter 19
F-19-109
7) Click [Download the Backup Data].
F-19-110
19-75
Chapter 19
8) Select the file to download, and click [Start Writing].
F-19-111
9) When downloading has ended, click [OK].
F-19-112
10) Click [return to unit selection screen].

19-76
Chapter 20
Service Tools
Contents
Contents
20.1 Special Tools ................................................................................................................................................. 20-1
20.2 Solvents and Oils ........................................................................................................................................... 20-2
Chapter 20
20.1 Special Tools
0006-1412
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
T-20-1
No.
Tool name
Tool No
Ctgr
Digital
FY9-2002
multimeter
Appearance
Remarks
Used for electrical
checks; for adjustment
of laser power in combination with the laser
power checker.
Cover switch
TKN-0093
Tester
FY9-3038
FY9-3039
extension pin
Tester
Used as a probe ex-
extension
tension when
pin(L-shaped)
makingelectrical
checks.
Mirror
FY9-3040-000
Used for adjusting the
positioning tool
distance between No.
(front, rear)
1 and No. 2 mirrors

(used in combination
CA1 Test Sheet
FY9-9030
Used foradjusting/
checking images.
20-1
Chapter 20
20.2 Solvents and Oils
0006-1436
T-20-2
No
Name
Uses
Composition
Remarks
Alcohol
Cleaning; e.g., glass,
Fluoride-family
- Do not bring near fire.
plastic, rubber;
hydrocarbon
- Procure locally.
external covers.
Alcohol
Substitute: IPA (isopropyl
Surface activating
alcohol)
.
1
agent
Water
2
Solvent
Cleaning; e.g., metal;
Fluoride-family
- Do not bring near fire.
#160
oil or toner stain.
hydrocarbon
- Procure locally
Chlorine-family
Substitute: MEK
hydrocarbon
Alcohol
3
Heat-resisting
Lubrication; e.g.,
Mineral oil-family
- MO-138S
grease
fixing drive areas.
lithium soap
Tool No.: CK-0427 (500 g/can)
Molybdenum
disulfide
4
Lubricating oil
Mineral oil
Tool No.: CK-0524 (100 cc)
(paraffin-family)
5
Lubricating oil
Lubrication; i.e., drive
Silicone oil
Tool No.: CK-0551 (20 g)
Tool No.: HY9-0007
areas, friction areas.

6
Lubricating oil
Lubrication; e.g.,
Special oil
(EM-50L)
gears.
Special solid
lubricating agent
Lithium soap
Lubricating oil
Lubrication; e.g.,
scanner rail
20-2
Silicone oil
Tool No.: FY9-6011 (50 cc)
Dec 3 2004

Canon Ir c3200 c3220n Series

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Canon Ir c3200 c3220n Series

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Service Manual

COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1.1 System Construction .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1

2.1 Making Pre-Checks ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................... 2-6

3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Basic Operations (As a Printer)

4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.7.1.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................. 5-25

Original Exposure System

6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.4.6.5 After Replacing the CCD Unit ........................................................................................................... 6-24

Image Processing System

7.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

8.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing .................................................................................................... 8-5

9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit .......................................................................................................................... 9-24

9.8.2.7 Opening the Main Controller Box ..................................................................................................... 9-54

9.8.12 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ......................................................................................................... 9-78

9.8.18.4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit .................................................................................................. 9-96

10.1 Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.9.1 Delivery ................................................................................................................................................ 10-32

10.10.8.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor .......................................................................................... 10-47

10.10.19.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................... 10-66

10.10.29 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ......................................................................... 10-86

10.10.36.21 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB ........................................................................................ 10-105

11.1 Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 11-1

11.3 Various Control Mechanisms ........................................................................................................................ 11-7

11.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch ......................................................................................................................... 11-37

11.5.15.9 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover ......................................................................................... 11-67

Externals and Controls

12.1 Control Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 12-1

12.5.2.8 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................... 12-21

12.5.12.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ................................................................................................. 12-32

12.5.20 Main Power Switch ............................................................................................................................. 12-44

12.5.25.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ......................................................................................... 12-58

13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 13-1

Maintenance and Inspection

14.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ........................................................................................................................... 14-1

14.1.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 14-1

Standards and Adjustments

15.1 Image Adjustments ........................................................................................................................................ 15-1

Correcting Faulty Images

16.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................... 16-1

16.2.2 Test Print TYPE ...................................................................................................................................... 16-4

16.3.10.34 E110-0x10 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-138

16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-180

17.1 Error Code Details ......................................................................................................................................... 17-1

18.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-1

18.5.1.5 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................... 18-84

19.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 19-1

19.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................ 19-28

20.1 Special Tools ................................................................................................................................................. 20-1

1.1 System Construction

A system may be configured as follows: